WinMax Mill Programming2

WINMAX MILL
PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATION
v9.1 & v10.1
June 2015 704-0116-501 Revision D

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not
represent a commitment on the part of Hurco Companies, Inc. (Hurco). The software
described in this document is furnished under the License Agreement to customers. It is
against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the
license agreement. The purchaser may make copies of the software for backup purposes.
Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or

improvements in machines and machine specifications which it considers necessary, and
does not assume any obligation to make any said changes in machines or equipment
previously sold.
Hurco products and services are subject to Hurco’s then current prices, terms, and
conditions, which are subject to change without notice.
© 2015 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.
Patents:U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434; Japanese

Patents 1,649,006 and 1,375,124; other Patents pending.
Hurco, Max, Ultimax, and WinMax are Registered Trademarks of Hurco Companies, Inc.
AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Many of the designations used by manufacturers and sellers to distinguish their products
are claimed as trademarks. Hurco has listed here all trademarks of which it is aware. For
more information about Hurco products and services, contact:
Hurco Companies, Inc.

One Technology Way
P.O. Box 68180
Indianapolis, IN 46268-0180
For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurco’s Web site:

www.hurco.com
i - WinMax Mill Programming Documentation 704-0116-501

DOCUMENTATION CONVENTIONS
This documentation uses several conventions to explain the safety features and
emphasize key concepts. These conventions are described in this section.
Additional information is available on the machine’s Documentation CD.
Console Buttons and Keys

References to console buttons and keys appear in bold text throughout the
documentation. For example, the Start Cycle button appears as the Start Cycle button
and the Manual key appears as the Manual console key in text.
Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax manual for information about console buttons
and keys, in addition to other information about using softkeys and the pop-up text entry
window.
Icons
This manual may contain the following icons:
Caution/Warning
The operator may be injured and the machine severely damaged if the
described procedure is not followed.
Important
Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.
Troubleshooting
? Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.
Hints and Tricks
Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.
Where can we go from here?Programming and Operation Information
Lists several possible options the operator can take.
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions — ii

Hurco provides documentation for using WinMax software on a control or desktop in two
formats: on-screen Help and PDF. The information contained in both formats is identical.
The programming and operation information is continually updated with each software
version. For example, when v08.01.02 is updated to v08.01.03 or some higher version,
the Help and PDFs are updated accordingly. Therefore, the most current information is
installed on the control with the software. This information is not included on the Machine
Documentation CD because of this reason.
This document explains how to use the On-screen Help on the control and how to copy
and print or view the information on a PC.
On-screen Help contains information about the current screen. If Help is not available for
a screen, a Welcome screen appears with access to the Table of Contents, Index, or
Search functions.
• To view the on-screen Help directly on a Hurco control, select the Help
console key.
• To view the on-screen Help on the desktop software, select the Help icon in
the menu bar.
PDF files are available on the control’s hard drive. These files can be copied from the hard
drive to a USB memory device and transferred to a PC for viewing and printing.
Using the On-screen Help

On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:
• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.
• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.

• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Printing the Programming Manuals, on
page 2 - iv for more information about printing.
• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.
• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:

1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.
iii - Documentation Conventions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search
word(s) is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.
• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
• Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.
Printing the Programming Manuals

The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files
may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for
printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:
1. From the Input screen, select the F8 softkey.

2. Select the F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:
• For WinMax on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\\hlp.

• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\\hlp.
The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.
The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.
4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a
USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in
the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A:
or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.
You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for printing.
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions -iv

v - Documentation Conventions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Documentation Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Console Buttons and Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii
Using the On-screen Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Printing the Programming Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1

Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 3
Jog Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 9
Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 17
Machine Operations Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 18
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 20
Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 23
Program Manager . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 27
Program Properties . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 33
Disk Operations . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 34
FTP Manager . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 35
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 37
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 38
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 39
Serial Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44
FTP Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44
WinMax Uptime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 44
Rotary Axes Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 45
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46
Data Logging Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 46
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 47
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 50
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 51
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 51
Machine Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 55
Machine Parameters Page 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 56
Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 72
Estimated Run Time Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 73
Programming Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 75
WinMax Interface Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 76
Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 84
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -viii

Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 85
Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 90
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 93
Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 93
Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 95
Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 96
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 100
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 110
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 115
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 117
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 118
Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 121
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 124
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 126
Manual Safety Override Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 128
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 131
Max5 UI Graphics Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 134
Machine Operation Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 135

Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 136
Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 137
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 138
Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 141
Tool Fixture Option (TPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 148
HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 151
Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 155
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 159
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 165
Restart Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 167
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 167
UltiMotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 173
Conversational Programming
Conversational Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 1
Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 2
Programming Dual-Zone Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8
Pecking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 8
Cutter Compensation (preliminary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 9
Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 14
Lead In/Out Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 15
Milling Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 17
General Guidelines for Creating a Milling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 18
Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 19
Mill Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 26
Mill Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 29
Mill Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 31
Mill Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 33
3D Mold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 34
Helical Plunge (Ramp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 44
Mill Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 51
Mill Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 54
Mill True-Type Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 56
ix - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Stick Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 59
True-Type Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 62
HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 65
Mill HD3 Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 69
Insert Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 70
Swept Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 74
Mill Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 79
Mill Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 84
Holes Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 87
Drill Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 88
Tap Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 97
Bore and Ream Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 98
Back Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 101
Bolt Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 102
Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 103
Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 104
Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 105
Holes End Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 105
Patterns Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 107

Patterns Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 108
Loop Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 109
Loop Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 110
Loop Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 111
Loop Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 112
Pattern Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 113
Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 114
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 115
Pattern End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 115
Special Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 117

Position Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 118
Graphics On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 119
Change Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 119
Change Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 121
Machine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 122
Lube Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 122
Comment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 123
Insert Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 123
Tool Change Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 124
NC/Conversational Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 129
DXF Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 131

DXF Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 132
DXF Build Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 133
DXF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 135
Edit Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 136
DXF Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 138
UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 139
Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 143
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -x

NC Programming
NC Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 1
NC Part Programming Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 2
NC Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 6
Starting a New NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 8
NC Editor Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 9
NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 20
NC Probing Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 25
Preparatory Functions - G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 27

G Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 30
G Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 31
Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 59
Setting Tool Offsets with G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 60
Plane Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 62
Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 73
Special Program Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 102
Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 137
Feed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 139
Canned Cycle Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 142
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 145
Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 146
Canned Cycle Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 148
Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 150
Spindle Speed - S Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 151
Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153

D Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153
L Codes (BNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153
T Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153
Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 155

M Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 157
Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 160
Axis Limit Overrides (M210, M211, M212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
NC Productivity Package Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 183

Macro Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 184
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 185
Program Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 200
Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 205
Modal Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 214
User Defined Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 216
NCPP Variable Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 224
Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 234
xi - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Probing
Tool Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1

Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 2
Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 8
Tool Quality Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 14
Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 18
Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 26
Part Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31

Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 32
Part Probe Calibration and Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 34
Part Quality Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 67
Rotary Programming
Rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 1
Rotary Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 2
Rotary Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 5
Universal Transform Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 8
Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 13
Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 14
Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 24
Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 29
Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 34
Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 - 37
Extended Shop Floor
UltiMonitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 1
LAN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 2
Configuring a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 4
Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 8
Extended Shop Floor (ESF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 - 12
Field Name Glossary
Field Name Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1
Error Messages and Alarms
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 1
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 - 28
Record of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -xii

xiii - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual
MACHINE AND CONSOLE BASICS
These topics are discussed in this section:
Machine Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
Jog Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Emergency Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
Programming Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Machine Operations Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Communications Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine and Console Basics 1-1
Machine Components
Before using the machine, you should become familiar with its components. Because of
European Committee (CE) requirements, Hurco machines sold in Europe differ somewhat
from those sold elsewhere. The figure below identifies some of the easily recognized
components of a machine. The console is in front of the machine, facing the operator’s
area.
1 Console
2 Way Cover
3 Table
4 Spindle
5 Machine Base
6 Chip Conveyor
7 Tool Changer
Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with Dual-Screen Console
Hurco machines are available with several hardware and software options. Information
about these options is available from Hurco or your Hurco Distributor.
1 - 2 Machine and Console Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Consoles
The console, and the electrical components required to operate it, are called the “control”
or the “CNC” (Computer Numeric Control). Some electrical components are built into a
separate enclosure kept in the machine’s electrical cabinet. Some internal components,
such as drives and memory, are like those in a PC. Only the parts of the Windows®
operating system that are necessary to run Hurco CNCs are used. Customers are not
permitted to install software on the WinMax control. Pictured below are the Max5 dual-,
Max4 dual-, and Max4 single-screen consoles.
Max5 dual-screen console
Max4 dual-screen console Max4 single-screen console
Control Panel Function Groups
The buttons, keys, and knobs on the dual- and single-screen consoles are grouped by
their functions. Here are the control panel groups on single- and dual-screen consoles:
3
2 1
1. Machine Control buttons
2. Axis and Spindle Control dials
3. Jog Control functions
4. Machine Operations keyboard
5. Programming keyboard
Emergency Stop Buttons
There is an Emergency Stop button located on each console and one on the Remote Jog
Unit. Press the Emergency Stop button to stop all spindle and table motion. This button
locks down when pressed. To release it, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows.
Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining

center before operating.
If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part

program, the tool must be jogged clear of the part before resuming
operation.
When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
1 - 59 for more information.
Programming Keyboard
Program a job at the machine while reading from a blueprint or program worksheet. The
prompts on the Text screen lead you through each element of a part program. Enter
machine operations, part dimensions, and other parameters by selecting the appropriate
screen softkeys and console buttons.
Set up and run part programs, and manage part program files using the following data
entry keys:
• Text Screen Data Entry

• Softkeys
• Numeric Keypad
• Pop-up Text Entry Window
• Graphics Screen Data Entry
Text Screen Data Entry
Text screen data entry keys are used for entering programming information into the Text
screen’s fields. These keys are located in the center of the console’s Programming
Keypad.
Programming Mode
Programming Mode console keys are named for the screens they activate:
• Input – displays the main programming screen used to create and edit part
programs. From this screen, access Part Setup, Tool Setup, Part
Programming, Program Parameters, Copy and Change Blocks, and Restore
and Erase menus.
• Auxiliary – accesses program storage management, system configuration
settings, DXF files, reset master, and the upgrade system files menus.
• Review – for Conversational programs, provides an outline view of the
blocks currently programmed, including type of block and tool used. Jump to
a desired block by typing the block number and pressing Enter. For Numerical
Control (NC) programs, the Review key displays or re-displays the NC part
program.
• Help – displays help text. Place the cursor on a field in question and press
the Help key. If help text is available, it will appear in a pop-up window. Help
is not available for all screens.
These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard:
• Insert - type over and replace current text.

• Delete - delete the character to the right of the cursor.
• Home - position the cursor before a line of text.
• End - position the cursor at the end of a line of text.
• Page Up - position the cursor at the beginning of the previous page.
• Page Down - position the cursor at the beginning of the next page.
Text Screen Cursor Control Keys

These keys control cursor movement and perform programming operations:
• Arrow keys - move the cursor from one field to the next, or advance a part
program to the next data block.
• Enter key (↵) - accept the information typed in a text field, or move to the
next field.
• Special Function keys / keyboard shortcuts:
• alt + Input—display the Pop-up Text Entry Window.
• alt + Help—produce a bmp screen capture.
• alt + right arrow—tab through fields or through the windows in File
Manager.
• alt + left arrow—reverse tab through fields or the windows in File
Manager.
• alt + Select—simulate a right mouse click.
• alt + F + left arrow—reverse tab through fields or the windows in File
Manager. (Same function as alt + left arrow.)
• alt + F + Select—simulate Shift + left mouse click.
• C (clear) console key—press to clear the value at the current cursor
position. The C key works like an Esc key on a keyboard.
• F + Delete—delete the character to the left of the cursor.
• F + Help—produce a bmp screen capture.
• F + End—move the cursor to the end of a list.
• F + Home—move the cursor to the top of a list.
• F + Page Down—move through a list.
• F + Page Up—move through a list.
• F + Select—simulate a left mouse click.
• F + up arrow—move cursor to previous data block.
• F + down arrow—moves cursor to next data block.
• F + left arrow—moves cursor to previous element.
• F + right arrow—moves cursor to next element.
• F + decimal (.)—enable Full Precision Editing. This feature displays a
pop-up window showing 12 digits to the right of the decimal for the
current field.
• F + Draw—switch to the DXF drawing on the graphics screen.
• F + 1 through 8—simulate function keys on keyboard (F1, F2, F3,...F8).
Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad allows you to enter numbers and calculate values in the Text screen.
Perform the following operations with this keypad:
• Enter numeric data into fields on the screen.

• Perform calculations using the mathematical symbols (÷, ×, −, +) on the
keypad.
Optional Computer Keyboard

If the console is equipped with an optional computer keyboard, use it to enter data into a
field. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor.
Axis, Spindle, and Machine Control
The following keys and knobs are used to control machine movement and adjust the
spindle and axes.
Override Knobs
Three knobs on the upper console allow you to override the programmed axis feedrate,
rapid, and spindle speed.
The Override knobs function as follows:
• Axis Feed Rate - controls the programmed axis feedrate during an auto run
program. Turning the dial to counterclockwise slows the feedrate; turning the
dial to clockwise speeds the feedrate. Selecting Min slows the spindle to 10%
of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the feedrate to 150% of the
nominal value.
• Spindle Speed - controls the spindle speed. Turning the dial
counterclockwise slows the spindle; turning the dial clockwise increases
spindle speed. Selecting Min slows spindle speed to 640 RPM slower than the
nominal value. Selecting Max increases spindle speed to 640 RPM faster than
the nominal value.
• Rapid Override - overrides the programmed rapid traverse; the speed at
which the table moves from one point to another. Selecting Min slows the
table speed to 10% of the nominal value. Selecting Max increases the table
speed to 150% of the nominal value.
Jog Units
A jog unit is used to manually jog the axes and control machine operation. Hand-held, or
remote, jog units can be removed from the console and carried closer to the work piece.
Max5 Remote Jog Units
Max5 console offers a choice of remote jog units:
• Basic—portable hand-held unit with axes and machine operation controls.

• Premium—portable hand-held jog unit with all the features of the Standard
jog unit, plus an LCD touchscreen that displays axes position in Manual mode,
Part Setup, Tool Setup, Work Offsets, and Aux Work Offsets.
Max4 Remote Jog Unit
The Console Jog Unit is standard on the Max4 console.
The hand-held remote Max4 Jog Unit is an option on the Max4 console.
Jog Unit Operation

Basic operation of a jog unit is as follows:
1. Select an axis with the Axis Select Switch.

2. Use the Jog Feed Keys:
a. Select either the + or – Jog Feed Keys.
b. Adjust Jog Feed Override to override the programmed axis feedrate.
OR
3. Use the Hand Wheel Multiplier:

a. Select a hand wheel resolution with one of the Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys.
b. Rotate the Jog Hand Wheel.
Other than the Emergency Stop button, the Jog Unit does not affect
running programs.
Setting Jog Unit Parameters
To access the parameters :
1. Press the Manual Mode console key to display the Manual screen.
2. Press the Manual Function (F2) softkey. The Jog Unit parameters are
displayed:
• Manual Jog Feed— enter the desired manual jog axis feedrate. The
range is from 0.0 to the machine’s maximum feedrate.
An axis may have a maximum jog feedrate slower than other axes. This
slower axis can only move at its maximum jog feedrate (and not the
higher feedrate of other axes).
For example, the X and Y axes on a machine each have a maximum jog
feedrate of 787 inches per minute (ipm). The Z axis has a maximum jog
feedrate of 100 ipm. Without using the jog feedrate override, the X and Y
axes can jog at 787 ipm, but the Z axis is limited at 100 ipm.
• Manual Spindle Speed —enter the spindle speed when the Spindle On
console key is pressed. This value can not be greater than the machine’s
maximum spindle speed. Entering a negative value (e.g., -500) causes
the spindle to reverse (turn counterclockwise) at that speed.
• Rotary Jog Feed (for machines with rotary or swivel axes)—enter the
jog feedrate in RPM.
Max5 Remote Jog Units
Basic Remote Jog Unit
Pictured belows is the Basic Unit. See Remote Jog Units, on page 1 - 15 for more details.
Flashlight
Handle
Store Position
Emergency Stop
Stop Cycle
Start Cycle
Rapid Jog Rate Knob
Feed Hold
Flashlight On/Off
Axis Select Knob
Handwheel Multipliers
Jog Feed
Jog Handwheel
Premium Remote Jog Unit
Pictured below is the Max5 Premium Remote Jog. See Remote Jog Units, on page 1 - 15
for more information.
Handle Flashlight
Store Position
Emergency Stop
LCD Touchscreen
(Premium and
Wireless)
Stop Cycle
Start Cycle
Rapid Jog Rate Knob
Feed Hold
Axis Select &

Flashlight On/Off
Override Knob
feed
rapid
spindle
Handwheel Multipliers
Jog Feed
Jog Handwheel
This is the view of the back of the Max5 Remote Jog Unit (both Basic and Premium):
Enable button
Max4 Remote Jog Unit
1. Emergency Stop Button

2. Store Position Key
3. Hand Wheel Multiplier Keys
4. Jog Hand Wheel
5. Jog Feed Keys
6. Jog Feed Override
7. Axis Select Switch
Remote Jog Units
• Emergency Stop—stops all spindle and table motion. See Emergency Stop
Buttons, on page 1 - 5 for more information.
• Store Position—records the current axis position in the part program’s setup
screens.
• LCD screen (available only on Premium units)—displays Manual mode
(MAN), Part Setup (PSU), Tool Setup (TSU), Work Offsets (WO), and Aux
Work Offsets (AWO).
Mode Selections appear at the bottom of the LCD screen. Use the
touchscreen to select a mode; a check mark appears by the current selection.
Scroll up, down, left, and right, and select items using the touchscreen.
• MAN—manual mode. The display shows machine or part positions for X,

Y, and Z. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone machines.
• PSU—Part Setup. The display shows current part setup information.
Values for X, Y, Z, A, B, C, as well as rotary centerline X, rotary centerline
Y, and Z table offset are shown. Positions are zone relative on dual-zone
machines.
• TSU—Tool Setup. The display shows current tool setup information. The
initial tool displayed is the current tool in spindle.
• WO—Work Offsets. The displays shows G54, G55, G56, G57, G58, G59
and Shift values.
• AWO—Aux Work Offsets. The display shows offsets 1-93.
• Start Cycle (Max5)—activates machine operation. The Start Cycle button on

the Remote Jog Unit must be used in conjunction with the Enable button,
located on the back of the jog unit. Press and hold the Enable button and
press the Start Cycle button on the jog unit. The Enable button can be
released after the cycle is started.
Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held
down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open.
• Feed Hold (Max5)—stops all axes movement (except a tap operation) when
the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the button a second
time allows machine positioning to resume.
• Stop Cycle (Max5)—stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.
• Axis Selector (& Override) Knob – selects the axis to jog (0, X, Y, Z, A, B).
On Premium unit only, this knob also control the override mode: feed, rapid,
or spindle.
See Setting Jog Unit Parameters, on page 1 - 10 for instructions on
setting the Jog Unit parameters.
• Flashlight (Max5)—toggle flashlight or machine work light on and off with

this button. A short duration press toggles the flashlight. Flashlight
illuminates from the top of the remote jog unit. A longer duration press
toggles the machine work light.
• Rapid Jog Rate Knob (Max5)—controls the rapid jog rate when an axis is
selected on the Axis Selector (& Override) Knob. On Premium model, when
the Axis Selector & Override Knob is set to override mode (one of the bottom
three positions), the Rapid Jog Rate Knob controls the override (feed, rapid,
or spindle).
• Jog Feed Override (Max4)—control the jog speed (10% to 150%) of the
nominal value. Use this dial to touch off the tool and move the X and Y axes
to touch off the part for Tool and Part Setup.
• Jog Feed Keys —select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Jog Handwheel —select minus (-) or plus (+) jog direction.
• Handwheel Multiplier Keys - defines the hand wheel resolution.
• x1 - defines a one-to-one ratio (each click equals .0001 inch, or .00254
mm).
• x10 - defines a 10-to-one ratio (each click equals .001 inch, or .0254
mm).
• x100 - defines a 100-to-one ratio (each click equal s 0.01 inch, or .254
mm. One full turn equals 1 inch, or 25.4 mm).
• Enable button—on machines with CE enabled, must be held to use the Start
Cycle button and the +/- jog on the unit.
Enable Button
The Max5 Remote Jog, Max4 Remote Jog, single-screen and dual-screen consoles may be
equipped with an Enable button. The Enable button is functional only on machines that
have CE enabled.
The Enable button has three positions: fully up (off), middle (on), and fully down (off).
The button must be in the middle position to be enabled. The Enable button is required
for the following operations:
• Start Cycle (on Max5 Remote Jog only)—press and hold the Enable button
and press the Start Cycle button on the unit. The Enable button can be
released after the cycle is started.
Both the Enable button and the Start Cycle button must be held
down to run the spindle with the enclosure doors open.
It is not necessary to use the Enable button when using the Start Cycle
button on the console.
• +/- Jog—press and hold the Enable button while simultaneously selecting
either “+” or “-” button to jog the selected axis, only when the enclosure
doors are open. If the enclosure doors are closed, it is not necessary to use
the Enable button to jog the axes.
It is not necessary to press and hold the Enable button to jog the axis using
the hand wheel at x1, x10, or x100 speeds.
Machine Control
Machine Control buttons start and stop machine operation. The buttons function as
follows:
• Power On - enables the relay control system. This button must be

illuminated to operate the machine, but may be switched off while creating or
editing a part program.
• Start Cycle - activates machine operation. When the machine is in an active
mode, the Start Cycle flashes to indicate the machine is ready. When this
button is pressed again, the light switches off.
To turn Control Power On:
1. Press the Power On console button.

2. Press the Manual Mode console key.
3. Press the Start Cycle console button.
Never press the Start Cycle button without knowing exactly what the
machine will do.
• Stop Cycle - stops axes movement, then stops the spindle.

• Feed Hold (Motion Hold on Max console) - stops all axes movement, except
a tap operation, when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing
the button a second time allows machine positioning to resume.
To Stop an Automatic Machine Operation:
Press the Stop Cycle button to stop the axis, then the spindle.
Or
1. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button to stop axis motion.
2. Press the Spindle Off console key to stop the spindle.
3. Press the Feed Hold (or Motion Hold) console button again.
Machine Operations Keys
The Machine Operations console keys are needed to run part programs and control the
machine during cutting. These keys are labeled under the Machine Mode, Spindle, Tool
Changer, and Coolant groupings.
Machine Mode
The Machine Mode console keys have these functions:
• Auto - allows you to run a part program automatically. See Auto Mode, on
page 1 - 160 for more information.
• Interrupt - halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions, such as cleaning the work piece. See
Stop Motion, on page 1 - 18 for more information. Press Auto or Single to
resume the part program and most cycles that were manually started by the
operator (such as Chip Auger or Conveyor).
• Single - provides access to the Single Cycle screen. In this mode, the
machine stops the axes after each automatic operation. In Conversational
Programming the machine halts (with the spindle running) after each hole
operation, contour segment, or milling subroutine. For NC Programming, the
machine halts with the spindle running after each data block is executed.
Pressing the flashing Start Cycle button causes the automatic machining
operation to resume. For information on the Single Cycle screen softkeys, see
the Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160 section. The softkeys are the same on both
screens.
• Test - provides access to perform a program test run to identify potential
problems before cutting the part. For more information, see Auto Mode, on
page 1 - 160.
• Manual - provides access to manual machine operations that allow axis
positioning with the jog unit. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 1 -
134 for more information.
Stop Motion
If you observe a problem during the cutting process or simply want to stop the machine
to make some adjustments, you may press one of three buttons to stop motion:
• Feed Hold—stops all axes movement (except a tapping operation in

progress), when the tool is in the programmed feedrate region. Pressing the
button a second time allows machine positioning to resume without loss of
position, provided no other button or key has been pressed.
• Interrupt Cycle—halts machine operation during automatic execution of a
program to allow manual functions such as cleaning the work piece. Pressing
the Interrupt button performs the following actions:
1. Stops all motion except the spindle.
2. Pulls the tool straight up and out of the part.
3. Stops the spindle.
4. Displays the manual screen on the console.
To restart the part program, press the Auto button followed by the Start Cycle button.
If any key other than the Auto button is pressed to restart the
program, the system cancels the execution of the part program.
• Emergency Stop—all motion stops and power is shut off to the spindle,
relay control, and servo systems. An emergency stop message with recovery
instructions appears at the bottom of the text screen. To release an
Emergency Stop button, twist the button in the direction indicated by the
arrows and pull the button up.
After the last choice is selected, the following sequence occurs:
1. A prompt is displayed to press the Start button while the

console Start Cycle button flashes.
2. When the Start Cycle button is pressed, the program
begins running at the specified point of the Start Block.
3. When the specified End Block is reached, the display
indicates that Recovery Restart mode is complete and the
Start Cycle button flashes again.
4. If the Start Cycle button is pressed again, then the
program will rerun using the same Start and End Blocks.
Spindle
• On—activates the spindle if the machine is in manual mode. The Start Cycle
button must also be pushed to start spindle rotation.
• Off—stops spindle rotation during manual operation if the Spindle On button
was previously pressed.
Tool Changer
• Auto—activates the automatic tool changing function. When selected, all
operator-initiated tool changes will be automatic.
• Manual—activates the manual tool changing function. When selected, all
tools must be manually inserted into or removed from the spindle; bypassing
the automatic tool changer.
Coolant
• Auto—activates the selected coolant to spray whenever the tool is below the
Retract Clearance plane. The coolant turns off when the tool moves above
the Retract Clearance plane, or during a tool change. This key cannot be
activated in Manual mode. Pressing this key a second time turns off the
coolant operation.
• Primary—functions only on machines equipped with a primary (i.e., flood)
coolant system. Activates the primary coolant system when the machine is in
Auto or Manual mode, and overrides an Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the
Primary key a second time turns off this operation.
• Secondary—functions only on machines equipped with a secondary coolant
system (e.g., Coolant Through Spindle, CTS). Activates the secondary
coolant system when the machine is in Auto or Manual mode and overrides
Coolant Auto operation. Pressing the Secondary key a second time turns off
this operation.
Communications Panel
All communication ports are located on the Comm Port panel assembly on machine
control cabinet. The following connectors are available:
Port Connector Type Use
10-base T RJ45 Network (Ethernet)
Indexer 8-pin military Indexer
PORT 1 and Port 2 9-pin RS-232C Serial Communications
USB USB jump drive Not available for use.
The communication ports are typically arranged as follows:
Figure 1–2. Communications Panel
RS-232C Serial Port
The RS-232C serial ports can be used to connect peripherals to the machine. These ports
may be addressed separately. The standard baud rates are software-selectable. The ports
can be used as an output or input, depending upon the software.
The connector pin designated for the RS-232C signal is shown below:
Figure 1–3. Male 9-Pin D-Type Connector
While the signals present at the serial port conforms to the RS-232C standard, not all
standard RS-232C signals are available. Some peripheral devices may provide RS-232C
control signals that are not available at the port described here. However, such devices
can usually be adapted to the port. In some cases, it may be necessary to add jumpers to
the connector. Signals available at the serial port are:
Pin Signal Name Signal on the Pin

1 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) Not used by the control.
Receive Data (RXD) Data received (by machine) in serial format from
2
peripheral device.
Transmit Data (TXD) Data transmitted (by machine) to peripheral
3
device in serial format.
4 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) Not used by the control.
Signal Ground (SG) Line establishing the common ground reference
5
potential for all interface lines.
Data Set Ready (DSR) Signal to notify printer that transmitter is ready
6
for transmission.
Request to Send (RTS) Line used by control to instruct peripheral device
to get ready to receive data. Data can be
7
transmitted after the Clear-To-Send signal is
received from connected peripheral device.
Clear to Send (CTS) Control line used by peripheral device to indicate
8
that it is ready to receive data from machine.
Ring Indicator (RI) Signal indicates modem has received the ring of
9
an incoming call.
To connect a peripheral to the machine, fabricate an adapter cable. If a properly shielded

low capacitance cable is used, cable lengths of up to 100 feet are permissible.
Be certain that you use the correct cabling before connecting the device to the machine.
Consult the peripheral manual to determine whether the peripheral is a Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) or Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. The Hurco machine is
a DTE device, and in most cases, so is a personal computer. A printer may be either a DTE
or DCE device.
Indexer Port
Indexing signals are always present at the Indexer port, so there is no need to turn it on.
It is the customer’s responsibility to provide a harness from the Indexer to the Indexer
port. Before making this harness, see the Parts Listing and Diagrams Manual for the
correct pin-outs.
Network Port
The 10baseT (RJ45) connector is used with the Ultinet option. This option requires an
ethernet card, cabling from the ethernet card to the communications panel, and an
optikey diskette to enable the option.
USB Port
The USB Port (Universal Serial Bus) is a high-speed port that allows you to connect
devices, such as printers and jump drives to the panel. You can use a jump drive to
transfer files.
Spindle and Automatic Tool Changers
Hurco machining centers use either a Swing-Arm Random Pocket Automatic Tool Changer
(ATC) or a Horizontal Chain Type ATC. Both types of ATCs function essentially the same.
Each tool is inserted into a tool holder before being loaded into the spindle. The
orientation hole in the tool holder must always line up with the orientation key in the tool
changer. Tool changer stations are numbered to identify and locate each tool.
Only use tools that are dimensioned for the maximum spindle speed.
For machine series-specific ATC information, see Automatic Tool

Changers, on page 1 - 139.
Loading a Tool into the Spindle

Use this procedure to manually load a tool into the spindle:
1. Press the Machine Mode Manual console key to prevent the ATC from moving
while you insert a tool. The Manual screen appears.
2. Touch the Orient Spindle softkey to position the spindle for tool insertion. If
there is a tool in the spindle, refer to Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine,
on page 1 - 25.
3. Insert the tool holder into the spindle. Make sure the tool holder slots align
with the spindle head guides.
4. Release the Spindle Unclamp button to secure the tool in the spindle. Be
certain that the tool is firmly seated.
5. Touch the Tool In Spindle softkey. The Tool In Spindle field appears.
6. Make sure the tool number in the Tool In Spindle field matches the number of
the tool in the spindle. If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool
number.
7. To load a tool into the ATC magazine, see the Loading Tools into the ATC
Magazine, on page 1 - 24 section.
Unloading a Tool from the Spindle

To manually remove a tool from the spindle, follow these steps:
1. Press the Manual Mode console key. The Manual screen appears.
2. Hold the tool to prevent it from dropping.
3. Press the Spindle Unclamp button. The spindle unclamp button is either on the
side of the spindle, or the front of the spindle. Refer to Parts Listing and Wiring
Diagrams Manual for your machine for a drawing showing the Spindle Unclamp
button location.
4. The tool disengages. Pull the tool out of the spindle.
5. Release the Spindle Unclamp button when the tool is free.
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine

The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if
space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the
Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC
magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.
Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.
To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:

2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in
Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields
appear.
3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle.
If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.
4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.
5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.
6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be
Auto.
7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.
8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.
• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the
previous tool was removed from the spindle.
• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the
spindle.
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine
Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:

2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is
no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).
The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine,
and its location.
3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into
the Next Tool field.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the
spindle.
5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button to initiate the tool change.
6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the
spindle.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC
magazine.
Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually
loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.
The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80
mm (125 mm for some machines).
Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:
1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears.
2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.
3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool
Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.
Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC
Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.
4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd
numbered tool pockets will be available.
5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle”
section.
6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by
using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less
softkey.
PROGRAM MANAGER
Managing Program Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 33

Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39
Disk Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 40
FTP Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 41
Managing Program Files

Program Manager shows all part programs that are in the control’s memory to edit or run.
Use the Program Manager menu to create, open, save, and close programs. Features of
the Program Manager include:
• Ability to load more than one program at a time.

• Ability to load Conversational and NC programs at the same time.
• Ability to copy blocks from one program into another (blocks are copied in
Program Review; Program Manager is used to switch between programs to
facilitate copy and paste).
Program in use lock

Unsaved programs
Program storage location
List of programs
Snapshot of part
File type
and description
Figure 1–1. WinMax Program Manager
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Program Manager 1-27

Sort the program list by Program Name or Path by selecting the
corresponding header. Select the Program Name header once to sort
the list alphabetically. Select the Program Name header again and
sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.
Program Manager softkeys are:
• New—creates a new part program. Choose the program type by selecting

one of these softkeys:
• Conversational Program—creates a new conversational part program.
• NC Program—creates a new NC part program (extensions for NC part
programs are determined by the NC dialect set in User Preferences. The
.NC extension is also supported.).
• Job List—creates a new job list (.HJL file extension). See Job Lists, on
page 1 - 37.
WinMax gives new programs the default name NONAME (for
example, NONAME1.HWM). When new programs are created, they
should be renamed with a suitable name and be saved to the hard
drive or other media.
• Open—opens a part program that is saved to the hard drive, network drive,
floppy disk, or USB memory device. The Load Program screen opens, where
you can locate the program from the list, as in the following example:
3. Select to
open
1. Select folder
2. Select
program
file
Figure 1–2. Load Program screen
To find a program, navigate through the folders in the left pane by selecting
“+” or “-” to expand or collapse. Select a folder to view its contents in the
right pane.
1 - 28 Program Manager 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Sort the program list by File, Size, or Date by selecting the
corresponding header. Programs with the same date will be sorted
alphabetically.
Select the File header once to sort the list alphabetically. Select the
File header again to sort the list in reverse alphabetical order.
Files with the same name may be loaded into Program Manager if
they are saved in different locations. If an attempt is made to load a
file that has the same name and same location as a file already
loaded into Program Manager, a message appears confirming that
the file should be loaded again. If YES is selected the file will be re-
loaded and any unsaved changes will be lost.
HD3 and XML1 files will be listed with .HWM extension in Program
Manager. HWM is Hurco’s conversational program file type. SAVE AS
must be used to re-save the program as HD3. Using SAVE will save
the program with the HWM extension. Programs cannot be saved
with the .XML1 extension.
• Load—opens an HWM, NC, or XML1 file.

• Import—opens an HD3 file.
• Stream Load—optimizes memory utilization for loading and running NC
program files that are too big to be stored in memory. The NC program
loads as it is run. This method should be used only when you want to run
the program; the file cannot be edited or drawn when opened this way.
Only one NC file can be loaded at a time using Stream Load.
Programs loaded with Stream Load must be re-loaded each time WinMax
is shutdown. In addition, files cannot contain NCPP calls, and subroutines
cannot be in the same file.
• Save—saves the current part program to a hard drive, network drive, floppy
disk, or USB memory device. If the program has a path indicated in Program
Manager, it will be saved to the same location.
Hurco recommends the following storage areas in My Computer:
• 3½ Floppy (A:)
• PART_PROGS (D:)
• USB Device (E:)
• My Network Places (if the UltiNet option is installed)
Programs cannot be saved to the root level of the My Computer or

My Documents directories. You must open these to see the directory
listing before you can save to these areas.
• Save As—allows the current part program to be saved with a different name,
as a different file type, or in a different location. Also used to save files with
the default NONAME program name. Type the program name in the File Name
box and select the file type, as in the following example:

To rename a program, highlight the entire name in the FILE NAME field and
type or use alpha/numeric console keys to replace the name. To modify
character(s) in the name, highlight the name, select again in the field, and
use the cursor keys, delete, and the alpha/numeric keys to change the name.
When the filename is completely highlighted, the filename extension does not
have to be re-entered; the extension selected in the SAVE AS TYPE field will
be added to the name entered in the FILE NAME field.
For Conversational programs, the following file types are available from the
Save As Type drop-down list:
• .HWM—WinMax Mill conversational format

• .HD5—WinMax Desktop conversational format (desktop only)
• .HD3—Ultimax conversational format
To save as an HWM file, select the Save softkey.
To save as an HD3 (or HD5) file, select the Export softkey.
For NC programs, SAVE AS will default extensions to the selected NC dialect,

either FNC (ISNC) or HNC (Basic NC). If another extension is desired, include
the extension with the filename in the FILE NAME field. For example,
SAMPLE. NC.
The job list extension is .HJL.
• Close—opens a menu to close selected program or all programs.

• Program Properties—stores properties for the selected part program.
• Disk Operations—opens the Disk Operations screen to browse available
folders and files, and cut, copy, paste, rename, and delete files.
• FTP Manager—displays external network connections (with the Ultinet
option).

Job Lists
A job list is a collection of programs, or “jobs,” that run sequentially to complete a part.
A job list is made up of jobs. A job can be a single file or it can be made up of several
files; for example, a job might be a Conversational program and the NC programs that
are called in it using NC/Conversational Merge.
Job list files have the file extension .HJL. To create a new job list:
1. Select the Job List softkey on the Program Manager New Program screen. A
new program with the .HJL extension is added to the program list. See also
Managing Program Files, on page 1 - 33.
2. Select the Save As softkey and type a name in the File Name field. Select the
Save softkey.
3. Open the new .HJL file. The Job List screen opens.
4. Type a name for your Job List in the Name field and press the Enter key.
5. Select Add Job softkey. The Job screen opens.
6. Type a name for your job in the Name field and press the Enter key.
7. Select the Select Files to Add softkey. The Program Manager screen opens
where you can select the files for your job.
8. Repeat steps 5-7 for as many jobs and files as you want to add.
Individual program files must be programmed and saved prior to
being added to a Job List.
Here is a sample job list:
Use the Add Job softkey to open a job

screen.
Use the Remove Job softkey to remove a

job from the job list.
Use the Edit Job softkey to edit a job.
Use the Move Job Up and Move Job

Down softkeys to rearrange the job order
The Start Cycle setting controls how the job files are run:
• Once Per Job—Start Cycle console button must be pressed to repeat the
job.
• Once Per List—Start Cycle console button must be pressed to repeat the full
list.
• Continuous Loop—Job List continuously runs in a loop without the need to

use the Start Cycle button.
The Force File Reload setting, when Yes, specifies that any previously loaded file will
be closed and reloaded before it is run as a part of the job list. This is useful if any
program information is dynamically changed while running and needs to be reloaded to
take effect.
From the Job List screen, you can select a job to view or edit.
Here is sample job that contains an NC program and the NC state file:
Use Add File to Job softkey to enter a

file path to add a new file to the job.
OR
Use Select Files to Add softkey to
browse for files in Program Manager.
Use the appropriate softkeys to edit the

file path, remove a file from the job, or
change the order of the files in the job.
Running the Job List

Job lists are executed from the Auto screen. Partial program runs can be specified using
the Start Job and End Job fields.
Recovery Restart is supported with job lists. If machine operation is interrupted:
• during an NC program run, the NC Editor restart screen opens so the restart
marker can be set.
• during a Conversational run, the Auto screen opens so the block range and
restart operation can be set.

Drawing is disabled when a Job List is the active file.
Program Properties
Program properties store and manage properties for the selected part program.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Program Properties fields:
Description
Display Units
Material
Name
Path
Program Type
Write Protection

Disk Operations
Disk Operations displays available directories and files. Cut, copy, paste, rename, and
delete program files from Disk Operations.
See also:
Managing Program Files, on page 1 - 33
Import / Export Functions, on page 1 - 127
NC States, on page 1 - 127
Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59
Directory Window Files Window
Figure 1–3. Disk Operations
When a directory is highlighted in the Directory window, the softkeys are:
• Cut Directory—deletes the directory from one location to be pasted into

another location
• Copy Directory—makes a copy of the directory (but does not delete) to be
pasted into another location
• Paste Into Directory—pastes the directory or file that has been cut or
copied. For example, to copy a directory and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the directory you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY DIRECTORY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied directory.
4. Select the PASTE INTO DIRECTORY F3 softkey.

• Create Directory—creates a new directory.
• Rename Directory—renames a directory.
• Delete Directory—removes the directory.
• FTP Manager—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option).
When a file is highlighted in the Files Window, the softkeys are:
• Cut—deletes the file from one location to be pasted into another location.
• Copy—makes a copy of the file (but does not delete) to be pasted into
another location.
• Paste—pastes the file that has been cut or copied. For example, to copy a file
and paste it into a new location:
1. Highlight the file you wish to copy.
2. Select the COPY F2 softkey.
3. Highlight the folder in which you wish to place the copied file.
4. Select the PASTE F3 softkey.
• Rename—renames the file.
• Delete—removes the file.
• Load—loads the file into the Program Manager.
• FTP Manager—displays the external network connections (with Ultinet
option).
FTP Manager
FTP Manager allows you to transfer programs from a remote location (host), such as a PC
or machine, to a local PC or another machine, using the UltiNet option. See WinMax Mill
Options for more information.

UTILITIES
Utilities are accessed with the Auxiliary console key. Select the Auxiliary console key and
this window with softkey selections appears on the screen:
Figure 1–1. Auxiliary Screen
Use the softkeys on the Auxiliary screen to navigate to other parts of WinMax Mill. Also
toggle the Edit Lockout feature on and off with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey.
See Edit Lockout, on page 1 - 46 for more information.
Select the Utility Screen softkey to access the Utility screen. These functions are
available and are described in this section:
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 44
User Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 45
Additional Utilities Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 53
Printing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 53
Integrator Support Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 56
Serial I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 57
Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 57
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Utilities 1-37

System Configuration
The SYSTEM CONFIGURATION softkey on the Utilities screen displays machine, control,
and software information. Softkeys on the System Configuration submenu are:
• WinMax Configuration—changes WinMax configuration settings.

• Machine Specifications—changes machine specifications.
• Backup Config & Machine Files—copy Configuration and Machine files to a
directory or to a USB memory device or floppy disk.
• Restore Config & Machine Files—use saved files to overwrite existing
Configuration and Machine files.
WinMax Configuration
The WinMax Configuration softkeys are:
• Software Version—displays the current version of WinMax Mill.

• Software Options—displays the current software options. An option can be
toggled on or off using the Enable Selected Option and Disable Selected
Option softkeys; the option state is displayed as Installed or Disabled.
• Motion Configuration—displays the current motion system.
• Ladder File Configuration—Ladder files bridge communication between the
machine and the software. The current version of the Ladder files on the
machining center, the total number of Ladder files, and any mismatched
Ladder files that may cause a software conflict are displayed.
• Language File Configuration—displays the language files.
• WinMax IP Address—displays the current IP address of the CNC.
Machine Specifications
Displays specific information about the machining center that was entered during
software/machine installation.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Machine Specifications fields:
Machine Class Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit
Machine Hour Meter Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit
Maximum Contouring Rate Number of Axes Present
Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate Vertical/Horizontal
Maximum Spindle Motor Speed
Maximum Spindle Tool Speed
1 - 38 Utilities 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Backup Config & Machine Files
Backup files can be used to restore corrupted Configuration and Machine files on the hard
drive. Select this softkey and choose the location to copy the files. Backup files can be
copied to any directory on the hard drive or to a USB memory device or floppy diskette.
Restore Config & Machine Files

Select this softkey to use saved Configuration and Machine files to overwrite existing files
stored on the hard drive.
User Preferences
WinMax software can be modified to change how certain information is displayed or
calculated. For example, certain interface elements, Conversational and NC settings,
machine parameters, and languages can be modified.
Select the User Preferences softkey on the Utilities screen to access to the following:
• User Interface Settings, on page 1 - 46

• Conversational Settings, on page 1 - 48
• NC Settings, on page 1 - 48
• Autosave Settings, on page 1 - 49
• Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49
• Machine Parameters, on page 1 - 61
• Serial Port Settings, on page 1 - 50
• FTP Server Settings, on page 1 - 50
• Rotary Axes Parameters, on page 1 - 51
• WinMax Uptime, on page 1 - 50
• Select Language, on page 1 - 52
• Data Logging Filters, on page 1 - 52
• Advanced, on page 1 - 53
User Preference settings can be saved to a file for backup purposes using the Export
User Preferences button. When this button is selected, the file manager screen opens.
Select a location to save the backup file (filename.setx), then select the Export softkey.
The current user preference settings are saved in this file.
To import saved user preference settings use the Import User Preferences button.
Settings can be restored to factory defaults with the Reset User Preferences button.
Integrator Parameters, Machine Parameters, Rotary Axes

Parameters, and FTP Host cannot be backed up or restored.

User Interface Settings
User Interface Settings change the screen display.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the User Interface Settings:
Application Font Size Screen Configuration
Edit Lockout Level Screensaver Timeout
Edit Mode Show All File Types
Enable Program Restore Softkey Menu Position
List Icon Size Swap Screens
Edit Lockout
The Edit Lockout feature limits access to certain program functions and screens. Partial
and Full lockout levels are available. Partial lockout prevents changes to the part
program, while Full lockout prevents changes to the program as well as to setup
information. Refer to the table below for a complete listing of features that are affected
by partial and full lockout.
Edit Lockout is enabled or disabled with the Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey located
on the Auxiliary screen. When the softkey is selected, a pop-up box appears prompting
for the password. Enter the password and select OK. The Edit Lockout feature is enabled
(or disabled if it was previously enabled), and a confirmation message appears.
Set Edit Lockout Level to Partial or Full on the User Interface Settings screen:
1. Select the Auxiliary console key. The Auxiliary screen opens.

2. Select the Utility Screen softkey.
3. Select the User Preferences softkey.
4. Select the User Interface Settings softkey. Select Partial or Full in the
Edit Lockout Level field. When Partial is selected, you can also lock out Part
Setup and/or Tool Setup.
When the cursor is in the Edit Lockout Level field, the Change Lockout
Password softkey is available. The first time the feature is used, the
password should be reset from the factory default. This password is
required to enable and disable Edit Lockout.
You will be redirected to the Input screen if you are on a screen that
becomes locked out when you enter the password.

Here are the features locked with Edit Lockout:
Feature Partial Full
Part Programming Locked Locked
Program Parameters Locked Locked
Program Review: Multiple Block Locked Locked

Functions (Copy, Paste, Insert, Delete)
Copy/Change Blocks Locked Locked
Erase Functions Erase Part Program and Parameters Locked

locked
Capture Feeds and Speeds (Auto) Locked Locked
DXF Locked Locked
DB Search / Block Jump Locked Locked
Jump to Block (from Error Message) Locked Locked
Import Functions Import Part Program and Locked

Parameters locked
Part Setup Depends on setting Locked
Work Offsets Accessible with Part Setup access Locked
Tool Setup Depends on setting Locked
Tool Setup: Feeds and Speeds When Tool Setup is accessible, feeds Locked
and speeds are updated, but data
blocks that use the tools are not.
Tool Offsets Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked
Part Program Tool Review: Match Accessible with Tool Setup access Locked
Tools, Add Unmatched Tool
User Preferences Accessible Locked
Probing Cycles Accessible Locked
Part Counter Accessible Locked
Fields or softkeys appear grayed out and are not accessible when
lockout mode is enabled. In cases where an entire screen is locked
out, you will be redirected to the Input screen.
Additional Edit Lockout considerations:
• Runtime modifications—Edit Lockout does not prevent a running program

from modifying setup or itself. For instance, if the program uses part or tool
probing blocks or macros that manipulate program variables or part or tool
setup directly, this is allowed.
• Recovery Restart—Recovery Restart is enabled in both conversational and NC
modes when Edit Lockout is enabled. Access to the NC Editor is allowed in

this case in order to set the restart marker, but text entry and all softkeys
that allow modification of the program (for example, Cut and Paste) are
disabled.
• Overrides—Speed/Feed overrides are controlled by the Override Lockout
parameter in Program Parameters General 1 tab. Since Program Parameters
are not accessible in Partial or Full lockout mode, Override Lockout should be
set to ON so overrides cannot be adjusted while running the program.
Conversational Settings
Conversational Settings control certain aspects of Conversational programming.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Conversational Settings:
Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies Math Assist Style
Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Warn Before Saving in Old Format
Update
Default Conversational Program Type
Display Machine Axes For Universal Type
HD3 Save Program Type
NC Settings
NC Setting control certain aspects of NC programming.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC Settings:
BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device Exported NC Decimal Places
BPRNT/DPRNT Output File NC Dialect
Custom NC File Extensions NC Display Type
Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup Save NC State with Program
Disable Tool Length Offset Table
NC Variable Monitoring settings:
Enable Reset at Program Start
Enable Variable Monitoring
Monitored Variable Number
Variable Reset Value

Autosave Settings
Specify Yes or No to enable automatic saving of part programs. When set to Yes, you can
specify the frequency and whether to save the active program only.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Autosave Settings:
Enable Automatic Save
Save Active Program Only
Save Frequency
Tool Utilities and Settings

The Tool Utilities and Settings screen is accessed from Utilities/User Preferences. Fields
vary dependent on whether the Tool and Material Library option is loaded.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Utilities and Settings:
General tab
Replace In Files
Tool Calibration Mode
Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes
Use Tool Type Checking
Matching tab
Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual
Enable Automatic Matching
Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration
Maximum Diameter Difference
Life Monitoring tab

Enable Tool Life Monitoring
Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded
Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change
The Life Monitoring tab is not displayed if the Tool & Material
Library option is not installed.

Serial Port Settings
Serial Port Settings allows you to set Port 1 and Port 2 settings for protocol, baud rate,
character length, stop bits, and parity. The following fields appear on the Serial Port
Settings screen. Refer to your hardware documentation for your equipment’s specific
settings.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Serial Port Settings:
Baud Rate
Character Length
Parity
Protocol
Stop Bits
FTP Server Settings

The WinMax console can serve as an FTP Server. For more information refer to Using FTP,
on page 6 - 8 in Extended Shop Floor.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the FTP Server Settings:
Enable FTP Server
FTP Server Port
Maximum Idle Time (Mins)
Password
Path
User Name
WinMax Uptime
The WinMax Uptime screen displays the start date time and runtime for the current
session of Winmax.

Rotary Axes Parameters
Set the General Rotary Axes Parameters on this screen.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary Axis Parameters:
Part Kinematics Z Reference
Rotary Axis ISO Standard
Tilt Axis Preference
Set the specific A, B, C axes parameters (depending on configuration) by selecting the

A/B/C Axis softkeys.
Automatic Centerline Calculation
Machine Coordinate Relative
Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z
For dual-zone machines, parameters can be set for each zone, on the Zone 1 and Zone 2
tabs.

Select Language
Select and register a language on the Language Selection screen:
1. Select a language from the list.

2. Press the Load Language softkey to install the Language files. You can also
press the F1 key to perform this function. The selected language is shown in
the Current Language field.
Language Quick Toggle

You can toggle between two languages from any screen in WinMax using the Language
Quick Toggle feature. To set the primary and secondary languages, highlight a language
in the list and select the Set as Toggle Language 1 (for primary language) or Set as
Toggle Language 2 (for secondary language). The selected languages are shown at the
top of the screen:
Figure 1–2. Language Selection screen
Use Ctrl+L on the keyboard (or virtual keyboard) to switch back and forth between the
languages on any screen in WinMax.
Data Logging Filters

Used for diagnostic purposes only.

Advanced
Used for service purposes; requires a password to access.
Additional Utilities Softkeys

• Printing Setup—set printing preferences for program blocks, range of
program blocks, program parameters, part setup, and tool setup.
• Integrator Support Services—for diagnostics and machine configuration;
password required for access.
• Restart Control—exits all control operations, powers down, then restarts
machine and control.
• Shutdown Control—exits all control operations and powers down machine.
• Serial I/O—to begin read/write program operations using screenport 1 or 2.
• Log Files—displays error and status messages that have occurred during
normal operation.
Printing Setup
The Printing Setup F3 softkey on the main Utilities screen provides access to the following
printing functions:
• Part Program Printing—print part program elements.

• Tool Information Printing—print the Tool Library or save it to file.
• Probing Data Printing—print probing part inspection files.
• Serial Numbers Printing—print a report that lists used Serial Numbers.
Part Program Printing

In the Part Program Printing screen you can choose to print some or all of the following
elements:
• Program Blocks (all or a range)

• Program Parameters
• Part Setup
• Tool Setup
After checking the desired elements, select the PRINTING F3 softkey. A pop-up window
appears that contains the selected data. The information can be viewed by selecting the
heading to expand the section; select the heading again to hide the information. The
following softkeys appear in the pop-up window:

• Print Preview—displays the part program information as it will appear when
printed.
• Print—sends the information to the printer.
• Save As—saves the information as a text file to an external drive.
• Close—closes the pop-up window.
Tool Information Printing

Tool Information Printing is available only with the Tool and Material
Library option.
The TOOL INFORMATION PRINTING F6 softkey on the Tool Utilities and Settings screen
allows you to view and print tool information for all tools saved in the Tool Library:
Print tool list
Save tool list
Figure 1–3. Tool Information and Printing
Select the PRINT button on the Tool Information pop-up to print a list of tools and
settings, as in the following example:
ATC
Tool Number: 23
Tool Type: Ball End Mill
Tool Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Tool length is 0.5625 inches.
Length of cut is 0.4688 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Shank Diameter is 0.0938 inches.
Apt Gear Ratio is 1.

Apt Tool Number is 1.
Apt Diameter Offset is 1.
Apt Length offset is 1.
Simulation Color is SEQUENTIAL.
MTC
Tool Number: 1
Tool Type: Drill
Tool length is 5 inches.
Length of cut is 5 inches.
Number of flutes is 0 inches.
Direction of Spindle Rotation is Clockwise.
Drill Angle is 118.000000°.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Tool Number: 20
Tool Type: Cutting Tap
Tool length is 1.296 inches.
Length of cut is 1.08 inches.
Tap Direction: Right Hand.
Tap Chamfer: Bottoming.
Thread Pitch is 0.0417 inches.
Thread Diameter is 0.216 inches.
Helix Angle is 0°.
Flute Style: Spiral Flute.

Probing Data Printing
When Probing Part Inspection files are generated, they are saved to the same location
and with the same filename as the part program with a .TXT filename extension. For
example, the Part Inspection file for the program SAMPLE.HWM is SAMPLE.TXT. Part
Inspection files are printed from the control using the PROBING DATA PRINTING softkey:
1. Select the PRINTING SETUP F3 softkey from Utilities.

2. Select the PROBING DATA PRINTING F3 softkey.
3. Locate the Part Inspection file from the Locate Probing Data Files screen.
4. Select the PRINT F1 softkey to print the file.
Subsequent Part Inspection data from the same part program is
appended to the existing Part Inspection file for that program.
Serial Numbers Printing

You can print a report that lists the Serial Numbers already used in the part program:
1. Select the Printing Setup softkey from Utilities.

2. Select Serial Numbers Printing softkey.
3. The report is displayed in a pop-up window. Select the Print softkey.
Integrator Support Services

The Integrator Support Services screen requires a password to
access and is for Hurco Certified Technicians’ use in configuring and
setting up the machine.

Serial I/O
Two serial ports are available on the control. The Serial I/O screen contains Status and
Bytes Transferred fields for both ports. In addition, there are read, write, and abort
softkeys for both ports.
These are the fields on the Serial I/O screen:
• Status—status of serial port.

• Bytes Transferred—number of bytes transferred.
These softkeys are available on the Serial I/O screen. Duplicate sets of fields and softkeys
are available on the Serial I/O screen for Port 1 and Port 2.
• Begin Reading from Port—brings up 2 softkey choices: READ NC FROM

PORT and READ CONV FROM PORT to identify the program format to read.
• Begin Writing to Port—writes the program to the port.
• Abort Port Operation—halts the read or write operation for the port.
Log Files
WinMax provides two log files that are accessed with the Log Files softkey, as well as
status and error listings:
• Active Error Listing, on page 1 - 57

• Active Status Listing, on page 1 - 58
• Error History, on page 1 - 58
• Status History, on page 1 - 59
• Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page 1 - 59
• Export Log, on page 1 - 60
Active Error Listing

WinMax provides a list of the most recent error messages displayed, up to a maximum of
200 messages. Review messages when troubleshooting or to determine if a problem
recurs.
These are the softkeys on the Active Error Listing screen:
• Previous Page F1—displays the error messages on the previous page of the
Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the error messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all error messages from the Active Error Listing.

Active Status Listing
The Active Status Listing screen displays current machine status messages. Each item
will include time/date stamp, language file, language file index and the machine status
message currently active in the system. Examples are messages such as “MOTION HOLD
HAS BEEN DEPRESSED,” or “LOW LUBE LEVEL.” As each status changes back to a normal
state, it will be removed from the list (see Status History, on page 1 - 59).
Example:
10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32
CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.
These are the softkeys on the Active Status Listing screen:
• Previous Page F1—displays the status messages on the previous page of

the Active Error Listing.
• Next Page F2—displays the status messages on the next page of the Active
Error Listing.
• Clear All F4—clears all status messages from the Active Status Listing.
Error History
The Error History screen displays a list of all system errors since the last power up (see
Active Error Listing, on page 1 - 57). A plus sign “+” indicates when the error occurred
and a minus sign “-” indicates when the error was cleared.
Examples:
Error occurred:
10:53:40, ERROR.WRC, 110, +
SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.
Error cleared:
10:57:32, ERROR.WRC, 110, -
SERVO FAULT – Z AXIS.
The history will also display part program errors generated during programming
(interpreter errors). These errors will not display in the Active Error Listing since they are
transient.
Example:
11:39:21, COMPILER.WRC, 3, +
ERROR IN BLOCK 1: TOOL 1 IS AN INVALID TOOL NUMBER.

Status History
The Status History screen displays a list of all system messages since the last power up
(see Active Status Listing, on page 1 - 58). A plus sign “+” indicates when the status
went active and a minus sign “-” indicates when the status returned to normal.
Examples:
Status went active:
10:53:39, STATUS.WRC, 32, +
CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.
Status returned to normal: Log F
10:54:27, STATUS.WRC, 32, -
CHIP DOOR(S) OPEN.
Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files

When the Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files softkey is selected, a file manager screen
opens with access to Log and Diagnostic files. Directories are displayed in the left pane;
these include AtcMapLog, Communications, DumpFiles, NavErr, NavTap, NavESTOP,
Profiles, ScreenCaptures, and ThreadMonitor. Select a directory to see its contents (the
files) displayed in the right pane. To help distinguish between files, the date is included in
the filename.
When it is necessary to copy certain files for service purposes, follow these steps:
Due to the large size of some of the files, it is recommended to copy

them from the Hurco machine to a USB flash memory device.
1. Attach the USB flash memory device to the external connector on the
communications port on the machine.
2. Select the appropriate directory from the left-hand pane and select the file(s)
you wish to copy from the right-hand pane.
3. Select the COPY softkey.
4. In the left-hand pane, select the USB flash memory device (will probably
indicate it is E drive in parentheses).
5. Select the PASTE softkey. The files are now on the USB flash memory device,
and can be transferred to a PC to be emailed.

Export Log
The Export Log displays data that is lost or changed when a program is exported from
WinMax (.HWM) to another format (.HD3, .FNC, etc.). Each time a program is exported
from .HWM to another format, the data from the most recent export is displayed and the
older data is erased.
These are the softkeys on the Export Log screen:
• Previous Page F1—displays the previous page if log is longer than one
page.
• Next Page F2—displays the next page if log is longer than one page.
• Clear All F4—erases all information from the Export Log.

MACHINE PARAMETERS
The Machine Parameters screens list various parameters, the range of values that can be
set for each parameter, and the current set or default value. The values of the Machine
Parameters may be changed by the operator.
The machine, part, and/or tool may be damaged if parameters are

changed without understanding the machine operation that may be
affected by the change.
The fields that will be displayed on the Machine Parameters screens are dependent upon
machine type. The values shown on the following screen figures are the default factory
settings for HTX and VTX series machines.
Follow these steps to access the Machine Parameters screens:
1. Select the AUXILARY console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.
4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey.
Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62
Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6, on page 1 - 78
Estimated Run Time Parameters, on page 1 - 79
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine Parameters 1-55

Machine Parameters Page 1
Parameter Description Range Default
Control Power Off Turns the control off after the specified 0-255 120
Time period of inactivity. minutes
UPS Software Sets the number of minutes the 1-20 1 min

Shutdown Off Time system will wait before it shuts down
after a power loss condition has been
detected.
Enable Retract Z- Enables Z-axis retract upon power 0 (disable) 0

Axis on Power Loss loss, when an M91 is present. 1 (enable)
Auto Balance Enable Adjusts the balance between the 0 (disable) 1

motion card and the servo drives at 1 (enable)
the start of calibration and run
program.
Disable Auto On Disables chip conveyor from turning on 0-1 0

Chip Removal automatically in AUTO mode.
Chip Removal On/ Enables the Chip Removal Delay. 0 (disable) 0

Off Delay Enable 1 (enable)
Chip Removal On Sets the time the chip conveyor/auger 0-9999 0

Delay Time cycles on, when Chip Removal On/Off seconds
Delay is enabled.
Chip Removal Off Sets the time the chip conveyor/auger 0-9999 0
Delay Time cycles off, when Chip Removal On/Off seconds
Delay is enabled.
Enable Dual Zones Sets a dual-zone capable machine as 0 (1 zone - 1

either a single long bed machine, or as long bed)
a dual-zone machine. 1 (dual zones)
Dual Laser Probe Sets tool probe in one or both zones of 0 (one) 0
Present dual-zone machines. 1 (both)
1 - 56 Machine Parameters 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Control Power Off Time
Turns the control off after the specified period of activity.
The default setting for Control Power Off Time is 120 minutes.
UPS Software Shutdown Off Time

Sets the number of minutes the system will wait before it shuts down after a power loss
condition has been detected. The default is 1 minute.
Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss

Enables Z-axis retract on power loss. 0 disables the retract feature. 1 enables the Z-axis
retract feature. Default is 0.
This parameter must be used in conjunction with M90/M91. The Z-axis retracts upon
power loss when this parameter is set to 1 and an M90 code (Z-axis Retract Enable) is
inserted at the beginning of the program. The retract can be turned on and off within the
program using M90 (on) and M91 (off).
The Z-axis will not retract if the M90 code is not used in the program
in conjunction with this parameter.
Auto Balance Enable

Auto Balance Enable set to 1 will have the logic controller send an auto balance request to
adjust the balance between the motion card and the servo drives at the start of
calibration and run program. No auto balance request will be sent if the parameter is 0.
The default setting for Auto Balance Enable is 1.
Only a trained technician performing diagnostic tuning of the servo

amplifiers should set the Auto Balance Enable value to zero.
Disable Auto On Chip Removal

The Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter disables the chip conveyor from turning on
automatically in Auto Mode. The range is 0 or 1; 0 is the default. Setting the parameter to
1 will disable the Auto On Chip Removal feature.
Chip Conveyor Parameters

Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable, Chip Removal On Delay Time and
Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters are functional only when
the Chip Removal Forward On/Off F2 softkey (Automatic Run
Mode) is set to On.

Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable
The Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is used with the Chip removal On
Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters to periodically allow the chip
conveyor or auger to remove chips from inside the machine during the part program.
When Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is set to 0, this parameter is disabled. Values
entered into the Chip Removal On Delay Time and Chip Removal Off Delay Time will not
be retained.
When Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is set to 1, use the Chip Removal On Delay Time
and Chip Removal Off Delay Time parameters to regulate operation of the chip conveyor
or auger.
The default setting for Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable is 0 (disable).
Chip Removal On Delay Time

When the Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Removal On
Delay Time parameter defines the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles On to
remove chips from inside the enclosure.
The default setting for Chip Removal On Delay Time is 0 seconds.
Chip Removal Off Delay Time

When the Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable parameter is set to 1, the Chip Removal Off
Delay Time parameter sets the time that the chip conveyor or auger cycles Off. When the
chip conveyor or auger cycles Off, the screen status display is FWD-Delay, not Stopped.
The default setting for Chip Removal Off Delay Time is 0 seconds.
Enable Dual Zones

This parameter enables zones on a dual-zone machine. 0 sets both zones as a single long
bed machine, and 1 sets the zones as separate zones. The default is 1.
Dual Laser Probe Present

The Dual Tool Probe Present parameter sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone
machines. 0 specifies there is one tool probe; 1 specifies there is a probe in each zone.
The default is 0.

CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis 100-2540 1270
X, Y, Z as it moves toward the calibration limit MMPM
switch during a machine calibration
cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.
CAL to LS Velocity Sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis 100-2540 0

A, B, C as it moves toward the calibration limit DPM
switch during a machine calibration
cycle.
See Cal to LS Velocity Parameters.
Disable Tool Picker Turns off the Tool Picker option. 0 (enable) 0
Option 1 (disable)
ATC Disable Disables all automatic tool changer 0 (enable) 0

functions. 1 (disable)
Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC operations are 0 (disable) 0

Manual Mode ATC performed at Safety Position when 1 (enable)
enabled.
Tilt Axis Safety Sets the position for the tilt axis during 0-360 degrees 0
Position an automatic tool change when the
Table Safety Move parameter is set to
Yes for an Automatic Tool Change.
X-Axis Safety Sets the absolute X axis machine Travel Limits 0

Position location to which the table will move (mm)
when the Table Safety Move parameter
is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool
Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety
Position.
Y-Axis Safety Sets the absolute Y axis machine Travel Limits 0

Position location to which the table will move (mm)
when the Table Safety Move parameter
is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool
Change. See X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety
Position.
ATC Z-Axis Move to On HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero 0 (disable) 0
Zero Position position at the end of a tool change. 1 (enable)

Cal to LS Velocity Parameters
The Cal to LS Velocity parameters set the feed rate for each axis as it is moving towards
the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. Only the axes that are
present on the machine need to be set. The units are indicated in parentheses and can be
MMPM (millimeters per minute), IPM (inches per minute), or DPM (degrees per minute).
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 MMPM (50
IPM) for the X, Y, and Z axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the
X, Y, and Z axes is 100 MMPM to 2540 MMPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to LS Velocity is 0 DPM for the A, B, and C
axes. The range for Cal to LS Velocity values for the A, B, and C axes is 100
DPM to 2540 DPM.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1270 mmpm (50
IPM) for X, Y, and Z axes.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm
(39.37 IPM) for A axis on a VTXU machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 2000 (78.74 IPM)
mmpm for B axis on an HMX machine.
• The default setting for Calibrate to Limit Switch Velocity is 1000 mmpm (50
IPM) for C axis on a VTXU machine.
Disable Tool Picker Option

Turns off the Tool Fixture (TPS) option, if it is present on your VM, VMX, or VTXU
machine. Refer to the Tool Fixture (TPS) chapter in the Options manual.
The default setting for Disable Tool Picker Option is 0.
The Disable Tool Picker Option parameter is not functional on HMX machines.
ATC Disable
The ATC Disable parameter allows the user to completely disable all automatic tool
change functions. Setting the ATC Disable parameter to 1 disables the Auto Tool Change
button (for performing tool changes in Manual mode or Tool Setup) and the Auto Tool
Change in Auto mode button (for running programs). With ATC Disable set to 1, all tools
will have to be inserted and removed manually using the Spindle Clamp/Unclamp button
mounted on the head.
When ATC is disabled, the Control assumes that the ATC is in a safe
position to allow normal X, Y, and Z axis movement. Input status for
the ATC at home position will not be checked. Failure to ensure that
the ATC is in a safe position may result in machine damage.
The default setting for ATC Disable is 0.

Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC
When the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC operations parameter is set to 0 for an
ATC command, the Z axis moves to tool change height and the ATC is completed at the
current X and Y axis position.
The default setting for Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC is 0 (disable).
If this parameter is set to 1, then:
1. The Z axis moves at rapid to zero.

2. The X and Y axes move at rapid to the X- and Y-axis safety positions.
3. The Z axis moves to tool change height.
4. The automatic tool change is completed.
5. The Z axis moves to zero.
6. The X and Y axes move at rapid back to the previous X and Y position.
The Move to Safety Position for Manual Mode ATC only applies to
Manual mode. ATC operations in Auto Mode are not affected by this
parameter. To move the table to the safety position during an
automatic tool change in Auto Mode, set the Move to Safe Pos During
TC from Program Parameters in Input.
Axis Safety Position Parameters

Tilt Axis Safety Position
The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter sets the position for the tilt axis on the VTXU
machine during an ATC if either one of the following conditions occurs:
• the Move to Safe Pos During TC parameter is set to Yes (for Auto Run mode).
• the Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC parameter (for Manual or Input
modes) is set to 1.
After the Z retracts before the ATC, the tilt axis moves to the position indicated in
degrees. After the automatic tool change completes, the tilt axis returns to the original
position.
The default setting for Tilt Axis Safety Position is 0.
The Tilt Axis Safety Position parameter is not functional for HMX machines, VM machines,
or VMX machines.
X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position

The X-Axis Safety Position and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters determine the absolute
X-axis and Y-axis machine locations, in millimeters, to which the table will move when the
Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See Program
Parameters for more information.During an automatic tool change with the Table Safety
Move set to Yes:
1. The Z-axis will retract to maximum position.

2. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the X-Axis Safety Position
and the Y-Axis Safety Position, respectively.
3. The automatic tool change will complete.
4. The X-axis and Y-axis will move at rapid feedrate to the previous X-axis and Y-
axis positions before the move to the X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Positions.
The X-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or maximum travel limits
for the X-axis. The Y-Axis Safety Position value must not exceed the minimum or
maximum travel limits for the Y-axis. If the Table Safety Move parameter is set to No,
these parameters are not used, and steps 1, 2, and 4 above are not executed for an
automatic tool change.
The default setting for X-Axis Safety Position is 0.000 mm. The default setting for Y-Axis
Safety Position is 0.000 mm.
The X-Axis and Y-Axis Safety Position parameters are not functional for HMX machines.
ATC Z-Axis Parameter

ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position
This parameter is functional only on an HMX machine. The ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero
Position parameter moves the Z-axis to the zero (0) position at the end of either an Auto
or Manual tool change.
ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position set to 0 disables the parameter. ATC Z-Axis Move to
Zero Position set to 1 enables the parameter.
The default setting for ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position is 0.
ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position parameter is not functional for VTXU, VM, or VMX
machines.

Machine Pause - Sets the time the program pauses 0-60 seconds 0
Flood Coolant when the primary coolant is enabled.
Machine Pause - Sets the time the program pauses 0-60 seconds 0
Secondary Coolant when the secondary coolant is
enabled.
Aux Coolant Console Identifies which auxiliary output the 0-12 0 (disabled)
Button console Aux Coolant button controls.
Pulsating or Delay Sets the Washdown Coolant pump 0 (continuous) 0 or 1

Washdown Enable run cycle; used in conjunction with 1 (pulsating) (depends on
other washdown coolant parameters. machine)
2 (delay)
Alt Washdown Dwell Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 500 or 1000
right side of the machine enclosure on (.01 sec) (depends on
certain machines. Used in conjunction machine)
with other washdown coolant
parameters.
Alt Dwell Lt Side Controls washdown coolant flow on the 0-32767 (.01 200
left side of the machine enclosure on sec)
certain machines. Used in conjunction
with other washdown coolant
parameters.
Alt Washdown Off Sets the time the washdown coolant 0-32767 (.01 0 or 200
Time flow cycle is paused, on certain sec) (depends on
machines. machine)
Washdown On Delay Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0

Timer pump is on; used with Washdown Off seconds
Delay Timer.
Washdown Off Defines the time the washdown coolant 0-9999 0

Delay Timer pump is off; used with Washdown On seconds
Delay Timer.

Coolant Parameters
The coolant parameters are used to control coolant flow to the spindle (known as flood
coolant), coolant flow in the machine enclosure (known as washdown coolant), or to turn
the washdown coolant pump on or off. The Washdown Coolant Pump must be On for
Right and Left side operation. Some coolant parameters may not be functional on your
machine. For examples of how to use washdown coolant parameters on your Hurco
machine, see Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 - 75.
Washdown coolant flow for VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, and VMX50 machines is continuous
to both sides of the enclosure. The amount of washdown coolant used during machining
operations is controlled by cycling the washdown coolant pump.
The VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, and VMX84 machines are equipped with a butterfly
solenoid that alternates washdown coolant flow between the right and left sides of the
machine enclosure.
This is the washdown coolant flow cycle for VMX64 and VMX84 machines:
1. Coolant flows on right side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Washdown

Dwell).
2. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).
3. Coolant flows on left side of machine enclosure (defined in Alt Dwell Lt Side).
4. Pause time of no coolant flow (defined in Alt Washdown Off Time).
The amount of washdown coolant used during machining operations for VMX60,
VMX6030, VMX64, and VMX84 machines is controlled by the time washdown coolant
flows/pauses to each side of the machine enclosure, and/or by cycling the washdown
coolant pump.
VMX64 and VMX84 machines are equipped with a separate Factory-configured timer to
control the Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off cycles.
Machine Pause - Flood Coolant

Machine Pause - Flood Coolant pauses the running part program for the indicated time
(0-60 seconds) whenever the program enables the primary flood coolant.
The default is 0 seconds.
Both Flood and Secondary Coolant pause parameters can be set to

the same pause time or they may be set separately.
Machine Pause - Secondary Coolant

Machine Pause - Secondary Coolant pauses the running part program for the indicated
time (0-60 seconds) whenever the program enables the secondary (CTS) coolant.
The default is 0 seconds.
Both Flood and Secondary Coolant pause parameters can be set to

the same pause time or they may be set separately.

Aux Coolant Console Button
Identifies which auxiliary output the console Aux Coolant button controls. 0 is disabled.
1-12 identify the auxiliary output.
M52-M55 and M142-M149 are used in the program to enable the auxiliary equipment or
machine function that the Aux Coolant Console button controls.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable

This parameter is used with other washdown coolant features to regulate washdown
coolant flow for continuous clearing of chips from the machine enclosure.
Parameter operation is determined by machine type.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—use this parameter to manage

washdown coolant flow:
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 0, washdown coolant will
continuously flow on the right and left sides of the machine enclosure.
Values in the Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side, or Alt Washdown Off
Time will have no effect on washdown coolant operation.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, do not use this setting
for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance section of the
Maintenance and Safety Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, the washdown coolant
pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown Delay On Timer and
Washdown Delay Off Timer.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 0.
• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—use this parameter to alternate

washdown coolant flow on the machine enclosure:
for a VMX64 or VMX84 machine. If unexpected performance occurs, refer
to the Machine Maintenance section of the Maintenance and Safety
Manual.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1, washdown coolant flow
will cycle for the times defined in Alt Washdown Dwell, Alt Dwell Lt Side
and Alt Washdown Off Time.
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable parameter = 2, the washdown
coolant pump will cycle for the times defined in Washdown On Delay
Timer and Washdown Off Delay Timer, whether or not washdown coolant
flow is alternating in the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is 1.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.

Alt Washdown Dwell
This parameter controls the time washdown coolant flows on the right side of the
machine enclosure. Alt Washdown Dwell is used with Alt Washdown Off Time to define
the washdown coolant flow cycle on the right side of the machine enclosure. The value for
Alt Washdown Dwell in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5 sec.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Dwell.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50

for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine. If unexpected
• When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 2, Alt Washdown Dwell is
not functional; entering a value in Alt Washdown Dwell will have no effect
on washdown coolant flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or
VMX60 machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds), but set
this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If unexpected
• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable =
1 or 2, define the time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the
machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 500 (5 seconds).
• VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable = 1 or 2, define the

time for washdown coolant to flow on the right side of the machine enclosure.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 1000 (10 seconds).
Alternating Washdown Dwell is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.
Alt Dwell Lt Side

On VMX60, VMX64, and VMX84 machines, this parameter controls the time washdown
coolant flows on the left side of the machine enclosure. Alt Dwell Lt Side is used with Alt
Washdown Off Time to cycle washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine
enclosure. The value for Alt Dwell Lt Side is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500
equates to 5 sec.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Dwell Lt Side.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—Alt Dwell Lt Side is not functional;

entering a value in Alt Dwell Lt Side will not affect washdown coolant flow for
a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Dwell is 200 (2 seconds), but you
should set this parameter to 0 to avoid unexpected performance. If
unexpected performance occurs, refer to the Machine Maintenance
section of the Maintenance and Safety Manual.

• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—define the time for washdown coolant
to flow on the left side of the machine enclosure.
• Alt Dwell Lt Side will only function if the Alt Washdown Dwell is greater
than 0. If the value of Alt Washdown Dwell is 0, the machine will ignore
Alt Dwell Lt Side and washdown coolant will not flow on either side of the
machine enclosure.
• If Alt Dwell Lt Side = 0 and Alt Washdown Dwell is greater than 0,
washdown coolant will flow to the left side of the enclosure for the time
defined in Alt Washdown Dwell.
• The default setting for Alt Dwell Lt Side is 200 (2 seconds).
Alternating Dwell Left Side is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.
Alt Washdown Off Time

On VMX64 and VMX84 machines, this parameter defines the pause time in the washdown
coolant flow cycle. The value is in 0.01 sec increments, so a value of 500 equates to 5
sec.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 1 or 2 to use Alt Washdown Off Time.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—Alt Washdown Off Time is not functional;

entering a value in Alt Washdown Off Time will not affect washdown coolant
flow for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50 or VMX60 machine.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 0; this parameter is not
functional for a VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, or VMX60 machine.
• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—When Pulsating or Delay Washdown
Enable = 1 or 2, washdown coolant flow will pause for the time indicated in
the Alt Washdown Off Time after coolant flow on each side of the enclosure.
• If Alt Washdown Off Time is set to 0, the washdown off-time is 0.7 sec.
• The default setting for Alt Washdown Off Time is 200 (2 seconds).
Alternating Washdown Off Time is not functional for HMX, VM, and VTXU machines.
Washdown On Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The default setting
for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use Washdown On Delay Timer.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—washdown coolant flow will be

continuous to both sides of the machine enclosure during the time the
washdown coolant pump is On.
• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—the washdown coolant pump is On for
the time defined, whether or not washdown coolant flow is alternating in the
machine enclosure. Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on
page 1 - 75 shows an example where the washdown coolant pump cycles on
and off while washdown coolant flow is alternating on the machine enclosure.

It is recommended that you follow this formula:
Washdown On Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown Off

Delay Timer + ALT Dwell Left Side + Washdown Off Delay Timer
See Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 -

75.
• The default setting for Washdown On Delay Timer is 0 seconds.
This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is On, and is
used with the Washdown Off Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. Washdown On Delay
Timer is not functional for VM machines.
Washdown Off Delay Timer

This parameter defines the time (in seconds) the washdown coolant pump is Off, and is
used with the Washdown On Delay Timer to manage coolant usage. The functionality of
this feature is dependent upon machine type. Washdown Off Delay Timer is not functional
for VM machines.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable must be set to 2 to use this parameter.
• VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50—defines the time the washdown coolant

pump is Off.
• VMX60, VMX6030, VMX64, VMX84—defines the time the washdown
coolant pump is Off, whether or not coolant flow is alternating in the machine
enclosure.
It is recommended that you follow this formula:
Washdown Off Delay Timer = Alt Washdown Dwell + Washdown On

Delay Timer + Alt Dwell Left Side + Washdown On Delay Timer
See Table 1–1.Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples, on page 1 -

75.
Washdown Off Delay Timer should be calculated using even multiples

of its value, increasing it by that value.
For example, if the calculated value is 30, then you can increase it to
60, 90, etc.
• The default setting for Washdown Off Delay Timer is 0 seconds.

Examples for Coolant Parameters Use
VMX24, VMX30, VMX42, VMX50, and VMX60
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
247 228 248 249 297 298 Result
0 0 0 0 0 0 Continuous washdown coolant flow.
1. Washdown coolant pump on for 20 sec.
2 0 0 0 20 45 2. Pump off for 45 sec.
3. Cycle repeats.
VMX64, VMX84
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Parameters)
247 228 248 249 297 298 Result
1. Right side washdown coolant for 8 sec.
2. No coolant for 0.7 sec.
1 800 600 0 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
1 800 600 250 0 0 3. Left side washdown coolant for 6 sec.
5. Cycle repeats.
2. No coolant for 5 sec.
3. Left side washdown coolant for 10 sec.
4. No coolant for 5 sec.
2 1000 1000 500 30 60
5. Washdown coolant pump on for 30 sec during
right & left cycles.
6. Pump off for 60 sec.
7. Cycle repeats.
Key to N95 Code Column Headings for Tables Above

Integrator Configuration Definition
Parameter
N95:247 Pulsating or Delay WD Enable
N95:228 Alt WD Dwell
N95:248 Alt Dwell Lt Side
N95:249 Alt WD Off Time
N95:297 WD On Delay Timer
N95:298 WD Off Delay Timer
Table 1–1. Washdown Coolant Parameter Examples

Warm-Up Cycle Time Sets the time for each step of the warm- 60-600 120
Per Pass up cycle.
Warm-Up Starting Sets the spindle speed for the initial step 0-25% 1000
Speed of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM
Warm-Up Speed Sets spindle speed increments for each 0-25% 2000
Steps step of the warm-up cycle. Max RPM
Warm-Up Max Sets the spindle speed for the final step 0-Max RPM Machine’s
Spindle Speed of the warm-up cycle. maximum
spindle RPM
Warm-Up Axis Feed Sets the axis feed rate for each step of 0-Max 2920
Rate the warm-up cycle. Rapid
Axis Feedrate Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum 0-99% 10%
Override Min (%) value.
Axis Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 101-200 150

Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.
Rapid Feedrate Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override 0-200% 10%

Override Min (%) Minimum value.
Rapid Feedrate Not accessible by the user. Contact a 0-200 100

Override Max (%) Hurco Certified Service representative for
assistance.
Rotary Position Out Specifies how to process “Out of position” 0 (ignore) 0

of Tol Proc conditions for the axes. 1 (warn)
2 (error)

Warm Up Parameters
These parameters allow the operator to configure the machine’s daily warm-up cycle.
• Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass

• Warm-up Starting Speed
• Warm-up Speed Steps
• Warm-up Max Spindle Speed
• Warm-up Axis Feed Rate
When the warm-up cycle is initiated:
• Spindle speeds up to the Warm-up Starting Speed RPM for the time indicated
in the Warm-up Cycle Time per Pass field.
• X and Y axes move diagonally from corner to corner at the Warm-up Axis
Feed Rate.
• The machine then steps through the warm-up cycle until the Warm-up Max
Spindle Speed is reached. The length of each step is defined by the Warm-Up
Cycle Time per Pass. During each step of the cycle, the spindle speed will
increase to the Warm-up Speed Steps RPM and the axes will run at the
Warm-up Axis Feed Rate.
Altering the default daily warm-up parameters may lead to

inadequate machine warm up that can negatively impact spindle
operations and may void the Hurco warranty.
Refer to your machine’s Maintenance and Safety manual for more

information about warm-up cycles.
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or equal to
the maximum value.
Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%)

Sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. This value cannot be greater than or
equal to the maximum value.
Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc

Specifies how to process “Out of position” conditions for the axes:
• 0 = ignore
• 1 = post a warning
• 2 = generate an error condition
The default is 0.

Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6
Aux Output 1-12 Enables a confirmation signal for 0 (disable 0

Confirmation Enable completion of each Auxiliary M-code 1 (enable)
Output.
Disable Aux Out 1-12 Disables the specified Auxiliary M-code 0 (enable) 0
During Interrupt Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected 1 (disable)
during Auto Run mode.
Aux Output Parameters

Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable
Aux Output Confirmation Enable set to 1 enables a confirmation signal for completion of
each Auxiliary M-code Output. The program pauses until the confirmation signal is
detected. A setting of 0 will not require a confirmation signal and will not pause the
program during the Auxiliary M-code Output.
The default setting for each Auxiliary Output Confirmation Enable is 0.
Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt

When set to 1, the parameter Disable Aux Output During Interrupt disables the specified
Auxiliary M-code Output when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. Upon
return to Auto Run mode, the Auxiliary M-code Output will automatically be re-enabled.
However, if another mode is selected, then the Auxiliary M-code Output will remain
disabled until activated again in Auto Run mode.
A setting of 0 will leave the Auxiliary M-code Output enabled when an Interrupt cycle is
selected during Auto Run mode. It will remain enabled after exit from Interrupt cycle,
even when accessing a mode other than Auto Run.
The default setting for Disable Aux Out During Interrupt is 0 (enable).

Estimated Run Time Parameters
Use the Estimated Run Time Parameters to make adjustments to certain machine
operations in order to generate a more accurate estimated program run time.
The Compute Estimated Run Time function on the Auto screen provides an estimate of
the time it takes to run the current part program. Times entered on the Estimated Run
Time Parameters screens are used in the calculation of the overall program run time
estimate.
Select the Estimated Run Time softkey from the Machine Parameters screens to view and
enter Estimated Run Time Parameters. The values are saved upon exit.
Figure 1–4. Estimated Run Time Parameters for a horizontal milling machine
The available parameters are dependent on machine type.
See Auto Mode, on page 1 - 160 for information about the Compute
Estimated Run Time softkey.

PROGRAMMING BASICS
The following sections explain basic programming information for Conversational and NC
programming, such as required setup, program checking, editing, and running of the
program.
WinMax Interface Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 82

Input Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 90
Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 91
Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 96
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 99
Work Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 99
Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 101
Tool Calibration Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 102
Tool Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106
Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 109
Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116
Part Program Tool Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116
Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 117
Tool Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 119
Tool Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 121
Tool and Material Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 123
Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 124
Import / Export Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 127
Copy and Change Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 130
Review Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 132
Manual Safety Override Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 134
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 137
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Programming Basics 1-75

WinMax Interface Environment
There are three ways to navigate and enter data for programming:
• Touchscreen—use the stylus or other pointing device to select softkeys and

drop-down lists for data entry and programming.
• Keyboard—use the function (F1-F12) keys and other keyboard shortcuts for
navigation and to call up screens.
• Ultimax classic edit mode—use the console keys; for example, use the
arrow keys for navigation and the enter key to accept data typed into a field.
See Edit Mode below for more information.
Edit Mode
Edit Mode is set in Utilities. Refer to User Interface Settings, on page 1 - 46. WinMax has
two edit modes:
• Ultimax Classic (default)—in this mode the console arrow keys are used to
move between blocks and segments, and the enter key is used to accept data
after it is typed into a field.
• Windows Dialog—in this mode the console arrow keys do not navigate
through fields and the enter key is not required to accept data typed into a
field.
If you want to... Ultimax Classic Windows Dialog
Enter data into a field Enter key to accept data Enter key to accept data
OR
Down (or Up) arrow to
accept data
Advance to next block Right/Left arrows Next Block/Previous Block

OR softkeys
Next Block/Previous Block OR
softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key
Advance to next segment Right/Left arrows Next segment/hole softkeys

or operation OR OR
Next segment/hole softkeys Page Up or Page Down key
OR
Page Up or Page Down key
Navigate to next or Left or right arrow keys Page Up or Page Down keys
previous tool in Tool Setup
The right and left arrows will change the selection in fields with drop-
down lists (such as Tool Type in Tool Setup) in either Ultimax Classic
or Windows Dialog mode.
1 - 76 Programming Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Full Precision Editing
Numbers with decimals are rounded to the decimal display limit (three digits for metric
and four digits for imperial) when displayed in a field. Full Precision Editing allows you to
view the full number (up to 12 digits after the decimal) and/or to edit it to a more precise
point. With the cursor in a numeric decimal field, press F + decimal (.) on a machine, or
Ctrl + decimal (.) on the desktop to open a pop-up box containing the number.
Figure 1–5. Full Precision Editing Pop-up Box
Edit the number and select OK to save the changes. To close the pop-up box without
saving changes, select Cancel.
Do not use Full Precision Editing to change numbers that are

automatically calculated by WinMax. These numbers are calculated
to their 12-digit maximum accuracy and changing them could result
in changes to other automatic calculations in the program.
Softkeys
Softkeys appear as buttons on the screen; their default location is the right side of the
screen, but they can also be positioned on the left by changing the setting in User
Preferences (see Utilities, on page 1 - 43 for more information). Select a softkey using
one of these methods:
• On the screen, select the softkey.

• On the console, simultaneously press the F key and the number that
corresponds to the softkey (for example, F + 1 will select the F1 softkey).
For dual-console machines, ALT + the softkey number will select softkeys on
the graphics screen.
• On the keyboard (if using), press the corresponding function key (F1, F2, F3,
etc).

Drop-down Lists
Many fields contain a choice of items that are viewed by pulling down a list:
Touch the small

arrow to view a
drop-down list; use
arrow keys to
highlight choice
and Enter console
button to select
Figure 1–6. Example of a drop-down list
Expand and Collapse Files

In the Program Manager, files can be expanded or collapsed as follows:
Touch the “+” to expand

and view the files and
folders in a folder
Touch the “-” to collapse

(close) and hide the
files and folders in a
folder
Figure 1–7. Example of Expand and Collapse Files

Sorting and Resizing Columns
On screens that contain columns, data in a column can be sorted ascending to
descending or descending to ascending by selecting the column heading. Columns can be
resized by dragging the column divider in the header.
Select and drag to resize column

Select to sort column
Figure 1–8. Example of Sorting and Resizing Columns
Pop-ups
During machine operation and programming, pop-up boxes may be displayed to convey
prompts or status messages. These pop-up boxes can be closed by selecting the
appropriate button (i.e., YES or NO or OK). Some pop-up boxes may only provide
informational messages and will be displayed for a few seconds before they automatically
close.
Figure 1–9. Pop-up message example
Certain pop-ups, such as the calculator and virtual keyboard, can be minimized by
selecting the “—” in the upper right corner. These pop-ups will remain open but are
“hidden” in the taskbar, and can be viewed again by touching the taskbar button. These
pop-ups can also be closed by touching the “X” in the upper right corner:
Minimize
Close
Figure 1–10. Pop-up showing minimize and close icons

Status Bar
The Status Bar appears at the bottom of every WinMax screen. It displays the program
name of the current active part program, a calculator icon, the current unit of measure
(inch or mm), the keyboard icon, and the current time. When viewed on a single screen
console, all icons appear in the same status bar; when viewed on a dual-screen console,
the program name and calculator icon appear on the left screen status bar, and the unit
of measure, keyboard icon and time appear on the right screen status bar.
• To use the calculator function, touch the calculator icon.

• To use the on-screen keyboard, touch the keyboard icon.
• To change the unit of measure, touch the unit of measure abbreviation.
WinMax Version
Softkeys
Prompts
Error/Status area
Status Bar
Figure 1–11. Status Bar and other areas
Calculator
Select the calculator icon in the Status Bar to open the calculator. The calculator appears
on screen and is operated using the stylus to select the calculator keys on screen.
Figure 1–12. Calculator pop-up
When the calculator is minimized (with “—” in the upper right), the last calculation is
retained, but when it is closed (with “X” in the upper right), the last calculation is erased.

Pop-up Keyboard
Enter part program names using the on-screen, pop-up keyboard. The pop-up keyboard
is available for entering text, such as naming a part program.
Figure 1–13. Pop-up Keyboard
1. Either select the keyboard icon located in the screen’s status bar or
simultaneously press the Alt and Input keys on the console to activate the
keyboard.
2. Use a pointing device such as the stylus to select characters from the
keyboard.
3. Press the Enter key to update a field and advance the cursor after the
characters are selected in the text field (e.g., after creating a program name).
4. Select the X located in the lower left corner of the text entry window to close
the keyboard.

On-screen Help
On-screen Help provides information about using WinMax. The Help is context-sensitive
to the screen level. Press the console Help button to display the Help topic for the current
screen. The following list describes Help functions:
• Buttons in the upper left-hand corner of the Help screen are used to move
through Help topics and print screens.
• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.
• Use the Back button to return to the previous Help screen.
• Use the Print button to print the current displayed Help topic, if a printer
is attached and configured. See Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF
format, on page 1 - 89 for more information about printing.
• Use the arrow buttons to move between pages within a Help topic and to
move through topics.
• Use the Contents tab for a list of information sorted by subject:
1. Select the “+” to expand the topic and view sub-topics.
2. Select the topic to display it.
• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:
1. Quickly scroll to an index topic by typing the topic in the box at the top of
the index.
2. Select a topic and the Display button to view the topic.
• Use the Search tab to search the Help for a word or phrase:
1. Type the search word(s) into the text box at the top of the pane.
2. Select the List Topics button. A list of topics that contain the search
word(s) is displayed.
3. Select a topic and the Display button to view that topic.
• Use the Favorites tab to save Help topics for quick access:
1. Select the Add button at the bottom of the pane to add the current topic.
2. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Display button to view
it.
3. Select a topic from the Favorites list, and select the Remove button to
remove it from the list.

Accessing the WinMax Help in PDF format
The WinMax On-screen Help is also provided in PDF format for easy printing. The
information contained in the PDF files is identical to the on-screen Help. The PDF files
may be copied to a floppy disk or USB memory device to be transferred to a PC for
viewing or printing. Here are the steps to access the PDF files:
1. From the Input screen, select the PROGRAM MANAGER F8 softkey.

2. Select the DISK OPERATIONS F7 softkey.
3. In the left-hand pane, navigate through the folders:
• For WinMax Mill on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\Winmax Mill\hlp
• For WinMax Desktop on a PC, the path is C:\Program Files\Winmax
Mill\hlp
The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.
The SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in User Interface Settings must be
set to YES (default is NO) in order to see the PDF files in the
directory. Access the SHOW ALL FILE TYPES field in Auxiliary Mode,
Utilities/ User Preferences/ User Interface Settings.
4. Highlight the PDF file(s) in the right-hand pane, and select the COPY F2
softkey.
5. Ensure that your media is loaded (either a floppy disk in the disk drive or a
USB memory device in the USB port), and navigate to the proper location in
the left-hand pane of the DISK OPERATIONS screen (either the floppy drive A:
or the USB port E:). Highlight the desired location.
6. Place the cursor in the right-hand pane and select the PASTE F3 softkey to
paste the PDF file(s) to the desired location.
7. You may now remove your media and load the PDF file(s) onto a PC for
viewing and printing.

Input Mode
Input mode is used for part and tool setup, part programming, setting parameters, and
other information entry. Press the Input key on the console to access the Input screen.
The following softkeys appear on the Input screen:
• Part Setup—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline,
offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Tool Review—access the Tool Review screen for a summary listing of all
tools used in active program (see Part Program Tool Review, on page 1 - 116
for more information).
• Part Programming—access and create data blocks of a part program. The
current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used.
Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor is
displayed for NC programs.
• Program Parameters—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Import / Export Functions—import parts of a previously saved Conversational
program or NC state, export NC state to file, or import/export the tool library.
• Copy and Change Blocks—make changes to several blocks at one time and/or
copy and change blocks within the active program.
• Erase Functions—erase sections of the current program.
• Program Manager—access and manage other part programs.
Erase Functions
Erase functions erases (deletes) programs or components (part setup, tool setup, and
program parameters):
• Erase Part Setup—resets Part Setup to the default values.

• Erase Tool Setup—deletes tools in Manual Tools, Auto Tools, and spindle.
The Erase Tool Setup softkey deletes ALL tools from the control, and
cannot be undone.
• Reset Program Parameters—resets Program Parameters to the default

values.
• Erase Program—deletes the part program data blocks but retains the
program name.
• Unload Program—removes program from the Program Manager, including
the filename. This does the same function as CLOSE PROGRAM in the
Program Manager.

Part Setup
Part Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 94
Part Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 94
Rotary Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 96
Stock Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 101
Part setup establishes the locations of part zero in X, Y, and Z relative to the machine's
absolute zero. Part Zero may be located anywhere on the fixturing or the part. During
machine calibration, each axis moves to its + or - travel limits. Machine zero, identified
during machine calibration, is the location to which each axis moves to determine a fixed
point where the X, Y, and Z axes become tangent. This value does not change after
calibration.
1. Part Zero
2. Workpiece
3. Machine Zero
4. X Axis
5. Y Axis
Figure 1–1. Part Zero Relative to Machine Zero Viewed Looking Down at Table
Program the axes to move within the coordinate system as shown below:
-X Table moves to the left
+X Table moves to the right
-Y Table moved toward the operator
+Y Table moves away from
-Z Spindle moved down into the part
+Z Spindle moved up away from part
Figure 1–2. Axis Motion

1. Table
2. Part (Workpiece)
3. Machine Absolute - Z Axis
4. Tool Zero Calibration Plane
Figure 1–3. Part Zero in Z (Tool calibration Plane)
Part Setup Coordinate Systems

Machine Coordinate System
The Machine Coordinate System is fixed to the machine frame and does not move when
the machine axes move. This coordinate system is located at the spindle nose center
when all machine axes are at their zero positions.
Unrotated Coordinate System

The Unrotated Part Coordinate System is present on a 4-axis or 5-axis machine and is
located at the Workpiece Coordinate system when all the machine’s axes are at their Part
Setup Zero locations. This coordinate system moves with the machine’s linear axes, but
does not rotate with the rotary axes. The Unrotated Coordinate system is generally used
only by NC Post Processors that do not use Tool Center Point Management.
Workpiece Coordinate System

The Workpiece Coordinate System is fixed to the physical workpiece fixtured to the table;
it moves and rotates when the machine axes move.The coordinate system is fixed to the
part fixtured on the machining center’s table. The Workpiece Coordinate System is
typically set in the user’s CAD/CAM system or on the part drawing used for programming
the tool paths.

The Machine Coordinate, Workpiece Coordinate, and Unrotated Coordinate systems are
shown in the figure below:
1. Machine
Coordinate System
2. Unrotated Part
Coordinate System
3. Workpiece
Coordinate System
Figure 1–4. Part Setup Coordinate Systems

Part Setup Fields
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Setup fields:
A Centerline X / Y / Z Offset Z Part Zero Y TIS / Tool in Spindle
B Centerline X / Y / Z Part Part Zero Z X/Y Skew (DEG)
C Centerline X / Y / Z Part Zero A Part Zero Z Shift Zone
Disable Centerlines Part Zero B Probe Z Z Table Offset
Feed Part Zero C Safety Work Region
Machine Part Zero X Spindle
The fields on the Part Setup screen vary depending on machine

configuration and tool calibration mode.
Use the Safety Work Region fields on the Part Setup screen to
enter values to define the safety region. Type the value in the field,
or jog each axis to the desired safety region, and press the Store
Position button on the jog unit.
Out of range entries in the Safety Work Region appear in red. See
Machine Specifications for ranges.
Always enter the Z(-) parameter (Z Bottom) to prevent the tool from
drilling through the part and into the table.
Use the Z(+) field (Z Top) to define the clearance above the part and
fixture.
Use the Z(+) field with a Position block. The Z Top value reduces
rapid Z motion for Position blocks. The spindle retracts to the Z Top
value above the tool zero calibration for Position blocks.
Part Setup Softkeys

Part Setup contains these softkeys:
• Work Offsets—Accesses the work coordinates G54-G59 and a set of shift

values for NC programs. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for
multiple parts fixtured to the table and milled consecutively using the same
program.
• Tool Setup—Accesses Tool Setup screen to enter the descriptions of tools that
will be used in the part program.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how the
part will be cut. See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming
manual for more information.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify
data common to all program data blocks.
• Part Probing—Accesses the Probing parameters screen (available only with

the Probing option). See Part Probing Option.
• Store Machine Position—Sets the current axis position as a Part Zero
location. The cursor location determines which axis (X or Y) will be set.
These are the softkeys on the second Part Setup screen, accessed with the More 
softkey:
• Stock Geometry—Accesses fields to specify the dimensions of the stock

material so it displays properly in graphics.
• Orient Spindle—Allows the spindle to be positioned for tool insertion or
removal.

Rotary Part Setup
Ensure that the B-axis angle is at zero degree when measuring Z Table Offset, Offset Z,
and Zero Calibration fields for 5-axis machining.
For conversational programs, B-axis Part Setup Offset must be zero degree.
1. Workpiece Coordinate System
2. Zero Calibration (positive value)
3. Offset Z (positive value)
4. Z Table Offset (positive value)
Rotary Part Setup for Zero Calibration mode

See Tool Calibration Modes, on page 1 - 102 for more information about tool calibration.
In addition to standard Part Setup fields, Part Setup for rotary programming in Zero
Calibration mode includes part zero for the rotary axis and the rotary centerline fields.
Manually type the values directly into the Part Setup fields, or use the
jog unit to set the values. Follow these steps to use the jog unit to enter
the Part Setup values:
1. Use the jog unit to move the appropriate axis until it is in the
position that you want to define as part zero.
2. Select the Store Machine Position softkey or the Store Posi-
tion button on the jog unit.
Zero Calibration Rotary Centerline Calculation

Hurco recommends automatically calculating the rotary centerline. Use the following
steps:
1. Enter Part Zero X and Part Zero Y field values, either manually or by using the
jog unit to store the machine position.

2. Place the cursor in the Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, or Offset Z field to make the
Calculate Rotary Offsets softkey available.
3. Select the Calculate Rotary Offsets softkey. The machine automatically
calculates the values for the rotary centerline fields.
1. Center of cylindrical part and center of

rotary table
2. Part Zero
3. A Centerline Y
4. A Centerline Z
Figure 1–5. Rotary Centerline

1. Part Zero
2. X Center
3. Y Center
4. Rotary Centerline
5. Rotary Centerline
6. Rotary Table
Figure 1–6. Rotary Centerline
When the part is fixtured to the center of the rotary-axis table, the
rotary centerline is the Y-Z center point of the part.

Part Fixturing and Tool Loading
Before entering data into the part and tool setup screens for a part program, first fixture
the work piece to the table and load a tool into the spindle.
In order to determine the starting point (part zero) in the part, first fixture the work piece
(raw material or stock) to the machine tool table. This process, called fixturing, can be
accomplished using a variety of clamping devices, such as vises and toe clamps. Select
the fixturing device that will hold the work piece securely without getting in the way of
the cutting tool while the part is being made.
You may want to insert a tool in the spindle to use as an edge finder when identifying part
zero. Press the Manual button in the Machine Mode grouping to display the Manual
screen. Use the Tool in Spindle field and softkey to enter the tool number for the edge
finder tool.
Insert this tool as described in Loading a Tool into the Spindle, on page 1 - 23. The tool
will need to be calibrated as described in Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106.
Work Offsets
The Work Offsets softkey displays up to six work coordinates (G54-G59) and a set of
shift offset values. These are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to
the table and milled consecutively using the same program.
The X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offset values can be entered for G54 to G59
codes. The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part
defined on the Part Setup screen. When the G54 coordinates are changed on this screen,
the part setup is also changed.
These work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program. They are not
saved to a disk file and need to be re-entered.
The shift offset coordinates, which follow the six work coordinates on the screen, move all
of the part zero coordinates as a group. This incremental value is useful when you place
part fixtures on the table in a different location and want to shift all of the work offsets to
the newly fixtured location. The G54-G59 offset values do not change on the screen when
shift offset values are entered.

For dual-zone machines, specify the zone for each offset:
Set zone for each

work offset
Figure 1–7. Work Offsets on a dual-zone machine
Values for the Zone field are:
• 0—zone undefined (the active zone when only one is in use)

• 1—Zone 1
• 2—Zone 2
Auxiliary Work Offsets

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available on the
AUX WORK OFFSETS screen. These are accessed with the Aux Work Offsets F6 softkey
on the WORK OFFSETS screen.
To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93. For example,
to change to auxiliary work offset 46 you would call G54.1 P46 in your NC program.
To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary
work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46
X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5
Following is a sample NC program that uses Auxiliary Work Offsets:
%
G90G80
T1M6F100
G10 L20 P1 X1 Y1 Z.-1
G10 L20 P93 X10 Y10 Z-.1
G54.1 P1 (change work part setup to 1)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.

Y1.
X0.
Y0.
G54.1 P93 (change work part setup to 93)
G1X0.Y0.Z0.
X1.
Y1.
X0.
Y0.
M02
Stock Geometry
Stock Geometry allows you to specify the dimensions of the stock material so it displays
properly in graphics (when Stock Outline field is enabled in Graphics Settings).
For dual-zone machines, choose Zone 1 or Zone 2 tab to specify stock geometry settings.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Stock Geometry fields:
Apply Border To Top Manual Stock Sizing Y Length
Border Size Radius Y Ref Position
Direction Stock Type Z Length
Length X Length Z Ref Position
Manual Border Sizing X Ref Position Zero Ref

Tool Calibration Modes
Tool measurement and Part Setup Z measurements can be set with one of two modes:
Zero Calibration or Absolute Tool Length. The mode is selected in Utilities/User
Preferences/Tool Utilities and Settings. See Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49.
If a program’s tools were calibrated using one mode, and that

program is loaded into a control that is set to the other mode, a
message is displayed that the program’s tool calibrations cannot be
used. The program data is loaded, but the tool calibration data is
not; tool calibration fields are set to zero.
Absolute Tool Length mode

With the Absolute Tool Length method, the absolute length of the tool from the spindle
nose to the tip of the tool is stored in Tool Setup. Each tool used in a program should be
calibrated to the same gauge device set on table top. To use Absolute Tool Length Mode:
1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
4. Part Zero is stored separately in the Part Zero Z field in Part Setup and is the
distance from Machine Zero to the Z0 of the workpiece:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Part Zero Z field, use calibrated tool to touch off Z0 of the workpiece
and select the Store Machine Position softkey or button on the jog unit.

Setup of Gauge Device
To use Absolute Tool Length mode, you must define the Z location for the table top and
the touch off device(s). This needs to be done only once unless the touch off device
changes. Access the Tool Measurement screen with the Tool Measurement Settings
softkey on the 2nd set of Tool Setup softkeys (use the More softkey):
Figure 1–8. Tool Measurement screen
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Measurement fields:
Device
Height
Notes
Touch-Off Device
Z Location
Z Reference
To set the Z Reference position

1. Advance to Z Reference field.
2. Place a gauge of known length on table top.
3. Jog Z-axis down and carefully touch spindle nose to top of gauge block.
4. Select Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button on
remote jog unit.
The Part Kinematics Z Reference value from Rotary Axes Parameters
may also be used as the Z Reference value by selecting the Set to
Part Kinematics Ref softkey.
5. Subtract the length of the gauge block from the value stored in Z Reference

field.
With Z Reference field highlighted, you can type in length of the
gauge block followed by enter. For example, if Z Reference measures
-562.259, using a 200 length gauge, type “200-” and enter to set Z
Reference to -762.259.
Once Z Reference is set it does not have to be changed or set again,

even if new devices are used. This field and the calculated Z Location
fields should not be edited.
To set up a gauge device

1. In the Touch-Off Device field, select the device number to be used when
measuring tool length. Up to six different devices can be set, but only the one
currently selected in the Touch-Off Device field is active when setting tool
length.
2. Advance to the row number that corresponds to the touch-off device number.
3. In the Device column, select gauge.
4. In the Height column, enter the height of the gauge.
Z Location field will be automatically calculated by adding the height
to the Z Reference value. Do not edit Z Location column.
5. Multiple gauges can be set up by specifying height in the appropriate row (1-
6). However, the active device for measuring tool length is the one specified in
the Touch-Off Device field.
All values set in Tool Measurement Settings are retained in the
control and are applicable to all programs. They are not program
specific.
To set up a probe device

1. Follow the steps to set up a single gauge device (for example, set up gauge for
device) and set touch-off device to Device 1.
2. In Tool Setup, use any tool to touch-off on the Device 1 gauge.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or Store Position button on jog unit.
4. In Tool Measurement Screen, select the touch-off device to be used when
probing tool length.
5. In the appropriate row, select Probe as the device from the drop-down Device
list.
6. Jog the tool down to the probe until probe is engaged.
7. With cursor in the Z Location column, select Store Position button on jog unit
or Store Z Location softkey. This will calculate the height of the probe from Z
Reference.
Also see Tool Probing in Options for more information.

Zero Calibration Mode
With the Zero Calibration method of tool measurement, tools are calibrated to a plane in
the Z-axis as referenced from the Z Home position. Each tool used in a program should
be calibrated to the same plane. To use Zero Calibration mode:
1. In the Tool Setup screen, enter the number of the tool to be calibrated into the
Tool Number field.
2. If the tool is in spindle, jog Z down to the reference plane or gauge block.
3. Select Store Machine Position softkey or button on the Jog Unit.
All tools should be calibrated to the same reference plane.
4. If the reference plane is not the same as Z=Part Zero for program depth:
a. Select Part Setup softkey.
b. In Offset Z field, enter distance from reference plane to Part Zero, or use
calibrated tool to touch off Z=0 plane and select the Store Machine Position
softkey or button on the Remote Jog Unit.
If the plane that all tools are touched off of is the top of the workpiece, all program
dimensions for Z will be from Z=0. If the plane is not the top of the workpiece (as when a
gauge block is used), the operator can use the Offset Z field in Part Setup to set the
distance from the gauge block or other plane to the top of the workpiece plane. See Part
Setup, on page 1 - 91 for more information.

Tool Setup
Tool Setup Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106
Tool Setup Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 106
Advanced Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 109
Change Tool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 116
Use the Tool Setup screen to describe the tools that will be used for the part program.
You can access Tool Setup from several screens by using the Tool Setup softkey.
To review all tools currently programmed, go to the Tool Review screen.
When running a previously created part program, Tool Setup must

be carefully checked to be certain the tools described for the old
program match the tools planned for the new program. If a tool
breaks or is not available when running a previously created part
program, the Tool Setup information must be changed.
Tool Setup Fields

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Setup fields:
Coolant Flutes Speed (RPM) Tool Type
Cutting Time Location Spindle Touch-Off Device
Diameter Machine Surface Speed TPI
Diameter Wear Part Thread Diameter Zero Calibration
Feed Pitch Tool Cal Length
Feed/Flute Plunge Feed TIS / Tool in Spindle
Feed/Rev Shank Diameter Tool Number
The fields on the Tool Setup screen vary depending on machine

configuration and tool calibration mode.
Tool Setup Softkeys

Softkeys perform the following functions:
• Delete Tool—Deletes all program settings for the tool number entered in the
Tool Field, for a Manual tool. If the tool is in Spindle or Auto, this softkey is
not active.
• Part Setup—Accesses Part Setup screen.
• Part Programming—Accesses fields to enter the exact description of how the
part will be cut.
• Tool Offsets—Available only for NC programs. The tool length offsets appear

on the screen. Tool offsets are tool lengths used to compensate tool length
without altering the NC program.
Tool offsets are not saved with the NC program.
• Use the Positive Tool Length Compensation (G43) or Negative Tool Length
Compensation (G44) codes. A G49 code specifies tool offset cancel. An
H00 also cancels an offset.
• The G43 and G44 codes set a mode of operation within the program that
is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used. If an H code is used without a G43
or G44, in effect, the value stored in the tool length offset table is used as
the calibrated tool length.
• If a zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool Offset H Table), the
control uses the Tool Offset value entered in Tool Setup for the tool
length.
• If a value greater than zero is entered for the Tool Offset value (Tool
Offset H table), the control replaces the value set in Tool Setup with the
Tool Offset H Table value.
• The four keyboard arrows, Page Up, and Page Down keys scroll through
the 01 to 200 offsets.
• When the Store Machine Position softkey is pressed, a negative Z value
reflecting the Z axis machine position is entered on the screen.
• Tool Home—Allows you to move the tool quickly away from the part. Using
this softkey after Tool Calibration is much faster than pressing the axis jog
buttons on the jog unit. Press this softkey and then press the Start Cycle
button to move the spindle to the change height.
• Set Tool Zero (Zero Calibration mode)—stores the Z-axis position of the
tool tip when at workpiece or gauge block plane. To use this softkey, carefully
jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the part or to the fixture defined
at the Tool Calibration point and then press the softkey. The system stores
the position of the tool into the current part program and the number appears
in the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. This can also be
accomplished by pressing the Store Position button on the jog unit. On the
screen the part display for “Z” changes to zero. In Zero Calibration mode, all
tools used in a part program will need to be calibrated to the same plane.
A warning message is displayed if the edited tool is not the tool in
spindle. Select OK to store the current position for the tool that is
being edited. Select Cancel if you do not want to set tool zero for
that tool.
• Set Length Using Touch-Off Device (Absolute Tool Length mode)—

stores the tool length when using a gauge or other touch-off device. For a
gauge, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down to the top of the gauge and
select the softkey. The system stores the tool length in the Tool Cal Length
field.

This softkey is active when the following is true:
1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool

Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:
a. Select the More softkey.
b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.
c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.
2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes.
This field is accessed in Part Setup:
a. Select the Part Probing softkey.
b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.
• Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block (Zero Calibration mode; Probing
only)—stores the Z-axis position of the tool tip when using a gauge block
into the Zero Calibration field and marks the tool as probed so it can be used
in Part Probing. To use this softkey, carefully jog the tool in the spindle down
to the top of the gauge at the Tool Calibration plane and press the softkey.
This softkey is active when the following is true:
1. The Tool Probe Parameters Type field is set to No Tool

Probe. This field is accessed in Tool Setup:
a. Select the More softkey.
b. Select the Tool Probing softkey.
c. Select the Tool Probe Setup softkey.
2. The Part Probe Parameters Present field is set to Yes.
This field is accessed in Part Setup:
a. Select the Part Probing softkey.
b. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.
Second set of Tool Setup softkeys:
• Advanced Tool Settings—set Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed, Surface Finish
Quality, and other tool information.
• Change Tool Number—Allows you to change the tool number for the current
tool displayed.
• Tool Probing—Accesses the Probing Parameters, see Program Parameters,
on page 1 - 124. Probing is available only with BMCs.
• Program Parameters—Accesses the program parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review—Accesses the tool review screen.
• Tool Measurement Settings (Absolute Tool Length mode)—accesses
the Tool Measurement screen where touch-off device height is set.

Advanced Tool Settings
Tool Geometry, on page 1 - 110
Feed and Speed, on page 1 - 112
NC SFQ, on page 1 - 114
Supplier, on page 1 - 115
Notes, on page 1 - 115
Edit Apt Parameters, on page 1 - 115
Basic tool information is stored in Tool Setup and additional information can be set in the
Advanced Tool Settings screens. Tool Geometry, Feed and Speed information, SFQ, and
other tool information are set in the Advanced Tool Settings screen.
Advanced Tool Settings are optional; it is not necessary to adjust

these settings in order to run part programs. They are available to
simplify programming and increase program efficiency.

Tool Geometry
Tool dimensions are set in the Geometry tab. Fields denoted with a * are required in
order to draw a tool in Solid Graphics; however, these fields are automatically populated
with information from Tool Setup, as ratio of entered diameter. A picture of the tool is
displayed, and when a field is selected, that area on the picture is denoted.
Tool length field

is selected and
corresponding
area is denoted
on picture
Figure 1–9. Tool Geometry
Most fields on the Geometry screen correspond to tool type; see the following table for
information about these fields. Additional Geometry fields are:
Color
Direction
The following table provides the tool-type specific fields:

Thread Diameter
Shank Diameter
Neck Diameter
Chamfer Angle
Ream Chamfer
Cutting Edges
Stylus Length
Length of Cut
Tip Diameter
Tool Length
Tip Length
Drill Angle
Tip Angle
Diameter
Radius
Flutes
Angle
TPI
Drill X X X X X X
Tap X X X X
Boring head X X X X X
End Mill X x x x
Face Mill x x x X X X
Ball End Mill X X X X X
Back Spotface X X X X X
Probe X X X X
Gun Drill X X X X X X
Center Drill X X X X X X X X
Chamfer Mill X X X X X X
Bull Nose Mill X X X X X X
Ream X X X X X X
Spot Drill X X X X X
Forming Tap X X X X X
Counter Bore X X X X X X X
Counter Sink X X X X X X
Keyseat Mill X X X X X X
Thread Mill
Single Cutter X X X X
(SC)
Thread Mill
Multi Cutter X X X X X X
(MC)
Taper Radius
X X X X X X X
End Mill
Corner Round
X X X X X X X
Mill
Dove Tail Mill X X X X X X X
Engraving Mill X X X X X

Tip Diameter is used to calculate Milling Type offset for Chamfer
Mill, Corner Round Mill, and Taper Radius End Mill.
When Shank Diameter, Length of Cut, and Tool Length are set
as a ratio of the diameter, values will be automatically recalculated if
the diameter changes or until a user-defined value is entered.
When used in a Thread Milling cycle, the Length of Cut and Pitch
are used to calculate the number of passes in the cycle.
Feed and Speed

Feed and Speed in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the
Tool and Material Library option.
Feed and Speed settings are carried over from Tool Setup or can be specified in the Feed
and Speed tab for specific tool and material combinations in a part program. Choose one
of the materials from the work material list for a specific tool and enter the feeds and
speeds for both roughing and finishing for that tool and work material combination. This
information is saved in the Tool and Material Library and can be utilized in future part
programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds: When the Program Parameters for a
part program specify a work material, the tool number will recall the feed and speed for
that material.
Regardless of the material set in the Feed and Speed tab, the main
Tool Setup screen will always display feeds and speeds for
“Unspecified” material.
Specify work
material
Specify
Roughing & Speed and Feed
Finishing are calculated or
can be specified
in these fields
Figure 1–10. Advanced Tool Settings: Feed and Speed
Roughing and finishing tool parameters can be specified.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Feed and Speed fields:

Chipload Plunge Feed
Coolant Speed (RPM)
Feed Surface Speed
Feed/Rev Tool
Max Depth
Peck Depth
Feed and Speed Calculations
The WinMax software automatically performs tool feed and speed calculations for each
tool programmed in Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106. The calculations are carried over to
each data block in the part program using the programmed tool.
The software uses data to perform the calculations from these Tool Setup fields:
Diameter, Speed (RPM), Surface Speed (FPM) or (MPM), Flutes, and Feed/Flute (Tooth).
Feeds and speeds are related using the following formulas: Speed Formulas, on page 1 -
113 and Feed Formulas, on page 1 - 114.
Calculated values are carried forward to the Mill Feed field and Speed (RPM) field for
milling and holes data blocks. You can override automatically calculated values in a data
block by inserting a user defined value. If you manually change a calculated value in Tool
Setup, you will be prompted to update feeds and speeds for the part program data
blocks.
For fields that display truncated decimal point values, you may view
the non-truncated value by pressing and holding the CTRL key and
pressing the period (.) key.
Speed Formulas
The WinMax software uses these formulas to automatically calculate the spindle speeds:
Metric Mode:
Surface Speed x 100
English Units:
If the calculated RPM exceeds the maximum spindle RPM entered in

Machine Specifications, the value appears in red font color.

If you enter the Surface Speed (fpm) value, the Speed (RPM) value
will be calculated for you.
If you enter the Speed (RPM) value, the Surface Speed (fpm) value
will be calculated for you.
In some cases, calculation rounding may slightly alter a calculated

value.
For example, if you enter a value of 7000 RPM for the Speed field in
Tool Setup for a Drill operation, the calculated value for Surface
Speed is 458 fpm.
However, if you enter a Surface Speed of 458 fpm in the Surface

Speed field, the calculated value for Speed is 6997 RPM.
Feed Formulas
For Milling data blocks, specify the number of flutes for the tool in the Flutes field.
The software uses the following formula to calculate the Mill Feed:
For Holes operations, flutes are not specified for the tool.
The software uses this formula to calculate the Mill Feed:
If the calculated feedrate exceeds the maximum contouring feedrate

for the machine, an error is generated during the program run.
NC SFQ
NC SFQ in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the NC/
Conversational Merge option.
Surface finish quality in NC programming is set in the NC SFQ tab of Advanced Tool
Settings. Change Enable Tool SFQ to YES and adjust the Tool SFQ value. This
automatically sets the SFQ value whenever the tool is used in NC programming and will
override the SFQ value set in Program Parameters or with the G05.3 setting.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC SFQ Fields:
Enable Tool SFQ
Tool
Tool SFQ

Supplier
Supplier in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
Material Library option.
The Supplier tab is optionally used to store information about tool supplier and orders in
memo-type fields.
Notes
Notes in Advanced Tool Settings is available only with the Tool and
The Notes tab is used to store notes and miscellaneous information about a tool in a
memo-type field.
Edit Apt Parameters

The Edit Apt Parameters fields are defined as follows:
• Tool—displays the tool number and type entered on the Tool Setup screen.
This field cannot be edited. To change tools, go to Tool Setup, on page 1 -
106.
• NC Gear Range—define the spindle gear range. 0 = Low; 9 = High.
• NC Tool Number—indicate the starting tool in the tool changer. The range is
0 to 999.
• NC Diameter Offset—indicate the tool diameter to be used for cutter
compensation. This field is used for posting only. This will not affect a file that
is saved as an ISNC file.
If Cutter Comp is selected from the Output Tool Path As field on the
Post Processor Configuration screen, the value in the NC Diameter
Offset field will be put into the APT file. This value will refer to the
tool diameter offset on the target machine. If Centerline is selected
from the Output Tool Path As field, then the value entered in the NC
Diameter Offset field will not affect the APT file.
• NC Length Offset—indicate the length offset at the machine tool.

Change Tool Number
The Change Tool Number softkey allows you to change the number of an existing tool or
copy an existing tool and give it a different number while retaining the tool with the same
number.
To change the Tool Number or create a copy of a tool, display the tool in the Tool Setup
screen. With the cursor in the Tool Number field, select the More softkey to display the
next softkey menu. Select the Change Tool Number softkey. The Current Tool
Description and New Tool Number fields are displayed. Type the new number into the
New Tool Number field and select one of the following softkeys:
• Change Tool Number—changes the number of the tool to the new Tool
Number. The old tool number is simply changed to the new number. If the
new tool number is already assigned to another tool, then the tool numbers
are swapped. If the Tool Library option is enabled, the tool number is also
updated in the spindle or ATC.
• Copy Tool—adds a new tool that is identical to the Current Tool Description.
If the New Tool Number is not in the current program or Tool & Material
Library, the current tool is copied to the New Tool Number. If the New Tool
Number is already used in the current program or Tool & Material Library, a
prompt appears that the New Tool Number selected will be replaced with a
copy of the current tool.
Part Program Tool Review

Use the PART PROGRAM TOOL REVIEW softkey on the Program Review screen to review
the tools used in a specific part program. This screen lists all tools used in a program, and
the program block where they are used. The location column indicates if the tool is in
Manual, Auto, or Spindle.
List of tools
used in program
Supplier, Order,
Notes, Tool Life
tabs can be used to
keep track of
other tool
Program blocks information
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
Edit Block
softkey to jump to
the program block)
Figure 1–11. Part Program Tool Review of a Conversational program

Start typing a tool number to jump to that tool in the review list. The
Jump to tool pop-up box opens; select OK to go to that tool in the
list.
Tool information can be entered into the Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs at the bottom of
the Part Program Review screen.
Tool notes can be entered and viewed on the Notes tab in the Part
Program Tool Review screen and the Advanced Tool Settings screen.
Notes can also be viewed in the Select Tool screen (accessed with
the Select Tool from List softkey when entering a tool in a program
block).
The Supplier, Order, and Notes tabs are only available with the Tool &
Part Program Tool Review for NC Programs

Part Program Tool Review in NC programming scans the current NC program for T codes
to determine the tools used in the program. T codes are ignored if they are inside a
comment (surrounded by parentheses) or if they are an argument in a macro call
(preceded by a G65).
Tools are listed by number. When a tool is selected (highlighted), the Block list will display
the number and NC text of all blocks that contain the T code for a tool change to the
selected tool, as shown below:
List of tools
used in program
Program blocks
in which
highlighted
tool is used
(highlight block
and select the
EDIT BLOCK F1
softkey to jump to
the program block)
Figure 1–12. Part Program Tool Review of an NC program
Jump to a program block by highlighting the block and selecting the

Edit Block softkey.
If a tool in the current NC program is not defined in Tool Setup, it appears in the Tool

Review list as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 and an unknown location. This is
shown below.
Figure 1–13. Tool Review showing Unknown tool in NC program
An undefined tool can be added to the NC tool setup by selecting the tool in the list,
selecting the Tool Setup softkey, and selecting a type or entering data for the new tool.
The tool can also be quickly added as an unknown tool with a diameter of 0 by selecting
the Add As Manual Tool softkey.
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys

Softkeys perform the following functions:
• Part Setup—access Part Setup screen. See Part Setup, on page 1 - 91 for
more information.
• Tool Setup—access Tool Setup. See Tool Setup, on page 1 - 106 for more
information.
• Part Programming—access and create data blocks of a part program. The
current program's data blocks appear on screen when this softkey is used.
Delete, add, edit, and navigate through the data blocks. The NC editor is
displayed for NC programs. See Conversational Part Programming for more
information.
• Program Parameters—accesses the Program Parameters screen to specify
data common to all program data blocks. See Program Parameters, on page
• Tool Change Review Screen—access the Tool Change Review screen to

see all tool changes in the part program. Available with the Tool Change
Optimization option. See Tool Change Optimization in the Options manual for
more information.
• Match Tools—access tool matching results. See Tool Matching, on page 1 -
119 for more information.
• Add As Manual Tool—adds the highlighted unmatched tool as a Manual tool
in the Tool & Material Library and assigns it the next available tool number.
Tool Matching
When a new program is loaded and the Tool & Material Library option is enabled:
1. The new program’s tools are compared to the tools in the Tool & Material
Library to identify a match by tool type and diameter.
The diameter is set in the Tool Matching: Maximum Diameter
Difference field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49.
2. If only one tool match is found, the program will use that tool number,
including the Zero Calibration, from the Tool & Material Library. Note that Feed
and Speed data will not be replaced in the program.
3. If more than one match exists, WinMax then looks at tool number. If it finds
the same tool number, type, and diameter, it will match the tool.
4. If there are no matches, tools are either loaded into the Tool & Material Library
as Manual, or users can select from a list of tools in the Tool & Material Library
that are similar to the unmatched tool. The AUTOMATICALLY LOAD
UNMATCHED TOOLS AS MANUAL field in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1
- 49 controls this:
• When the field is set to Yes, any unmatched tools from the new part
program will be added to the Tool & Material Library and will be assigned
to the first available tool number.
For example, a new program is loaded with tool #12 as a 0.375 inch end
mill. If tool #12 in the Tool & Material Library is not a 0.375 inch end mill
and no other tool in the Tool & Material Library is a 0.375 inch end mill,
then this tool will be added to the Tool & Material Library as a Manual tool
and will be assigned the first available tool number.
• When the field is set to NO, a prompt to match tools appears. Answer YES
to the prompt to review the unmatched tools.
Tools that are unmatched are displayed in Tool Matching Results.

Tool Matching Results
When tools from the part program cannot find a matching tool in the Tool & Material
Library, these unmatched tools are listed in the Tool Matching Results screen, accessed
with the MATCH TOOLS softkey from the Tool Review screen. Unmatched tools from the
current part program are listed in the “Tools to be matched” section; for imported
programs, the Import Number (No.) column contains the tool number saved in the
original program. When each unmatched tool is highlighted, a list of tools from the Tool &
Material Library with the same tool type are listed in the lower, “Closest matches” section.
Tools of the same type are listed in order of closest to furthest diameter difference from
the highlighted tool.
Unmatched
Tools Import Tool
Number
Difference in
tool diameter List of similar tools
from in Tool Library (list
unmatched corresponds to the
tool highlighted tool)
Figure 1–14. Tool Matching Results
The Choose As Replacement softkey appears when you select a tool from the Closest
matches list. Use this softkey to replace an unmatched tool with the selected tool from
the Tool & Material Library.
If there is not a match in “Closest matches,” use the Add As Manual Tool softkey to add
the tool to the Tool & Material Library.
The Save To Database softkey appears when you select an unmatched tool from the
list. Select the softkey to save the tool to the Tool and Material Database.
Saving a tool to the Tool and Material Database will not match a tool
with an existing tool in the Tool & Material Library. The program will
still consider the tool unmatched and will not run until a match is
selected or a new tool is added to the Tool & Material Library.

Tool Management
Tool Management screens are accessed in Manual Mode with the Tool Management
softkey. Tool information can be stored independent of the part program data using the
Tool & Material Library option. Program-specific tool information (such as feed rate and
speed) created for one program can be reused when tools are selected from the library
for a subsequent program. Tool Management tabs are:
• Spindle—shows the tool located in the machine’s spindle.

• Auto—lists the tools that are in the machine’s tool magazine.
• Manual—lists the tools that may be utilized on the machine but are not
currently in the machine’s magazine or spindle. The Manual tab is active only
with the Tool & Material Library option.
Spindle
The Spindle tab displays information about the tool in spindle and allows you to set the
next tool to execute a tool change, or to change the current tool in spindle. The Move
Tool to Spindle softkey moves the tool in the Next Tool field to the spindle.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of fields on the Spindle tab (fields displayed vary
depending on machine and/or configuration):
Axes Status Next Tool
Axis Limit Switches Orientation
F / Feed Part
Machine S / Spindle
Magazine TIS / Tool in Spindle
Auto
The Auto tab lists the tools in the ATC (automatic tool changer) magazine. Tools are listed
by pocket number. The view can be customized to show only occupied pockets or to
disable even-numbered pockets (for large tools), using the check boxes at the top of the
screen.
Softkeys on the Tool Library Auto tab are:
• Move Tool To Spindle—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the

Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will
appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the
spindle.
• Select Tool—highlight a tool in the list and touch this softkey to select the
tool.
• Clear Pocket—removes the selected tool from the pocket.
• Clear All Pockets—removes all tools from the Auto list.

Manual
The Manual tab shows tools available for use that are resident on the control, but are not
currently in the spindle or ATC. The Manual tab is active only with the Tool & Material
Library option:
Softkeys are:
• Move Tool To Spindle—when spindle is empty, highlighting a tool on the

Auto or Manual lists will enable this softkey. Select to confirm and the tool will
appear on the SPINDLE tab. The control will prompt to insert the tool into the
spindle.
• Insert Tool—moves a tool from Manual to Auto.
• Tool Setup—accesses the Tool Setup screen.
• Change Tool Number—allows you to change the number of a tool in the
list. See Change Tool Number, on page 1 - 116 for more information.
• Clear Tools—clears (removes) tools from the list:
• Clear Selected Tool—removes highlighted tool from the Tool Library.

• Clear Auto And Manual Tools—removes all tools from the Tool Library.
• Clear Auto Tools—removes all tools in Auto from the Tool Library.
• Clear Manual Tools—removes all tools in Manual from the Tool Library.

Tool and Material Database
The Tool and Material Database is available when the Tool & Material Library option is
enabled. It is accessed in Auxiliary Mode. Tool and material information can be entered
and stored in the database. The materials entered into the database are available in the
work material list located on the Feed and Speed tab in Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool
Settings. This information is saved in the material database and can be utilized in future
part programs without re-entering the speeds and feeds.
To add a tool to the database:
1. Select the Tools tab.

2. Select Add Tool softkey.
3. Enter the tool information in the fields. See Advanced Tool Settings, on page 1
- 109 for more information about these fields.
Softkeys on the TOOLS tab are:
• Add Tool—accesses Tool Type Setup screen to add a tool to the database.
• Edit Tool—accesses Tool Setup to edit tool.
• Delete Tool—deletes the selected tool from the database.
To add a material to the database:
1. Select the Materials tab.

2. Select the Add Material softkey.
3. Type the name of the material in the Name field.
4. Add any notes in the Notes field.
5. The entry is saved by exiting the screen.
Softkeys on the MATERIALS tab are:
• Add Material—add a new material to the database.

• Edit Material—change the specifications of a material in the database.
• Delete Material—delete a material from the database.
• Select Material for Part Program—uses the highlighted material in the
current part program.

Program Parameters
Program parameters are displayed on tabs for General 1, General 2, Milling 1, Milling 2,
Holes, Probing, and Performance. The Performance tab in WinMax is active when the
SelectSurface Finish Quality option is enabled. The programmer has the option to make
changes to any or all of the program parameters and save them as user defaults. The
user defaults and original WinMax defaults can be restored by using the appropriate
softkey. Parameters can be altered with the Change Parameters data block during
program execution. Refer to Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 in Conversational
Programming for details.
Refer to NC Part Programming for information about NC Parameters.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the General 1 tab:
Chord Error Rapid Traverse
Enable Pecking Retract Retract Clearance

Clearance
Override Lockout
Peck Clearance Plane
Pecking Retract Clearance
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the General 2 tab:
Automatic Safe Repositioning Move to Safe Pos During

Retract Override TC
Depletion Retract Tool Change Optimization
First Peck Offset
Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal
Interrupt Cycle Z Retract
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Milling 1 tab:
Blend Offset Finish Speed (%)
Blend Overlap Finish XY
Cutter Comp Parameter Finish Z
Default Pocket Overlap Milling Direction
Finish Feed (%) Stock Allowance Mode
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Milling 2 tab:

Allow Plunge Outside Pocket Mill Plunge Ramp Slope
Finish Plunge Helix Radius Mill Plunge Type
Finish Plunge Ramp Slope Operator Specify Pocket

Start
Finish Plunge Type Pocket Plunge Near Center
Mill Plunge Helix Radius
The Milling 2 Parameters fields are available only when the Helical
Plunge option is installed.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Holes tab:
Bore Dwell
Bore Orient Retract
Drill Dwell
Tap Retract (%)
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Probing tab:
Automatic Tool Monitoring
Diameter Tolerance
Length Tolerance
Retain Probed Part Setup
Start Coordinate Reference
Probing parameters affect Tool Quality Monitoring and Part Probing.

See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14 and Part Probing Option,
on page 4 - 31 for more information.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of parameters on the Performance tab:
Smoothing Tolerance
Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default)
Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default)
Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) is enabled with the SelectSurface Finish Quality option. SFQ
parameters can be modified in either Conversational or NC programming. The default
SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:

SFQ Desired Result
1-20 High precision parts /finishing
21-79 Good surface quality / finishing, semi-finishing
80-100 High throughput / roughing
Table 1–1. Recommended SFQ values
If SelectSurface Finish Quality is not enabled, conversational

roughing tools use SFQ of 80 and conversational finishing tools use
SFQ of 20; NC default is 50.
Softkeys on the Program Parameters screen are:
• Save As User Defaults—saves the selected field’s value as the user-defined

default value.
• Restore User Defaults—restores the user-defined values to a field that has
been populated with other values.
• Restore WinMax Defaults—restores the WinMax-defined values to a field
that has been populated with other values.
Change Parameters program blocks load the user-defined
parameters set in Program Parameters.
• NC Parameters—accesses NC Configuration Parameters. These parameters

are available only with NC Part Programming.

Import / Export Functions
Import Functions imports Part Setup, Tool Setup, Program Parameters, Part Program
information, and/or NC states from an existing Conversational program or NC State file
into the active part program. Tool lists and Tool and Material Database can also be
imported or exported from this menu (with the Tool & Material Library option installed).
1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.
2. Select the appropriate softkey to import from a Conversational file, or to
import or export NC state or Tool Library.
3. Choose the origination or destination file, or select an operation for the Tool
Library then select the appropriate file.
4. Select the Import or Export softkey.
5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the Begin Operation
softkey.
Conversational Components
These are the Conversational components that can be imported from an existing part
program into a new part program:
• Part Setup—imports the Part Setup from the selected program into the
• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 1 - 119).
• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters from the selected
program into the current part program.
• Part Program—imports the part program from the selected program into the
NC States
NC components are stored in the NC State file on the control. Only one NC State file
exists on a control, and it is updated as changes are made to current or new NC
programs.
When transferring an NC program from one machine to another the NC State file from the
can be imported or exported using the Import (or Export) NC State From (To) File
softkey. These are the components that can be imported into an NC file:
• Program Parameters—imports the Program Parameters.

• Part Setup / Work Offsets—imports the Part Setup and Work Offsets.
• Tool Setup—imports tools from the Tool Setup of the selected part program
to the current tool setup on the machine. If the Tool & Material Library option
is enabled, unique tools are added as Manual and other tools may be
matched (see Tool Matching, on page 1 - 119).

• Tool Offsets—imports Tool Offsets.
• NC Parameters—imports the NC parameters.
• NC Variables—imports NC variables.
The imported components will replace the current components from
the open program; they are not merged together.
NC States are saved as follows:
1. Select the Import / Export Functions softkey from the Input screen.
2. Select the Save NC State To File softkey.
3. Choose the location to which the file will be saved in the Save State File
screen.
4. Type the name of the file in the FILE NAME field, or use the default,
ncstate.ncsx, which appears automatically in this field.
It is recommended to rename the NC States file to match the active
part program. When renaming, you must retain the .ncs extension at
the end of the file name. For example, Program Name.ncsx.
5. Select the SAVE F1 softkey to save the NC States file. A message that the file
saved successfully will briefly appear on screen.
Importing NC States into Conversational Programs

NC States information that is valid for Conversational programs (the Part Setup, Tool
Setup, and Program Parameters) can be imported into a Conversational program.
1. Make sure the current part program is Conversational.

2. Select the IMPORT FUNCTIONS softkey from the Input screen.
3. Select the IMPORT NC STATE FROM FILE softkey.
4. Choose the NC States file from which components will be imported and select
the LOAD F1 softkey. Either file may be used to import any component.
5. Choose one or more components from the list and select the BEGIN
OPERATION softkey.
6. Select OK to continue the import operation.

Import and Export Tool Library
Import and Export Tool Library functions are available only with the
Tool and Material Library option.
The Import / Export Tool Library softkey allows you to move tool information from the
WinMax control to other locations and vice versa.
Import / Export Tool Library submenu softkeys are:
• Export Auto And Manual Tools—save Auto and Manual tools to a different
directory.
• Export Manual Tool List—save only the Manual tools to a different
directory.
• Import Into Manual Tool List—load tools into the control from a directory.
All tools are imported into the Manual list, even if they were exported as Auto
tools.
The ATC positions are not retained when tools are imported.
• Export Tool and Material Database—save tool templates and materials to

a different directory.
• Append Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials
into the control from a directory. These are added to the existing database on
the control.
• Replace Tool and Material Database—load tool templates and materials
into the control from a directory. The existing database is replaced.

Copy and Change Blocks
To make changes to several data blocks at one time, use the Copy and Change Blocks
softkey to access the Block Editor.
These are the softkeys:
• Copy Blocks—Duplicate the specified data blocks in another location in the

part program.
• Move Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from their current location
and transfer them to another location in the part program.
• Delete Blocks—Remove the specified data blocks from the part program.
• Modify Dimensions—Add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently
stored in the part program for a range of blocks.
• Change All Feeds, Speeds, and Tools—substitutes new feeds and speeds
for all tools within the specified range of data blocks.
• Change Feeds and Speeds by Tool—substitutes new speeds and feedrates
for a specified tool within a range of data blocks.
• Change Surface Finish Quality—changes the SFQ value(s) for the specified
block range.
Copy, Move, or Delete Blocks

The COPY BLOCKS screen is used to duplicate the specified data blocks in another
location in the part program.
The MOVE BLOCKS screen is used to remove the specified data blocks from their current
location and transfer them to another location in the part program.
The DELETE BLOCKS screen is used to remove specified data blocks from the part
program.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Copy/Move/Delete Block fields:
End Block
Put Block Before
Start Block
Modify Dimensions
Modify Dimensions allows you to add offsets to the axes' coordinate dimensions currently
stored in the part program for a range of blocks.
These softkey choices appear when you select the Modify Dimensions softkey:
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Modify Dimensions fields:

A Offset Start Block
B Offset X Offset
C Offset Y Offset
Change Z-Start Z Offset
End Block
Enter the modifications in the fields and select the Make The Change softkey to modify
the programmed dimensions.
Modified dimensions are applied to Pattern blocks that provide their

own reference points: Loop Rotate center points, Loop Angular
reference and center points, Mirror Image reference point, and Scale
reference point.
Changing Feeds, Speeds, Tools, and SFQ

Feeds, Speeds, and Tools, and SFQ can be changed for a range of blocks in a part
program.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Change Feed, Speeds, Tool and SFQ fields:
Change Finish SFQ Put Block Before New Tool
Change Rough SFQ New Feed Put Block Before
Change Tool New Finish Tool Rough SFQ
End Block New Plunge Feed
Finish SFQ New Speed (RPM)
Enter the changes in the fields and select the Make the Change softkey.
The Copy Blocks, Move Blocks, and Delete Blocks softkeys are
also available for editing a current program.

Review Mode
The Program Review screen is accessed with the console Review key.
Sub-blocks within the

selected data block
List of program’s
data blocks
Select to jump
to selected
data block or
sub-block
Tools and Notes for

the selected block
Figure 1–15. Program Review Screen
Data blocks and sub blocks of the active part program are displayed. Program blocks can
be moved and added in the Program Review screen.
Start typing a block number to jump to that block in the review list.
The Jump to block pop-up box opens; select OK to go to that block
in the list.
Jump to the program block by highlighting the block in the list and
selecting the Part Programming softkey.
Tool data and notes are displayed in the Tools and Notes tabs:
• Tool information for the selected data block is displayed in the Tools tab.
When a tool is selected the Edit Tool softkey is displayed and will open Tool
Setup for the selected tool.
• Notes can be entered for the selected data block or sub block in the Notes
tab. Notes are displayed on the Review screen and with the data block when
the blocks are printed.

Program Review softkeys are:
• Multiple Block Functions—allows multiple blocks to be cut, copied, or

pasted between programs:
• Cut—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to delete from the
current program. Block(s) can then be pasted into the same or a different
program.
• Copy—highlight data block(s) and select this softkey to make a copy that
can be pasted into the same or a different program.
• Paste—places previously cut or copied data block(s) above the
highlighted data block.
• Delete—highlight data block(s) and touch this softkey to permanently
remove the block from the program.
Multiple blocks can be selected simultaneously by holding the F and
Alt keys while pressing the up or down arrow keys.
• Convert to Rotary—converts linear dimensions to rotary dimensions; a

flat geometry can be wrapped around a cylinder, given a radius. Blocks
that can be wrapped are: contour, circle, frame, slot, polygon, TrueType
lettering holes (locations), and patterns (loop linear, loop rectangular, and
mirror). You will be prompted to enter a cylinder radius.
If centerlines are enabled in Part Setup, the Z values in the blocks are not
adjusted. If the centerlines are disabled, the Z axis becomes the radius in
the block and the cylinder radius is applied to the value.
• Convert to Linear—converts rotary dimensions to linear dimensions.

For WinMax Desktop and WinMax Mill on machines not equipped with
rotary, the Default Conversational Program Type must be
changed to a rotary type in order to convert the program to rotary.
This is changed in Conversational Settings in Utilities.
• Delete Block / Delete Sub Block—deletes the highlighted data block or

sub-block.
• Part Programming—allows you to edit the selected data block or sub-block.
See Part Programming in the Conversational Programming manual for more
information.
• Program Parameters—access General, Milling, Holes, Probing, and
Performance parameters. NC parameters are accessible for NC programs.
• Part Setup—access the Part Setup screen to establish part zero, centerline,
offset Z, safety work region, and other parameters.
• Part Program Tool Review—review the tools used in the part program.
• Insert Block / Sub Block Before—inserts a new program block or sub-
block before the selected block or sub-block.

Manual Safety Override Mode
For machines with CE safety circuit switches enabled, the Manual Safety Override mode
allows the enclosure doors to be opened when the system is in Manual mode so the
operator or supervisor can perform limited manual machine operations.
While the doors are open, manual jog feed is restricted. The jog feed is limited to 2
meters per minute, or approximately 80 inches per minute, with manual safety override
enabled. No jogging is permitted with manual safety override disabled.
Manual operations that cannot be started with the doors open,

regardless of manual safety override mode, are:
• Spindle On
• Park Machine
• Warm Up Machine
• Calibrate Machine
• Spindle Orient
• Chip Removal
• Tool Changer Functions
When the Manual Safety Override mode is enabled, it remains enabled until control
power is turned off, the Emergency Stop button is pressed, or machine power is turned
off. A fault will disable the Manual Safety Override mode also.
If you try to jog the axes with the doors open without enabling the manual safety
override mode, a prompt appears to cycle the keyswitch or enter the access code to
enable jog.

CE Diagnostics
To enable the Safety Override mode, access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen.
1. From the Manual mode screen, select the Diagnostics softkey.

2. Select the CE Diagnostics softkey. The following screen appears:
Figure 1–16. CE Status & Diagnostics Screen
The fields on the CE Status & Diagnostics screen are defined as follows:
• CE Configuration—Displays CE logic configuration. Enabled or disabled in

Integrator Support Services.
• Door Lock Status—Displays status of all doors with CE safety circuit
switches Unlocked or Locked. The Door Switch Status must be Closed when
the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Door Switch Status—Displays status as Closed or Open. The switch must be
Closed when the Door Lock Status is Locked.
• Limited Manual Operations—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled.
Status is Enabled after entering an access code. Enabled allows limited safe
motion with the doors open.
• EIR Relay State—Displays status as Disabled or Enabled. When enabled, the
enclosure doors have been locked due to a process request or an active
process.

Entering the Access Code
A numeric access code is required to enable Limited Manual Operations. Follow these
steps to enter the access code:
1. Select the Enter Access Code softkey. A message appears with a prompt for
entering a 4 digit code.
2. Enter a numeric code using the console keypad. Asterisks (*) appear
representing each entered digit. When the fourth digit is entered, the asterisks
and message disappear.
Using a non-numeric key cancels the operation.
When the code is successfully entered, the Limited Manual Operations feature is enabled,
as indicated in the status field.
For initial setup of the Access Code, the user is prompted to enter a new code and then to
enter the same code a second time before it is accepted.
Changing an Existing Access Code

To change an existing access code, follow these steps:
1. Select the Change Access Code softkey. A message appears asking you to
enter the current code.
2. Enter the current numeric code from the console keypad. A message appears
asking you to enter the new code.
3. Enter the new code. A message appears asking you to re-enter the new code
for confirmation.
• If the new code is not re-entered, the code is not changed.
• When the new code is verified, the code will change and a message
appears to confirm the action.

Graphics
WinMax graphics include Toolpath and Solid Graphics, on page 1 - 138. Real-time graphic
animation is available with the Runtime tool, which shows a simulated tool cutting the
part on screen while the machine is cutting the actual part.
Solid graphics and Runtime tool are only available with the
Advanced Verification Graphics option.
Graphics Settings
Graphics preferences are set in the Graphics Settings screen, which is accessed with the
Graphics Settings softkey.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Graphics Settings fields:
Background Color Override Machine Show Graphics Tool Path

Configuration
Default View Part Surface Show Roughing Tool Universal Type

Path for 2D Surfaces
Default Zone Plunges Show Roughing Tool Use Chord Error

Path for 3D Surfaces From Program
Enable Runtime Tool Rapids Stock Outline

Display
Graphics Chord Error Refresh Speed Stock Transparency
Graphics Optimization Rotary Axis ISO Tilt Axis Preference

Standard

Toolpath and Solid Graphics
Toolpath graphics displays a wireframe view of the part. Toolpath is also animated to
show the tool in motion if the runtime tool is displayed (only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option).
Solid graphics displays a solid 3-dimensional part; only available with the Advanced
Verification Graphics option.
Denotes the
view selected
Indicates
the stage of
processing
Figure 1–17. Solid graphic display
The console Draw button initiates drawing. The Draw Options menu is displayed (for both
Toolpath and Solid) to control drawing and animation:
• Draw Options—displays the following draw options:

• Draw (Pause)—starts drawing the part. When drawing is in progress,
the softkey displays PAUSE—select it to pause the drawing. When paused,
the softkey displays DRAW—select it to resume drawing.
• Accelerated Draw—displays only the completed drawing without
showing each block as it is drawn. There may be a delay before the
completed drawing appears on screen; selecting the Show Progress
softkey displays the drawing at the current point each time the softkey is
selected.
• Single Step—displays only one step or program block at a time.
Subsequent selection of SINGLE STEP will execute the next step or block.
• Next Tool Change—displays cutting from one tool change to the next.
• Clear Graphics—clears the part drawing from the screen.
• Save Session—saves the current part drawing after a successful draw.
Allows the drawing to be loaded for faster drawing at a later time
(especially useful for large programs).
• Load Session—loads current program drawing that was previously saved
with the Save Session softkey.

• Select View—choose XY plane, XZ plane, YZ plane, Isometric, or All Views.
For dual-zone machines, the Select Zone softkey displays Zone 1, Zone 2, or
All Zones.
• Zoom—magnifies an area of the graphic. Select the softkey and choose one
of the following:
• Zoom In—magnify incrementally by 20% each time the softkey is
selected.
• Zoom Out—shrink view incrementally by 10% each time the softkey is
selected.
• Smooth—toggle on or off to sharpen image when drawing completes or
with zoom, pan, rotate, etc. An icon located in the top left corner of the
graphics screen shows if smoothing is on or off (icon can be toggled as
well):
Indicates that smoothing is toggled ON.
Indicates that smoothing is toggled OFF.
• Default Zoom—returns to the zoom level to the default value.

• Fit To View—returns drawing to the default position, rotation, and zoom
levels.
• “Touch-and-drag”—place stylus at a point on the screen and drag it to
expand the box over the area you wish to magnify. When stylus is lifted
from screen the area will be magnified.
• Pan—moves the graphic up, down, left, or right. Use the softkeys (Pan Up,
Pan Down, Pan Left, Pan Right, or Center), or touch the screen and drag the
graphic. Fit to View returns the drawing to the default position, rotation, and
zoom levels.
• Rotate—changes the rotation of the graphic. Softkeys include Rotate Up,
Rotate Down, Rotate Left, and Rotate Right. Default Rotation returns rotation
to the default value.
• DB Search—jumps to a selected data block. Select the softkey, touch an
area on the graphic touchscreen, and select the JUMP TO BLOCK softkey.
• Snapshot—creates an image of the solid drawing that is stored with the file.
The image is displayed on the Program Manager screen when the program is
highlighted.
• Graphics Settings—displays the Graphics Settings screen.

Max5 UI Graphics Screen
The Max5 Graphics screen is available as an option for Max4 consoles and WinMax
desktop software. This graphics screen shows solid renderings of the tool paths and stock
removal for the program. In addition, the appropriate console LEDs light when the
coolant is programmed to be on, when the spindle is programmed to be on, and when
there is a programmed tool change.
This updated graphics screen uses many of the same features of the Max4 Toolpath and
Solid graphics.
Zoom in and out

Pan in selected direction
Rotate in selected direction in ISO view
Reset All to original view
Opaque view
Measure
Fill
XY Side view XZ End view YZ Top view
Isometric view Quad view (all of above)
Run the entire Part program

Run Single block or segment of program
Run Program until programmed Tool
change
Graphics Speed Control buttons
Draw Control buttons
Select point on drawing

Jump to location in program
Capture graphic
Smooth lines
Access screen Settings

MACHINE OPERATION BASICS
The following sections explain basic machine operation.
Machine Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 134

Recovery and Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 135
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 136
Automatic Tool Changers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 139
HMX Automatic Pallet Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 149
Dual-Zone Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 153
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 157
Stop Machine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 163
Restart Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 165
Shutdown Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 165
Servo Drive Alarm Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 166
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 Machine Operation Basics 1-135
Machine Start Up
Calibrate Machine
Calibrating establishes the machine reference point (absolute zero) for each axis.
Absolute zero is the location on the table, usually a corner or near a corner, where the X
and Y axes intersect. This value does not change.
To calibrate the machine, press the Manual Mode console button. "Uncalibrated" will be in
the Cal Status field.
Establishing Servo Power

Perform the following steps to establish servo power:
1. If necessary, release all Emergency Stop buttons. Twist the button in the
direction indicated by the arrows to release it.
2. Press the Manual Mode console button.
3. Press the console Power On button to turn on the machine. The Power On
button lights up.
4. If there is a servo or spindle error, press the Reset Servos and Spindle softkey
to clear it. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
5. Press the Start Cycle button to turn on the machine servos. The Start Cycle
button stops flashing.
Axes Calibration
To calibrate all axes, follow these steps:
1. Press the Calibrate Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins to flash off
and on.
2. Press the flashing Start Cycle button. The Axis Limit Switches field indicates
the current status of the machining center’s limit switches as each axis
calibrates.
3. The machine position display (at the top of the text screen) shows zero (0) for
all axes when the calibration process is complete.
Warm Up Machine
If the machine has been idle for an hour or more, it is recommended that the warm up
cycle be run. Warming up an idle machine before part cutting improves component
reliability and machine performance. You must be in Manual mode to run a warm up
cycle.
Follow these steps to warm up the machining center:
1. The control power must be on and the axes must be calibrated. There must
not be any tool in the spindle, and the Tool in Spindle field on the Manual
screen must be 0.
1 - 136 Machine Operation Basics 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill
2. Select the Warm Up Machine softkey. The Start Cycle button begins flashing.
3. Press the Start Cycle button (to cancel the warm up cycle, press any Mode
console button or softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button). The axes
slowly move from one end of the machine to the other. The spindle moves at a
low RPM for five minutes.
4. The warm up cycle completes in 15 minutes. The Manual screen reappears and
axis movement stops.
Follow these steps to cancel the warm-up cycle:
1. Press the Feed Hold console button.

2. Press the Spindle Off button.
3. Press the Feed Hold button a second time, or press the Stop Cycle button.
Reset Master
To restart the control (reboot the system) without switching the power to the machine
tool off and back on again, follow these steps:
1. Press the Auxiliary console button. The Auxiliary screen appears.

2. Press the More softkey.
3. Press the Reset Master softkey. The Yes and No softkeys appear. When the Yes
softkey is pressed, the system will reboot. Pressing the No softkey aborts the
reset process.
Be sure to save any part program you’re working on before resetting
the master. In NC Programming, an unsaved part program will be
permanently erased. In Conversational Programming, the part
program will be saved, but any changes made after the last autosave
will be lost.
Recovery and Restart

Restart a part program at almost any point within the program - typically, the point at
which the running program was interrupted.
If the Emergency Stop button was used to stop machining, machine power must be
restored before restarting the program.
To restart the program, follow these steps:
1. Select the console Auto button. The Start Block default is 1, and the End Block
default is the last block of the program.
2. Enter the proper Start Block and, optionally, an End Block if other than the end
of the program.
3. Select the Recovery Restart softkey.
4. If the Start Block contains multiple choices for restart, prompts are displayed
to select the proper point of restart.
Manual Mode
Manual mode controls machine settings and operations.
These are the softkeys for Manual mode:
• Tool Management—Access tool information for Spindle, Auto Tools, and

Manual Tools.
• Manual Function Setup— Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract tool,
execute a manual rapid move, turn chip removal on and off, turn washdown
coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off from this screen.
• Diagnostics— Access the CE Status & Diagnostics screen and the ATC &
Machine Diagnostics screen. See Manual Safety Override Mode, on page 1 -
134 and ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 1 - 145 for more information.
• Park Machine—Center the table and leave the spindle at the home position.
• Warm Up Machine—Warm up an idle machine.
• Orient Spindle—Ensures that the Z axis is at the correct height for a tool to
be inserted in the spindle.
The ORIENT SPINDLE softkey will not function unless the enclosure
doors are completely closed.
• Reset Servos and Spindle—Activates only to enable recovery from certain

types of electronic hardware faults such as overloads.
• Calibrate Machine—Establish absolute zero for each axis on the machining
center.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the Manual mode screens (fields
displayed vary depending on machine, configuration, and/or program type):
A Jog Along Tool Axis Orientation X
Axes Status Machine Part Y
B Magazine Rotary Jog Feed Z
C Manual Jog Feed Rotary Rapid Feed
Coordinate System Manual Rapid Feed S / Spindle
F / Feed Manual Spindle Speed TIS / Tool in Spindle
Manual Function Setup

Set manual spindle speed and jog feed, retract tool, execute a manual rapid move, turn
chip removal on and off, turn washdown coolant on and off, and turn worklight on and off
from this screen. Some fields vary depending on machine type.
Softkeys are:
• Retract Tool—retracts the tool.
• Retract Tool Along Tool Axis (Tilt B axis machines)—retracts tool along
the tool axis.
• Toggle Jog Along Tool Axis (Tilt B axis machines)—toggle on and off
• Manual Rapid Move—accesses the manual rapid move parameters.
• Chip Removal Forward On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a forward
direction. Also turns conveyor off.
The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual
screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey
before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).
• Chip Removal Reverse On/Off—turns the chip conveyor on in a reverse

direction. Also turns conveyor off.
The Chip Conveyor continues to run when you exit the Manual
screen. If you want to stop the conveyor, you must use this softkey
before you exit the screen (E-stop will also stop the conveyor).
• Washdown Coolant On/Off—turns the washdown coolant on and off.

• Worklight On/Off—turns the worklight on and off.
Manual Rapid Move

Manual Rapid Move executes a single axis rapid move to a specific position at a controlled
feedrate. The operator can enter an axis position, either in machine or part coordinates,
and initiate the move to that position at a specified feedrate. More than one axis end
position may be entered, but the move occurs only on the axis that is selected with the
corresponding Rapid Move softkey.
Softkeys are:
• Rapid Move X—enables the rapid move in X.

• Rapid Move Y—enables the rapid move in Y.
• Rapid Move Z—enables the rapid move in Z.
• Rapid Move A—enables the rapid move in A (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt A axis).
• Rapid Move B—enables the rapid move in B (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary/tilt B axis).
• Rapid Move C—enables the rapid move in C (softkey is inactive if the
machine is not equipped with a rotary C axis).
To perform a Manual Rapid Move:
1. In Manual mode, select the Manual Function Setup softkey.

2. Select the Manual Rapid Move softkey. The Manual Rapid Move fields are
displayed. (This softkey is grayed out if the machine is not calibrated.)
3. Select Part or Machine coordinate system from the drop-down Coordinate
System list.
4. Set the linear axis feedrate in the Manual Rapid Feed field. Alternatively, set
the rotary axis feedrate in the Rotary Rapid Feed field.
5. Specify the end position of the move in the appropriate axis field(s).
6. Select the appropriate Rapid Move softkey to enable the move. When the
softkey is selected, a message is displayed that instructs the operator to press
the Start Cycle button to move the axis. When the Start Cycle button is
pressed, the rapid move is performed.
Only one axis move can be performed at a time. During the move, all
other Rapid Move softkeys are disabled until the move is completed.
Once complete, another softkey can be selected, initiating the next
move.
The Rapid Override knob/potentiometer is active during the move.
Manual Rapid Move values are retained after reboot.
Automatic Tool Changers
The ATC for HMX, DCX, and VTXU machines is a random-pocket tool changer that tracks
tools in the magazine using an ATC Map. All ATC operations require that the servo power
is on, that the machine is calibrated, and that the ATC is at Home position.
Loading Tools into the ATC Magazine

The ATC takes a tool from the spindle and automatically loads it into the magazine, if
space allows. The tool’s location in the magazine is recorded in the ATC Map (the
Horizontal Chain Type ATC does not use an ATC Map). Before loading a tool into the ATC
magazine, the Servo power must be On, and the machine must be calibrated.
Do not manually load tools directly into the magazine.
To load the tool currently in the spindle into the ATC magazine:

2. Select the Tool Management softkey. The Spindle tab displays the Tool in
Spindle, Next Tool, and ATC Map (Swing-Arm Random Pocket ATC only) fields
appear.
3. Verify that the Tool In Spindle value matches the tool currently in the spindle.
If the numbers do not match, enter the correct tool number.
4. Enter the same tool number into the Next Tool field.
5. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key.
6. Enter a new tool number into the Next Tool field. The ATC Map field must be
Auto.
7. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key. The Start Cycle light begins flashing.
8. Clear the tool changer and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button. The Tool In Spindle field will be updated to the next tool value.
• If the Next Tool is an Auto tool, it was placed into the magazine when the
previous tool was removed from the spindle.
• If the Next Tool is a Manual tool, you will be prompted to insert it into the
spindle.
Removing Tools from the ATC Magazine
Remove tools from the ATC magazine by following these steps:

2. Select the Tool Management softkey to display the Tool in Spindle. If there is
no tool in the spindle, set the Tool In Spindle field to 0 (zero).
The ATC Map field will indicate if the tool selected is in the magazine,
and its location.
3. Enter the tool number (of the tool you want to remove in the magazine) into
the Next Tool field.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console key to move the Next Tool into the
spindle.
5. Clear the tool changer area and shut the enclosure door. Press the Start Cycle
button to initiate the tool change.
6. Press the Spindle Unclamp button and manually remove the tool from the
spindle.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6, as needed, to remove additional tools from the ATC
magazine.
Large Tools in the ATC Magazine

A part program may require tools with large diameters. These tools can be manually
loaded by the operator, or automatically loaded.
The ATC magazine capacity is reduced by half for tools larger than 80
mm (125 mm for some machines).
Follow these steps to load large tools into the ATC magazine:
1. Touch the ATC Map softkey from the Spindle screen. The ATC Map appears.
2. Touch the Max. Tool Dia. More than XX mm softkey.
3. An “ATC Map will be cleared! Are you sure you want to change Max. Tool
Diameter to more than XX mm?” message appears.
Each time you switch between large and small tools, the entire ATC
Map will be cleared and the magazine must be reloaded.
4. Select the Yes softkey. The ATC Map will clear, then reappear. Only the odd
numbered tool pockets will be available.
5. Reload tools into the magazine using the “Loading a Tool into the Spindle”
section.
6. Return to the default setting of Maximum Tool Diameter XX mm or Less by
using the previous procedure and touching the Max. Tool Dia. XX mm or Less
softkey.
Each VMX or VM machining center is equipped with a swing-arm random pocket
Automatic Tool Changer (ATC).
VM Tool Magazine
The station magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electronic motor and
helical gear drive the magazine. When activated, the tool magazine operates as described
below:
1. The requested tool pocket rotates 90° to make the tool available for the swing
arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab the tool in the pocket and
the tool in the spindle.
3. The spindle unclamps.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and the spindle,
and then rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. Finally, the swing arm and tool pocket return to their original positions.
There are two types of ATCs, which are described in the following sections:
• 40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

• 50-Taper ATC with 30- or 32-Station Tool Magazine
40-Taper ATC with 24- or 40-Station Tool Magazine

This tool changer features a magazine with either 24 or 40 tool pockets (stations). The
magazine is positioned vertically on the machine. An electric motor and helical gear drive
the 24- and 40-station magazine. The 24-station magazine is round and the 40-station
magazine is elliptical. Refer to the previous table for the number of tool pockets (stations)
available for a specific machining center.
ATC Sequence
This is the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine, assuming the magazine is
positioned to the next tool required:
1. The requested tool pocket rotates down 90° to make the tool available for the
swing arm.
2. The swing arm rotates 60° to simultaneously grab both the tool in the pocket
and the tool in the spindle.
4. The swing arm moves down to pull the tools out of the pocket and spindle, and
then the arm rotates 180°.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools.
6. The spindle clamps the new tool in the spindle and the swing arm rotates back
to 0°.
7. The tool pocket moves back to its original position.
Figure 1–18. VMX 40-Taper ATC with 24-station Tool Magazine
50-Taper ATC with 30 or 32-Station Tool Magazine
The VMX50/50T uses the 50-Taper ATC with a 30-station tool magazine. The VMX64 uses
the 50-Taper ATC with a 32-station tool magazine.
An electric motor, two dogs (cam detents), and three proximity switches control the 50-
Taper tool changer motion. For the VMX64, a free-standing hydraulic unit runs the
rotation of the magazine, magazine locking cylinder, and the tool pot up and down
cylinder. The ATC sequence for the 50-taper ATC is the same as the 40-taper ATC
sequence.
Figure 1–19. VMX 64/50-Taper, 32 Station ATC
HMX and VTXU Tool Magazine
The ATC can be operated in Auto or Manual machine mode, using ATC Diagnostics.
HMX Machines
For HMX machines, the following steps explain the basic sequence of operation of the tool
magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.
1. The tool holder rotates to 90°, and the ATC door opens.
2. The exchange arm rotates to 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
holder, and if present, the tool in the spindle, if the following conditions are
met:
• The X, Y, and Z axes are at tool change position.
• The spindle is oriented.
4. The exchange arm moves out and simultaneously pulls the tools from the
holder and the spindle, then rotates 180°.
5. The exchange arm moves in and swaps the tools.
6. The exchange arm rotates to 90°.
7. The ATC door closes and the tool holder simultaneously returns to its original
position.
VTXU Machines
The following steps describe the basic sequence of operation of the tool magazine in the
VTXU magazine, assuming the magazine is positioned to the next tool required.
1. The ATC door opens if the following conditions are met:

• The X and Y axes are at tool change position.
• The Z axis is at Height (refer to ATC and Machine Diagnostics, on page 1 -
145 for more information).
• The spindle is oriented.
2. The tool pocket rotates from the Up position to the Down position.
3. The swing arm rotates 90° and simultaneously grabs the tool in the tool
pocket and, if present, the tool in the spindle.
5. The swing arm moves up and swaps the tools, then rotates 180°.
6. The swing arm and tool pocket return to the original positions.
7. The ATC door closes.
ATC and Machine Diagnostics
8. ATC and Machine Diagnostics display status and diagnostics information.
ATC and Machine Diagnostics Fields
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the ATC and Diagnostic screens.
Note not all fields listed here are displayed for every machine model and configuration:
Air Pressure Coolant Status Overload Status Way Lube Level
ATC Axis Positions Exchange Arm Spindle Chiller Z-Axis Position
ATC Door Hydraulic Status Spindle Clamp/

Unclamp
ATC OK to Stop Magazine Lock Spindle Status
ATC Position Magazine Position Start Pushbutton
ATC Status Magazine Reference Tool Holder
ATC Z Axis Position Magazine Status Tool in Spindle
Selecting another softkey before pressing the Start Cycle button cancels the pending
command and causes the Start Cycle lamp to cease flashing. If the requirements for a
softkey action are not met, a message displays indicating why the action cannot be
commanded. The ATC & Machine Diagnostics softkeys are listed below; some softkeys
may not be present on all machines or may appear in a different order:
•
• Tool Holder Up / Down—sets the command to move the Tool Holder Down
or Up. Each press of the softkey switches command between Down and Up.
• For VM, VMX, VTXU machines, Tool Pocket must be Z-axis at Tool Change
Height, Spindle Clamped, and Oriented Down before moving to 60° (90°).
• Exchange Arm Rotate—sets the command to move the Exchange Arm

down, rotate 180° and up. Tool Pocket must be Down, Load Arm must be at
60°, and spindle must be unclamped.
• Exchange Arm Jog Reverse—sets the command to pulse jog the exchange
arm in the reverse direction. Pulse commands will stop once the Exchange
Arm is at 0 degree.
•
• Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock—sets the command to lock or unlock the
magazine pin. Locked is required for ATC to begin.
•
Tool Fixture Option (TPS)
The Tool Fixture (TPS) option provides an alternative way to manually move tools to and
from the spindle during tool setup or program execution. The TPS software option is
required, as well as a tool fixture. The fixture is attached to the table, near the front
enclosure doors. It is not removable, except for complete removal.
TPS is used as part of a tool change sequence from Tool Setup or Manual or Auto mode.
Tools are laterally loaded into and unloaded from the tool fixture, and use the same
spindle orient position as the ATC arm.
Tools used with TPS are limited by the tool fixture’s height and diameter, as well as ATC
weight restrictions. Tools inserted into the spindle with TPS must be removed with TPS.
You can convert a tool loaded with TPS into an auto tool, as long as it fits the diameter
and weight constraints of the magazine. Once the tool becomes an auto tool, it is no
longer tracked as a TPS loaded tool.
You can insert a tool or remove a tool using TPS in Tool Setup,
Manual Mode or Auto Mode. This section describes tool loading and
unloading using TPS in Tool Setup.
Automatic Tool Removal Using TPS

Follow the instructions below to use TPS to automatically remove a tool from the spindle:
1. Select the Input console key to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey.
3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool you want to
change into the spindle.
4. Select the Auto Tool Change console button. The Start Cycle button begins
flashing.
5. Press the Start Cycle console button to initiate the tool removal process. The
enclosure doors can now be opened. A "Confirm Empty Fixture. Close Doors
and Press Start to Continue" message appears. The Start Cycle button flashes.
6. Make certain the Tool Fixture is empty. Press the Start Cycle button and its
stops flashing.
7. A "Remove Tool X from Fixture, Close Doors & Press Start" message appears
on the screen.
8. Remove the tool from the fixture, close the enclosure doors and Press the
Start Cycle button.
9. The tool entered in step #3 is inserted from the magazine into the spindle.
10. The tool removal is complete.
You must use Manual Mode if the tool you are removing was the last
tool in the spindle.
Automatic Tool Change Using TPS
Follow the instructions below to complete an Auto Tool change using TPS:
1. Select the Input console button to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey to access the Tool Setup screen.
3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool that will be
inserted into the spindle using TPS.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console button. The Start Cycle button begins
flashing.
5. Press the Start Cycle button to initiate the tool change.
a. The Z axis rapids to the home position.
b. The X and Y axes rapid to the Access position. An "Insert Tool X in Fixture.
Press Start" message appears. The Start Cycle button flashes again.
If the Tool in Spindle is 0, a message will appear confirming that the
spindle is empty. If the Tool in Spindle is a number other than 0, the
tool will be removed from the spindle (automatically put into the
magazine or you will be prompted to be removed manually)
6. Insert the tool into the fixture.

7. Close the enclosure doors. Press the Start Cycle button.
a. The Start Cycle button stops flashing.
b. The X and Y axes rapid to the Fixture position.
c. The spindle orients (if it is not already oriented).
d. The spindle unclamps.
e. The Z axis rapids to the Clear position (its position before the tool change
began) - then moves at a fixed, reduced feedrate to the Fixture position.
The spindle clamps the tool.
f. The Z-axis moves to the Fixture position at a reduced feedrate.
g. The spindle clamps the tool.
h. The X and Y axes move to the Clear position (their positions before the tool
change began) at a reduced feedrate.
i. The Z axis rapids to the Tool Change position.
8. The tool change is complete.
A message requesting the tool be removed from the spindle using
TPS will be displayed for any tool that was inserted into the spindle
with TPS. You may use TPS to remove the tool or manually unclamp
the tool to remove it from the spindle.
Bypass TPS in an Automatic Tool Change
Follow the instructions below to complete an Auto Tool change and bypass TPS:
1. Select the Input console button to access the Input screen.

2. Select the Tool Setup softkey to access the Tool Setup screen.
3. With the cursor in the Tool field, enter the number of the tool that will be
inserted into the spindle.
4. Press the Tool Changer Auto console button; the Start Cycle button begins
flashing. Press the Start Cycle button. If there is a tool in the spindle, remove
it before proceeding. If the spindle is empty, the machine moves to the Access
position.
5. When prompted to insert the tool into the fixture, manually insert the tool into
the spindle. To install a tool using TPS, see Automatic Tool Removal Using
TPS, on page 1 - 146.
a. Press the spindle unclamp button and insert the tool. The prompt changes
to "Insert Tool XX in Spindle & Press Start Cycle."
b. Release the unclamp button. The tool is clamped in the spindle.
6. Close the enclosure doors and press the Start Cycle button.
7. The tool change is complete.
Any tool that is inserted into the spindle manually (bypassing TPS)
must be removed manually.
HMX Automatic Pallet Changer
The Automatic Pallet Changer (APC) system is standard on HMX machining centers.
Equipped with two pallets, the APC provides the ability to set up a part on one pallet while
a part is being machined on the other pallet.
The B-axis must be squared before any operation can occur. Refer to
Squaring the Pallet, on page 1 - 149 for instructions for squaring the
APC table.
This is the basic sequence of operation of the APC:
1. The APC Pin unlocks.

2. The APC table raises and rotates 180°. Hydraulic solenoids ensure the table
rotates in the proper direction.
The APC table does not rotate through 360°, but rotates in the
opposite direction to return to its previous position.
3. The APC table lowers into position.

4. The APC Pin locks.
Only a Hurco-certified Service Engineer can make adjustments to the

APC Table.
Squaring the Pallet

The pallet is not automatically squared during machine calibration. It must be squared
before it can be used. Follow these steps to square the pallet:
1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the Diagnostics softkey.
3. Select the Pallet Changer Diagnostics softkey to access the APC Diagnostics
screen.
4. Select the More softkey to access the second APC Diagnostic screen.
5. Select the Move Z-axis to APC Position softkey to position the Z-axis at the
APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis
to the APC position.
6. Select the Square Pallet For Rotation softkey and press the Cycle Start
button. The pallet will rotate into the proper position for the pallet exchange
cycle.
If the B-axis is away from the squared position, selecting the Square
Pallet For Rotation softkey rotates the table at the maximum RPM
back to the squared location.
Operating the APC
The APC can be operated in Auto mode within a Conversational or NC part program.
Follow these steps to operate the APC in a Conversational program:
1. On any Conversational part programming data block, select the

Miscellaneous softkey.
2. Select the Machine Function softkey to display the Machine Function screen.
3. Scroll through the M Code list to select the appropriate code, then select the
Select M Code softkey.
The following M Codes are used to operate the APC (use the scroll bar to view
more M codes, if necessary):
• M51 Cycle APC—requires confirmation from the Operator before a pallet

change cycle is initiated (see details below).
• M56 Cycle APC w/o Notify—complete a pallet change cycle without
confirmation from the Operator.
• M57 Cycle to Pallet #1—place Pallet 1 in the machine without
• M58 Cycle to Pallet #2—place Pallet 2 in the machine without
Figure 1–20. Machine Function Screen with M Code List
Using M51 does not require indicating whether Pallet 1 or 2 is in the machining
setup area. Before M51 will initiate the APC cycle, the front enclosure doors must
be closed and the APC Ready pushbutton pressed.
• If the front enclosure doors are open when the M51 operation is requested,
the program will be in a Feed Hold state and a message to close the front
enclosure doors will be displayed. Close the doors and press the APC Ready
pushbutton to continue the part program.
• If the APC Ready pushbutton has not been pressed when the M51 operation
is requested, the program will be in a Feed Hold state with the following
message displayed, “Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet
changer.” Press the APC Ready and Cycle Start pushbuttons on the APC
Panel to continue the program.
Pressing Feed Hold during a pallet change cycle will stop the cycle.
Releasing Feed Hold will resume the cycle. However, Feed Hold
followed by Spindle Off (or the Stop Cycle button) during a pallet
change cycle will abort the program and the pallet change cycle. The
APC must be returned to the home position using the Pallet Changer
Diagnostics before an Auto program can be run again.
Refer to the NC Programming Manual for instructions on operating the APC within an NC
program.
APC Diagnostics
Follow these steps to access the APC Diagnostics screen:
1. Press the MACHINE MODE MANUAL console key.

2. Select the DIAGNOSTICS softkey.
3. Select the PALLET CHANGER DIAGNOSTICS softkey. The APC Diagnostics
screen 1 opens:
APC Diagnostics Screen 1 APC Diagnostics Screen 2
Figure 1–21. APC Diagnostics Screens 1 and 2
APC Status Conditions
The APC Diagnostics screen displays the status of inputs for the APC system.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the fields on the ATC and Diagnostic screens:
APC Clamp Status Pallet in Machine
APC Door Status Pallet Pin
APC Position Pallet Reference

Position
ATC Status Pallet Status in

Machine
B-Axis Status Z-Axis Position
Hydraulic Status
APC Diagnostics Softkeys

The APC Diagnostic softkeys are functional only when Servo Power is On and the machine
is calibrated. These are the APC Diagnostic softkeys.
• Cycle Pallet Changer—sets the command to complete a full rotation of the

APC Table. This function will perform a full APC cycle. The Z-axis will move to
the APC position, the B-axis will square, the APC table will raise, the APC
table will rotate 180 degrees, and will then lower.
• Raise Pallet Changer—sets the command to lift the APC Table to the Up
position. The B-axis must be squared and the Z-axis must be at the APC
position.
• Rotate APC to Position 1—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
Position 1 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the
APC must be in the raised position, and Position 1 must not be in the
machining area.
• Rotate APC to Position 2—sets the command to rotate the APC table to
Position 2 inside the machining area. The B-axis must be squared and the
APC must be in the raised position, and Position 2 must not be in the
machining area.
• Lower Pallet Changer—sets the command to lower the APC table to the
Down position. The Z-axis must be in the APC position. The table must be at
Pos 1 or Pos 2.
• More—opens the second APC Diagnostics screen.
• Move Z-Axis to APC Position—sets the command to move the Z-axis to the
APC position. The APC table must be in the down position to move the Z-axis
to the APC position.
• Square Pallet for Rotation—sets the command to square the pallet.
• Enable APC Jog Mode—allows the operator to jog the APC table up and
down and also jog the APC table 180 degrees. When selected, a message
displays indicating to proceed with caution:
This message is displayed until the APC Diagnostics screens are exited or
until an E-stop occurs.
APC Jog Mode
The operator should verify the position of the Z-axis before jogging the APC. From APC
screen 1, the operator can select Raise Pallet Changer, Lower Pallet Changer, Rotate APC
to Position 1, or Rotate APC to Position 2. Once a function has been selected, the green
Start Cycle button flashes and a message is displayed:
Figure 1–22. APC Diagnostic screen 1 with APC Jog Mode messages
The operator can then press and hold the green Start Cycle button to jog the APC. The
operator must hold the Start Cycle button down while jogging. Once the Start Cycle
button is released, the jogging function stops. The operator must select a softkey
function again to enable the jogging.
Once selected, the APC Jog Mode remains enabled until the operator
navigates away from the APC diagnostic screens or an E-stop occurs
Dual-Zone Machining
Dual-zone machining provides the ability to set up a job in one zone while machining in
the other zone.
To use both zones on a dual-zone capable machine, the Enable Dual Zones parameter
must be set to enable dual zones. This is done in Machine Parameters:
1. Select the Auxilary console key.

2. Select the Utility Screen icon.
4. Select the Machine Parameters softkey.
The Enable Dual Zones parameter is listed on Page 1 of Machine Parameters. Set this
parameter to 1 to enable dual zones (1 is the default setting). When this parameter is set
to 0, the machine can be used as a single long bed vertical machine.
The zone partition must be removed to use as a single long bed

vertical machine.
See Machine Parameters, on page 1 - 61 for more information about the Enable Dual
Zones parameter.
Part Programming for Dual-Zones

Each zone has its own coordinate system, so a Change Part Setup data block is used to
modify the coordinates for each zone. This Change Part Setup block is used to switch
zones while running a program. At the beginning of the program and at each point where
a zone change is required, insert a Change Part Setup block:
1. From the Input screen select Part Programming, the Insert Block Before
softkey, the Miscellaneous softkey, and the Change Part Setup softkey. A
Change Part Setup block is added.
2. Modify Part Zero X, Y, Z (Part Zero Z is available only if using Absolute Tool
Length mode) for the zone.
3. Modify Offset Z (if using Zero Calibration mode only) for the zone.
4. Specify the zone the part setup applies to in the Zone field.
• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).
• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).
• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled
but you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the
Zone field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently
occupies.
Zone field is not displayed in single long bed configuration.
Viewing Graphics
Graphics can be displayed in one or both zones:
1. Press the Draw console key to display the Graphics screen.

2. Select the Select View softkey. Select the All Views softkey.
3. Select the Select Zone softkey.
4. Select Zone 1, Zone 2, or All Zones.
The zone setting must match the zone of the program (or be set to
All Zones) to view the part program in Graphics.
The zone is displayed in the lower left corner of the graphics display:
Figure 1–23. Isometric view of parts in both zones
Dual-Zone Operation
Programs can be run in one zone while the other zone is accessible to the operator for set
up or other functions.
Setup Confirmation
Each zone door is equipped with a green Zone Setup Confirmation button and a red
Emergency Stop button:
Emergency Stop Button Confirmation Button
Figure 1–24. Emergency Stop and Zone Confirmation buttons
The green Zone Setup Confirmation button must be pressed to confirm that the zone is
ready before the spindle will move into the zone to start machining.
The red Emergency Stop button will stop all machine operation when pressed.
Running Programs
To run a program, press the Cycle Start button. A pop-up confirmation message appears,
and the green Zone Setup Confirmation button flashes on the door of the zone where the
program will run. Push the green flashing button to confirm setup. If the spindle head is
in the current zone for program, no confirmation is required.
While the program is running, you are able to set up in the other zone. When the door to
the second zone is closed and the program completes its run in the first zone, the green
Zone Setup Confirmation button on the second zone door flashes. Press it to start
machining in the that zone.
• In dual-zone configuration, the door of the opposite zone can be opened until
the green Zone Setup Confirmation button is pressed. The door must be
closed before the confirmation will be accepted and the door locked.
• To unlock the door while the spindle head is in the opposite zone, press the
green Zone Setup Confirmation button to cancel confirmation.
• With CE enabled the door will not open when the green Zone Setup
Confirmation button is lit.
Auto Mode
Programs are run in Auto Mode. Press the Auto button on the console to access Auto
Mode to check for errors, compute estimated run time, recovery/restart, perform a dry
run, or run a part program.
Figure 1–25. Auto Mode screen
The following softkeys are available in Auto Mode:
• Use Editing File—selects the active program file to run. If this softkey is not
selected, WinMax defaults to the last program run. If the last program run
does not match the program that is being edited (as indicated in status bar),
the operator will be prompted to select which program to run.
• Feed & Speed Optimization—fine tunes program execution, using the Axis
Feed Rate and Spindle Speed dials to adjust values. This softkey is disabled in
Test Mode.
• Linear Thermal Compensation—accesses the Linear Thermal
Compensation table where parameters are set to manage linear growth. See
Linear Thermal Compensation, on page 1 - 159.
• Check for Errors—checks the program from the Start Block through the End
Block and displays error status. The number of the data block containing the
error is included in the error message.
The time required for error checking depends upon the program’s length and
complexity. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop error checking at any
time.
• Compute Estimated Run Time—provides an estimate of time it takes to

run the program. Select the Abort Operation softkey to stop computing
estimated run time.
Error checking automatically occurs during Compute Estimated Run Time.
• Recovery Restart—restarts a conversational or NC part program; typically
at the point at which the program was interrupted. This softkey is disabled in
Test Mode.
• For Conversational Programs—if necessary, Conversational Start and End
blocks can be changed from the default.
For Mill Contour data blocks: Recovery Restart only occurs at segment 0
of a Mill Contour data block, not at a segment within a data block.
For Pattern data blocks: the user is prompted to specify which pattern or
block instance to restart at and to provide any additional restart
information for the start block. See Patterns Overview, on page 2 - 110 of
the Patterns chapter, for more information.
• For NC Programs—use the following softkeys to restart an NC program

after it was aborted either by the machine or the operator. Preparatory
functions such as coolant, feeds and speeds, and offsets will be executed
before machining resumes, and Tool Vector input is checked.
• Set Restart Marker—manually sets the restart marker. An “R” will

appear to the left of the block selected, and will clear if the program
successfully runs.
• Auto Set Restart Marker—automatically marks the last block being
executed when the program was stopped, or where an error occurred
during error checking.
• Reset Restart Marker—clears the Restart Marker and cancels the
Recovery Restart operation. Can be used on a block after a G41/G42.
• Set End Marker—indicates the block that system should use to end
program verification and execution. An “E” is inserted to the left of the
block.
• Reset End Marker—restores end marker to its default position at the
end of the program.
• Dry Run—active in Test Run mode only. Performs a program test run to
identify potential problems before cutting the part. Specify all or a portion of
the part program that will be tested in the Start and End blocks.
Trace the tool over the part at the programmed minimum Z level with the
Spindle Off. Peck cycles and roughing passes are skipped.
If the Z Start value is set below the stock surface, the Minimum Z
value must be programmed so the tool does not plunge into the part.
A message appears requesting the Minimum Z value. Note that
Minimum Z will be shifted by patterns.
• Run Program—initiates program execution and displays monitoring

information. Disabled in Test Mode. When selected, the program is buffered
and the Start Cycle button flashes. Pressing the Start Cycle button starts the
program run. If the machine is not calibrated, the Manual screen immediately
displays.
Changes made to a program while running take effect when the Start
Cycle button is pressed again.
Linear Thermal Compensation
Linear Thermal Compensation parameters allow axis adjustments to compensate for
linear growth. Offsets can be set for any linear axis, at specified time intervals, in minutes
(up to 99,999,999). Between two and ten entries can be set.
Since compensation is applied to the machine X-, Y-, and/or Z-axes,

it cannot be used to compensate spindle thermal growth on rotary
machines when the spindle is not aligned to the machine Z-axis.
Linear Thermal Compensation is enabled in the Auto Mode screen, where the reference
time is set in the Current Time field. Current Time is increased automatically during
program run, and is paused when the program is finished. Time and offsets remain
unchanged when the program is not running.
Offsets can be imported using the Import Offsets from File softkey. Offsets can be
saved/exported using the Export Offsets to File softkey.
Determining Offset Time and Positions for Linear Thermal Compensation

The Linear Thermal Compensation table is part-specific. A gauge or probe can be used to
determine the offsets by measuring reference surfaces.
1. Turn off Linear Thermal Compensation (Enable set to NO on Auto Mode

screen).
2. Measure reference surfaces.
3. Run part program. At identified intervals (in minutes), quickly measure
reference surfaces using same tool or probe, at same locations.
4. Recovery restart the part program.
5. Repeat step 3 and 4 until the part program is finished or measurement values
stabilize.
6. Record the intervals (time) and position differences into the Linear Thermal
Compensation table.
Auto Mode Monitoring
The Auto Mode Monitoring screen appears when the Run Program softkey is selected
and program execution begin. Real-time machine and part locations and machine status
are shown, as well as Spindle Load Monitor, the data block and type of operation, and the
part count.
For NC programs, five lines of NC code are shown; to view more NC code as the program
runs, select the NC Monitor softkey. The bottom portion of the screen is reserved for
program status and error messages.
5 lines of
Spindle Load NC code
Monitor
Figure 1–26. Auto Mode Monitoring screen
See the Field Glossary for definitions of fields on the Auto mode screens (fields displayed
vary depending on machine, configuration, and/or program type):
Axis Limit Switches End Block Part Count S / Spindle
Block End Job Part Program Name Spindle Load Monitor
Coolant F(%) Part Program Path Start Block
CR / Chip Removal F / Feed Opt Stop On (Off) Start Job
Current Time Machine Orientation Time / Program Run

Time
Enable Linear Thermal Magazine R(%) TIS / Tool in Spindle

Compensation
Part S(%) Zone
These are the monitoring softkeys that may be available for Auto Mode Monitoring:
• Reset Part Count—Part Count is the number of times a program was

executed. To return this value to zero when a new program starts, select the
Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value
can be changed or reset to zero.
Access to the part counter is locked out by Edit Lockout Level

“Full,” set in User Interface Settings. See Edit Lockout, on page 1 -
46 for information.
• Chip Removal Forward On/Off— turn the chip auger in the forward
(clockwise) direction on or off. This selection is saved when the Interrupt
button is pressed or after the program has finished running. If a stop
condition or mode change is made before restarting a new part program or
exiting the interrupt cycle, the saved information is cleared. This softkey is
only available if your machining center uses a chip auger.
• Optional Stop On/Off—pauses the program and shuts off the spindle.
Optional Stop can be turned On and Off through a soft key in the main menu
on the Auto screen while a program is running. When this setting is changed,
the new state applies immediately and applies to all programs.
For NC programs, when Optional Stop is ON, an M01 code in an NC program

will be processed and will cause a program stop (see M00), which will display
a message requesting that the operator press Start Cycle to continue. When
Optional Stop is OFF the code will be ignored.
For Conversational programs, an M01 can be inserted using a Machine

Function data block.
An optional stop can also be set in Position, Rotary Position, and Comment
data blocks by setting the Stop field to Optional. The block will function as if
the Stop field were set to YES when the Optional Stop softkey is enabled. See
Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 and Comment Block, on page 2 - 125 in
Conversational Programming, and Rotary Position Block, on page 5 - 6 in
Options.
• Select DRO— view machine, part, distance-to-go, workpiece, and/or

transform plane information, displayed in either standard or quad-size DRO
view. See Digital Read Out (DRO), on page 1 - 162, below.
• Coolant Washdown On/Off—turn the coolant washdown on or off for
washing chips from the enclosure.
• NC Monitor—displays a pop-up window containing the current NC code. This
feature allows you to view the code as the program runs; the program name
appears in the Current Program Name box at the bottom of the monitor. The
line of code that is currently being machined is identified in red. When the
“Show Modals” boxed is checked, the current active modals are shown. As
machining progresses, the monitor will scroll through the lines of code. Select
the “Close” button at the bottom of the window to close the NC Monitor.
The NC Monitor softkey is available when an NC program is running or

during the NC portion of an NC/Conversational merged program. In a merged
program, once the monitor is opened, it will display during the NC program
run, and will be automatically hidden during the Conversational run.
• Toggle Rapid Override Lockout—enable or disable overrides to the

programmed rapid traverse using the Rapid Override console knob. A
confirmation message appears; select Yes to confirm the switch.
• Worklight On/Off—turn the enclosure worklight on or off. This softkey is
only available if your machining center is equipped with an enclosure
worklight.
Digital Read Out (DRO)

The Auto Run screen uses a standard size digital read out (DRO) at the top of the screen
in addition to other fields and information. A Quad-size DRO is available that provides
large-view machine, part, or distance-to-go for the part program that is running.
Select the SELECT DRO softkey on the Auto Program Run screen to change the size of
the digital read out (DRO). From the Select DRO screen you can see real-time machine
information displayed in full-screen view. The softkey menu provides these DRO options:
• Machine / Part (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location relative to

machine zero and current part zero.
• Distance to Go (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location relative to
machine zero and current part zero, and the remaining distance to
completion of move.
• WorkPC / TR Plane (Standard DRO)—shows real-time axes location
relative to machine zero, workpiece zero, and transform plane zero.
• Machine (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the real-time axes
location relative to machine zero.
• Part Relative (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the real-time axes
location relative to current part zero.
• Distance To Go (Quad-size DRO)—shows in a larger view the remaining
distance to completion of each move.
• Dist to Go / Trans (Standard DRO)—shows real-time distance-to-go, and
axes location relative to workpiece zero and transform plane zero.
Use the SELECT DRO softkey to select a different DRO display.
A (c) next to the axis indicates the axis is clamped.
To access the configurable DRO view, select the Auxiliary button, and choose the Launch
DRO softkey.
Concurrent Programming
Concurrent Programming allows you to create or edit a program while simultaneously
machining a different program. When using Concurrent Programming, two part programs
are simultaneously available. To enter Concurrent Programming while machining a part,
press the console Input key. The Auto screen is replaced by the Input screen.
Stop Machine Operation

There are three methods to stop machine operation without turning off the power:
• Emergency Stop
• Park machine
• Control Power Off Timer parameter
The methods described here stop machine operation, but do not
shutdown the control. See Shutdown Control, on page 1 - 165 for
more information about shutting down the control.
If the machine will not be used for several days, or the shop has
power surges or blackouts, turn off machine power at the main
power switch, after stopping machine motion and shutting down the
control.
Emergency Stop
To shut down the machining center quickly, press the Emergency Stop button. All motion
stops and power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and
servo systems.
Do not use Emergency Stop shut down if the machine has a long
table with heavy equipment attached to one end. Instead, park the
machine so that the weight of the table and any attached equipment
will be evenly distributed.
Before hitting the Emergency Stop button, park the machine or

center the table.
When the Emergency Stop button is pressed, a special error file is created and saved to
the machine hard drive in a folder called NavESTOP. These files record the machine
conditions at the time the Emergency Stop button is pressed. These files can be retrieved
when necessary for service purposes; refer to Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files, on page
Park Machine
Parking the machine centers the table and places the spindle at the home position. Table
and attached equipment weight is distributed evenly when the machine is parked. Before
parking the machine, the servo power must be on, the machine must be calibrated and
the Tool in Spindle must be 0.
Follow this procedure to park the machine:
1. Press the Manual Mode console button.

2. Select the PARK MACHINE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
3. Press the Start Cycle button. The machine moves to its park position.
4. A message with instructions to return to the power-up condition is displayed.
Control Power Off Timer

Set the Control Power Off Timer on the Machine Parameters screen. All motion stops and
power is shut off to the spindle, relay control, way lubrication pumps, and servo systems.
Where can we go from here?
To restart the machine after the Emergency Stop was pressed, follow
this sequence:
1. Twist the Emergency Stop button to release it.

2. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.
3. Press the Power On button.
4. Press the Start Cycle button.
Or...
To restart the machine after it was parked, follow this sequence:
1. Press the Manual Machine Mode button.

2. Press the Power On button.
Or...
If machine will not be used for several days or power surges and
blackouts are common, switch off the machine’s power. After
restarting, calibrate and warm up the machine.
Restart Control
The Restart Control command will remove control power, complete an orderly shutdown
of the WinMax Mill control, and then restart.
Follow these steps to use the Restart Control command:
1. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
2. From the Utilities screen, select the Restart Control softkey to access the
Restart Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want to
restart the control?”
3. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Restart Control command is
performed. This feature saves time and avoids having to shut down the entire
machine when it is only necessary to restart the control.
Shutdown Control
The Shutdown Control command will remove control power and complete an orderly
shutdown of the WinMax control.
Hurco recommends using the Shutdown Control command prior to

turning off machine power to ensure that no data is lost.
1. Follow these steps to use the Shutdown Control command:

2. Press the Aux/Menu key followed by the Utility Screen softkey to access the
Utilities screen and softkey menu.
3. From the Utilities screen, select the Shutdown Control softkey to access the
Shutdown Control command. A pop-up message appears: “Do you really want
to shut down the control?”
4. Select Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Shutdown Control command is
performed.
5. Wait for the shutdown process to finish before shutting off machine power at
the Main Disconnect switch.
ULTIMOTION
Hurco’s UltiMotion system provides the following benefits:
Improved Surface Quality
With Hurco's proprietary smoothing, lookahead and motion control technology, the
UltiMotion system provides significantly improved part surface quality. You'll see
smoother and shinier surfaces, less vibration, less chatter marks, and higher accuracy.
Higher Throughput
Compared with a standard motion system, the UltiMotion system's advanced motion
planning and rapid corner feature can provide decreased cycle time with the same or
even better surface finish quality. This is especially true for parts with complex
geometries or large amounts of repeated tasks, such as drilling or tapping.
Rapid Corner
For programs with a lot of consecutive rapid moves, the UltiMotion system doesn't stop
between two rapids. Instead, it travels through blended corners at very high speed with
only negligible deviation. This saves significant amount of time for repeated tasks, such
as drilling and tapping.
Broader Performance Range for Surface Finish Quality
The Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) mechanism is Hurco's proprietary technology to allow
users to choose better surface finish or higher throughput for their applications via a
simple one-parameter control mechanism. Winmax control automatically adjusts internal
parameters to achieve either better surface quality (smaller SFQ) or higher throughput
(higher SFQ). The UltiMotion system extends the performance range for SFQ to have
even better surface quality for your finish pass and even more time savings in the
roughing or semi-roughing passes.
Higher Quality Rigid and Regular Tapping
The UltiMotion system deploys a coordinated motion control mechanism for regular and
rigid tapping. You no longer need to worry if your tap will pass go/no-go tests; the
UltiMotion system monitors the spindle angle at all times and controls the Z-axis to track
the spindle position.
Smoother Motion Results in Longer Machine Life
Rough motion, vibration, and bumping increase mechanical system fatigue and shorten
machine life. The UltiMotion system's unique acceleration and jerk control, along with its
advanced motion planning, have made it possible to achieve faster, yet smoother motion.
You will get a faster machine with extended machine life.
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-501 UltiMotion 1-169

Robust and Consistent Performance Over a Wide Range of Working Conditions
Have you ever had trouble maintaining the equivalent performance with work pieces
weighing from several ounces to several thousands of pounds? The UltiMotion system's
advance and accurate model compensation will help you to maintain the same level of
performance over a wide range of working conditions.
Dynamic Variable Lookahead Algorithm
Hurco's proprietary Lookahead doesn't require a fixed number of blocks lookahead like
conventional controls; instead the lookahead varies dynamically depending on the
geometry and motion profile, but always guarantees there is enough to make optimized
maneuvers.
Smooth and Responsive Handwheel Jogging
Compared with standard system, the UltiMotion system's hand wheel jogging is
optimized to reduce bumping and vibration while providing more responsiveness.
How to Select the Motion System

The UltiMotion option must be installed. To turn it on or off:
1. Select the Auxiliary console button.

3. Select the System Configuration softkey.
4. Select the WinMax Configuration softkey.
5. Select the Software Options softkey. The software options are displayed.
6. Select the UltiMotion option and use the Enable or Disable Selected Option
softkeys to toggle on or off.
To view the current Motion System:
1. Select the Auxiliary console button.

3. Select the System Configuration softkey.
4. Select the WinMax Configuration softkey.
5. Select the Motion Configuration softkey. The Motion Configuration screen
opens and the current motion system is displayed.
6. Select either Standard or UltiMotion in the Motion System field. The system
must be restarted for the change to take effect.
1 - 170 UltiMotion 704-0116-501 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAMMING
Conversational programming allows you to create a part program from a blueprint or
program worksheet while working at the machine. Operating selections and prompts on
the screen lead you through the steps necessary to enter the data for a part program.
Machining operation information is stored within data blocks describing each operation to
be performed.
Create and access the data blocks through the Part Programming softkey or icon.
These topics are discussed in the Overview section:
Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Programming Dual-Zone Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Pecking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8
Cutter Compensation (preliminary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 14
Lead In/Out Moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 15
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming 2-1

Part Programming
Part Programming is the process of entering data, often from a blueprint, into program
data blocks to create a part.
Data blocks appear in numerical order as they are created.
To create a Conversational Part Program:
1. Press the Input console key to display the Input screen. The Input screen
allows you to access setup functions including Import Functions, Tool Setup,
and Program Parameters. See Input Mode, on page 1 - 90l for more
information.
2. Enter machining operation information in the Part Setup and Tool Setup
functions. This information is stored within data blocks describing each
operation to be performed. Create and access the data blocks through the
Input screen.
3. Select the Part Programming softkey to begin programming. The system
displays either the first block of an existing program or a New Block screen for
new programs.
Data blocks can be managed with the following programming operations:
• Access softkeys to create a new data block or edit an existing data block in
the Input screen.
• View a list summarizing a part program's data blocks on the Program Review
screen. See Review Mode, on page 1 - 132 for more information.
• View the current program's tool list on the Tool Review screen. Refer to Part
Program Tool Review, on page 1 - 116 for more information.
• Use the Insert Block Before softkey to Insert a new data block between two
sequentially numbered blocks. The data blocks following the inserted block
are automatically renumber.
• Holes blocks contain operations, and Mill Contour blocks contain segments.
Part Programming softkeys access the following options:
• Position—Insert instructions to move the tool away from the part (or
fixture), or to stop a program. A Position block is most often used to move
the table to an X-Y location and is normally used at the end of the program
and at any time the tool must be moved to the Z Top position of the Safety
Work Region. See Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 for more information.
• Holes—Select Drill, Tap, Bore and Ream drilling operations, and Back
Spotface and Bolt Circle hole drilling. The locations of these holes on the part
can be specified using the Locations operation, and the holes can also be
programmed in a Bolt Circle pattern. See Holes Operations, on page 2 - 89
2 - 2 Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

• Milling—Program milling operations. See also Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour),
on page 2 - 19, Mill Ellipse, on page 2 - 33, Mill Frame, on page 2 - 29, Mill
Face, on page 2 - 31, Mill HD3 Lettering, on page 2 - 69, and Swept Surface
Parameters, on page 2 - 75. Special milling blocks Triangle, Diamond 1 Face,
Diamond 2 Faces, and Hexagon are accessed with the Special  softkey, see
Insert Pockets, on page 2 - 70 for more information.
• Patterns—Repeat or modify a sequence of one or more data blocks. A
program sequence can be repeated in a rectangular, linear, angular, or
rotated pattern or at specified locations. This operation is also used to scale
or mirror a programmed part. See Patterns Operations, on page 2 - 109 for
more information.
• Miscellaneous—Access these softkey functions:
• Graphics Off and ON; see Graphics On/Off, on page 2 - 121.
• Change Parameters; Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121.
• Change Part Setup; see Change Part Setup, on page 2 - 123.
• Machine Function; see Machine Function, on page 2 - 124.
• Probe Part Setup; see Probe Part Setup Data Block, on page 4 - 65.
• Lube Cycle; see Lube Cycle, on page 2 - 124.
• Comment; see Comment Block, on page 2 - 125.
• Insert; see Insert Block, on page 2 - 125.
• Tool Monitoring (Probing); see Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.
• Part Inspection; see Part Quality Verification, on page 4 - 67.
• Tool Optimize On and Off; see Tool Change Optimization, on page 2 - 126.
• NC Program Call—Access an NC program from within the conversational
program with this softkey. See NC/Conversational Merge, on page 2 - 131.
• Rotary and Transform Planes—Accesses the Rotary New Block menu
where you can access the Rotary Position, Milling, and Patterns, and
Parameters blocks, as well as the Transform Plane and Transform Plane
Groups blocks. See Rotary, on page 5 - 1 for more information.

Block Layout
The layout of most data blocks includes the part geometry at the top of the screen with
the tool information below it, as in the following example:
Part geometry
Operation data
Operation Data
Information about block execution, such as tool, cutter compensation, pocketing,
roughing, finishing, and surface finish quality is entered on the bottom part of the data
block. Fields are displayed on tabs for Roughing, Rest, Finishing, SFQ, and Allowances.
The tabs and fields displayed are dependent on the block, machine type/configuration, or
software options installed:
Roughing tab
This tab contains the tool information for the roughing pass.
• Tool—the tool used for the roughing pass.

• Milling Type—the type of cutting operation.
• Pocket Type (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary)—the pocket
type: Inward, Outward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way.
• Mill Feed—the axis feedrate. Value initially displayed has been calculated by
the control and can be retained or changed to a different value.
• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the roughing tool. This value is carried over
from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the field.
• Pocket Overlap (%) (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary,
UltiPockets option required)—the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps
for each pass in a pocket milling operation. If the overlap is less than 50%,
the toolpath may make additional moves to clean out the pocket. For
example (toolpath is red):

Additional corner moves for
Pocket Overlap of 25%
If you change the Pocket Overlap using this field and save the file as
an HD3 file, a Change Parameters data block will be inserted into the
HD3 file to make the Pocket Overlap change. The Change Parameters
block changes only the Pocket Overlap, leaving all other parameters
as they were.
• Peck Depth—the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total depth is
greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0)
value causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.
• Plunge Feed—the feedrate for the tool moving from Z Start to Z Bottom.
• Radial Peck Count (appears only in a Mill Thread block)—the number of
radial pecking passes. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 for more information.
• Radial Peck Depth (appears only in a Mill Thread block)—the incremental
distance from the final cut. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53.
Rest tab
This tab appears only when the Milling type is Pocket Boundary and the Pocket Type is
ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way (UltiPockets option required). This tab is used to specify the
tool information for the rest milling pass - to clear out remaining material from corners
when pocketing.
• Tool—the tool used for the rest milling pass.

• Pocket Type—the pocket type: ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way.
• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the rest milling tool. This value is carried
over from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the
field.
• Peck Depth—the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total depth is
greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0)
value causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.
Finishing tab
This tab contains tool information for the finishing pass.

• Tool—the tool used for the finishing pass.
• Milling Type—the type of cutting operation. This value is carried over from
the Roughing tab and cannot be changed.
• Pocket Type (appears when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary)—the pocket
type for the finish pocketing operations: Inward or Outward.
• Speed (RPM)—spindle speed for the finishing tool. This value is carried over
from Tool Setup, but can be overridden here by typing a value in the field.
SFQ tab
This tab is used to specify the surface finish quality for the roughing pass and finishing
pass. SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required.
The default SFQ for roughing is 80 and finishing is 20. Recommended values are:
SFQ Desired Result
1-20 High precision parts / finishing
Allowances tab
This tab appears when Stock Allowance mode is set to Data Blocks in Program
Parameters, Milling 1 tab. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started
with WinMax Mill. This allows the stock allowance to be set in the data block rather than
using a global value from Program Parameters.
Set the stock allowances left by the roughing pass:
• Finish XY—specifies the stock width to be left by the roughing pass.

• Finish Z—specifies the stock depth to be left by the roughing pass.
When the cursor is in the Finish XY or Finish Z field, the following softkeys appear:
• Copy Allowances from Parameters—copies the values for Finish XY and

Finish Z from Program Parameters.
• Clear Allowances—zeros out the values in the Finish XY and Finish Z fields.
Select Tool from List

Use the following steps to select a tool using the Select Tool From List softkey:
1. In a program block screen, place the cursor in the Tool field and choose the
Select Tool From List softkey.
2. Locate the desired tool using one of the following methods:

• Scroll through the list of tools and select the desired tool to highlight it.
• Begin typing the number of the desired tool. A pop-up box will appear
when the first digit is entered; enter the entire number and select OK to
jump to that tool number in the list.
3. Select the Select Tool softkey, which enters the tool into the data block or
segment.
If Tool Type Checking is enabled, only tools that are suitable for the
programmed operation can be selected.
Check the Display Tool Notes checkbox to view the Notes for each
tool. Notes can be entered in Part Program Tool Review and
Advanced Tool Settings when the Tool & Material Library option is
installed.
The Select Tool list displays in the sort order most recently used,
when accessed via any screen - data blocks, Tool Management, or
Tool Setup.
Temporary Parameter Change

For some programs, you may want to insert a temporary parameter change block
between data blocks.
1. Display the data block for which the parameter change will first be used.
2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey. The New Block screen appears.
3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey. Choose the Change Parameter Softkey.
See Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 and Change Part Setup, on page 2 - 123 for
more information.
Automatic Calculations
The WinMax AutoCalc feature enables the system to calculate certain dimensions
automatically after sufficient data has been programmed. Leave a data field blank to
automatically calculate the value for that field. After sufficient data is entered in the other
fields, the system automatically fills in the blank data field(s) and displays “CAL” next to
those field(s).
The screen displays a Store Calculated Value softkey for editing a field with a
calculated value. Select this softkey or the Enter key to store the displayed value into the
part program. Do not re-enter the data, i.e., 8.9199; the data is actually 8.9199xxx and
will be calculated as such when entered with the softkey or Enter key.
If you enter a value and later decide to let the control calculate the data, clear the
entered value by following these steps:
1. Use the Arrow keys or the touchscreen to select the parameter where the
automatic calculation is needed.
2. Press the C (Clear) console key or the Delete key on the keyboard.
3. Press the Enter key. The calculated value is displayed (if the field remains
blank, additional data must be entered so the control can calculate the value).

Programming Dual-Zone Machines
With dual-zone machining, machining occurs in one zone while the other zone is being
used to set up the part. A Change Part Setup data block is used to switch zones. The
Enable Dual Zones parameter must be set for dual zones to use both zones; see Machine
Parameters, on page 1 - 61 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Pecking
Pecking in a Milling Block
Pecking optimizes tool wear, deflection, feeds, and speeds by avoiding a full depth of cut
in a single machining pass.
Pecking is controlled with the Peck Depth field in a milling block. Peck Depth specifies the
maximum depth that is milled per pass:
If the Peck Depth value is non-zero, the following sequence occurs:
1. Tool feeds down to the first peck depth (the value of Z Start minus the
Peck Depth value).
2. Contour is milled.
3. Tool retracts at rapid to Retract Clearance Plane.
4. XY moves at rapid to plunge point.
5. Tool moves at rapid down to the previous peck depth plus the Peck
Clearance Plane.
6. Tool feeds down to the second peck depth (Z start minus 2 times the Peck
Depth value).
7. Cycle repeats until the Z Bottom depth is reached.
If Peck Depth is zero, the total depth to Z Bottom is cut in one pass.
Pecking clearances are set on the Program Parameters screen/General 1 tab:
• Enable Pecking Retract Clearance

• Pecking Retract Clearance
• Peck Clearance Plane
In a Mill Thread block, Radial Peck Depth is used when more than one cutting pass is
required. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 for more information.

Cutter Compensation (preliminary)
Cutter Compensation is set in the Milling Type field in a milling program block.
Cutter Compensation allows you to choose the side of the contour the tool should begin
cutting. The programmed tool automatically follows the finished contour of the part when
cutter compensation is selected. Without cutter compensation, the centerline of the
programmed tool follows the print line.
1 Programmed path
2 Cutting tool
3 Path compensating for cutter radius
4 Cutter radius = amount of cutter compensation offset
Figure 2–1. Cutter Compensation
The following diagram shows tool paths using no cutter compensation compared to tool
paths using left and right compensation. When either right or left cutter compensation is
selected, the tool is offset from the cutting path a distance equal to the tool’s radius. The
tool begins cutting at the offset and moves in the selected direction.
1 No Cutter Compensation
2 Cutter Compensation to the left
3 Cutter Compensation to the right
4 Tool
5 Centerline of contour
Figure 2–2. Tool Paths for Cutter Compensation

The following are the types of cutter compensation used for Mill Contours such as Lines,
Arcs, Blend Arcs, Helices, True-Type Lettering, and 3D Blend Arcs:
• On—Locates the center of the tool on the programmed contour of the frame.
• Left—Performs climb milling. Refer to Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12.
• Right—Performs conventional milling. Refer to Conventional Milling (Right),
on page 2 - 12.
• Profile Left—Removes material from a contour for climb milling. Refer to
Profile Left and Right, on page 2 - 13.
• Profile Right—Removes material from a contour for conventional milling.
refer to Profile Left and Right, on page 2 - 13.
The following are the types of cutter compensation used for milling Circles, Frames, and
Ellipses:
• On—Locates the center of the tool on the programmed contour.

• Inside—the tool enters the part inside the contour and blend into the
programmed contour using a 180° arc. Cutter compensation is automatically
employed, and the edge of the tool remains inside a programmed contour.
• Outside—the tool enters the part outside the programmed contour and
follow the outside contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed,
and the edge of the tool remains outside the programmed contour.
• Inside Tangent—the tool enters the part inside and tangent to the
programmed contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and
the edge of the tool remains inside and tangent to the programmed contour.
The direction the tool travels depends upon the Milling Direction. The tool is
withdrawn from the part inside and tangent to the programmed contour.
• Outside Tangent—the tool enters the part outside and tangent to the
programmed contour. Cutter compensation is automatically employed, and
the edge of the tool remains outside and tangent to the programmed contour.
The direction the tool travels depends upon the Milling Direction. The tool is
withdrawn from the part outside and tangent to the programmed contour.
• Pocket Boundary—the tool cuts the part around the programmed boundary
and avoid any programmed islands or pockets.
• Pocket Type—The Pocket Type field appears with Inward and Outward
softkey and drop-down list box choices when Pocket Boundary or Pocket
Island is chosen for Milling Type. The choices define whether spindle
movement spirals from inside the pocket or outside the pocket.
• Outward—the tool begins cutting operations in the center region of
the pocket and cut outward to the edge of the programmed boundary.
Outward is used only for Circle and Frame data blocks without islands.
• Inward—the tool cuts in from the outside of the defined boundary,
avoiding the defined islands.
• Pocket Island—Defines islands within pockets on a part. As many islands as
desired may be defined (subject to available memory), but all must fit within
the defined boundary and must allow the tool to completely define the island.
A Pocket Island cannot follow an Outward Pocket Boundary.

The order in which segments are programmed determines the direction the tool moves
from the start point. Setting Conventional (right) or Climb (left) in Milling Parameters
overrides the direction of the programmed path.
Unless the Blend Offset is set for 0.0 in Milling Parameters, the system automatically
creates Lead In and Lead Out arcs for closed contours. Refer to Lead In/Out Moves, on
page 2 - 15.
Circle
Inside Outside
Centerline Inside Outside Pocket
Tangent Tangent
Ellipse
Inside Outside
Tangent Tangent
Frame
Inside Outside
Tangent Tangent

Climb Milling (Left)
Climb milling is the preferred method of cutter compensation, except when the fixturing
is not rigid. In climb milling, the tool cuts in the same direction as the feeding motion.
This is also known as “in–cut” or “down milling.”
During climb milling, the spindle turns in a clockwise direction. The tool is on the left-
hand side of the cut.
The advantages of using climb milling are as follows:
• The chip starts thick and allows easy penetration into the surface of the part,
causing less tool wear and less power consumption.
• The tool force cuts in and down on the part, helping to hold the part in the
fixture. The more rigid the fixture, the better the hold on the part.
• Chip removal is greater, and there is less re-cutting of chips or marring of the
part surface.
• The cutting fluid is more accessible to the cutting surface.
Conventional Milling (Right)

During conventional milling, the cutting teeth move in the opposite direction to the
feeding motion. This is known as “out–cut” or “up milling.” When using conventional
milling with a clockwise spindle direction, the tool is on the right-hand side of the cut.
The advantages of using conventional milling are as follows:
• The chip thickness starts at zero, causing less impact on the cutting teeth.
This is ideal for setups that are not very rigid.
• The backlash in older machines is greatly diminished.

The programming sequence of Lines and Arcs segments determines
the cutting direction. However, when programming Mill Frames,
Circles and Ellipses, the cutting direction is determined by the values
entered in Program Parameters.
Profile Left and Right

Profile Left and Profile Right work the same as Left (Climb) and Right (Conventional)
milling, except that a Max Offset may be added.
Maximum Offset
The Max Offset field appears when either Profile Left or Profile Right is selected. Max
Offset allows the cutter to be programmed to start at some specific distance away from
the programmed profile and move toward the finished profile, using the Pocket Overlap
parameter, as each pass is completed. It is typically the radius of the largest inscribed
circle minus the tool radius. Manually calculate the value and enter it into this field.
Drawing the part on the graphics screen is the key to determining an

optimum Maximum Offset value.
If a .500" diameter (.25" radius) End Mill is used to machine the part illustrated below (a
circle with a 1" radius), the value for the Maximum Offset field is 0.75".
1 Starting point for the tool

2 Largest inscribed circle in this contour
3 Radius
Figure 2–3. Determining Maximum Offset
If the tool diameter is changed (i.e., the cutter is sharpened to a smaller diameter), the
Maximum Offset value must be manually re-calculated and this new value programmed
into Segment 0 of the Mill Contour's Start block. Refer to Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour), on
page 2 - 19. The Tool diameter is programmed in Tool Setup and cannot be changed in
Part Programming. See Tool Setup in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.

Calculated Plunge Points for Milling Cycles
The following calculations are for determining the plunge points for milling cycles. The
examples are for Climb Milling.
The Blend-in move is 90° for all examples.
The Arc of Radius = Blend Offset for all examples.
Circle, Inside Circle, Outside
Occurs at 3 o’clock position on the circle.
X Plunge = X Center + Circle Radius - X Plunge = X Center + Circle Radius +

Blend Offset - Tool Radius Blend Offset + Tool Radius
Y Plunge = Y Center Y Plunge = Y Center
Frame, Inside Frame, Outside
Occurs at 6 o’clock position on the frame.
X Plunge = X Corner + (X Length/2) X Plunge = X Corner + (X Length/2)
Y Plunge = Y Corner + Blend Offset + Tool Y Plunge = Y Corner - Blend Offset - Tool
Radius Radius
The plunge points apply to Circle and Frame milling cycles.

Lead In/Out Moves
With posted NC programs, use Lead In and Lead Out moves to control the tool path
before the tool moves into position to cut the part.
A positive Lead Angle starts the tool path away from the programmed path when
performing a Lead In move and ends away from the programmed path when performing
a Lead Out move. A negative Lead Angle has the opposite effect.
Toolpath Graphics will not draw the Lead Angle or Lead Length motion.
A Lead In move
B Lead Out move
1 Programmed paths
2 Offset tool path
3 (-) Lead Angle
4 (+) Lead Angle
5 Lead Length
Figure 2–4. Lead In/Out Moves
When you select Milling Type Left, Right, Inside, or Outside, and enable the Display APT
fields in Editor field on the Utilities—Post Processor screen, Lead Angle and Lead Length
fields appear on the Milling data block.
Lead In/Out moves are determined by the lead angle and lead length values. With the
exception of open contours, perform a 90º arc Lead In and Lead Out move.
These NC Programming fields operate similarly to Conversational Blend In/Blend Out

moves (Blend Offset and Blend Overlap values).

Lead Angle
Lead Angle is used with Lead Length to define Lead In and Lead Out moves. Lead Angle is
an angle relative to the direction of the cut, measured 180º from the end of the first
segment.
If starting a contour in the middle of a line or arc, set the Lead Angle at 45º or 90º to
prevent gouging the contour.
Use caution with Lead Angle, because the tool could gouge the part if left at the default of
0.
Lead Length
Lead Length is used with Lead Angle to define Lead In and Lead Out moves. Lead Length
is the length of the Lead In move.
The Lead Length must be larger than the tool's radius. For example, using a 1" diameter
End Mill, the Lead Length would be 0.505".

MILLING OPERATIONS
General Guidelines for Creating a Milling Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 18

Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 19
Mill Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 26
Mill Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 29
Mill Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 31
Mill Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 33
3D Mold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 34
Helical Plunge (Ramp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 44
Mill Thread. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 51
Mill Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 54
Mill True-Type Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 56
Stick Lettering Along Contour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 59
True-Type Lettering Along Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 62
HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 65
Mill HD3 Lettering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 69
Insert Pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 70
Swept Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 74
Mill Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 79
Mill Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 84
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Milling Operations 2-17

General Guidelines for Creating a Milling
Block
1. Select the Part Programming softkey from the Input screen.
2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey.
3. When the New Block screen appears, select the Milling softkey to display the
milling options shown in the seven softkey selections.
4. Select the milling operation and the first data block screen appears.
5. Enter the geometry values in the appropriate fields/tabs.
6. Enter tool information on the Roughing tab (and on the Finishing tab if a finish
tool will be used). Type the number of the tool in the Tool field and a list of
stored tools appears. Select your tool.
• The tool numbers and their descriptions are entered in Tool Setup. If the
tool information has not been entered or another tool should be added to
the program, select the Tool Setup softkey to update the tool
descriptions for this program.
• Entering a number in the Tool field pulls information from Tool Setup and
automatically loads it into fields on the program block screen. Note that
the Mill Feed and Speed (RPM) fields are filled in based on the information
about the tool.
• To use the UltiPocket option feature, select a pocket boundary. The Pocket
Type field appears when a pocket operation is selected.
Many WinMax screens have fields that appear based on selections

made in other fields. These are conditional fields because they
only appear on a screen under certain conditions.
2 - 18 Milling Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour)
Mill contour data blocks use segments to create lines and arcs in a part program. A
segment is any single or combined X-Y-Z axis movement at a programmed feedrate. A
series of line and arc segments can be programmed in a single data block, using different
segments, to form a complete contour.
• Start Segment, on page 2 - 19

• Line Segment, on page 2 - 20
• Arc Segment, on page 2 - 21
• Blend Arc Segment, on page 2 - 22
• Helix Segment, on page 2 - 23
• 3D Arc Segment, on page 2 - 24
The Field Name Glossary, on page 7 - 1 contains definitions of all WinMax fields. The
fields listed below appear on the Mill Contour screens. Fields displayed on screen may
vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in
other fields.
Block Mill Feed Rough SFQ X Start Z Bottom
Finish SFQ Milling Type Radius XY Angle Z Center
Finish XY Overlap Speed (RPM) XY Length Z End
Finish Z Peck Depth Sweep Angle Y Center Z Point
Lead Pocket Overlap X Center Y End Z Start
Lead Angle Pocket Type X End Y Point
Lead Length Plunge Feed X Point Y Start
Cutter compensation, set in the Milling Type field, determines the

compensation applied to the tool path. See Cutter Compensation
(preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for more information.
Pecking is the use of multiple cutting passes to optimize tool

operation. See Pecking, on page 2 - 8 for more information.
To use pocketing with Mill Contour, the UltiPockets option must be

installed. See UltiPockets, on page 2 - 141 for more information.
Start Segment
The first segment in a Mill Contour block is always a Start segment, indicated by the
segment zero (0). Enter the tool that will be used for the entire operation in the Start
segment - all segments in the operation will use this tool. X, Y, and Z Start coordinates
are also entered in the Start segment.

Line Segment
For line segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown
dimensions after you enter sufficient data.
The figure below illustrates the XY Length and XY Angle in a Line segment:
• If the X End and Y End coordinates are entered, the system calculates the XY
length and the XY angle values.
• The XY Angle is the angle of the line segment (from the start point to the end
point), measured counterclockwise from the 3 o'clock position.
• If both end points are unknown but the XY Length and XY Angle fields are
programmed, the system calculates the values for the X End and Y End fields.
• If one end point coordinate and the XY Angle field are programmed, the
system calculates the values for the unknown end point and the XY Length
fields.
• If one end point coordinate and the XY Length field are programmed, the
system calculates the values for the unknown end point and the XY Angle
fields. However, unless the XY Angle is known, there are two possible
solutions for the unknown end point, and the correct one must be determined
for the program.
• When two possible solutions exist, the "Another end point exists" message
appears and one of the two possible solutions appears in the unknown field.
You can use the Draw key to view the solution in the Graphics screen. You
can also use the Find Another Endpoint softkey to see the alternate
solution, and view it in Graphics as well. Use the Enter key to accept either
displayed solution.

The following illustration shows a line segment with unknown Y End and XY Angle:
Arc Segment
The software uses data in the Arc Segment fields as described below to perform
automatic calculations:
• The center points plus the start points or end points provide the arc radius.
• The start points and end points plus the radius provide the two possible
center points.
• Either of the end points and the center point provide the value of the other
end point and the radius.
• When a known center point, start point, or end point and radius are provided,
an unknown center point is provided.

Blend Arc Segment
A blend arc is an arc that joins two other segments and is tangent to both. Use a blend
arc to join two line segments, to join a line segment and an arc segment, or to join two
arc segments. The segments to be joined must have a theoretical point of intersection.
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Blend Arc

programming video demonstration:
Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.com
Scroll to the bottom of the page and select the video to download.
Internet connection is required.
Two Lines Joined by a Line and Arc Joined by a Two Arcs Joined by a
Blend Arc Blend Arc Blend Arc
1 X/Y Start 1 X/Y Start 1 X/Y Start
2 X/Y End 2 X/Y End 2 X/Y End
3 Segment 1 (Line) 3 Segment 1 (Line) 3 Segment 1 (Arc)
4 Segment 1 End/ 4 Segment 1 End/ 4 Segment 1 End/
Segment 3 Start Segment 3 Start Segment 3 Start
(Point of Intersection) (Point of Intersection) (Point of Intersection)
5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc) 5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc) 5 Segment 2 (Blend Arc)
6 Segment 3 (Line) 6 Segment 3 (Arc) 6 Segment 3 (Arc)
Figure 2–5. Blend Arc Examples

If the only information known about an arc is its radius, it is easier to program it as a
blend arc if the segments intersect.
Reference values programmed in a previous segment to a blend arc define the start point
of this segment and are displayed in parentheses. These values can only be changed in
the segment in which they were created.
Some guidelines that must be followed when creating a blend arc:
• The first or last segment of a Mill Contour data block cannot be blend arc
segments.
• Blend arc segments cannot be adjacent to one another in a program cannot
be blend arc segments. For example, if segment #2 is a blend arc, neither
segment #1 nor #3 can be blend arc segments.
• Segments that are adjacent to the blend arc segment must intersect at some
point in their theoretical plane. Therefore, if segment #2 is a blend arc,
segments #1 and #3 must theoretically intersect at some projected point.
• The Radius of a blend arc segment cannot be too large to be tangent to both
of the adjoining segments.
• If any coordinate (start point, center point, or end point) is important to the
construction of the two segments to be blended, the segment must be
programmed as an arc and not as a blend arc.
• The Feed field is initially displayed with a value carried forward from the
previous segment. This value can be accepted or changed.
A series of arcs and lines can be programmed in a single data block

to form a complete contour. Press the right Arrow key to program
additional Line and Arc segments for the current data block.
Helix Segment
The software uses data in the Helix fields as described below to perform automatic
calculations:
• The Z End and Sweep Angle provide data to calculate the Lead.
• The Sweep Angle is used to calculate the Z End.
• The X End, Y End, and Lead values provide the Z End.
• The Z End and Lead values provide the X End, Y End, and Sweep Angle
values.
• The X End, Y End, X Center, and Y Center values supply the Radius.
• The Sweep Angle and either the X or Y end point provide the unknown X End
or Y End.

3D Arc Segment
Use 3D Arc to create a three-dimensional arc segment.
Do not confuse the 3D Arc feature with the 3D Mold Option. The 3D
Arc feature is always included in the WinMax software. Refer to
WinMax Mill Options for more information on the 3D Mold option.
This diagram shows the relationships of the coordinates to each other:
1 Start Point
2 Center Point
3 X, Y, Z Point
4 End Point
To calculate the centerline of cutter movement, remember these points. Refer to Cutter
Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for information about cutter compensation.
• Depending on the axis being worked, X can be interchanged with Y or Z.

• The X and Z points must be calculated for an X-Z arc.
• The Y and Z points must be calculated for a Y-Z arc (all arcs travel through at
least two axes).
• To calculate the centerline in the X axis for a ball-nosed end mill, use this
formula:
Here are the elements of this formula:
Xa = Actual centerline dimension of cutter in X axis
X s = Arc reference starting point in the X axis
Xc = X center point

Ri = Radius of arc minus ½ cutter diameter
R = Radius of arc
Follow these guidelines when programming 3D arcs:
• Never program cut right or cut left cutter compensation into a 3D

arc block.
• Always program the centerline of cutter movement.
• Lower the tool calibration point to one-half the cutter diameter by
manually changing the Tool Zero reference point.
For example, when using a 1/4" ball-nosed end mill with Tool Zero of
2.2500" (ball tip touched to work surface), the new zero calibration
is 2.3750". Remember this change when entering Z Up and Z Start
dimensions (which must include the value of this manual change to
the reference point).
Contour End
This block marks the end of the programmed contour. To view the previous segment,
select the Previous Segment softkey. If there are no existing segments, select the
Insert Segment Before softkey or the PAGE DOWN key to create a new segment.
The Contour End screen is shared by Lines and Arcs, Rotary Lines and Arcs, and 3D Mold.

Mill Circle
Use the Circle data block to mill circles.
To create a Mill Circle data block:
1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey or icon.
3. From the New Block screen, select the Milling softkey.
4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Circle. Mill Circle screen opens.
5. Enter geometry data into the appropriate fields. Field definitions can be found
by following the links below.
6. Enter block operation data into the appropriate tabs and fields. Field
definitions can be found by following the links below. Also see Operation Data,
on page 2 - 4 for more information.
fields listed below appear on the Mill Circle screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings in other
fields.
Block Peck Depth Start Angle
Finish SFQ Pocket Overlap Tool
Finish XY Pocket Type X Center
Finish Z Plunge Feed Y Center
Mill Feed Radius Z Bottom
Milling Type Rough SFQ Z Start
Overlap Speed (RPM)

Mill Circle Example
The sample data in the fields above create the following circle.
Tool plunge point
In this example, Milling Type is ON. Machine movement occurs as follows:
1. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate in Z to the Retract Clearance plane.

2. Table moves at Rapid Traverse rate in XY to the Start Angle position at the 3
o’clock position.
3. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate to Z Start.
4. Tool moves at Plunge Feed rate to Z Bottom.
5. When the tool reaches Z Bottom, machining continues at Mill Feed with the
center of the tool along the contour, moving clockwise around the circle
(direction set in Program Parameters) until cutting is complete.
6. Tool retracts at Rapid Traverse rate to the Retract Clearance plane.


To use pocketing with Mill Circle, the UltiPockets option must be

Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Mill Circle video
demonstration:
For Rotary Circle, see Rotary Circle - Universal, on page 5 - 16 in the

Rotary manual.

Mill Frame
The Mill Frame data block supports the creation of frames with or without uniform
corners.
To start a new Mill Frame block:
4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Frame. Mill Frame screen opens.
The Mill Frame block fields appear on two tabs: Geometry and Corners. The frame
geometry parameters are entered on the Geometry tab. Corner Radius specifies the
radius of the reference corner. Use this field if all four corners of the frame will have the
same radius.
To program unique corners (with different radii), parameters are set on the Corners tab.
Select Line or Arc for each corner, and specify a radius for arcs, or length and angle for
lines. If the corner should have neither, geometry should be left as an arc with radius of
0.00, which is the default.
If all four corners of the frame should have the same radius, the
Corners tab does not need to be used; instead use the Corner
Radius parameter on the Geometry tab.
Specifying a value in the Corner Radius field will reset all of the
corners set as Arcs in the Corners tab to that radius. If you are
creating unique corners, do not use the Corner Radius field.
fields listed below appear on the Mill Frame screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
fields.
Block Peck Depth X Length
Corner Radius Plunge Feed Y Corner
Finish SFQ Speed (RPM) Y Length
Finish XY Rough SFQ Z Bottom
Finish Z Start Side Z Start
Mill Feed Tool
Milling Type X Corner
For Rotary Frame, see Rotary Frame - Universal, on page 5 - 16 in

the Rotary manual.

Mill Frame Example
The sample data in the fields above create the following frame.
In this example, Milling Type is ON. Machine movement is:
1. Tool moves at Rapid Traverse rate to Z Start.

2. Tool moves at Plunge Feed rate to Z Bottom at the mid-point of the bottom
side of the frame (because Start Side is Bottom).
3. When the tool reaches Z Bottom, milling occurs with the center of the tool
along the contour (Milling Type On), moving clockwise around the frame until
milling is complete.
4. Tool retracts at Rapid Traverse rate to the Retract Clearance plane.


To use pocketing with Mill Frame, the UltiPockets option must be

Mill Face
Face milling directs the cutter path so the tool moves over the rectangular face area of
the part, removing material using 60% of the tool diameter from the previous pass (but
the last pass may be less).
Axis positioning places the tool over the next cutting path, and cutting resumes in the
opposite direction.
To start a new Mill Face block:
4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Face. The Mill Face screen opens.
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Mill Face programming
video demonstration:
There are four types of face milling, set in the Milling Type field:
• X Unidirectional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction, parallel to the X

axis, and then move the spindle to the retract clearance value. Axis
movement occurs at rapid traverse to return the tool to the start point of the
next cutting path, which is determined by the system. The start point for
each cut is the tool radius plus blend offset away from the starting edge
corner.
• X Bi-directional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction from the start point,
parallel to the X axis. Axis positioning occurs to place the tool over the next

cutting path, and cutting resumes in the opposite direction. The new cutting
path for the tool is automatically determined by the system.
• Y Unidirectional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction, parallel to the Y
axis, and then move the spindle to the retract clearance value. Axis
movement occurs at rapid traverse to return the tool to the start point of the
next cutting path, which is determined by the system. The start point for
each cut is the tool radius plus blend offset away from the starting edge
corner.
• Y Bi-directional—Directs the tool to cut in one direction from the start
point, parallel to the Y axis. Axis positioning occurs to place the tool over the
next cutting path and cutting is in the opposite direction. The new cutting
path for the tool is automatically determined by the system.
1 Blend Offset
2 X Unidirectional
3 Y Unidirectional
4 X Bidirectional
5 Y Bidirectional
fields listed below appear on the Mill Face screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
fields.
Block Plunge Feed Y Length
Finish SFQ Speed (RPM) Z Bottom
Finish XY Rough SFQ Z Start
Finish Z Tool
Mill Feed X Corner
Milling Type X Length
Peck Depth Y Corner

Mill Ellipse
The Mill Ellipse block creates ellipses. To start a new Mill Ellipse block:
4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select Ellipse. Mill Ellipse screen opens.
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Ellipse programming

video demonstration:
To use pocketing with Mill Ellipse, the UltiPockets option must be

Ellipse axes must be programmed parallel to the respective axes of the machine. X
Radius and Y Radius specify the distance along the X axis from X Center, or along the Y
axis from Y Center, to the edge of the ellipse.
The major axis is the longer or wider axis and can be either the X or Y axis. The minor
axis is the smaller axis. Program an ellipse with the major and minor axes non-parallel to
the machine using a Pattern Loop Rotate routine and rotating the ellipse after it has been
programmed. Refer to Loop Rotate, on page 2 - 114.
fields listed below appear on the Mill Ellipse screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
fields.
Block Peck Depth X Center
Finish SFQ Plunge Feed X Radius
Finish XY Pocket Overlap Y Center
Finish Z Pocket Type Y Radius
Mill Feed Rough SFQ Z Bottom
Milling Type Speed (RPM) Z Start
Overlap Tool X Radius


To use pocketing with Mill Frame, the UltiPockets option must be

3D Mold
3D Mold creates a three dimensional part. Requires the 3D Mold option.
For Swept Surface programming, see Swept Surface, on page 2 -

74 in the Milling chapter of the Conversational Programming manual.
3D Mold Parameters
To create a three-dimensional (3D) part, define a two-dimensional (2D) profile in either
the XY or XZ plane (these are the 3D mold parameters). Repeat the 2D profile along a
straight line (translate) or repeat it around a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D
shape (the 3D mold contour). Choose Draw 2D Contour to draw the original 2D contour
that will be manipulated using the 3D operations.
To start a new 3D Mold data block:
4. From the New Block (Milling) screen, select 3D Mold. 3D Mold screen opens.
Combine of any of the three types into composite contours to machine complex parts:
• XY Revolved About X (About X)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XY

plane and revolve it about a centerline on the X axis to produce the finished
3D contour.
• XZ Revolved About Z (About Z)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ
plane and revolve it about a centerline on the Z axis to produce the finished
3D contour.
• XZ Translated in Y (Trans Y)—Use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ
plane and translate it in the Y axis.
Select the Edit 3D Mold Contour softkey to access the contour segments. Use the Edit
3D Mold Parameters softkey to reach the parameters screen from any of the contour
screens.

fields listed below appear on the 3D Mold Parameter screens. Fields displayed on screen
may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings
in other fields.
Bidirectional Finish SFQ Start Angle Z Start
Block Mill Feed Step Size
Centerline X Milling Type Stock Allowance
Centerline Y Peck Depth Tool
Centerline Z Plunge Feed Type
Cut Direction Rough SFQ Y End
End Angle Speed (RPM) Y Start
Centerline Y and Centerline Z
1 X Centerline = 0
2 Y Centerline = 5
Figure 2–6. Increased Radius

1 X Centerline = 0
2 Y Centerline = 0
Figure 2–7. Zero Radius
The Centerline Z field determines the Z axis position of the X axis centerline. Changing
the Z axis centerline moves the X axis centerline above or below the part surface. This
alters the depth of the 3D contour. The Z axis centerline is used only for XY Revolved
About X.
To machine the 3D contour below the part surface, enter a negative value in the
Centerline Z field. This value is equal to the radius of the part measured from the Y
centerline.
Here is a convex contour programmed below the part surface:
1 Original Profile
2 Z Centerline
Figure 2–8. Convex Contour Below the Part Surface
Y Start and Y End

Determine the length of the 3D contour along the Y axis for XZ Translated in Y, as shown
in the example below:
1 Part Zero
2 Y Start
3 Y End
Figure 2–9. Y Start and Y End Fields (XZ Translated in Y)

3D Mold Contour
For Lettering Along Contour programming, see Stick Lettering

Along Contour, on page 2 - 59 or True-Type Lettering Along Contour,
on page 2 - 62 in the Milling chapter of the Conversational
Programming manual.
Used in conjunction with 3D Mold Parameters to mill a 3D Mold, program the part
surfaces as a 2D profile in either the XY or XZ plane.
The Start Segment number is always 0. Use segments to program lines and arcs which
create a contour. Repeat the 2D profile along a straight line (translate) or repeat it
around a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D shape. The Contour End block
marks the end of the programmed contour.
Select the Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey to access the parameters screen. The Edit
3D Mold Parameters softkey is not available when the cursor is in either the Block or
Segment field. When you select the Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey, it changes to
Edit 3D Mold Contour. This softkey is not available when the cursor is in the Block field.
3D Mold Start Segment

See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Contour Start segment fields:
Block
Segment
X Start
Y Start
Z Start
Continue programming the contour by using the Page Down key or by selecting the Next
Segment softkey.
Line, Arc, and Blend Arc softkey choices appear.

A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour into the
program, using Multiple Block Functions on the Program Review
screen. This allows you to use the same segments for a Mill Contour
Block and a 3D Mold Block without entering each segment twice.
• To copy a block, select the contour that you wish to copy

on the Program Review Screen and use the MULTIPLE
BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the COPY softkey.
• To paste a block, select the 3D Mold Block that you wish
to paste the contour into on the Program Review screen
and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to
access the PASTE softkey.
3D Mold Line
Use the 3D mold Line Segment block to create the geometry for a 3D Mold Line segment.
Some 3D Mold Line fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See
Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated
Value softkey to retain a calculated value.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Line segment fields:
Block XY Length Z End
Segment XZ Angle Z Start
X End XZ Length
X Start Y End
XY Angle Y Start
Some fields on screen will vary depending on the type of contour selected.

3D Mold Arc
Some 3D Mold Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Arc segment fields:
Block X Center Y Start
Direction X End Z Center
Radius X Start Z End
Segment Y Center Z Start
Sweep Angle Y End
3D Mold Blend Arc

74 in Conversational Programming.
Some 3D Mold Blend Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature.
See Automatic Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store
Calculated Value softkey to retain a calculated value.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the 3D Mold Blend Arc segment fields:
Block X End Z Center
Direction X Start Z End
Radius Y Center Z Start
Segment Y End
X Center Y Start

Roughing and Finishing Tools
In many applications, a Flat End Mill can be used for roughing, followed by a Ball-Nosed
End Mill, which is required for cutting the finished surface.
1 First Data Block Using a Flat End Mill
2 Programmed Contour
3 Material to be Removed by Ball-Nosed End Mill
Figure 2–10. Flat End Mill on a Contour
1 2nd Data Block using a Ball-Nosed End Mill
2 Programmed Contour (Same Contour as DB1)
3 Material to be Removed by Ball-Nosed End Mill
Figure 2–11. Ball-Nosed End Mill on a Contour
Flat End Mill - the cutter path is computed as if a Ball-Nosed End Mill is used. This
computation allows a Flat End Mill to be used for roughing without gouging the part, and
in most cases leaves enough material to be removed for the finished surface using a Ball-
Nosed End Mill.

1 Tool Calibrated on Tip
2 Tool Calculated as center of imaginary ball nose
3 Tool Zero
Figure 2–12. Flat End Mill
Ball-Nosed End Mill - the system computes the compensated cutter path of the ball
center:
1 Tool Calibrated on Tip
2 Tool Calculated as center of ball nose
3 Tool Zero

Figure 2–13. Ball-Nosed End Mill
Roughing and Finishing Passes

The Flat End Mill tool path is calculated as a Ball-Nosed End Mill for the roughing pass.
The maximum additional material remaining on the overall 3D contour will not exceed the
tool's radius.
1 Roughing contour using Flat End Mill
2 Finishing contour using Ball-Nosed End Mill
3 Extra Material
Figure 2–14. Roughing and Finishing Passes

Helical Plunge (Ramp)
To use Helical Plunge, the Helical Ramp software option must be installed.
The Helical Plunge programming option provides helical plunging as an alternative

machining strategy. Helical plunge and straight plunges can be used separately for
roughing and finishing phases, or they can be used together for the same operation. For
example, you can rough with a helical plunge and finish with a straight plunge.
With Helical Plunging, the tool rotates around the cut and moves down the Z-axis. The
cutting tool is continuously cutting deeper and enters and exists the machined part only
once.
The Helical Plunge fields are located on the Milling 2 tab on the Program Parameters
screen. Set Mill Plunge Type and/or Finish Plunge Type to Helix. Specify the ramp
slope and radius percentage.
• Helical Plunge uses the feedrate programmed by the operator

on the mill circle, mill frame, ellipse, or mill contour start
screens.
• Pattern blocks can be used with helical plunging. A scaled-up or
scaled-down pattern will not affect the diameter of the helix
plunge. When using a mirror image pattern, the helical plunge
will be in the negative Z direction.
• Helical Plunge for rotary mill frames, mill circles, and mill contours
is similar to helical plunging for non-rotary mill frames, mill circles,
and mill contours.
Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 45

Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill Frames, Mill Circles and Ellipses . . . . . 2 - 45
Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 45
Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46
Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46
Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 46
Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No Pecking and Blend Offset . . . . . . . 2 - 46
Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with Pecking and Straight Plunge Finish Pass and
Blend Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 48
Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 50
Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 50

Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields
On the Program Parameters screen, Milling 2 tab, select Helix in the Mill Plunge Type
field.
fields listed below appear on the Milling 2 (Helical Plunge) screen. Fields displayed on
screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or
settings in other fields.
Allow Plunge Outside Pocket Mill Plunge Helix Radius Pocket Plunge Near Center
Finish Plunge Helix Radius Mill Plunge Ramp Slope
Finish Plunge Ramp Slope Mill Plunge Type
Finish Plunge Type Operator Specify Pocket Start
Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill Frames, Mill Circles

and Ellipses
Helical Plunge is similar for milling the inside or outside of mill frames, circles, and
ellipses (with or without blend-in moves). The center location of the helical plunge is the
same as a straight plunge. The direction of the helical plunge (clockwise, CW, or counter
clockwise, CCW) will be determined by the tool spin direction (CW or CCW) and the
milling direction (climb or conventional). If Blend Offset is used, the helical plunge will be
centered about the plunge point of the Blend Offset.
The helical plunge direction that provides a smooth transition to the tool path will be
chosen. Helical plunge is not allowed when Milling Type On is selected.
Helical Plunge with UltiPockets

The Helical Plunge option is used with the UltiPocket option to define the plunging location
when inward pocketing. The operator can specify the pocket plunge location using the
Operator Specify Pocket Start function, or start the pocket plunge near the center by
using the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center function. See Helical Plunge with UltiPockets,
on page 2 - 145 in Conversational Programming.
When both the Operator Specify Pocket Start and the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center
are set to No, the plunge locations are used that would have been used without the
Helical Plunge option.
An error message appears if the plunge point specified would violate

the programmed part surface.

Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Location
When the operator specifies the plunge point, all of the helix plunge moves will occur at
that location, even for the pocket boundary.
Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket

When the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field value is Yes (Operator Specify Pocket
Start value must be No), a plunge point near the center of the pocket will be chosen.
Islands near the center will impact upon the plunge point’s location.
When machining a part with a lot of webbing (many small pockets

separated by walls), it may be desirable to disable helical plunging.
Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing

Helical plunging occurs near the center of the pocket when used with Outward Pocketing,
and only one plunge location is needed. The Operator Specify Pocket Start and the
Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center fields have no effect on Helical Plunge with Outward
Pocketing.
Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No Pecking and

Blend Offset
The tool will helical plunge to the Z Bottom level and then perform the normal blend-in
move. The direction of the helical plunge arc will smoothly transition to the blend-in arc.
For instance, if the blend-in arc is CCW, the direction of the helical plunge will be CW. The
following isometric views are created by setting the Draw Plunge Moves graphics
parameter field to Yes.
This graphical representation is only for informational purposes and

cannot be viewed with WinMax.

The graphics show the finish pass only if a finish tool is specified in the frame block, and
do not show individual peck levels.
Figure 2–15. Helical Plunge with No Pecking and Blend Offset (Isometric View)

Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with Pecking and
Straight Plunge Finish Pass and Blend Offset
The following example is a Mill Frame Block Type with Inside Milling Type. The finish tool
specified and the peck depth is set to 0.6 inches.
First Peck - The tool helical plunges down to the -first peck depth, then mills another full
circle to ensure that all material down to the first peck is removed. After the full circle is
completed, a 180° blend in arc is performed. The direction of the helical plunge will
always be in the opposite direction of the blend-in arc.
These graphical representations are only for informational purposes

and cannot be viewed with WinMax.
Figure 2–16. First Peck (Isometric View)
Second Peck and All Pecks to Finish Peck Depth - The tool will rapid down to the previous
peck depth plus the peck clearance plane. The tool then helical plunges down to the next
peck depth or the Z Bottom plus the Finish Z. If the tool is at a peck depth, a 360o arc
will be machined. The 360o arc will not be machined if it is the last peck depth. Instead,
a blend-in arc will be machined. The blend-in arc for the last peck depth will be similar to
the one machined for the first peck.

Figure 2–17. Second Peck (Isometric View)
Finish Pass - The tool will rapid down to the Z Start and plunge feed down to the Z
Bottom. A blend-in move is performed before milling the frame contour.
When helical plunge is used for roughing passes, a large amount of

material is removed around the point of entry. Therefore, using
helical plunging for the finish passes is probably not necessary.
Figure 2–18. Finish Pass (Isometric View)
If the finish tool is larger than the roughing tool, helical plunges
should also be performed for the finish pass. If a post was created by
the roughing tool (the Helix plunge radius was greater than 50
percent) the finish tool may be cutting into the post.

Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs
Helical plunge with lines and arcs occurs at the start of the contour.
The following example shows helical plunging with right cutter compensation of a
contour.
Figure 2–19. Helical Plunging with Lines/Arcs (Isometric View)
An error message will be displayed if the helical plunge would cut

into a part surface. If this error message appears, move the starting
location of the contour to an area that will not cause interference.
Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming Option

Helical plunging is supported in the 3-D Part Programming option. A helical plunge can be
performed when the Mill Plunge Type field is set to Helix.
Only one helical plunge occurs when using a bi-directional tool path. When performing
helical plunge using unidirectional tool path, a helical plunge occurs for each cutter pass.
When programming complex 3-D parts, the operator should review

helical plunge placements in graphical form before milling to ensure
helical plunges from one block do not interfere with neighboring
blocks.
If Mill Plunge Type field is set to Helix, but the helical plunge does not
appear on the graphics screen, check the Z Start field on the Mill 3-D
block screen. The plunges may not appear if Z Start value is too low.

Mill Thread
The Mill Thread data block mills a part with internal or external threads. Milling can be
clockwise or counterclockwise, and occur from top to bottom or bottom to top.
Thread Direction Down
The following diagram shows the Z positions, and the arrows indicate tool movement
when the Thread Direction is Down. In this case, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the Z
Plunge Start position, then feeds to the Z Top position. The tool mills down to the Z
Bottom position. It then moves at rapid feedrate out of the hole to Z Plunge Start + Z
retract clearance height (set in Program Parameters).
Z Plunge Start
Z Thread Top
Z Thread Bottom
Figure 2–20. Tool movement when Thread Direction is down
Thread Direction Up
The following diagram shows the Z positions, and the arrows indicate tool movement
when Thread Direction is Up. In this case, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the Z
Plunge Start position, then feeds down to the Z Bottom position, and mills up to the Z Top
position. The tool then moves at rapid to Z Plunge Start and retracts to the Z retract
clearance height (set in Program Parameters).
Z Plunge Start
Z Thread Top
Z Thread Bottom
Figure 2–21. Tool movement when Thread Direction is up

To access the Mill Thread block:
1. From a New Block screen, select the Milling softkey.

2. Select the More softkey twice.
3. Select the Thread softkey. The Mill Thread block opens.
Thread geometry is set in the Thread tab. Specify the radius, TPI/Pitch, inside or outside
threads, start angle, and any taper angle.
Thread location is set in the Location tab. Specify the X and Y centers, the Z plunge start
point, thread top and bottom locations, and the threading direction.
Cutting information is set in the Process tab. Specify cutter compensation, blend type,
and center start.
When using a single-cutter thread mill, the Taper Angle field appears in the Thread tab.
External threads must have a positive taper angle and internal threads must have a
negative taper angle:
-10° Taper with Internal Threads 10°Taper with External Threads
fields listed below appear on the Mill Thread screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
fields.

Blend Type Pitch Start at Center Z Plunge Start
Block Plunge Feed Taper Angle
Cutter Length Radial Peck Count Thread Bottom
Direction Radial Peck Depth Thread Top
Enable Cutter Comp Radius TPI
Mill Feed Speed (RPM) X Center
Orientation Start Angle Y Center
Radial Pecks
The Radial Peck feature can be used when more than one cutting pass is required, such
as with harder materials.
Enter an incremental distance from the final cut in the Radial Peck Depth field, and
enter the number of passes in the Radial Peck Count field. Milling occurs as follows:
• Orientation Outside—milling begins at (radius) + (Radial Peck Count x Radial

Peck Depth) position, and proceeds inward for the number of passes (count)
specified, to the final radius cut.
• Orientation Inside—milling begins at (radius) - (Radial Peck Count x Radial
Peck Depth) position, and continues outward in the number of passes (count)
specified, to the final radius cut.
For example:
Radius = 2.0 Final Radius 2.0

Radial Peck Count = 10
Radial Peck Depth = .05
Orientation = Inside
First cut 1.5
Incremental cuts .05

Milling begins at 1.5
[2.0 -10x.05)], makes
10 incremental .05 passes
to finish at 2.0.
If Radial Pecking is not desired, set Radial Peck Count to 1 (default).

Mill Stick Lettering
<See also Mill True-Type Lettering, on page 2 - 56.>
The Stick Lettering block supports the HD3 lettering (military text) character set. Use the
X and Y Ref Locations to specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or end:
Y Reference
Top
Center
Bottom
Start Center End

X Reference
Specify the text, length, and orientation. For example:

fields listed below appear on the Mill Stick Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen
may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or settings
in other fields.
Block Peck Depth X Reference
Char Spacing Plunge Feed X Ref Location
Finish SFQ Rough SFQ Y Length
Finish XY Speed (RPM) Y Reference
Finish Z Text Y Ref Location
Mill Feed Tool Z Bottom
Orientation X Length Z Start
Recovery Restart is supported from a specific letter, specified as character number. For
example, to restart from the “R” in HURCO, you would specify character 3 as the starting
character. Recovery Restart is launched from the Auto mode screen.

Mill True-Type Lettering
The Mill True-Type Lettering block mills True-Type fonts. These True-Type fonts are
available in different styles and are block-type letters with closed profiles for milling,
which allow cutter compensation - i.e., inside, outside, and pocket milling. Supported
characters include the full character sets for most Western European languages.
Common Fonts Available with Mill True-Type Lettering
Arial (default) Microsoft Sans Serif
Arial Black Palatino Linotype
Comic Sans MS Sylfaen
Courier New Tahoma
Franklin Gothic Times New Roman

Medium
Trebuchet MS
Georgia
Verdana
Impact
Webdings
Lucida Console
Wingdings
Lucida Sans Unicode
Marlett
Specify the text, length, and orientation. For example:

Figure 2–22. Example of True-Type Lettering
The X and Y Ref Locations specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or end:
Y Reference
Top
Center
Bottom
Start Center End
X Reference
fields listed below appear on the Mill True-Type Lettering screen. Fields displayed on

Block Mill Feed Speed (RPM) Y Reference
Enable Blend Moves Orientation Text Y Ref Location
Finish SFQ Overlap Tool Z Bottom
Finish XY Peck Depth X Length Z Start
Finish Z Plunge Feed X Reference
Font Pocket Overlap X Ref Location
Mapping Rough SFQ Y Length

Stick Lettering Along Contour
<See also True-Type Lettering Along Contour, on page 2 - 62.>
With Stick Lettering Along Contour, text is oriented along a programmed contour,
which determines the size and orientation. The contour is grouped with the data block
and programmed like the contours in a 3D mold or Swept Surface data block.
The opening screen is the lettering parameters screen. The text dimensions and spacing
are set in this screen. First, specify how the width of the text is determined, in the Width
Method field:
• Use Contour—the text will be distributed evenly along the contour.

• Specify Width—specify the width measurement in the Text Width field
(appears when Specify Width is selected).
Text Width—field appears when Specify Width is selected as Width Method.

Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the Calculate Text
Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the contour
length.
Figure 2–23. Stick Lettering Along Contour Lettering Parameters screen
Use Edit Along Contour softkey to open the Start segment:
Figure 2–24. Stick Lettering Along Contour Start Segment
The contour start segment includes fields to specify which side of the contour the text is
positioned relative to. The text offset specifies distance between the contour and the

reference point of the text.
Select the Next Segment softkey to lay the text out on a line, arc, and/or blend arc.
Here is an example with a single arc segment:
Figure 2–25. Stick Lettering Along Contour Arc Segment

screen.
Figure 2–26. Example of Stick Lettering Along Contour

fields listed below appear on the Stick Lettering Along Contour screen. Fields displayed on
Block Peck Depth Text Offset XY Length
Char Spacing Plunge Feed Text Height Y Center
Direction Radius Text Width Y End
Finish SFQ Rough SFQ Width Method Y Start
Finish XY Speed (RPM) X Center Z Bottom
Finish Z Sweep Angle X End Z Start
Font Side of Contour Tool X Start
Mill Feed Text XY Angle

True-Type Lettering Along Contour
With True-Type Lettering Along Contour, text (True-Type font) is oriented along a
programmed contour, which determines the size and orientation. The contour is grouped
with the data block and programmed like the contours in a 3D mold or Swept Surface
data block.
True-Type fonts are available in different styles and are block-type letters with closed
profiles for milling, which allow cutter compensation - i.e., inside, outside, and pocket
milling. Supported characters include the full character sets for most Western European
languages.
The font selection dialog box is opened with the Select New Font F3 softkey, when the
cursor is in the Text field on the parameters screen.
Common Fonts Available with Mill True-Type Lettering
Courier New Tahoma
Franklin Gothic Times New Roman

Medium
Trebuchet MS
Georgia
Verdana
Impact
Webdings
Lucida Console
Wingdings
Lucida Sans Unicode
Marlett
The lettering parameters are programed on the opening screen. The text dimensions and
spacing are set in this screen. First, specify how the width of the text is determined, in
the Width Method field:

Text Width—field appears when Specify Width is selected as Width Method.

Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the Calculate Text
Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the contour
length.
Here is an example of a True-Type Lettering Along Contour parameters block:

Use the Edit Along Contour softkey to open the Start segment:
The contour start segment includes fields to specify which side of the contour the text is
positioned relative to. The text offset specifies distance between the contour and the
reference point of the text.
Select the Next Segment softkey to lay the text out on a line, arc, or blend arc:

Figure 2–27. Example of True-Type Lettering Along Contour

screen.
fields listed below appear on the True-Type Lettering Along Contour screen. Fields
displayed on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter
settings, and/or settings in other fields.
Block Mill Feed Sweep Angle XY Angle
Blank Spacing Milling Type Tool XY Length
Char Spacing Overlap Text Y Center
Direction Peck Depth Text Offset Y End
Finish SFQ Plunge Feed Text Height Y Start
Finish XY Pocket Overlap Text Width Z Bottom
Finish Z Pocket Type Width Method Z Start
Font Radius X Center
Font Side of Contour Rough SFQ X End
Mapping Speed (RPM) X Start

HD3 Serial Number Stick Lettering
HD3 Serial Number Lettering mills a sequence of unique serial numbers that increment
each time the block is run. The characters are HD3-style (non-true type) and can be
alphabetic A-Z, numeric 0-9, and special characters @#!$^&*()-[]_=+’:;%?/<>,.\.
Alpha characters are all upper case. The last character in the serial number must be
numeric and is incremented by a specified amount.
• Users can manually provide serial number data, which includes a starting
sequence, such as 0001 or ABC001, and an increment which advances the
serial number for each subsequent run.
• Data can originate from a file in which the serial numbers are listed. Each
time the block is run, the next serial number is extracted from the file. The
format of this file must be one serial number per line, each line must end in a
carriage return, line feed sequence, or Return key.
To create an HD3 Serial Number Lettering block from the New Block Screen:
1. Select the Milling softkey.

2. Select the More softkey.
3. Select the Lettering softkey.
4. Select the Serial Number Stick Lettering softkey.
The HD3 Serial Number Lettering screen uses three tabs: Text, Orientation, and Format.
Text tab
The text of the serial number is set up in the Text tab:
The Character Width includes the character left-justified, plus some spacing between it
and the next character to be milled. Spacing between the characters is equal to the tool's
diameter. Because cutter compensation is not used in this routine and letter contouring

follows the center of the tool, character spacing can be adjusted by adjusting the tool
diameter in Tool Setup.
To populate serial numbers from a source file, specify From File in the Data Origin
field. The File field and Locate... button appear. The file must be located on the hard drive
or an accessible network drive, or can be on a floppy disk or USB memory device that has
been loaded onto the control. To select the file:
1. Select the Locate... button to browse for the file.

2. Navigate to the location of the file in the dialog box that opens.
3. Select the file.
4. Select the Open button on the dialog box. The file and path appear in the
File field.
Orientation tab
The Orientation fields specify the orientation of the X and Y reference points.
Figure 2–28. Serial Number Orientation tab
Y Reference
Top
Center
Bottom
Start Center End
X Reference
Figure 2–29. X Reference and Y Reference locations

Format tab
The Format fields indicate whether the serial number should have a minimum length and
what that length should be.
Figure 2–30. Serial Number Format tab
Leading Symbol Example:

Starting Sequence 001
Increment 1
Assure Minimum Length Yes
Minimum Length 5
Leading Symbol A
First Serial Number will be AA001 NOTE: A second “A” is added to starting
sequence of 001 to assure the minimum
length of 5.
Second Serial Number will be AA002
999th Serial Number will be AA999
1000th Serial Number will be A1000 NOTE: The second “A” is no longer needed to
assure minimum length.
If serial number “AA1000” is required, the
Starting Sequence would be AA001 and Assure
Minimum Length would be set to No.
Format tab only assures a minimum number of characters. The

serial number will continue to increment and expand with continuous
running of the block.

History tab
The History tab displays the last used and next serial numbers and contains the Reset
Numbering button:
Figure 2–31. Serial Number History tab
The Last Used and Next Serial Numbers are saved in the part program after each cycle so
milling can restart from where it was stopped when the part program was closed.
fields listed below appear on the Serial Number Stick Lettering screen. Fields displayed
on screen may vary according to machine type, configuration, parameter settings, and/or
Assure Minimum Last Used Serial Plunge Feed X Ref Location

Length Number
Block Leading Symbol Reset Numbering Y Reference
Character Height Mill Feed Speed (RPM) Y Ref Location
Character Width Minimum Length Starting Sequence Z Bottom
Data Origin Next Serial Number Tool Z Start
Increment Peck Depth X Reference

Mill HD3 Lettering
Mill HD3 Lettering supports programs created in the legacy Ultimax Classic mode.
Use the X and Y Ref Locations to specify the X and Y reference points—start, center, or
end:
Y Reference
Top
Center
Bottom
Start Center End
X Reference
Figure 2–32. X Reference and Y Reference locations
Specify the character dimensions in Character Height and Character Width, and the
text to be milled in the Text field.
Cutter Compensation is not available for HD3 Lettering. Milling is performed using the
centerline of the tool. Refer to Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9.
fields listed below appear on the HD3 Lettering screen. Fields displayed on screen may
other fields.
Block Speed (RPM) Y Ref Location
Character Height Text Z Bottom
Character Width Tool Z Start
Mill Feed X Reference
Peck Depth X Ref Location
Plunge Feed Y Reference

Insert Pockets
Cutter insert manufacturers use the Insert Pockets milling routines to mill pockets in
triangular, diamond, and hexagon shapes. These routines are sold as the Insert Pockets
option and can be defined in one program data block.
To access the Insert Pockets features, select the Milling softkey in a New Block screen,
then Select the More softkey. If the option is installed the next screen will have a
Special softkey. Select that softkey to display the following screen:
Choose Triangle, Diamond 1 Face, Diamond 2 Faces, or Hexagon milling.
Mill Triangle, on page 2 - 71—mills a triangle shape with three equal 60° angles
with one open face.
Mill Diamond, on page 2 - 71—mills a four-sided diamond shape with opposite

angles equal with one or two open faces.
Mill Hexagon, on page 2 - 72—mills a six-sided hexagon shape with every other
angle equal.
For all shapes, the cutting operation is set in the Milling Type field:
• Inside - cuts just the non-open faces of the pocket, including the relief cuts.
• Inside 2 Passes - cuts the same as Inside, except this selection uses a
roughing pass and a finishing pass. During roughing, material is left for the
finish pass.
• Pocket Outside In - cuts along the faces of the insert, including the relief
cuts and then steps inward and cleans out the entire insert by executing
smaller versions of the shape until the center point is reached.
• Pocket 2 Passes Outside In - cuts in the same manner as Pocket Outside
In, except this selection uses a roughing and a finishing pass.

• Pocket Inside Out - plunges tool at X-Y center of the insert and cuts
outward, executing larger versions of the shape until the faces and relief cuts
are milled.
• Pocket 2 Passes Inside Out - cuts the same as Pocket Inside Out, except
this selection uses a roughing and a finishing pass.
Mill Triangle
The triangle pocket shape has three equal 60° angles with one open face as shown below.
A relief cut can be programmed in the corner at point 1.
Relief Corner
1
Open Face Radius Centerpoint Orientation = 0
Figure 2–33. Triangle Programming Diagram
Mill Diamond
The diamond pocket shapes have four sides with opposite angles equal.
The Diamond 1 Face has one open face and the option of a right, center, or left relief cut
in the corners at point 1 and point 2 as shown below:
Relief Corners
Angle
Radius
4
Centerpoint Orientation =0
2
Open Face
Figure 2–34. Diamond 1 Face Diagram

The Diamond 2 Faces pocket has two open faces and the option of a right, center, or
left relief cut in the corner at point 1 as shown below:
1
Relief
Corners
Angle
4 Radius
Centerpoint Orientation = 0
2
Open Face
Open Face
Figure 2–35. Diamond 2 Faces Diagram
Mill Hexagon
This pocket shape has six sides and every other angle equal. In the diagram below, the
shape has two open faces and the option of a relief cut in the corners at point 1, point 2,
and point 3, and the option of a face relief distance between points 0 and 1 and points 3
and 4.
P-0 Point 0
P-1 Point 1
Radius
P-2 Point 2
Orientation=0
P-3 Point 3
Shape
Angle
X and Y
Centerpoint
P-4 Point 4
P-5 Point 5
R-1 Relief 1
Tool path
R-2 Relief 2
R-3 Relief 3
Relief Distance
Figure 2–36. Hexagon Programming Diagram
fields listed below appear on the Insert Pockets screen. Fields displayed on screen may

other fields.
Block Radius Text
Mill Feed Relief 1 Tool
Milling Type Relief 2 X Center
Orientation Relief 3 Y Center
Peck Depth Shape Angle Z Bottom
Plunge Feed Speed (RPM) Z Start

Swept Surface
The Swept Surface option in WinMax allows you to program draft angles for pocket or
island walls with greater flexibility, including Spiral, Constant Z level, and Cusp Height
cutting strategies.
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Swept Surface

programming video demonstration:
Video Demonstrations at www.hurco.comScroll to the bottom of the

page and select the video to download. Internet connection is
required.
Swept Surface builds on the WinMax 3D Mold option. The basic elements in Swept
Surface programming are:
• Draw Profile Contour—build the XZ or YZ shape of the part

• Draw Along Contour—build the shape of the contour
• Swept Surface—provide details of how to cut the part
To begin a new Swept Surface program block, perform the following steps:

3. Select the Swept Surface softkey.
4. Use the drop-down list to select the type of contour in the Type field: Draw
Profile, Draw Along, or Swept Surface.
A Swept Surface program block must contain all three types of
contours: Draw Profile, Draw Along, and Swept Surface.
5. To program Draw Profile Contours or Draw Along Contours, place the cursor in
the Type field, and select the Edit Along Contour or the Edit Profile
Contour softkey.

Swept Surface Parameters
Swept Surface parameters establish the machining characteristics.
fields listed below appear on the Swept Surface parameter screen. Fields displayed on
Bidirectional Individual Pocket Finish Rough SFQ Type of Corners

Profiles SFQ
Block Mill Feed Pocket First Speed (RPM) Use Cusp Height
Cusp Height Milling Type Pocket Overlap Start Angle Z Roughing
Cut Direction Min Cusp Pocket Rough Step Size Z Start

Overlap (%) SFQ
End Angle Min Z Pocket Type Stock Allowance Y End
Finish SFQ Overlap Profile Number Step Connect

Type
Finish XY Peck Depth Roll End Point Tool
Finish Z Plunge Feed Roll Start Point Type
Swept Surface Contours

Program the part surfaces as a 2D profile in either the XY or XZ plane.
The Start Segment number is always 0. Use segments to program lines and arcs which
create a contour. Repeat the 2D profile along a straight line (translate) or repeat it around
a centerline (revolve) to produce the final 3D shape. The Contour End block marks the
end of the programmed contour.
When creating/editing a contour segment, select the Swept Surface Parameters

softkey to access the parameters screen. When on the parameters screen, the Edit
Profile Contour and Edit Along Contour softkeys appear. Use these softkeys to switch
between the parameter and contour screens; softkeys do not appear if the cursor is in the
Block or Segment fields.
Draw Profile Contour

The Draw Profile Contour screen is displayed as
Swept Surface (Profile Contour).
Set the Type field to Draw Profile(s) and select the Edit Profile Contour softkey. Seg-
ment types are:
• Start Segment
• Line Segment

• Arc Segment
• Blend Arc Segment
A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour, circle,

frame, slot, or polygon into the program, using Multiple Block
Functions on the Program Review screen.
Draw Along Contour

The Draw Along Contour screen is displayed as
Swept Surface (Along Contour).
Set the Type field to Draw Along and select the Edit Along Contour softkey. Segment
types are:
• Start Segment
• Line Segment
• Arc Segment
• Blend Arc Segment
A contour can also be created by pasting an existing contour, circle,

frame, slot, or polygon block into the program, using Multiple Block
Functions on the Program Review screen.
The Surface Side field (present in Segment 0) specifies on which side of the Along
contour the profile is cut:
• When set to Right, the profile is cut to the right of the contour forming a
surface to the right of the along contour.
• When set to Left, the profile is cut to left of the contour creating a surface to
the left of the along contour.
Start Segment
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Contour Start segment fields:
Block
Segment
Surface Side
X Start
Y Start
Z Start
Continue programming the contour by using the Page Down key or by selecting the Next
Segment softkey.
Line, Arc, and Blend Arc softkey choices appear.

screen. This allows you to use the same segments for a Mill Contour
Block and a 3D Mold Block without entering each segment twice.
• To copy a block, select the contour that you wish to copy

on the Program Review Screen and use the MULTIPLE
BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to access the COPY softkey.
• To paste a block, select the 3D Mold Block that you wish
to paste the contour into on the Program Review screen
and use the MULTIPLE BLOCK FUNCTIONS softkey to
access the PASTE softkey.
Line Segment
Use the Line Segment block to create the geometry for a line.
Some Line fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic
Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value
softkey to retain a calculated value.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Line segment fields:
Block XY Length Z End
Segment XZ Angle Z Start
X End XZ Length
X Start Y End
XY Angle Y Start
Arc Segment
Some Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See Automatic
Calculations, on page 2 - 7 for more information. Use the Store Calculated Value
softkey to retain a calculated value.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Arc segment fields:
Block X Center Y Start
Direction X End Z Center
Radius X Start Z End
Segment Y Center Z Start
Sweep Angle Y End

Blend Arc Segment
Some Blend Arc fields are automatically calculated with the Auto-Calc feature. See
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Swept Surface Blend Arc segment fields:
Block X End Z Center
Direction X Start Z End
Radius Y Center Z Start
Segment Y End
X Center Y Start

Mill Slot
For Rotary Slot see Rotary Slot - Universal, on page 5 - 19 in the
Rotary chapter.
The Mill Slot block creates a line or arc shape of any width. The slot is defined by a line or
an arc segment and a width. The ends of the slot can be round or square.
Line Slot Arc Slot

Width Width
Top
XY XY End
Start
Bottom
Bottom
Start Point
XY End
Start Point XY Start
Milling begins at the center of the bottom wall of the slot, assuming the shape is parallel
to the X axis (Angle field is set to zero). The same relative “bottom” wall is maintained
when the shape is rotated, so when the Angle field is nonzero, milling begins on the side
that would be parallel with the X-axis if the Angle was zero:
XY End
Start Point
XY Start
Figure 2–37. Line Slot rotated 90°

Mill Slot Programming
3. Select the Slot softkey. The Mill Slot screen contains three tabs: Start,
Geometry, and Caps.
To use pocketing with Mill Slot, the UltiPockets option must be

Start tab
Define the slot shape, width, and common starting information on the Start tab:
Some fields may be automatically calculated when sufficient data

has been entered. The CAL notation appears before the field.
Geometry tab
The fields that appear on the Geometry tab depend on the slot shape selected in the
Start tab (line or arc). Define the slot geometry:

Caps tab
The slot ends are defined on the Caps tab:
If a Corner Radius exceeds 1/2 of the slot width, WinMax will find the
intersection point to close the contour.
fields listed below appear on the Mill Slot screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary
fields.
Block Peck Depth Start Cap XY Angle
Corner Radius Plunge Feed Sweep Angle XY Length
Direction Pocket Overlap Tool Y Center
End Cap Pocket Type Width Y End
Mill Feed Radius X Center Y Start
Milling Type Shape X End Z Bottom
Overlap Speed (RPM) X Start Z Start

Start Cap and End Cap specify the type of ends the slot uses:
• Line closes the slot with a straight line, passing through the programmed
endpoint:
• Append Arc appends an arc at the ends of the slot length, i.e., center of
semi-circle is programmed endpoint:
• Include Arc includes the arc in the slot length, i.e., outermost edge of semi-
circle is programmed endpoint:

Mill Slot Sample Program
NOTE: values are metric
DB Data Block Field Name Field Value

1 Mill Slot
Shape Line
Width 30.000
X Start 20.000
Start tab
Y Start 20.000
Z Start 1.000
Z Bottom -10.000
X End 100.000
Y End 20.000
Geometry tab
XY Length [CAL] 80.000
XY Angle [CAL] 0.000
Start Cap Line
Corner Radius 0.000
Caps tab
End Cap Append Arc
Corner Radius n/a
Milling Type Pocket Boundary
Roughing tab
Pocket Type Outward

Mill Polygon
For Rotary Polygon information, see Rotary Polygon - Universal, on
page 5 - 19 in the Rotary chapter.
The Mill Polygon data block mills a multi-sided contour with equal-length sides. The
bottom of the polygon is parallel to the X axis at 0° orientation (three o’clock position):
Milling begins on the side of the polygon that is parallel to X at 0° prior to rotation.
Rotation is achieved with the Orientation Angle field.
To access the Mill Polygon block:

3. Select the Polygon softkey. The Mill Polygon block opens:
Figure 2–38. Mill Polygon screen
To use pocketing with Mill Polygon, the UltiPockets option must be


The Sizing Method determines how the polygon size is established:
• Outer Diameter—the diameter of a circle that encompasses the outside of

the polygon, touching it at the corners:
• Inner Diameter—the diameter of a circle contained within the polygon,

touching at the center of each edge:
• Side Length—the length of one side of the polygon:
The Orientation Angle field rotates the part. This field specifies an angle relative to the
X axis that determines where the starting side occurs. An orientation of 0° indicates that
the starting side is at the bottom of the polygon, parallel to the X axis. For example:
0° Angle 45° Angle
Starting Side
Starting Side
fields listed below appear on the Mill Polygon screen. Fields displayed on screen may vary

fields.
Block Plunge Feed X Center
Corner Radius Pocket Overlap Y Center
Direction Pocket Type Z Bottom
Mill Feed Radius Z Start
Milling Type Side Length
Number Of Sides Sizing Diameter
Orientation Angle Sizing Method
Overlap Speed (RPM)
Peck Depth Tool
A Mill Polygon data block will convert to a Mill Contour data block if
saved as an HD3 program.

HOLES OPERATIONS
A Holes block consists of the operation (drill, tap, bore, ream, or back spotface) and the
pattern or location (bolt circle or locations).
These topics explain the hole operations:
Drill Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 90
Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Center Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Counterbore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Spotface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Countersink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Gun Drill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 92
Custom Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 94
Tap Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 99
Bore and Ream Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 100
Bore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Ream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Bore Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Bore Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102
Ream Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102
Back Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 103
These topics explain the pattern or location of the hole operation:
Bolt Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 104

Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 105
Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 106
Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 107
Holes End Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 107
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Holes Operations 2-87

Drill Operations
Select the Drill Operations softkey on the New Hole Operation screen to select the type
of drilling operation. The appropriate screen appears with fields describing the operation.
The drill operations are:
Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Center Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Counterbore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Spotface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Countersink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 91
Gun Drill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 92
Custom Drill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 94
See Bore and Ream Operations, on page 2 - 100 for information
about bore and ream.
The diagram below shows the relationships of the field names to positions of the tool to
the work piece:
1 Head
2 Part
3 Table
4 Z Start Plane
5 Rapid Traverse
6 Retract Clearance Plane
7 Plunge Feed
8 Z Bottom
Figure 2–39. Reference Points Relative to Drill Operations
Be aware of the drill bits' characteristics. The system does not keep track of the type and
length of flutes on the bits or the shapes of drills with pilots or other multiple-diameter
drills.
This is the machine motion in a basic drilling operation:
1. The table moves at the rapid traverse rate to the programmed X and Y
dimensions.
2. The Z axis moves at the rapid traverse rate to the programmed retract
clearance.
3. When these coordinates are reached, the Z axis moves at the rapid traverse
rate to Z Start.
4. Then the Z axis moves at the programmed plunge feed rate until reaching the
Z Bottom dimension.
2 - 88 Holes Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

5. The Z axis dwells the time specified and rapid traverses to the retract
clearance.
The rapid traverse rate, retract clearance, and drill dwell are selected in Program
Parameters or Change Parameters.
When all values are programmed, the Bolt Circle and Locations softkeys are available.
See Bolt Circle, on page 2 - 104 and Locations, on page 2 - 105 for more information.
Drill
Use a drill to create holes that may be complete or may be used as the starting points for
additional drilling operations.
See Drill Fields, on page 2 - 98 for field definitions.
Center Drill
Select Center Drill when the work piece is very rigid to create a guide hole for the drilling
tool that will be used to complete the hole. Center drilling helps keep holes in their proper
locations and prevent runout.
Center drills are special tools with short flutes, but a standard drilling tool may be used to
create these starting holes.
Counterbore
Use Counterbore to enlarge the end of a previously drilled hole. This operation creates an
enlarged area at the end of the hole to accommodate a bolt, cap screw, or pin. These
square-shoulder fasteners can then be inserted flush with the top of the part or slightly
below the surface of the material.
To avoid unneeded tool changes, use Counterbore before drilling the hole.
Spotface
Spotface smooths and squares the surface around a previously drilled hole to provide a
seat for a bolt head, a nut, or the shoulders on mating members. The spotfacing
operation is a shallow counterboring operation. Spotfacing is often used when the surface
of the part is uneven.
To avoid unnecessary tool changes, Spotface can be used before drilling the hole.
Countersink

Countersink enlarges the top end of a hole to a cone shape to accommodate the head of
a flat or oval headed machine screw. The hole is enlarged so that when the screw is
inserted, the screw head will be flush with or slightly below the top of the work piece
surface:
Gun Drill
Select the Gun Drill feature when using a very long tool and drilling deep holes, as if
drilling out the center of a gun barrel. A long, rotating tool may whip off center when
approaching the cutting surface, so a drilling cycle that controls the approach to the work
piece and corrects positioning of the tool is required.
The Gun Drill selection positions the tool without rotating the spindle. This allows the tip
of the tool to position precisely in a pre-drilled starting hole, as shown in the diagram
below:
1 Work Piece
2 Planned Path
3 Pre-drilled starting hole
4 Long tool moves into position with the spindle off to

avoid whipping
Figure 2–40. Gun Drilling
To use the Gun Drill features, perform these tasks:
• Describe the gun drill tool during Tool Setup.

• Create a starting hole for the drill as the first step in part programming.
• Create a Gun Drill data block in the part program.

Each Gun Drill data block must contain at least two operations: one describing the
starting hole and one for the gun drill hole.
To create a Gun Drill data block, begin on a New data block screen and follow these
general steps:
1. Press the Drill Operations softkey.

2. Create the first operation of the data block by describing the starting hole
portion of the data block. Select either the Drill softkey or the Center Drill
softkey. Type in the description of the starting hole into the fields displayed on
the screen.
3. When all of the starting hole data have been entered, begin the second
operation in this data block.
4. Press the Drill Operations softkey and then the Gun Drill softkey.
The following illustration shows the Gun Drill program fields as they relate to a part and
the drilling tool:
1 Work Piece
2 Move at rapid traverse down to Z top
3 Z Top
4 Z Top Feed—feedrate between Z top and Z Start
5 Z Start—spindle begins to rotate at Speed (RPM)
6 Z Bottom

Custom Drill
The Custom Drill feature can be used to adjust the feedrate and speed for each step in
the drill cycle: entry into hole, break out through bottom of material, bottom, re-entry
into hole from bottom, out move at top of hole, and the move to retract clearance plane.
Custom Drill is typically used for long hole drill cycles but can be used to customize any
drill cycle.
Tool Tab
The Custom Drill screen is organized into tabs where the feed, speed, and other
parameters are entered for each step of the drill cycle. The first tab is the Tool tab:
Figure 2–41. Custom Drill Tool tab
A list of all hole operations are displayed on the Tool tab to show the relation of the
Custom Drill cycle with other operations in the block. The tool is specified on this screen.

Entry Tab
The Entry step establishes the speed and feed for the approach move starting at Z Start
and ending at Z Top. The image shows the move from Z Start to Z Top:
Figure 2–42. Custom Drill Entry tab
Break Out Tab

The Break Out tab allows the user to set a feed and speed for the drill operation that
differs from the feed and speed used for the move breaking through the bottom of the
material (typically to avoid whipping). This step is optional and can be skipped by setting
the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the feed and speed from the Bottom tab are
used for the move from Z Top to Z Bottom, and the pecking parameters are set on the
Bottom tab.
The image shows the plunge move from Z Top to Z Break Out, if enabled:
Figure 2–43. Custom Drill Break Out tab

Bottom Tab
The final move through the hole from Z Break Out to Z Bottom is set in the Bottom tab. If
the previous Break Out step is not enabled, then the feed and speed set in this step are
used for the entire move from Z Top to Z Bottom.
The image shows the motion for the plunge move from Z Break Out to Z Bottom:
Figure 2–44. Custom Drill Bottom tab
Re-entry Tab
The Re-entry step allows the user to set a speed and feed for the retract move from Z
Bottom to a Z position back inside the hole (Z Re-entry). This step is optional and can be
skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the move occurs from Z
Bottom to the next enabled step (Out or Retract). If there are no other enabled steps, the
spindle moves at rapid out of the hole to the Z start location.
The image shows the move from Z Bottom to Z Re-entry, if enabled:
Figure 2–45. Custom Drill Re-entry tab

Out Tab
The Out step allows the user to set the speed and feedrate for the retract move from Z
Re-entry to Z Out (the Z end position of the retract move from Z Re-entry). This step is
optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When Enable is No, the
move occurs from the last enabled step (Bottom or Re-entry) to the Retract step, if it is
enabled. If the Retract step is not enabled, the spindle moves at rapid from the last
enable step (Bottom or Re-entry) out of the hole to the Z start location.
The image shows the move from Z Re-entry to Z Out, if enabled:
Figure 2–46. Custom Drill Out tab

Retract Tab
The Retract step allows the user to set the feed and speed for the move from Z Out to Z
Retract. This step is optional and can be skipped by setting the Enable field to No. When
Enable is No, the tool moves at rapid feedrate from the last enabled step (Bottom, Re-
entry, or Out) to the Z Start position.
From Z Retract, the tool moves at rapid feedrate to the retract clearance plane;
therefore, Z Retract should be less than the retract clearance plane. Z Retract can be
greater than, less than, or equal to Z Start.
The image shows the retract move from Z Out to Z Retract:
Figure 2–47. Custom Drill Retract tab
Drill Fields
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Drill Operations fields:
Block Peck Retract Feed Tool Z Start
Enable Peck Type Z Bottom Z Top
Feed Plunge Feed Z Break Out Z Top Feed
Operation Rapid Peck Retract Z Out Z Top RPM
Peck Depth Speed (RPM) Z Re-entry
Pecking Retract Spindle Stop Z Retract

Clearance

Tap Operations
To program a new Tap operation:
1. Display the Input screen and select the Part Programming softkey.
3. Select the Holes softkey. The Hole Operation screen opens.
4. Select the Tap Operations softkey.
5. Select the Tap or Rigid Tap softkey.
• Tap - programs a standard tapping sequence.
• Rigid Tap - programs a tapping sequence in which the same hole is
tapped repeatedly with precision.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tap Operations fields:
Block Tool
Dwell Time TPI
Operation Z Bottom
Pitch Z Start
Plunge Feed
Speed (RPM)

Bore and Ream Operations
The bore and ream operation types are:
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Ream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Bore Rapid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 101
Bore Orient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102
Ream Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 102
Use a bore when a straight and accurately round hole is needed. A boring bar usually has
one or, at the most, two blades projecting out from the shank. The blades are adjustable
on many types of boring bars.
1 Shank
2 Blade depth adjustment dial
3 Replaceable cutter inserts
Figure 2–48. Two-Bladed Boring Bar with Adjustment Dial
Use a ream to size a previously drilled hole. A reaming tool has multiple flutes that run
vertically along the shank of the tool. During reaming, the cutter follows the angle of the
existing hole and cannot be used to straighten the angle of the hole.
Figure 2–49. Reaming Tool
To program a new Bore or Ream operation:
4. Select the Bore and Ream Operations Softkey softkey
5. Select the Bore or Ream operation.

Bore
Use a bore when a straight and accurately round hole is needed. A boring bar is a tool
with typically one or two blades projecting out from the shank. The blades on many
boring bars can be adjusted to increase or decrease the size of the hole. The illustration
below shows a two-bladed boring bar.
Insert the boring tool into the spindle with the cutting face in line with the tool holder’s
orientation hole, opposite the spindle key. WinMax uses this oriented spindle key angle to
determine the bore orient retract direction.
1 Boring Bar
2 Shank
3 Blad depth adjustment dial
4 Replaceable blades
Figure 2–50. Two-bladed Boring Bar with Adjustment Dial
Ream
Use the Ream feature to size a previously drilled hole. Reaming clears burrs and other
particles left from a drilling or boring operation. During reaming, the cutter follows the
angle of the existing hole and cannot be used to straighten the angle of the hole.
A reaming tool has multiple flutes that run vertically along the shank of the tool as shown
in the following illustration:
Figure 2–51. Reaming Tool
Pecks are not allowed with the reaming feature.
Bore Rapid
Use Bore Rapid when the tool should retract at the Rapid Traverse feedrate programmed

in General Parameters or Change Parameters.
Bore Orient
Use Bore Orient to orient the bore at Z Bottom and move the boring bar. The cutting edge
of the boring bar moves away from the surface of the bored hole so that during the next
step the cutting edge will not scrape the walls of the hole. The distance the boring bar
moves is set in the Bore Orient Retract field on the Holes Parameters screen.
Insert the boring tool into the spindle with the cutting face in line with the tool holder’s
orientation hole, opposite the spindle key. WinMax uses this oriented spindle key angle to
determine the bore orient retract direction.
Ream Rapid
Use Ream Rapid when the tool should retract at Rapid Traverse feedrate programmed in
General Parameters or Change Parameters.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Bore and Ream Operations fields:
Block Z Bottom
Operation Z Start
Plunge Feed
Speed (RPM)
Tool

Back Spotface
Use the Back Spotface function to cut out the underside of holes that must be cut through
the workpiece.
To program a new Back Spotface operation:
4. Select the Back Spotface softkey.
This motion sequence occurs with Back Spotface:
1. Rapid to Z Start minus cutter offset and set the spindle speed to a plunge
speed.
2. Move to Z Plunge minus cutter offset at a closing feedrate to close the cutter.
3. Rapid to Z Bottom minus cutter offset.
4. Dwell for a specified reverse dwell amount, reverse the spindle direction and
ramp to cutting speed to open the cutter.
5. Move up to Z Depth minus cutter offset at a cutting feedrate.
6. Dwell for the drill dwell time (from program parameters).
7. Rapid down a Z Clearance amount.
8. Dwell for the Reverse Dwell time and reverse the spindle direction to plunge
speed to close the cutter.
9. Move to Z Retract minus cutter offset at a closing feedrate to insure the cutter
is closed.
10. Rapid out of the hole.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Back Spotface fields:
Block Speed (RPM) Z Retract
Closing Feed Tool Z Start
Operation Z Bottom
Plunge Feed Z Clearance
Plunge Speed Z Depth
Reverse Dwell Z Plunge

Bolt Circle
For each Holes block, you must include a Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary
Locations operation. The Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations softkeys are
not available for the first operation in a Holes block because they require prior operations
to identify the type of operation, the tool, reference points, and machining information.
A Bolt Circle operation executes a series of equally spaced holes in a common circle. This
operation allows skipping holes in the bolt circle.
• All Locations programmed in a block containing a Bolt Circle are executed in

addition to the Bolt Circle pattern.
• All operations programmed in a data block are performed at all locations
specified in that block.
To program a new Bolt Circle operation:
4. Select and program the hole operation(s).
5. Place cursor in the Operation field and select Next Operation softkey.
6. Select the Bolt Circle softkey.
Enter the number of holes, the radius, and the X and Y center coordinates to establish the
bolt circle pattern. Use the Skip List field to specify positions that should be skipped. For
example, in the diagram below there are 6 holes in the pattern. If you do not want to drill
holes for positions 2 and 5, enter 2 and 5 in the Skip List field
A Start Angle
B X Center, Y Center
C radius
Figure 2–52. Bolt Circle Pattern
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Bolt Circle fields:

Block Start Angle
Operation X Center
Number of Holes Y Center
Radius
Skip List
See Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern Locations Conversion,

on page 2 - 106 to convert the Bolt Circle to a Holes Locations or
Pattern Locations block.
Locations
For each Holes block, you must include a Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary
Locations operation. The Bolt Circle, Locations, or Rotary Locations softkeys are
not available for the first operation in a Holes block because they require prior operations
to identify the type of operation, the tool, reference points, and machining information.
• All Locations programmed in a block containing a Bolt Circle are executed in

addition to the Bolt Circle pattern.
• All operations programmed in a data block are performed at all locations
specified in that block.
To program a new Locations operation:
4. Select and program the hole operation(s).
5. Place cursor in the Operation field and select Next Operation softkey.
6. Select the Locations softkey.
Specify the X and Y hole locations. Up to 10 locations can be displayed on the screen. The
Page Up/Page Down softkeys appear when there are more than 10 locations
programmed. With the cursor in a Location X or Y field, the Add Location and Insert
Location Before softkeys appear. Select one of these softkeys to either add or insert
fields in the list for entering data. The Delete Location softkey appears when at least
one location is in the list.
Move to the next Block or the next Operation by placing the cursor in the desired field and
selecting the appropriate softkey (Next Block, Next Hole Operation, etc.).
See Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion, on page 2 - 107 to

convert the Locations block to a Pattern Locations block.

Bolt Circle to Holes Locations or Pattern
Locations Conversion
A Bolt Circle data block can be copied or converted to either a Holes Locations or Pattern
Locations block. Place the cursor in a Bolt Circle field and the Copy and Convert softkeys
appear:
Copy or convert to
Hole Locations block
Copy or convert to
Pattern Locations block
Figure 2–53. Bolt Circle Hole or Pattern Locations Copy and Convert softkeys
Use the following softkey commands:
• Copy to Hole Locations—a Holes Locations block is created with the Bolt
Circle coordinates, and is inserted before the Bolt Circle operation in the
program. The Bolt Circle operation is maintained in the program. A Holes End
block is inserted after the Hole Locations block.
• Convert to Hole Locations—a Holes Locations block is created with the Bolt
Circle coordinates, and replaces the Bolt Circle operation in the program. The
Bolt Circle operation is removed from the program. A Holes End block is
inserted after the Hole Locations block.
• Copy to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the
Bolt Circle coordinates, and is inserted before the Holes block in the program.
The Bolt Circle operation is maintained in the program. A Pattern End block is
inserted after the Holes block.
• Convert to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with
the Bolt Circle coordinates. The Bolt Circle operation is removed from the
program, and a Holes Location block with 0.0 coordinates is inserted for a
reference point. A Pattern End block is also inserted after the Holes block.

Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion
A Holes Locations data block can be copied or converted to a Pattern Locations block.
Place the cursor in a field and the Copy and Convert softkeys appear:
Figure 2–54. Holes to Pattern Locations softkeys
Use the following softkey commands:
• Copy to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with the

Holes locations, and is inserted before the Holes block in the program. The
Holes operation is maintained in the program. A Pattern End block is inserted
after the Holes block.
• Convert to Pattern Locations—a Pattern Locations block is created with
the Holes locations. The Holes Locations block remains in the program with
0.0 coordinates as a reference point. A Pattern End block is inserted after the
Holes block.
Holes End Block

A Holes End block is automatically inserted at the end of each Holes data block.

PATTERNS OPERATIONS
Patterns Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 110
Loop Rectangular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 111
Loop Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 112
Loop Angular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 113
Loop Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 114
Pattern Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 115
Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 116
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 117
Pattern End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 117
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Patterns Operations 2-107

Patterns Overview
Pattern operations repeat or modify a sequence of data blocks. This may save
programming time by duplicating part geometry to complete a part program or create
multiple parts from one program.
Pattern Nesting
Patterns may only be nested 10 levels deep.
Recovery Restart with Patterns

Recovery Restart can be used to restart the program if milling is interrupted during a
pattern. The Recovery Restart softkey is located on the Auto screen, see Recovery and
Restart, on page 1 - 135 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
When Recovery Restart is initiated, the user is prompted to select a starting pattern
number plus any other additional restart information. The program runs the remaining
blocks for the selected pattern instance, then runs all blocks in remaining pattern
instances, and then continues with the remaining program blocks.
With Recovery Restart a program can be restarted at a specific

pattern number, whereas in a partial program run (using the Start
and End block fields on the Auto screen) only blocks can be specified,
including blocks within a pattern, but a specific pattern number
cannot be specified with partial program run.
Example restart scenarios using the following program:
Block 1—Pattern Linear x 3
Block 2—Mill Circle Roughing & Finishing passes
Block 3—Mill Frame Roughing & Finishing passes
Block 4—Mill Contour Roughing & Finishing passes
Block 5—Pattern End
Example 1—Recovery Restart on Pattern Linear: control prompts for the starting pattern
number (1, 2, or 3). All blocks in the pattern are run.
Example 2—Recovery Restart on the Frame block: control prompts for the starting
pattern number, and whether to start on the finishing pass. If pattern number 1 and
finish pass for the frame are specified, it runs the finish pass for the frame in the first
pattern, followed by the entire contour block, then runs the circle, frame, and contour for
all remaining instances of the pattern.
Example 3—Partial Program Run using the Start and End block fields: Start block set to
3 (Frame), end block set to 5 (pattern end), and Run Program softkey selected. Restart
information is not requested; the frame and contour blocks are run for all 3 instances of
the pattern. The circle is not run since it is outside the specified block range.
2 - 108 Patterns Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Loop Rectangular
This routine repeats a pattern a specified number of times along lines parallel to the X
and Y axes. The original pattern is always milled at its programmed location. Always
program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Rectangular block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 X Distance
5 Y Distance
6 X Number = 3; Y
Number = 2
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Rectangular fields:
Block
X Distance
X Number
Y Distance
Y Number

Loop Linear
This routine repeats a pattern a specified number of times along a line defined in the X-Y
plane. Even though the defined line of this pattern is not parallel to the X or Y axes, the
original pattern is always milled at its programmed location and orientation does not
change with respect to the X and Y axes. Always program a Pattern End data block
following a Loop Linear block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 Distance
5 Angle
6 X Distance
7 Y Distance
8 Number = 3
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Linear fields:
Angle
Block
Distance
Number
X Distance
Y Distance

Loop Angular
This routine repeats a programmed pattern a specified number of times along a circular
path. Pattern orientation does not change with respect to the X and Y axes. The original
programmed pattern is not executed at its original position unless the routine places it at
that location. The pattern is only shown in the locations specified by the routine. Always
program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Angular block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 XY Center
5 Start Angle
6 Rotate Angle
7 XY Reference
8 Number = 3
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Angular fields:
Block Y Center
Number Y Reference
Rotate Angle
Start Angle
X Center
X Reference

Loop Rotate
This routine repeats a pattern along a circular path. Loop Rotate moves the pattern
around the X-Y center point and executes the pattern only at the programmed locations.
The original programmed pattern is not executed at its original position, unless this
routine places it at that location. The pattern is only shown in the specified locations.
Always program a Pattern End data block following a Loop Rotate block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 XY Center
5 Start Angle
6 Rotate Angle
7 XY Reference
8 Number = 3
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Loop Rotate fields:
Block
Number
Rotate Angle
Start Angle
X Center
Y Center

Pattern Locations
For Transform Plane, see Transform Plane (configurations other than
Universal), on page 5 - 13 in Rotary Programming.
Enter a Pattern Location block each time a programmed pattern is to be repeated. The
pattern is repeated by offsetting the pattern with each displacement specified in the
Pattern Location block. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Pattern
Location block.
Use the X, Y, and Z fields to identify the locations where the pattern is to be executed in
the X, Y, and Z axes.

Scale
This routine scales a programmed pattern down or up in a range of 0.100 to 10.000
(10% to 1000%) respectively. Always program a Pattern End data block following a Scale
block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 Scaled Pattern
5 XY Reference
6 X Scale = 3; Y
Scale = 2; Z Scale
= not shown
When you use Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 in the program, the X
and Y scale factors must be equal, except for these selections where the X and Y scale
factors can be different:
• Circle (ON)
• Frame (ON)
• Ellipse (ON)
• Contour (ON)
• True-Type Font (ON)
• HD3 Lettering
When using Z scaling, the Peck Depth, Retract Clearance Plane, Peck Clearance Plane,
and Z Safety Plane values are not affected.
Z Bottom and Z Start are the values commonly affected by Z scaling.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Scale fields:
Block Z Reference
X Reference Z Scale
X Scale
Y Reference
Y Scale

Mirror Image
This pattern programs a part as a mirror image of an existing programmed part. The
routine can execute the mirror image alone or the original part and the mirror image.
Always program a Pattern End data block following a Mirror Image block.
1 X Axis
2 Y Axis
3 Original Pattern
4 Angle
5 XY Point on
Mirror Line
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Pattern Mirror Image fields:
Angle
Block
Keep Original
Pattern End
There are no fields to enter in this data block. It is a marker at the end of the sequence of
data blocks used in a Pattern operation. There must be an equal number of Pattern blocks
and Pattern End data blocks.

SPECIAL OPERATIONS
Special data blocks can be inserted between operational data blocks to change the
position of the table, automatically stop a program, or temporarily change the part
program parameters or set a new part zero.
Position Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 120

Graphics On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 121
Change Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 121
Change Part Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 123
Machine Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 124
Lube Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 124
Comment Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 125
Insert Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 125
Tool Change Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 126
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 Special Operations 2-117

Position Data Block
Use a Position block to move the table, or to stop motion so you can adjust the work
piece, or to gain clearance around the tool or work piece. See Part Setup Safety Work
Region in Part Setup, on page 1 - 91 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Use a Position data block instead of a Change Parameters data block in these instances:
• Between operations, when a clamp or raised portion of the part is higher than
the programmed relative clearance.
• When cutting occurs inside a cavity and is followed by work inside another
cavity in which an optimal Retract Clearance for operations in the recessed
areas is below the surface of the part.
• The Z Retract is the same as the Z safety plane height in a Position data
block.
Refer to Change Parameters, on page 2 - 121 for more information.
To program a Position block:
2. Select the Insert Block Before softkey. The New Block screen opens.
3. Select the Position softkey. The Position block opens.
4. Select the order of axis movement with the drop-down lists and specify the
coordinate(s). Multiple axes with the same value will move simultaneously.
5. Specify in the Z Retract field if the Z axis should retract before the axes move
to the specified positions. If Yes, this move happens first.
6. Specify a tool in the Tool field. If a tool is not specified, a tool change does not
occur.
If there is a tool change in the position block, the tool change safety
move occurs and the axes will not return to their pre-tool change
positions. Only axes that did not have a move specified are left in
their pre-tool change positions.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Position fields:
Block X
Index Pulses Y
Stop Z
Tool Z Retract
If you want to open the CE Safety enclosure doors after the Position
data block executes (the Stop field is Yes), press the Machine Mode
Interrupt console key, then press the Start Cycle button. The
enclosure doors can be opened and the axes jogged. To resume
program execution, close the enclosure doors and press the Start
Cycle button.
2 - 118 Special Operations 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

Graphics On/Off
Graphics On and Graphics Off program blocks allow you hide selected operations in the
graphics display. For example, setting a Graphics Off block as block 3 in a part program
and Graphics On as block 10 will hide blocks 4-9 when the part is viewed using Solid or
Toolpath graphics.
To insert a Graphics On or Graphics Off block:
3. From the New Block screen, select the Miscellaneous softkey.
4. Select the Graphics On/Graphics Off softkey.
All blocks that are hidden by this operation are still cut when the
program is run.
Change Parameters
Use this feature to change data stored in Program Parameters (Refer to Program
Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill):
• Change Parameters (General), on page 2 - 122

• Change Parameters (Milling), on page 2 - 122
• Change Parameters (Holes), on page 2 - 122
• Change Parameters (Probing), on page 2 - 122
• Change Parameters (Performance), on page 2 - 122
When a part program is executed, the data selected in Program Parameters are in effect
until the system encounters another Change Parameters data block or until the end of the
program.
When planning a change to the Retract Clearance parameter, consider the following
points:
1. This parameter is defined relative to the Z Start dimension and can optimize Z
axis tool motion between localized operations.
2. If all of the operations are at the same Z Start plane, there is no difference
between a relative and an absolute clearance. However, when groups of
cutting operations are at different Z levels on the part, programming a relative
Retract Clearance can be more efficient than an absolute retract dimension. It
is possible, using a relative Retract Clearance, to eliminate unnecessary tool
motion and save execution time.
3. If the Z Start dimension of the next operation is different from that of the
current operation, the control uses the higher of the two values for Retract
Clearance before positioning the part in the X-Y axes.

4. To achieve a Retract Clearance close to the part may require the use of a
Position data block. Programming a Position block causes the tool to retract to
the Z Top (+) of the Safety Work Region.
Examples of areas in which a Position data block must be used rather than a simple
parameter change are as follows:
• Between operations, a clamp or raised portion of the part is higher than the
programmed relative clearance.
• When cutting occurs inside a cavity and is followed by work inside another
cavity in which an optimal Retract Clearance for operations is below the
surface of the part.
Refer to Position Data Block, on page 2 - 120 for information about when to use a
Position block instead of changing parameters.
Change Parameters (General)

Use this feature to change the General Parameters for the current program.
The Change Parameters (General) fields are the same as General

Parameters 1 and General Parameters 2. Refer to Program
Change Parameters (Milling)

Use this feature to change Milling Parameters for the current program.
The Change Parameters (Milling) fields are the same as Milling

Parameters 1 and Milling Parameters 2. Refer to Program
Change Parameters (Holes)

Use this feature to set the Holes Parameters for the current program.
The Change Parameters (Holes) fields are the same as Holes

Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in
Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Change Parameters (Probing)

Use this feature to change the Probing Parameters for the current program.
The Change Parameters (Probing) fields are the same as Probing

Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in
Change Parameters (Performance)

Use this feature to change Surface Finish Quality parameters for the current program.
The Change Parameters (Performance) fields are defined the same

as Performance Parameters. Refer to Program Parameters, on page 1
- 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Change Part Setup

Use this function to change the part zero coordinates and the Offset Z value. Change Part
Setup values remain in effect until the next Change Part Setup block. The Auto screen will
show the part position relative to the current part setup block. To change the part setup
back to the original parameters, enter another Change Part Setup screen with the original
parameters at the point in the program where the setup must be reset.
Part Zero A and Centerline A fields appear on the screen when the
Rotary option is installed.
When the program will be used to cut more than one part insert
another Change Part Setup data block at the end of the program to
restore the original (default) part setup.
To create a new Change Part Setup data block:
1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey.

3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey.
4. Select the Change Part Setup softkey.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Change Part Setup fields:
Block Part Zero C X/Y Skew (DEG)
Offset Z Part Zero X Z Table Offset
Part Zero IV Part Zero Y Zone
Part Zero V Part Zero Z
Part Zero A Part Zero Z Shift
Part Zero B Probe Z

Machine Function
Insert Machine Function command into a part program with the Machine Function block.
To add a Machine Function block:
1. From the Input screen, select the Part Programming softkey.

3. Select the Miscellaneous softkey.
4. Select the Machine Function softkey.
5. Select the desired M Code/function.
6. Select the Select M Code softkey.
7. Enter the number of times the M code should repeat in the Repeat Count
field.
8. Enter delay in the Repeat Delay field.
If the Machine Function softkey appears grayed out, the machine
does not have auxiliary machine or equipment-specific M codes
defined.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Machine Function fields:
Block Pallet
Confirm APC Ready Repeat Count
M Code
Lube Cycle
If additional lubrication is needed, insert this block into your program to pulse the lube
pump. The current lube cycle will not be affected. Check your machine manual to see if
your lube reservoir/pump supports programmed inputs. If your lube pump and or
reservoir is actuated by a timer, this option will not function. Most Hurco machines made
after 1998 have timer actuated lube, but the Lube Cycle option is provided for backward
compatibility with older machines. This option is not needed in newer machines due to
higher quality components and adequate lube application.

Comment Block
Comment blocks are useful for the programmer to outline tooling requirements and part
setup data. Comment blocks display text to the operator during program execution when
the block is encountered in the program. The amount of time a comment block is visible
can be programmed in the comment data block. Subsequent machining data blocks will
continue to execute during this time.
When posting Conversational programs to NC, Comment Blocks explain the program code
or provide information, such as setup instructions.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Comment Block fields:
Block
Display Time
Line 1-10
Stop
Insert Block
When posting Conversational programs to NC, use an Insert Block to insert up to ten lines
of NC code (Text Option) or up to ten lines of APT code (APT option).
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the Insert Block fields:
Block
Line 1-10
Type

Tool Change Optimization
Tool Change Optimization reduces the number of tool changes in Conversational
programs. In typical Conversational program execution, each data block is completed
(roughing and finishing) before the program moves to the next data block. With Tool
Change Optimization, operations are completed sequentially by tool; for example, the
program completes all operations that use tool 1 before moving to the operations that
use tool 2, and so on.
For example:
A Mill Frame with tool 1 for roughing and tool 2 for finishing, patterned three
times, with tool 1 in the spindle:
• Without Tool Change Optimization, each frame in the pattern is rough cut
and finish cut before moving to the next frame in the pattern. Sequence
of tool changes: 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2. Total number of tool changes = 5.
• With Tool Change Optimization enabled, all three frames are rough cut,
then all are finish cut. Sequence of tool changes:1, 2. Total number of
tool changes = 1.
Using Tool Change Optimization

To use Tool Change Optimization, the Tool Change Optimization parameter must be set to
YES (default is Yes). This parameter is found on the General 2 tab in Program
Parameters:
Figure 2–55. Tool Change Optimization parameter in Program Parameters
In addition, the Tool Change Optimization On block must be inserted ahead of the
program blocks to which it applies. Both the parameter and the data block are necessary
to activate Tool Change Optimization. The Tool Change Optimization Off block is inserted
after the last block in which tool optimization is to occur. This allows flexibility in using

Tool Change optimization on select blocks while maintaining normal tool change sequence
in other blocks of the program.
With Tool Change Optimization on, a data block should not be

dependent on the finishing pass of the preceding block to clear out
stock (material) prior to that data block. With Tool Change
Optimization, the finishing pass has not yet run (because all
roughing operations are completed first), and therefore the finish
material is not yet removed.
To use the Tool Change Optimization On and Off blocks:
1. From a New Block screen, select the Miscellaneous softkey.

2. Select the More softkey twice.
3. Select the Tool Optimize On softkey. The block opens:
Figure 2–56. Tool Change Optimization On block
4. Set the operations that will have tool changes optimized:

• Maintain Operation Level 1 Order—when set to Yes, all Level 1
operations (typically these are the roughing operations) are performed in
block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all
Level 1 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.
For Holes, the first hole operation is treated as a Level 1 operation

and will be executed when other Level 1 operations are executed,
based on the Maintain Operation order. The other hole operations will
always follow the first hole operation. If the hole operation should
not be started until a previous block has been finished, then be sure
to disable Tool Change Optimization prior to hole operation.
• Maintain Operation Level 2 Order—when set to Yes, all Level 2

operations (typically these are the finishing operations) are performed in
block sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all
Level 2 operations are performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.

The Maintain Operation Level 2 Order parameter does not apply to
holes operations.
5. Select the Tool Optimize Off softkey. The Tool Change Optimization Off block is
used to turn off the Tool Change Optimization feature for a block or group of
blocks within a program, after the Tool Change Optimization On block has
been used at an earlier point in the program.
Example
Tool Change
Optimization
Blocks
Figure 2–57. Placement of Tool Change Optimization blocks
In the sample screen above, tool change optimization occurs for blocks 2-6. The
sequence with Tool Change Optimization parameter set to Yes and the Tool Optimization
On block Maintain Operation Level 1 Order and Maintain Operation Level 2 Order set to
No is shown below:
Tool Change Sequence

Block 2 (Tool 1)
Block Type Rough Tool Finish Tool Block 3 (Tool 1)
Block 5 (Tool 1)
1 TCO On Block 6 (Tool 1)
2 Mill Contour 1 3 Block 4 (Tool 2)
3 Mill Frame 1 3 Block 2 (Tool 3)
4 Mill Circle 2 4 Block 3 (Tool 3)
5 Mill Ellipse 1 3 Block 5 (Tool 3)
7 TCO Off Block 4 (Tool 4)
Tool Changes = 3
Note in the sequence that all roughing blocks that use the first roughing tool (Tool 1) are
executed in block sequence, before switching to the next roughing tool (Tool 2). After all
roughing operations are completed, all finishing operations that use the first finishing tool
(Tool 3) are executed in block sequence, followed by the block that uses the next
finishing tool (Tool 4). This requires 3 tool changes.

If a finish tool is not specified in a milling block, the tool listed in the
Roughing tab is considered a finish tool and will be grouped with the
other finish tools.
If a hole block is within a group of blocks that use Tool Change
Optimization, the hole operations are completed as a group. In
addition, the first hole operation’s tool is grouped with the tools of
the other blocks and is completed in the sequence specified by the
Maintain Roughing Sequence.
When Tool change Optimization is not used (no Tool Optimization On block), the sequence
of tool changes looks like this:
Tool Change Sequence

Block 1 (Tool 1)
Block 1 (Tool 3)
Block Type Rough Tool Finish Tool Block 2 (Tool 1)
Block 2 (Tool 3)
2 Mill Frame 1 3 Block 3 (Tool 4)
3 Mill Circle 2 4 Block 4 (Tool 1)
4 Mill Ellipse 1 3 Block 4 (Tool 3)
Block 5 (Tool 3)
Tool Changes = 9
Note that tool changes occur in block order, resulting in 9 tool changes.

Tool Change Review
Tool changes are reviewed in the Tool Change Review Screen, accessed with the Tool
Change Review softkey in the Part Program Tool Review menu. Tools are displayed in the
order they are used in the program. All tool changes in a part program are displayed,
even if the Tool Change Optimization feature is not used.
Tools are
displayed in the
order they are
used in program Operation is
listed for each
block:
- Roughing
- Finishing
Data blocks - Hole operation
are displayed in by type
the order they
are executed
Figure 2–58. Tool Change Review Screen
Jump to the data block from this screen in one of the following ways:
1. Select the block in the list and press the Enter console key.
2. Select the block in the list and select the Part Programming softkey.
3. Double-click on the block in the list.

NC/CONVERSATIONAL MERGE
WinMax allows you to execute an ISNC G-code (NC) program from within a
Conversational part program with NC/Conversational merge. G-code programs can be
used and re-used within the Conversational program.
To include this data block in a Conversational program, select the NC Program Call
softkey. Use the Program Number field to initiate the NC program (program number
must not exceed 6999). For programs that use variables, the Argument Type field
allows you to enter argument variables (String or List) to pass to a subprogram. See
WinMax Mill NC Programming for more information about variables and arguments.
To invoke a G-Code program from within a Conversational part program, the program
must be loaded in Program Manager. The first line of NC code following the percent (%)
sign must contain the program number preceded by the letter “O” (not a zero) or a colon
(:), for example, O1234 or :1234. There cannot be any other information on this line and
“O” or “:” must be the first character. The program must end with an M99 to allow other
Conversational program operations after the NC program is complete, as in the following
program (O number and M99 are bolded for emphasis):
Example:
%
O5085
(#1 IS THE START ANGLE)
(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF GEAR TEETH)
(#3 IS THE OUTSIDE RADIUS)
(#11 IS THE INSIDE RADIUS)
(#4 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT X COORD)
(#5 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Y COORD)
(#6 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Z COORD)
(#19 IS THE TOOTH TO SKIP)
(#18 IS THE TOOTH RATIO)
/
T1 M06
M03G00G21G90X0Y0Z0S1800
(VARIABLE #4006 - INCHES/METRIC)
IF[#4006EQ20]GOTO10
IF[#4006EQ21]GOTO15
N10#850=25.4
GOTO20
N15#850=1.0
N20G0X-3Y-5
Y5
X8
Y-5
#30=[360.0/#2]
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 NC/Conversational Merge 2-129

#31=0
#22=[#30*#18]
#23=#30-#22
#24=#11*#850
#25=#3*#850
#26=#20*#23
X#4 Y#5
G90G00G16X#25Y#1
G01Z-.25F20.
WHILE[#31LT#2]DO250
#1=[#1+[#22]]
G03G16X#25Y[#1]R#3
G01X#24Y[#1+#26]
#1=[#1+[#23]]
G03X#24Y[#1-#26]R#11
G01X#25Y[#1]
G15
N200#31=#31+1
N400END250
M99
The states for modal G-codes such as work offsets (G54-G59),
absolute/incremental (G90, G91), or SFQ (G5.3 P__) are retained
until they are explicitly changed. They are not automatically reset at
the end of the subprogram run when you return to conversational.
You must explicitly reset the modal code(s) before ending the NC
subprogram if you do not want to retain the state.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of NC/Conversational Merge (NC Program Call
block) fields:
Argument Type
Block
Program Number
2 - 130 NC/Conversational Merge 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

DXF OPTION
DXF Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 134

DXF Build Data Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 135
DXF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 137
Edit Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 138
DXF Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 140
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 DXF Option 2-131

DXF Overview
WinMax DXF offers greater flexibility, improved compatibility with AutoCad®, and the
ability to save DXF changes directly to file (avoiding the need to send DXF files back to
the CAD system for editing). The DXF file translation software is compatible with DXF files
generated with Autocad version 12 and earlier.
DXF files are loaded directly into WinMax as follows:
1. Press the Auxiliary console button.

2. Select the DXF icon on the Auxiliary screen.
The DXF Editor is functional in Conversational programs only. If the
DXF Editor is started when the current active program is NC, a
prompt asks if you want to start a new conversational part program.
Answer Yes to create a new Conversational part program.
3. Find the DXF file on the Load DXF File screen, and select it to highlight.
4. Select the Load softkey.
• On single-screen machines, the DXF program blocks are displayed in the
Program Review Screen; use F+Draw (console key) to display the DXF
drawing.
• On dual-screen machines, the DXF drawing is displayed on the graphics
screen. After building the data blocks, the part can be viewed in Solid or
Toolpath graphics using the Draw console key. Switch the screen back to
the DXF drawing using F + Draw (console keys). You can switch the
screen back to the previously drawn graphic (without causing it to be
redrawn) with the Draw console key. To redraw the graphic, select the
Draw console key a second time (or access the DRAW OPTIONS F1
softkey).
DXF units of measurement (INCH or MM) match global WinMax units. When a data block
is built from a CAD drawing, the data block adopts the unit displayed on the WinMax
status bar. In Build DB, changing the WinMax unit will result in a different sized element,
for example, a segment that is 3 inches or 3 mm in length.
Here are the softkeys on the DXF screen:
• Parameters—see DXF Parameters, on page 2 - 137.

• Build DB—see DXF Build Data Block, on page 2 - 135.
• Zoom Window—see Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.
• Edit Drawing—see Edit Drawing, on page 2 - 138.
• Layers—see DXF Layers, on page 2 - 140.
• Save DXF—saves the DXF file.
• Part Programming—goes to the active part program.
• Quit CAD—exits the DXF CAD option.
The Part Programming softkey or icon toggles back to Part Programming without
closing the DXF file. You may return to DXF at any time by selecting the DXF icon.
2 - 132 DXF Option 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

DXF Build Data Block
The Build DB softkey accesses the automatic data block building features. The system
creates milling, holes, position, or pattern locations data blocks.
Milling - the Milling operation softkeys perform these functions in Lines/Arcs, Circles,
Frame, 3D Mold, or Ellipse data blocks:
• Accept—loads the entity into the data block.

• Zoom Window—refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.
• Edit Drawing—refer to Edit Drawing, on page 2 - 138.
• Reverse—reverses the contour direction.
• AutoChain—defines contours by autochaining individual segments together.
• Default Radius—inserts the value of the default radius set in the Frame
screen’s Corner Radius field.
• Exit/Cancel—cancels the operation and returns to the previous screen.
If you are using AutoCAD 14, set the registers to generate Polylines and Ellipses so they
are saved as pline entity types and not splines.
Holes -Holes data blocks are built using the Hole Location Method (F1) or the Hole
Pattern Method (F2):
• Use Hole Location Method—builds Holes Locations blocks from selected

points on the drawing.
• Use Hole Pattern Method—builds Holes Pattern blocks from selected points
on the drawing.
For either softkey, select holes on the drawing with one of three methods:
• Select individual holes on the touchscreen.

• Choose the Window Select softkey and drag across an area of the screen
to select a group of holes.
• Use the Intersect softkey to select two intersecting lines. The point of
intersection becomes the center of the hole.
Select the Accept softkey to create the data blocks.
These are the softkeys in the Holes menu:

• Zoom Window— refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.
• Window Select—selects a group of holes on the drawing.
• Intersect—draws a hole at the intersection of two selected lines and
represents the center with a highlighted plus (+).
• Default Order—orders the holes as they were selected in the Auto CAD

drawing.
Position - creates a Position data block from the DXF drawing. These are the softkeys on
the Position menu:

• Zoom Window—refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.
• Intersect—draws a hole at the intersection of two selected lines and
represents the center with a highlighted plus (+).
• Default Order—orders the holes as they were drawn in the original AutoCAD
drawing.
Pattern Locations—builds a Pattern data block. To use, select the softkey and then
select points on the drawing to serve as pattern locations, using one of the following
methods:
• Select individual holes on the touchscreen.

• Choose the Window Select softkey and drag across an area of the screen
to select a group of holes.
• Use the Intersect softkey to select two intersecting lines. The point of
intersection becomes the center of the hole.
Select the Accept softkey to create an empty Pattern Locations data block. Additional
data can then be added either manually or from the DXF drawing.
These are the softkeys on the Pattern Locations menu:

• Zoom Window— refer to Zoom Window, on page 2 - 137.
• Intersect—specifies a pattern location at the intersection of two selected
lines.
• Default Order—orders the holes as they were selected in the Auto CAD
drawing.

DXF Parameters
These parameters link contour segments, define part zero within the drawing, and set the
radius for frame corners.
Use the Move Zero and Select Value softkeys to change the location of part zero. The
part zero symbol is a circle with crosshairs. To change this location manually, move the
cursor to the field for Part X Offset or Part Y Offset and enter the X or Y Offset values.
To change this location graphically and automatically, use the Move Zero softkey.
Frame Radius sets the default corner radius. If the corners of a frame do not have the
same radius, you are prompted to either select a corner radius on the drawing or use the
default value entered in this field for the radius.
The Exit softkey returns to the DXF softkeys.
See the Field Glossary for definitions of the DXF Parameter fields:
Drawing scale
Endpoint Tolerance
Frame Radius
Hole Diameter
Part X Offset
Part Y Offset
Use the check boxes to turn on or off the following parameters:
• Display Geometry—shows selected lines on the graphic display in a color

other than black, illustrating which elements have been selected. Colors can
be changed with the Choose Colors softkey on the Parameters screen.
• Autochain Contours—allows autochaining to be turned off so that a contour
may be created by individually selected segments into a chained contour. By
default, segments are automatically chained to create contours.
• Select Holes by Diameter—selects holes with the diameter specified in the
Hole Diameter field (defined above) when the WINDOW SELECT softkey is
used. This selection allows you to order the hole selection by size, which
optimizes tool changes.
Zoom Window
Use the Zoom Window softkey to enlarge an area of the drawing or zoom out to see a
full view. Use the pointer to touch an area on the screen and drag across the screen to
enlarge an area of the drawing. When an area is enlarged, use the following softkeys:
• Zoom Out—pulls back from the drawing incrementally to the previous

magnification level without re-centering the part in the drawing.
• Fit to View—gives a full scale of the drawing with the part in the drawing

auto-centered.
• Pan—relocates the center of the drawing on the Graphic display.
• Exit—returns to the previous menu.
Edit Drawing
Use the Edit drawing feature to extend, join, modify, or split segments that need to be
edited in order to create the proper geometry for the part program.
• Extend—locates the intersection of two lines and extends one or both of the
lines to the intersection point.
To extend lines, select the EDIT DRAWING softkey and then the Extend
softkey. Select the two lines that need to be extended. Both lines are
highlighted when selected and extended to their points of intersection as
shown in the examples below:
A Original drawing
B Edited drawing
1 Extended line
2 Both lines extended
3 Start of arc
4 Selected intersection point
5 Extended arc
• Join—moves a selected line endpoint to the endpoint of a line or arc

segment. Always select as the first endpoint the point that will be joined to
the second endpoint. The endpoint at the opposite end of the first selected
segment remains stationary and becomes a pivoting point. Both segments
are highlighted when selected, and the screen is redrawn to reflect the
joining of the two segments.
• Modify—is used to view or modify the actual geometry data of segments.

Choose the SELECT POINT softkey to view the segment data.

• The DXF Edit Modify - Arc dialog box appears if you select an arc. Refer to
DXF Edit Modify - Arc, on page 2 - 140.
• The DXF Edit Modify - Line dialog box appears if you select a line. Refer to
DXF Edit Modify - Line, on page 2 - 140.
• The DXF Edit Modify - Point dialog box appears if you select a point. Refer
to DXF Edit Modify - Point, on page 2 - 140.
• The segment appears gray on the Graphic display.
Choose the Accept softkey to retain the changes in the control's memory.
A Original drawing
B Edited drawing
1 Stationary endpoint
2 Selected segment endpoint
3 Joining endpoint
4 Newly joined segment
Figure 2–59. Joined Lines and Arcs
• Split—use to divide segments for selection, de-selection, and chaining.

Segments may be split at midpoint or any point of intersection with other
segments.
To split a segment, first select the segment and then select the point where
the segment will be divided. When a segment is selected for splitting, the
midpoint and all intersection points with the other segments are indicated
with crosshair markers. Follow the directions in the Prompt display.
• Delete—deletes a programmed endpoint.

• Trim—trims a selected segment.
• Explode PCurve—shows an exploded view of a selected PolyCurve. If you
are using Auto CAD 14, set the registers to generate Polylines and Ellipses so
they are saved as pline entity types and not splines.
• Exit/Cancel—return to the Main DXF menu.

DXF Edit Modify - Arc
The DXF Edit Modify - Arc dialog window contains these fields:
• Start Angle—defines the starting point of the angle.

• Sweep Angle—defines the total number of degrees in the arc to be cut. This
number can be greater than 350.
• Direction—identifies the direction of the arc from the start point.
• Radius—identifies the radius of the arc.
• Center X and Center Y—identify the X and Y coordinates for the center point
of the arc.
DXF Edit Modify - Line

The DXF Edit Modify - Line dialog window contains these fields:
• Endpoint1 X and Endpoint1 Y—define the first endpoints for the X and Y
coordinates.
• Endpoint2 X and Endpoint2 Y—define the second endpoints for the X and Y
coordinates.
• Length—identifies the line length.
• XY Angle—identifies the angle of the XY coordinate.
DXF Edit Modify - Point

The DXF Edit Modify - Point dialog window contains these fields:
• X Value—identifies the X location for the selected point.

• Y Value—identifies the Y location for the selected point.
DXF Layers
Many DXF drawings use layers - an electronic method of representing transparent acetate
overlays used in hand-drawn drafting work.
• Select Layer—toggles the highlighted layer on and off.

• All On—turns on all of the layers.
• All Off—turns off all of the layers.
• Exit—return to the Main DXF menu.
Layer names longer than 31 characters will be shortened during

processing.

ULTIPOCKETS
The UltiPocket™ programming option adds special milling routines for machining pocket
boundaries with islands. This option provides complete clean out of odd-shaped pockets
without cutting the islands programmed inside the boundary. The software automatically
calculates the tool path around islands eliminating the long task of plotting these shapes.
Islands may also be rotated, scaled, and repeated.
The following drawing shows an inward spiral boundary with three differently shaped
islands.
The pocket feature is available for any closed contour data block: Mill Contour, Mill Frame,
Mill Circle, Mill Ellipse, Mill Slot, or Mill Polygon.
To use the UltiPocket feature, first establish the cutter compensation

parameter and then program any UltiPocket data blocks.
• Refer to Milling Parameters.

• Select either Insert Arc or Insert Line for the Cutter Comp Parameter
field. If this field does not appear on the Milling Parameters screen,
the UltiPocket option has not been installed on the control.
Additionally, see these topics:
Helical Plunge with UltiPockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 145

Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pocket Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 145
Conversational Programming 704-0116-501 UltiPockets 2-139

Pocket Boundary
The Pocket Boundary is the outside frame of the part. The basic philosophy of the
UltiPocket option is to program the boundary and then tell the system which pockets or
islands to avoid within that boundary. This approach eliminates complex calculations and
shortens the part programming process.
The types of Pocket Boundaries are Outward, Inward, ADP Zigzag, and ADP 1-Way. These
are explained below.
Follow this link to the Hurco website to view a Pocket Boundary video
demonstration:
Outward
This selection is only for Circle and Frame data blocks without islands. When this routine
is selected, the tool begins from the center region of the part outward to pocket the
entire programmed boundary. This operation is, therefore, the same as the standard
WinMax Pocket selection. With this selection the cutter overlap is controlled by the Pocket
Overlap value on the Milling Parameters screen, not the Pocket Overlap field on the Mill
Circle and Mill Frame screens.
Inward
This selection cuts in from the outside of the defined boundary avoiding the defined
islands. When this routine is selected, the tool enters the part and begins following a path
formed by offsetting the boundary one-half the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap.
To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter a value in the Pocket Overlap
field. After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced by offsetting the boundary by
the tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each pass while avoiding islands inside the
boundary.
After pocketing the boundary, the tool then cuts around the inside of the boundary and
the outside of each island, using the selected blend offset and the programmed tool
radius.
ADP Zigzag
With AdaptiPath (ADP) pocket types the tool makes constant contact with the material
surface to decrease cutting time. ADP Zigzag moves the tool in a zigzag pattern; one
pass is climb milling, the next pass is conventional milling, alternating climb and
conventional passes until complete.
To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter values in the Overlap Target
and Min(imum) fields.
For more information, see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling
2 - 140 UltiPockets 704-0116-501 Conversational Programming

(Right), on page 2 - 12 in Conversational Programming.
ADP 1-Way
With AdaptiPath (ADP) pocket types the tool makes constant contact with the material
surface to decrease cutting time. ADP 1-Way moves only in climb or conventional
direction, skimming the part surface on the return move. Climb or Conventional Milling
Direction is set in the Program Parameters Milling 1 tab. See Program Parameters, on
page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
To control the percentage of overlap during cutting, enter values in the Overlap Target
and Min(imum) fields.
For more information, see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling
(Right), on page 2 - 12 in Conversational Programming.
Rest Machining
Rest Machining is available with Pocket Boundary ADP Zigzag and ADP 1-Way. Rest
Machining allows you to specify a small tool that is used to clear out remaining pocket
areas, i.e., corners where a bigger tool might not be able to reach. The Rest tab appears
in the tool data area when either ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way pocket types are selected
with Pocket Boundary Milling Type on the Roughing tab:
Programming Islands
After programming the mill data block for a boundary, an island can be defined by
creating a Pocket Island data block. As many islands as desired may be defined (subject
to computer memory on the control), but all must fit within the defined boundary and
should allow the tool to completely define the island.
The island data block can be a Mill Frame, Circle, or Contour (provided it is a closed
contour). The Pocket Island data blocks use the standard milling values from the
boundary data block and do not display these parameters on the island programming
screen. The pocket overlap percentage was also defined in the boundary data block.
Mill Contours
To create a Mill Contour data block using the UltiPocket option, set up the operation in the
start segment (segment zero). As in standard WinMax milling, an UltiPocket Mill Contour

block consists of segments beginning with segment zero. With the cursor in the MILLING
TYPE field, select one of the Pocket options in the Start segment to indicate whether this
block is the boundary of the part or one of the islands within the boundary. The boundary
must occur first in the program.
The segments after the Start segment are programmed in the same manner as standard
milling lines and arcs. Automatic calculation of unknown points is available for these data
blocks.
Mill Frame
The Mill Frame data block is often used to create the part boundary.
This block is programmed in the same manner as the standard WinMax Mill Frame, with
the addition of the Pocket Overlap percentage.
Mill Circle
The Mill Circle data block is used for both boundaries and islands. It is similar to the
standard Mill Circle data block except that if this block is used to create an island, it uses
the tool from the boundary data block.
Pattern
Pattern data blocks can be inserted to rotate, scale, or repeat islands. Only Pattern data
blocks can be programmed between a boundary data block and an island. As many
islands as desired may be defined (subject to available memory), but all must fit within
the defined boundary.

Helical Plunge with UltiPockets
The Helical Plunge option is used with the UltiPockets option to define the plunging
location when inward pocketing. Islands created using inward pocketing can influence
plunge locations. A plunge location is determined that will not interfere with pocket
islands.
The plunging location in outward pocketing is the same as a straight plunge. Outward
pocketing is used only for mill frame, mill circle, and ellipse pocket boundaries that do not
have pocket islands. Since islands are not present with outward pocketing, the plunging
location is in the middle of the mill frame, mill circle and ellipse.
When the Helical Plunge option is installed, two additional pocketing-related fields appear
on the Milling 2 tab on the Program Parameters screen. These fields are Operator
Specify Pocket Start and Pocket Plunge Near Center.
The Operator Specify Pocket Start field takes precedence over the Pocket Plunge Near
Center field. If the Operator Specify Pocket Start field is set to Yes, the value of the
Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field is ignored.
When the Operator Specify Pocket Start field is set to No, the value of the Inward Pocket
Plunge Near Center field is checked. If the Inward Pocket Plunge Near Center field is set
to Yes, a starting location will be determined near the center of the pocket. If both fields
are set to No, the default starting position will be used for the pocket.
Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pocket Start

To use the Operator Specify Pocket Start function:
1. Set the Type field to Pocket Boundary on the Mill Contour, Mill Frame or Mill
Circle screen.
2. Set the Pocket Type field to Inward on the Mill Contour, Mill Frame or Mill
Circle screen.
3. Set the Operator Specify Pocket Start field to Yes on the Milling Parameters
screen.
4. The Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields appear on the Mill Contour, Mill
Frame, or Mill Circle screen. The operator identifies the pocket plunge location
with the Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields.
The Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields define the centerline of the
plunge path. This is the location where the helix will be centered. If a straight
plunge is selected, the straight plunge will occur at the location.
The following figure shows the Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start fields on the Mill Frame
screen. See Helical Plunge (Ramp), on page 3 - 1 for an example using Pocket Start X and
Pocket Start Y fields.

For non-rotary blocks, Pocket X Start and Pocket Y Start define the
XY starting location. For rotary blocks, these fields define the XA
starting location.
An error message will display if the values for Pocket X Start or

Pocket Y Start interfere with the pocket island or pocket boundary.

NC PROGRAMMING
This documentation describes the use of NC (Numerical Control) Part Programming,
which includes the BNC (Basic Numerical Control) and the ISNC (Industry Standard
Numerical Control) Editor portion of the CNC software as it is used on the machine tool
console. This section explains the following:
NC Part Programming Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2

NC Editor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
Starting a New NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
NC Editor Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
NC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
NC Probing Part Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 NC Programming 3-1

NC Part Programming Principles
NC part programming adheres to the ANSI/EIA RS–274–D standard terminology with
extensions for BNC and ISNC dialects. In addition, the NC programming facilities were
designed to use as much of the WinMax Conversational system as possible. As a result,
most of the screens are the same in both the NC and the conversational systems. This
allows a smooth transition between the two.
The primary difference between conversational and NC programming is the program

editors. NC programming uses standard G and M codes; whereas, conversational
programming uses plain English or another supported programming language.
The CNC software can read NC files from the serial port directly into
dynamic memory or run NC files that are partially loaded into
dynamic memory. NC files can be serially loaded to the hard disk.
NC part programs can be created using the CNC on the machine tool or off-line CNC
programming software running on a personal computer. NC programs cannot be
converted to conversational programs, nor can NC programs be converted automatically
to any other NC format.
NC Part Program Components

NC programs are a series of characters and words that form program blocks. These
program blocks tell the machine tool how and where to move. The operator needs to
understand the basic program structure and the types of codes in order to create, edit,
and run a program successfully. These components make up NC code:
Program Start
NC data can begin with the with a “%” (percent) character to indicate the beginning of
the file. When a percent character is received, the control starts to accept, check, and
load blocks into its memory. If you are creating a new part program at the control, the
percent character is automatically inserted at the beginning of the program.
Sequence Number
A sequence number serves as a block label; it has no other significance within the part
program except being required with GOTOs in the NCPP option and the M99 jump
command. Sequence numbers are often used to mark the beginning of milling sequences
so you can restart at a given sequence number or recall specific operations within the
program. The maximum sequence number is 9999999.
When programming on an off-line system, sequence numbers should be used sparingly.

Sequence numbers (N words) are optional in the NC Editor, and they are useful in
programs sent over the RS-232 link. However, the absence of sequence numbers permits
faster processing (loading, syntax checking, and parsing) of the part program and can
result in improved part program execution. In addition, omission of these numbers
increases the amount of the program that can fit into memory.
3 - 2 NC Programming 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

If you request renumbering of part program sequence numbers, any
sequence numbers in GOTO statements will not be updated. You
must then press the (F1) Yes softkey before re-sequencing will take
place. To cancel the renumbering, press the (F8) No softkey. In
general, you will not want to renumber part programs that use GOTO
statements.
Address Characters
An address character is the first character of a word in a program block. The Ignore
Command signals the system to ignore the remainder of the block. The Comment
Command characters are used to delimit comments. The following is a list of the address
characters recognized by this system:
/ Ignore Command
() Comment Command
: Subprogram Number (NCPP Option)
A Rotary Dimension Around X-axis
B Rotary Dimension Around Y-axis
D Tool Diameter Offset
F Feedrate
G Preparatory Functions
H Index into the tool length offset table
I X-axis Arc Center/Offset, X scale factor, Canned Cycle Bore Shift
J Y-axis Arc Center/Offset, Y scale factor, Canned Cycle Bore Shift
K Z-axis Arc Center/Offset, Z scale factor, Canned Cycle Repeat
L Tool Length Offset, Data Set Mode
M Miscellaneous Functions
N Sequence Number
O Subprogram Number (NCPP option)
P Subprogram Number, Dwell Time, Scaling Factor
Q Canned Cycle Bore Shift, Peck Depth
R Rotation Angle, Return Level, Circular Interpolation Radius
S Spindle Speed Function
T Tool Select
X Primary X Motion Dimension, Dwell Time
Y Primary Y Motion Dimension
Z Primary Z Motion Dimension
Special Characters
Special characters are ASCII characters within a file which have special meaning to the
system and cannot be edited. The following special characters are recognized by the NC
software:
• %—Beginning/End of file—signals the system that all of the following

characters are part of the program. The system automatically adds this
character to the beginning of a new program. (% is not used in
subprograms.)
You can also include the % character to signal the End of File.
• E— —signals the NC system that no more legal program characters follow.

This character is optional to provide compatibility with existing programs that
include EOT characters at the end.
• [CR]—Carriage Return—signals the End of a Program Block.
• [CRLF]—Carriage Return/Line Feed Pair—signals the End of a Program
Block (identical to [CR]).
[CRLF] is not shown when the program is viewed in the NC Editor.
Words
A word is a group of alphanumeric characters. The first character is an address
character—a letter such as M or G. The address character is followed by a signed or
unsigned numeric value. Some sample NC words are “X-.03” and “G00.” One word or
groups of words form a program block.
Block
A block is a group of words terminated by the end-of-block character: a carriage return
[CR] or a carriage return/line feed pair [CRLF]. Each block within a part program must be
terminated with either a [CR] or a [CRLF].
The following illustration shows a typical NC block and its components:
1 Word
2 Address character
3 Numeric character
4 Feedrate word
5 Sequence number
6 Modal preparatory functions
7 One-shot preparatory function
8 Dimension words
9 Miscellaneous function
Figure 3–1. Typical NC Block

Default M and G Codes
Upon power up, control reset, initial entry into the NC Editor, or after erasing a program,
the system presets these M codes as defaults:
M05 Spindle Off
M09 Both Coolant Systems Off
The system also presets certain G codes as the default active codes. The default G codes
are highlighted in the G Code Table in the “Preparatory Functions-G Codes” section.
The system uses the units specified when the NC Editor is selected, not the G codes, for
graphics display and running the part program.
Navigation
To move the cursor from a block to the beginning of the next block, press the down arrow
(↓). Use the right/advance arrow (→) and the left/back arrow (←) to move the cursor
within a block. Use the Enter key to move the cursor between words and blocks.
To move to the beginning of the current block, press the Home key or the up arrow (↑). If
the cursor is already at the beginning of the block, pressing the up arrow moves the
cursor to the beginning of the last word in the previous block.
To move from a word to the beginning of the next word, press the Enter key. If the cursor
is at the end of the current block when the Enter key is pressed, the editor automatically
presents the next legal address character.
To move from one character to the next, press the right arrow. If the cursor is at the end
of the current block, the cursor wraps around to the beginning of the block.
To move from one character to the preceding character, press the left arrow. If the cursor
is at the start of the current block, it wraps around to the end of the current block.
Delete characters or words from a block using these methods:
• To delete numeric data, position the cursor on the number and press the
Delete key.
• To erase the entire word, position the cursor on the address character and
then press the left arrow or the Delete key. The entire word is removed since
numeric data is not allowed in an NC program without an address character
to introduce it.

NC Editor
NC Editor provides a wide range of tools to review, create, and modify NC part programs.
The editor has the following features:
• Several ways of selecting the code, such as by dragging the stylus across the
screen, and by using keyboard keys (if available).
• Copying/Pasting/Cutting of a block of selected code, including to applications
outside WinMax.
• Undo/Redo functionality.
• Unlimited number of tags.
• Real-time syntax check. Incorrect syntax is indicated by showing the
incorrect text in red. Comments are shown in a user-defined color (green in
this example):
See NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19 for information about the

comment color.
• Real-time indicators of the meanings of the G codes. Place the cursor on the
G code and the definition is displayed in the prompt area of the screen.
• Simplified and friendlier access to common editing tasks, such as jumping
and searching operations.
• Keyboard shortcuts:
• Ctrl + Home—jump to the beginning of program
• Ctrl + End—jump to the end of program
• Shift + Ctrl + Home—selects all text between cursor and beginning of
program
• Shift + Ctrl + End—selects all text between cursor and end of program
• Shift + Home—selects the text between cursor and beginning of line
• Shift + End—selects the text between cursor and end of line
• Ctrl + C—copy selected text to the clipboard
• Ctrl + F—opens a Find window. Enter text to find in the current program.
• Ctrl + G—opens a Goto window. Enter a block number to navigate to that
block.
• Ctrl + H—opens a Find and Replace window.
• Ctrl + X—cut the selected text from screen and copy to clipboard
• Ctrl + V—paste the copied or cut text
• Ctrl + Z—undo the last change
• Ctrl + Y—redo the last undo

The status bar provides real-time updates on the status on the program being edited. The
information shown in the status bar is as follows:
1 2 6
3 4 5
1 Part Program Name
2 Units
3 Coding Standard
4 Current Line Number
5 Insert/Overstrike Mode
6 Block Skip On/Off
Figure 3–2. Status Bar in NC Editor
The Part Program name is shown first in the status bar. Coding standard can either be
Industry Standard (I) or Basic NC (B). Current Line number indicates the current location
of the cursor in the part program. Insert mode is indicated as INS, while overstrike mode
is indicated as OVR.
Refer to NC Editor Menus, on page 3 - 9 for information about the NC Editor menus.

Starting a New NC Program
To begin NC part programming, press the Input key. Refer to Getting Started with
WinMax Mill, Program Manager section, for information about saving, opening, and
loading programs.
The NC file extension is set in User Preferences. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax
Mill.
These steps help determine the most efficient tool movement and basic program
structure to save time during programming:
1. Determine the tool path on the print and label the points where the path
direction changes.
2. Make a chart showing the coordinates of each point identified in the previous
step.
3. Identify the spindle movements that will be necessary during cutting.
NC Programming Rules
Here are some basic rules to follow when creating NC part programs:
• The axis letter always precedes the numeric information.

• In most cases an integer works the same as a decimal or real number. In the
following cases an integer is scaled by the appropriate scaling factor to
maintain compatibility with existing NC programs:
Feedrate: F (BNC only)
Rotation: R (ISNC Only)
Dwell: P, X (Both BNC and ISNC)
Scaling: P (ISNC only)
If an integer is below the acceptable range after scaling, a “Below

Minimum Value” error message occurs.
• All axis dimensions are considered to be positive unless a minus sign is

entered. When describing axis motion, the codes for the program block must
contain the following information in order to move properly:
• Axis identification (e.g., X, Y, Z).
• Direction the axis will move (+ or -).
• Distance the axis will move (e.g., 4.0).
• Enter the speed preceded by the F address character to program a
feedrate in a block.
• Include a Z parameter in the NC part program to permit the system to
draw the part on the graphics screen. An absolute Z command must occur
after a tool change before making another move command.

NC Editor Menus
Hurco's NC system provides many levels of program editing, as well as editing tools, to
simplify the task.
The NC Editor contains these top level menus:
Basic Programming Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9

Jump and Search Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Edit Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12
Renumbering and Tagging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 14
Program Execution Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 16
NC Editor Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 18
Basic Programming Menu

While entering NC codes to create blocks, you may wish to insert new blocks, delete
blocks, or display different sections of the part program on the screen.
Figure 3–3. NC Basic Programming Menu
The Basic Programming softkeys provide these functions:
• Insert Block Before—Inserts a blank line before the block where the cursor
is located. This permits addition of a new block of data. This softkey will be
disabled if text can't be inserted at the current cursor location.
• Delete Block—Removes the block where the cursor is positioned. This
softkey will be disabled if the block can't be deleted.

• Jump to Beginning—Moves the cursor to the beginning of the first program
block in memory. If a keyboard is available, Ctrl + Home combination will
result in the same action.
• Jump to End—Moves the cursor to the beginning of the last program block
in memory. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + End combination will result in
the same action.
• Jump and Search Functions—Invokes Jump and Search Functions menu.
• Edit Functions—Invokes Edit Functions menu
• More ->—Displays the next menu.
• Exit Editor—Exits the NC Editor and moves to the Input screen. Select Part
Programming to return to the NC Editor screen.
Jump and Search Functions Menu

The Jump and Search provides the flexibility to locate hard-to-find items in program
memory using the block or sequence number or searching for specific address
characters, numeric parameters, or words.
Figure 3–4. NC Jump and Search Functions Menu
When the Jump & Search Functions softkey is selected from the Basic Programming
menu, these softkeys appear:
• Jump to Block Number—enter a block number in the popup box. The

cursor is positioned on the specified block. The number entered refers to the
position that block has in NC memory.
You can also use the touchscreen to select the Line number in the
Editor status bar to open the Jump to Block popup box.
• Jump to Sequence Number—enter a sequence number (N code) in the

popup box. The cursor is positioned on that block.

• Search for Text—activates the Search submenu.
• Jump to Beginning—moves the cursor to the beginning of the first program
block in memory. If a keyboard is available, Ctrl + Home combination will
result in the same action.
• Jump To End—moves the cursor to the beginning of the last program block
in memory. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + End combination will result in
the same action.
• Jump To Previous Syntax Error—tries to find the previous syntax error,
and if successful, takes the user to that line.
• Jump To Next Syntax Error—tries to find the next syntax error, and if
successful, takes the user to that line.
• Exit—returns to the previous menu.
Search Submenu
The Search submenu allows the user to search for specific text in the part program.
Figure 3–5. NC Search Submenu
The menu contains the following softkeys:
• Enter Text To Search—opens a popup box where search text is entered.

Type search term and select the Find Next button. The NC editor finds the
next occurrence of the entered text following the current cursor position. If
found, the text is highlighted. Selecting the Search Up checkbox will search
for the search term prior to the current cursor position.
If text is highlighted on a single line before the Enter Text to Search
softkey is selected, that text is inserted in the Search box.
• Search Again—repeats the last search operation without prompting the

user.

• Find and Replace—opens a popup box where search text is entered and
replacement term is specified.
If text is highlighted on a single line before the Find and Replace
softkey is selected, that text is inserted in the Find And Replace box.
• The Replace Next button finds the next instance of the search term and
replaces it with the new term. To find and replace the next instance you
must select the Replace Next button again.
• The Replace All button finds and replaces all instances of the search
term.
• Exit—invokes the Jump and Search menu.
Edit Functions Menu

The Edit menu provides advanced editing functionality to the user.
Figure 3–6. NC Edit Functions Menu
When the Edit softkey is selected from the Basic Programming menu, these softkeys
appear:
• Insert/Overstrike Mode Toggle—switches the data entry style between

insert and overwrite. Currently active mode is shown on the status bar of the
window - “INS” indicates Insert and “OVR” indicates Overwrite.
You can also use the touchscreen to toggle the Insert/Overstrike

Mode in the Editor status bar.
• Copy Selection—this softkey copies the selected text to the Windows'

clipboard memory. If the keyboard is available, this action can be achieved by
pressing Ctrl + C combination. Text can be selected by dragging the stylus
(up/down/right/left) across the editing area of the screen, or by holding
down the keyboard Shift key and using the up/down/left/right arrow keys to

select text.
• Cut Selection—copies the selected text to the Windows clipboard. In
addition, the selected text is deleted from the part program. If the keyboard
is available, Ctrl + X combination will cut the selected text and place it in the
Windows clipboard.
• Paste Selection—text previously copied to the Windows' clipboard is
inserted at the current cursor position. If the keyboard is available, this action
can be achieved by pressing Ctrl + V keys.
• Redo—each click redoes the editing operation(s) previously undone by the
Undo softkey. If the keyboard is available, Ctrl + Y combination will result in
the same action. This action can be locked out with the Disable Undo and
Redo setting in NC Settings, NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19.
• Undo—each click on undoes the previous editing operations starting from the
latest to the earliest. The depth of the undo buffer is 100. If more than one
text modification was performed in a single step (e.g. “Replace All”), all those
modifications will be undone in one step as well. If the keyboard is available,
Ctrl + Z combination will result in the same action. This action can be locked
out with the Disable Undo and Redo setting in NC Settings, NC Editor
Settings, on page 3 - 19.
• Find & Replace—activates a popup box where search text and replacement
text are entered. NC editor finds occurrences of the search text and replaces
it with the replacement text.
• Exit—loads the Basic Programming menu.

Renumbering and Tagging Menu
Renumbering and tagging menu offers access to renumbering and tagging functionality.
This menu can be accessed by pressing More-> from the Basic programming menu.
Figure 3–7. NC Renumbering and Tagging Menu
• Block Renumbering mode—invokes Block Renumbering Mode submenu.

See Block Renumbering Submenu, on page 3 - 15.
• Tag Block—tags a block by underlining it. There is no limit on the amount of
tagged blocks you can have.
• Jump to Previous Tagged Block—NC editor tries to find the closest tagged
block before the current cursor's position. If such block is found, the cursor is
placed in the beginning of the block.
• Jump to Next Tagged Block—NC editor tries to find the closest tagged
block after the current cursor's position. If such block is found, the cursor is
placed in the beginning of the block.
• Tagged Block List—invokes Tagged Blocks List screen, which allows the
user to review the tagged block and manage the tags. See NC Tag List, on
page 3 - 16.
• More->—invokes program Execution menu.
• Exit Editor—this softkey operates the same as in the Basic Programming
menu.

Block Renumbering Submenu
The Block Renumbering mode submenu allows the user to search for specific text in the
part program.
Figure 3–8. NC Block Renumbering Mode Submenu
• Jump & Search Functions—opens the Jump and Search Functions menu.
• Enable Optional Numbering—enables user-assigned block numbering
mode.
• Enable Auto Numbering—enables automatic block numbering mode.
• Renumber Numbered Blocks—enables block renumbering. The
renumbering interval is entered into the popup box and the blocks are
automatically renumbered.
• Renumber Selected Blocks—enables renumbering of selected blocks. First
select the blocks to be renumbered by dragging the stylus (up/down/right/
left) across the editing area of the screen, or by holding down the keyboard
Shift key and using the up/down/left/right arrow keys to select text. Then
select the softkey and specify the renumbering interval. The selected blocks
are renumbered.
• Exit—invokes the Renumbering and Tagging menu.

NC Tag List
The NC Tag List screen is accessed with the Tagged Block List softkey on the
Renumbering and Tagging Menu. The tagged blocks in a program are displayed:
Figure 3–9. NC Tag List screen
Softkeys are:
• Jump to Selected Tag—goes to the selected tag in the program.

• Clear Tag—deletes the selected tag.
• Clear All Tags—deletes all tags in the list.
Program Execution Menu

Program Execution menu allows selection of the part program to be processed for
graphics and for execution. This menu can be accessed by twice pressing More-> (first
from the Basic programming menu and then from the Renumbering and Tagging menu.)

Figure 3–10. NC Program Execution Menu
• Set Wireframe Start Marker—marks the current block as the beginning

point for the graphics display by inserting a left bracket ([) to the left of the
block.
• Set Wireframe End Marker—marks the current block as the ending point
for the graphic display by inserting a right bracket (]) to the left of the block.
If the Wireframe Start and Wireframe End markers overlap, the

pound (#) sign is displayed to the left of the line.
• Reset Wireframe Markers—returns start and end wireframe markers to

their default locations. The defaults are at the beginning and end of the
program.
• Set Start marker—indicates the block that the system should use to start
program execution when running and verifying the program. A letter S is
inserted to the left of the block, and the code before the marker is grayed
out.
• Set End marker—indicates the block that system should use to end program
verification and execution. A letter E is inserted to the left of the block, and
code after the end marker is grayed out.
If the Start and End markers overlap, the dollar ($) sign is displayed
to the left of the line.
• Reset Start/End Markers—restores start and end markers to their

defaults. The defaults are at the beginning and end of the program.
• More->—invokes NC Editor Settings menu.
menu.

NC Editor Settings Menu
Figure 3–11. NC Editor Settings menu
• NC Editor Settings—invokes NC Editor Settings screen, which allows the

user to modify the editor's behavior. See NC Editor Settings, on page 3 - 19.
• More ->—invokes Basic Programming menu.
menu.

NC Editor Settings
Figure 3–12. NC Editor Settings screen
Refer to the Field Glossary for NC Editor Settings definitions:
Block Skip Enable
Comment Color
Current Font
Disable Undo and Redo

NC Parameters
The NC Parameters softkey accesses these functions:
NC Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
NC M and G Code Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
NC Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
NC Configuration Parameters
Use this screen to change general NC part program parameters and set ASR Buffering.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the NC Configuration Parameters:
General 1
Disable X Scaling Least Scaling Factor Reference Point Z
Disable Y Scaling NC Optional Program Stop Tool Length Tolerance
Disable Z Scaling Reference Point X
Least Dwell Units Reference Point Y
General 2
Allow Vacant Variables Enable Lead In Error Checking
Assume Feedrate .1 Increment Enable Lead Out Error Checking
Default Cutter Comp Lookahead M6 Initiates Tool Change
Default Tool Number
Intelligent ASR
When enabled, Intelligent ASR buffering begins automatically when certain conditions are
met in the program.
Intelligent ASR Triggers
Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning
Linearization Override
Retract Override
Safety Clearance
M16 (Automatic Buffering On) and M17 (Automatic Buffering Off) are used to turn
automatic buffering on and off within a program. The parameter must be turned on in
order to use M16/17.

G08.1 and G08.2 (ASR Command Buffering On/Off) always have
priority over Intelligent ASR (automatic buffering). Automatic
buffering will not become active if G08.1/G08.2 is active in a
program. Additionally, if automatic buffering is active and either a
G08.1 or a G08.2 is called, the automatic buffering is immediately
turned off.
M00 (Program Stop) and M01 (Planned Stop) codes are skipped in
ASR buffering mode. Codes are re-posted when buffering is no
longer active, except in a Recovery/Restart.
NC M and G Code Parameters

Use this screen to change M code and G code program numbers for an NC part program
using the NCPP option:
• Enable User M/G Codes—enables user customization of M codes and/or G

codes to perform specialized tasks. User defined M and G codes define a
custom code which performs a specialized task, replace an existing G or M
code, or provide compatibility between different NC dialects from various
machine tool control manufacturers.
• Enable User S/B/T Codes—enables user customization of S codes, B
codes, or T codes to perform specialized tasks. User defined S, B, or T codes
replace spindle and tool functions with custom subprograms.
• M-Code—allows programming of customized M codes. Up to 13 user defined
M codes can be programmed from M01 through M255 (except M02, M98, and
M99). Negative numbers cannot be entered in the column for user defined M
codes. Enable programmed M codes using the Enable User M Codes function.
• G-Code—allows programming of customized G codes. Up to 10 user defined
G codes can be programmed from G01 through G255 (except G65, G66, and
G67). If a negative number is entered for a user defined G code, the
subprogram becomes modal. Enable programmed G codes using the Enable
User G-Codes function.

NC Variables
Use this screen to define Global and System NC variable codes and subprograms for an
NC part program using the NCPP option. Programs with variables can be reused. All
variables must begin with the "#" character followed by a valid, writeable register
number and an equal sign. The following example sets the variable value (#500) to 100:
# 500 = 100
Some variables are read only when an operator attempts to write to the variable.
There are four types of variables that can be used in NC programming:
• Global—can be used by all programs. Assign a global variable before it is

used in an equation or expression, or the variable will be considered vacant,
generating an error unless the Allow Vacant Variables field is set to Yes. Use
the Global 100-199 and Global 500 - 999 softkeys to enter global variables
on the NC Variables screen.
• System—provide information about the state of the system such as X, Y, and
Z external work compensation, miscellaneous system parameters, modal
information, position information, and G code group status. Use the Tool
Offset 2001-2200, Work Offset 2500-2999, Misc 3000-3014, Modal
4001-4320, and Position 5001-5083 softkeys to enter system variables
on the NC Variables screen.
• Local—are valid only within the current program. These variables are only
available in Macro Mode B and range from #1 to #33. Enter local variables in
the NC Editor screen. Refer to NC Editor, on page 3 - 6.
• Assign a value to the local variable before it is used in an equation or
expression, or the variable will be considered vacant, generating an error
unless the Allow Vacant Variables field is set to Yes.
• When the subprogram call is not made using an M98, local variables are
nested, meaning that when a subprogram call is made, a new set of local
variables is received and the old set is stored. After leaving the
subprogram, these local variables are destroyed and the previous set is
restored.
• Passing parameters to subprograms automatically initializes local
variables when subprogram calls other than M98 are made.
• Arguments—available only Macro Mode A. Arguments are used to pass

parameters to subprograms. Parameters are the addresses which follow G65,
G66, and M98 codes. Enter arguments in the NC Editor screen. Refer to NC
Editor, on page 3 - 6
Refer to the Macro Mode A G Code Group Status table.
Use the softkeys to select the type of NC Variable to appear on the NC Variables screen:
• Global 100-199
• Global 500 - 999
• Tool Len Offset 2001-2200
• Work Offset 2500-3000

The More  softkey accesses these softkey choices:
• Misc 3000-3021
• Position 5061-5083
• Tool Dia Offsets 12001-12200
The More  softkey returns to the first softkey menu described above.
The Toggle Units softkey toggles the dimensional variables (Tool Offset, Work Offset,
Position) between inch and metric.
Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

In this table, the values for the NC parameters are stored in addresses #8004 to #8026
for Macro Mode A subprogram calls.
The status for each variable is stored in address #8104 to #8126.
The status for the variables is non-zero (>1) if an argument is specified in the
subprogram call, and zero otherwise.
Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

NC Parameter Value Address Type Status Address R/WW/WWW
I #8004 ARG #8104 R
J #8005 ARG #8105 R
K #8006 ARG #8106 R
F #8009 ARG #8109 R
G #8010 ARG #8110 R
H #8011 ARG #8111 R
M #8013 ARG #8113 R
N #8014 ARG #8114 R
P #8016 ARG #8116 R
Q #8017 ARG #8117 R
R #8018 ARG #8118 R
S #8019 ARG #8119 R
T #8020 ARG #8120 R
X #8024 ARG #8124 R
Y #8025 ARG #8125 R
Z #8026 ARG #8126 R
Table 3–1. Macro Mode A Subprogram Variables

Macro Mode A G Code Group Status
In this table, the value for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for
Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined G codes and M codes.
The status for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8130 to #8146.
The status is non-zero if an argument is specified in the subprogram call, and empty
otherwise.

G Code Value Type Status R/W
Address Address
00 #8030 ARG #8130 R
01 #8031 ARG #8131 R
02 #8032 ARG #8132 R
03 #8033 ARG #8133 R
05 #8035 ARG #8135 R
06 #8036 ARG #8136 R
07 #8037 ARG #8137 R
08 #8038 ARG #8138 R
09 #8039 ARG #8139 R
10 #8040 ARG #8140 R
11 #8041 ARG #8141 R
15 #8045 ARG #8145 R
16 #8046 ARG #8146 R
Table 3–2. Macro mode A G Code Group Status

NC Probing Part Setup
It is possible to perform a part probe setup using calls to a set of predefined
subprograms. A subprogram is a group of commands stored under one name. These
probing subprogram calls mimic the probe part setup conversational data block.
The first five subprogram calls (P1000 through P5000) are used to set internal reference
locations that perform the probing function. The sixth subprogram, P6000, performs the
probing operation.
In addition, an NC program utilizing G31 commands can be used to perform a probing

part setup.
Probing is used for setting up part zero for G54 only.
Here is an example of the NC codes for probing part setup:
G165 P1000 X0.0 Y0.0
G165 P2000 X1.0 Y8.0 Z-10.0
G165 P3000 X4.0 Y1.0 Z-10.0
G165 P4000 X4.0 Y2.0 Z-5.0
G165 P5000 X1.0 Y2.0 Z-10.0
G165 P6000 X+1 Y+1 A1
1 P2000 XYZ X Start Location
2 P3000 XYZ Y Start Location
3 P4000 XYZ Z Start Location
4 P5000 XYZ Skew Start Location
5 X Probe Direction
6 Y Probe Direction
7 Skew Axis: X

The previous example illustrates these subprograms:
• P1000 is used to set the X and Y reference locations.

• P2000 is used to set the X Start Location.
• P3000 is used to set the Y Start Location.
• P4000 is used to set the Z Start Location.
• P5000 is used to set the Skew Start Location.
• P6000 is used to set the X and Y direction (+1.0 means positive -1.0 means
negative) and the Skew axis (A = 1 for X axis, A = 2 for Y axis, any other
value or no A parameter indicates no skew axis).
The P1000 to P5000 subprograms must be used prior to P6000. Once

a P6000 is used, the internal reference locations are reset to zero
after the probing operation is performed. To retry the part setup, the
P1000 to P5000 subprograms must be reset before P6000.

PREPARATORY FUNCTIONS - G
CODES
This section defines G codes and their functions. This information is often needed when
using an off-line CAM or CAD/CAM system to create NC part programs.
G Code Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 30
G Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 31
Rapid Traverse (G00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 40
Linear Interpolation (G01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 42
Circular and Helical Interpolation (G02 and G03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 44
3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 49
Dwell Mode (G04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 50
Surface Finish (G05.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
Data Smoothing (G05.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
Surface Finish Quality (G05.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 51
Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 52
Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 53
Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 54
Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer Off (G08.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56
Precision Cornering (G09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 58
Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59
Setting External Work Zero Offsets (G10 with L2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 59
Setting Tool Offsets with G10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Initializing Tool Length Offsets (G10 with P, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Initializing Tool Offsets (G10 with T, H, D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 60
Assigning Tool Offsets (G10 with L3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61
Polar Coordinates Command (G16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 61
Plane Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 62
XY Plane Selection (G17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 63
XZ Plane Selection (G18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 64
YZ Plane Selection (G19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 66
Units of Measure ISNC G20, G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67
Automatic Return To and From Reference Point (G28 and G29) . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 67
Skip (Probing) Function (G31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 70
Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 73
Cutter Compensation (G40–G42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 74
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Preparatory Functions - G Codes 3-27

Cutter Compensation – ISNC and Basic NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 75
Cutter Compensation Off (G40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 76
Cutter Compensation Left (G41). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77
3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 77
Cutter Compensation Right (G42). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 78
Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 80
5-Axis Linear Interpolation (G43.4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 83
Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Tool Radius Offset Increase (G45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Tool Radius Offset Decrease (G46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Tool Radius Offset Double Increase (G47) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Tool Radius Offset Double Decrease (G48). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 84
Scaling (G50 and G51) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 87
Mirror Image (G50.1 and G51.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 90
Local Coordinate System Setting (G52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 93
Machine Coordinates (G53) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 96
Multiple Work Coordinate Systems (G54–G59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 98
Aux Work Coordinate Systems (G54.1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 100
Special Program Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 102
Rotation (G68 and G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 102
Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2) and Local Rotation NC Transform Plane
(G68.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 104
Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 105
Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 106
Peck Drilling (G73) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 107
Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 109
Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G74) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 110
Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G75) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 110
Bore Orient (G76). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 111
Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 113
Drill, Spot Boring (G81). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 113
Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring (G82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 115
Deep Hole Drilling (G83) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 116
Tapping (G84) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 120
Boring (G85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 123
Bore Rapid Out Cycle (ISNC G86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 125
Chip Breaker (BNC G87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 127
Back Boring (ISNC G87) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 128
Rigid Tapping (BNC G88; ISNC G84.2; ISNC G84.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 130
Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out and Dwell (ISNC G88) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 131
3 - 28 Preparatory Functions - G Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

Bore with Dwell (G89) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 133
Absolute and Incremental (G90, G91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 135
Coordinate System Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 137
Part Zero Setting (G92). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 137
Feed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 139
Inverse Time Feedrate (G93) and Feed Per Minute Feedrate (G94) . . . . . . . . . 3 - 139
Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) (preliminary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 140
Canned Cycle Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 142
Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycles (G98) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 142
Return to R Level in Canned Cycles (G99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 144
Special Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 145
Canned Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 146
Canned Cycle Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 148
Depth (Z Parameter). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149
Dwell (P Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149
Feedrate (F Parameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 149
Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 150

G Code Groups
The G codes are grouped by functions.
Group Function Group Function
00 One-Shot 10 Return from Canned Cycles
01 Interpolation 11 Scaling
02 Plane Selection 12 Macro/Subprogram
03 Dimension 14 Coordinate System Selection
05 Feed 15 Precision Cornering
06 Measurement 16 Rotation
07 Cutter Compensation 17 Polar Coordinates
08 Tool Length Compensation 18 Mirroring
09 Canned Cycles 19 Program Parameters for

Surface Finish/Data
Smoothing
Table 3–3. G Code Groups
The system displays the number 010 as an alarm if an invalid G code

(one not listed in the following table) is entered.
More than one G code can be specified in the same block. If more than
one is from the same group, the last G code entered is active.
Specifying a group 01 (Interpolation) G code in a canned cycle
automatically enters the G80 condition (Canned Cycle Cancel).
Conversely, a group 01 G code is not affected by the canned cycle G
codes.

G Code Table
The following table lists the G codes, identifies the defaults (in the shaded areas), lists
Modal (M) or Non-modal (N) types, identifies groups, and describes the G codes’
functions.
Some G codes are strictly BNC or strictly ISNC, and are identified as such in this manual.
Otherwise, the G codes apply to either dialect.

G Code Type Group Function
G00 M 01 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)
G01 M Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed)
G02 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CW
G02.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CW
G03 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW
G03.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CCW
G04 N 00 Dwell, Exact Stop
G05.1 M 19 Surface Finish Parameters
G05.2 M Data Smoothing
G05.3 M Surface Finish Quality
G07.2 M 00 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On
G07.3 M 00 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off
G08.1 M 00 ASR Command Buffer On
G08.2 M 00 ASR Command Buffer Off
G09 N 00 Decelerate Axis to Zero
G10 N Data Setting
G11 N Data Setting Mode Cancel
G15 M 17 Polar Coordinates Cancel
G16 M Polar Coordinates
G17 M 02 XY Plane Selection
G18 M ZX Plane Selection
G19 M YZ Plane Selection
ISNC G20 M 06 Input in Inch
ISNC G21 M Input in mm
G28 N 00 Return to Reference Point
G29 N Return from Reference Point
G31 N Skip Function

G Code Type Group Function (Continued)
G40 M 07 Cutter Compensation Cancel
G41 M Cutter Compensation Left
G41.2 M 3D Tool Geometry Compensation
G42 M Cutter Compensation Right
G43 M 08 Tool Length Compensation + Direction
G43.4 M 5-Axis Linear Interpolation
G44 M Tool Length Compensation - Direction
G45 N 00 Tool Offset Increase
G46 N Tool Offset Decrease
G47 N Tool Offset Double Increase
G48 N Tool Offset Double Decrease
G49 M 08 Tool Length Offset Compensation Cancel
G50 M 11 Scaling Cancel
G51 M Scaling
G50.1 M 18 Mirroring Cancel
G51.1 M Mirroring
G52 N 00 Local Coordinate System Setting
G53 N Machine Coordinate System Selection
G54 M 14 Work Coordinate System 1 Selection
G54.1 M Aux Work Coordinate Systems
G55 M Work Coordinate System 2 Selection
G61 M 15 Decelerates to Zero–Precision Cornering
G64 M Cancels Precision Cornering
G65 N 12 Macro Command, Subprogram Call
G66 M Modal Subprogram Call
G67 M Modal Subprogram Call Cancel
G68 M 16 Coordinate Rotation

G68.2 M Global Rotation NC Transform Plane
G68.3 M Local Rotation NC Transform Plane
G69 M Coordinate System Rotation Cancel
BNC G70 M 06 Input in Inch
BNC G71 M Input in mm
G73 M 09 Peck Drilling Cycle
ISNC G74 M Left-handed Tapping Cycle
ISNC G74 M Left-handed Rigid Tapping

with M29
BNC G74 M 01 Single-quadrant Circular Interpolation
BNC G75 M Multi-quadrant Circular Interpolation
G76 M 09 Bore Orient Cycle
G80 M Canned Cycle Cancel
G81 M Drilling Cycle, Spot Boring
G82 M Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring
G83 M Peck Drilling Cycle
G84 M Tapping Cycle
ISNC G84.2 M Rigid Tapping Cycle
ISNC G84.3 M Rigid Tapping Cycle
ISNC G84 with M Rigid Tapping Cycle

M29
G85 M Boring Cycle
BNC G86 M Bore Orient Cycle
ISNC G86 M Bore Rapid Out Cycle
BNC G87 M Chip Breaker Cycle
ISNC G87 M Back Boring Cycle
BNC G88 M Rigid Tapping Cycle
ISNC G88 M Boring Cycle Manual Feed Out, Dwell
G89 M Boring Cycle Bore and Dwell
G90 M 03 Absolute Command
G91 M Incremental Command
G92 N 00 Programming of Absolute Zero Point

G93 M 05 Inverse Time
G94 M Feed per Minute
G94.1 M 05 Rotary Tangential Velocity Control
G98 M 10 Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle
G99 M Return to R Point in Canned Cycle
Table 3–4. G Codes in order of Codes

The following table lists the G codes by group, identifies the defaults (shaded areas), lists
Modal (M) or Non-modal (N) types, and describes the G codes’ functions.
Group G Codes Type Function
00 G04 N Dwell, Exact Stop
G07 M Cylindrical Rotary Wrap
G08 M ASR Command Buffering
G09 N Decelerate Axis to Zero
G10 N Data Setting
G11 N Data Setting Mode Cancel
G28 N Return to Reference Point
G29 N Return from Reference Point
G31 N Skip Function
G45 N Tool Offset Increase
G46 N Tool Offset Decrease
G47 N Tool Offset Double Increase
G48 N Tool Offset Double Decrease
G92 N Programming of Absolute Zero Point
01 G00 M Positioning (Rapid Traverse)
G01 M Linear Interpolation (Cutting Speed)
G02 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CW
G02.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation CW
G03 M Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW
G03.4 M 3D Circular Interpolation/Helical CCW
BNC G74 M Single-quadrant Circular Interpolation
BNC G75 M Multi-quadrant Circular Interpolation
02 G17 M XY Plane Selection
G18 M ZX Plane Selection
G19 M YZ Plane Selection

Group G Codes Type Function (Continued)
03 G90 M Absolute Command
G91 M Incremental Command
05 G93 M Inverse Time
G94 M Feed per Minute
G94.1 M Rotary Tangential Velocity Control
06 BNC G70 M Input in Inch
BNC G71 M Input in mm
07 G40 M Cutter Compensation Cancel
G41 M Cutter Compensation Left
G41.2 M 3D Tool Geometry Compensation
G42 M Cutter Compensation Right
08 G43 M Total Length Compensation + Direction
G43.4 M 5-Axis Linear Interpolation
G44 M Total Length Compensation – Direction
G49 M Tool Length Offset Compensation Cancel

09 G73 M Peck Drilling Cycle
ISNC G74 M Left-handed Tapping Cycle
ISNC G74 M Rapid Tapping

with M29
G76 M Bore Orient Cycle
G80 M Canned Cycle Cancel
G81 M Drilling Cycle, Spot Boring
G82 M Drilling Cycle, Counter Boring
G83 M Peck Drilling Cycle
G84 M Tapping Cycle
ISNC M Rigid Tapping Cycle

G84.2
ISNC M Rigid Tapping Cycle

G84.3
ISNC G84 M Rigid Tapping Cycle

with M29
G85 M Boring Cycle
BNC G86 M Bore Orient Cycle
ISNC G86 M Bore Rapid Out Cycle
BNC G87 M Chip Breaker Cycle
ISNC G87 M Back Boring Cycle
BNC G88 M Rigid Tapping Cycle
ISNC G88 M Boring Cycle Manual Feed Out, Dwell
G89 M Boring Cycle, Bore and Dwell

Group G Codes Type Function (Continued)
10 G98 M Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle
G99 M Return to R Point in Canned Cycle
11 G50 M Scaling Cancel
G51 M Scaling
12 G65 N Macro Command, Subprogram Call
G66 M Modal Subprogram Call
G67 M Modal Subprogram Call Cancel
14 G54 M Work Coordinate System 1 Selection
15 G61 M Decelerates to Zero-Precision Cornering
G64 M Cancels Precision Cornering
16 G68 M Coordinate Rotation
G69 M Coordinate System Rotation Cancel
17 G15 M Polar Coordinate Cancel
G16 M Polar Coordinates
19 G05.1 M Surface Finish Parameters
G05.2 M Data Smoothing
G05.3 M Surface Finish Quality
Table 3–5. G Codes in order of Groups

Rapid Traverse (G00)
Rapid Traverse mode (G00) is the default and moves the axes to a specified location at
the rapid feedrate programmed in the Program Parameters screen. Up to five axes (X, Y,
Z, A, B, C) of coordinated rapid motion can be specified while in this mode.
Set either a linear or non-linear tool path on the NC Parameters screen. The linear tool
path is the default. ISNC and BNC have different linear tool path modes. In the ISNC
linear mode the tool motion is in all three axes (X, Y, Z) simultaneously. In the BNC linear
mode the motion is divided into separate X, Y, and Z moves. The motion in the XY plane
is a straight line.
The ISNC and BNC non-linear modes are the same. In the non-linear tool path mode, the
XY plane motion is broken down into a 45° move and a straight line move parallel to
either the X or Y axis. The determination of whether the 45° move or the straight line
move is made depends first on the distances from the current position to the end position
along the X and Y axes.
If it is desired that the tool move to a position which is compensated, G41 or G42 needs
to be specified along with the offset before any axis coordinates are given. The rapid
traverse rate is set on the General Parameters screen.
The G00 mode is canceled by using the G01, G02, G03, or canned
cycle (G73, G76, G81–G89) commands.
G17, G18, or G19 determine plane of offset.
G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies incremental

dimensioning.
Another work coordinate system can be selected by using commands

G54 through G59.
Format
The format of the rapid traverse command is as follows:
G00 X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B_____C____W____
where
X is the Primary X Motion Dimension
Y is the Primary Y Motion Dimension
Z is the Primary Z Motion Dimension
A is the Rotary Dimension around X-axis
B is the Rotary Dimension around Y-axis
C is the Rotary Dimension around Z-axis
W is the secondary, linear axis in the Z direction

Example
If one axis of movement is specified in a G00 block, that axis moves at the rapid traverse
feedrate. When two axes of movement are specified in a G00 block, the rapid traverse
feedrate is assigned to the longest vector component. The resulting feed that appears on
the screen may actually exceed the rapid traverse feedrate parameter.
If a block containing a G00 word also contains a Z word that causes the Z-axis to move
away from the part, the Z-axis moves first. The other specified axes then move in linear
or non-linear mode at the rapid feedrate to their specified end points. If Z is to move
toward the part, all axes except Z move in linear or non-linear mode at rapid feedrate to
their specified end points; then Z moves down to its end point. If no Z is programmed, all
axes move at rapid feedrate coordinated to the specified end point. G00 is a member of
the tool positioning code group and is canceled by G01, G02, G03, and G81–G89.
This code is used for positioning only and should never be used for
cutting material.
The diagram below shows the two different rapid traverse modes:
1 Start Point
2 End Point
3 Linear
4 Non-Linear
Figure 3–13. G00 Axis Movement

Linear Interpolation (G01)
The Linear Interpolation code (G01) moves the axes to a specified location at the
programmed feedrate. Up to five axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C) of coordinated motion can be
specified while in this mode. The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F
word to any NC block while in this mode. X, Y, Z, A, B, C, and F dimensions need to be
supplied only if they change.
G01 is a member of the tool positioning code group and is canceled

by G00, G02, G03 and the canned cycle (G73, G76, G81–G89)
commands.
G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies incremental

dimensioning.
G41 or G42 may be optionally selected if a cutter offset is desired.
This code is used when the tool is in contact with the work piece to
cut a line parallel to an axis or at an angle to an axis.
Format
The format of the linear interpolation command is as follows:
G01 X_____ Y_____ Z_____ A_____ B_____C____ F_____
where
F is the Feedrate. If rotary axis parameters (A and B) are used, the feedrate
units are in degrees/minute.

Example
The diagram below illustrates the linear interpolation axis movement:
1 Start Point
2 End Point
Figure 3–14. G01 Axis Movement

Circular and Helical Interpolation (G02 and G03)
These two codes are members of the tool positioning code group. The Clockwise Circular
or Helical Interpolation code (G02) causes the axes to generate an arc or helix in a
clockwise direction. The previous block’s end point defines the start point of the arc.
If the first segment in a contour is an arc with a radius smaller than

the radius of the tool, the +-control will generate an error message
indicating that you need to use a tool with a smaller radius or
program a larger radius. An error message is generated only if the
Enable Lead In/Out Error Checking parameter in NC
Configuration Parameters is Yes.
The Counterclockwise Circular or Helical Interpolation code (G03) causes the axes to
generate an arc or helix in a counterclockwise direction. The previous block’s end point
defines the start point of the arc.
Calculate the linear feedrate to verify that it does not exceed various
limit values.
Both G02 and G03 codes are canceled by G00, G01, the canned cycle
(G73, G76, G81–G89) commands, or by each other.
The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to

any NC block when this code is active.
G17, G18, or G19 specify plane of interpolation.
G41 or G42 may be optionally selected if a cutter offset is desired.
G40 is used to cancel cutter offset.
G02 or G03 cannot be used in a start up block in offset mode.
(X,Y) for G17, (X,Z) for G18, and (Y,Z) for G19 specify the end
location on the selected plane.
R or the incremental coordinates ((I,J) or (I,K) or (J,K)) specify the

arc center location. The R is modal and stays in effect until another R
value is specified or (I,J) is used. With the R (radius) parameter, you
specify the radius. You do not need to calculate the center point.
• A positive R produces an arc of less than or equal to 180°.

• A negative R produces an arc of greater than or equal to 180°.
• The R takes precedence over an I, J, or K in the same block.
For BNC, I, J, K, and R are modal for G02 and G03. The I, J, and K
center point location is incremental from start point in G91 mode and
absolute coordinates in G90 mode.
For ISNC, when G02 or G03 are specified, the I, J, and K are reset to
0.0. They remain modal until another G02 or G03 is encountered. R
is not reset to 0.0. For ISNC, the I, J, and K are incremental from the
start point in both G90 and G91 mode.

You can specify an R value for arcs when the arc is in the G17 XY
plane or the G19 YZ plane.
Arcs use the right-hand coordinate system for all planes, except
when using Basic NC for the G18 XZ plane. Arcs use a left-hand
coordinate system when using the Basic NC for the G18 XZ plane.
When interpreting an arc in ISNC, a helix will be the result if a valid

center point was established in the previous block and only a Z value
is given.
F specifies the feedrate in degrees/minute along the arc in the

circular plane.
Format
The formats of the Circular Interpolation commands are as follows:
Circular interpolation (Z = 0)
Helical interpolation (Z ≠ 0)
G02/G03 (for G17) X_____ Y_____ {R_____ or [I_____ and J_____ ]}Z_____ F_____
G02/G03 (for G18) X_____ Z_____ {R_____ or [I_____ and K_____ ]}Z_____ F_____
G02/G03 (for G19) Y_____ Z_____ {R_____ or [J_____ and K_____ ]}Z_____ F_____
where
R is the Circular Interpolation Radius
I is the X-axis Arc Center
J is the Y-axis Arc Center
K is the Z-axis Arc Center
F is the Feedrate

This diagram illustrates circular and helical interpolation:
1 Start Point
2 End Point (Circular)
3 End Point (Helical)
Figure 3–15. Circular and Helical Interpolation

G02 Example
Consider the following section of an NC program using a G02 code in absolute mode using
R to specify the modal turn radius:
NC Part Program 1 Inch

G02.FNC
%
G00 G90
M25
T1 M06
Z5.05
X2.0 Y0.0
S2000 M03
Z0.05
G01 Z-0.5 F10.
G01 X2.0 Y0.0
G01 X0.5
G02 X0.0 Y0.5 R0.5 ⇐ R needs to be specified only once.
G01 Y2.5
G02 X0.5 Y3.0
G01 X3.5
G02 X4.0 Y2.5
G01 Y0.5
G02 X3.5 Y0.0
G01 X2.0
M25
M05
M02

BNC G03 Example
Consider the following section of a BNC program using a G03 code in absolute mode:

G03ABS.HNC
%
N110 Z0 G91
N115 T01 M06
N116 X0. Y0. Z0.
N120 F40 S1000 M3
N130 G00 X3. Y4.
N140 G01 X3. Y2. F10
N150 G03 X4. Y1.5858 I4. J3.
N160 X7.4142 Y5. J5.
N170 G01 Y7.
N220 M02
E
This is an example of the same geometry using the incremental mode:

G03INC.HNC
%
N110 Z0
N115 T01 M06
N116 X0. Y0. Z0.
N120 F40 S1000 M3
N130 G00 X3. Y4.
N140 G01 Y-2. F10
N150 G03 X1. Y-.4142 I1. J1.
N160 X3.4142 Y3. I0. J3.4142
N170 G01 Y2.
N220 M02
E
A, B, and C words are not allowed in circular interpolation mode. The programmed
feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to any block while in this mode.
X, Y, and Z define the end point of the arc and I, J, and K define the center point of the
arc. I represents the X center point; J represents the Y center point; and K represents the
Z center point. The X, Y, Z, and F words do not need to be programmed when you are
initially setting the circular interpolation mode if they have not changed from the previous
block.

For BNC, the I, J, and K dimensions must be specified when initially setting the circular
interpolation mode (when a G02 or G03 is in the block) to establish a center point.
For ISNC, I, J, or K are set to 0.0 if they are not initially specified.
Once the circular interpolation mode is set, the X, Y, Z, I, J, K, and F dimensions need to
be supplied only if they change. A block with missing dimensions uses the last specified
locations.
A circle or circular helix may be programmed by either using the

same end and start point, or by not programming the end points.
Ensure that the specified end point is mathematically on the arc.
If the programmed end point is not on the arc or helix, an end point is calculated using
the start point, center point, and programmed end point. The start point and center point
determine the radius of the arc and thus the distance of the calculated end point from the
center point. The center point and programmed end point determine the line on which the
calculated end point results.
Arcs in this system are approximations that are comprised of small

line segments or arc chords.
The chord error of arcs and helices may be controlled through the chord error parameter
in the Program Parameters screen. The default chord error is 0.0001 inches (.003 mm).
This creates very smooth arcs, but may limit the maximum feedrate for the arc or helix.
Larger chord errors allow higher feedrate arcs or helices, but may be less accurate.
3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4)

The 3D Circular Interpolation (G02.4 and G03.4) codes are part of the tool positioning
code group. These codes require two lines of NC code:
• The first line contains a set of X, Y, and Z values which represent the
Intermediate Point.
• The second line contains a set of X, Y, and Z values which represent the End
Point.
The Radius, Direction (CW or CCW), and Center Point are calculated based on the current
location, the Intermediate Point, and the End Point. G02.4 and G03.4 can be used
interchangeably to represent the same arc. The actual direction is calculated by the
software.
Both G02.4 and G03.4 codes are canceled by G00, G01, the canned
cycle commands (G73, G76, G81-G89), or by each other.
The programmed feedrate can be changed by adding an F word to

any NC block when this code is active.
G17, G18, G19 are irrelevant for these G codes.
G41 and G42 may not be used with these G codes.

Example
Below is a program example using G03.4:
%
T1 M6 S500 M3
G0 X0 Y0 Z6
G1 X0 Y0.0 F5.
Z0
G3.4 X5.0 Y2.5 Z1.0 (Intermediate Point)
X10.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 (End Point)
G0Z6
M2
E
Dwell Mode (G04)

The Dwell Mode code (G04) causes the machine to delay the shift to the next block in the
program by the amount specified by parameter P or X for a specified amount of time.
When an integer is used with the G04 command, the value is multiplied by 0.01 for BNC
and.001 or .0001 for ISNC depending on the Least Dwell Units programmed on the NC
Parameters screen.
The BNC format for the dwell time is as follows:
Real Number:.3 second = G04 X.3 or G04 P.3
Integer Number:.3 second = G04 X30 or G04 P30
This is the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with a real number:
Real Number:.3 second = G04 X.3 or G04 P.3
When .001 is programmed for the Least Dwell Units field on the NC Parameters screen,
the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with an integer is this:
Integer Number: .3 second = G04 X300 or G04 P300
When .0001 is programmed for the Least Dwell Units field on the NC Parameters screen,
the ISNC format for the dwell time programmed with an integer is this:
Integer Number:.3 second = G04 X3000 or G04 P3000
The Dwell Mode code is only active in the programmed block, but the dwell time is modal
and it affects most of the canned cycles.
A decimal after an integer indicates whole seconds. For example,

G04 P5 = .005 second dwell, while G04 P5. = 5 second dwell.

Format
G04 P_____ or X_____
where
P is the Dwell Time
X is the Dwell Time
The range of values is 0.001–9999.999 seconds.
Surface Finish (G05.1)

The code determines the type of finish quality, P_.
• P1 = Precision
• P2 = Standard
• P3 = Performance
The parameter Q_ sets the chord segment for the finish, where the Q value is the
acceptable error value.
Data Smoothing (G05.2)

Q_ sets the Tool Path Tolerance. The deviation from the tool path the system will tolerate
must be between 0 to 0.0005 inches, inclusive (0 to 0.012 mm).
Surface Finish Quality (G05.3)

The G05.3 command is used with the Select Surface option.
G05.3 P_, where the P value is 1.0 to 100.0. P1 gives a smoother surface but requires a
longer cutting time. P100.0 cuts down time to cut the part, but gives a rougher surface
finish.

Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2)
The G07.2 code wraps X-, Y-, and Z-axis commanded motion to a cylinder for 4- and 5-
axis machines, and can be used in transform planes.
There are two methods for setting the cylinder location and orientation: Rotary Axis
Method and Vector Method. Using default parameters for both styles, the X-direction is
wrapped around the cylinder, the Y-direction points along the cylinder axis, and the Z-
direction always maps to the cylinder radius.
Tool changes can be safely performed while milling with G07.2, because the control
utilizes ASR Command Buffering. See Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On
(G08.1), on page 3 - 54.
Format
G07.2 requires parameters to identify the location and the orientation of the cylinder:
Rotary Axis Method
The Rotary Axis Method wraps XYZ to the cylinder.
G07.2 X_____Y_____Z_____ C_____ D_____P_____L_____Q_____
• X_____Y_____Z_____ is cylinder coordinate system location with respect to

the current coordinate system. If not specified, the control sets them to zero.
• C______indicates cylinder axis is along C-axis and the # indicates the
mapping radius. The radius cannot be zero. If the radius is negative, it will
wrap to the inside of the cylinder along the negative radial direction (180
degrees rotation). A_ or B_ can be specified instead of C to define the rotary
axis the cylinder is parallel to.
• D_____ (optional) Indicates inside cylinder wrap. When specified, it will
invert the wrap at the same angle (no 180 degree rotation as when a
negative radius is specified).
• P_____ (optional) Indicates lead/lag distance (tangential to positive rotation
direction at contact point on cylinder).
• L_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the
Retract Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses L=infinity.
• Q_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the
Safety Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses Q=0 (Safety
Plane passes through the Target Point).
• H_____(optional) The rotation in degree about the Z-direction for the 3D
feature that will be wrapped (prior to being wrapped). 0 degrees is the
default if no H parameter is specified; this will align the Y-direction to the
cylinder axis and the X-direction to be wrapped around the cylinder.

Vector Method
The Vector Method uses vectors (IJK and UVW) to define the zero-angle direction and the
cylinder axis direction.
G07.2 X_____Y_____Z_____I_____J_____K_____U_____V_____W_____
R_____D_____P_____L_____Q_____
• X_____Y_____Z_____ is the cylinder coordinate system location with respect

to the current coordinate system. If not specified, the control sets them to
zero.
• I_____J_____K_____ is the cylinder Zero Rotation direction with respect to
the current coordinate system.
• U_____V_____W_____ is the cylinder axis direction with respect to the
current coordinate system.
• R_____ is the mapping radius. The radius cannot be zero. If the radius is
negative, it will wrap to the inside of the cylinder along the negative radial
direction (180 degrees rotation).
• D_____ (optional) indicates inside cylinder wrap. When specified, it will invert
the wrap at the same angle (no 180 degree rotation as when a negative
radius is specified).
• P_____ (optional) indicates lead/lag distance (tangential to positive rotation
direction at contact point on cylinder).
• L_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the
Retract Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses L=infinity.
• Q_____ (optional) Incremental distance from first position after G07.2 to the
Safety Plane (same as for G08.2). If not specified, control uses Q=0 (Safety
Plane passes through the Target Point).
Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3)

This command cancels the G07.2 command.

Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1)
The G08.1 code turns on the Automatic Safe Repositioning (ASR) Command Buffering.
This feature allows NC programs to automatically retract, reorient, and plunge from
anywhere in the machine to any point in the program using a series of moves computed
automatically that do not violate machine limits. When G08.1 is called, the control will
stop outputting machine motion and commands. Internally the control will continue to
process the program and buffer up all machine commands. Each subsequent block is
processed and the target position is updated with each new programmed move.
Machine Movement
The following example outlines the basics of Automatic Safe Repositioning (ASR). This
example is for an SR machine; the objective is to safely move the tool from one
Transform Plane to another, both at different locations and orientations.
The following graphic shows the tool in the begin and target positions, as well as the
retract plane and machine limits:
Retract Plane
Machine
X, Z limits
Target
Position
Begin
Position
The tool starts in the begin position (1) and retracts along the tool vector (direction) to
the machine limits, M140 (2):
1 2
Retract Plane Retract Plane

The tool retracts to the vertical (Z) machine limit (3) and then re-orients to the target
position orientation (4):
3 4
Retract Plane Retract Plane
The tool tip moves to the retract plane (5) and then moves to a point above the plunge
position in XY of the retract plane (6):
5 6
Retract Plane
Retract Plane
If the tool tip is not at or above the retract plane, program execution
is stopped and an error message is generated.

The tool plunges to the target position along the plunge direction (7):
Retract Plane
Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer Off (G08.2)

The G08.2 code turns off ASR Command Buffering. When the G08.2 command is called,
the buffer state is turned off and the control outputs any buffered up machine commands
(for example, preparatory functions, tool change, and so on).
The control will not output redundant commands after the ASR
Command Buffer state is turned off. For example, if a rotary clamp
was on before G08.1 and the clamp was toggled off and on several
times, then finally set to off, G08.2 will only output one unclamp
command.
G31 Skip Function is not compatible with ASR Command Buffering.
M00 (Program Stop) and M01 (Planned Stop) codes are skipped in
ASR buffering mode. Codes are re-posted when buffering is no
longer active, except in a Recovery/Restart.
There are two versions of ASR available. Option 1 is a simple retract, reorient and
reposition to the specified location and orientation. Option 2 adds buffering of commands
from a start block to an end block.
Format
The command format is as follows:
Option 1—Direct Reposition
G08.2 X_Y_Z_[I_J_K_ or A_B_C_][L_][D_]
where
X_Y_Z_ are the target positions to move to.
I_J_K_ are the target tool vectors to reorient to. Cannot be used with
A_B_C_.

A_B_C are the target rotary axes positions. Cannot be used with I_J_K_.
L_ is the incremental safety clearance distance along the tool vector to the
target position. An error will be reported and the program will stop if the tool
tip cannot clear this distance from the target position at the start of the final
approach move.
D_ is the linearization override parameter that specifies how the control will
reorient to the new tool vector or rotary angles. D0 forces linearization off;
D1 forces linearization on. This parameter is optional; when not present the
control uses the current linearization interpolation mode G43.4.
Option 2—Buffer Command Direct Reposition
G08.1 (ASR Command Buffering start; control begins buffering commands.
No physical motion until G08.2 is called.)
G0X_Y_Z_I_J_K_
G08.2 [L_][D_] (ASR Command buffering end; control moves to the position and
orientation prior to this block)
where
approach move.
Tool Vector Canned Cycles with G08.2

NC canned cycles can be modified to execute along the current tool vector at a 3D point
without having to define a full Transform Plane (G68.2). The G08.2 ASR Command can be
used to re-orient the tool to a new tool vector after which the canned cycle can be
commanded to execute along the new tool vector:
G08.2 X_Y_Z_I_J_K (ASR move to start point and tool vector orientation)
G81 X_Y_Z_I_R_[P_Q_L_K_F_S_](e.g. Drill along current tool vector)
where
X_Y_Z_ are the target positions to move to.
I_J_K_ are the target tool vectors to reorient to. Cannot be used with
A_B_C_.

A_B_C are the target rotary axes positions. Cannot be used with I_J_K_.
approach move.
Precision Cornering (G09)

The Precision Cornering code (G09) decelerates the axes to zero velocity at the end of
the block in which it is programmed. After stopping, the axes accelerate to the
programmed feedrate in the next block. This causes a sharp corner to be cut regardless
of the programmed feedrate. The G09 code is not part of a G code group, so it affects
only the axis movement of the block in which it is specified.

Setting Work Coordinate Systems with G10
This code is used for setting tool offsets, entering tool wear data, and changing work
coordinate systems. The G11 command cancels the data setting mode.
G10 commands can not be performed by graphics at the same time

that the program is running.
Setting External Work Zero Offsets (G10 with L2)

One of six work coordinate systems can be changed as shown below where P is used to
select the external work zero point offset value (P parameter = 0), or one of the work
coordinate systems (P parameter = 1 to 99), and X, Y, Z, A, B, C is the work zero point
offset value of each axis. G90 specifies absolute dimensioning and G91 specifies
incremental dimensioning.
Format
The command format for setting external work zero offsets is as follows:
G10 L2 P____ X____Y____Z____ A ____ B ____C____
where
P is the Work Coordinate System

Setting Tool Offsets with G10
This code is used for setting tool length and radius offsets. The G11 command cancels the
data setting mode.
Initializing Tool Length Offsets (G10 with P, R)

G10 is used with the P and R parameters. P is the offset number 01 through 200, and R is
the offset amount which may be absolute or incremental depending on G90 or G91.
Format
This is the command format for initializing tool length offsets:
G10 P____ R____
where
P is the Tool Length Offset Number
R is the Offset value
Initializing Tool Offsets (G10 with T, H, D)

G10 is used with the T, H and D parameters. The T parameter is the offset number 01
through 200, H is the tool length offset and D is the tool radius offset.
Format
This is the command format for initializing tool offsets:
G10 T___ H___ D____
where
T is the Offset Index Number
H is the Tool Length Offset Value
D is the Tool Radius Offset Value

Assigning Tool Offsets (G10 with L3)
The following example shows how to assign tool offsets. T is the tool number, H is the tool
length offset number, and D is the cutter compensation (offset) number.
Format
The command format for assigning tool offsets is as follows:
G10 L3 T_____H_____D_____
where
T is the Offset Index
H is the tool Length Offset Value
D is the Tool Radius Offset Value
Example
The following tool offset initialization example shows how to set up a program to assign
offsets to the tools.
G10L3
T0001 H_____ D_____ (for tool 1)
T000n H_____ D_____(for tool n)
G11 (to cancel)
The tool number does not require leading zeroes.
Polar Coordinates Command (G16)

This command allows coordinates in the current block to be input in polar coordinates
(radius and angle). The first coordinate in the currently selected plane is the radius
coordinate in mm, and the second coordinate in the plane is the angle in degrees. For the
XY plane, the X value represents radius and the Y value represents the angle.
G16 is canceled by G15 (Polar Coordinates Cancel).
Format
The command format for Polar Coordinates is as follows:
G16 X____ Y_____ Z_____
where
X is the Primary X Motion Dimension, Dwell Time

Example
Select Metric mode for the following sample program using the Polar Coordinates
command:
NC Part Program 1 Metric

PIE.FNC
%
T1 M06
M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800
G01 Z-.25 F20.
G01 G16 X50. Y60.
G03 X50. Y120. R50.
G15
G01 X0 Y0
M02
Plane Selection
The three codes in the plane selection group and their relationships to each other are
illustrated below:
Figure 3–16. Plane Selection Group Codes

XY Plane Selection (G17)
The XY Plane Selection code (G17) is the default and sets the plane for circular
interpolation modes G02 and G03 to the XY plane. The X, Y, Z, I, and J words are valid in
circular interpolation blocks; K words are invalid. If a Z word is programmed in the
circular interpolation block, a helix is generated in the XY plane. The direction of an arc or
helix in the XY plane can be determined by looking at the XY plane with positive X to the
right and positive Y going up. The XY plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb
points to positive Z, and fingers wrap in counterclockwise direction).
In G17, the arc end point is defined by the X and Y words in the block. The arc center
point is defined by the I and J words in the block.
G17 is canceled by G18 and G19.
Format
The format of the XY plane selection command is as follows:
G17 X____ Y____
where
Example
The diagram below illustrates XY plane selection:
Figure 3–17. XY Plane Selection (G17)

XZ Plane Selection (G18)
The XZ Plane Selection code (G18) sets the plane for the circular interpolation codes G02
and G03 to the XZ plane. The X, Y, Z, I, and K words are valid in circular interpolation
blocks; J words are invalid. If a Y word is programmed in the circular interpolation block,
a helix is generated in the XZ plane. The direction of an arc or helix in the XZ plane can
be determined by looking at the XZ plane with positive X to the right and positive Z going
up.
Basic NC and ISNC handle the XZ plane differently. For Basic NC, the XZ plane is a left-
handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive Y, and fingers wrap in clockwise
direction). For ISNC, the XZ plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb points to
positive Y, and fingers wrap in a counterclockwise direction).
In G18, the arc end point is defined by the X and Z words in the block. The arc center
point is defined by the I and K words in the block.
Format
The format of the XZ plane selection command is as follows:
G18 Z____ X____
where

Example
The diagrams below illustrate XZ plane selection in Basic NC and in ISNC:
Figure 3–18. Basic NC XZ Plane Selection (G18)
Figure 3–19. ISNC NC XZ Plane Selection (G18)

YZ Plane Selection (G19)
The YZ Plane Selection code (G19) sets the plane for circular interpolation codes G02 and
G03 to the YZ plane. The X, Y, Z, J, and K words are valid in circular interpolation blocks;
I words are invalid. If an X word is programmed in the circular interpolation block, a helix
is generated in the YZ plane. The direction of an arc or helix in the YZ plane can be
determined by looking at the YZ plane with positive Y to the right and positive Z going
up. The YZ plane is a right-handed coordinate system (thumb points to positive X, and
fingers wrap in counterclockwise direction).
In G19, the arc end point is defined by the Y and Z words in the block. The arc center
point is defined by the J and K words in the block.
Format
The format of the YZ plane selection command is as follows:
G19 Y____ Z____
where
Example
The diagram below illustrates YZ plane selection:
Figure 3–20. YZ Plane Selection (G19)

Units of Measure ISNC G20, G21
Before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program, the units of
measure must be specified in an independent block. A part program may switch between
English and Metric modes as long as the format of the dimensions is correct for the
chosen mode.
The Imperial Units of Measure code (ISNC G20) signals the system that the dimensions
are in inches.
ISNC G20 is canceled by G21.
The Metric Units of Measure code (ISNC G21) signals the system that the dimensions are
metric units.
ISNC G21 is canceled by G20.
Format
These are the command formats for the inch/metric conversion commands:
ISNC:
G20: Inch command
G21: Metric command
The ISNC G20 and G21 codes do not affect the units of measure
used in the graphics and machine status display screens. The
displays are controlled by the units selected when entering NC
editing.
Automatic Return To and From Reference Point (G28 and

G29)
Any point within the machine coordinate system can be selected as the reference point.
The return to reference point is often used to move the part forward so you can remove
chips from the part and inspect the part. Select the reference point on the NC Parameters
screen.
The Automatic Return To Reference Point command (G28) specifies an automatic return
to the reference point for the designated axes. An intermediate point can be specified
with the X____Y____Z____ parameters. If no intermediate point coordinates are
specified, the system uses the previous intermediate point coordinates. If no
intermediate point coordinates are specified during the current program execution, the
machine returns directly to the reference point.
The Automatic Return From Reference Point command (G29) specifies an automatic
return from the reference point through the intermediate point, if specified by a previous
G28, and to the end point designated by the X, Y, and Z parameters. If no intermediate
point coordinates were specified during the current program execution, the machine will
return directly from the reference point to the specified end point.

G28 Format
The format for the automatic return to reference point command is:
G28 X____ or Y____ or Z____
where
These parameters specify the absolute or incremental location of the intermediate point
in coordinates relative to the current coordinate system. The G28 command is only
performed for the axes which follow the G28. For example, if an X value follows the G28,
the machine moves to the X reference point, not the Y or Z reference point.
As another example, a typical method to home the Z axis using incremental mode is
shown below. The combination of G91 and a value of zero for the Z axis causes the Z axis
to move directly to the home (reference) point without moving through an intermediate
point.
G91 G28 Z0
G90
G29 Format
The format for the Automatic Return to Reference Point command is:
G29 X____ Y____ Z____
where
When the G29 command is given, the system returns to the most recently used working
coordinate system. These parameters specify the absolute or incremental location of the
end point in coordinates relative to the current coordinate system in effect when the G28
command was processed.

Example
This sample program uses G28 and G29 to return the spindle to and from the reference
point. Set Part Zero to X12 Y9 before running the program.

PLAIN_28.FNC
%
G00 X0 Y0 Z0
G28 X-7 Y-8
G29 X3 Y-4
M02

Skip (Probing) Function (G31)
The Skip Function command is used to perform probing within an NC program, allowing
you to specify a target position. The machine axis will stop when the target position is
reached, or if the probe comes in contact with another surface. The Skip Function
command can be programmed on a PC, but it can only be run properly on the control. On
a PC, the command works similarly to the Linear Interpolation (Cutting Feed) (G01)
command. The Skip Function command is a one-shot command and is only effective in
the current block.
Two-touch and single-touch probing is supported. These modes are selected with the M41
and M42 codes. Two-touch probing is the default probing mode.
When performing two-touch probing (M42 specified), the probe moves in the specified
direction until it touches the part, backs up away from the part, and then moves forward
again at the specified feedrate. When the probe touches the part again, the trigger point
is stored in variable #5061 (X axis), #5062 (Y axis), or #5063 (Z axis) with the NCPP
option. The NCPP option allows you to create macro subroutines and use conditional
statements and math functions. (Refer to NC Productivity Package Option, on page 3 -
183 for more information about the variables and subprograms.)
When performing one-touch probing (M41 specified), the probe does not back up after
the first touch.
Values may be written to tool offset variables so they can be viewed after running the
program on the Tool Offset screen. If the system does not have the NCPP option, the
values need to be recorded manually. A Programmed Stop (M00) command can follow the
G31 block to stop the machine so you can record the machine’s location.
The values which are stored are referenced to the current coordinate system (working,
local, or machine). If the probe does not touch the part before the end of the movement,
the end coordinate value is stored in #5061, #5062, or #5063.
The current positions of the XY and Z axes can be retrieved using the #5041, #5042, and
#5043 registers. The values can then be stored into part setup using the G10 code. For
example, to set the X value for work offset G54, use the following G10 command:
G10 L2 P1 X[#5041]
Format
The format for the Skip (Probing) Function is as follows:
G31 X____ Y____ Z____ and/or F____
where
F is the Feedrate
This command cannot be performed with cutter compensation (G41,

G42, G43 {with G18 or G19}, G45, G46, G47, and G48).

Example
The following program example finds the center point within a box when run on the
control.

G31_TEXT.FNC
%
(GO TO INITIAL PART ZERO)
G01 X0 Y0 F15.
G31 X7 F15.
#2001 = #5061
G01 X0 Y0 F25.
G31 X-7 F15.
#2002 = #5061
#2003 = [#2002+#2001]/Z
G01X#2005Y#2006F25.
N100 M00
G31 Y5 F15.
#2004 = #5062
G01 X#2003 Y0F25.
G31 Y-5 F15.
#2005 = #5062
#2006 = [#2004+#2005]/Z
(THE SPINDLE NOW MOVES TO THE CENTER OF THE BOX)
G01 X#2003 Y#2006

Parallel sides are assumed to be aligned with the X and Y axes. Additional programming
steps will be required to determine the angle between the sides and the X and Y axes
(skew angle) if the sides are not aligned. The initial part zero is set somewhere within the
box.
The probe moves in the +X and then the -X direction to determine the center point
between the sides in the X axis.
1 X Left
2 X Right
3 Y Top
4 Y Bottom
5 Initial Part Zero
Figure 3–21. ISNC Skip (Probing) Function

Tool and Radius Offsets (G40–G49)
Tool and Radius Offsets include the Tool Length Offsets and Tool Radius Offsets. Cutter
Compensation G codes G40–G42 are used to control tool movement. Access the Tool
Offsets from the Tool Setup screen. Select the Tool Offsets (F4) softkey. From the Tool
Setup - NC Tool Offsets screen, select either Tool Length Offsets (F4) or Tool Radius
Offsets (F4). The softkey toggles between these selections.
• The Length Offset Table contains the tool length offset (G43, G44).
• The Radius Offset Table holds signed values for cutter compensation (G40–
G42) and Tool Radius Offset Increase/Decrease (G45–G48).
The measurement units for the offsets in the Tool Offset Table depend on the
programmed units. If -9.5 is entered for tool offset 15, that tool offset is -9.5 inches (or -
9.5 mm, depending on the unit of measurement).
The Toggle Units softkey on the NC Tool Offsets screen changes the units of
measurement between inch and metric.
Use either the Page Up and Page Down softkeys, the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys,
or the scroll bar to scroll through all of the Tool Offset fields. The keyboard up and down
arrows move through the fields displayed on the screen.
Tool changes may be made from the offsets table screen. Place the
cursor in the offset field of the tool you wish to change to, and press
the console Auto Tool Change button.
Cutter Compensation (G40–G42), on page 3 - 74
Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49), on page 3 - 80
Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49), on page 3 - 84

Cutter Compensation (G40–G42)
Cutter compensation may be used for two purposes. First, it may be used when the
dimensions in the program and the part surface are the same. The system calculates the
proper tool path by using the part surface and the tool diameter information.
Second, cutter compensation corrects the difference between the diameters of the tool
specified and the tool actually used to cut the part. This situation often occurs when the
program originates from an off-line device. Note that the coordinates of those programs
are usually tool center line data.
If the first segment in a contour is an arc with a radius smaller than

the radius of the tool, the control will generate an error message
indicating that you need to use a tool with a smaller radius or
program a larger radius.
Cutter compensation is based on the direction of travel of the tool. To determine which
type of cutter compensation to use, look at the part as if you are moving around the part
always keeping the tool ahead of you. Then it becomes obvious whether the tool needs to
be on the right or the left of the programmed line or the boundary of the part as shown in
the illustration below.
1 Part
2 Cutter
3 Programmed Part Outline
4 Direction of Cutter Travel
5 Compensated Cutter Path
Figure 3–22. Cutter Compensation

Cutter Compensation – ISNC and Basic NC
You may program cutter compensation using ISNC or Basic NC.
Tool Radius Offset
ISNC
There are two options to program cutter compensation using ISNC:
1. Use Diameter and Diameter Wear values from Tool Setup. To use this method,
the Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup parameter in NC Settings must
be set to Yes. The control will use the values from Tool Setup to calculate the
offset.
2. Use a D code (Tool Radius offset). The D code specifies an index into the Tool
Offset Table or an actual offset value. For example, in the command G41 D5,
the index value is an actual offset value of 5.
If a D code is present, it always takes priority over the Diameter and
Diameter Wear method, even if the Diameter Compensation Using
Tool Setup parameter is Yes.
An error will be generated if there is a decimal point.
Access the Tool Radius Offset Table using the Tool Offset softkey on
the Tool Setup screen. The Tool Radius Offset page contains 200
registers for storing radius offsets.
Basic NC
To program cutter compensation using Basic NC, you may choose whether or not to use a
D code:
1. Use Diameter and Diameter Wear fields from the Tool Setup screen. If a D
code is not present the control will always use Diameter and Diameter Wear.
2. Use a D code. Basic NC interprets the D code value based on whether you are
calling out a tool change or commanding a G41 or G42:
• If you use a D code when calling out a tool change, enter the actual tool
diameter. Basic NC divides this value by two to calculate the tool diameter
offset.
• If you are programming a G41 or G42 code, Basic NC interprets the D
code based on whether the D code value contains a decimal point:
• Contains a decimal point – Basic NC interprets the D value as the tool
diameter offset.
• Does not contain a decimal point – Basic reads the D value as an index
value for the Tool Offset table.

Tool Length Offset
You may use a G43 code to program tool length offsets. This is true for ISNC and Basic
NC. Use an H code to specify an index into the Tool Offset Table. For example, in the
command G43 H01, the index value is “01”.
The value in the Tool Offset Table is a negative value that represents the distance from
the Z home position to the top of the part with the tool tip touching the top of the part.
Another way to program a tool length offset would be to use the Zero
Calibration field in the Tool Setup screen, and not use the G43 H
code. This is recommended, especially if you are using the Tool
Probing software.
Cutter Compensation Off (G40)

The Cutter Compensation Off code (G40) is the default. It cancels cutter compensation
by erasing all the data in the system’s cutter compensation look-ahead buffers and
moving to the current uncompensated endpoint at the programmed feedrate.
G00 or G01 must be selected in order for this command to cancel the offset
compensation. Each axis moves straight (G01) or at rapid traverse (G00) from the point
of the old vector at the start point toward the end point. The machine should be in G40
mode before the end of a program. Otherwise, when the program ends in the offset
mode, positioning cannot be made to the terminal point of the program, and the tool
position will be separated from the terminal position by the vector value.
Format
The command format for Cutter Compensation Off is as follows:
G40 X____ Y____
where
If the parameters are omitted, the tool moves the old vector amount in the opposite
direction which effectively cancels the offset.
It is possible to switch from left to right cutter compensation (and

vice versa) without first canceling cutter compensation.

Cutter Compensation Left (G41)
The Cutter Compensation Left code (G41) switches on cutter compensation. It establishes
a new tool path left and parallel to the programmed path. The distance between the new
tool path and the programmed path is equal to the cutter compensation value for the
programmed tool.
G41 is canceled by G40.
The offset executes only in the G17 offset plane. In simultaneous three-axis control, the
tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated.
G00, G01, G02, or G03 must be specified.
Format
The command format for cutter compensation left is as follows:
G41 X _____ Y_____ D_____
where
D is the Tool Radius Offset
If the offset number for cutter compensation is D00, the system will not go into G41
mode.
G41 cannot be used when G42 or G41.2 are active.
Tool Vector orientation cannot be changed when G41 is active.
3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2)

3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) allows the specification of the Surface Contact
Point, Surface Normal Vector, and Tool Vector for ball nose, flat end, and bull nose
endmills. See 3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 77 discussion in Tool
Centerpoint Management (M128) for more information.
G41.2 cannot be used when G41 or G42 are active.

Cutter Compensation Right (G42)
The Cutter Compensation Right code (G42) switches on cutter compensation and
establishes a new tool path right of and parallel to the programmed path. The distance
between the new tool path and the programmed path is equal to the cutter compensation
value for the programmed tool.
This command is an offset method similar to G41 except that the offset is to the right of
the programmed path looking in the direction in which the tool is advancing. The offset is
performed only in the G17 offset plane. Only the coordinate values of an axis in the offset
plane are affected by the offset. In simultaneous three-axis control, the tool path
projected on the offset plane is compensated.
G00, G01, G02, or G03 must be specified.
Format
The command format for cutter compensation right is as follows:
G42 X _____ Y_____ D_____
where
If the offset number is D00, the system will not go into G42 mode.
G42 cannot be used when G41.2 is active.
Tool Vector orientation cannot be changed when G42 is active.

Cutter Compensation Programming
Follow these steps to use cutter compensation:
1. Enter the part surface description according to the final dimensions of the part.
2. Enter the full cutter diameter as a positive number in the Diameter
Compensation field in Tool Setup, or supply a D word when changing tools
(Basic NC only).
3. Activate cutter compensation in the desired direction (left or right of part
surface with respect to tool path direction).
4. Supply an entry move from somewhere outside the part to the start point of
the part surface, i.e., somewhere outside of the compensated path. The part
surface appears as a blue line on the graphics display.
5. Following all of the blocks to be compensated, provide an exit move to
somewhere outside the compensated path and turn off cutter compensation
(G40). When a G40 is programmed, cutter compensation extracts any
remaining information from its look-ahead buffer and moves to the last
programmed end point. The tool moves from the compensated end point of
the previous move to the end point of the exit move.
6. Be certain that the exit move is outside the compensated path. Otherwise,
turning off cutter compensation may cut into the part surface. To check the
exit move, use graphics to verify the tool path movements.
The tool moves from the start point of the entry move and ends at the compensated start
point for the part surface as shown in the graph below:
1 Part
2 Actual Tool Path
3 Programmed Move
Figure 3–23. Cutter Compensated Tool Movement

In the previous illustration, the value in the Diameter Compensation field is 1.00, and
these codes were used to control tool movement:
• G00 G40 X5. Y5.

• G41 X7. Y2.
Z movements may be used for the entry and exit moves. For
example, turn on cutter compensation when moving to a Z Start
plane before plunging. Turn off cutter compensation after retracting
the tool from the part.
Turn off cutter compensation using a G40 code before ending a

program or all programmed blocks may not be cut.
Refer to NC Parameters, on page 3 - 20 for information about the

DEFAULT CUTTER COMP LOOK AHEAD field in the NC Parameters
screen.
Tool Length Offset (G43, G44, G49)

Tool offsets, G43 and G44 tool length compensation codes, are used to compensate tool
length without altering the NC program. G43 is for positive tool length compensation.
G44 is for negative tool length compensation. Either the G49 command, or an H00
command, immediately cancels the offset.
The tool offset specified by a G43 or G44 overrides the tool length offset from the Zero
Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen. The Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup
screen is always treated as a negative Z offset. For example, if a value of 3.0 is put in the
Zero Calibration field, a Z offset value of -3.0 is stored. If the command G43 H1 is then
used where the value -2.2 is stored in the H1 offset register, WinMax uses a tool offset of
–2.2. The table below illustrates tool offsets:
Tool Setup Screen Tool Length Total

H1
Zero Calibration Offset Mode Tool Offset
3.0 G43 -2.2 -2.2
3.0 G44 -2.2 +2.2
3.0 G49 -2.2 -3.0
3.0 G49 +2.2 -3.0
3.0 G43 +2.2 +2.2
3.0 G44 +2.2 -2.2
Table 3–6. Tool Offsets
The values in the Tool Setup screens always remain in the units
selected when going into the NC Editor.

For Basic NC (BNC)
An H address may specify an index into the tool length offset table without specifying a
G43 or G44. In such a case, the value in the tool length offset table is used as the tool
offset. This is equivalent to the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen.
For BNC and ISNC, if the system is in the G43 and G44 mode already, an H code can be
used by itself to replace the existing tool length already in effect.
If no G43 or G44 is programmed and an H offset is not specified, tool

lengths are taken from the Tool Setup screen.
An offset in the X axis can be specified with the G19.
An offset in the Y axis can be specified with the G18.
If a G17 is provided, or none of the plane selection commands (G17,

G18, and G19) is present, specify an offset in the Z axis.
The G17, G18, and G19 used in this block are only used to specify
the axis of the tool offset and will not affect the specified plane.
An offset in the X or Y axis cannot be specified when cutter

compensation is active or commands G45–G48 are being used.
Commands G45–48 support existing X or Y axis tool offset

programs; however, to save time, automatic Cutter Compensation
(G40–G42) should be used instead.
Commanding an H00 cancels an offset.
Either G43 or G44 is in effect until a G49 or H00 is used.
Format
The H is the Offset Code with a range of H00 to H200. G17 is optional when a Z axis
offset is desired.
[G17 _____] or [G18 _____] or [G19 _____] H_____
The following four examples illustrate tool length offset H codes with the G43 and G44
codes. Tool 1 had a value of 5.0 for the Zero Calibration field on the Tool Setup screen.
The Tool Length Offset 1 value is –6.0 and the Tool Length Offset 2 value is –7.5.
Example 1
T01 M06
With these offsets, the calibrated tool length will be 5.0. That length is taken
from the Tool Setup screen)

Example 2
T01 M06
H02
At this point, the calibrated tool length will still be 5.0 because no G43 or G44
has been entered.
Example 3
T01 L4.0 M06
G43 H01
At this point, the calibrated tool length is 6.0 because the L value was
superseded by the offset value of 6.0.
Example 4
T01 M06 - sets the tool length to be 5.0
H02 - tool length remains 5.0
G43 - tool length remains 5.0
H02 - sets the tool length to be 7.5

5-Axis Linear Interpolation (G43.4)
The CNC offers two rotary interpolation modes of the tool relative to the Workpiece
Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
• Linearly interpolate the Tool Vector with respect to the Workpiece Coordinate
System between tool positions. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Ensure the tool start point is relatively close to the C-axis centerline
location immediately before activating the G43.4 command.
When executing a Tilt Axis Preference command, the machine may

need to rotate the part up to 180° around the machine singularity
point when moving to the contouring start point and tool orientation.
Refer to Tilt Axis Preference (M200), on page 3 - 179.
If the tool start point is too far away from the C-axis centerline, an
“Axis out of limits” error will occur.
• Linearly interpolate the programmed rotary angle between tool positions.
Format
The 0 and 1 parameters for G43.4 are optional. If you do not choose
a parameter, the control will automatically choose:
• 0 when Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 is used.

• 1 when Axes Angle Input, on page 3 - 172 is used.
G43.4 Q{0, 1} will turn on the 5-axis workpiece-relative linear interpolation.
G43.4 Q0 linearly interpolates the Tool Vector and Tool Tip between NC points with
respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Although G43.4 Q0 will interpolate the Tool Tip and Tool Vector
relative to the Workpiece Coordinate System, the CAM software must
generate properly toleranced tool paths to machine smooth surfaces.
G43.4 Q1 linearly interpolates the Tool Tip between tool positions with respect to the
Workpiece Coordinate System and the rotary angles in the Machine Coordinate System.
Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Tool Radius Offset (G45–G49)
ISNC and Basic NC – the tool used for cutter compensation must be
smaller than or equal to the arc that you have programmed. If the
tool radius is greater than or equal to the arc radius, the
compensated tool path will sweep in the opposite direction of the
programmed arc.
Tool position offset commands increase or decrease the amount of axis movement. Offset
values within the following ranges can be selected for the tool radius offset commands:
mm input inch input

Offset Value 0∼±999.999 mm 0∼±99.999 in.
0∼± 999.999° 0∼±999.999°
G45–48 support existing X or Y axis tool offset programs. However,

to save time, use the automatic Cutter Compensation (G40-G42)
instead.
Tool Radius Offset Increase (G45)

This command increases the specified block’s tool radius offset amount by the value
stored in the offset value memory.
Tool Radius Offset Decrease (G46)

This command decreases the specified block’s movement amount by the value stored in
the offset value memory.
Tool Radius Offset Double Increase (G47)

This command increases the specified block’s movement amount by twice the value
Tool Radius Offset Double Decrease (G48)

This command decreases the specified block’s movement amount by twice the value
Tool Offset Cancel (G49)

This command cancels the offset.
Format
The command format for the tool position offsets is as follows:
GXX X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B____C____ D____

where
A is the Rotary Dimension Around X-axis
B is the Rotary Dimension Around Y-axis
C is the Rotary Dimension Around Z-axis
GXX is an optional Interpolation (Group 1) move command, and D is the offset command.
The number which follows D is an index into the tool offsets table. The offset value is
modal and needs to be specified only once. The offset is applied to all axes specified in
the parameters.
Example
Set tool offset 1 to the desired offset before running the following program using the Tool
Radius Offset commands (G45 through G48):
Industry-Standard NC Part Program 1 Inch

G45_G48.FNC
%
N10 G10 P1 R0.5
N20 G00
N30 G90
N40 M25
N50 T1 M06
N60 Z5.0 X0. Y0.
N70 S2000 M03
N80 Z0.05
N90 G00 Z-0.5 F10.
N200(INNER OUTLINE WITHOUT USING OFFSETS)
N210 G91 X4 Y4
N220 G01 X3
N230 Y1.5
N240 X4
N250 G45 Y-1.5
N260 X3
N130 G03 X1 Y1 I0. J1
N140 G01 Y4
N150 X0
N160 G02 X-2 Y2 I0. J2

N170 G01 Y0
N180 X-3
N190 Y-2.5
N200 X-3
N210 Y2.5
N220 X-3
N230 G03 X-1 Y-1 I0. J-1
N240 G01 Y-2
N250 X1
N260 Y-4
N265 Z5.05
N270 G00 X-4 Y-4
N275 G90 X0 Y0
N280(OUTER OUTLINE USING G45, G46, G47, AND G48)
G45_G48.FNC
N290 G91 G46 X4 Y4 D1

N300 G47 G01 X3 F20.
N305 Y1.5
N307 G48 X4
N308 Y-1.5
N309 G45 X3
N310 G45 G03 X1 Y1 I0. J1
N320 G45 G01 Y4
N330 G46 X0
N340 G46 G02 X-2 Y2 I0. J2
N350 G45 G01 Y0.
N360 G47 X-3
N370 Y-2.5
N380 G48 X-3
N390 Y2.5
N400 G45 X-3
N410 G45 G03 X-1 Y-1 I0. J-1
N420 G45 G01 Y-2
N430 X1
N440 Y-4
N450 G00 G46 X-4 Y-4
N460 G00 Z5.05
N470 M25
N480 M05
N490 M02

Scaling (G50 and G51)
The G51 code is used to scale subsequent move commands by a programmable scale
factor and must be in an independent block.
Scaling is not applicable to the following movement in case of canned Z axis movements.
If scaling results are rounded and units less than 5 are ignored, the move amount may
become zero and may affect cutter movement. Whether the scaling function is effective
or not, it can be set by a parameter for each axis. The scaling function always becomes
effective for the circular radius command R in the G51 mode, regardless of these
parameters.
One or more axes’ scaling can be disabled on the NC Parameters screen. The methods for
specifying the scaling center point and the scaling factor are different with BNC and ISNC.
For BNC, X, Y, and Z are the scaling center points in absolute coordinates. The I, J, and K
codes specify the scale factor for the X, Y, and Z axes. If only I is specified, all axes will be
scaled by that factor. Scaling G51 codes may not be nested.
For ISNC, these two methods can be used to specify scaling parameters:
Method 1: X, Y, or Z present. X, Y, Z define the scaling center point. If I, J, or K are

present, they define the scaling factors. If they are absent and P is present, the P value
defines the scaling factor for all three axes. If P is an integer (no decimal point) the value
is multiplied by the least scaling factor parameter on the NC Parameters screen;
otherwise, the exact P value is used.
Method 2: X, Y, or Z absent. I, J, K define the scaling center point. P provides the

scaling factor if provided for all three axes. If P is an integer (no decimal point) the value
is multiplied by the least scaling factor parameter on the NC Parameters screen;
otherwise, the exact P value is used.
Format
The format of the BNC scaling code is as follows:
G51 X___ Y___ Z___ I___ J___ K___
where
X is the X-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
Y is the Y-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
Z is the Z-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
I is the X-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
J is the Y-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
K is the Z-axis Scaling Center Point or Scaling Factor
The format of the ISNC scaling code is as follows:
Method 1: G51 X___ Y___ Z___ (I____ J_____ K____ or P____)

Method 2: G51 I____ J_____ K____ P____
The smallest unit of scaling is either 0.001 or 0.00001 when an

integer P value is provided. The Least Scaling Factor field on the
Configuration Setup screen is used for setting the smallest unit of
scaling.
If scaling factors are not specified, the default scaling factor 1.0 is
used.
If the scaling center point is not specified, the G51 command point is
used for the scaling center.
Scaling can be enabled/disabled for a particular axis on the
Configuration Setup screen.
Example
Here is a BNC sample using the scaling codes:
Using G91 — G00 X20. Y20.
G51 X40. Y40. I.5
G01 X40.
Y40.
X-40.
Y-40.
G50
The following diagram illustrates the previous code sample:
1 Centerpoint
2 Scaled
3 Original
Figure 3–24. G51 Scaling Code

The Scaling (G51) command must always be canceled with a Cancel
Scaling (G50) command.

Mirror Image (G50.1 and G51.1)
Mirroring (G51.1) and Mirroring Cancel (G50.1) commands are used when the shape of
the workpiece is symmetric to an axis. The whole part can be prepared by programming
a subprogram and using programmable mirror imaging. Ordinary mirror image comes
after the programmed mirror image. The first movement command must be absolute
when in this mode. The following actions occur when the mirror image is applied to only
one axis composing a plane:
• Circular Command: CW and CCW are reversed.

• Cutter Compensation: Right and Left Offset are reversed.
• Coordinate Rotation: Rotation angle becomes reversed.
Format
The formats of the mirroring codes are as follows:
G51.1 X___ or Y___ or Z___
G50.1 [X0] or [Y0] or [Z0]
where
X is the X-axis Dimension
Y is the Y-axis Dimension
Z is the Z-axis Dimension
Specifying a G50.1 with no X, Y, or Z parameter cancels the mirroring code in the X, Y,

and Z axes. The coordinates about which the tool path will be mirrored are in absolute
values. The mirroring codes create the following special conditions:
• For circular commands CW and CCW are reversed.

• Cutter compensation for Right and Left are reversed.
• Mirroring G51.1 codes may not be nested.
G51.1 is used to mirror a tool path about the X, Y, or Z axis while G50.1 is used to cancel
mirroring for the X, Y, or Z axis.
This mode is canceled by G50.1. The first movement command after

a G50.1 command must be an absolute command. This mode must
not be specified in the G68 or G50 mode.

Example
In the illustration below, part #1 (in the upper right corner) is mirrored three times into
part #2, #3 and #4. Note that the direction of the tool path (shown as directional arrows
numbered 1, 2, and 3) on each part changes with each mirroring operation:
A X Axis
B Y Axis
C X Mirror Axis
D Y Mirror Axis
Figure 3–25. BNC G50.1 and G51.1 Mirroring Codes

The following program example mirrors the part as shown in the example from the
previous page:
NC Part Program 1 inch

MIRROR.FNC
%
N10 (FIG 7-94 MIRRORING EXAMPLE)
N42 ( )
N44( MAIN PROGRAM )
N46 ( )
N50 M98 P8888
N60 (2-PART#1 MIRRORING IN X)
N70 G51.1 X1.5
N80 M98 P8888
N90 (3-MIRRORING CONTINUED IN Y)
N100 G51.1 Y1.5
N110 M98 P8888
N120 (CANCEL INITIAL X & Y MIRROR)
N130 G50.1
N140 (4-PART#1 MIRRORED IN Y)
N150 G51.1 Y1.5
N160 M98 P8888
N170 M02
N172 (END OF MAIN PROGRAM)
N180 ( )
N190 (SUB-PROGRAM 8888)
N200 (1-PART#1 UPPER RIGHT)
N210 (TRIANGLE 3,2 3,3 2,3)
N215 ( )
N220 O8888
N230 G00 G90 T01 M06
N240 X0 Y0 Z.05 M03 S800
N250 G00 X3 Y2 Z0
N260 G1 Y3 F50
N270 X2
N280 X3 Y2
N290 M99
E

Local Coordinate System Setting (G52)
While programming in a work coordinate system, it is sometimes more convenient to use
a local coordinate system within the current work coordinate system. The zero point of
each local coordinate system is equal to the X, Y, Z, position of the current work
coordinate system. The local coordinates are relative to the workpiece coordinate system,
including any skew that may be active at that time. A, B, C angles are not rotations with
respect to the workpiece coordinate system, but are rotary axis positions that rotate the
local coordinate system around each rotary axis centerline.
To cancel the local coordinate system, the zero point of the local coordinate system
should be matched with the zero point of the work coordinate system by using the G52
X0 Y0 Z0 command. The local coordinate system can also be canceled by switching to
another work coordinate system (including the current work coordinate system) or to the
machine coordinate system (G53).
The G52 command is most useful in conjunction with subprogram commands. A

subprogram could be used to cut a part and the local coordinate system can be shifted to
cut a number of similar parts.
Format
The format of the local coordinate system command is as follows:
G52 X_____Y_____Z_____A____B____C____
where
X is the X-axis Local Coordinate
Y is the Y-axis Local Coordinate
Z is the Z-axis Local Coordinate
A is the A-axis Local Coordinate
B is the B-axis Local Coordinate
C is the C-axis Local Coordinate

Example
This illustration shows setting a local coordinate system using the G52 command:
1 Machine Zero Point
2 Shift Offsets
3 Local Coordinate System
4 G54
5 G55 through G58
6 G59
Figure 3–26. Setting Local Coordinate System Using G52

The following is a sample program, which uses G52 to set local coordinates:

LOC_COOR.FNC
%
N10 G00 G90
N40 M25
N45 X0 Y0
N50 T1 M06
N60 Z5.
N90 S2000 M03
N100 Z0.05
N110 M98 P2121
(USE LOCAL COORD SYSTEM)
N240 G52 X-1.5 Y-1.5
N320 G65 P2121
N380 G52 X1.5 Y-1.5
N390 M98 P2121
N430 G52 X0 Y-3
N440 M98 P2121
N430 Z5.
N1170 M25
N1190 M05
N1200 M02
O2121
N500 X1
N510 Y1
N520 X0
N530 Y0
M99

Machine Coordinates (G53)
This Machine Coordinates (G53) command moves the tool to the X, Y, Z, A, B, C machine
coordinate position at rapid traverse. This command is only effective in the block in which
it is specified and in Absolute mode (G90). The system reverts to the last commanded
work coordinate system.
If a local coordinate (G52) is used before a machine coordinate (G53) is commanded, the
local coordinate is canceled when the system goes back to the last commanded
coordinate system. Reinstate the local coordinate system with another G52.
Format
The format of the machine coordinates command is as follows:
G53 X____Y____Z____ A ____ B ____C____
where
X is the X-axis Machine Coordinate
Y is the Y-axis Machine Coordinate
Z is the Z-axis Machine Coordinate
A is the A-axis Machine Coordinate
B is the B-axis Machine Coordinate
C is the C-axis Machine Coordinate
Example
Before running this sample program, set the shift offsets to X0 Y0 Z0 and set part zero to
X2.0 Y3.0 and Z1.0.
%
G00 G90
M25
X0 Y0
T1 M06
Z5.
S2000 M03
Z0.05
G01 X1 F30.
Y1
X0
Y0
(USE MACHINE COORD SYSTEM)
G01 G53 X0
G53 X1 F30.
G53 Y1

G53 X0
G53 Y0
G53 G00 Z5.
M25 M05
M02
E
When running a program on the control, do not use negative shift
offsets with G28 or G53. An error message will occur since the
negative machine positions cannot be implemented.

Multiple Work Coordinate Systems (G54–G59)
These modal commands select the work coordinate systems 1–6. The work coordinate
systems are affected by the work offsets, the shift offset, and the G92 (Set Part Zero)
command. Coordinate system 1 is the same as the part setup and it is the default
coordinate system. Coordinate systems 1–6 are established by manually entering work
offset values for G55–G59 on the Work Offset screen or with the G10 command.
Use the G10 command to set tool offsets, enter tool wear data, and change work
coordinate systems, and use the G92 command to set part zero. All six work coordinate
systems can be moved an equal distance and direction by using the G92 command.
Format
The format of the multiple work coordinates command is as follows:
G54 (Select work coordinate system 1)
Example
When in the NC mode, the Part Setup screen has the Work Offsets (F1) softkey to display
up to six work coordinates (G54–G59) and a set of shift offset values. As shown below,
these codes are used to set multiple part zeroes for multiple parts fixtured to the table
and milled consecutively using the same part program.
1 Machine Zero
2 Part Zero
Figure 3–27. Work Offset G Codes for Multiple Parts

The coordinates defining G54 are the part zero coordinates for the original part defined
on the Part Setup screen. Set the X, Y, and Z values for the G54 to G59 codes. These
work offsets are stored in memory, but not with the part program.
The G54 work offsets are the same registers as those in the Part Setup screen for Part
Zero X, Y, and offset Z. Editing G54 work offsets for multiple coordinate systems updates
the part setup for X, Y, and Z on the Part Setup screen.
Aux Work Coordinate Systems (G54.1)

There are 93 additional X, Y, Z, and optional Rotary A and B work offsets available in NC
programming. To access any of these offsets call G code G54.1 Pn, where n is 1 thru 93.
For example, to change to auxiliary work offset 46, call G54.1 P46 in the NC program.
To update work offset values, use data setting G code G10 L20 Pn to set the Auxiliary
work offsets values. For example, to update work offset 46 value call G10 L20 P46
X12.5 Y3.0 Z-0.5
Precision Cornering On (G61) and Off (G64)

Precision cornering allows non-tangent blocks to be milled with precise corners,
regardless of programmed feedrate.
Precision cornering works differently on machines that have the

UltiPro II option installed. Please use the tables below to determine
how precision cornering will operate on your machine.
The NC Precision Cornering codes work in the following manner in standard Hurco
machines. If you have the UltiPro II option installed, refer to the Precision Cornering with
UltiPro II Option table.
Code Action
Causes the axes to decelerate to zero velocity at the end of a block, if the
blocks are not tangent. Tangency is defined as an angle of 5° or less between
G61 two consecutive blocks.
If the angle is greater than 5°, the system stops and then accelerates to the
programmed feedrate in the next block.
G64 two consecutive blocks.
(default) If the angle is greater than 44°, the system stops and then accelerates to the
programmed feedrate in the next block. The first line is marked as a stop when
complete.
Table 3–7. Standard Precision Cornering

The NC Precision Cornering codes work in the following manner in Hurco machines that
have the UltiPro II option installed. If you do not have the UltiPro II option installed,
please refer to the Standard Precision Cornering table.
Code Action
two consecutive blocks.
G61
If the angle is greater than 44°, the system stops and then accelerates to the
programmed feedrate in the next block. The first line is marked as a stop when
complete.
Causes the axes to traverse all blocks at a constant feedrate and blends for
G64
constant surface finish with no regard to tangency. The first line is not marked
(default)
as a stop when complete.
Table 3–8. Precision Cornering with UltiPro II Option

Special Program Support
Rotation (G68 and G69)
The Coordinate Rotation (G68) command turns on coordinate system rotation, and the
Coordinate Rotation Cancel (G69) command turns off coordinate system rotation.
Format
The G68 code uses this format to command rotation:
G68 (XY___ or XZ ___ or YZ___) R___
When the G17 plane is used, X and Y addresses are used in the format to describe the
center point. When G18 is used, X and Z describe the center point. If the plane is defined
using G19, the Y and Z addresses define the center point.
R specifies the angle of rotation. A positive R value indicates a CCW direction, and a
negative R value indicates a CW direction. When the coordinate values of rotation center
are omitted, the current position is used as the center point.
The range of R depends on whether BNC or ISNC is selected and whether an integer or
decimal value is specified. Here are the R ranges for each NC type:
BNC: R has a range of -360.0 to +360.0, whether an integer or real number is

used.
ISNC: Units of R have a value of 0.001° when R is an integer.
R has a range of -360,000 ≤ R ≤ 360,000 when R is an integer value.
R has a range of -360.0 to +360.0 when R is a real number.
Rotation is canceled with a G69. Do not use G17, G18, or G19 while in the G68 mode.
Use G69 to disable the G68 mode, change the plane, and then go back to the G68 mode.
G68 codes may not be nested.

Example
This program uses the rotation codes:
ISNC Part Program 1 Inch

G68.FNC
%
(USING REAL NUMBER WITH G68)
T1 M06
G68 X0 Y0 R45
Z5.05
G01 Z-0.5 F10.
G91 X1.0
Y2.0
X-1.0
Y-2.0
(CANCEL ROTATION)
G69
(USING INTEGER NUMBER WITH G68)
G68 X0 Y0 R45000
X1.0
Y2.0
X-1.0
Y-2.0
(CANCEL ROTATION)
G69
M05
M02

Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2) and
Local Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.3)
The NC Transform Plane block is not a motion block; it does not
execute motion.
G68.2
G68.2 specifies global rotations for the A, B, and C angles in the NC Transform Plane
block. G69 cancels G68.2.
The rotation sequence will be in the order of A, followed by B, followed by C, where all
rotations are around the X, Y, and Z axes of the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to
G68.3
G68.3 specifies local rotations for the A, B, and C angles in the NC Transform Plane block.
G69 cancels G68.3.
The rotation sequence will be in the order of A, followed by B, followed by C, where all
rotations are around the X, Y, and Z axes of the rotating Transform Plane Coordinate
System.
• Rotation of the A angle will be around the workpiece’s X-axis.

• Rotation of the B angle will be around the Y-axis of the rotating Transform
Plane Coordinate System that has been rotated by the A-angle.
• Rotation of the C angle will be around the Z-axis of the Transform Plane
Coordinate System that has been rotated by the A-angle and B-angle
rotations.
Format
The G68.2 code uses this format to command rotation of the NC Transform Plane:
G68.2 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_
where

The G68.3 code uses this format to command rotation of the NC Transform Plane:
G68.3 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_
where
All subsequent tool positions (X, Y, Z positions, I, J, K Tool Vectors, and U, V, W Surface
Normal Vectors) are specified with respect to NC Transform Plane, except program rotary
angles (i.e., B and C angles).
Rotary moves are permitted while NC Transform Plane is active.
NC Transform Planes can be stacked and the coordinates are relative

to the last stacked coordinate system.
NC Hole cycles are permitted only if the Tool Vector is aligned with
the Z-direction of the Transform Plane.
M128 (Tool Centerpoint Management) cannot be used with G68.2 or

G68.3.
Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69)

Coordinate System Rotation Cancel (G69) cancels the following rotation commands:
• Coordinate Rotation (G68)

• Global Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.2)
• Local Rotation NC Transform Plane (G68.3)

Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71)
Before setting the coordinate system at the beginning of the program, the units of
measure must be specified in an independent block. A part program may switch between
English and Metric modes as long as the format of the dimensions is correct for the
chosen mode.
The Imperial Units of Measure code (BNC G70 signals the system that the dimensions are
in inches).
BNC G70 is canceled by G71.
The Metric Units of Measure code (BNC G71signals the system that the dimensions are
metric units.
BNC G71 is canceled by G70.
Format
These are the command formats for the inch/metric conversion commands:
BNC:
G70: Inch command
G71: Metric command
The BNC G70 and G71 codes do not affect the units of measure used
in the graphics and machine status display screens. The displays are
controlled by the units selected when entering NC editing.

Peck Drilling (G73)
For Peck Drilling, the spindle moves down in incremental steps and retracts to the
position set in the Pecking Retract Clearance field on the General 1 Parameters screen.
After each peck, the drill is retracted by the Peck Clearance Plane value set on the
General 1 Parameters screen. These screens are described in the Getting Started with
WinMax Mill manual.
Spindle positioning is performed on the XY plane and hole machining is performed on the
Z axis. These parameters are stored as modal values; therefore, if a parameter value
does not change for subsequent drilling commands, those commands do not have to
contain the parameter.
Format
The command format for the Peck Drilling canned cycle is as follows:
G73 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, F____, [K____ or L____]
where
R is the Return Level
Q is the Peck Depth
F is the Feedrate
K or L is the number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.
Range = 1 through 6; Default = 1.
If L=0, drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.
The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is

determined by the previous block’s position from the first canned cycle’s
position.
K and L parameters function the same.

Example
The diagram below illustrates tool movement for the G73 command:
1 Part
2 Z Start (Basic); Return Point (Industry Standard)
3 Z Bottom
4 Peck Depth
5 NC Parameter Peck Clearance Distance
Figure 3–28. Tool Movement for the Peck Drilling Cycle (G73)

Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74)
During the Left-Handed Tapping Cycle the spindle rotates CCW to the bottom of the hole.
Then the spindle stops, an optional dwell is performed, the spindle rotates CW, and left-
handed tapping is performed.
The positioning for this cycle is performed on the XY plane and hole machining is
performed on the Z axis. During left-handed tapping, the feedrate override is ignored and
the cycle does not stop until the end of the return operation, even if a feed hold is
applied.
If a Start Spindle Clockwise (M3) code is in effect, the spindle direction will be reversed
prior to executing a G74 cycle. Rigid Tapping is performed when an Enable Rigid Tapping
(ISNC M29) code is used in a block previous to the G74 block.
Format
The command format for the Left-Handed Tapping cycle is as follows:
G74 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [Q____,]

[K____, or L____].
where
P is the Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate
Q is the Peck Depth
K or L is the Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.
If L = 0 drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.

position.

Z is the distance from the R Point (in Return to R Point in Canned
Cycle [G99] mode) to the Z Bottom or the distance from the Initial
Point (in Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle [G98] mode) to the Z
Bottom.
Q is the optional peck depth. If Q equals 0.0, pecking is not

performed. Q used for G74 with M29 applies only to rigid tapping.
Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G74)

The Single-Quadrant Circular Interpolation Mode (G74) causes the system to interpolate
arcs and helices in a single quadrant only. The arc or helix must remain within the
quadrant in which it started (the arc or helix cannot be larger than 90°). Since the arc
cannot cross quadrants, the center point is determined by looking toward the center of
the arc from the start point. I, J, and K are unsigned incremental distances from the arc
start point to the center of the arc.
Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation (BNC G75)

The Multi-Quadrant Circular Interpolation Mode (G75) is the default and causes the
system to interpolate an arc or helix across all quadrants. The arc or helix can start and
end in any quadrant. An arc or helix may be up to 360° in this mode. The center point
data can be represented in two different ways based on the current machine dimension
mode (G90 and G91).

Bore Orient (G76)
The Bore Orient cycle provides a feed-in, stop-feed, orient spindle, move tool away from
part surface, rapid-out, and spindle restart sequence suitable for boring operations when
the tool needs to be moved away from the part surface before retracting out of the hole.
If the default Bore Orient Retract vector is not suitable, I and J words may be used to
specify a new retract position.
A value needs to be entered in the Bore Orient Retract field on the Holes Parameters
screen. That value specifies the distance the X and Y axes travel to retract the tool from
the part surface during the Bore Orient cycle.
A spindle oriented stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and the spindle retracts
after shifting in the direction opposite to the cutter direction. High precision and efficient
boring is performed without scratching the workpiece surface.
The Bore Orient G86 mode continues to be supported to provide

compatibility with existing BNC programs.
The bore orient cycle moves the axes in this manner:
1. The spindle should already be switched on.

2. The spindle positions the tool at the rapid speed to the XY location, if
necessary.
3. The spindle moves down at the specified feedrate to the Z value.
4. The spindle stops and orients.
5. The spindle moves from the XY location to the IJ position or to the Bore Orient
Retract distance.
6. The system rapidly moves Z to the initial Z location.
This cycle applies only to machines that have an electronic or
mechanical orient feature (refer to the machine tool owner’s
manual).
Format
The format of the Bore Orient cycle is as follows:
G76 X____, Y____, Z____, [I_____, J_____, or Q____] R____, P____, F____,
[K____, or L____]
where
I is the X-axis Incremental Bore Shift
J is the Y-axis Incremental Bore Shift
Q is the Incremental Bore Shift (can be used to shift XY instead of using IJ)

P is the Subprogram Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate

position.
I and J may also be used instead of Q to specify an incremental bore

shift value and direction. If Q is used, the Q value must be a positive
number; otherwise, an error message will occur.
For BNC, Q and I, J are optional to maintain compatibility with older

programs. A default Z value of 1.0 will be used for BNC if a Q word is
not contained in the same block with the G86 command. Q is not
modal for BNC.
The Q value is modal. Since Q is used as the cut-in value for G73 and
G83, use care when specifying Q.
Example
The diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Bore Orient cycle:
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
A Stop and Orient Spindle
B Rapid Feed
C Feedrate
D Move Tool
Figure 3–29. Tool Movement for the Bore Orient Cycle (G76)

Canned Cycle Cancel (G80)
Canned Cycle Cancel is a machine default mode and cancels all canned cycles. When a
cycle is canceled using a G80, program execution returns to the One-Shot (G00, G01,
G02, or G03) mode that was in effect before the canned cycle was executed. Use either
G00, G01, G02, or G03 to cancel a canned cycle.
The G80 cycle also cancels the R and Z Points. That is, R = 0 and Z = 0 for the
incremental command. Other drilling data are also canceled.
Drill, Spot Boring (G81)

The Drill, Spot Boring cycle is a feed-in, rapid-out sequence. The axes move in this
manner with the spindle switched On:
1. Ensure that the initial Z location is above Z bottom and above any
obstructions.
2. The tool is positioned at the Initial Z location and moves at the rapid speed to
XY if it is in the block.
3. The spindle drills down to Z Bottom at the specified feedrate.
4. The spindle moves up to Z Start at the rapid speed.
Format
The command format for Drill cycle is as follows:
G81 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
F is the Feedrate

position.

Example
This is a sample BNC Drilling cycle:
G81 Z1.0000 (inches) G90 or G91
Here is a sample ISNC Drilling cycle and a tool movement diagram:
G81 Z-1.0000 (inches) in G91 mode
2 Z Bottom
Figure 3–30. Tool Movement for the Spot Boring Cycle (G81)

Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring (G82)
The Drill with Dwell, Counter Boring cycle provides a feed-in, dwell, and rapid-out
sequence.
Format
The command format for the Drill with Dwell cycle, or Counter Boring, is as follows:
G82 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
P is the Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate

position.
Example
This diagram illustrates tool movement for the Counter Boring cycle:

1 Part
3 Z Bottom Dwell Point
Figure 3–31. Tool Movement for the Counter Boring Cycle (G82)
Deep Hole Drilling (G83)

The Deep Hole Drilling cycle provides a sequence of feed-in and rapid-out movements
until the specified hole depth is reached.
For BNC, each feed-in moves the distance of the peck depth. The tool will rapid back to
the Z Start position.
For ISNC the tool will rapid out to the Return point.
Next the tool will rapid down until it reaches the starting point for the next peck (for
either BNC or ISNC). The starting point is an incremental distance above the last peck,
defined on the Holes Parameter screen as the Peck Clearance Distance.
BNC has three Z values: Z1, Z2, and Z3. They may be programmed in this canned cycle
and are unsigned incremental distances. There is a rapid traverse back to R at the end of
each pecking cycle and then the tool feed begins above where the tool stopped during the
last pecking cycle.

Z1 is the total depth for the hole.
Z2 is the depth of the first peck.
Z3 is the depth for each of the remaining pecks.
Z2 and Z3 must be smaller than Z1.
If Z2 and Z3 are not programmed, this canned cycle functions like

G81.
If Z3 is not programmed, Z2 is the depth for each peck. The last

peck for the hole is the programmed peck depth or the remaining
distance from the last peck to the bottom of the hole, whichever is
smaller.
If Z1, Z2, and Z3 do not change between G83 blocks, they need not
be reprogrammed. Use the Precision Cornering codes (G61 and G64)
to control the Z axis deceleration between pecks.

Format
The command formats for the Deep Hole Drilling cycle are as follows:
BNC: G83 X____,Y____, Z____, [Z____,] [Z____,] R____,

F____,[K____, or L____]
where
F is the Feedrate

position.
For BNC, the first Z is the distance from Z Start to Z Bottom. The
second Z is the first cut-in depth. The optional third Z is the depth of
the remaining pecks. The Zs are always positive. All of the peck
depths will be the same if the third Z is left out.
For BNC, R is always positive and is an incremental distance from the

initial point to point R.
ISNC: G83 X____,Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, F____,

[K____, or L____]
where
Q is the Peck Depth
F is the Feedrate


position.
ISNC has one Z parameter which represents the location of Z

Bottom.
Example
The diagram below illustrates tool movement for the G83 code:
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
+ Up to 3 Peck Depths Can be Programmed
* NC Parameter Peck Clearance Distance
Figure 3–32. Tool Movement for the Deep Hole Drilling Cycle (G83)

Tapping (G84)
The Tapping cycle provides a tap sequence. The current feedrate (F) and spindle speed
(S) are used. The spindle accelerates to the defined speed and the Z axis plunges at the
defined feedrate. At the bottom of the hole, the spindle and Z axis decelerate in
coordination to a stop. They then reverse directions and accelerate in coordination to the
programmed feed and speed. Once back to the original Z level, the spindle shuts off and
reverses back to the original direction in preparation for the next operation.
For BNC, G84 is used for right- and left-handed tapping. Start Spindle Clockwise (M3) or
Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M4) commands determine whether right- or left-handed
tapping is performed.
For ISNC, G84 performs right-handed tapping only. A Start Spindle Counterclockwise
(M4) command causes the system to reverse the spindle direction at the start of the
cycle to ensure that right-handed tapping is performed.
Use the following formula to calculate the correct feed and speed for the tap cycle:
Feedrate:
Feed in inches or mm per minute = Spindle RPM / threads per inches or mm
Spindle RPM:
Spindle RPM = Feed in inches (mm) per minute × threads per inch (mm)
When an M3/M4 command is detected in a program and the current

tool in the spindle is defined as a tapping tool in tool setup, the
system looks 10 blocks ahead for another tap cycle, a G01/G02/G03
code, or a canned cycle other than a tap. If any cutting move (G01,
G02, G03, or any canned cycle other than a tap) is found within 10
moves or 10 rapid moves are found, the spindle is turned on as
usual. If a G84 is found and all moves from the M3/M4 are rapid
moves, the spindle is not turned on, and the rapid moves will be
executed with the spindle off.
The spindle rotates clockwise to the bottom of the hole. At the

bottom of the hole, the spindle is reversed and rotates
counterclockwise and tapping is performed. During the tapping, the
feedrate override is ignored and the cycle does not stop until the end
of the return operation, even if a feed hold is applied.
For ISNC, a Rigid Tap Enable (M29) command initiates rigid tapping
instead of regular tapping. Rigid Tap is disabled with a G00, G01,
G02, G03, or G80 command. The programmed feedrate can be
overridden for rigid tapping.

Format
The command format for the Tapping cycle is as follows:
G84X____, Y____, Z ____, R ____, P____, F ____, [Q____,] [K____, or L____]
where
P is the Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate
Q is the Canned Cycle Bore Shift, Peck Depth

position.
P is used only with ISNC for the Tapping cycle. P specifies a dwell
period at the bottom of the hole and after leaving the hole.
Q, the optional peck depth, is only used with ISNC for the Tapping
cycle. If Q equals 0.0, pecking is not performed. M29 is required with
Peck for Rigid Tapping.

Example
The diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Tapping cycle (G84):
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
Spindle Stop; Dwell
Spindle Reverse
Figure 3–33. Tool Movement for the Tapping Cycle (G84)

Boring (G85)
The Boring cycle provides a feed-in and feed-out sequence suitable for boring.
The boring cycle moves the axes in this manner:
1. The spindle should already be switched on using an M3 code.

2. The tool is positioned over the hole location.
3. At the G85, the spindle feeds to Z Bottom as specified.
4. At Z Bottom, the spindle feeds to the Z Start position.
It is possible to have an XY position move with the G85 code.
Format
The command format of the Boring cycle is as follows:
G85 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
F is the Feedrate

position.

Example
The diagram below illustrates tool movement for the Boring cycle (G85):
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
Figure 3–34. Tool Movement for the Boring Cycle (G85)

Bore Rapid Out Cycle (ISNC G86)
The ISNC Bore Rapid Out canned cycle is a feed-in, rapid-out sequence. The spindle stops
at the bottom of the hole and is retracted at the rapid traverse rate.
The Bore Rapid Out canned cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle
switched on:
1. The tool is positioned at the Initial Z location and moves at the rapid speed to
XY if it is in the block.
2. The spindle bores down to Z Bottom at the specified feedrate.
3. The spindle turns off.
4. The spindle moves up to Z Start at the rapid speed.
5. The spindle turns on.
Format
The command format for the Bore Rapid Out cycle is as follows:
G86 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
F is the Feedrate

position.

Example
This diagram illustrates tool movement for the Bore Rapid Out cycle:
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
Spindle Stop
Figure 3–35. Tool Movement for the Bore Rapid Out Cycle (G86)

Chip Breaker (BNC G87)
The Chip Breaker cycle provides drilling with a dwell every 0.050" (1.27 mm) to break off
the chip. The dwell time is automatically calculated so the spindle revolves two times to
break the chip. After the dwell, the system feeds another 0.050" (1.27 mm) and again
breaks the chip until the bottom of the hole is reached. This cycle breaks the chip without
retracting the tool entirely from the hole as with the Deep Hole Drilling cycle (G83). Use
the Precision Cornering codes (G61 and G64) to control the Z axis deceleration between
dwells.
The Chip Breaker cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle switched on:
1. The tool is positioned at the rapid speed to XY if necessary.

2. The spindle moves down 0.05" at the feedrate.
3. The spindle dwells at that location for two rotations.
4. The spindle moves down another 0.05" at the feedrate.
5. This is repeated until the Z depth is reached.
6. The spindle moves at the rapid speed to the initial Z location.
Format
The format of the Chip Breaker cycle is as follows:
G87 X___ Y___ Z___ F____, [K____, or L____]
where
F is the Feedrate

position.

Back Boring (ISNC G87)
The Back Boring cycle provides a boring sequence in the positive Z direction. Boring is
performed from the specified R level to the Z level. Positioning is performed on the XY
plane and hole machining is performed on the Z axis.
Format
The command format for the back boring cycle is as follows:
G87 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, Q____, I_____, J_____, P____,

F____, [K____, or L____]
where
R is the Z Depth Position Prior to Bore Shift Movement
Q is the Incremental Bore Shift
P is the Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate

position.
R is used to specify the depth to which the bore moves before

shifting over Q or IJ and moving up to the Z level.
Q is used to store an incremental bore shift value. I and J may also

be used instead of Q to specify an incremental bore shift value. I and
J can be used to specify a distance and direction. Q can only specify
distance; the direction is pre-defined by machine parameters.

ISNC G87 Example
The drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Back Boring cycle (ISNC G87):
2 R Point
1 Spindle Stop, Orient, and Move A Stop and Orient Spindle
2 Feed Down to R Point B Repid Feed
3 Spindle Stop, Spindle Move C Feedrate
4 Spindle Start D Move Tool
5 Feed Up to Z Bottom
6 Dwell Point
7 Spindle Stop, Orient, and Move
8 Rapid Move
9 Spindle Move
Figure 3–36. Tool Movement for the Back Boring Cycle (ISNC G87)

Rigid Tapping (BNC G88; ISNC G84.2; ISNC G84.3)
Rigid tapping allows the same hole to be tapped repeatedly with precision. The rigid
tapping feature increases accuracy by synchronizing the rotation of the spindle with the
feed of the Z axis. ISNC G84.2 is used for right-handed tapping, and ISNC G84.3 is used
for left-handed tapping. M29 is required for Rigid Tapping.
The format of the rigid tapping cycle is as follows:
M29
G88X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____

[K____, or L____]
or
M29
G84.2X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____

[K____, or L____]
or
M29
G84.3X____, Y____, Z____, [Q____], R____, F____, P____

[K____, or L____]
where
Q is the Peck Depth
F is the Feedrate
P is the Dwell Time

position.

The optional Q parameter defines the peck depth.
Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out and Dwell (ISNC G88)
With this canned cycle, a dwell is performed at the bottom of the hole and the system
goes into Interrupt mode. The spindle can then be retracted manually using the jog
controls. When the desired manual position is reached, follow these steps:
1. Press the console Auto button (in Machine Mode group).

2. The Start button starts flashing and the “Press Start Button” message displays.
3. Press the Start button.
4. The program finishes the canned cycle and then continues with the rest of the
program.
Format
The command format for the Boring With Manual Feed Out and Dwell canned cycle is as
follows:
G88 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, I_____, J_____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
P is the Dwell Time
F is the Feedrate
The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is determined

by the previous block’s position from the first canned cycle’s position.
Example
The drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Canned Boring with Manual Feed Out

and Dwell cycle (ISNC G88):
1 Part
3 Z Bottom
Spindle Stop after Dwell
4 Resume Program Execution
A Rapid Feed
B Manual Retract
C Feedrate
Figure 3–37. Tool Movement for ISNC G88 Cycle

Bore with Dwell (G89)
The Bore with Dwell cycle provides a feed-in, dwell, and feed-out sequence.
The Bore with Dwell cycle moves the axes in this manner with the spindle switched on:
1. The tool positions at the rapid speed to XY position, if necessary.

2. The spindle moves down at the feedrate to Z Bottom.
3. The spindle stays at the Z Bottom position for the specified dwell time.
4. The spindle moves Z up to Z Start at the rapid speed.
Format
The command format for the Bore with Dwell cycle is as follows:
G89 X____, Y____, Z____, R____, P____, F____, [K____, or L____]
where
R is the Rotation Angle, Return Level, Circular Interpolation
P is the Subprogram Number, Dwell Time, Scaling Factor
F is the Feedrate

position.

Example
The drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Bore with Dwell cycle (G89):
1 Part
Figure 3–38. Tool Movement for the Bore with Dwell Cycle (G89)

Absolute and Incremental (G90, G91)
The Absolute Machining Mode (G90) is the default and signals the system that the
programmed dimensions are relative to part zero. Once programmed, this default stays in
effect until canceled with a G91.
The Incremental Machining Mode (G91) signals the system that all programmed
dimensions are incremental distances from the position in the previous block. Once
programmed, this mode stays in effect until canceled with a G90.
If Absolute Machining Mode (G90) is activated, the center points I, J, and K are absolute
Cartesian (rectangular) coordinates from part zero in BNC, but are incremental for ISNC.
If Incremental Machining Mode (G91) is activated, the center points I, J, and K are signed
incremental distances from the arc start point for both BNC and ISNC. If I, J, or K is
missing on an ISNC block, a zero is assumed.
Format
This is the command format for each position command:
Absolute command:
G90 X_____Y_____Z_____
Incremental command:
G91 X_____Y_____Z_____
where
Example
A machine is resting at the programmed part zero location, and the following blocks are
executed in inches:
N2 G01 X1.0 Y1.0 F10.0
N4 X1.0 Y1.5
If the system is in Absolute Machining mode (G90), the N2 block causes the axes to travel
at a 45° angle to the 1.0" position in X and 1.0" in Y. As a result of the N4 block, the
machine remains at the 1.0" position in X and Y moves to the 1.5" position.
If the system is in Incremental Machining mode (G91), the N2 block causes the axes to
travel at a 45° angle to the 1.0" position in X and the 1.0" position in Y—just as before.
But, as a result of the N4 block, X continues to move 1.0" to the 2.0" position; Y moves
1.5" to the 2.5" position.

The diagram below illustrates absolute and incremental axis moves.
A Absolute
B Incremental
Figure 3–39. Differences Between Absolute and Incremental

Coordinate System Setting
This section explains the commands used for these coordinate system settings: part zero,
machine coordinates, multiple work coordinates, local coordinates, polar coordinates, and
automatic return to and from reference point.
Part Zero Setting (G92)

This command establishes the work coordinate system so that a certain point of the tool,
for example the tool tip, becomes X, Y, Z, A, B, C in the established work coordinate
system. The distance shifted with this command is added to all subsequent work
coordinate system zero point offset values; all work coordinate systems move by the
same distance. The G92 command can be used in any work coordinate system (G54–
G59).
Cancel Scaling (G50) must be active before selecting G92.
A G92 command makes the dimensions included in the block the new part relative
position for the current machine location. The new part zero location is calculated from
the current location of the axes and the dimensions included in the G92 block.
The part zero location is only altered for dimensions programmed in the G92 block. This
makes it possible to alter the part zero locations for certain axes without affecting the
others.
G92 is invalid while cutter compensation is on.
Format
This is the format of the setting part zero command:
G92 X_____Y_____Z_____A_____B_____C____
where
Example
Set Part Zero (G92) establishes new part relative coordinates at the current axis
positions. For example, if the machine is positioned at part relative X2.0 and Y2.0, the
block G92 X0.0 Y0.0 would make the current X and Y axis part relative positions equal
0.0. The machine axes will not move, but the status screen changes to reflect the new
part zero reference point(s). Any programmed coordinates after the G92 block are

referenced to the new part zero location(s).
Use the G92 code for repeating parts of a program at another location. The following is a
sample of the codes used in incremental mode. Refer to the diagram below for an
illustration of these codes.

PARTZERO.FNC
%
N10 G0 X20. Y20.
N12 X40.0
N14 Y40.0
N16 X20.0
N18 Y20.0
N20 X70.
N22 G92 X0. ⇐ Set new part zero
N24 X20.0
N26 Y40.0
N28 X0.0
N30 Y20.0
M02
Figure 3–40. Set Part Zero (G92)

Feed Functions
The Feedrate (F words) value establishes the non-rapid move feedrate. It remains active
for all non-rapid moves until another Feedrate code is entered.
For Inch units in Basic NC, the actual feedrate is dependent on the usage of a decimal
point. If no decimal point, the actual feedrate is one-tenth of the programmed feedrate
(F30 equates to 3 inches per minute). If a decimal point is specified then the actual
feedrate will be the programmed feedrate (F30.0 is 30 inches per minute). For metric
units in Basic NC, the actual feedrate is the same as the programmed feedrate regardless
of a decimal point (F75 and F75.0 are both 75 millimeters per minute).
The Feedrate code is active before the other commands in the program block are
executed. G94, Feed per Minute Feedrate, is the default setting unless otherwise specified.
Inverse Time Feedrate (G93) and Feed Per Minute Feedrate

(G94)
The default setting for Feedrate is G94 for Feed per Minute Feedrate, either inches per
minute or millimeters per minute. G93 cancels G94 and G94 cancels G93.
Inverse Time (G93) can be specified to change the feedrate as a function of time and
distance. If the time is unchanged but the distance changes then the actual feedrate will
change proportionally. The format for Inverse Time is F6.3 (maximum of six digits before
the decimal point and maximum of three digits after the decimal point) and the units are
minutes. Feedrates of up to 999999.999 can be programmed using G93. The time is
computed by dividing one by the Inverse Time programmed. The actual feedrate is the
distance divided by the time.
The feedrate must be specified for every move.
If the inverse time value falls outside the contouring limits of the
machine, the control will instead use the minimum or maximum
value.
Example
G93 G1 X5.0 F10.0
Y7.0 F10.0
Time is 1/10.0min = 0.1min
Actual Feedrate for first line is 5.0in/0.1min = 50ipm.
Actual Feedrate for second line is 7.0in/0.1min = 70ipm.

Format
G93 X____ Y____ Z____ A____ C____ F____ (activate Inverse Time)
X ____Y____ Z____ A____ C____ F____
...
G94 X____ Y____ Z____ F____ (cancel Inverse Time and enable Feed Per Minute
feedrate)
where
F is the Feedrate
Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) (preliminary)

The Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) command maintains the tool tip feedrate
regardless of tool or part linear or rotary motion. This command works identically for 4-
and 5-axis simultaneous motion, transitions between 4- and 5-axis simultaneous motion,
linear to rotary moves, combined rotary to linear moves, or rotary-only moves.
G94.1 computes feedrate changes in real time as the tool approaches and moves away
from a centerline of rotation, even if this happens during the execution of a single NC
block. For example, on a 4-axis machine with Rotary A configuration, if the tool tip starts
away from the rotary centerline and the NC block commands only the Y-axis to move
such that the tool tip moves over and past the A centerline of rotation while rotating the
A-axis, the machine will start with slower axes movement, then speed up to higher A-
and Y-axes feedrates when the tool tip is just above the centerline of rotation. It will then
slow down as it moves away from the centerline. This happens because the radial
distance of the tool tip is shortest when the tool is just above the centerline, so the axes
will have to move more quickly to maintain the feedrate.
Absolute Tool Length mode is the recommended tool calibration

mode for use with the G94.1 command. If Z calibration mode is
used, the Part Setup Offset Z, Z Table Offset, Tool Z calibration, and
Rotary and Tilt axes centerline locations must be set. See “Tool
Calibration Modes” in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.
G94.1 stays on until it is turned off with a G93 or G94.

Example
G21
G94.1
G1A90F1000
When executed on a 4 axis machine with Rotary A configuration, this example will result
in a 90 degree arc cut on the cylinder circumference. The move will maintain a tool tip
velocity with respect to the rotating part of 1000mm/min.

Canned Cycle Descriptions
Canned cycle descriptions, formats, and examples follow.
Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycles (G98)

Position the Z axis to the initial level. The initial level is the last position of the Z axis
before the canned cycle is started. The Z axis rapids or feeds to the Z Retract Clearance
level, based on the canned cycle being performed. Z Start in the canned cycle description
is then equal to the initial point.
Format
G98 (no parameters follow)
Example
1 Initial Level
2 Retract Level
Figure 3–41. Return to R Plane Example

Sample NC Part Program Using G98
Below is a program example using G98:
%
N1 G90 G80 G40 G21
N2 T1M6
N3 G43 H1 S3000 M3
N4 Z78.0 M8
N5 F1270.0
N6 G99 G81 X15 Y15 R28.0 Z-10.0
N7 Y35.0
N8 X60
N9 G98 Y15.0
N10 G99 X140.0
N11 Y35.0
N12 X185.0
N13 G98 Y15
N14 G80
N15 G0 G91 M28 Z0 M5 M9
E

Return to R Level in Canned Cycles (G99)
The Return to R Level in Canned Cycles command positions the Z axis to a return (R)
level. The Z axis rapids or feeds to the return level between locations during canned
cycles. Z Start in the canned cycle descriptions is then equal to the Return Point. Even
when the canned cycle is performed in G99 mode, the initial level remains unchanged.
For BNC, specify an R with the G99.
For ISNC, the modal value of R is used.
Format
The format of this code is as follows:
G99 R___
For BNC, the R parameter is an incremental distance from the initial

Z level. Use this code to reduce the returned distance between
locations during canned cycles.
For ISNC, the R parameter is an absolute Z level in G90 mode and an

incremental negative Z distance in G91 mode.
Example
The drawing below illustrates tool movement for the Return to R Level in Canned cycles
(G99) command:
1 Part
2 Initial Point
3 Z Bottom
4 Return Point (Industry Standard); Z Start (Basic)
Figure 3–42. Tool Movement for the G99 Cycle

Special Functions
Motoman Robot Control (G140)
The G140 code provides the ability to control a Motoman robot. The robot is physically
connected to WinMax via ethernet (either direct or over a network). RS-232 (serial)
connections are not supported.
This feature requires a USB dongle that enables the robot control
functions.
Format
G140 uses the following syntax:
G140(J:Jobname R:xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
The parentheses after G140 are required. The “J:” character sequence precedes the
name of the robot job to run. The sequence “R:” is used to indicate the robot to receive
the command and is specified as an IP (Internet Protocol) address. Each robot controller
has a unique IP address and this format allows WinMax to work with multiple robots
within the same program, if desired. The Jobname must already exist in the desired robot
(there may be multiple jobs programmed into the robot). WinMax is simply selecting the
job and robot and will wait for the job to complete before executing the next NC block.
Example
A robot is programmed with a job named “MovePallet” and the IP address of the robot is
192.168.11.7. To run the job, insert the following in the NC program:
G140(J:MovePallet R:192.168.11.7)
When the block is executed WinMax will stop, wait for the robot to run its job then
continue once the job is complete.

Canned Cycles
Canned cycles use a one-block G code to provide drilling, boring, and tapping operations.
Using one G code instead of several helps simplify writing NC programs. Various
parameters are used in common with all or most of the canned cycles. For instance, Z is
used to specify the canned cycle’s depth, P is used to specify dwell time, and F is used to
specify the feedrate. For BNC, if there is no spindle speed and direction specified in the
program, these values are retrieved from the tool page.
The table below contains canned cycles, G codes, and spindle operation while moving in
the negative Z direction, being at Z Bottom, and moving in the positive Z direction.
Operation G Codes Spindle Operation
Canned In -Z In +Z
BNC ISNC At Z Bottom
Cycle Direction Direction
Peck Drilling G73 G73 Peck Feed None Rapid Traverse
Left Handed G84 Spindle Stop,

Tapping with G74 Feed Dwell, Feed
M04 Spindle CW
Bore Orient G76 Oriented Spindle

G76 Feed Rapid Traverse
G86 Stop
Canned Cycle
G80 G80 None None None
Cancel
Drill,
G81 G81 Feed None Rapid Traverse
Spot Boring
Drill with Dwell,

G82 G82 Feed Dwell Rapid Traverse
Counter Boring
Deep Hole Drilling G83 G83 Peck Feed None Rapid Traverse
Tapping Spindle Stop,

G84 Dwell,
with G84 Feed ISNC Spindle Feed
M03 CCW or
BNC Spindle CW
Boring G85 G85 Feed None Feed

Operation G Codes Spindle Operation
Canned In -Z In +Z
BNC ISNC At Z Bottom
Cycle Direction Direction
Bore Orient Cycle G86 -
Bore Rapid Out - G86 Feed Spindle Stop Rapid Traverse
Back Boring Spindle Stop,

– G87 Feed Spindle Move, Rapid Traverse
Spindle Start
Chip Breaker Peck Feed

G87 – None Rapid Traverse
with Dwell
Boring with Manual Move,

– G88 Feed Dwell
Manual Feed Out Rapid Traverse
Rigid Tapping G74

with
M29;
G 84 Spindle Stop,
G88 with Feed Dwell, Feed
M29; Spindle Reverse
84.2;
or
84.3
Bore with Dwell G89 G89 Feed Dwell Rapid Traverse
Table 3–9. Canned Cycles, G Codes and Z Spindle Operations
These canned cycles are different for BNC than ISNC:
BNC-Specific Canned Cycles ISNC-Specific Canned Cycles
G84 with M04 G74—Left-Handed Tapping

Left-Handed Tapping
G84 with M03 Tapping G84—Tapping
G86—Bore Orient Cycle G86—Bore Rapid Out
G87—Chip Breaker G87—Back Boring
G88—Rigid Tapping G74 and

G84 with M29— Rigid Tapping
G88—Boring with manual Feed Out
Table 3–10. BNC and ISNC Specific Canned Cycles

Canned Cycle Parameters
These parameters are used for programming the various canned cycles. They determine
the spindle movement. In the pages that follow, the canned cycles are described and the
parameters for each one are identified.
Parameter Description
F Feedrate
Signed, incremental distance from start point to center of spindle shift

I
position (X axis).
Signed, incremental distance from start point to center of spindle shift

J
position (Y axis).
Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.

If K = 0, drilling data is stored and no drilling is performed.
K The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is
position.
Number of repeats for a series of operations in a specified block.

L The incremental distance and direction between canned cycles is
position.
P Dwell time at the bottom of the hole.
Q Incremental peck depth value or spindle shift distance.
BNC: Incremental, positive distance from the Initial Point to Point R.

Only used in G99 mode for BNC.
R ISNC: Represents absolute Z level at which machining begins in either
G98 or G99.
Must be specified for all ISNC canned cycles.
X X axis hole position data.
Y Y axis hole position data.
Defines Z Bottom location.

BNC:Always a positive value.
In G98 mode:incremental distance down from initial point.
Z
In G99 mode:incremental distance down from the R level.
ISNC:In G90 mode: absolute Z level.
In G91 mode: negative incremental value measured from the R level.
Table 3–11. Canned Cycle Parameters

Depth (Z Parameter)
Z is used to specify the canned cycle’s depth. All canned cycles require a Z word. Z Start
is the Z level where the negative Z (-Z) axis movement begins. This dimension is the
same as the Return to Initial Point in Canned Cycle (G98) and the Return to R Point in
Canned Cycle (G99) codes. The Z Bottom parameter is the point of maximum Z down
(except for ISNC G88) and the dimension where the -Z axis movement ends.
A rapid move at the Z Start level is automatically used to move from one canned cycle
block to another. Make sure the current Z Start level is high enough to clear all fixtures
and obstacles.
Note the differences in the definitions for BNC and ISNC Z parameters in the previous
table.
• For BNC, the current Z level should be established before invoking the canned
cycle (via G00 or G01). Once a Z distance is established, it does not need to
be reprogrammed until the canned cycle mode is canceled or changed.
• For ISNC, the Z word represents a negative or positive absolute Z drilling
level in G90 mode which must be below the current Z level, or an incremental
negative distance from the current R level in G91 mode.
Dwell (P Parameter)
Many of the canned cycles have dwell capability. The scaling factors used with the canned
cycle dwell parameter P are the same as Dwell, Exact Stop (G04). The length of dwell
time is modal and can be specified using one of these methods:
• G04 with a P or X value

• P value with a canned cycle command
• Dwell parameters on the Holes Parameters screen
Taps use the Bore Dwell parameter.
If you use the default dwell parameters on the Holes Parameters screen, G04 P0.0 or a
P0.0 is required with the canned cycle command to cancel any previously commanded
dwell time.
Feedrate (F Parameter)
The current feedrate is used for feed moves and may be reprogrammed in any canned
cycle block by including an F word. The feedrate parameter applies only to the Z direction
during canned cycles.
For BNC files, if no decimal point is included, the system

automatically divides the feedrate by 10.
For ISNC files, if no decimal point is included and the Assume

Feedrate 1 Increment field on the NC Parameters⎯Configuration
Parameters screen is set to Yes, the system automatically divides the
feedrate by 10.

Canceling or Replacing Canned Cycles
All canned cycles are canceled by G00, G01, G02, G03, (the One-Shot Group 00 G codes)
or G80 (Canned Cycle Cancel).
Current canned cycles can be replaced with another canned cycle without first canceling
the canned cycle.
If a G00, G01, G02, G03, or G80 occurs in the same block with a canned cycle command
(for example G00 G85), the G00 is ignored and the canned cycle command (G85 in this
case) is executed. If a G00, G01, G02, or G03 command follows a canned cycle
command, the X, Y, Z parameters are used to perform the interpolation or rapid
positioning, and the remaining canned cycle parameters in the block are ignored.
All canned cycle data are modal. When a canned cycle is canceled using G00 or G80, the
R point, canned cycle repetition value K, and the Q (cut-in, bore shift) are canceled.
Except for tap cycles, canned cycles do not activate the spindle. The
program must have a Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) or Start Spindle
Counterclockwise (M04) to turn on the spindle prior to executing a
canned cycle. For tap cycles, both the spindle speed and direction
are retrieved from the tool library if not specified in the program. If a
spindle speed is not provided with the M3 or M4, the spindle speed
from the tool library is used.
Canned cycles, which turn off the spindle during the cycle, automatically restore the
spindle to the original speed and direction before completing the cycle. If a canned cycle
requires a certain spindle direction and the opposite spindle direction is currently in
effect, the system reverses the spindle direction automatically.

SPINDLE SPEED - S CODES
The Spindle Speed code (S) specifies the spindle rotation speed. The spindle does not
rotate until a Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) or a Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04) is
programmed.
If the S is present with an M03 or an M04 in the same program block, it is active before
the other codes in the program block are executed. As soon as an S appears in the
program, its value is used for the M03s and M04s that follow until a new S value is
encountered. If there is a rapid on the same line, the spindle will ramp up while
simultaneously moving in the other axes.
For ISNC, if the spindle has already been turned on, the S code is sufficient for changing
spindle speed. If the spindle is already turned on and an S code occurs either in a tool
change block or in a block following a tool change block, the spindle ramps up to the new
spindle speed after the tool change.
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Spindle Speed - S Codes 3-151

3 - 152 Spindle Speed - S Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming
TOOL FUNCTIONS
These codes control tool selection: T, L, and D. The L and D codes are for BNC only. To
activate these codes, an M06 code must be contained in the same block. To activate the L
and D words, an M06 must be used with a T word. The NC Parameters screen contains
two fields for controlling tool changes: the Default Tool Number and the M6 Initiates Tool
Change.
D Codes
The Tool Diameter Offset codes (D values) are used in ISNC and BNC programs and cause
the specified dimension to be loaded into the tool diameter register.
Otherwise, for BNC only, the Diameter value in the appropriate Tool Setup data is used.
This dimension is used for cutter compensation, again, only for BNC.
Negative values are not permitted.
L Codes (BNC)
The Tool Length Offset (L) codes cause the specified dimension to be loaded into the tool
offset register. Otherwise, the Zero Calibration value in the appropriate Tool Setup data is
used.
Negative values are not permitted.
T Codes
The Tool Select (T) codes specify the tool number. The value is composed of up to two
digits. Placing the T word in a block does NOT cause a tool change to occur.
If the M6 Initiates Tool Change field is set to Yes, the M06 code must be used to initiate
the tool change.
If the M6 Initiates Tool Change field is set to Yes, and a program has a T Code without an
M6 Code, the machine will pre-fetch the tool. When this occurs, the tool changer moves
the tool carousel so the next tool is ready, but does not complete the change until it
encounters the M6.
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Tool Functions 3-153

3 - 154 Tool Functions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming
MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS - M
CODES
The following information is described in this section:
M Code Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 157

Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 160
Program Stop (M00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 160
Planned Stop (M01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 161
End of Program (M02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 161
Start Spindle Clockwise (M03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162
Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162
Spindle Off (M05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162
M6 Initiates Tool Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 162
Secondary Coolant On (M07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163
Primary Coolant On (M08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163
Both Coolant Systems Off (M09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163
Both Coolant Systems On (M10). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 163
Clamp C-axis (M12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164
Unclamp C-axis (M13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164
Automatic Buffering On (M16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164
Automatic Buffering Off (M17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164
Oriented Spindle Stop (M19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 164
Pulse Indexer One Increment (M20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Z Axis to Home Position (M25) - Basic NC Programming only . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Select Part Probe Signal (M26) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Select Tool Probe Signal (M27). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Enable Rigid Tapping (ISNC M29) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Program End (M30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Rotary Encoder Reset (M31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 165
Clamp A-axis (M32) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Unclamp A-axis (M33). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Clamp B-axis (M34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Unclamp B-axis (M35). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Servo Off Code (M36) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Laser Input Update (M38-M40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 166
Single-Touch Probing (M41). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes 3-155

Double-Touch Probing (M42) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Barrier Air Control (M43 and M44) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Shutter Probe Control (M45 and M46) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Laser Emitter On/Off Control (M47 and M48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Laser Receiver On/Off (M49 and M50). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Enable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M52 – M55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 167
Nonconfirmation Pallet Change (M56 – M58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168
Chip Conveyor Fwd/Reverse/Stop (M59, M60, M61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168
Disable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M62 – M65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168
Washdown Coolant System (M68, M69) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168
Pallet Changer Control (M70) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 168
Right Handed C Axis (M80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169
Left Handed C Axis (M81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169
Z Axis Retract Enable (M90)/Disable (M91) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169
Subprogram Call (M98) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 169
Jump; Return from Subprogram (M99) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 170
Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126) and Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse
Cancel (M127) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 171
Tool Center Point Management (M128) and Tool Center Point Mngmt Cancel (M129) 3 -
172
Retract Along Tool Vector (M140) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 177
Enable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M142-M149) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178
Disable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M152 – M159) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178
B-Axis Pinning (M170 - M175) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178
Spindle Gear Select (M176) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 178
ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion (M177) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 179
Tilt Axis Preference (M200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 179
Minimum Axis Limit Override (M210) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180
Maximum Axis Limit Override (M211) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180
Cancel Axis Limit Overrides (M212) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180
Kinematic ASR Motion (M213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 180
Kinematic ASR On/Off (M214) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 181
3 - 156 Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

M Code Definitions
Miscellaneous Functions (M codes) cause machine-related action (e.g., coolant control
and tool changes). Each Miscellaneous Function is explained below. Multiple M codes can
be used within an NC block.
M Code Table
M Code Definition
M00 Cancels the spindle and coolant functions; stops part program execution
M01 Program stop often used when the operator wants to refixture the part
M02 Marks the end of the program; stops the spindle, coolant, and axes feed
M03 Starts clockwise rotation of the spindle
M04 Starts counterclockwise rotation of the spindle
M05 Switches the spindle off
M06 Requests an automatic tool change
M07 Switches on secondary coolant systems
M08 Switches on primary coolant system
M09 Switches off both the primary and secondary coolant
M10 Switches on both the primary and secondary coolant
M12 Clamp Rotary C Axis
M13 Unclamp Rotary C Axis
M16 Automatic Buffering On
M17 Automatic Buffering Off
M20 Advances the indexer one position
M21 Initiates lubrication
M25 Retracts the Z axis to the home position (tool change height)
M26 Select Part Probe Signal
M27 Select Tool Probe Signal
ISNC M29 Enables rigid tapping
M30 Program End
M31 Resets the rotary axis encoder position
M32 Clamps the rotary A axis
M33 Unclamps the rotary A axis
M34 Clamps the rotary B axis
M35 Unclamps the rotary B axis
M36 Switches off the servos
M38 Reads and places the state of the laser OK signal
M39 Reads and places the state of the laser static signal
M40 Reads and places the state of the laser dynamic signal

M Code Table
M Code Definition
M41 Enables single-touch probing when using the G31 command
M42 Enables two-touch probing with the G31 command.
M43 Increases the barrier air.
M44 Reduces barrier air.
M45 Opens the shutter.
M46 Closes the shutter.
M47 Turns the laser emitter on.
M48 Turns the laser emitter off.
M49 Turns the laser receiver on / Disable Latch Mode.
M50 Turns the laser receiver off / Enable Latch Mode.
M51 Cycle Pallet Changer
M52 Enables auxiliary output 1.
M56 Rotates the pallet changer for a non-confirmation pallet change.
M57 Rotates the pallet changer to pallet 1.
M58 Rotates the pallet changer to pallet 2.
M59 Turns chip conveyor forward mode on.
M60 Turns chip conveyor reverse mode on.
M61 Stops the chip conveyor.
M62 Disables auxiliary output 1.
M68 Enables washdown coolant system.
M69 Disables washdown coolant system.
M70 Pallet Changer Control
M76 Normal A Axis operation (default).
M77 Reverses A Axis operation.
M78 Normal B Axis operation (default).
M79 Reverses B Axis operation.
M80 C Axis is right-handed (default).
M81 C Axis is left-handed.
M90 Z Axis Retract Enable
M91 Z Axis Retract Disable
M98 Subprogram call.
M99 Jump; Return from subprogram.

M Code Definition
M126 Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse
M127 Cancels Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126)
M128 Tool Center Point Management
M129 Cancels Tool Center Point Management (M128)
M140 Retract Along Tool Vector
M142 Enable Auxiliary Output 5
M152 Disable Auxiliary Output 5
M170 Pin Boring Mill B-axis to 0 degrees
M174 Boring Mill table pin in
M175 Boring Mill table pin out
M176 Spindle Gear Select
M177 ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion
M200 Tilt Axis Preference
M210 Minimum Axis Limit Override
M211 Maximum Axis Limit Override
M212 Cancel Axis Limit Overrides
M213 Kinematic ASR Motion
M214 Kinematic ASR On/Off

Program Functions
The Program Functions (M00, M01, and M02) stop the execution of the part programs.
Program Stop (M00)

The Program Stop (M00) cancels the spindle and coolant functions and terminates further
program execution after completion of other commands in the same program block.
When the program is stopped, existing modal information remains unchanged as in single
block operation. The Start Cycle button on the control flashes and this prompt message
appears:
Cycle complete; press start to continue.
Pressing the Start Cycle button resumes the spindle and coolant operation and continues
the program execution.
This M code should not be set simultaneously with other M codes. M00 is executed
following execution of the rest of the address words on the block. Here is an example
using the M00 code:
N10 G01 X2. Y1. F10. M00
In this example, the machine moves to the X2/Y1 location before it shuts down.
Program blocks should be included that retract the tool to a safe

position before a block containing an M00 is programmed. If these
program blocks are not included, the spindle stops while cutting the
part.

Planned Stop (M01)
The Planned Stop Code (M01) pauses the program and shuts off the spindle. M01 is
ignored unless previously validated in the parameter page.
Include a data block to retract the tool to a safe position before a block containing an M01
is programmed. If the retract tool data block is not included, the spindle will stop while
cutting the part.
The enclosure doors can be opened after an M01 command, but no

machine operation is allowed. Once the doors are closed, press the
flashing Start Cycle button to acknowledge the command and allow
the program to continue.
You can also pause the program and shut off the spindle by selecting
the NC Optional Stop On/Off softkey on the Auto Run screen or
setting the NC Optional Program Stop parameter on the NC
Configuration Parameters screen. Refer to Auto Mode Monitoring in
Getting Started with WinMax Mill and NC Parameters, on page 3 - 20
When the Start Cycle button is pressed after an M01, the control
looks ahead 30 blocks to determine if the spindle and/or coolant
should be turned back on. For the spindle, a M06, M19, M5, M2, M30
or M36 event without a G01, G02, or G03 will keep the spindle off.
For coolant, a M06, M09, M2, or M36 event without a G01, G02, or
G03 will keep the coolant off. Otherwise, the spindle and/or coolant
is turned back on.
End of Program (M02)

The End Of Program code (M02) indicates the end of the main program (the completion of
the part), and is necessary for the registration of CNC commands from tape to memory.
M02 stops the spindle, the coolant, and the axis feed after completing all of the
commands in the program. M02 is active after the block is executed.
The M02 does NOT stop the NC program loader if the program is
loading from a serial link. An E character must be transmitted to
signal the loader that the entire program has been sent to the
remote device.
This M code should not be set simultaneously with other M codes

unless it is the last M code in the block.

Start Spindle Clockwise (M03)
The Start Spindle Clockwise code starts a clockwise spindle rotation (as viewed from the
headstock). The spindle reaches the programmed speed before X, Y, and Z (also A and B
if present) axis feed starts. If the M03 is on the same line as a Rapid move (G00), the
spindle ramps up to speed while moving at rapid to position. If the spindle speed has not
been defined, the Tool Setup screen’s spindle speed is used.
M03 is active before the other commands in the block are executed.
Start Spindle Counterclockwise (M04)

The Start Spindle Counterclockwise code starts spindle rotation in a counterclockwise
direction (as viewed from the headstock). The spindle reaches the programmed speed
before X, Y, Z (A or B) feed starts. If the spindle speed has not been defined, the Tool
Setup screen’s spindle speed is used.
Spindle Off (M05)

The Spindle Off code is the default and causes the spindle to stop in a normal manner. If
the machine is equipped with a brake, it is applied.
M05 is active after the other commands in the block are executed.
M6 Initiates Tool Change

Use this field on the NC Parameters screen to indicate whether tool changes are initiated
with the M6 or with the T code. Set this field to No and the M06 is ignored and tool
changes are initiated whenever a T code is found in the program (not when T is used for
user-defined subprogram or subprogram parameter).
If this field is set to Yes, the M6 is required for tool changes. (Default is Yes.)
If this field is set to Yes and a T code is used without the M06, the machine will “pre-
fetch” the tool. When this occurs, the tool changer moves the tool carousel so the next
tool is ready, but does not complete the change until it encounters the M06.
Change Tool (M06)

The Change Tool code requests that the machine perform a tool change. These tool
changes should be performed in rapid traverse mode. The following sequence occurs if an
automatic tool changer is present and in the Auto Tool Change mode:
1. The Z axis retracts to tool change position.

2. The machine moves the X and Y axes to the Tool Change position if the tool
change position parameter is set to Yes.
3. The spindle orients and stops.
4. The “old” tool is returned to the tool changer.

5. The “new” tool is placed in the spindle.
6. New tool offsets from the Tool Offset screen are loaded into the appropriate
registers. The Tool Length Offsets from G43 and G44 remain in effect.
7. The program continues.
The M06 is optional if the M6 Initiates Tool Change field on the NC
Parameters screen is set to Yes; otherwise, tool changes are
performed with the T code.
This sequence occurs for manual tool changes:
1. Z axis retracts to its tool change position.

2. The machine moves the X and Y axes to the Tool Change position if the tool
change position parameter is set to Yes.
3. The spindle stops and orients.
4. The screen prompts for a tool change.
5. Change the tool and press the Start Cycle button on the control to allow the
program to continue.
6. New tool offsets are loaded into the appropriate registers.
7. The program continues.
The first Z dimension after a tool change must be absolute. Any Z
dimension programmed in a tool change block is ignored.
Secondary Coolant On (M07)

The Secondary Coolant On code switches on the mist coolant, if available. M07 is active
before the other commands in the block are executed.
Primary Coolant On (M08)

The Primary Coolant On code switches on the flood coolant, if available. M08 is active
before the other commands in the block are executed.
Both Coolant Systems Off (M09)

The Coolant Off code is the default and switches off the coolant if it has been activated by
Secondary Coolant On (M07) or Primary Coolant On (M08). M09 is active after the other
commands in the block are executed.
Both Coolant Systems On (M10)

The Both Coolant Systems On code switches on the coolant if it has been activated by
Both Coolant Systems Off (M09).

Clamp C-axis (M12)
The Clamp C axis code clamps the C axis. For C axis moves after M12, the C axis is
automatically unclamped for the move and clamped again after the move is complete.
M12 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by an
Unclamp C axis (M13) command.
Unclamp C-axis (M13)

The Unclamp C axis code unclamps the C axis until an M12 is programmed.
M13 is active before the other commands in the block are executed and is canceled by a
Clamp C axis (M12) command.
Automatic Buffering On (M16)

Turns on automatic buffering when the Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning
parameter is enabled in NC Parameters. M16/M17 are used to turn automatic buffering
on and off within a program.
Automatic Buffering Off (M17)

Turns off automatic buffering.
Oriented Spindle Stop (M19)

The Oriented Spindle Stop code causes the spindle to stop in the oriented position. A
brake, if available, will be applied. The coolant is also turned off. This function only
applies to machines which have an orient feature. On machines without the orient
feature, this function works like the Spindle Off (M05) command.
S___ defines the position of the spindle, from 0 to 359 degrees, in 1 degree increments.
Q___ defines the reference method for the spindle zero position:
• Q0 defines the orient position as the zero position. The spindle position is a
positive angle measured CCW from the orient position. This is the default
reference method.
• Q1 defines the positive X axis as the zero position. The spindle position is a
positive angle measured counterclockwise from the positive X axis, when
looking down the spindle. A position of zero will align the oriented spindle key
along the positive X axis.
M19 is active after the other commands in the block are executed. When the M19 S_
command is received, WinMax will stop the spindle, orient the spindle, move to the S_
position, and then hold position.

Pulse Indexer One Increment (M20)
The Pulse Indexer One Increment code advances the indexer one position. A reply signal
is sent back from the indexer to indicate when it is in position. When the signal is
received, the program continues. For multiple indexes, separate M20 blocks must be
programmed. (Refer to the indexer’s manual and the Hurco Maintenance Manual for
information on attaching an indexer to the machine.)
M20 is active after the other commands in the block are executed.
Z Axis to Home Position (M25) - Basic NC Programming

only
The Z Axis to Home Position code retracts the Z axis to the home position (tool change
height) at the rapid traverse rate selected in the Program Parameters screen. The first Z
value after an M25 must be absolute.
Select Part Probe Signal (M26)

When G31 is used to invoke probe motion, the machine will move to the specified
destination until either the destination is reached or a probe deflection occurs. The Select
Part Probe Signal (M26) alerts the G31 move to detect a part probe deflection.
Select Tool Probe Signal (M27)

When G31 is used to invoke probe motion, the machine will move to the specified
destination until either the destination is reached or a probe deflection occurs. The Select
Tool Probe Signal (M27) alerts the G31 move to detect a tool probe deflection.
Enable Rigid Tapping (ISNC M29)

When Enable Rigid Tapping (M29) is used before a Left-Handed Tapping Cycle (ISNC G74)
or Tapping Cycle (G84) command, rigid tapping is performed. M29 stays in effect until a
One-Shot (G00, G01, G02, G03) code or Canned Cycle Cancel (G80) command is used.
Program End (M30)

The Program End code (M30) indicates the end of the main program (the completion of
the part). M30 stops the spindle, the coolant, and the axis feed after completing all of the
commands in the program. M30 is active after the block is executed.
Rotary Encoder Reset (M31)

If the rotary axis rotates to a position greater than +180° or less than -180°, the M31
resets the current axis position to 0° so subsequent rotations of the axis will move based
on the new rotary position of 0°.

For example, if the rotary axis is positioned to 9000° and the program is rerun, without
an M31 the rotary axis will have to unwind back to be within (-180°, 180°) before moving
to 9000°. With an M31 before the 9000° move, the rotary axis will reset from 9000° to 0°
and will not have to unwind.
An M31 command can be called in both Conversational and NC part programs. If M31 is
executed during contouring operations in a part program, the move prior to the M31
command will come to an exact stop before M31 is executed.
Clamp A-axis (M32)

The Clamp A-axis code clamps the A axis. For A axis moves after M32, the A axis is
Unclamp A axis (M33) command.
Unclamp A-axis (M33)

The Unclamp A axis code unclamps the A axis until an M32 is programmed.
Clamp A axis (M32) command.
Clamp B-axis (M34)

The Clamp B axis code clamps the B axis. For B axis moves after M34, the B axis is
Unclamp B axis (M35) command.
Unclamp B-axis (M35)

The Unclamp B axis code unclamps the B axis until an M34 is programmed.
Clamp B axis (M34) command.
Servo Off Code (M36)

The servos may be turned off using the Servo Off (M36) command.
Control power to the machine will be turned off. The control will still be powered on. This
is similar to an emergency stop.
Laser Input Update (M38-M40)

These codes read the state of the three laser inputs (M38: OK signal;

M39: static signal; and M40: dynamic signal).
Single-Touch Probing (M41)

For a G31 probing move, perform one touch.
Double-Touch Probing (M42)

For a G31 probing move, perform two touches. This is the default mode.
Barrier Air Control (M43 and M44)

Barrier air is used to prevent chips and debris from getting into the laser emitter and
receiver. M43 causes the air flow at the probe to increase; M44 reduces the airflow.
During operation of the probe, the barrier air should be increased whenever the probe
shutter is open. It should remain at the high flow rate except during the actual tool
measurement. When the shutter is closed, the flow rate may be reduced.
Shutter Probe Control (M45 and M46)

A pneumatic shutter protects the probe. During a measurement, the barrier air should be
increased and the shutter opened. After the probe cycle is completed, the shutter should
be closed and the barrier air reduced. M45 causes a brief puff of air that helps clear chips
and debris from the probe. M46 closes the shutter.
Laser Emitter On/Off Control (M47 and M48)

M47 turns the laser emitter on. M48 turns the laser off. It is recommended to turn the
laser emitter off when not in use.
Laser Receiver On/Off (M49 and M50)

M49 turns the laser receiver on. M50 turns the laser receiver off. It is recommended to
turn the laser receiver off when not in use.
M49 is also used to disable latch mode and M50 to enable latch mode
with some probe types.
Cycle Pallet Changer (M51)

M51 rotates the pallet changer on horizontal machining centers without regard to position
or pallet setup. Confirmation is required.
Enable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M52 – M55)

M52 through M55 are used to individually enable auxiliary equipment or a unique
machine function from within a part program. Enter performance time for the machine-

specific M code in the M Code Table. When M52 through M55 are active, the
corresponding auxiliary equipment or machine function is turned on, and any
performance time is added to estimated run time.
M52 enables Auxiliary Output 1, M53 enables Auxiliary Output 2, M54 enables Auxiliary
Output 3, M55 enables Auxiliary Output 4.
Auxiliary Outputs 5 through 12 are enabled with M142-M149.
Nonconfirmation Pallet Change (M56 – M58)

M56 rotates the pallet changer without regard to position or pallet setup confirmation.
M57 rotates the pallet changer to pallet 1. M58 rotates the pallet changer to pallet 2.
The Z-axis automatically moves to zero when a M56, M57 or M58 command is executed.
Chip Conveyor Fwd/Reverse/Stop (M59, M60, M61)

M59 enables chip conveyor forward mode. M60 enables chip conveyor reverse mode. M61
stops the chip conveyor motion.
Disable Auxiliary Output 1 through 4 (M62 – M65)

M62 through M65 turn off auxiliary equipment or machine functions enabled with M codes
M52 through M55.
M62 disables Auxiliary Output 1 (M52), M63 disables Auxiliary Output 2 (M53), M64
disables Auxiliary Output 3 (M54), and M64 disables Auxiliary Output 4 (M55).
Washdown Coolant System (M68, M69)

M68 enables washdown coolant system. M69 disables washdown coolant system.
Pallet Changer Control (M70)

M70 controls pallet changes with or without two optional parameters, P_ and L_. By itself
(without P_ or L_ parameters) it cycles the pallet changer without confirmation.
Confirmation requires the APC Ready button.
M70 P_ L_ (optional)
where
P0 = change current pallet (no P token is the same as P0)
P1 = change to pallet #1
P2 = change to pallet #2

L0 = perform pallet change without confirmation (no L token is the same as L0)
L1 = perform pallet change with confirmation (APC Ready button)
Right Handed C Axis (M80)

When this M code is active and a command is given to the C axis to go in a positive
direction, the axis will rotate counter clockwise.
Left Handed C Axis (M81)

When is M code is active and a command is given to the C axis to go in a negative
direction, the axis will rotate clockwise.
Z Axis Retract Enable (M90)/Disable (M91)

M90 enables the Z Axis to be retracted in the event of a power loss. M91 disables Z
retract.
M90/M91 must be used with the Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss parameter. The
parameter must be set to 1 to enable the feature, and can then be turned on and off
within a program using M90 (on) and M91 (off).
Subprogram Call (M98)

One way of specifying the number of iterations for a subprogram to perform is with M98
subprogram calls.
When making M98 subprogram calls, the P parameter is used to specify iterations as well
as the subprogram number. Up to four digits can be used to specify iterations for a
maximum of 9999 iterations. Leading zeros are not required when specifying iterations;
however, leading zeros are required with a subprogram number that is less than 1000.
In Example 1 below, M98 P60050 must be used instead of M98 P650 to run program 50
with 6 iterations because the subprogram number (50) is less than 1000.
In Example 2, the M98 P23013000 subprogram example, the four digits to the left (2301)
specify the number of iterations, and the four digits to the right (3000) specify the
subprogram number.

Example 1 Example 2
A Number of Items
B Subprogram Number
As other examples, M98 P1 runs program 1 with no iterations, and M98 P100001 runs
program 1 ten times.
Jump; Return from Subprogram (M99)

Each subprogram ends with an M99 Jump statement.

Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse (M126) and
Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse Cancel (M127)
M126 activates Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse. The control will move the rotary-axis
through the shortest angular distance to the commanded position. M127 cancels the
Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse.
Example
The table below illustrates machine movement with the M126 command.
Initial Commanded Angular Distance

Position Position Traverse
350° 20° +30°
20° 350° -30°
Table 3–12. Machine Movement with M126 Command
The table below illustrates machine movement with the Shortest Rotary Angle Path
Traverse Cancel (M127) command. Standard machine movement for the VMX42 SR is the
same as machine movement with the Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse cancelled,
except when Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 (G00 or G01) or 3D Tool Geometry
Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 174 are active.
Initial Commanded Angular Distance

Position Position Traverse
350° 20° -330°
20° 350° +330°
Table 3–13. Machine Movement with M127 Command

Tool Center Point Management (M128) and
Tool Center Point Mngmt Cancel (M129)
The Tool Center Point Management feature allows programming of 5-axis tool positions in
the Workpiece Coordinate System, independent of the Part Setup location in the machine.
Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.
M128 activates Tool Center Point Management and M129 cancels Tool Center Point
Management.
G00, G01, G02, and G03 moves are supported in M128 mode.
NC Hole cycles are permitted with M128 activated, only if the Tool
Vector is vertical.
Both G93 (Inverse Time) and G94 (UPM) are supported when M128
is active.
Three input modes are available with M128:
• Axes Angle Input, on page 3 - 172 (G00 or G01): Tool Bottom Centerpoint
(X_Y_Z_) and Axes Angle Input (B_C_)
• Tool Vector Input, on page 3 - 173 (G00 or G01): Tool Bottom Centerpoint
(X_Y_Z_) and Tool Vector (I_J_K_)
• 3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2), on page 3 - 174: Surface Contact
Point (X_Y_Z_) and Tool Vector (I_J_K_) and Surface Normal Vector at
contact point (U_V_W_)
Axes Angle Input

Allows the Operator to specify the Tool Bottom Centerpoint with respect to the Workpiece
Coordinate System, and the rotary and tilt axes relative to the Unrotated Coordinate
System. Refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.
Format
G01 X_Y_Z_B_C_
where
{X, Y, Z} is the Tool Bottom Centerpoint.
{B, C} are the rotary and tilt angles relative to Part Setup. B and C are modal.

Tool Vector Input
Tool Vector Input is only available if M128 or NC Transform Plane is
active.
A vector is a direction in 3D space that is defined using values for the X, Y, and Z direction
components, as shown in the figure below. Since vectors describe a direction, their base
is always at the Coordinate System origin from which they point outward. Tool Vector is
the vector that describes the orientation of the tool axis; the direction from the tool tip
pointing up through the spindle and away from the workpiece.
The Tool Vector can be specified with up to six decimal places. It is

highly recommended that the full precision be used. Field values will
normally lie in the range of -1.000 000 to +1.000 000. If the
magnitude of the vector does not equal 1, the vector will be
normalized by the CNC.
The magnitude of a vector is determined by using the following

equation: magnitude = I2 + J2 + K2
The drawing below is a plot of a vector with its, Â I, J, and K components that correspond
to the X, Y, and Z directions.
Figure 3–43. Plot of a Vector
When the NC program contains Tool Vectors in the tool position blocks with M128 or NC
Transform Plane active, the CNC will compute the appropriate rotary and tilt axes (B-axis
and C-axis) positions. The Tool Tip location in the part program specifies where on the
workpiece the tool should be positioned. The CNC computes the X, Y, and Z machine axes
positions to move the rotated tool tip to the specified point on the rotated workpiece.
The Tool Tip and Tool Vector are specified with respect to the
Workpiece Coordinate System defined in the CAM software or the NC
Transform Plane. The CNC will automatically compute the machine
axes positions using the Tool Length and the Part Setup information.
Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.

Format
G01 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_
where
{X, Y, Z} is the Tool Bottom Centerpoint. X, Y, and Z are modal.
{I, J, K} is the Tool Vector. I, J, and K are non-modal.
Both G93 (Inverse Time) and G94 (UPM) are supported with Tool
Vector Input.
3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2)

M128 must be active when using G41.2.
G41.2 allows specification of the Surface Contact Point, the Surface Normal Vector, and
the Tool Vector. The CNC will compute the tool position automatically for ball nose, flat
end, and bull nose endmills. The tool will be positioned to tangentially touch the specified
Surface Contact Point. The following figure shows the Surface Normal Vector, Tool Vector
and Surface Contact Point for a tool.
1 Surface Normal Vector
2 Tool Vector
3 Surface Contact Point
Figure 3–44. Tool Components for 3D Tool Geometry Compensation
Although ball, flat, and bull nose endmills can be positioned

interchangeably with a G41.2 command, there is no guarantee that
the selected tool dimensions and geometry will not cause gouging of
the part.
It is the responsibility of the Operator to ensure that the tool path is

gouge-free for the selected tool.

The Surface Contact Point, Surface Normal Vector, and Tool Vector are specified with
respect to the Workpiece Coordinate System defined in the CAD/CAM software or part
drawing. The CNC will automatically compute the machine axes coordinates using the tool
dimensions and Part Setup information. Refer to Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Tool Vector and Surface Normal Vector can be specified with up to six
decimal places. It is highly recommended that the full precision be
used. Field values will normally lie in the range of -1.000 000 to
+1.000 000. If the magnitude of the vector does not equal 1, the
vector will be normalized by the CNC.
For flat and corner radius end mills, there are infinite solutions for the tool position when
Tool Vector and Surface Normal Vector point in the same direction and any point on the
bottom face of the tool can touch the Surface Contact point (shown by #1 and #2 in the
following figure). When this condition exists, the CNC will place the Tool Bottom Center on
the Surface Contact Point, as shown by #3 in the figure below.
A Tool Vector
B Surface Normal Vector
C Surface Contact Point
Figure 3–45. 3D Tool Geometry Compensation Infinite Solution Examples
• G41.2 requires the radius and corner radius to compute tool positions. Refer
to the following figure for tool geometry.
• G41.2 D_R_ specifies the Tool Radius (D_) and the Corner Radius (R_) for
both the ISNC and Hurco Basic NC dialects. The values in D_ and R_ are
indexes for the Tool Radius Offset Table and Tool Corner Radius Offset Table,
respectively.

Figure 3–46. Tool Geometry
Format
G41.2 uses G01 for contouring moves.
G40 cancels G41.2
G01 X_Y_Z_I_J_K_U_V_W_
where
All coordinates are specified in the Workpiece Coordinate System. Refer to

{X, Y, Z} is the part’s Surface Contact Point and is modal.
{U, V, W} is the Surface Normal Vector of the part contact point and is non-
modal.
{I, J, K} is the Tool Axis Vector and is non-modal.
3D Tool Geometry Compensation (G41.2) is well-suited for using

with a ball nose endmill. The potential for surface gouging exists
when using the G41.2 command with flat and corner radius endmills.

Retract Along Tool Vector (M140)
M140 allows the Operator to move the tool along the current Tool Vector for a specified
distance or to retract to machine limits. In the drawing below, positive Retract Along Tool
Vector is in the direction of the arrow (which will move the tool away from the part).
Figure 3–47. Positive Retract Along Tool Vector
Format
M140 is non-modal and is only active for the current block.
M140 [L_], where L_ is the incremental distance the tool will move from its current
position along the current Tool Vector direction.
• A positive L_ value will move the tool in the direction pointing from the
cutting tool bottom up through the spindle (i.e., moves the tool away from
the part). Typically, a positive L_ value will be programmed.
• A negative L_ value will move the tool in the opposite direction.
• When M140 is used without the L_ parameter, the tool will retract along the
positive direction of the current Tool Vector to the machine limits (i.e., move
the tool tip away from the workpiece).

Enable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M142-M149)
M142 through M149 are used to individually enable auxiliary equipment or a unique
machine function from within a part program. Enter performance time for the machine-
specific M code in the M Code Table. When M142 through M149 are active, the
corresponding auxiliary equipment or machine function is turned on, and any
performance time is added to estimated run time.
M142 enables Auxiliary Output 5, M143 enables Auxiliary Output 6, M144 enables
Auxiliary Output 7, M145 enables Auxiliary Output 8, M146 enables Auxiliary Output 9,
M147 enables Auxiliary Output 10, M148 enables Auxiliary Output 11, and M149 enables
Auxiliary Output 12.
Auxiliary Outputs 1 through 4 are enabled with M52-M55.
Disable Auxiliary Output 5 through 12 (M152 – M159)

M152 through M159 turn off auxiliary equipment or machine functions enabled with M
codes M142 through M149.
M152 disables Auxiliary Output 5 (M142), M153 disables Auxiliary Output 6 (M143),
M158 disables Auxiliary Output 11 (M148), and M159 disables Auxiliary Output 12
(M149).
B-Axis Pinning (M170 - M175)

The B-Axis on boring mill machines can be locked, or “pinned.” M170 through M175 are
used to specify the pinning position (machine position):
• M170—Table select B to 0 degrees and pin

• M171—Table select B o 90 degrees and pin
• M174—Table pin in (must be at one of the above positions)
• M175—Table pin out (must be at one of the above positions)
Spindle Gear Select (M176)

M176 selects the spindle gear. Applicable only on machines that have multi-speed
spindles.
Format is M176 Pn, where n is gear number 1-5. Once a spindle gear is specified, it
remains active until the gear is changed with another M176.

ASR Non-Interpolated Axis Motion (M177)
L0 (default) Enable ASR non-interpolated axis motion.
L1 Disable ASR non-interpolated axis motion.
Tilt Axis Preference (M200)

To improve the work volume when the spindle is horizontal, the C axis table has been
located at the corner of the machine's base table. Although this configuration provides a
large work volume for negative B axis angles, it restricts the work volume for positive B
axis angles. Since parts that require positive B axis angles can be cut using a negative B
axis angle with a rotation of 180 degrees of the C axis table, the configuration does not
impose limitations on the parts that the user can cut.
Since positive B-axis angles have a restricted work volume for

3+2-axis machining, the Operator may request that the post
processor set the B-axis limits from -90° to 0° to prevent using
positive B-axis angles.
M200 can be used to select the Tilt Axis Preference direction for simultaneous 5-axis
contouring in an NC program. A positive Tilt Axis Preference will keep the B axis between
0 to +90 degrees. A negative Tilt Axis Preference will keep the B axis between -90 to 0
degrees. A neutral Tilt Axis Preference specifies no preference and the program will
execute with the shortest angular traverse if activated. A Neutral, Positive, and Negative
preference is specified using P0, P1, or P2 parameter with the M200 command.
Tilt Axis Preference is only applied under the following conditions:
• Tool Center Point Management (M128) OR Transform Plane is active.

• AND Tool Vector input is used.
OR
• Cylindrical wrap machining (G07.2) is used.
Note that during 5-axis simultaneous interpolated moves, if the

machine is not on the tilt axis preference side, it can only move back
to the preference side when the tool path moves through the
machine singularity point (i.e. B0 machine position).
The default for programs is specified in the Rotary Parameters settings screen.
Motion During 5-axis Contouring with Tilt Axis Preference
If the B axis is requested to move to the opposite side of the Tilt Axis Preference, the CNC
will interpolate the tool tip and tool vector up to the machine singularity point (B axis at 0
degrees), then the machine will rotate about the singularity point (i.e. the CNC will rotate
the C axis and interpolate the X- and Y axes while keeping the tool tip at a constant
location relative to the workpiece), followed by interpolating the B axis and tool tip to
their final positions with the B axis on the Tilt Axis Preference Side.

Format
M200 P[0,1,2]
P0 = None (turns tilt axis preference off), control uses shortest angular traverse
P1 = Positive, B axis between [0°, +90°]
P2 = Negative, B axis between [-90°, 0°]
Axis Limit Overrides (M210, M211, M212)

Axis limit overrides allow new minimum and maximum travel limits to be set for an axis.
Before changing an axis limit be sure the current machine position is

within the new limits or an out of limits error will be generated.
Before a tool change is executed the limits should be restored to

defaults using the M212 to avoid an out of limits error.
Minimum Axis Limit Override (M210)

Use M210 to set a new minimum axis limit during machining, overriding the default real
machine limits.
M210 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_, where the value following the axis is the new minimum limit.
Maximum Axis Limit Override (M211)

Use M211 to set a new maximum axis limit during machining, overriding the default real
machine limits.
M211 X_Y_Z_A_B_C_, where the value following the axis is the new maximum limit.
Cancel Axis Limit Overrides (M212)

M212 cancels the axis limit overrides (M210 / M211) and restores the default real
machine limits. Limits are also restored to defaults when the program ends.
Kinematic ASR Motion (M213)

M213 is used to specify various aspects of motion when Kinematic ASR (M214) is
enabled. M213 optional; when not present the control uses the defaults for the specified
parameters.
M213 [L_ | R_] P_ Q_, where
L_ specifies an absolute retract distance along tool vector

R_ retract distance is tool length plus this offset (default distance is tool length)
P_ specifies plunge distance (default is 5mm)
Q_ specifies plunge feedrate (default is current feedrate)
L_ and R_ are mutually exclusive and only the last one specified is
active.
R_ is valid only in Absolute Tool Length mode.
Kinematic ASR On/Off (M214)

M214 enables or disables Kinematic ASR. Kinematic ASR applies only to rotary axes with
motion limits. If the control detects that axis motion limits will be reached, Kinematic ASR
retracts and reorients the tool so cutting can continue without going out of limits.
M214 L_, where L0 disables and L1 enables kinematic ASR (default is enabled)

NC PRODUCTIVITY PACKAGE OPTION
The NC Productivity Package (NCPP) option provides features that enhance productivity
and aid in producing smaller, more powerful, and easier to maintain NC programs. NCPP
features include variables, subprogram calls, macros, user-defined codes, mathematical
equations and address expressions. The NCPP option requires the presence of the ISNC
option.
NC files that are larger than dynamic RAM memory can be serially
loaded to the hard disk. The CNC can run NC files that do not entirely
fit into dynamic RAM memory.
Macro Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 184

Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 185
Program Control Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 200
Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 205
Modal Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 214
User Defined Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 216
NCPP Variable Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 224
Programming Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 234
WinMax Mill NC Programming 704-0116-501 NC Productivity Package Option 3-183

Macro Modes
The CNC software provides compatibility between different NC dialects from various
machine tool control manufacturers. The software calls NC macros (Macro Mode A or
Macro Mode B) to be compatible with existing NC macros.
Older NC macros use the Macro A method of calling subprograms. The main difference
between the two macro modes is Macro Mode A does not provide for local (general
purpose) variables within a subprogram. Also, Macro Mode B provides the potential to
embed more NC computer programming. The table below identifies each macro mode’s
variables and the functions for which the variables are used. (Refer to the “Variables”
section for more information about local variables.)
Functions Subprogram Variables
Macro Mode A Macro Mode B
Local Variables None #1-33
Tool Offsets #1-#99 #2001-#2200
User defined M Codes 9001-9003 9001-9003; 9020-9029
Indirect Variable Referencing #9100 #[#100]
Pass Subprogram Parameters #8004-#8026; #8104- #1-#33

#8126
G Code Status #8030-#8046; #8130-

#8146
Table 3–14. Subprogram Variables
To enable the appropriate macro mode, press the NC Parameters (F3) softkey on the
Program Parameters screen. The NC Parameters⎯ Configuration Parameters screen
appears with the cursor in the upper left-hand corner at the default Macro Mode B Yes
field.
Enable Macro Mode B by selecting the Yes (F2) softkey; enable Macro Mode A by selecting
the No (F1) softkey.
• Macro Mode A contains 3 program numbers (9001–9003).

• Macro Mode B contains 13 program numbers (9001–9003 and 9020–9029).
Refer to User Defined Codes, on page 3 - 216 for more information about user defined
codes.
The user can assign G or M codes in the appropriate column on the NC Parameters⎯M
and G Code Program Numbers screen for each program number.
3 - 184 NC Productivity Package Option 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill NC Programming

Variables
Variables are used to create programs that can be easily modified. Programs with
variables can be reused for various applications. All variables must begin with the “#”
character followed by a valid, “writeable” register number and an equal sign.
The example that follows sets the variable value (#500) to 110:
# 500 = 110.
There are four types of variables that can be used in NC programming: global, system,
local, and arguments. Arguments and local variables are only available in Macro Mode A.
Some variables are read only and an error is generated when an attempt is made to write
to the variable.
Global Variables
Global variables are general purpose variables that can be used by all programs. Assign a
value to the global variable before it is used in an equation or expression, or the variable
will be considered vacant. An error message is generated when the system attempts to
read a vacant variable.
If the value of a global variable is changed in a program, all other programs can reference
that variable with the new value.
Global variables range between #100 to #199 and #500 to #999.
System Variables
System variables are predefined variables that provide information about the state of the
system such as X, Y, Z, external work compensation, miscellaneous system parameters,
modal information, position information, and G code group status.
For instance, the coordinates of a probe touch are saved to variables #5061, #5062, and
#5063 when using the G31 command. These variables contain information about the
probe’s location when the probe touch occurs.
Macro Mode A Local Variables

Local variables are general purpose variables that are only valid within the current
program. They are only available in Macro Mode A and range from #1 through #33.
Assign a value to the local variable before using it in an equation or expression, or it will
be considered vacant. An error message is generated when the system attempts to read
a vacant variable.
These variables are nested, meaning that when a subprogram call is made, a new set of
local variables is received and the old set is stored. After leaving the subprogram, these
local variables are destroyed and the previous set is restored.

Passing parameters to subprograms automatically initializes local variables when
subprogram calls other than M98 are made. Refer to Passing Single Dedicated
Parameters to Subprograms, on page 3 - 221 for more information.
Macro Mode A Arguments

Parameters are the addresses which follow G65, G66, and M98. Arguments include the
parameter’s G group status, and they are used to pass parameters to subprograms. In
the table below, the subprogram numbers listed in the Value column contain the code
variable or G group modal status, and the subprogram numbers in the Status column
contain the status of corresponding values. Notice that these arguments are read only.
Macro Mode A Parameters

In the table below, the parameters’ values (I, J, K,.....Z) are stored in addresses #8004
to #8026 for Macro Mode A subprogram calls. The status for each variable is stored in
addresses #8104 to #8126. The status for the variables is non-zero (≥1) if an argument
is specified in the subprogram call, and zero otherwise.
Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters
Value of Status of
I #8004 ARG #8104 R
J #8005 ARG #8105 R
K #8006 ARG #8106 R
F #8009 ARG #8109 R
G #8010 ARG #8110 R
H #8011 ARG #8111 R
M #8013 ARG #8113 R
N #8014 ARG #8114 R
P #8016 ARG #8116 R
Q #8017 ARG #8117 R
R #8018 ARG #8118 R
S #8019 ARG #8119 R
T #8020 ARG #8120 R
X #8024 ARG #8124 R
Y #8025 ARG #8125 R
Z #8026 ARG #8126 R
Table 3–15. Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters

Macro Mode A G Code Groups
The value for each G Code Group is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for Macro Mode
A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined G and M Codes. The status is stored in
addresses #8130 to #8146. The status is non-zero if an argument is specified in the
subprogram call, and empty otherwise.
Value of Status of
00 #8030 ARG #8130 R
01 #8031 ARG #8131 R
02 #8032 ARG #8132 R
03 #8033 ARG #8133 R
05 #8035 ARG #8135 R
06 #8036 ARG #8136 R
07 #8037 ARG #8137 R
08 #8038 ARG #8138 R
09 #8039 ARG #8139 R
10 #8040 ARG #8140 R
11 #8041 ARG #8141 R
15 #8045 ARG #8145 R
16 #8046 ARG #8146 R
Table 3–16. Macro Mode A G Code Group Status

Read/Write Restrictions
Read only variables are fixed values. You can change write only variables. Some variables
within NCPP are read only (R), some are write only (W), and others are read/write (R/W).
Most variables can be used to store either real variables or 32 bit binary values, and the
software performs the appropriate conversions when the variables are used within
equations. The types of variables are identified as follows: Argument (A), Global (G),
Local (L), and System (S).
This table lists the NCPP variable types and read/write restrictions.
Variable Number Type Restriction Variable Number Type Restriction
#1 to #33 L R/W #4309 S R
#1 to #99 S R/W #4311 S R
#100 to #199 G R/W #4313 S R
#500 to #999 G R/W #4314 S R
#2000 S R #4315 S R
#2001 to #2200 S R/W #4319 S R
#2500 S R/W #4320 S R
#2501 to #2506 S R/W #5001 to #5004 S R
#2600 S R/W #5021 to #5023 S R
#2601 to #2606 S R/W #5041 to #5043 S R
#2700 S R/W #5061 to #5063 S R/W
#2701 to #2706 S R/W #5081 to #5083 S R
#3000 S R/W
#3004 S R/W #8004 A R/W
#3005 S R #8005 A R/W
#3007 S R #8006 A R/W
#4001 to #4021 S R #8009 A R/W
#4022 S R #8010 A R/W
#4102 S R #8011 A R/W
#4107 S R #8013 A R/W
#4109 S R #8014 A R/W
#4111 S R #8016 A R/W
#4113 S R #8017 A R/W
#4114 S R #8018 A R/W
#4115 S R #8019 A R/W

Variable Number Type Restriction Variable Number Type Restriction
#4119 S R #8020 A R/W
#4120 S R #8024 A R/W
#4201 to #4221 S R #8025 A R/W
#4222 S R #8026 A R/W
#4302 S R #8030 A R
#4307 S R #8031 A R
#8032 A R #8117 A R
#8033 A R #8118 A R
#8035 A R #8119 A R
#8036 A R #8120 A R
#8037 A R #8124 A R
#8038 A R #8125 A R
#8039 A R #8126 A R
#8040 A R #8130 A R
#8041 A R #8131 A R
#8045 A R #8132 A R
#8046 A R #8133 A R
#8104 A R #8136 A R
#8105 A R #8137 A R
#8106 A R #8138 A R
#8109 A R #8139 A R
#8110 A R #8140 A R
#8111 A R #8141 A R
#8113 A R #8145 A R
#8114 A R #8146 A R
#8116 A R
Table 3–17. NCPP Variable Types and Read Write Restrictions

Addresses with Variables
NC blocks contain addresses with specific numbers. Variables can be used in place of
numbers for addresses in the NC blocks, making the program generic. The example
below uses variables in the block’s address instead of the numbers they represent:
Number Variable
0.00 #110
-10.00 #115
1.00 #120
0.25 #121
12.00 #122
Address with Variables

G#110 X[#122+.3] Y-[#115/5.] Z[#120 + #121]
Address with Numbers

The same address would be written as follows if numbers were used instead of variables:
G0.00 X[12.00 + .3] Y-[10.00/5] Z[1.00 + 0.25]
–Or–
G0.00 X12.3 Y2 Z1.25
Alarm 3000 Messages

Variable #3000 writes an Alarm 3000 error message to the screen. The following is an
example of this type of error message:
#3000 = 140 (ARGUMENT MISSING)
The right-hand side of the equation must begin with a number in the range of 0 to 200
followed by a left parenthesis, a string which is limited to 26 characters, and a right
parenthesis. This number is added to 500 and stored to variable #3000. The message
“ARGUMENT MISSING” is displayed on the screen.

Vacant Variables
A variable is considered vacant if a local or global variable has not been assigned a value
before it is used in an equation or expression. An error message occurs with vacant
variables.
A variable can be tested to determine if it is vacant by comparing it with the null variable
#0. The variable #0 is called the “null variable” because it cannot be used to store a value
and is only used to perform vacant variable tests.
For example, the following IF conditional statement is true if variable #510 is vacant and
false if the variable is not vacant. (Refer to the “IF Statements” section of this chapter for
information about IF statements.)
IF[#510 EQ #0] GOTO 100
The function NE (not equal) can also be used with vacant variables.
It is best to avoid using vacant variables in equations. However, when it is necessary to

use them to maintain compatibility with existing programs, vacant variables can be used
in some circumstances without receiving an error message.

The following table shows what happens when vacant variables are used in equations
versus setting variables to zero. This table shows the difference between using vacant
variables and setting variables to 0 in equations:
Comparison of Vacant Variables and Setting Variables to Zero (0)
Null/Vacant Variable
Function Examples Variable Set to 0
(#10 = <vacant>) (#10 = 0)
Assignment #20 = #10 Error Message #20 = 0
Multiplication #20 = #10 * 3 #20 = 0 #20 = 0
#20 = #10 * #10 Error Message #20 = 0
#20 = #10 * #0 Error Message Error Message
#20 = #0 * 3 Error Message -
#20 = #0 * #0 Error Message -
Addition #20 = #10 + 3 #20 = 0 #20 = 0
#20 = #10 + #10 Error Message #20 = 0
#20 = #10 + #0 Error Message Error Message
#20 = #0 + 3 Error Message -
#20 = #0 + #0 Error Message -
EQ (equal) #10 EQ #0 True False
#10 EQ 0 Error Message True
NE (not equal) #10 NE #0 False True
#10 NE 0 Error Message False
GE (greater than or #10 GE #0 True False

equal to)
#10 GE 0 Error Message True
GT (greater than) #10 GT #0 Error Message Error Message
#10 GT 0 Error Message False
Other Functions - Error Message Depends on Function
Table 3–18. Comparison of Vacant Variables and Setting Variables to Zero (0)

Variable Expressions
Instead of using a number after an NC parameter, a variable expression (or math
expression) can be used.
• The “[”and the “]” characters serve as delimiters in the expressions.

• A negative sign entered before the left bracket ([) indicates that the
expression is negative (i.e. X-[[#110+3.4] + 4.5]).
Expression Symbols and Keywords

Various keywords and symbols can be used in the expressions. At least two letters of the
keyword are required: RO, ROU, ROUN, and ROUND perform the same function. The
software checks spelling. RUON is not a valid abbreviation for ROUND, but ROUN is
acceptable.
Symbol Description Example
+ Addition #500 = #600 + 2.3
- Subtraction #500 = #600 - 2.3
/ Division #500 = #600 / 2.3
* Multiplication #500 = #600 * 2.3
Power #500 = 4.5 ^ 2

^
(i.e. 2^2, 2 to the 2nd power, or 4) #500 will be set to 20.25.
Table 3–19. NC Expression Symbols

The keywords are described and examples are provided in the following table:
Operation
Description Example
Keyword
ABS Absolute Value #500 = ABS [-#550]
ACOS Arc or Inverse Cosine function #500 = ACOS [#540]
AND Logical AND #500 = #600 AND 48
ASIN Arc or Inverse Sine function #500 = ASIN [#540]
ATAN Arc Tangent (degrees) #500 = ATAN [.34]
BCD Convert Binary to BCD Format #500 = BCD [#600]
BIN Convert BCD to Binary Format #500 = BIN [#600]
COS Cosine (degrees) #500 = COS [45.3]
DEGREES Converts radians to degrees #500 = DEGREES [5.437]

#500 will be set to 311.52
degrees.
EQ Equal #500 = #510 EQ 3.4

#500 will be set to 0 if
false; 1 if true.
EXP Exponential function #500 = EXP [3.67]

#500 will be set to 39.252.
FIX Discards fractions less than 1 #500 = FIX [45.2375]

#500 will be set to 45
FUP Adds 1 for fractions less than 1 #500 = FUP [45.2375]

#500 will be set to 46
GE Greater Than Or Equal To #500 = #510 GE 3.4

false; 1 if true.
GT Greater Than #500 = #510 GT 3.4

false; 1 if true.
HSIN Hyperbolic Sine function #500 = HSIN[#540]
HCOS Hyperbolic Cosine function #500 = HCOS [#540]
INVERSE Binary Inverse function #500 = [7 AND [INV[3]]]

LE Less Than or Equal To #500 = #510 LE 3.4

false; 1 if true.
LN Natural Logarithmic function #500 = LN [24.89]


Operation
Description Example
Keyword
LOG Logarithmic function #500 = LOG [345.89]

LT Less Than #500 = #510 LT 3.4

false; 1 if true.
MOD Modulus operator #500 = 19 MOD 6.7

Will return a value of 5.6
NE Not Equal #500 = #510 NE 3.4

false; 1 if true.
OR Logical OR #500 = 41 OR 4
RADIANS Converts degrees to radians #500 = RADIANS [270.34]

#500 will be set to 4.718
radians.
ROUND Rounds off #500 = ROUND [34.56

result is 35]
SIN Sine (degrees) #500 = SIN [#610]
SQRT Square Root #500 = SQRT [#540]
TAN Tangent (degrees) #500 = TAN [32.4]
XOR Logical Exclusive OR #500 = #560 XOR 34
Table 3–20. NC Expression Keywords

The software automatically converts real numbers to hexadecimal format before
performing logical operations. The Operation Keyword “AND” does not function on real
numbers. As shown below, the #500 value is truncated to 32 and the #550 value is
truncated to 48. When the “AND” function is performed, the truncated numbers are
stored in variable #560.
• #500 = 32.456
• #550 = 48.98
• #560 = [#500 AND #550]
These examples are valid variable expressions:
• G01 X#140 Y [#500 + 2.] Z[#550 * [SIN [#130 + 23.5 ]]]

• G02 Z [2.3 / [SIN 43]] Y[2 ^ 3] G20 M25
• X [ROUN[3.45 * COS[#520]]]
• R [SQRT[[#510 ^ 2] + [#511 ^ 2]]]
• G01 X-#510 Y-[#520 + 4.5] Z4
Operation Priorities
The interpreter gives operations within the expression a certain priority in order to
determine how the expression is evaluated. This is a listing of the priorities:
Priority Operation
Highest Functions
Second Symbols Power (^)
Third Multiplication (*) Division (/)
Lowest Addition (+) Subtraction (-)
Table 3–21. Numerical Operations Priorities
Even though the interpreter assumes this priority, in order to make the NC program more
understandable and more maintainable, use brackets to divide the expressions. For
example, G01 X[34.5+23.4 / 32] should be rewritten as G01 X[34.5 + [23.4/32]]. Using
spacing within an expression can also make the expression more readable. Decimal
points and leading or trailing zeros are not required with the numbers.

Indirect Variables
Variables can be referenced indirectly by using multiple levels of pound signs (#) and
brackets ([ and ]).
#100 = 600⇐ #100 is equal to 600.
#600 = 4.5 ⇐ #600 is equal to 4.5.
#[#100] = 4.5⇐ #[#100] is equal to #600; #600 equals 4.5.
Macro Mode A variables are referenced indirectly by using a “9” as the first number:
In #9500, #9 is the address of the value at 500, which is the same as using
#[#500] in Macro Mode A or Macro Mode B.
Saving Variable Values To a File on the Control

When running the program on the CNC, if an error occurs during the program run, the
variable values are not saved. The variable values are saved if the program runs
successfully.
Variable Example
This program illustrates the use of #0 in an IF statement to determine if an argument is
passed to subprogram 3100. There are two IF statements in sequence numbers 100 and
200 in the subprogram which test to verify that the calling program (0100) had passed
parameters I and J which correspond to #4 and #7 in subprogram 3100, respectively. If
either variable #4 or #7 is vacant, an Alarm 3000 error message is written to the screen.
(Refer to the “Program Control Statements” section for more information about IF
statements.)

TRU_CRC.FNC
%
O0100 ⇐ Calling Program⎯0100⎯Start
T01 M06
S1500 M03
G00 G90 X5.0 Y5.0
G43 Z.1 H01
M08
G01 Z-.5 F5.0
G65 P3100 I.5 D2 F15.0
G00 Z.1 M09
G91 G28 Z0 M05
M30 ⇐ End of Program⎯0100
:3100(True CIRCLE TYPE 1) ⇐ Subprogram⎯3100⎯Start
#27 = #4001
#28 = #4003
#29 = #4107
N100 IF[#4EQ#0] GOTO 1000 ⇐ Vacant Variable Check
N200 IF[#7EQ#0] GOTO 1000
#1 = ABS [#4]-ABS [#[2000+#7]]
IF [#1LE0] GOTO 2
#20 = #1/2
#21 = ROUND [#20*1000]
#22 = #21/1000
#2 = #1-#22
#3 = #1-#2
IF [#23EQ#0] GOTO 10
G01 G91 X-#2 Y-#3 F#9
G17 G02 X-#3 Y#3 J#3

I#1
X#3 Y#3 I#3
G01 X#2 Y-#3 F[#9*3]
GOTO 5
N10 G01 G91 X-#2 Y#3 F#9
G17 G03 X-#3 Y-#3 J-#3
I#1 J0
X#3 Y-#3 I#3
G01 X#2 Y#3 F[#9*3]
GOTO 5
N1000 #3000 = 100(ARGUMENT MISSING) ⇐ Alarm Message
N5 G#27 G#28 D#29
M99 ⇐ M99 is end of Subprogram 3100
View the part using the Draw console key to verify that the part is programmed correctly.

Program Control Statements
Program control statements are NC blocks which direct the flow of the NC program or
subprogram. The following section describes using the different NCPP option’s program
control statements.
Program control statements use keywords: GOTO, IF, WHILE, and DO. At least two letters
of the keyword are required. For example, WH, WHI, WHIL, and WHILE all perform the
same function. Some program control statements are only effective within the current
program or subprogram, and other program control statements cause program execution
to go to subprograms. The software can only locate sequence numbers that are in
memory.
The following program control statements are effective only within the current program
being executed:
• WHILE [conditional expression] DO#

• DO#
• IF [conditional expression] GOTO [expression or #]
• GOTO [expression or #]
• END#
• M99 or M99 P____
These program control statements cause program execution to call subprograms:
• M98 P____
• G65 P____ L____ [Optional Argument List]
• G66 P____ L____ [Optional Argument List]
• User defined G code followed by [Optional Argument List]
• User defined M code followed by [Optional Argument List]
• User defined B, S, and T codes followed by optional parameter
Variables can be referenced indirectly to initialize a large block of variables, for example:
• #100 = 500
• WHILE [#100 LT 1000] DO 250
• #[#100] = 1.5
• #100 = #100+1
• END 250

The alternative to indirectly referencing variables is to have a program line for each
variable as shown below:
• #500 = 1.5
• #501 = 1.5
• …
• #999 = 1.5
In this case, 500 program lines would be required to perform what five program lines
accomplished in the first example.
GOTO Statements
GOTO statements jump the program to a specific number in the program. Any valid
address expression can be used in place of a sequence number after the GOTO. Fractions
are truncated. For example, GOTO 3.45 and GOTO 3 work the same. The program cannot
locate sequence numbers that are not in memory. If the search reaches the end of the
program without finding the sequence number, the software generates an error message.
Positive GOTO Statement

If the resultant value is positive, the software searches for the sequence number from the
point of the GOTO to the end of the program. Then it proceeds to the beginning of the
program and searches for the sequence number until reaching the starting point (GOTO
statement).
Negative GOTO Statement

If the resultant value of the expression is negative, the search begins at the beginning of
the program.
IF Statements
IF statements contain a conditional expression and a GOTO statement. The expression
which follows the GOTO must result in a valid sequence number; otherwise, an error
message is generated. The program cannot locate sequence numbers that are not in
memory. The following line illustrates an IF statement’s components:
• IF [conditional expression] GOTO [expression or #]

• If the conditional expression has a value of 1, it is true, and the GOTO is
performed.
• If the conditional expression has a value of 0, it is false, and the next NC
block is executed.
• If the conditional expression has a value other than 0 or 1, it is invalid.
These are examples of conditional expressions used in IF statements:
IF[[[#100 LT 2.3] OR [#320LE7.34]] AND [#400LT3.4]] GOTO#340

IF[#150 EQ 2] GOTO 10
IF[#750 GT 2.34] GOTO [[#550+23]/40]

WHILE Loops
WHILE loops contain a conditional expression and a DO statement. This is a sample
WHILE loop:
• WHILE [conditional expression] DO number

• NC block
• NC block
• NC block
• END number
The blocks between the WHILE statement and the END statement are repeated as long as
the conditional expression is true. The following are other details about WHILE loops:
• A WHILE loop must have a matching END statement within the same
program.
• The DO must match the number following END and must be an integer in the
range of 1 to 255.
• The program cannot locate sequence numbers that are not in memory.
• No other NC commands can be contained on the same lines as the WHILE or
END statements.
• If the WHILE conditional expression is false, the program continues execution
with the NC block which follows the END statement.
• DO loops operate the same as WHILE loops with a conditional expression
which is always true.
• The DO statement can also be used by itself without the WHILE conditional
statement.
To exit an infinite WHILE loop while the program is being drawn,

press the console Draw key.

DO Loops
DO loops operate the same as WHILE loops with a conditional expression which is always
true. The DO statement can also be used by itself without the WHILE conditional
statement. The following are some additional details about DO loops:
• DO loops must contain a matching END statement within the same program.
• The numbers following DO and END must match and must be an integer in
the range of 1 to 255.
• The program cannot locate sequence numbers not in memory.
• No other NC commands can be contained on the same lines as the DO or END
statements.
The following is a sample DO loop:
• DO number
• NC block
• NC block
• NC block
• END number
The blocks between the DO statement and the END statement are repeated continuously
in an infinite loop unless one of the following events occurs:
• The program exits the loop with a GOTO or M99 P ____ jump statement.
• The program execution is terminated with an M02 or M30.
• The right mouse button is pressed. The right mouse button acts as a graphics
reset.
To exit an infinite DO loop while the program is being drawn, press

the console Draw key.

Stop Program Execution
The M02 (End of Program) and M30 (End Program) program control statements stop
program execution. The following examples of program control statements are used
correctly:
Nested WHILE Branch Outside Subprogram Call Reuse of

Loops WHILE Loop from Inside DO-END Pairing
WHILE Loop Number
WHILE[...] DO 100 WHILE[...] DO 200 WHILE[...] DO 150 WHILE[...] DO 100

NC blocks NC blocks NC blocks NC blocks
WHILE[...] DO 200 GOTO 3535 M98 P3000 END 100
WHILE[...] DO 250 END 200 END 150 WHILE[...] DO 100
END 250 N3535 WHILE[...] DO 200 END 100
NC blocks NC blocks NC blocks
END 200 G65 P3000 WHILE[...] DO 100
END 100 END 200 END 100
NC blocks
Table 3–22. Correct Program Control Statement Examples
These examples show incorrect use of program control statements:
Incorrectly Nested Branch Into a Improper Reuse of

WHILE Loops WHILE Loop DO-END Pairing
Number
WHILE[...] DO 100 GOTO 3535 WHILE[...] DO 100

WHILE[...] DO 200 WHILE[...] DO 200 WHILE[...] DO 100
WHILE[...] DO 250 N3535 END 100
END 100 END 200 END 100
NC blocks NC blocks
END 200
NC blocks
END 250
Table 3–23. Incorrect Program Control Statement Examples

Subprograms
Subprograms are stand-alone NC programs that can be called from another NC program.
Subprograms begin with the letter “O” or the “:” character (but do not use the “%”)
followed by a four-digit number that identifies the subprogram. Each subprogram ends
with an M99 statement. The only limitation for the number of NC files and subprograms
the software can load is the amount of available dynamic RAM memory.
The following is a sample subprogram:
N10 O7162 ⇐ begins with “O” followed by 4-digit number
N20 G00 G90
N30 M25
N40 X0 Y0
N50 T1 M06
N60 Z5.
N70 S2000 M03
N80 Z0.05
N90 M99 ⇐ ends with M99
Subprograms can be nested 15 levels deep. In general, different types of subprogram

calls can be used in various combinations. There are some restrictions in the use of modal
subprograms and user defined G, M, B, S, and T subprogram calls, however, which will be
described in more detail later.
Programs cannot call themselves as subprograms because the repetition exhausts the 15
levels of subprogram nesting. For the same reason, a user defined code cannot be used in
a program which is associated with the same user defined code. For example, a G65
P5000 command is illegal within the program 5000.

G65 Subprogram Call
The G65 subprogram command has the following form:
G65 P____ L_____ [followed by optional arguments]
The P represents the subprogram number and the L represents the number of iterations
that the subprogram must perform. These two methods of argument passing can be used
together:
Arguments
In a G65 subprogram call, the local variables in the calling program are not copied to the
local variables in the called subprogram. Arguments which follow the G65 command are
copied to the local variables in the subprogram as illustrated in the following command:
G65 P5080 A0.0 B8 C2.3 S6 T2 H81 I9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R.1
The value which follows A is copied to the local variable #1 in the subprogram. The table
on the following page shows the relationships between the subprogram arguments and
the local variables in the subprograms.
Multiple Arguments
Multiple I, J, and K arguments can also be used as subprogram arguments. For example,
if three I arguments are used in the subprogram call, the first I maps to the #4 variable,
the second I maps to the #7 variable, and the third I maps to the #10 variable. The
following subprogram call is legitimate:
G65 P2000 A2.3 B3.2 I2.0 J3. K5.4 I3. I5. J2. I6. W3. U3
Only numbers may be used as arguments in a G65 subprogram call; no variables or

expressions can be used. If multiple iterations of the subprogram are to be performed,
the local variables will be initialized to the same argument values.

Passing Argument Lists to Subprograms in Macro Mode B
There are several methods for passing arguments and parameters to subprograms. The
G65 and G66 subprogram calls allow an argument list to be provided after the G65 and
G66, respectively. The user defined M Code and the user defined G Code allow an
argument list to be provided after the user defined Code. The argument list consists of
various letters followed by values. The values are then stored as local variables within the
subprogram.
The table below lists the correspondence between the arguments and the local variables
in Macro Mode B. The argument list is optional. Any arguments which are not included in
the list are given vacant status.
Macro Mode B
Subprogram Subprogram
Local Variables Local Variable
Arguments Arguments
#1 Argument A #18 Argument R or K5
#2 Argument B #19 Argument S or I6
#3 Argument C #20 Argument T or J6
#4 Argument I or I1 #21 Argument U or K6
#5 Argument J or J1 #22 Argument V or I7
#6 Argument K or K1 #23 Argument W or J7
#7 Argument D or I2 #24 Argument X or K7
#8 Argument E or J2 #25 Argument Y or I8
#9 Argument F or K2 #26 Argument Z or J8
#10 Argument I3 #27 Argument K8
#11 Argument H or J3 #28 Argument I9
#12 Argument K3 #29 Argument J9
#13 Argument M or I4 #30 Argument K9
#14 Argument J4 #31 Argument I10
#15 Argument K4 #32 Argument J10
#16 Argument I5 #33 Argument K10
#17 Argument Q or J5
Table 3–24. Macro Mode B Local Variables and Subprogram Arguments

Layering of Local Variables within Subprogram Calls
M98 subprogram calls use local variables differently from other subprogram calls since
the called subprogram does not get a new set of local variables. Changes made to the
local variables within the current subprogram will be retained when the calling program is
re-instated.
Changes can be made to the local variables within the current subprogram, but when
program execution returns to the calling program, the values of the local variables of the
calling program are reinstated. The local variables in the subprogram can be changed,
however, without affecting the local variables in the calling program. With other
subprogram calls, unless an argument list is passed to the subprogram, the local
variables are given vacant status.
Specifying Subprogram Iterations

The number of iterations for a subprogram to perform are specified with G65, G66, and
M98 subprogram calls.
Using G65 and G66

When making G65 and G66 subprogram calls, the L parameter is used to specify
iterations. The maximum number of iterations which can be specified with the G65 and
G66 subprogram calls is 999.
Using M98
When making M98 subprogram calls, the P parameter is used to specify iterations as well
as the subprogram number. Up to four digits can be used to specify iterations for a
maximum of 9999 iterations. Leading zeros are not required when specifying iterations;
however, leading zeros are required with a subprogram number that is less than 1000.

G65 Subprogram Example
In the following example a line of holes will be drilled along a line. The type of canned
cycle can be determined along with the distance between the holes in both the X and Y
axes. The type of canned cycle and various canned cycle parameters can also be set.

BOLT_LN.FNC
O4000
T1 M06
M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800
/
(B REPRESENTS THE NUMBER OF BOLT HOLES)
(H REPRESENTS THE DESIRED CANNED CYCLE)
(X,Y REPRESENT THE INCREMENTAL DISTANCE BETWEEN HOLES)
(Z REPRESENTS THE HOLE DEPTH)
(R REPRESENTS THE R PLANE LEVEL)
/
#500=99 (RETURN TO R LEVEL)
G65 P5070 X.5 Y.75 B10 H81 Z-1 Q0. R.1 F20.
M30
(*************************************************)
( BOLT HOLE LINE PATTERN - SUBPROGRAM 5070 )
(*************************************************)
O5070
(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF HOLES)
(#11 IS THE CANNED CYCLE NUMBER)
(#26 IS THE HOLE DEPTH)
(#500 IS 99 FOR RETURN TO R LEVEL MODE OR 98 FOR RETURN TO INITIAL POINT)
(#5003 IS THE Z COORDINATE BEFORE THE CANNED CYCLE IS PERFORMED)
/
WHILE [#2GT0] DO250
G91 G#500 G#11 Z#26 Q#17 R[#5003-#18] F#9
G00 X#24 Y#25
#2 = #2-1
END250
M99

Macro Instruction (G65)
G65 Macro instructions are G65 commands which are used to perform mathematical,
trigonometric, or program control functions instead of subprogram calls. These
commands are intended to support existing programs which use this program format.
The value in the H parameter defines the operation being performed. In all instructions
except the GOTO commands H80 through H86, a variable number follows the P
parameter. The operation’s result is stored in that variable number. In the following
command the value stored in variable #100 is added to the number 1 and the resultant
value is stored in variable #115.
G65 H02 P#115 Q#100 R1
For the GOTO commands, the value which follows the P is a positive or negative integer.
If the number is negative, the software begins searching for the sequence number at the
beginning of the file and continues to search for the sequence number until reaching the
end of the file. If the number is positive, the search for the sequence numbers begins
with the block after the GOTO command and continues until reaching the end of the file.
The software then searches from the beginning of the file until reaching the GOTO
command block.
The values which follow Q and R are general purpose parameters which are used in
mathematical, logical, or GOTO operations. The specific operations are listed in the
following table.
Format
The following is the G65 Macro Instruction format:
G65 H ____, P #a , Q #b , R #c ,.

The table below lists the Descriptions and Instruction Functions for the H codes used in
the G65 macro instructions:
H Code Description Instruction Function
H01 Definition, Substitution #a = #b
H02 Addition #a = #b + #c
H03 Subtraction #a = #b - #c
H04 Product #a = #b * #c
H05 Division #a = #b / #c
H11 Logical Sum #a = #b .OR. #c
H12 Logical Product #a = #b .AND. #c
H13 Exclusive OR #a = #b .XOR. #c
H21 Square Root #a = √#b
H22 Absolute Value #a = |#b|
Remainder #a = #b - trunc (#b/#c) * #c

H23
trunc: discard fractions less than 1.
H24 Conversion from BCD to Binary #a = BIN(#b)
H25 Conversion from binary to BCD #a = BCD(#b)
H26 Combined Multiplication/Division #a = (#a * #b) / #c
H27 Combined Square Root 1 #a = √(#b2 + #c2)
H28 Combined Square Root 2 #a = √(#b2 - #c2)
H31 Sine #a = #b * SIN(#c)
H32 Cosine #a = #b * COS (#c)
H33 Tangent #a = #b * TAN(#c)
H34 Arc tangent #a = TAN(#b/#c)
H80 Unconditional Divergence (GOTO) GOTO a
H81 If Statement, Equals IF #b = #c, GOTO a
H82 If Statement, Not Equal IF #b ≠ #c, GOTO a
H83 If Statement, Greater Than IF #b > #c, GOTO a
H84 If Statement, Less Than IF #b < #c, GOTO a
H85 If Statement, Greater Than/Equals IF #b >= #c, GOTO a
H86 If Statement, Less Than/Equals IF #b <= #c, GO TO a
Table 3–25. H Code Descriptions and Instruction Functions for G65 Macro Instructions

For H80 through H86, if “a” has a negative value, the software performs a GOTO but
begins looking for the sequence number at the beginning of the program. No variables
can be used for the P parameter for H80 through H86.
The G65 Macro Instructions are intended to support existing Macro A

programs. Use equations and regular GOTO statements in place of
these instructions when developing new programs.
For example use #100 = 4.56 OR #110 instead of G65 #11 P#100
Q4.56 R#110.
And use IF [#150 EQ #160] GOTO 100 instead of G65 H81 P100
Q#150 R#160.
These commands can be used in either Macro A or B mode.
Example
The following example shows how to use G65 macro instructions in a Bolt Hole Circle
subprogram:

G65INST.FNC
%
(#600 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE X COORD)
(#601 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Y COORD)
(#602 IS BOLT HOLE CIRCLE RADIUS)
(#603 IS STARTING ANGLE)
(#604 IS NUMBER OF BOLT HOLES)
#600 = 0
#601 = 0
#602 = 2.
#603 = 30.
#604 = 12.
T1 M6
G00 X0 Y0 Z0.05
M98 P3030
G00 X0 Y0 Z0.05
M02
O3030
(#110 IS BOLT HOLE COUNTER)
(#112 IS ANGLE OF CURRENT HOLE)
(#113 IS X COORD OF CURRENT HOLE)
(#114 IS Y COORD OF CURRENT HOLE)
N10 G65 H01 P#110 Q0
G65 H22 P#111 Q#604
N20 G65 H04 P#112 Q#110 R360
G65 H05 P#112 Q#112 R#604

G65INST.FNC
G65 H02 P#112 Q#603 R#112
G65 H32 P#113 Q#602 R#112
G65 H02 P#113 Q#600 R#113
G65 H31 P#114 Q#602 R#112
G65 H02 X#114 Q#601 R#114
G90 H00 X#113 Y#114
G81 Z-1. F20.
G80
G65 H02 P#110 Q#110 R1
G65 H84 P-20 Q#110 R#111
M99
View the part using the Draw console key to verify that the part is programmed correctly

Modal Subprograms
Modal subprograms are executed every time a motion is performed (i.e., after a Move
command). Use them for performing repetitive tasks at different locations. The repetitive
tasks can be put inside a modal subprogram. A subprogram call can be made to a
program which contains X, Y, and Z locations and will be executed at each of these
locations.
A modal subprogram will not be modal within another modal subprogram. If the modal
subprogram contains Move commands, the modal subprogram will not be performed
after Move commands within the modal subprogram. This allows Move commands to be
contained within modal subprograms.
These methods allow the subprogram call to be modal:
• A Modal Subprogram Call (G66) Command

• A Modal user defined G code
Modal Subprogram Call (G66)

In a G66 Modal subprogram call, the subprogram is repeatedly executed after each Move
command until the Modal Subprogram Call Cancel (G67) command is performed.
Modal User Defined G Code

The user defined G code is made modal by entering a negative number in the G code
column on the Change NC Parameters screen. Only one user defined G code can be
designated as a modal subprogram. The first one in the list is treated as modal if more
than one negative number is entered in the G code column. The remaining negative G
codes are treated as regular user defined G codes.
When the modal user defined G code is encountered in the NC program, the subprogram
becomes modal until a G67 is used. Only one modal subprogram can be in effect at any
given time; an error message occurs if a modal subprogram is first initiated with a G66
command and the modal user defined G code is then attempted.
Modal Subprogram Cancel (G67)

The G67 command is used to cancel modal subprograms initiated with either the G66 or
with a modal user defined G code.

Modal Subprogram Call (G66) Example
The following program draws a series of squares and rectangles:

G66.FNC
%
(EXAMPLE OF MODAL SUBPROGRAM CALL G66)
(P6010 IS USED AS MODAL SUBPROGRAM)
(THE VALUES AFTER I AND J ARE PASSED TO)
(THE SUBPROGRAM. THE SUBPROGRAM IS ONLY)
(EXECUTED AFTER BLOCKS WITH MOVE COMMANDS.)
X0 Y0 Z0
X5 G66 P6010 I1. J1.5
Y-3
X-5
Y0
(MODAL SUBPROGRAM IS NOW CANCELED WITH G67)
G67
Y3
(THE MODAL SUBPROGRAM IS STARTED AGAIN WITH)
(NEW PARAMETERS.)
X0 G66 P6010 I3.J1.
Y0
Y-2
M02
:6010
(THIS SUBPROGRAM CREATES A SIMPLE BOX SHAPE.)
G91
X#4
Y#5
X-#4
Y-#5
G90
M99

User Defined Codes
G, M, S, B, and T codes can be customized to perform specialized tasks. Enable these
codes on the NC Parameters Configuration Parameters screen by placing the cursor at the
code’s field and selecting the Yes softkey.
User defined G and M codes define a custom code in a subprogram which replaces an
existing G or M code, performs a specialized task, or provides compatibility between
different NC dialects from various machine tool control manufacturers. For instance, if a
different NC program uses G codes for canned cycles that are not defined by Hurco BNC
or ISNC, User Defined G codes can re-map the canned cycles to enable the program to
run on a Hurco. You can also set User Defined Codes to allow a BNC subprogram to be
used in ISNC mode.
The user defined B, S, and T subprograms provide additional user defined subprograms.
User defined S and T subprograms replace the spindle and tool functions with custom
subprograms.
Before enabling any User Defined Code, a subprogram will need to be created that
contains the Hurco-acceptable operations to replace the code that is not recognized or
needs to be changed. Follow all instructions for creating a subprogram in Subprograms,
on page 3 - 205. The subprogram number must use one of the valid subprogram
numbers associated with each code. The subprogram(s) must be loaded into the Program
Manager prior to running the main program. For the main program:
1. Select the Program Parameters softkey.

2. Select the NC Parameters softkey.
3. Enable the appropriate User Defined Code.
4. Enter the code from the main program in the subprogram list to indicate the
G- or M-code that is to be replaced by the subprogram (for example, if G86 is
to be replaced by a G76 in subprogram 9010, set 86 in 9010 field). For S-, B-,
and T-codes no code number is required.
G Codes
G1 through G100 (except G65, G66, and G67) can be programmed for user defined G
codes. Enable the user defined G codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User G Code field
on the NC Parameters screen. The subprogram is executed after every Move command
once the modal G code is invoked.
User Defined G Code Example

This example converts a G86 Bore Orient cycle for BNC into a G76 Bore Orient cycle
compatible with ISNC option. Up to 10 user defined G codes can be defined on the
Change NC Parameters screen.
To re-map BNC G86 to ISNC G76 follow these steps:
1. Press the console Input key to display the Input screen.

2. Press the Program Parameters softkey.
3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The Change NC Parameters screen appears.

4. Select the NC M and G Code Parameters softkey.
5. Enable the User G Codes field by placing the cursor at the field and selecting
the Yes softkey.
6. Set 9010 to 86 on the Change NC Parameters screen.
7. Load the 9010: program.

G86_TRAN.FNC
G99 G90 G00 X0.0 Y0.0 Z1.0
G86 X2.0 Y3.0 Z3.0 I1.0 J0.0 R1.0 F100. ⇐ User defined G86 called
O9010 ⇐ Subprogram⎯9010⎯ Start
IF [#4003 EQ 91] GOTO 100 user defined G86)
(TRANSLATION FOR ABSOLUTE MODE)
G76 X#24 Y#25 Z[#5003-#26] R[#5003-#18] I#4 J#5 F#9
GOTO 200
(TRANSLATION FOR INCREMENTAL MODE)
N100 G76 X#24 Y#25 Z[-#26] R[-#18] I#4 J#5 F#9
N200
M99 ⇐ End of Subprogram⎯9010
M Codes
Up to 13 user defined M codes can be programmed from M01 through M100 (except M02,
M30, M98, and M99). Enable the user defined M codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User
M Code field on the NC Parameters screen. The user defined M codes can be assigned to
subprograms 9020 through 9029 and 9001 through 9003.
There are no modal user defined M codes; therefore, negative numbers cannot be
entered in the column for user defined M codes on the Change NC Parameters screen.

User Defined M Code Example
This example converts an M77 into a rectangle:

3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The Change NC Parameters screen appears.
5. Enable the User M Codes field by placing the cursor at the field and selecting
the Yes softkey.
6. Enter 77 into the 9020 field.
The following program re-maps a BNC G86 Bore Orient cycle to the ISNC G76 cycle:

USER_MAC.FNC
%
(GOTO NC PARAMETERS PAGE)
(FIRST ENABLE USER DEFINED M CODES)
(SET USER DEFINED 9020 TO 77)
X0 Y0 Z0 ⇐ Main Program Start
X5
Y-3
X-5
Y0
G67
Y3
X0
M77 ⇐ M77 Call
Y4
M77
M02 ⇐ Main Program End
:9020 ⇐ Subprogram⎯9020⎯ Start (user defined M77)
G91
X.75
Y1.5
X-.75
Y-1.5
M99 ⇐ End of Subprogram⎯
E

S, B, and T Codes
Enable the user defined S, B, or T codes by selecting Yes in the Enable User S, B, or T
Code field on the Change NC Parameters screen. The software executes the appropriate
subprogram when it encounters an S, B, or T code in an NC program.
If a user defined T subprogram call is made, Tool Function commands T____ contained
within program 9000 will be treated as normal Tool Function commands. If a number
follows the T, this value is stored in variable #149. Including a number after the S, B, or T
is optional.
The variable numbers and subprogram numbers are fixed for these subprogram calls:
User Defined B Variable #146 Program #9028
User Defined S Variable #147 Program #9029
user Defined T Variable #149 Program #9000
Table 3–26. Fixed Variable and Subprogram Numbers
User Defined S, B, and T Code Example

Follow these steps before running the sample user defined S, B, and T code program:

3. Select the NC Parameters softkey. The NC Parameters screen appears.
5. Enable the User S Codes, B Codes, and T Codes fields by placing the cursor at
each field and selecting the Yes softkey.

BST.FNC
%
(GOTO NC PARAMETERS PAGE)
(FIRST ENABLE B, S, AND T CODES)
X0 Y0 Z0
X5 B1.4 Y2 ⇐ user defined B Call
Y-3 S2. ⇐ user defined S Call
X-3 T1.5 Y-1.5 ⇐ user defined T Call
X-5 Y0 B.75 ⇐ user defined B Call
Y3 S1.8 ⇐ user defined S Call
X0 T2.
Y0
M02

:9000(USER DEFINED T MACRO)
G91
X#149
X-[#149/2] Y#149
X-[#149/2] Y-#149
G90
M99
:9028(USER DEFINED B MACRO)
G91
X#146
Y#146
X-#146
Y-#146
G90
M99
BST.FNC
:9029(USER DEFINED S MACRO)

G91
X#147
X[#147/2] Y#147
X-#147
X-[#147/2] Y-#147
G90
M99

Passing Single Dedicated Parameters to Subprograms
User defined subprogram calls’ conditions are listed in the table below. If a user defined
M, G, S, B, or T subprogram call is not allowed, it is treated as a normal M, G, S, B, or T
code. There are no restrictions for G65, G66, and M98 subprogram calls provided that the
subprogram has been loaded in memory.
For user defined S, B, and T subprograms, a single parameter is passed to the

subprogram. These parameters are optional and they are stored at specific variable
locations. The value of the passed parameter can be retrieved by accessing the specific
variable which corresponds to the parameter. For example, variable #149 is used for the
T subprogram parameter, variable #147 is used for the S subprogram parameter, and
#146 is used for the B subprogram parameter. The table below lists the conditions for
using modal and user defined subprograms:
Types of Conditions Under Which User Defined Subprograms Can Be

User Defined Utilized
Subprograms
No
User User User User User
Sub-
M98 G65 G66 M G B S T
prgram
Code Code Code Code Code
Call
User G Code X X X X X X X
User M Code X X X X X X
User T Code X X X X
User B Code X X X X
User S Code X X X X
Table 3–27. Conditions Under Which User Defined Subprograms Can Be Utilized

While executing a user defined S Code subprogram, user defined G and M Codes can be
used, but user defined S, B, and T Codes cannot. There are several different ways of
performing subprogram calls. The information in the following table illustrates the
different methods for making subprogram calls. The format of the optional argument list
is the same for all the different methods of subprogram calls.
Types of Subprogram Capabilities

Subprogram Calls
Modal Can Optional Single
Capability Specify Argument Predefined
Iterations List Parameters
G65 X X
G66 X X X
M98 X
User Defined G Codes Optional X
User Defined M Codes X
T Code X
B Code X
S Code X
Table 3–28. Subprogram Capabilities

This table shows which program numbers are assigned to the different macro calls and
their variables:
Program # Macro Call Variables Note
9000 T-Subprogram Parameter @ #149
M-Macro Mode A #8004-#8026 are R/W, Status #8104-#8146

9001
#8030-#8046 are R Tool Offsets #1-#99

9002

9003
9010 G-Code
9011 G-Code
9012 G-Code
9013 G-Code
9014 G-Code
9015 G-Code
9016 G-Code
9017 G-Code
9018 G-Code
9019 G-Code
9020 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33
9028 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33 B-Parameter @ #146
9029 M-Macro Mode B #1-#33 S-Parameter @ #147
Table 3–29. Program Numbers and Their Assigned Macro Calls and Variables

NCPP Variable Summary
In the tables below, the Type column indicates the type of variable: Argument (A),
System (S), Common (C), and Local (L). The R/W column indicates whether the variable
is Read or Read/Write.
Variable Number Type R/W Local Variables for Macro Mode B (Note 3)
#1 A R/W Address A (Note 4)
#2 A R/W Address B (Note 4)
#3 A R/W Address C (Note 4)
#4 A R/W Address I (Note 1)or I1 (Note 2)
#5 A R/W Address J (Note 1) or J1 (Note 2)
#6 A R/W Address K (Note 1) or K1(Note 2)
#7 A R/W Address D (Note 1) or I2 (Note 2)
#8 A R/W Address E(Note 1) or J2 (Note 2)
#9 A R/W Address F (Note 1) or K2 (Note 2)
#10 A R/W Address I3 (Note 2)
#11 A R/W Address H (Note 1) or J3 (Note 2)
#12 A R/W Address K3 (Note 2)
#13 A R/W Address M (Note 1)or I4 (Note 2)
#14 A R/W Address J4 (Note 2)
#17 A R/W Address Q (Note 1) or J5 (Note 2)
#18 A R/W Address R (Note 1) or K5 (Note 2)
#19 A R/W Address S (Note 1) or I6 (Note 2)
#20 A R/W Address T (Note 1) or J6 (Note 2)
#21 A R/W Address U (Note 1) or K6 (Note 2)
#22 A R/W Address V (Note 1) or I7 (Note 2)
#23 A R/W Address W (Note 1) or J7 (Note 2)
#24 A R/W Address X (Note 1) or K7 (Note 2)
#25 A R/W Address Y (Note 1) or I8 (Note 2)
#26 A R/W Address Z (Note 1) or J8 (Note 2)
#27 A R/W Address K8(Note 2)
#30 A R/W Address K9(Note 2)
Table 3–30. NCPP Local Argument Variables (#1 - #33) for Macro Mode B

1. Valid for argument assignment method 1 where multiple sets
of (I,J,K) are not used.
2. Valid for argument assignment method 2 where multiple sets
of (I,J,K) are used.
3. Local variables are used to pass arguments to a macro. If a
local variable without a transferred argument is vacant in its
initial status, it can be used freely in the macro.
4. Valid for argument assignment method 1 and 2
Custom Macro Mode A
Variable Number Type R/W Tool Offset Amounts
#1 to #99 S R/W Tool offset amounts for custom macro mode A
Table 3–31. Tool Offset Variable Numbers for Macro Mode A (#1 - #99)
Variable Number
#100 to #199 Type R/W Common Variables
#500 to #999
#100 to #199 Use these variables to store binary numbers as

well as real numbers. All programs and
subprograms can read and write to them.
C R/W
Variables #146, #147, and #149 also store the
values which follow the B, S, and T code when B,
S, and T subprogram calls are performed.
#500 to #999 Use these variables to store binary numbers as

C R/W well as real numbers. All programs and
subprograms can read and write to them.
Table 3–32. NCPP Common Variables (#100 - #199 and #500 - #599)
Variable Number Tool Offset/Wear Number Variables

Type R/W
#2000 to #2200 Macro Mode B
#2000 S R Tool Length Offset Number 00. (Always 0.)
#2001 to #2200 S R/W Tool Length Offset Number 1-200 for H.
#12001 to #12200 S R/W Tool Radius Offset Number 1-200 for D.
Table 3–33. Tool Offset/Wear Number Variables for Macro Mode B (#2000 - #2200)

Variable Number External Work Compensation and
#2500 to Type R/W Work Coordinate System 1 (G54) to 6 (G59)
#2906 Used to Read/Write Zero Point Offset Values
#2500 S R/W X External Work Compensation.

Compensation is applied to the Work Coordinate
System 1 to 6 X value.
#2501 to #2506 S R/W X For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6
#2600 S R/W Y External Work Compensation.

System 1 to 6 Y value.
#2601 to #2606 S R/W Y For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6
#2700 S R/W Z External Work Compensation.

System 1 to 6 Z value.
#2701 to #2706 S R/W Z For Work Coordinate System 1 to 6
#2800 to #2906 S R/W Rotary Axes for External Work Coordinates 1 to 6.
4 axis program types:

• Rotary A: 2800 - 2899 = Work offsets
for A axis, 2900s are unused
• Rotary B: 2800 - 2899 = Work offsets
for B axis, 2900s are unused
5 axis program types:

• Rotary A, Tilt B: 2800s = A, 2900s = B
• Tilt A, Rotary C: 2800s = A, 2900s = C
• Tilt B, Rotary C: 2800s = B, 2900s = C
• Universal: 2800s = IV, 2900s = V
Table 3–34. External Work Compensation and Work Coordinate System 1 Variables (#2500 -
#2906)

Variable Number
Type R/W Miscellaneous System Parameters
#3000 to #3005
#3004 If #3004 = 0 to 7, feed hold, feedrate override

(F.O.), or exact stop check (E.S.C.) will be enabled
or disabled.
Currently not implemented.
#3004 Feed Hold F.O. E.S.C.
0 0 0 0
1 X 0 0
2 0 X 0
S R/W
3 X X 0
4 0 0 X
5 X 0 X
6 0 X X
7 X X X
Key: 0 = Effective, X= Suppressed
Feed Hold and Exact Stop are currently not
implemented.
#3005 Provides the condition of mirror image of each axis

at that time.
Bit 0:
X axis (set to 1 if X axis mirroring is being used)
Bit 1:
Y axis (set to 1 if Y axis mirroring is being used)
S R
Bit 4:
inch/mm status flag
inch input (set to 1)
mm input (set to 0)
Bit 6:
absolute/incremental flag
absolute (set to 1)
incremental (set to 0)
#3007 S R Indicates the active pallet number, 1 or 2.
#3020 Indicates whether the probe touched during a G31

move.
S R
Equals 0 if the probe does not touch. Equals 1 if the
probe does touch.
Table 3–35. Miscellaneous System Parameters Variables (#3000 - #3020)

Tool Probe
Variable Number Type R/W Description
#3101 S Current Tool Number
#3102 S R Tool Probe present
#3103 S R Tool Probe X location
#3104 S R Tool Probe Y location
#3110 S R Tool Probe X Plus Offset location
#3111 S R Tool Probe X Negative Offset location
#3112 S R Tool Probe Y Plus Offset location
#3113 S R Tool Probe Y Negative Offset location
#3114 S R Tool Probe Z Plus Offset location
#3115 S R Tool Probe Z Negative Offset location
#3116 S R Tool Probe Tool Length tolerance
Table 3–36. Tool Probe Variables (#3101 - #3116)
Part Probe
#3120 S R Part Probe X Plus Offset location
#3121 S R Part Probe X Negative Offset location
#3122 S R Part Probe Y Plus Offset location
#3123 S R Part Probe Y Negative Offset location
#3124 S R Part Probe Z Plus Offset location
#3125 S R Part Probe Z Negative Offset location
#3126 S R Part Probe Z (reserved; not supported)
#3127 S R Part Probe Safety Min Z (reserved; not supported)
#3128 S R Tool Probe safety Min Z (reserved; not supported)
#3129 S R Tool Probe Z (reserved; not supported)
Table 3–37. Part Probe Variables (#3120 - #3129)

Tool Variables
#3201-#3300 S R Tool Type
#3301-#3400 S R Tool Diameter
#3401-#3500 S R Reserved
#3501-#3600 S R Tool Probe Offset X
#3601-#3700 S R Tool probe Offset Y
#3701-#3800 S R/W Probe Calibration
#3801-#3900 S R/W Tool Calibration
Table 3–38. Tool Variables (#3201 - #3900)
There are 100 variables each reserved for tool type, tool diameter,
tool calibration, probe calibration, tool probe offset X, and tool probe
offset Y regardless of whether or not the machine can handle that
many tools. If the program tries to access a variable for a tool that
does not exist, an error is generated. The variables for tool type
(#3201 – #3300) have these values:
Undefined -10
Drill -11
Tap -12
Bore -13
Mill -14
Face Mill -15
Ball End -16
Back Spot Face -17
Probe -18
Gun Drill -19

Variable Number
Type R/W Modal Information from Previous Block
#4001 to #4120
#4001 to #4021 S R G Code Groups 1 to 21
#4022 S R G Code Group 22
#4102 S R B Code
#4107 S R D Code
#4109 S R F Code
#4111 S R H Code
#4113 S R M Code
#4114 S R Sequence Number of previous block
#4115 S R Program Number of previous block
#4119 S R S Code
#4120 S R T Code
Table 3–39. Modal Information from Previous Block Variables (#4001 - #4120)
Variable Number
Type R/W Modal Information for Current Block
#4201 to #4210
#4201 to #4221 S R G Code Groups 1 to 21
#4222 S R G Code Group 22
#4302 S R B Code
#4307 S R D Code
#4309 S R F Code
#4311 S R H Code
#4313 S R M Code
#4314 S R Sequence Number of current block
#4315 S R Program Number of current block
#4319 S R S Code
#4320 S R T Code
Table 3–40. Modal Information for Current Block Variables (#4201 - #4320)

Variable Number
Type R/W Position Information
#5001 to #5083
#5001 to #5004 X, Y, Z, and A axis block end part coordinate

respectively.
S R
Coordinates are referenced to the current
coordinate system.
#5021 to #5023 X, Y, and Z axis machine coordinate position

respectively.
Coordinates are referenced to the current working
S R coordinate system.
Based on real time measured position.
These variable cannot be used while Cutter
Compensation is active.
#5041 to #5043 X, Y, and Z axis work coordinate position

respectively.
Coordinates are referenced to the current working
S R coordinate system.
These variable cannot be used while Cutter
Compensation is active.
#5061 to #5063 X, Y, and Z axis skip signal position respectively.

Coordinates are referenced to the current
S R/W
coordinate system (machine, local, or working).
#5081 to #5083 S R X, Y, and Z axis tool offset respectively.
Table 3–41. Position Information Variables (#5001 - #5083)
Arguments in the following table are variables used only in Macro A subprograms that
pass parameters to subprograms. They are used to support existing Macro A
subprograms. When a Macro A subprogram is called, the variables #8004 to #8026 are
initialized with the address values in the calling program. Variables #8104 to #8126 are
set to 1 if the address value is valid, and they are set to 0 if the address value is invalid.
In general, variables #8004 to #8026 are initialized after a subprogram call is made.
These variables are not kept up to date. They are only valid immediately after a
subprogram call. Variables #8104 to #8126 are set to 1 during a subprogram call and
reset to 0 when the software returns from the subprogram.
Likewise, variables #8030 to #8046 are initialized to the G group modal status when a
Macro A subprogram is called. Variables #8130 to #8146 are then set to 1 if the
corresponding parameter is passed.

Variable Number Macro Mode A
Value Status Type R/W Subprogram Parameters
#8004 #8104 A R I
#8005 #8105 A R J
#8006 #8106 A R K
#8009 #8109 A R F
#8010 #8110 A R G
#8011 #8111 A R H
#8013 #8113 A R M
#8014 #8114 A R N
#8016 #8116 A R P
#8017 #8117 A R Q
#8018 #8118 A R R
#8019 #8119 A R S
#8020 #8120 A R T
#8024 #8124 A R X
#8025 #8125 A R Y
#8026 #8126 A R Z
Table 3–42. Macro Mode A Subprogram Parameters Variables (#8004 - #8026, #8104 - #8126)
The G code groups’ values are stored in addresses #8004 to #8026

for Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined M
and G codes. The G code groups’ status is stored in addresses #8114
to #8126. The software sets the value to 1 if an argument is
specified in the subprogram call.
#8104 is non-zero if an argument is specified during the macro call

and zero if no argument is specified.
#8004 has a valid value if #8104 is non-zero and may be undefined

if #8104 is zero.

Variable Number Macro Mode A
Value Status Type R/W G Code Group Status
#8030 #8130 S R Group 00 G codes
#8031 #8131 S R Group 01 G codes: G00, G01, G02, G03
#8032 #8132 S R Group 02 G codes: G17, G18, G19
#8033 #8133 S R Group 03 G codes: G90, G91
#8035 #8135 S R Group 05 G codes: G94
#8039 #8139 Group 09 G codes: G73, G74, G76, G80-

S R
G89
#8045 #8145 S R Group 15 G codes: G61, G62, G63, G64
Table 3–43. Macro Mode A G Code Group Status Variables (#8030 - #8046, #8130 - #8146)
The G code groups’ status is stored in addresses #8030 to #8046 for

Macro Mode A subprogram calls G65, G66, and user defined M and G
codes.
The status is stored in addresses #8130 to #8146 and is non-zero if

an argument is specified in the subprogram call. It is zero if no
argument is specified in the subprogram call.

Programming Examples
This section contains NC programming examples. The first one uses basic BNC
programming features while the second example uses the NCPP programming features.
The third example illustrates Polar Coordinates in a subprogram.
NC Part Program Example

Following the simple drawing below, of a part program, is a sample NC part program that
may be used to test the BNC programming features.
Figure 3–48. Sample NC Part Program Drawing

Here is one way the part shown on the previous page may be programmed using the NC
system:
BNC Part Program 1 Inch

PART.HNC
%
N10 G0 G90 x0. Y0. S500 T1 M6
N12 X0.5 Y0.5 Z0.5 M3
N15 G81 X0.5 Y0.5 Z0.75 F5.
N20 X0.5 Y7.5
N25 X9.5 Y7.5
N30 X9.5 Y0.5
N35 G0 X0. Y0. S1000 T2 M6
N40 G0 X5. Y6.5 Z0.5
N50 G0 G42 X5. Y6.5 M3
N55 G1 Z-0.25 F5.
N65 G2 X5. Y1.5 I5. J4. F10.
N70 X5. Y6.5 I5. J4.
N71 G0 Z0.5
N72 G0 G40 X5. Y6.5
N75 G0 Y10.5 Z3. M2
E

NCPP Example—Bolt Hole Circle
The Bolt Hole Circle program uses subprograms to produce five different Bolt Hole
patterns, as shown below, and specifies which canned cycle to use, how many holes to
skip, and on which hole to begin the skip.
Figure 3–49. Bolt Hole Circle Example Drawing

BOLT_ABS.FNC
%
O4000
T1 M06
M03 G00 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800
#500 = 99
G65 P5080 A30.0 B10 C2.5 S4 T3 H81 I-9 J-3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.7
G65 P5080 A30.0 B12 C2.6 S2 T4 H81 I9 J-3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.2
G65 P5080 A0.0 B8 C2.3 S6 T2 H81 I9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.4
G65 P5080 A30.0 B9 C2.5 S2 T1 H81 I-9 J3.5 K0 Z-1 R-.1
#1 = 0
WHILE [#1LT5] DO 100
#500 = 98
G65 P5080 A90.0 B5 C[1.5+#1] S0 T0 H81 I0 J0 K.5 Z-2 R-.7
#1 = #1+1
N1000 END 100
M02

BOLT_ABS.FNC
O5080
(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF HOLES)
(#3 IS THE RADIUS)
(#4 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT X COORD)
(#5 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT Y COORD)
(#6 IS THE BOLT CIRCLE CENTER PT Z COORD)
(#18 IS THE RETURN LEVEL)
(#19 IS THE HOLE TO SKIP)
(#11 IS THE CANNED CYCLE NUMBER)
(#26 IS THE HOLE DEPTH)
#30 = [360.0/#2]
#31 = 0
#32 = 0
#33 = 0
WHILE [#31LT#2] DO 250
#7 = [#1+[#31*#30]]
IF [[#19-1]EQ#31] GOTO 200
IF[#32EQ1] GOTO 200
#33 = 1
G00 Z#6
G#500 G#11 Z#26 X[#4+[#3*COS[#7]]] Y[#5+[#3*SIN[#7]]] R[#18] F20.
N200 #31 = #31+1
IF [#33EQ1] GOTO 300
IF [#20EQ0] GOTO 300
#20 = #20-1
#32 = 1
GOTO 310
N300 #32 = 0
N310 #33 = 0
N400 END 250
M99

NCPP Example—Gear Pattern
The program below uses Polar Coordinates in a subprogram to generate a Gear pattern:
Figure 3–50. Display of Gear Pattern Example

GEAR_ABS.HNC
%
M03 G00 G21 G90 X0 Y0 Z0 S1800
(VARIABLE #4006 - INCHES/METRIC)
IF [#4006 EQ 20] GOTO 10
IF [#4006 EQ 21] GOTO 15
N10 #850 = 25.4
GOTO 20
N15 #850 = 1.0
N20
G65 P5085 A30.0 B8 C2.5 S0 H2. I1 J1 K1 R.45 T.2
G65 P5085 A0.0 B5 C1.5 S0 H1.2 I5 J3 K1 R.3 T.2
G65 P5085 A15. B20 C1.8 S0 H1.5 I5 J-3. K1 R.6 T.1
M02
/

GEAR_ABS.HNC
O5085
(#2 IS THE NUMBER OF GEAR TEETH)
(#3 IS THE OUTSIDE RADIUS)
(#11 IS THE INSIDE RADIUS)
(#4 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT X COORD)
(#5 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Y COORD)
(#6 IS THE GEAR CENTER PT Z COORD)
(#19 IS THE TOOTH TO SKIP)
(#18 IS THE TOOTH RATIO)
/
#30 = [360.0/#2]
#31 = 0
#22 = [#30*#18]
#23 = #30-#22
#24 = #11*#850
#25 = #3*#850
#26 = #20*#23
G52 X#4 Y#5 Z#6
G90 G00 G16 X#25 Y#1
G01 Z-.25 F20.
WHILE [#31LT#2] DO 250
#1 = [#1+[#22]]
G03 G16 X#25 Y[#1] R#3
G01 X#24 Y[#1+#26]
#1 = [#1+[#23]]
G03 X#24 Y[#1-#26] R#11
G01 X#25 Y[#1]
G15
N200 #31 = #31+1
N400 END 250
M99
E

TOOL PROBING OPTION
Tool Probing measures Tool Cal Length (in Absolute Tool Length mode) or Zero
Calibration (in Zero Calibration Mode) and Diameter/Diameter Wear using either a
touch probe or a laser probe.
If the probe is newly installed or has been relocated, it must be

calibrated and the parameters set before probing. See Appendix A:
Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and Appendix B: Tool Probe
Calibration, on page 4 - 26. These need to be done only when the
probe is installed, replaced, or relocated, NOT each time it is used.
To get started, select the calibration mode you use:
Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2
Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 8
Calibration mode is set in Utilities/User Preferences/Tool Utilities and

Settings. For more information, see Tool Calibration Modes, on page
1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Included in this chapter:
Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2
Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode, on page 4 - 8
Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14
Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18
Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26
Probing 704-0116-501 Tool Probing Option 4-1

Tool Probing in Absolute Tool Length
Mode
In Absolute Tool Length mode, the tool is probed and the Tool Cal Length and
Diameter Wear values are measured.
The probe must be setup and calibrated before proceeding. This is

done only once, unless the probe is replaced or relocated. For more
information see Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and
Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26.
Set the Probing Parameters—Absolute Tool Length Mode

The tool information for the tool(s) to be probed and the probing cycle information is
entered in Tool Setup:
1. From the Input screen, select the Tool Review softkey, then the Tool Setup
softkey.
2. Select the number of the tool you will be probing, or if it is a new tool, enter
the number and type.
3. Enter the tool diameter in the Diameter field.
4. Enter an approximate tool length in the Tool Cal Length field. Find this
approximate length by measuring the tool in the spindle from the spindle nose
to the tip of the tool. This value will be updated when the tool is probed.
5. Enter other parameters as necessary to define the tool. For more information,
see Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
6. Select the More softkey to access the second set of Tool Setup softkeys.
7. Select the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool Probing screen opens:
Figure 4–1. Tool Probing screen in Absolute Tool Length mode
4 - 2 Tool Probing Option 704-0116-501 Probing

The current tool is displayed in the Tool field. The cycle parameters are displayed on the
Main tab, and are read-only. Default values are set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults
screen, see Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 4. If you need to change one or
more parameters for the current tool, check the Edit Parameters check box. (If you
need to change a parameter for all tools, go back to the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults
screen and make the change there.) The defaults should be set before proceeding with
the probing cycle.
To set the remaining cycle parameters on the Main tab:
1. Select the type of probing cycle from the drop-down list in the Cycle field:
• Length—measures the Tool Cal Length. This value is automatically
calculated by subtracting the probed Z location of the tool in spindle from
the Z location of the probe stored in the Tool Measurement screen.
• Diameter—measures the actual tool diameter, and uses this value to
determine the Diameter Wear and Radius Offset. For more information,
see the Diameter Wear definition in Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106 in
• Length & Diameter—measures both length and diameter.
2. Indicate Yes or No for Multi Tool Probing. Yes will include the current tool in
multi-tool probing cycle.
3. Specify a Sister Tool to be used as a replacement if tool wear is out of
tolerance. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.
The Length and Diameter tabs specify where these values are stored. These are also
set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, but can be changed here by selecting the
Edit Parameters check box:
• Length—results are stored as either the Tool Length, or as a Tool Length

Offset, or both. When stored as an offset, the Offset Number field appears
where you can indicate the number in the Tool Offset table where the value is
to be stored.
• Diameter—results are stored as either Diameter Wear, Tool Radius Offset,
Diameter, Diameter Wear and Radius Offset, or Diameter and Radius Offset.
When stored as an offset, the Offset Number field appears where you can
indicate the number in the Tool Offset table where the value is to be stored.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Probing Parameters:
Cycle Multi-Tool Probing Spindle Usage
Fast Feed Rapid Clearance Store Result As
Length Offset X Rapid Z Position Tool Cal Length
Length Offset Y Slow Feed Z Drop Down Depth
Min Length Delta Spindle Clearance
Min Z Position Spindle Speed

Tool Probing Cycle Defaults
These are the Tool Probing Cycle defaults in Absolute Tool Length mode. For Zero
Calibration Mode, see Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 10.
Defaults for probing cycle parameters that infrequently need to be changed are set and
stored in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen. Once these parameters are set, they
are automatically applied to each tool and do not have to be accessed again. However, if
it is necessary to change one or more parameters for a specific tool, this is done in the
Tool Probing screen. To access the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen:
1. From the Tool Probing screen, select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. The Tool
Probe Parameters screen opens.
2. Select the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults softkey. The Tool Probing Cycle
Defaults screen opens. Set the default values in this screen.
Figure 4–2. Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen in Absolute Tool Length mode
3. Select the Spindle Usage. This is the direction the spindle turns during the
probe cycle.
4. Enter a Spindle Speed, if Spindle Usage is CW or CCW.
5. Specify the Fast Feed and Slow Feed. These are the feedrates of the initial
touch (Fast) and measurement touch (Slow).
6. Enter a value in the Rapid Clearance field. This is the distance above probe
stylus or beam that determines Rapid Z Position.
7. Specify the Min Length Delta. This is the distance below the probe stylus or
beam that the Z-axis is allowed to travel; determines the Min Z Position.
8. Specify the X and Y Length Offsets, if probing for length of a tool with its
cutter offset from the center, for example, a face mill. Otherwise, leave at 0.0.
9. Specify Z Drop Down Depth for diameter. This is the distance the tool drops
down from the point where the tool tip touches the top of the probe, when
probing for diameter. Value is always negative.
10. Specify Spindle Clearance, the distance between the tool and the probe

when the tool drops down for diameter probing.
11. Specify how to store the Length and Diameter results:
• Length can be stored as Length, Offset, or both.
• Diameter can be stored as:
• Diameter Wear
• Radius offset
• Diameter
• Diameter Wear and Radius Offset
• Diameter and Radius Offset
Select the Apply Defaults to Current Tool softkey to apply these defaults to the tool
currently being edited. You only need to do this when you first set the defaults or when
you change any of the values.
Select the Apply Defaults to All Tools softkey to apply these defaults to all tools in the
active program’s tool setup, or to the entire tool library if using the Tool and Material
Library option.
Select Exit twice to return to the Tool Probing screen.
Run the Probe Cycle

When the cycle parameters are set, you are ready to run the probe cycle:
1. Select the Probe Single Tool softkey.

If the tool that you wish to probe is already in the spindle, select the
Probe Current Tool Now softkey.
To probe multiple tools, see Probe Multiple Tools, on page 4 - 7.
2. Enter the Tool Number to probe. The following sequence occurs for length
probing:
a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt to press Start appears.
b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue.
• Ιf the tool to be probed is not in the spindle, a tool change occurs.
• If the tool to be probed is not in the magazine, the software prompts
for the tool.
• The spindle operates as specified in the Spindle Usage field in Tool
Setup.
c. The Z axis moves downward at rapid feed until it reaches Rapid Z
Position. Axis Feedrate Override is active during this move.
• The Z axis continues moving at Fast Feed until a probe deflection

occurs.
• If the probe reaches Min Z Position prior to deflection, an error
message appears. The value may need to be adjusted to correct the
problem.

d. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for laser).
e. For a touch probe:
• The tool retracts slightly (at Slow Feed) and makes three touches
(deflections) at Slow Feed. The average length of these deflections is
used to determine the tool length.
For a laser probe:
• The tool retracts up out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is
uninterrupted. The measurement is always taken when the tool moves
back into the beam. The average of these readings is used to
determine the tool length.
3. The Probe Single Tool cycle is now complete for length. Select the Exit softkey
to return to the initial Tool Setup screen. The Tool Cal Length field is updated
and the “P” designator appears.
Continue with the next step to probe the tool’s diameter.
4. If you entered an estimate of the tool’s diameter in the Diameter field and
selected Diameter or Length & Diameter in the Cycle field on the Tool Probing
screen, the probe cycle continues with the tool Diameter sequence:
a. The tool retracts just above the probe and moves to one side at Spindle
Clearance.
b. The tool drops down to Z Drop Down Depth, below the top of the tool
probe stylus or beam, and moves toward the probe.
c. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for a laser).
d. For a touch probe:
(deflections) at Slow Feed. The average of these deflections is stored
for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.
For a laser probe:
• The tool retracts out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is
back into the beam. The average of these readings is stored for
calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.
e. The tool moves up to Rapid Clearance and over to the other side of the
stylus or beam (to Spindle Clearance), and steps a-d are repeated from
the other side of the probe.
f. The two readings (one from each side of the probe) are used to determine
the actual diameter of the tool.
5. The actual probed diameter is subtracted from the tool diameter entered in
Tool Setup, and this value appears in the Diameter Wear field on the Tool
Setup screen with the “P” designator.

Probe Multiple Tools
The Probe Multiple Tools cycle determines Tool Cal Length (Length) and/or Diameter/
Diameter Wear based on the setting of the probe cycle field. All tools that are defined in
Tool Setup and have Multi-Tool Probing field set to Yes will be included in the multiple
tool probing cycle. Any tool that has Multi Tool Probing set to no will be skipped but may
still be probed using the single tool cycle.
The tools must be entered in Tool Setup and the probe cycle parameters set; see Set the
Probing Parameters—Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2.
Follow these steps to perform a Probe Multiple Tools cycle:
1. Select the Probe Multiple Tools softkey.

2. The following sequence occurs:
a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt requests you to press Start
to initiate the multiple tool probing cycle.
b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue. The first tool to be calibrated is
determined by the current tool in the spindle, the Cycle field and the value
of the Multi Tool Probing field. The control starts with the current tool in
spindle and scans in ascending order. A tool must have a Cycle defined
(Length, Diameter, or both) and the Multi Tool Probing field set to Yes. The
first tool to meet these requirements is placed in the spindle.
1. The tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 5.
2. The tools list is scanned again in ascending order until the next tool to
meet the multi tool probing criteria is found. A tool change occurs and
the tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 5.
3. This process repeats until there are no more tools to probe. During the
tool scanning when the highest number tool is reached the list wraps
around to tool one. The scan continues until the original tool in spindle
is reached. When this occurs the multi tool probing cycle is complete.
Note that once this process begins the operator is no longer required. The entire process
is automatic (as long as the tools are in the ATC).

Tool Probing in Zero Calibration Mode
In Zero Calibration mode, the tool is probed and the Zero Calibration and Diameter
Wear values are calculated.
The probe must be setup and calibrated before proceeding. This is

done only once, unless the probe is replaced or relocated. For more
information see, Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 and
Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration, on page 4 - 26.
Set the Probing Parameters—Zero Calibration mode

The tool information for the tool(s) to be probed and the probing cycle information is
entered in Tool Setup:
1. From the Input screen, select the Tool Review softkey, then the Tool Setup
softkey.
2. Select the number of the tool you will be probing, or enter a number and type,
if it is a new tool.
3. Enter other parameters as necessary to define the tool. For more information,
see Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106.
4. Select the More softkey to access the second set of Tool Setup softkeys.
5. Select the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool Probing screen opens:
Figure 4–3. Tool Probing screen in Zero Calibration mode
The current tool is displayed in the Tool field. The cycle parameters are displayed but are
read-only. Parameter default values are set in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, see
Tool Probing Cycle Defaults, on page 4 - 10. If you need to change one or more
parameters for the current tool, check the Edit Parameters check box. (If you need to
change a parameter for all tools, go back to the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen and
make the change there.) The defaults should be set before proceeding with the probing
cycle.

To set the remaining cycle parameters for the current tool:
1. Select the type of probing cycle from the drop-down list in the Cycle field:
• Length—measures the tool length (as Zero Calibration). This value is
automatically calculated using the stored internal value and the Probe Z
value obtained from probe calibration.
• Diameter—measures the actual tool diameter, and uses this value to
determine the Diameter Wear. For more information, see the Diameter
Wear definition in Tool Setup Fields, on page 1 - 106.
• Length & Diameter—measures both length and diameter.
2. Ensure the correct value has been entered in the Rapid Z Position field. This
is the position just above the contact point of the probe that the tool rapids
down to before continuing downward at Fast Feed for the initial touch.
To set Rapid Z Position, use the remote jog unit to jog the part probe to a
point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set
Position softkey, or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field. (With the
cursor in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to
position the part probe over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired
position.)
3. Specify the Min Z Position. This is the lowest position that Z will be allowed to
travel during the probe cycle.
4. Indicate Yes or No for Multi Tool Probing. Yes will include the current tool in
multi-tool probe cycle.
5. Specify a Sister Tool to be used for as a replacement if tool wear is out of
tolerance. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14.
6. The Length and Diameter tabs contain the values for these parameters set in
the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen, and may be changed here for the
current tool; check the Edit Parameters check box.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Probing Parameters:
Cycle Rapid Z Position
Fast Feed Slow Feed
Length Offset X Spindle Clearance
Length Offset Y Spindle Speed
Min Z Position Spindle Usage
Multi-Tool Probing Z Drop Down Depth

Determine Probe Z
The Probe Z value of the part needs to be set whenever a new part is placed on the
table. The Zero Calibration value of the tool is calculated using the new Probe Z value,
the stored internal value (from tool probe calibration), and the probed tool length.
If you are using a reference tool to calibrate the tool probe:
1. From the Input screen, select the Part Setup softkey to open the Part Setup
screen.
2. With the cursor in the Probe Z field, touch off the top of the part with the part
probe or reference tool.
3. Select the Store Machine Position softkey. This value is stored in Probe Z.
If you are using a part probe to calibrate the tool probe, use the part probe Z Edge cycle
to determine Probe Z. See Edge, on page 4 - 42 in Part Probing.
Tool Probing Cycle Defaults
Defaults for probing cycle parameters that infrequently need to be changed are set and
stored in the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen. Once these parameters are set, they
are automatically applied to each tool and do not have to be accessed again. However, if
it is necessary to change one or more parameters for a specific tool, this is done in the
Tool Probing screen. To access the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen:
1. From the Tool Probing screen, select the Tool Probe Setup softkey. The Tool
Probe Parameters screen opens.
2. Select the Tool Probing Cycle Defaults softkey. The Tool Probing Cycle
Defaults screen opens. Set the default values in this screen.
Figure 4–4. Tool Probing Cycle Defaults screen in Zero Calibration mode
3. Select the Spindle Usage. This is the direction the spindle turns during the
probe cycle.
4. Enter a Spindle Speed, if Spindle Usage is CW or CCW.

5. Specify the Fast Feed and Slow Feed. These are the feedrates of the initial
touch (Fast) and measurement touch (Slow).
6. Specify the X and Y Length Offsets, if probing for length of a tool with its
cutter offset from the center, for example, a face mill. Otherwise, leave at 0.0.
7. Specify Z Drop Down Depth for diameter. This is the distance the tool drops
down from the point where the tool tip touches the top of the probe, when
probing for diameter. Value is always negative.
8. Specify Spindle Clearance, the distance between the tool and the probe
when the tool drops down for diameter probing.
Select the Apply Defaults to Current Tool softkey to apply these defaults to the tool
currently being edited. You only need to do this when you first set the defaults or when
you change any of the values.
Select Exit twice to return to the Tool Probing screen.
Run the Probe Cycle

When the Probe Z value is set, return to the Tool Setup/Tool Probing screen
1. Select the Probe Single Tool softkey.

If the tool that you wish to probe is already in the spindle, select the
Probe Current Tool softkey.
To probe multiple tools, see Probe Multiple Tools, on page 4 - 7.
2. Enter the Tool Number to probe. The following sequence occurs for length
probing:
a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt to press Start appears.
b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue.
• Ιf the tool to be probed is not in the spindle, a tool change occurs.
• If the tool to be probed is not in the magazine, the software prompts
for the tool.
• The spindle operates as specified in the Spindle Usage field in Tool
Setup.
c. The Z axis moves downward at rapid feed until it reaches Rapid Z
Position. Axis Feedrate Override is active during this move.
• The Z axis continues moving at Fast Feed until a probe deflection

occurs.
• If the probe reaches Min Z Position prior to deflection, an error
message appears. The value may need to be adjusted to correct the
problem.
d. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for laser).
e. For a touch probe:
(deflections) at Slow Feed. The average length of these deflections is
used to determine the tool length.

For a laser probe:
• The tool retracts up out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is
back into the beam. The average of these readings is used to
determine the tool length.
3. The Probe Single Tool cycle is now complete for length. Select the Exit softkey
to return to the initial Tool Setup screen. The Zero Calibration field is
updated and the “P” designator appears.
Continue with the next step to probe the tool’s diameter.
4. If you entered an estimate of the tool’s diameter in the Diameter field and
selected Diameter or Length & Diameter in the Cycle field on the Tool Probing
screen, the probe cycle continues with the tool Diameter sequence:
a. The tool retracts just above the probe and moves to one side at Spindle
Clearance.
b. The tool drops down to Z Drop Down Depth, below the top of the tool
probe stylus or beam, and moves toward the probe.
c. The tool touches the probe (or breaks the beam for a laser).
d. For a touch probe:
(deflections) at Slow Feed. The average of these deflections is stored
for calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.
For a laser probe:
• The tool retracts out of the beam (at Slow Feed) until the beam is
back into the beam. The average of these readings is stored for
calculation after the other side of the tool is probed.
e. The tool moves up to Rapid Z Position and over to the other side of the
stylus or beam (to Spindle Clearance), and steps a-d are repeated from
the other side of the probe.
f. The two readings (one from each side of the probe) are used to determine
the actual diameter of the tool.
5. The actual probed diameter is subtracted from the tool diameter entered in
Tool Setup, and this value appears in the Diameter Wear field on the Tool
Setup screen with the “P” designator.

Probe Multiple Tools
The Probe Multiple Tools cycle determines Zero Calibration and/or Diameter Wear
(Diameter) based on the setting of the probe cycle field. All tools that are defined in Tool
Setup and have Multi-Tool Probing field set to Yes will be included in the multiple tool
probing cycle. Any tool that has Multi Tool Probing set to no will be skipped but may still
be probed using the single tool cycle.
The tools must be entered in Tool Setup and the probe cycle parameters set; see Set the
Probing Parameters—Zero Calibration mode, on page 4 - 8.
Follow these steps to perform a Probe Multiple Tools cycle:
1. Select the Probe Multiple Tools softkey.

2. The following sequence occurs:
a. The Start Cycle button flashes and a prompt requests you to press Start
to initiate the multiple tool probing cycle.
b. Press the Start Cycle button to continue. The first tool to be calibrated is
determined by the current tool in the spindle, the Cycle field and the value
of the Multi Tool Probing field. The control starts with the current tool in
spindle and scans in ascending order. A tool must have a Cycle defined
(Length, Diameter, or both) and the Multi Tool Probing field set to Yes. The
first tool to meet these requirements is placed in the spindle.
1. The tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 11.
2. The tools list is scanned again in ascending order until the next tool to
meet the multi tool probing criteria is found. A tool change occurs and
the tool is probed as described in Run the Probe Cycle, on page 4 - 11.
3. This process repeats until there are no more tools to probe. During the
tool scanning when the highest number tool is reached the list wraps
around to tool one. The scan continues until the original tool in spindle
is reached. When this occurs the multi tool probing cycle is complete.
Note that once this process begins the operator is no longer required. The entire process
is automatic (as long as the tools are in the ATC).

Tool Quality Monitoring
Tool Monitoring is available to automatically monitor calibrated tools and detect breakage
or wear. The software compares the current tool dimensions to the calibrated dimensions
stored in Tool Setup for the programmed tool. If the current dimensions deviate from the
defined tolerance programmed in the tool monitoring menus, the tool is defective.
This section describes the ways to perform Tool Monitoring:
Probe Tool Monitoring Data Block , on page 4 - 14
Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter, on page 4 - 17
Probe Tool Monitoring Data Block

It is possible to program a spare tool (Sister Tool) to automatically replace a defective
monitored tool. If a Sister Tool is not programmed, or if there is no ATC, axis motion
stops and the following message appears on the screen:
“Tool # x is defective, no more tools to substitute.”
To access the Probe Tool Monitoring data block, follow this softkey sequence from the
Input screen:
1. Select Part Programming.

2. Select Miscellaneous.
3. Select More.
4. Select Tool Monitoring (Probing).
Figure 5. Probe Tool Monitoring Screen

From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select the type of measuring cycle by selecting
the appropriate softkey. The measuring cycles are described in the following sections.
As with any data block, use the Insert Block Before and Delete Block
softkeys available for each measuring data block to add and delete
measuring cycles from the program.
Tool Breakage Detection

Tool Breakage Detection monitors the tool for breakage. Follow these steps to program a
Tool Breakage Detection Cycle:
1. From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select Tool Breakage Detection in
the Probe Cycle Type field.
2. Enter the tool to be monitored, in the Tool field. The tool must be
programmed in Tool Setup, and it must be probed.
3. If desired, adjust the Speed (RPM) value.
4. Enter the Breakage Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the tool
length programmed in the Tool Cal Length field in Tool Setup.
When the data block is executed in the part program, the current tool length is measured
and compared with the Tool Cal Length/Zero Calibration in Tool Setup.
The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Breakage
Tolerance. If the tool is shorter than the programmed tolerance, the tool is broken. If the
tool is broken, the software checks for a spare tool.
• Ιf a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis
motion stops and a tool change automatically occurs.
• If there is no Sister Tool programmed for this tool, or if there is no ATC, axis
motion will stop and a message appears telling you to change tools.
Tool Wear Detection

To monitor tool length and/or diameter wear, select from the following Probe Cycle Type
choices:
• Tool Length Wear Detection

• Tool Diameter Wear Detection
• Tool Length & Diameter Wear Detection
Follow these steps to program a Tool Wear Detection Cycle:
1. From the Probe Tool Monitoring screen, select the Probe Cycle Type.
2. Enter the Tool to be monitored. The tool must be programmed in Tool Setup,
and it must be calibrated.
3. Enter Length Tolerance or Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both
length and diameter.
When the data block is executed in the part program, the current tool length is measured

and compared with the tool length or diameter tolerance, or both if monitoring both
length and diameter.
The figure below illustrates the tool length and diameter tolerances:
1. Length Tolerance
2. Diameter Tolerance
Figure 6. Tool Wear Tolerances
The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Length Tolerance
or the Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.
• If the tool is shorter than the Length Tolerance value minus the length, the
tool is worn.
• If the tool’s diameter is less than the Diameter minus the programmed
tolerance, the tool is worn.
• If the tool is worn, the software checks for a sister tool.
• If a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tool Quality Monitoring fields:
Breakage Tolerance Probe Cycle Type Spindle Usage
Diameter Tolerance Probing Method Tool
Direction Sister Tool
Length Tolerance Speed (RPM)

Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter
Another method of monitoring tool quality is the Probing Parameter’s Automatic Tool
Monitoring field. This setup automatically checks every probed tool for wear before and/
or after cutting.
To set this parameter to automatically monitor tool quality:
1. From the Input screen, select the Program Parameters softkey.

2. Select the Probing tab.
3. Select the Automatic Tool Monitoring parameter:
• Incoming Tool—tool is checked after it is inserted into spindle
• Outgoing Tool—tool is checked before it is removed from the spindle
• Both—checked before and after cut
4. Specify the Length Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the tool
length programmed in Tool Setup screen.
5. Specify the Diameter Tolerance. This is the amount of deviation from the
tool diameter programmed in Tool Setup screen.
The software monitors the tool and determines if the tool is within the Length Tolerance
or the Diameter Tolerance, or both if monitoring both length and diameter.
• If the tool is shorter than the Length Tolerance value minus the length, the
tool is worn.
• If the tool’s diameter is less than the Diameter minus the programmed
tolerance, the tool is worn.
• If the tool is worn, the software checks for a sister tool.
• If a Sister (spare) Tool has been entered in Tool Setup for this tool, axis

Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup
Tool probe setup parameters provide critical information on how the machine will use the
probes. The parameters include fields specific to programming a touch probe or a laser
probe.
Tool probe setup parameters should only be adjusted when a tool

probe is newly installed, relocated, or when probing feedrates are
changed.
From Tool Setup, select the Tool Probing softkey, then the Tool Probe Setup softkey.
The Tool Probe Parameters screen opens. From here, you can access the parameters
for the type of probe you select, either Touch Probe or Laser Probe.
Touch Probe Parameters

Select the Touch Probe Parameters softkey to access the touch tool probe fields. The
following screen appears:
Figure 4–1. Touch Probe Parameters
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Touch Probe Parameters fields:
Contact Point X Repetitions Setup Fast Feed
Contact Point Y Retract Feed Stylus Width
Max Spread Retract INCR Type
Probing Axis Retract INIT

Laser Probe Parameters
Select the Laser Probe softkey to access the laser tool probe fields:
Figure 4–2. Laser Probe Parameters
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Laser Probe Parameters fields:
Beam Offset Contact Point Y Repetitions
Cal Tool D Drip Rej. Delay Retract Feed
Cal Tool H Drip Rej. Samples Setup Fast Feed
Cal Tool L Retract INCR Stylus Width
Center Beam X Retract INIT Type
Center Beam Y Max Spread
Contact Point X Probing Axis
Laser Beam Calibration

The Laser Beam Calibration cycle uses a tool to probe the beam and determine the exact
trigger point position in the light beam for X/Y and Z axes so the light beam can
effectively measure tools. The Determine Laser Beam Offset softkey on the Tool Setup
Probe Parameters screen initiates the cycle to set the beam offset value. Refer to
Appendix A: Tool Probe Setup, on page 4 - 18 for field definitions for this screen.
You must calibrate the laser system before using the light beam for measuring tools. The
laser calibration tool or precision dowel used for performing calibration is inserted into the
spindle just like any tool.

Laser Tool Calibration Calculations
The calibration tool’s dimensions are determined by using a precision dowel or a laser
calibration tool, as shown in the figure below. Use this formula to determine the location
on the tool’s diameter to interrupt the beam:
Length + (Height / 2) = Point on Diameter to Interrupt Beam
The software uses the Cal Tool D(iameter), H(eight), and L(ength) fields (shown below as
D, H, and L) and the trigger points established in this cycle to determine the Center Beam
X or Y values, depending on the Probing Axis.
1. Donut
2. Tip
Figure 4–3. Typical Laser Probe Calibration Tool

Laser Tool Calibration Cycle
Follow these steps to run the Laser Calibration Tool cycle:
1. Access the Tool Setup Probe Parameters screen using this softkey sequence:
a. Tool Setup softkey
b. More softkey
c. Tool Probing softkey
d. Tool Probe Setup softkey
2. In the Type field, select Laser Probe.

3. Enter values in the Cal Tool D, H, or L fields. The DETERMINE LASER BEAM
OFFSET softkey appears when the cursor is in any of these fields.
4. Select the DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET softkey and this sequence occurs:
a. The Start Cycle button flashes.
b. Press the Start Cycle button to begin the cycle. The tool moves down in
the Z Plane at Setup Fast Feed until the beam is interrupted by the tip of
the tool.
c. The tool moves up slightly at Retract Feed until the beam is uninterrupted.
This sequence of slow moves into, then out of, the beam repeats for
Repetition number of readings. The average switch point coming out of the
beam is recorded.
d. The tool moves up slightly again, moves over in the X/Y Plane, and down
until the laser beam is positioned parallel to the center of the tool’s donut.
e. The tool moves in the X/Y Plane at Fast Setup Feed toward the beam until
the beam is interrupted.
f. The sequence of slow moves into then out of the beam repeats for
Repetition number of readings. The average switch point coming out of the
beam is recorded.
g. The process is repeated from the opposite side of the beam.
h. The Center Beam X or Y field is updated based on the trigger points
established in this cycle, depending on the Probing Axis selection.
• Ιf Probing Axis is X, the Center Beam X field is updated.

• Ιf Probing Axis is Y, the Center Beam Y field is updated.
i. The Beam Offset field is updated based on the trigger points established in
this cycle.

The figure below illustrates the tool motion during this cycle:
1. Z Minus
2. X/Y Plus
3. X/Y Minus
Figure 4–4. Typical Laser Probe Calibration Tool Motion

Probe Deflection Offset Calibration
Tool and part probe deflection offsets are the difference between the contact point of the
probe and the actual receipt of a probe deflection signal. The offsets may vary for each
direction of deflection. The switch points are repeatable to one micron or less.
These offsets need to be adjusted during an initial probe installation, a new stylus
installation, or for centering or re-centering a stylus. They do not need to be performed
each time the control is reset.
Tool Probe Deflection Offset

Access the Tool Probe Deflection Offset screen from the Tool Setup screen. Select the
Tool Probing softkey, the Tool Probe Setup softkey, and the Tool Probe Deflection
Offset softkey. This screen appears:
Figure 4–5. Tool Probe Deflection Offsets
The Reference Tool Diameter field holds the diameter of the tool being probed.
The probe orientation determines the offsets used in the Probe Stylus Position fields. The
-Z offset is always used along with +/-X or +/-Y, depending from which direction the
probe can deflect.
The following sections describe the two methods for determining Tool Probe Deflection
Offsets: Absolute Location, on page 4 - 24 or Reference Tool Touch, on page 4 - 24.

Absolute Location
Use an edge finder to determine the absolute location of each edge of the probe stylus.
1. Enter the Reference Tool Diameter.

2. Position the cursor on the desired offset field.
3. Position the reference tool to the correct start position.
4. Press the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey. The Start Button
flashes.
5. Press the flashing Start Button.
a. The cursor position determines which axis is moved and in what direction.
b. The deflected position is used to calculate the offsets.
c. The offset value appears in the current field.
d. The offsets are saved by the system so they are retained after power to
the machine is turned off.
e. Unused fields contain a 0 value.
f. The sign of the offset is + for plus axis deflections and - for negative axis
deflections.
The Apply G Code Offset parameter applies the deflection offsets to
G31 commands when conversational and NC probing are used
together.
Reference Tool Touch
Use a feeler gauge to determine the position where the reference tool touches the top
and each side of the probe stylus. Follow the prompts on the screen to know which side of
the stylus to use. Follow these steps:
1. Enter a 0 for the Reference Tool Diameter.

2. Position the reference tool in the correct start position. Begin with the top of
the stylus.
3. Place the cursor in the -Z field of the Probe Stylus column.
4. Press the USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET (F1) softkey. The Start Button
flashes.
5. Press the flashing Start Button.
a. The cursor position determines which axis is moved and in what direction.
b. The deflected position is used to calculate the offsets.
c. The offset value appears in the -Z field.
d. The offsets are saved by the system so they are retained after power to
the machine is turned off.
e. Unused fields contain a 0 value.
f. The sign of the offset is + for plus axis deflections and - for negative axis
deflections.
6. Repeat these steps for the other two axis positions (+/- X and +/-Y).
Position the reference tool appropriately and put the cursor in the appropriate
Probe Stylus field.

You can manually adjust the deflection offsets to optimize performance. By running a
probe cycle on a reference tool you may make slight adjustments to the deflection offsets
until the cycle returns with the exact value(s) desired.

together.

Appendix B: Tool Probe Calibration
The Tool Probe must be calibrated before probing can be performed.
Probe Calibration must be completed before probing can begin,

but they only need to be done one time, unless the probe is
relocated or replaced, if the Slow Feed value is changed, or if the tool
calibration mode is changed.
Probe Calibration—Absolute Tool Length mode

To calibrate the Tool Probe:
1. Access the Tool Measurement screen (Tool Setup/More/Tool Measurement

Settings softkey):
2. Specify Probe in the Device field.
The Z Reference position must be known to proceed. Z Reference is the

distance from the table top to Machine Zero. If already set, skip to step 8.
3. Advance to Z Reference field.

4. Place a gauge of known height on table top.
5. With a reference tool in spindle, jog Z-axis down and carefully touch reference
tool to top of gauge block.
6. Select the Store Machine Position softkey or press the store position button
on remote jog unit.
7. Subtract the reference tool length and the gauge height from the stored
machine position, and manually enter this value in the Z Reference field.
For example, if the stored machine position is -300mm, and the reference
tool length = 150mm, and the gauge height = 50mm, the Z Reference value
is -500mm.
8. Access the Tool Setup screen. Enter the exact tool length for the Reference
Tool in the Tool Cal Length field.
9. Select the More softkey, and then the Tool Probing softkey. The Tool
Probing screen opens.
10. Select Length in the Cycle field.
11. Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey. The control asks for the
reference tool (number) to use for calibrating the probe; enter the number
and select OK to calibrate the probe.
12. When calibration is complete, the Tool Measurement screen opens and the
Height and Z Location fields contain the measured and calculated values:

Figure 4–6. Tool Measurement Screen
Now the probe is calibrated and you can proceed to Set the Probing Parameters—
Absolute Tool Length Mode, on page 4 - 2.
Probe Calibration—Zero Calibration mode

The tool probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a part probe or with a
reference tool.
When tools are probed, the Probe Z value and the stored internal value (from the
calibration of the tool probe) are used to calculate Zero Calibration. When a new part is
placed on the table, a new Probe Z value must be determined.
Figure 4–7. Tool Setup Probing Parameters in Zero Calibration mode

Calibrate Tool Probe with Part Probe
The Tool Probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a Part Probe.
When using a part probe, Part Probe Parameters and Deflection

Offsets must be set before proceeding with tool probe calibration.
Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32 and Part Probe
Deflection Offset Calibration, on page 4 - 34.
With the part probe in the spindle:
1. From the Tool Setup screen, select the More softkey.

2. Select the Tool Probing Softkey.
3. Set the Rapid Z Position. Use the remote jog unit to jog the part probe to a
point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set
position the part probe over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired
position.)
4. Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey.
5. Press the flashing Start Cycle button.
The control activates the part probe and the Z axis moves down at rapid,
then at Approach Feed until a probe deflection occurs or Minimum Z is
reached. (Ιf the probe reaches Minimum Z prior to deflection, an error
message appears. Minimum Z is set in the Part Setup Probe Parameters.)
If the appropriate fields are set correctly, then the two probes will touch (or
the part probe breaks the beam on a laser tool probe). The part probe will
then retract slightly and touch again at the feed rate specified in the
Measurement Feed field. The average deflection position is recorded and
saved internally for the Zero Calibration value calculation.
Next you must determine the Probe Z value. See Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10.
Calibrate Tool Probe with Reference Tool

The Tool Probe can be calibrated (Z height determined) with a Reference Tool.
1. From the Tool Setup screen, select the More softkey.

2. Select the Tool Probing Softkey.
3. Set the Rapid Z Position. Use the remote jog unit to jog the reference tool to
a point just above the contact point of the tool probe and select the Set
position the reference tool over the tool probe before jogging Z to the desired
position.)
4. Select the Calibrate the Tool Probe softkey.
5. A prompt appears requesting the Reference Tool number. Enter the
appropriate tool number and select OK.

If necessary, a tool change occurs, placing the reference tool in the
spindle. If the tool is not in the magazine, the software will prompt
you for the tool.
The Z axis moves downward at rapid then at Fast Feed until a probe
deflection occurs or Minimum Z is reached. (Ιf the probe reaches Minimum Z
prior to deflection, an error message appears. Minimum Z is set in the Tool
Probing screen.)
The reference tool touches the tool probe, retracts slightly, and touches again
at the feedrate specified in the Slow Feed field. The number of slow touches is
specified by the Repetitions parameter. The average deflection position is
recorded and saved internally for the Zero Calibration calculation.
Next you must determine the Probe Z value. See Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10.

PART PROBING OPTION
Part probing is used during Part Setup to probe the part’s edge, corner, bore, boss,
rectangular pocket, or rectangular solid. The probe collects information about the part’s
center position and diameter. This information is used to set Part Zero, making part setup
faster and more accurate. Part probing can be used in Manual or Auto mode and with
either Conversational or NC programming. Part probing can also be used for part quality
verification.
It is the operator’s responsibility to set safe travel limits for the part
probe as described in this chapter.
Manual Mode
Probing in Manual Mode is used to set part zero and/or determine skew:
1. Enter information about the probe in Part Probe Parameters. See Part Setup—
Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32.
2. Calibrate the probe and enter the deflection offsets. See Part Probe Calibration
and Cycles, on page 4 - 34.
3. Select the cycle and probe the part. See Manual Mode Part Setup Probing
Cycles , on page 4 - 42 and/or Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles , on
page 4 - 57.
Auto Mode
Probing in Auto Mode is used to set part zero and/or determine skew within the part
program (rather than in Part Setup as in Manual Mode). It can also be used to gather data
about part quality.
1. Enter information about the probe in Part Probe Parameters. See Part Setup—
Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32.
2. Calibrate the probe and enter the deflection offsets. See Part Probe Calibration
and Cycles, on page 4 - 34.
3. Probe the part to set part zero and/or determine skew. This is done within the
program; see Automatic Mode, on page 4 - 64.
Additionally, part inspection is performed in Auto Mode. See Part Quality Verification, on
page 4 - 67.
Probing 704-0116-501 Part Probing Option 4-31

Part Setup—Part Probe Parameters
The part probing parameters are accessed through Part Setup. These parameters must
be adjusted when a new stylus is installed in the part probe, when the probe work region
is changed, or when probing feedrates are changed.
To access the Part Probe Parameters:

2. Press the Part Setup softkey.
3. Press the Part Probing softkey. The Part Setup screen is displayed with the
Part Probing menu.
Figure 5. Probing Part Setup Softkey Menu
4. Select the Part Probe Parameters softkey.
4 - 32 Part Probing Option 704-0116-501 Probing

The Part Setup Probe Parameters screen appears:
Figure 6. Part Setup Screen with Part Probe Parameters
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Probe Parameters:
Approach Feed Minimum Z Stylus Diameter
Circular Passes Present X Max
Fast Start Feed Repetitions X Min
Max Spread Retract INCR Y Max
Measurement Feed Retract INIT Y Min

Part Probe Calibration and Cycles
This section describes the probe calibration and cycles available with the Probing Option.
Once the probing equipment is calibrated, the tool and part can be calibrated using the
probing equipment. This information can be stored as appropriate in Tool or Part Setup,
or in a data block to be executed with the part program.
Probe calibration is only required on systems that also have a tool probe installed.
Calibration methods vary between systems with tool probing only, versus systems with
both tool and part probing. See Probe Calibration—Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 4
- 26 or Probe Calibration—Zero Calibration mode, on page 4 - 27 of Tool Probing for
details.
Part Probe Deflection Offset Calibration

Part probe deflection offsets are the difference between the contact point of the probe
and the actual receipt of a probe deflection signal. The offsets may vary for each direction
of deflection.
These offsets need to be adjusted during an initial probe installation, a new stylus
installation, or for centering or re-centering a stylus. They do not need to be performed
each time the control is reset.
Access the Part Probe Deflection Offset screen from the Part Setup screen. Select the
Part Probing softkey followed by the Part Probe Deflection Offsets softkey. This
screen appears with softkeys for selecting the method to use for determining offsets.
Figure 7. Part Probe Deflection Offset
The sections that follow describe the procedures to follow for each method: Ring Gauge,
on page 4 - 35 and Reference Block, on page 4 - 36.

Ring Gauge
The Ring Gauge method probes in a circular pattern. Select the PART PROBE DEFLECTION
OFFSETS softkey followed by the RING GAUGE softkey, and this screen appears:
Figure 8. Ring Gauge Deflection Offset
Follow these steps to determine a Ring Gauge Deflection Offset:
1. Enter the Diameter of the part.

2. Use an indicator or some similar method to determine the center of the gauge.
Enter the Center of the gauge in the Center X and Center Y fields.
3. Jog the spindle to a point in Z where the probe just touches the part and enter
the value in the Datum Z field. This value can be entered manually or by
pressing the Store Position key.
4. Position the probe tip inside the gauge at the desired depth and select the Use
Gauge To Get X&Y Offsets softkey. The Start button begins to flash.
5. Press the Start button to begin the cycle.
6. The probe touches the part at 36 points (10° increments) inside the gauge to
automatically calculate the X and Y offsets. To determine the Z offset, position
the probe tip above the chosen datum point and select the Use Datum Point
To Get Z Offset softkey. The Start button begins to flash.
7. Press the Start button to begin the cycle.
8. The probe touches off the datum point and calculates the offset.
9. The Offset values appear on the screen and are stored in memory.
This offset will be used anytime the control uses a probe location.
Offset values may be entered manually by the operator. If you know the readings are off
by a certain amount, you can make adjustments without even using the probe.

The sign of the offset should be + for plus axis deflections and - for minus axis
deflections.

together.
Reference Block
The Reference Block method probes in the + or - X or Y direction. Select the Part Probe
Deflection Offsets softkey followed by the Reference Block Method softkey, and this
screen appears:
Figure 9. Reference Block Deflection Offset
Follow these steps to determine the Reference Block Deflection Offsets for the X or Y
axes:
1. Enter X or Y values manually in the Reference Block X or Y fields.

2. Position the cursor under the Deflection Offset column at the offset to be
determined.
3. Manually jog the machine so the part probe is in the proper location to touch
off the reference block for the desired axis and direction.
4. Select the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey, and the Start button
begins to flash.
5. Press the Start Button to start the cycle. The probe touches off the reference
block. The offset values are calculated, appear on the screen, and are stored
in memory.
This offset is used when the control uses a probe location.
Follow these steps to determine the offset for the Z axis:
1. Jog the probe to the top of the reference block.

2. Use a feeler gauge to determine where the tip of the stylus would touch the
reference block. Enter this value in the -Z field in the Reference Block column.
3. Select the Use Probe To Determine Offset softkey. The probe touches off
the part in the Z axis to determine the offset.
Offset values may be entered manually by the operator. If you know the readings are off
by a certain amount, you can make adjustments without using the probe.
The sign of the offset should be + for plus axis deflections and - for minus axis
deflections.
The Ring Gauge method is more accurate than the Reference Block
method.
• The probe measures the part at 36 points in 10° increments on the ring
gauge.
• The 4 points measured on the reference block correspond to the 0°, 90°,
180°, and 270° values on the ring gauge. The remaining 32 values are
estimated using the 4 actual measurements to fill in the 10° incremental
offsets.

together.

Conversational Part Probing Cycles
Part probing is used for locating the position and alignment of the part on the table.
Inserting a Probe Part Setup data block to run from the part program allows you to probe
multiple parts and locate them at run time. This section describes probing cycles which
are used for creating Probe Part Setup data blocks.
The software uses information programmed in the Part Setup screen to perform the
Probing Cycles in Manual or Automatic mode.
There are two types of cycles available for probing different types of part features: Part
Setup Probing Cycles and Part Skew Probing Cycles.
To select the Part Probe cycle type:

2. Press the Part Setup softkey.
3. Press the Part Probing softkey. The Part Setup screen is displayed with the
Part Probing menu.
• Select the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey for the Part Setup Probing
Cycles. Refer to Part Setup Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 40 for details
about programming these Manual Mode cycles. Refer to Automatic Mode,
on page 4 - 64 for information about programming these Auto Mode
cycles.
• Select the Part Skew Probe Cycles softkey to access the Part Skew
Probing Cycles. Refer to Part Skew Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 56 for
details about programming these Manual Mode cycles.Refer to Automatic
Mode, on page 4 - 64 for information about programming these Auto
Mode cycles.
Select the probing cycle type from the Part Setup screen with the Part Probing
softkey.The cycles provide a method for allowing the software to automatically enter the
Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, Probe Z, and X/Y Skew (deg) fields in the Part Setup screen.
Part Setup Screen

In addition to the standard Part Setup fields defined in the Getting Started with WinMax
Mill manual, the software updates these Part Setup fields with data obtained during the
probing cycles:
Part Zero X
Part Zero Y
Probe Z
X/Y Skew (DEG)
Refer to Determine Probe Z, on page 4 - 10 of Tool Probing for more details about Probe
Z calculations.
Part probing may be run either from Manual Mode or from Auto Mode inside the part
program. The sections that follow describe the different types of Manual Mode Probing

Cycles. Auto Mode probing is described at the end of this chapter.
Part Probe Deflection

During the probing cycles described in this section, the part probe positions and moves at
Approach Feed until it reaches the geometry. Then it backs up and moves again at
Measurement Feed until it deflects the geometry a second time. The Measurement Feed
touches are repeated a total of Repetitions times and the average is used.
Part Probe Working Envelope

The part probe cycles allow the part probe to operate within the constraints set in the Part
Setup—Part Probe Parameters, on page 4 - 32. A working envelope containing safe part
probe travel limits is stored in the Part Probing Parameters.
The working envelope represents the area on the machine table in which the probe can
search for geometric features. The travel limits mentioned in each of the Manual Mode
Part Setup Probing Cycles and the Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles are set in the
working envelope. This area is determined by these fields in the Part Probing Parameters
screen: X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, and Z Min. Z Min is a location above the table. The X
and Y parameters are illustrated in the figure below:
1. Y Max
2. Y min
3. X Min
4. X Max
Figure 4–1. Part Probe Working Envelope’s X and Y Parameters
If the probe reaches any part probe travel limit before reaching the
part feature, a fault occurs, motion stops, and an error message
appears on the screen.
Each cycle’s feed rate is determined by the value set in the Part Probing Parameters
Approach Feed and Measurement Feed fields.

Part Setup Probing Cycles
The table below describes the process for each Part Setup Probing Cycle:
Cycle Type Parameter Automatic Results Optional

Input Execution Displayed Storage
Edge Axis Approach edge. Deflection Deflection

Probe Direction Retract. Position X, Y, or Position
Z X, Y, or Z is
Positive OR Return to Start
Part Zero X,
Negative Position.
Part Zero Y,
Preset X or Y
OR
Probe Z.
Hole Start Angle 1, 2, 3 Approach 3 Center X Center is Part

Circle Preset X Circle Points Center Y Zero X and
from inside. Part Zero Y.
Pocket Preset Y Diameter
Position Probe
into Center.
Cylinder Probing Radius Approach 3 Center X Center is Part

Start Angle 1, 2, 3 Cylinder points Center Y Zero X and
from outside. Part Zero Y.
Z Depth Diameter
Position Probe
Preset X
above cylinder
Preset Y Center.
Rectangular Preset X Approach the 4 Center (X) Center is Part

Pocket Preset Y pocket walls Center (Y) Zero X and
from inside. Part Zero Y.
Length (X)
Position Probe
Length (Y)
into pocket
Center.
Rectangular Probing Length (X) Approach the 4 Center (X) Center is Part
Solid Probing Length (Y) Rectangle walls Center (Y) Zero X and
from outside. Part Zero Y.
Z Depth Length (X)
Position Probe
Preset X Length (Y)
above rectangle
Preset Y Center.

Cycle Type Parameter Automatic Results Optional
Input Execution Displayed Storage
Plane X Probe Direction Approach 2 Intersection Intersection

Intersection Offset 1 points on each point of the two point is
of the two planes in the Part Zero X and
Offset 2
planes. X/Y coordinate Part Zero Y.
Y Probe Direction system
Return to Start
Offset 1 Position.
Offset 2
Preset X
Preset Y
Slot Inside Preset X Approach the 2 Center (X) OR Center is Part

OR slot walls from Center (Y) Zero X OR
inside. Part Zero Y.
Preset Y Length (X) OR
Position Probe
Length (Y)
into slot Center.
Web Outside Probing Length (X) Approach the 2 Center (X) OR Center is Part
OR web walls from Center (Y) Zero X OR
outside. Part Zero Y.
Probing Length (Y) Length (X) OR
Position Probe
Z Depth Length (Y)
above web
Preset X OR Center.
Preset Y

Manual Mode Part Setup Probing Cycles
During a Part Setup Probing cycle, the probe moves to specified points on the part,
deflects, and stops in the center or at the Start Position, depending on the part feature.
From the Part Setup screen, use the PROBING (F5) softkey to access the Probing Cycles.
Each cycle is described in detail in the following sections. When the cycle is finished, the
software displays values representing the desired features. The fields for each cycle vary
and are defined with each cycle description.
You can accept these values by pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey
when it appears. If you have entered Preset X or Preset Y offsets, these offsets are
subtracted from the probed Part Zero values, and the new Part Zero values appear after
pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey.
Follow these steps to access the Part Probe Cycles:
1. From the Part Setup screen, select the Part Probing softkey.
2. Select the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey. The probe cycle softkeys appear.
Select a softkey to select a cycle.
Depending on the Probing Cycle selected, different probing fields appear on the Part
Setup screen.
The following sections describe how to program each of the Part

Setup Probing Cycles.
Edge
An Edge Cycle is used for determining the location of a specified edge of the part. During
an Edge Cycle, the part probe moves to the X, Y, or Z edge of the part and records the
deflection position.
The figure below shows part probe movement during X, Y, and Z Edge Cycles:
Edge Probing in X direction Edge Probing in Y direction Edge Probing in Z direction

(positive) (positive)
Top View Top View Side View
1 Start Position 2 Start Position 3 Start Position

The figure below shows a side view of an Edge cycle probing in the X direction:
Edge Probing in X direction (positive)

Side View
4 Start Position
Figure 5. Part Probe Movement for Edge Probing Cycles
In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Getting Started with
WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Edge Probing Cycle:
Part Zero Cycle Probe Z
Part Zero X Probing Axis
Part Zero Y Probing Direction
Preset X
Preset Y
Follow these steps to program an Edge Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Edge.
2. In the Probing Axis field, select the axis to move toward the edge of the part:
X Axis, Y Axis, or Z Axis.
3. In the Probing Direction field, select the direction to probe: Positive or
Negative. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available
for Z Probing Axis.
4. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the
offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field. This field appears when the
Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Z Probing Axis.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Edge Probing Cycle:
1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position,
near the edge to be probed.
2. Press the Start Probing Cycle softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
a. The probing axis moves in the specified direction until the probe is
deflected.
• Ιf no deflection occurs before the probe reaches the probe’s travel

limit, the cycle is stopped and an error message appears.
• To clear the error message and return to the Part Setup screen, press
any key.
• Check the Part Probe Parameters and the part fixturing. Make
adjustments as necessary and re-start the cycle.
b. The deflection position appears in the Edge (X,Y, or Z) field when the cycle
is finished.
c. The probing axis returns to the Start Position.
4. The Accept Position As Part Zero and Do Not Accept softkeys appear.
Press the appropriate softkey.
• The Accept Position As Part Zero softkey accepts the edge position
and subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.
• The Do Not Accept softkey ignores the edge position value and the
Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.
Refer to Part Zero Storage, on page 4 - 55 for more information.
5. The initial Part Setup screen appears with Part Zero entries established during
the cycle.
Hole or Circle Pocket
The Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle is used for determining the center location and the
diameter of a hole or pocket. During a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle, the part probe moves
from the inside of the circle out to three points on the edge, touches at each point, and
returns to the Start Position within the circle after each touch. The software records each
deflection position and calculates the center location. The probe positions in the center of
the pocket.
The figure below shows part probe movement during a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle:

1. Start Position
2. Start Angle 1
3. Start Angle 2
4. Start Angle 3
5. Start Position
6. Start Angle 1
Figure 6. Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle
WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Hole or Circle Pocket Probing
Cycle:
Center X Preset Y
Center Y Start Angle
Diameter
Part Probe Cycle
Preset X
Follow these steps to program a Hole or Circle Pocket Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Hole or Circle Pocket.
2. In the Start Angle fields, enter the desired approach angles.
offset value in the Preset X or Preset Y field.

When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Hole or Circle Pocket Probing
Cycle:
1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, into
the pocket and below the surface.
2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE (F1) softkey. The Start Cycle button
flashes.
a. The probe moves along Start Angle 1 until it is deflected at the edge of the
hole or circle pocket.
• If no deflection occurs before the probe reaches its travel limit, the
cycle is stopped and an error message appears.
any key.
b. After the first deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position.
c. The probe moves along Start Angle 2 to a second contact point.
d. After the deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position.
e. The probe moves along Start Angle 3 to a third contact point.
f. After the deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position.
g. Using the three contact points, the control calculates the diameter and the
center (X and Y) of the hole.
h. The probe moves to the center of the hole or circle pocket. The results
appear in the Center X, Center Y, and Diameter fields.
4. The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) and DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkeys
appear. Press the appropriate softkey.
• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the center
position and subtracts the presets to determine Part Zero.
• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center value and the Preset
X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.
the cycle.

Cylinder
The Cylinder Cycle is used for determining the center location and the diameter of a
cylinder. During a Cylinder Cycle, the part probe moves from the Start Position above the
cylinder, out and down to three points around the diameter. The probe touches at each
point and returns up and over to the Start Position above the cylinder after each touch.
The software determines the diameter and the center location.
The figure below shows part probe movement during a Cylinder Cycle:
1. Start Position
2. Start Angle 1
3. Start Angle 2
4. Start Angle 3
5. Start Position
6. Start Angle 1
Figure 7. Cylinder Probing Cycle
WinMax Mill manual, these Part Setup fields appear for the Cylinder Cycle:
Center X Preset Y
Center Y Probing Radius
Diameter Start Angle
Part Probe Cycle Z Depth
Preset X
Follow these steps to program a Cylinder Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Cylinder.
2. In the Probing Radius field, enter the probe search radius.
4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves down before

changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point.
5. If you want to program an offset from Part Zero X and Part Zero Y, enter the
offset value in the Preset X and Preset Y field.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Cylinder Probing Cycle:
above the cylinder.
flashes.
a. The probe moves along Start Angle 1 until it reaches the Probing Radius.
• If no deflection occurs before the probe reaches the probe’s travel

any key.
b. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.
• If deflection occurs during the Z move, axis motion stops and an error
message appears.
any key.
c. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position in
order to find a contact point.
d. After deflection, the probe moves up and over to the Start Position above
the cylinder.
e. The probe moves along Start Angle 2 until it reaches the Probing Radius.
The same motion occurs as with Start Angle 1.
f. After the deflection, the probe moves up and over to the Start Position
above the cylinder.
g. The probe moves along Start Angle 3 until it reaches the Probing Radius.
The same motion occurs as with Start Angles 1 and 2.
h. After the third deflection, the control uses the three contact points and
calculates the diameter and center (X and Y) of the cylinder.
i. The probe moves up and over to the center above the Z Plane of the
cylinder. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, and Diameter fields.
and subtracts the presets to determine part zero.

• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center values and the
the cycle.
Rectangular Pocket Inside
The Rectangular Pocket Inside (or Rectangular Pocket) Cycle is used for determining the
center location of the pocket and the X and Y length of the rectangle. During a
Rectangular Pocket Cycle, the part probe moves from inside the pocket out to a point on
each edge of the rectangle, touches at each point, and returns to the Start Position after
each touch. The software records each deflection position and calculates the center
location and lengths.
The figure below shows part probe movement during a Rectangular Pocket Cycle.
1. Start Position
2. Point 1
3. Point 2
4. Point 3
5. Point 4
6. Start Position
7. Point 1
Figure 8. Rectangular Pocket Probing Cycle
In addition to the standard Part Setup fields which are defined in the Programming Basics
chapter of the Getting Started with WinMax manual, these Part Setup fields appear for
the Rectangular Pocket Cycle:
Center X Preset X
Center Y Preset Y
Length (X)
Length (Y)
Part Probe Cycle

The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point of the pocket and applied to Part
Zero X and Y if you select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears
after the cycle has been run.
Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Pocket Cycle:
1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Rectangular Pocket
Inside.
2. If you want to program an offset for Part Zero X or Part Zero Y, enter the
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Pocket Cycle:
1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, into
the pocket and below the surface.
2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
a. The probe moves in the positive X direction until it is deflected at the edge
of the pocket.
• Ιf no deflection occurs before the probe reaches its horizontal travel

any key.
b. After the first deflection, the probe returns to the Start Position.
c. The probe moves in the negative X direction, reaches a second contact
point, and returns to the Start Position.
d. The probe moves in the positive Y direction, reaches a third contact point,
and returns to the Start Position.
e. The probe moves in the negative Y direction, reaches a fourth contact
point, and returns to the Start Position.
f. Using the four contact points, the control calculates the length of the
pocket in the X and Y directions and the center (X and Y) of the pocket.
g. The probe moves to the center of the rectangle. The results are displayed
on the screen in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), and Length (Y) fields.
4. The ACCEPT POSITOIN AS PART ZERO and DO NOT ACCEPT softkeys appear.
• The ACCEPT POSITOIN AS PART ZERO softkey accepts the center and
subtracts the presets to determine part zero.
• The DO NOT ACCEPT softkey ignores the center and length values and the
the cycle.

Rectangular Solid Outside
A Rectangular Solid Outside (or Rectangular Solid) Cycle is used for determining the
center location of the pocket and the X and Y length of the rectangle. During a
Rectangular Solid Cycle, the part probe moves from above the rectangle out and down to
a point on each of the four walls, touches at each point, and returns to the Start Position
after each touch. The software records each deflection position and calculates the center
position and lengths.
The figure below shows part probe movement during a Rectangular Solid Cycle:
1. Start Position
2. Point 1
3. Point 2
4. Point 3
5. Point 4
6. Start Position
7. Point 1
Figure 9. Rectangular Solid Probing Cycle
the Rectangular Solid Cycle:
Center X Probing Length X
Center Y Probing Length Y
Length (X) Preset X
Length (Y) Preset Y
Part Probe Cycle Z Depth
Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Solid Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Rectangular Solid
Outside.
2. In the Probing Length X field, enter an estimate for the X length.
3. In the Probing Length Y field, enter an estimate for the Y length.

4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis should move down.
5. If you want to program an offset for Part Zero X and Part Zero Y, enter the
offset value in the Preset X and Preset Y field.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Solid Cycle:
above the middle of the rectangle.
flashes.
a. The probe moves in the positive X direction, until it reaches its horizontal
travel limit determined by the Probing Length X field.

any key.
b. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.
• If deflection occurs during the Z move, axis motion stops and an error
message appears.
any key.
c. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and
deflects.
d. The probe returns up and over to the Start Position.
e. The probe moves in the negative X direction until it reaches its horizontal
travel limit determined by the Probing Length X field.
f. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.
g. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and
deflects.
h. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position.
i. The probe moves in the positive Y direction until it reaches its horizontal
travel limit determined by the Probing Length Y field.
j. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.
k. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and
deflects.
l. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position.
m. The probe moves in the negative Y direction until it reaches its horizontal
travel limit determined by the Probing Length Y field.
n. The probe moves down until it reaches Z Depth.
o. The probe moves backwards in the X/Y plane toward the Start Position and

deflects.
p. The probe moves up and over to the Start Position.
q. After the last deflection, the control calculates the X and Y lengths of the
solid and the center (X and Y) of the rectangle.
r. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), and Length (Y),
fields. The probe moves to the center above the rectangle.
and subtracts the presets to determine part zero.
• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the center and length values
and the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.
the cycle.
Plane Intersection (Non-Rectangular Corner)
A Plane Intersection Cycle is used for determining an X and Y intersection for a non-
rectangular corner. During a Plane Intersection Cycle, the part probe moves from an
offset position to two points in the X direction and two points in the Y direction to
determine an X and Y intersection point.
The Plane Intersection cycle can be used with solid or pocket geometry. The figure below
shows part probe movement with the two types of geometry:
1. Solid geometry Start
2. Solid Geometry Point 1
6. Pocket Geom. Start
7. Pocket Geom. Point 1
Figure 10. Plane Intersection Probing Cycle

the Plane Intersection Cycle:
Corner X Preset X
Corner Y Preset Y
Offset
Probing Direction X
Probing Direction Y
Follow these steps to program a Plane Intersection Cycle:
1. From the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey menu, select Plane Intersection.
2. In the Probing Direction X field, select Positive or Negative.
3. In the Offset 1 field, enter the position for the first Y Offset, relative to the
Start Position.
4. In the Offset 2 field, enter the position for the second Y Offset, relative to the
Start Position.
5. In the Probing Direction Y field, select Positive or Negative.
6. In the Offset 1 field, enter the position for the first X Offset, relative to the
Start Position.
7. In the Offset 2 field, enter the position for the second X Offset, relative to the
Start Position.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Plane Intersection Cycle:
1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe into the Start Position,
near the non-rectangular corner.
flashes.
a. The probe moves the direction specified in Probing Direction X the distance
specified in Offset 1.

any key.
b. The probe reaches the first contact point with the first edge in the X
direction, deflects, and moves to the position specified in Offset 2.
c. The probe reaches the second contact point in the X direction and deflects.

d. The probe returns to the starting point.
e. The probe moves the direction specified in Probing Direction Y the distance
specified in Offset 1.
f. The probe reaches the first contact point with the first edge in the Y
direction, deflects, and moves to the position specified in Offset 2.
g. The probe reaches the second contact point in the Y direction and deflects.
h. The probe returns to the Start Position.
i. Using the four contact points, the control calculates the X and Y
intersection points. The results appear in the Corner X and Corner Y fields.
4. The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (and DO NOT ACCEPT softkeys appear.
• The ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1) softkey accepts the corner
position and subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.
• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the corner values and the
the cycle.
Part Zero Storage
At the end of each Probing Cycle, the results of the cycle are displayed on the screen.
These results are displayed in machine coordinates and do not include the Preset values.
Cycle Results
Edge Contact Position (X, Y, or Z)
Hole or Circle Pocket Diameter, Center (X and Y)
Cylinder Diameter, Center (X and Y)
Rectangular Pocket Lengths (X and Y), Center (X and Y)
Rectangular Solid Lengths (X and Y), Center (X and Y)
Plane Intersect Corner (X and Y)
Selecting the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey accepts the probed values and
subtracts the presets to determine part zero. The new Part Zero values appear in the Part
Zero X and Part Zero Y fields.
With an Edge probing cycle the probe moves only one axis. Therefore, only one of Part
Zero X, Part Zero Y, or Probe Z is set. With all other cycles, both Part Zero X and Part Zero
Y are determined at the same time.

Part Skew Probing Cycles
The following table describes the process of the Skew Probing Cycles:
Skew Cycle Cycle Automatic Display of the Optional

Type Parameter Execution results storage
Input
Edge Axis X, Y, or Z Cycle Start Deflection Position Skew Angle

Probe Direction: Approach edge. X, Y, or Z
Positive or Retract. Skew Angle (deg)
Negative
Return to Start
Preset X or Position.
Preset Y
Hole or Start Angle 1, 2, 3 Cycle Start Center X Skew Angle

Circle Approach 3 Circle Center Y
Pocket Preset X Points from inside. Diameter
Preset Y Position Probe into Skew Angle (deg)
Center.
Cylinder Probing Radius Cycle Start Center X Skew Angle

Z Depth Approach 3 Center Y
Start Angle 1, 2, 3 Cylinder Points Diameter
from outside.
Preset X Skew Angle (deg)
Position Probe
Preset Y
above cylinder
Center.
Rectangular Preset X Cycle Start Center X Skew Angle

Pocket Preset Y Approach the 4 Center Y
pocket walls from Length X
inside.
Length Y
Position Probe into
Skew Angle (deg)
pocket Center.
Rectangular Probing Length X Cycle Start Center X Skew Angle

Solid Probing Length Y Approach the 4 Center Y
Z Depth Rectangle walls Length X
from outside.
Preset X Length Y
Position Probe
Preset Y Skew Angle (deg)
above rectangle
Center.
Two Point Axis X or Y Cycle Start Skew Angle (deg) Skew Angle
Edge Probe Direction: Approach two
Positive or points on the
Negative edge.
Offset Return to Start
Position.

Manual Mode Part Skew Probing Cycles
From the Part Setup screen, use the PROBING softkey to access the Probing Cycles.
During a Part Skew Probing cycle the probe moves to specified points on the part,
deflects, and stops in the center of the part feature. These cycles detect and compensate
for X/Y skew in the workpiece. X/Y skew represents, in degrees, how far the part is from
perfect alignment with the table.
• A positive skew angle means the part is rotated in a counterclockwise

direction from the machine axes (as viewed from above the part).
• A negative skew angle indicates a clockwise rotation from the machine axes.
Although this angle, if known, may be manually typed in using the keypad, it is easier
and more accurate to let the probe find the skew angle and automatically enter it.
For best results, it is recommended that you use the probe for
determining Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, and X/Y Skew. Entering values
for any of these fields with the keypad reduces the amount of
information available for skew calculations. Also, the software must
make assumptions that may reduce accuracy.
After probing the Part Zero position as a reference, the skew cycles allow you to probe a
second feature on the part and adjust all machining operations by the skew angle to
exactly match the part.
When the cycle is finished, the software displays values representing the desired
features. The fields for each cycle vary and are defined with each cycle description.
You can accept these values by pressing the Accept X/Y Skew Angle softkey when it
appears. Preset X or Preset Y offsets are used in the skew calculation. The presets are
subtracted from the probed Part Zero values, and the new Part Zero values appear after
pressing the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey.
The figure below illustrates a skewed workpiece with a Preset Y offset.
1. Part Zero (Corner, first

reference)
2. Hole Centerpoint (used as

a second reference for skew
compensation)
3. Preset Y

Figure 11. Example of a Skewed Workpiece
Enter offsets for Preset X and Preset Y for a precise Skew Angle. If
only one Preset value is entered, the skew angle will be approximate
and should not exceed 3 degrees.
Skew Compensation is intended to be used for correcting a slight

misalignment. If the skew angle contains only one Preset value and
is greater than approximately 3 degrees, then Part Skew probing
may not be exact, especially for Edge and Rectangular cycles.
Follow these steps to perform a Skew Probe Cycle for workpiece skew compensation:
1. Perform the Part Zero Probe Cycle. Refer to the appropriate Part Probe Cycle in
this chapter (i.e., Edge, Cylinder, etc.) or more information.
2. From the Part Setup screen, select the PROBING softkey followed by the PART
SKEW PROBE CYCLES softkey to access the Part Skew Probe Cycles.
3. The Skew Probe Cycle Type softkeys appear. Select the appropriate softkey for
the desired cycle.
Depending on the Skew Probing Cycle selected, different probing fields appear on the
Part Setup screen.
The following sections describe how to program each of the Part

Skew Probing Cycles.
Edge Skew
Follow these steps to program an Edge Skew Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Edge.
X Axis, Y Axis, or Z Axis.
Negative. Z Axis always probes in the Negative direction.
4. Program an offset in the Preset X or Preset Y field, if desired.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Edge Skew Probing Cycle:
near the edge to be probed.
flashes.
The tool motion for an Edge Skew Cycle is the same as the motion described
for an Edge Cycle. The results appear in the Edge (X,Y, or Z) and Skew Angle
(Deg) fields. The probe returns to the Start Position.
4. The ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) and DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkeys appear.
• The ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) softkey accepts the skew position and

subtracts the Preset X or Y value to determine Part Zero.
• •The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the edge position value and
the Preset X or Y value. Part Zero remains unchanged.
5. The initial Part Setup screen appears with the skew value established during
the cycle stored in the X/Y Skew (deg) field, if accepted.
Hole or Circle Pocket Skew
Follow these steps to program a Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select the HOLE OR
CIRCLE POCKET (F2) softkey.
2. In the Start Angle 1, Start Angle 2, and Start Angle 3 fields, enter the desired
approach angles.
3. Program an offset in the Preset X and/or Preset Y field(s), if desired.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Hole or Circle Skew Probing
Cycle:
inside the pocket near the center.
flashes.
The tool motion for a Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing Cycle is the same as
the motion described for a Hole or Circle Pocket Cycle. The results appear in
the Center X, Center Y, Diameter, and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe
stops in the center of the pocket.
• The DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey ignores the edge position value and the

Cylinder Skew
Follow these steps to program a Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Cylinder.
2. In the Probing Radius field, enter the probe search radius.
4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves down before
changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point.
5. Program an offset in the Preset X and/or Preset Y field(s), if desired.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle:
above the cylinder near the center.
flashes.
The tool motion for a Cylinder Skew Probing Cycle is the same as the motion
described for a Cylinder Cycle. The results appear in the Center X, Center Y,
Diameter, and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe stops in the center above
the cylinder.

Rectangular Pocket Skew
Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Pocket Skew Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Rectangular
Pocket Inside.
2. Program an offset for the Preset X and/or Preset Y field, if desired.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Pocket Skew Probing
Cycle:
inside the rectangular pocket.
flashes.
The tool motion for a Rectangular Pocket Skew Probing Cycle is the same as
the motion described for a Rectangular Pocket Cycle. The results are
displayed on the screen in the Center X, Center Y, Length (X), Length (Y) and
Skew Angle (deg) fields. The probe stops in the center of the pocket.

Rectangular Solid Skew
Follow these steps to program a Rectangular Solid Skew Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup Skew Probe Cycle softkey menu, select Rectangular Solid
Outside.
2. In the Probing Length X field, enter the pocket’s estimated X Length.
3. In the Probing Length Y field, enter the pocket’s estimated Y Length.
4. In the Z Depth field, enter the distance the Z axis moves downward before
changing direction and moving to the edges for deflection.
5. Program an offset for the Preset X and/or Preset Y field, if desired.
When the Part Setup fields have been entered, start the Rectangular Solid Skew Probing
Cycle:
above the rectangle near the center.
flashes.
The tool motion for a Rectangular Solid Skew Probing Cycle is the same as
the motion described for a Rectangular Solid Cycle. The results appear in the
Center X, Center Y, Length (X), Length (Y), and Skew Angle (deg) fields. The
probe moves to the center above the rectangle.

Two Point Edge Skew
Follow these steps to program a Two Point Edge Skew Probing Cycle:
1. From the Part Setup / Part Probing / Part Skew Probe Cycle screen, select the
Two Point Edge softkey.
X Axis, Y Axis.
Negative.
4. Program the value for the second point in the Offset field.
When the fields have been entered, start the Two Point Edge Skew Probing Cycle:
1. Place the part probe in the spindle and jog the probe to the Start Position, near
the edge to be probed.
2. Press the START PROBING CYCLE softkey. The Start Cycle button flashes.
a. The probing axis moves in the specified direction until the probe is
deflected.
b. Retracts to the start position.
c. Moves to the second start point, determined by the Offset value.
d. Moves in the specified direction until the probe is deflected.
e. Returns to start position.
4. A pop-up box with the probing results appears when probing is complete.
Select Yes or No to accept or reject the results.

Automatic Mode
To locate part zero and to determine skew in the XY plane as part of the program instead
of manually during Part Setup, the Probe Part Setup conversational data block can be
used to automatically perform this function.
Access the Probe Part Setup data block from the Part Programming screen as a
Miscellaneous Data Block. Select the Miscellaneous (F5) softkey from the New Block
screen and the following screen appears:
Figure 12. New Block Screen with Probe Part Setup Softkey

Probe Part Setup Data Block
<For Part Inspection Data Block, see Part Quality Verification, on page 4 - 67.>
From the New Block (Miscellaneous) screen, press the Probe Part Setup softkey. The
Probe Part Setup data block screen appears with fields for programming cycles to
determine part zero alone or in addition to determining the skew in the XY plane.
The fields on the left-hand side of the screen and the XYZ Start fields apply to the Part
Zero Cycle; the fields on the right-hand side of the screen and the Skew Start fields apply
to the Skew Cycle:
Figure 13. Probe Part Setup Data Block
Probe Part Setup Fields
The Probe Part Setup screen contains fields for the Part Zero Cycle and the Skew Cycle.
The fields change depending on the selected cycle.
Part Zero and Skew Cycles
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Zero and Skew Cycle fields:
Offset Probe Direction X Skew Start Positions Z Start
Offset X Probe Direction Y Start Angle
Offset Y Probing Length X Tool
Part Zero Cycle Probing Length Y X Start
Preset X Probing Radius Y Start
Preset Y Skew Axis Z Depth
Probe Axis Skew Cycle Z Drop Down Depth

Probe Part Setup Data Block Execution
When the program executes this data block, it will automatically probe the part and
update Part Zero X, Part Zero Y, Probe Z and X/Y Skew. The data block may be placed
anywhere in the part program except within a Pattern.
The Store Results field allows you to specify where you want the probed results to be
stored.
• Part Setup—sends the results to Part Setup.

• Work Offset—sends the results to the work offset you specify (G54-G59).
• Aux Offset—sends the results to the Aux Work Offset you specify (1-93).

Part Quality Verification
Part Inspection data blocks are available with the Probing Option for performing part
quality verification. This section describes the Part Inspection data blocks.
Part Inspection
A Part Inspection data block is available to monitor real-time data for selected probing
cycles. When the data block is executed, the software creates two files: progname.txt
and progname.dat, where “progname” is the name of the part program.
The files are stored on the hard drive in the same sub-directory as the part program file
and contain time-stamped information about the selected geometry.
The information in the files can be used for reports and part quality verification. Both files
contain the same information and are available for you to view.
• progname.txt - contains ASCII text, viewable with any editor.

• progname.dat - contains a comma delimited file that may be imported to a
spreadsheet.
Part Inspection Cycles

To access the Part Inspection cycles, follow this softkey sequence from the Input screen:
1. Select PART PROGRAMMING.

2. Select MISCELLANEOUS.
3. Select MORE. This screen appears:
Figure 14. New Block Screen with Part Inspection Softkey

Select the PART INSPECTION (F5) softkey and this screen appears:
Figure 15. Part Inspection Screen
Part Inspection Fields
The fields on the Part Inspection screen change depending on the selected cycle and are
defined as follows; refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Part Zero Cycle fields:
Inspection Cycle Probing Length X Y Start
Offset X Probing Length Y Z Depth
Offset Y Probing Radius Z Start
Probe Axis Start Angle
Probe Direction X Tool
Probe Direction Y X Start
Part Inspection Programming
Follow these steps to program a Part Inspection data block:
1. Enter the part probe tool number in the tool field.

2. When the cursor is on the Inspection Cycle field, the softkeys change. Select a
cycle type for the Inspection Cycle field.
3. Program the remaining fields as described in the “Part Inspection Fields”
section. The data block is stored with the program and executed
automatically.

Part Inspection Files
When the Part Inspection data block is executed, the software automatically creates the
part inspection files. The position data is presented in part relative coordinates.
• To view the files on your PC, first copy them to a disk in the floppy drive.
Follow the steps for saving files to disk in the Programming Basics chapter of
the Getting Started with WinMax manual.
It is not possible to view the Part Inspection files on the CNC.
Here is a sample Part Inspection Probe.txt file:
******************************************
* PART INSPECTION DATA *
******************************************
Cylinder inspection (block # 3) executed 15:46:58 8/10/2000
Part Count = 4
Center Diameter
***********************************************************
X 16.7168 inches ( 424.607 mm)1.8878 inches ( 47.951 mm)
Y 10.0995 inches ( 256.527 mm)
Single point inspection (block # 3) executed 9:50:31 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5
Point
*******************************
X 10.3365 inches ( 262.548 mm)
Y 10.3882 inches ( 263.860 mm)
Z 14.2154 inches ( 361.070 mm)
Hole/circle inspection (block # 4) executed 9:50:45 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5
Center Diameter
***********************************************************
Y 15.4572 inches ( 392.612 mm)
Cylinder inspection (block # 5) executed 9:51:02 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5
Center Diameter
***********************************************************
Y 10.0996 inches ( 256.531 mm)
Rectangular pocket inspection (block # 6) executed 9:51:24 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5
Center Length
**************************************************************
X 14.4527 inches ( 367.099 mm)X 4.7259 inches ( 120.037 mm)
Y 14.3001 inches ( 363.223 mm)Y 4.7258 inches ( 120.034 mm)
Rectangular solid inspection (block # 7) executed 9:51:47 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5

Center Length
**************************************************************
X 9.4447 inches ( 239.895 mm)X 3.8176 inches ( 96.967 mm)
Y 12.1092 inches ( 307.575 mm)Y 1.2629 inches ( 32.079 mm)
Plane intersect inspection (block # 8) executed 9:52:08 8/11/2000

Part Count = 5
Corner
*******************************
X 7.7663 inches ( 197.264 mm)
Y 13.2841 inches ( 337.417 mm)

ROTARY
Rotary Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
Rotary Part Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Universal Transform Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Rotary Programming 704-0116-501 Rotary 5-1

Rotary Overview
Rotary-axis and tilt-axis operations and hardware (e.g., rotary table, trunnion table,
swivel head) are typically used to cut around a cylindrical part while it is turning. When
your machine is equipped with rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis hardware, you can mill more
diverse parts than with 3-axis machining. Hurco’s Conversational rotary part
programming allows you to easily drill and contour cylindrical, curved, odd-shaped or
asymmetrical parts using rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis hardware.
A rotary axis can move in a 360° rotation in positive or negative

directions. See Rotary Axis, on page 5 - 3.
A tilt axis moves less than a 360° rotation. The machine

configuration determines the limits of tilt-axis rotation. See Tilt Axis,
on page 5 - 3.
In non-rotary linear milling operations, the machine table and spindle move in the X, Y,
and Z axes. In rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis milling operations, the A, B, and/or C axes
replace the corresponding linear axes.
• A axis rotates/tilts around the X axis.

• B axis rotates/tilts around the Y axis.
• C axis rotates/tilts around the Z axis.
Figure 5–1. Axes Movement
The configuration of rotary and/or tilt hardware installed in your machining center will
determine which axes are available for rotary-/tilt-axis milling operations.
5 - 2 Rotary 704-0116-501 Rotary Programming

Rotary Axis
Rotary-axis operations in a Conversational rotary part program are similar to standard
milling operations, except that the rotary milling feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame)
is wrapped around a cylinder. Rotary-axis operations can be performed on a 4-axis or 5-
axis machine where the part is fixtured to the centerline of the rotary-axis.
A rotary-axis table can move in a 360º rotation in both positive and

negative directions.
Tilt Axis
A pivoting rotary table allows you to tilt the table to a specific angle during machining.
Any rotary program or standard milling operation can be executed at the tilt position, but
the tilt-axis will remain stationary while the data block is being machined. If you want to
machine a part while moving the tilt axis, you must use NC programming. Refer to the
WinMax Mill NC Programming manual for more information.
A tilt-axis moves less than a 360º rotation. The machine configuration

determines the limits of tilt-axis rotation.
Configuration of Hurco Machining Centers

Hurco machining centers provide a variety of machine configurations. Rotary and/or tilt
tables can be installed in Hurco machining centers, either at the factory or on-site. Some
Hurco machine models come with rotary hardware as standard equipment. The table
below shows configurations available for Hurco machining centers.
Configuration Machine Type
Universal All axis configurations and machines
Rotary A 4-axis rotary machining
Rotary A, Tilt B 4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining
4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on trunion table

Tilt A, Rotary C
machines
Rotary B 4-axis rotary machining on horizontal (HMX) machines
Tilt B, Rotary C 4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on SR machines
Table 5–1. Rotary Configurations Available on Hurco Machines

Setting the Axis Configuration
You must set the axis configuration in the Conversational part program before you
program rotary or tilt operations. Follow these steps to set the axis configuration:
1. Press the Auxiliary console button to access the Auxiliary screen.

2. Select the Utilities icon from the Auxiliary screen.
4. Select the Conversational Settings softkey.
5. Select the axis configuration from the Default Conversational Program
Type drop-down list or softkeys on the Conversational Settings screen
(configurations listed below are not available for all Hurco models):
• Standard—Non-rotary
• Rotary A—Rotary axis
• Rotary A Tilt B—Rotary and/or tilt axis
• Tilt A Rotary C—Rotary and /or tilt axis
• Rotary B—Rotary axis
• Tilt B Rotary C—SR only
• Universal—all configurations (default)
Select the axis configuration for all of the axes on your machine,
even if you don’t think they will be used in the program. Rotary- and/
or tilt-axis data blocks can be added to an existing program as long
as the rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis configuration was selected when
the program was first created.
Once an axis configuration is set for a program, it cannot be

changed. However, you can use an existing Conversational program
to create a new program that contains rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis
programming data blocks. Follow these steps to create the new
program:
1. Create a new Conversational program with the rotary-axis

or tilt-axis configuration for your machine.
2. Select the Import Functions softkey from the Input
screen to pull in all data blocks and setups from an
existing Conversational part program. Refer to Getting
Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
3. Add rotary-axis or tilt-axis operations in the new program.
4. Save the new program under a new name. You now have
a rotary-axis and/or tilt-axis version and a standard
version of the same Conversational part program.

Rotary Part Programming
Part program type is dependent upon machine configuration:
• Universal—all axis configurations and machines (default)

• Rotary A—4-axis rotary machining
• Rotary A Tilt B—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining
• Tilt A Rotary C—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on trunnion
table machines
• Rotary B—4-axis rotary machining on horizontal machines
• Tilt B Rotary C—4-axis rotary and 5-axis rotary or tilt machining on SR
machines
See Configuration of Hurco Machining Centers, on page 5 - 3 for information about

setting the program type.
The following sections contain details about the program blocks for each configuration:
Universal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Tilt A Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29
Rotary B Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34
Tilt B Rotary C Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Rotary New Block

Rotary New Block is the same for all configurations. When you select the Rotary softkey a
new data block will appear with the following softkeys:
• Rotary Position—moves all axes, including the rotary axis. See Rotary
Position Block, on page 5 - 6.
• Rotary Milling—access the Rotary Lines and Arcs, Circle, Frame, True-Type
Font, Slot, and Polygon data blocks. See Rotary Milling New Block, on page 5
- 6.
• Rotary Patterns—access the Rotary Pattern Loop, Rotary Pattern Locations,
Rectangular, Mirror, and Transform Plane data blocks to repeat a rotary
feature on a cylinder. See Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7.
• Rotary Parameters—define the parameters of the cylinder. See Rotary
Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7.
• Transform Plane—access the Transform Plane block where angles or vectors
information is entered. See Universal Transform Plane, on page 5 - 8.
• Transform Plane End—ends the Transform Plane.
• Transform Plane Groups—accesses the Transform Plane Group blocks:
Linear, Rotate, and Locations. SeeTransform Plane Groups, on page 5 - 11.

Tool changes are completed before each rotary data block is
executed. The tool change will be automatic or the machine will
prompt for manual insertion of the tool specified in the data block.
Rotary Position Block

A Rotary Position data block is used to move the machine’s axes to a specific location at
Rapid feedrate. A new Rotary Position data block is required each time the rotary-axis
must be repositioned in the part program.
The tool will move to the Retract Plane, Safety Plane, or Home Z position before the table
rotates into position each time a Rotary Position data block with rotary-axis positioning is
executed in a Conversational part program.
A Rotary Position data block should be included as the first data

block in a Conversational rotary part program to define the initial
orientation of the rotary axis.
Rotary Position Block fields are dependent upon machine axis configuration. Fields for all
configurations except Universal are listed below. See Rotary Position Block - Universal, on
page 5 - 14 for Universal Rotary Position block fields.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of Rotary Position Block fields:
A Angle Tool Y Position
B Angle Transform Part Zero Y Safety Position
C Angle Use Offset Z Z Move Type
Rotary Safety Move X Position
Stop X Safety Position
Rotary Milling New Block

Rotary Milling New Block is the same for all configurations. These softkeys appear on the
Rotary Milling New Block screen:
• Rotary Lines And Arcs—access the Rotary Mill Contour data block to create
lines and arcs on a cylinder.
• Rotary Circle—access the Rotary Mill Circle data block to create a circle on a
cylinder.
• Rotary Frame—access the Rotary Mill Frame data block to create a frame on
a cylinder.
• Rotary True Type Font (available with Universal Rotary configuration
only)—access the Rotary True Type font data block to create text on a
cylinder.
• Rotary Slot (available with Universal configuration only)—access the Rotary
Slot data block to create a slot on a cylinder.
• Rotary Polygon (available with Universal configuration only)—access the

Rotary Polygon data block to create a polygon on a cylinder.
• Rotary Stick Lettering (available with Universal configuration only) —
access the Rotary Stick Lettering data block to create text on a cylinder.
Rotary Patterns
Rotary patterns allow you to repeat a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame,
holes) on the part. These are the softkeys on the Rotary Patterns data block:
• Rotary Loop—repeats a pattern along the X-A plane on a cylindrical part.

• Rotary Locations—repeats a mill feature anywhere on a cylindrical part.
• Rotary Rectangular (available only with Universal configuration)—repeats a
rectangle on a cylindrical part.
• Rotary Mirror (available only with Universal configuration)—repeats a
pattern as a mirror image.
Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations)

The Rotary Parameters data block is used to set the radius of the cylindrical part and to
define the Y Off of Centerline parameter.
For Universal configurations, see Rotary Parameters - Universal, on page 5 - 23.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of Rotary Parameters Block fields:
Cylinder Radius
Rotary Centerline X
Rotary Centerline Y
Y Off Of Centerline

Universal Transform Plane
Hurco’s Universal Transform Plane feature can be used with 4-axis or 5-axis machining
centers to machine non-rotary (i.e., 3-axis) milling or drilling features on multiple sides
(planes) of a part. The method of orientation (angles or vectors) is established and the
machine automatically moves so that the tool is positioned perpendicular to the
transformed plane.
Universal Transform Plane has the following benefits:
• Reduces setup time and potential positioning errors because the part doesn’t
have to be refixtured each time the plane is transformed.
• Allows a non-rotary milling or drilling feature to be machined on one or more
sides of an irregularly-shaped work piece.
Transform Plane Block

A Transform Plane block is used in a Conversational program to repeat a non-rotary
feature (for example, mill contour or holes) on multiple sides of a part.
Rotary Pattern Loop and Rotary Pattern Locations data blocks can
not be used within a Transform Plane operation.
Non-rotary patterns cannot be in effect (i.e., must be closed with a

Pattern End data block) prior to a Transform Plane operation.
However, non-rotary patterns can be used within a Transform Plane
operation.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Transform Plane fields:
Orient Method
Origin Point
Rotation Angles
X Direction
Y Direction
Follow these steps to use Universal Transform Plane:
1. Insert a Transform Plane block before the non-rotary milling or drilling block
you want to transform.
• Select the Orient Method.
• Enter the origin point coordinates and the angles or vectors.
2. Create the non-rotary milling or drilling block(s) on the X-Y plane (i.e., create
the milling or drilling feature as a 3-axis part). Multiple milling or drilling
operations may occur within a Transform Plane operation.
3. Insert a Transform Plane End block. The Transform Plane operation ends and
part zero is the reference point.

Repeat steps 1-3 for each transform (repeat of the milling/drilling
feature on another side/plane of the part).
Also see Universal Transform Plane Example, on page 5 - 10.
Transform Plane End Block

The Transform Plane End block ends the Transform Plane operation and part zero is the
reference point.
Stacking or nesting of multiple transform planes is allowed. In this

case the Transform Plane End block is not used between transform
plane moves, so the tool does not move back to part zero between
transform planes. At the end of the stack, there must be a Transform
Plane End block for each transform plane contained inside the stack.

Universal Transform Plane Example
The figure below shows a non-rotary mill polygon created on the top of the part and
transformed onto two additional sides.
Initial Part Zero
Initial polygon
1st transform plane 2nd transform plane
DB Data Block/Fields Value Notes

1 Mill Polygon Creates the non-rotary polygon on
(Pocket Boundary) the XY plane.
2 Transform Plane Re-orients the work plane.
Orient Method Angles
Origin Point X0, Y0, Z-6
Rotation Angles R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)0
(Pocket Boundary) the first transform plane.
4 Transform Plane End Ends the transform plane.
5 Transform Plane Re-orients the work plane.
Orient Method Angles
Origin Point X6, Y0, Z-6
Rotation Angles R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)90
(Pocket Boundary) the 2nd transform plane.
7 Transform Plane End Ends the transform plane.

Transform Plane Groups
Transform Plane Groups allow you to easily pattern or sequence a Transform Plane
feature without the need to program a series of transform planes at each location and
with different angles.
Three types of Transform Plane group blocks correspond with the three methods of
sequencing transform plane geometry: linear, rotate, and locations:
• Transform Plane Group Linear—repeats a transform plane along a linear

pathway with XYZ locations specified.
• Transform Plane Group Rotate—repeats a transform plane around an axis
with the angle and distance specified.
• Transform Plane Group Locations—repeats a transform plane at specified
locations using Angles or Vectors method.
Follow these steps to use Universal Transform Plane Groups:
1. Insert a Transform Plane Group block and program the fields to specify the
sequence moves.
2. Insert a Transform Plane block and program to specify the transform plane
moves.
3. Create the non-rotary milling or drilling block(s) on the X-Y plane (i.e., create
the milling or drilling feature as a 3-axis part).
4. Insert a Transform Plane End block to end the transform plane moves.
5. Insert a Transform Plane Group End block to end the sequence.
See Universal Transform Plane Groups Example, on page 5 - 13.
Transform Plane Group Linear

Repeat transform planes along a linear pathway. Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions
of the Transform Plane Group—Linear block fields:
Number
X Distance
Y Distance
Z Distance
Transform Plane Group Rotate

Repeat transform planes around an axis. Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the
Transform Plane Group—Rotate block fields:

Axis Distance
Number
Rotation Angles
Rotation Axis
Transform Plane Group Locations

Repeat transform planes at specified locations using angles or vectors. Refer to the Field
Glossary for definitions of the Transform Plane Group—Locations block fields:
Orient Method
Origin Point
Rotation Angles
X Direction
Y Direction
Transform Plane Group End

Ends the Transform Plane Group sequence.
Keep in mind that when using Transform Plane Groups the group block and group end
block must bookend the transform plane and non-rotary feature blocks, as shown in the
example below:

Universal Transform Plane Groups Example
The figure below shows a non-rotary mill polygon created on the top of the part and
transformed onto two additional sides, using a Groups method. Note that the geometry is
the same as the Transform Plane example provided above, but the Transform Plane Group
Locations block specifies the transform planes. In this case the polygon data block is
created only once, simplifying program maintenance if it needs to be changed.
Initial Part Zero

Initial polygon
1st transform plane
2nd transform plane
DB Data Block/Fields Value Notes

1 Transform Plane Group 3 Locations: Specifies the locations of the
Locations X0, Y0, Z0, initial polygon and the 1st and
Orient Method = Angles R(X)0, R(Y)0, R(Z)0 2nd transform planes.
X0, Y0, Z-6,
R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)0
X6, Y0, Z-6,
R(X)90, R(Y)0, R(Z)90
2 Mill Polygon Creates the non-rotary mill
(Pocket Boundary) polygon on the XY plane.
3 Transform Plane Group Ends the transform plane.
End
Transform Plane (configurations other than

Universal)
The Transform Plane feature is available for the non-Universal configurations. It is used
with 4-axis or 5-axis machining centers to machine non-rotary milling or drilling features
on multiple sides (i.e., planes) of a workpiece. Part zero is reestablished for each
transformed plane in a Transform Plane Reference Points data block; the tool
automatically moves so that it is always perpendicular to the transformed plane.

Universal Configuration
Universal Configuration is used with all rotary types.
Rotary Position Block - Universal

A Rotary Position data block is used to move the machine’s axes to a specific location at
Rapid feedrate. A new Rotary Position data block is required each time the rotary-axis
must be repositioned in the part program.
The tool will move to the Retract Plane, Safety Plane, or Home Z position before the table
rotates into position each time a Rotary Position data block with rotary-axis positioning is
executed in a Conversational part program.
A Rotary Position data block should be included as the first data

block in a Conversational rotary part program to define the initial
orientation of the rotary axis.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Position block fields:
Enable X Position
IV Angle Y Position
Retract Type Z Position
Stop
V Angle
Rotary Lines and Arcs - Universal

Rotary line and arc segments are used to create a rotary mill contour. A rotary mill
contour is similar to a standard mill contour, except the rotary contour is wrapped around
a cylinder. See Lines and Arcs (Mill Contour), on page 2 - 19 in WinMax Mill
Conversational Programming for more information.
Start Segment
The first segment in a Lines and Arcs block is always a Start segment, indicated by the
segment zero (0).
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Lines and Arcs Start
segment fields:
Angle Start
Axis Start
Radius Bottom
Radius Start

Line Segment
For Line segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown
dimensions after you enter sufficient data. See Line Segment, on page 2 - 20 in WinMax
Mill Conversational Programming for more information.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Line segment fields:
Angle End Radius End
Angle Start Radius Start
Axis End
Axis Start
Arc Segment
For Arc segments, the Auto-Calc feature automatically calculates certain unknown
dimensions after you enter sufficient data. See Arc Segment, on page 2 - 21 in WinMax
Mill Conversational Programming for more information.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Arc segment fields:
Angle Center Axis Start Sweep Angle
Angle End Direction
Angle Start Radius
Axis Center Radius End
Axis End Radius Start
Blend Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Blend Arc segment
fields:
Angle Center Axis End
Angle End Axis Start
Angle Start Direction
Axis Center Radius

Rotary Circle - Universal
A rotary mill circle is similar to a standard mill circle, except the rotary mill circle is
wrapped around a cylinder.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Circle block fields:
Angle Center Radius Start
Axis Center Start Angle
Radius
Radius Bottom
See also Mill Circle, on page 2 - 26 in Conversational Programming

for additional information.
Rotary Frame - Universal

A rotary mill frame is similar to a mill frame, except the rotary frame is wrapped around a
cylinder. Rotary Frame block supports the creation of frames with or without uniform
corners.
The Universal Rotary Frame block contains fields on two tabs: Geometry and Corners.
The geometry parameters are entered on the Geometry tab:
Figure 5–2. Universal Rotary Frame Geometry tab
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Frame block fields:
Angle Length Radius Bottom
Angle Start Radius Start
Axis Length Start Side
Axis Start
Corner Radius

Each corner of a frame can be programmed with a radius or chamfer of a different size,
on the Corners tab:
Figure 5–3. Universal Rotary Frame Corners tab
Select Line or Arc for each corner:
• Specify radius for arcs.

• Specify length and angle for lines.
If the corner should have neither, the geometry should be left as an

arc with radius of 0.00, which is the default.
Here is an example of a Rotary Frame:
Figure 5–4. Universal Rotary Frame example

Rotary True Type Font - Universal
Rotary True Type Font is available with Universal Rotary configuration only.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary True-Type Lettering
fields:
Angle Reference Mapping Text Height
Angle Ref Location Orientation Text Width
Axis Reference Radius Bottom
Axis Ref Location Radius Start
Font Text
Available Fonts for Mill True-Type Lettering
Courier New Tahoma
Franklin Gothic Medium Times New Roman
Georgia Trebuchet MS
Impact Verdana
Lucida Console Webdings
Lucida Sans Unicode Wingdings
Marlett

Rotary Slot - Universal
The Rotary Slot block creates a line or arc shape of any width on a cylinder.
See Mill Slot, on page 2 - 81 of the Conversational Milling chapter for

additional information.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Slot fields:
Angle Center Axis Start Radius Bottom Width
Angle End Corner Radius Radius Start
Angle Start Direction Shape
Axis Center End Cap Start Cap
Axis End Radius Sweep Angle
Rotary Polygon - Universal

The Rotary Polygon data block mills a multi-sided contour with equal-length sides on a
cylinder.
See Mill Polygon, on page 2 - 86 in Conversational Programming for more information.
See Mill Polygon, on page 2 - 86 in the Conversational Milling chapter

for additional information.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Polygon fields:
Angle Center Radius Bottom
Axis Center Radius Start
Corner Radius Side Length
Number Of Sides Sizing Diameter
Orientation Angle Sizing Method

Rotary Stick Lettering - Universal
The Rotary Stick Lettering block allows text to be wrapped around a cylinder.
Figure 5–5. Rotary Stick Lettering screen
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Stick Lettering fields:
Angle Reference Orientation Text Width
Angle Ref Location Radius Bottom
Axis Reference Radius Start
Axis Ref Location Text
Char Spacing Text Height
Rotary Patterns - Universal

Rotary patterns allow you to repeat a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame,
holes) on the part. The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary
configurations; see Rotary Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on
this screen. The specific pattern data blocks for Universal Rotary are explained below.
Rotary Patterns only apply to cylindrical wrapping and therefore only

apply to rotary blocks within the pattern.
Use non-rotary patterns to repeat a feature on a plane
Use Transform Plane when you want to repeat a non-rotary feature

(e.g., mill contour, holes) on multiple sides of a part. See Universal
Transform Plane, on page 5 - 8.
Rotary Loop
A rotary loop defines the number and locations a feature is repeated on a cylinder. The
initial mill feature is located at part zero and all subsequent copies are at a specific
distance along the X-A axis of the cylinder.

A rotary Pattern End data block is required to end the sequence
repeated in the Rotary Pattern Loop data block.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Patterns loop fields:
Angle Distance
Axis Distance
Number
Rotary pattern and standard pattern data blocks can be nested (i.e.,
entirely contained within another pattern). The order of execution for
nested rotary pattern and standard pattern data blocks is from the
inside to the outside.
In the following example of nested data blocks, this is the order of

execution:
1. Holes and rotary Mill Frame operations contained within

the Pattern Loop Rotate data block.
2. Standard Mill Circle operation contained within the Rotary
Pattern Loop data block.
Rotary Pattern Loop

Standard Mill Circle (or any other rotary or non-rotary data blocks)
Pattern Loop Rotate
Holes operation
Rotary Mill Frame (or other rotary or non-rotary data blocks)
Pattern End (ends the Pattern Loop Rotate)
Pattern End (ends the Rotary Pattern Loop)
Only one Rotary Position data block is required for nested Rotary
Pattern Loop data blocks.
Rotary Locations
The Rotary Pattern Locations data block is used to create a list of locations of a mill
feature repeated on a cylinder. Up to 999 copies can be located anywhere on the part.
Each set of locations listed on the Rotary Patterns Location data block is a specific location
on the cylinder, relative to part zero. If you want the mill feature to be cut at part zero,
you must define the coordinates of part zero in one of the sets of locations.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Locations fields:
Angle
Axis
A rotary Pattern End data block is required to end the sequence in

the Rotary Pattern Locations data block.

After the rotary Pattern End data block has executed, the orientation
of the machine axes will remain at the position defined in the most
recent Rotary Position data block.
If the part program continues beyond the Rotary Pattern operation,

another Rotary Position data block will be required if the axes must
be reoriented to a different position.
Rotary Rectangular
Rotary Rectangular Pattern Block is available only with the Universal Rotary
configuration.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Rectangular
fields:
Angle Distance
Angle Number
Axis Distance
Axis Number
Rotary Mirror
Rotary Mirror Pattern Block is available only with the Universal Rotary configuration.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Universal Rotary Pattern Mirror fields:
Angle
Cylinder Angle
Cylinder Axis
Keep Original
Pattern End
A Pattern End data block is required to end rotary Pattern Loop and rotary Pattern
Locations operations. There are no fields in the Pattern End data block.
After the rotary Pattern End data block has executed, the orientation of
the machine axes will remain at the position defined in the most recent
Rotary Position data block.
If the part program continues beyond the Rotary Pattern operation, another Rotary
Position data block will be required if the axes must be reoriented to a different position.
• A Rotary Pattern Loop data block only modifies the rotary operations
contained within the pattern.
• The subsequent Rotary Position data block defines the orientation of the
machine axes after the pattern is executed, and can provide a reference point
if Recovery Restart is used.

• If the Rotary Pattern End data block is the last data block of the part
program, a subsequent Rotary Position data block is not necessary.
• If a non-rotary operation data block (e.g., holes operation) is used in a rotary
loop, a Rotary Position data block is required before the non-rotary operation
data block to position the axes before the operation is executed in the loop.
Rotary Parameters - Universal

The Rotary Orientation field defines the axis configuration: Rotary A/AB, Rotary B,
Rotary AC, Rotary BC, and User Defined. User Defined orientation requires the Axis of
Rotation (Cylinder Axis vector) and Zero Angle vector. The Zero Angle vector
describes the zero-degree Cylindrical Point vector direction with respect to the current
coordinate system. These vectors must be perpendicular otherwise the control will throw
an error. Other Rotary Orientation selections (Rotary A/AB, Rotary B, Rotary AC, Rotary
BC) are available to automatically configure the Axis of Rotation and Zero Angle vectors
to describe rotary features for Hurco's current program type configurations.
Set Cylinder Radius Data to use the Radius Start value from the Rotary block or to a
User Defined value. A user defined value may be used when you want to move the
feature so the cylinder wrapping is referenced somewhere between radius start and
bottom instead of radius start. Off CL Distance allows a +/- value for distance from
centerline.

Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B Configuration
Rotary A configuration can be used only with a full rotary (A axis) table.
Rotary A Tilt B configuration can be used only with a full rotary (A axis) and tilt (B axis)
table.
Rotary Position
The Rotary Position data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary
Position Block, on page 5 - 6 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen.
Rotary Lines and Arcs

a cylinder.
Start Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Start segment
fields:
A Angle
X Start
Z Bottom
Z Start
Line Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Line segment
fields:
A End Z End
A Start Z Start
X End
X Start

Arc Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Arc segment
fields:
A Center Radius X Start
A End Sweep Angle Z End
A Start X Center Z Start
Direction X End
Blend Arc Segment

Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Blend Arc
segment fields:
A Center Radius
A End X Center
A Start X End
Direction X Start
Mill Contour End Block

A Contour End data block is required to end rotary Mill Contour operations. There are no
fields in the Contour End data block.
Rotary Circle
wrapped around a cylinder.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Circle fields:
A Center Z Bottom
Radius Z Start
X Center
Start Angle

Rotary Frame
A rotary mill frame is similar to a mill frame, except the rotary mill frame is wrapped
around a cylinder.
Rotary Patterns
The Rotary Patterns data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see Rotary
Patterns, on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the softkeys on this screen. The specific
pattern screens for Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B are explained below.
Rotary Loop
A rotary loop defines the number and locations a mill feature will be repeated on a
cylinder. The initial mill feature is located at part zero and all subsequent copies are at a
specific distance along the X-A axis of the cylinder.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Pattern Loop
fields:
A Distance
B Distance
Number
X Distance

This is an example of nested data blocks in a program (the

indentations are used illustrate the order of execution; your
Conversational part program will not have these indentations).
In the following example, this is the order of execution:

Rotary Pattern Loop

Pattern Loop Rotate
Holes operation
Rotary Locations
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary A/Rotary A Tilt B Pattern Locations
fields:



Pattern End

another Rotary Position data block will be required if the axes must be
reoriented to a different position.
• A Rotary Pattern Loop data block only modifies the rotary

operations contained within the pattern.
• The subsequent Rotary Position data block defines the orientation
of the machine axes after the pattern is executed, and can
provide a reference point if Recovery Restart is used.
• If the Rotary Pattern End data block is the last data block of the
part program, a subsequent Rotary Position data block is not
necessary.
• If a non-rotary operation data block (e.g., holes operation) is
used in a rotary loop, a Rotary Position data block is required
before the non-rotary operation data block to position the axes
before the operation is executed in the loop.
Rotary Parameters
The Rotary Parameters data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see
Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of
the fields on this screen.
Transform Plane
The Transform Plane data block is available with multiple rotary configurations; see
Transform Plane (configurations other than Universal), on page 5 - 13 for an explanation
of the fields on this screen.

Tilt A Rotary C Configuration
Tilt A Rotary C configuration can be used only with an integrated trunnion tilt (A axis) and
full rotary (C axis) table.
Rotary Position
Position Block, on page 5 - 6 for an explanation of the fields on this screen.

a cylinder.
Start Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Start segment fields:
C Angle
Radius Bottom
Radius Start
Y Start
Line Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Line segment fields:
C End Y End
C Start Y Start
Radius End
Radius Start
Arc Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Arc segment fields:
C Center Radius Y Center
C End Radius End Y End
C Start Radius Start Y Start
Direction Sweep Angle

Blend Arc
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Blend Arc segment fields:
C Center Radius
C End Y Center
C Start Y End
Direction Y Start

Rotary Circle
wrapped around a cylinder. These are the fields on the Rotary Mill Circle data block:
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Circle fields:
C Center Y Center
Radius
Radius Bottom
Radius Start
Rotary Frame
around a cylinder.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Frame fields:
C Corner Radius Start
C Length Y Corner
Corner Radius Y Length
Radius Bottom

Rotary Patterns
pattern data blocks for Tilt A Rotary C are explained below.
Rotary Loop
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Pattern Loop fields:
A Distance
C Distance
Number
Z Distance



Rotary Pattern Loop

Pattern Loop Rotate
Holes operation

Rotary Locations
Each set of locations listed on the Rotary Patterns Location data block is a specific
location on the cylinder, relative to part zero. If you want the mill feature to be cut at part
zero, you must define the coordinates of part zero in one of the sets of locations.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt A Rotary C Pattern Locations fields:



Pattern End


• The subsequent Rotary Position data block defines the
orientation of the machine axes after the pattern is
executed, and can provide a reference point if Recovery
Restart is used.
• If the Rotary Pattern End data block is the last data block
of the part program, a subsequent Rotary Position data
block is not necessary.
• If a non-rotary operation data block (e.g., holes
operation) is used in a rotary loop, a Rotary Position data
block is required before the non-rotary operation data
block to position the axes before the operation is
executed in the loop.
Rotary Parameters
Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the
fields on this screen.
Transform Plane

Rotary B Configuration
Rotary B configuration can be used only with full rotary table (B axis) on horizontal (HMX)
machines.
Rotary Position
Rotary Milling
For rotary milling programs on an HMX machine, Universal Rotary configuration must be
used; see Universal Configuration, on page 5 - 14.
Rotary Patterns
pattern data blocks for Rotary B configuration are explained below.
Rotary Loop
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary B Pattern Loop fields:
B Distance
Number
Z Distance




Rotary Pattern Loop

Pattern Loop Rotate
Holes operation
Rotary Locations
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Rotary B Pattern Locations fields:



Pattern End


Restart is used.
Rotary Parameters
Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of
the fields on this screen.
Transform Plane

Tilt B Rotary C Configuration
Tilt B Rotary C configuration can be used only with a swivel head (B axis) spindle and full
rotary table (C axis).
Rotary Position

a cylinder.
Start Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Start segment fields:
C Angle
Radius Bottom
Radius Start
Z Start
Line Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Line segment fields:
C End Z End
C Start Z Start
Radius End
Radius Start
Arc Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Arc segment fields:
Arc Radius Direction Z Center
C Center Radius End Z End
C End Radius Start Z Start
C Start Sweep Angle

Blend Arc Segment
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Blend Arc segment fields:
Arc Radius Z Center
C Center Z End
C End Z Start
C Start
Direction

Rotary Circle
wrapped around a cylinder. These are the fields on the Rotary Mill Circle data block:
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Circle fields:
C Center Z Center
Radius
Radius Bottom
Radius Start
Rotary Frame
around a cylinder.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Frame fields:
C Corner Radius Start
C Length Z Corner
Corner Radius Z Length
Radius Bottom
Rotary Patterns

pattern data blocks for Tilt B Rotary C configuration are explained below.
Rotary Loop
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Pattern Loop fields:
C Distance
Number
Z Distance



Rotary Pattern Loop

Pattern Loop Rotate
Holes operation

Rotary Locations
Each set of locations listed on the Rotary Patterns Location data block is a specific
location on the cylinder, relative to part zero. If you want the mill feature to be cut at part
zero, you must define the coordinates of part zero in one of the sets of locations.
Refer to the Field Glossary for definitions of the Tilt B Rotary C Pattern Locations fields:



Pattern End


Restart is used.
Rotary Parameters
Rotary Parameters (non-Universal configurations), on page 5 - 7 for an explanation of the
field on this screen.
Transform Plane

ULTIMONITOR
The UltiMonitor option adds capability and flexibility to your WinMax Mill operation by
providing connection to your Local Area Network (LAN). Using UltiMonitor, you can
communicate with other CNCs, and with PCs or file servers connected to your LAN using
standard TCP/IP and FTP protocols. UltiMonitor also includes Extended Shop Floor (ESF)
for remote machine monitoring and communication.
This section covers the use of the UltiMonitor product. For information about basic system
operation, refer to the Getting Started with WinMax Mill manual.
Customers using UltiNet should refer to this section for product

guidance. The UltiNet option provides the same FTP connectivity as
UltiMonitor but does not include ESF.
LAN Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Configuring a Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Using FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Extended Shop Floor (ESF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Extended Shop Floor 704-0116-501 UltiMonitor 6-1

LAN Requirements
To use UltiMonitor, you must have a Local Area Network (LAN or “network”) that supports
the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet hardware standards. Contact your IT provider for guidance
about proper LAN design and setup.
Limitations for UltiMonitor

1. Do NOT connect machines to a domain. When connecting a machine to a
network, a workgroup must be used. WinMax software runs on an embedded
Windows operating system, and any changes to the system could cause
unwanted effects.
2. Installing any physical cards, including wireless devices, is NOT supported.
WinMax is designed and configured to operate with the existing system
hardware.
3. Use of an Ethernet cable connection to a machine is required.
Glossary of Networking Terms

Following are definitions for networking terms used throughout this section.
• Client/Server—This is a term commonly used to describe how computers do

work for each other. One computer runs server software; the other computer
runs client software. The server software waits for requests from the client in
order to perform tasks. Many times the server is a background task that runs
all the time. A client is a user application on a PC or some other workstation
and usually will not run all the time. A user may begin running client
software, do some work, then shut down the client when finished. It is
important to note that a single server may handle many clients. It is also
possible for a computer to function as both a client and a server
simultaneously.
• Ethernet—Ethernet is a particular networking technology specification.
Ethernet uses CSMA/CD to gain access to the network media (cable). CSMA/
CD stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection. Ethernet
sends its data on a carrier wave. Since there are multiple Ethernet adapters
attached to the same cable, they must take turns sending data. When ready
to transmit, an adapter checks for the presence of a carrier wave. If no
carrier is detected, the adapter begins transmission. If another adapter
begins transmitting data at the same time, a collision will occur. The Ethernet
hardware senses when a collision occurs. The two adapters involved in the
collision will stop, delay for a random length of time, and then try to
retransmit the data. This process repeats until the data is successfully sent.
Data is sent in the form of packets, which have a limited size, allowing other
hosts an opportunity to use the network media.
• FTP—This is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is implemented using
the client/server model and uses TCP/IP as its protocols. FTP software
contains a standard set of commands that are used to transfer files and
manage directory structures.
• Host—Any computer connected to a network can be a host, including a PC
running DOS, Windows XP/Vista/7, Windows NT; a UNIX workstation; a
6 - 2 UltiMonitor 704-0116-501 Extended Shop Floor

mainframe computer; a CNC control; or any machine with networking
capability.
• IP Address—An IP (Internet Protocol) address is used to identify a particular
host on a network. Each host on a network must have a unique IP address
consisting of a 32-bit number usually presented in dotted decimal format; for
example, 200.100.150.1. This format divides the address into four single
byte values separated by decimal points. On most networks, the first three
bytes represent the network and the last byte is the host. Following this
practice, the first three bytes are the same for all hosts and the last byte is
different for each host. On the Internet, these cryptic addresses usually are
not used⎯most addresses are represented as plain text, which are converted
to IP addresses by DNS, or Domain Name Server. The underlying protocol still
uses the unique 32-bit IP addresses.
• TCP/IP—This is an acronym for the two major protocols of the Internet,
Transmission Control Protocol and Internet Protocol. IP data normally reaches
its intended destination, but there is no failure notification for the sender if it
does not. TCP, however, has an acknowledgment that the message was
received. The TCP layer of a protocol stack uses IP to send a message in the
form of packets, or bundles of data. Each packet must be acknowledged or it
will be sent again. This process repeats until the entire message, which
contains multiple packets, is received. TCP is defined as a reliable stream-
oriented protocol. The use of TCP/IP is not limited to the Internet. It is
commonly used for communication between hosts on LANs (local area
networks). It may be used for any application that requires reliable data
transfer.

Configuring a Network
UltiMonitor allows machines to be connected on a Local Area Network (LAN or “network”).
Configuring an IP address for your machine

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a numerical label assigned to each device in a
computer network. IP addresses are assigned to a host either at the time of booting, or
permanently by fixed configuration of the hardware or software. Persistent configuration
is also known as using a static IP address. In contrast, a dynamic IP address occurs when
a device’s IP address is assigned with each reboot. All Hurco machines, by default, are
configured to use dynamic IP addresses. This is shown in the figure below.
The configuration can be changed to a static IP address, if desired. IP addresses must

always be unique to your network; contact your network administrator for the proper IP
address values.
To access the LAN and Internet Protocol properties:
1. Select the Windows key (or the Ctrl+Esc keys) on the keyboard to access
system settings through the Shell.
2. Expand the left pane of the Shell.
3. Select Control Panel.
4. Select Network Connections.
5. Enter password.
6. Highlight Local Area Connection.
7. Select File/Properties. (See Figure 12-1 a.)
8. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
9. Select Properties. The IP address configuration can be changed in the TCP/IP
Properties box that opens. (See Figure 12-1 b.)

a. b.
Figure 6–1. Default LAN and Internet Protocol Properties

Configuring the Computer and Workgroup Names
A computer name is an easy way to locate a networked device when connected to a local
network, as an alternative to an IP address. Like IP Addresses, it is very important that
these names are unique. All Hurco machines are, by default, configured with unique
computer names. Although the default name is unique, it is not descriptive or easy to
remember, so many users may wish to change this value. The computer name is changed
in System Properties. To access:
2. Expand the left pane of Shell.
3. Select Control Panel.
4. Select System.
5. Enter password.
6. Select Computer Name tab. (See Figure 12-2 a.)
7. Select Change.
8. Enter new name in the Computer name field. Select OK. (See Figure 12-2 b.)
a. b.
Figure 6–2. Computer Name Changes in System Properties
While in this screen, the name of the workgroup or domain to which this machine is a
member may also be changed. Hurco DOES NOT support connections to network
domains. A workgroup can be used as a logical grouping of networked devices for a
particular purpose. It is easiest to place all devices under a particular workgroup but is
not required or necessary. By default, all Hurco controls are configured to be on the
workgroup named WORKGROUP.

Mapping a Network Drive
A server share is basically a folder on a different computer that is being shared with
everyone else. So when you “map a drive,” you are saying that you want access to that
folder on your computer also, which is done by mapping it to a letter, for example, F, G,
H, etc. To access the Map Network Drive dialog:
2. Expand right pane of Shell.
3. Select Map Drive.
4. Enter password. The Map Network Drive dialog box opens:
Figure 6–3. Map Network Drive dialog
To map a network drive:
1. Select an unused Drive letter to represent the shared folder and type in the
UNC path in the Folder field. UNC path is a special format for pointing to a
folder on another computer. The format is \\computer name\folder name.
If you're not sure what the name of the folder is, you can select Browse... to
find the computer that way. Select Entire Network, then Microsoft
Windows Network and expand the workgroup that your computer is in.
2. Click Reconnect at logon to make the connection permanent, which means

the drive will still be mapped even after you restart the computer.
If the drive is password protected, use the “Connect using a different

user name” link in the mapping window to configure the mapping
with the user name and password.

Using FTP
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) is a method of transferring files from one computer to
another, using the Internet. For Hurco machining and turning centers, FTP is required for
transferring programs between two or more machines. FTP can also be used to transfer
programs between a computer and a machine.
FTP Server Settings

To access the FTP Server Settings screen:
1. Press the Auxiliary console key.

2. Select the Utilities softkey to access the Utilities screen and softkey menu.
5. Select the FTP Server Settings softkey. The screen is displayed:
Figure 6–4. FTP Server Settings screen
FTP Server Settings Fields

These fields are available on the FTP Server Settings screen:
• Enable FTP Server—select Yes to enable or No to disable the FTP server.

• FTP Server Port—enter a number for the FTP server port. The default is 21.
• Maximum Idle Time (mins)—enter the number of idle time minutes before
the server disconnects. The default is 0 with no time out.
• User 1-4 Name—enter each user’s logon name. Up to 4 users can logon.
• User 1-4 Password—enter each user’s logon password. Up to 4 users can
logon.

If the logon name is “anonymous,” the password is not required.
• User 1-4 Path—enter each user’s root path. Up to 4 users can logon.
FTP Server Settings Softkeys

These softkeys are available on the FTP Server Settings screen:
• Display WinMax IP Address—displays the IP address list in a pop-up

window. Select OK to close the window.
An IP (Internet Protocol) address is used to identify a particular host on a

network. Each host on a network must have a unique IP address consisting of
a 32-bit number usually presented in dotted decimal format; for example,
200.10.150.1. This format divides the address into four single byte values
separated by decimal points.
On most networks, the first three bytes represent the network and the last
byte is the host. Following this practice, the first three bytes are the same for
all hosts and the last byte is different for each host.
On the Internet, these cryptic addresses usually are not used—most

addresses are represented as plain text, which are converted to IP addresses
by DNS, or Domain Name Server. The underlying protocol still uses the
unique 32-bit IP addresses.
• Change FTP Root Drive—displays a pop-up window to browse for a folder.

Select the appropriate root drive and select OK to close the window. Select
Cancel to stop browsing without changing the root drive.
• Disconnect All Users—select Yes in the pop-up window to disconnect all
current FTP users; select No to cancel the disconnect operation.

FTP Manager
To manage FTP connections:
1. Press the Input console key.

2. Select the Program Manager softkey.
3. Select the FTP Manager softkey to open the FTP Host List screen. From here,
you can connect to or disconnect from, add, edit, and delete FTP servers which
are identified on this list:
Figure 6–5. FTP Host List screen
To access the FTP Host Properties screen to add a host to the FTP Host List screen:
1. Select the Add Host softkey. The FTP Host Properties screen appears.
Figure 6–6. FTP Host Properties screen
2. Enter an Alias name to appear on the FTP Host List screen for this host.

3. Enter an IP Address for connecting to the host.
4. Specify Yes or No for Automatic Login:
• If set to No, the user is required to enter the username and password at
the time of connection.
• If set to Yes, the User Name and Password fields appear. The username
and password are stored for automatic connection when the host is
selected.
5. Enter the Default Remote Directory to be opened, or leave this field blank for
the FTP server’s root directory.
6. Select either 8.3 DOS or LONG for the Filename Format field.
• 8.3—file names with eight characters before the period (.) and three
characters for an extension after the period are allowed.
• Long—the complete path to the file, including the drive letter, server
name, folder path, and file name and extension can contain up to 255
characters – however, it will be truncated to the 8.3 format. For example,
LongFilename.txt will be truncated to LongFil_.txt
7. Select the Apply softkey to add this host to the FTP Host List screen.
From the FTP Host List screen,
• Select the Connect softkey to connect to a host.

• Select Disconnect to disconnect from a host.
• Select Delete Host to remove a host from the list.
• Select the Exit softkey to return to the Project Manager screen.
Select the File Manager softkey to access a list of system directories and filenames
connected with UltiMonitor.
After editing, files may be saved directly to the remote location:
1. Select the Save or Save As softkey in Program Manager.

2. Select the FTP Manager softkey. The screen will switch to
the remote File Manager, if connected, or to the login
screen if not connected.
3. When connected, select the appropriate remote directory
and save the file.

Extended Shop Floor (ESF)
Hurco’s Extended Shop Floor provides a web-based access point for a machine shop
owner to communicate and view machine data using a web browser. Additionally, ESF is a
distribution point for information about Hurco’s machine tools and it supports the remote
monitoring and diagnosis of the machine. By default, an ESF connection is made to Hurco
servers when an internet connection is present.
Here are the ESF connection states:
ESF State Description
The ESF Machine Service is not running. Clicking this icon will
turn the ESF Machine Service on.
Please wait while the ESF Machine Service is starting and

attempting to establish a connection with the ESF Server.
The ESF Machine Service is running and communicating with

the ESF Server. Clicking this icon will turn the ESF Machine
Service off.
The ESF Machine Service is running but is unable to

communicate with the ESF Server. There may be a problem
with the network connection. Clicking
this icon will turn the ESF Machine Service off.
For more information refer to the ESF User’s Guide found at the ESF website,
https://esf.hurco.com; a user account with password is required to access ESF.

FIELD NAME GLOSSARY
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPRSTUVWXYZ
A
A—the A end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).
—in a Rotary Position block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will
be located on the part.
A Angle—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A.
A Center—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.
A Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable
Centerlines is No in Part Setup. Program the value in order to draw the program
properly on the Graphics screen.
A Corner—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the reference corner of the frame.
A Distance—the distance (angle) on the rotary-axis between each repetition of the mill
feature.
A End—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the ending point of the line.
A Length—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.
• A Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the

reference corner.
• A Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from the
reference corner.
A Offset—the offset for the A axis, to be added to the A dimension in the data block.
A Start—the rotary-axis start point coordinate, calculated with data from the previous
segment. The value of A Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was
created.
Air Pressure—indicates Pressure OK or Low Pressure. Pressure OK is required to begin

an ATC operation.
Allow Plunge Outside Pocket—if Yes, UltiPocket will plunge outside the pocket, moving
through the open side of the pocket boundary. May be used with open contours only;
cannot be applied to frames, circles, or ellipses because they cannot be programmed with
open contours.
WinMax Mill Programming 704-0116-501 Field Name Glossary 7-1

Open Contour
Plunge point
Toolpath
The Operator Specify Pocket Start parameter must also be set to Yes.
The contour Pocket Type must be set to Inward.
The plunge point should be placed near the open side of the contour
outside the pocket. The tool moves through this opening near the
approximate center. The software verifies the tool will fit through the
opening and generates an error message if it will not.
Allow Vacant Variables—allows variable values to be left blank when Yes.
Alt Dwell Lt Side—controls washdown coolant flow on the left side of the machine enclosure
on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. See
Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.
Alt Washdown Dwell—controls washdown coolant flow on the right side of the machine
enclosure on certain machines. Used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters.
See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for
more information.
Alt Washdown Off Time—the time the washdown coolant flow cycle is paused, on certain
machines. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with
WinMax Mill for more information.
Angle—in Pattern Loop Linear, the angle (in degrees) between the defined line and the X
positive axis. A positive value is counterclockwise (CCW) from the 3 o'clock position, and
a negative value is clockwise (CW) from the 3 o'clock position.
—in Pattern Mirror Image, the orientation in degrees of the mirror line (which passes
through the X-Y dimensions); measured from the 3 o'clock position. A positive value is
CCW.
—in Rotary Pattern Locations, the angle coordinate where the mill feature will be located
on the part.
—in Rotary Patterns Mirror, the orientation of the mirror line which passes through the
point defined above (measured in XY from 3 o’clock).
Angle Center—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.
Angle Distance—the distance (angle) on the rotary-axis between each repetition of the
7 - 2 Field Name Glossary 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming

mill feature.
—in Rotary Rectangular, the distance between the patterns along the rotary axis.
Angle End—axis coordinate for the ending point of the line or arc.
Angle Length—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.
• Angle Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the
reference corner.
• Angle Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from
the reference corner.
Angle Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along the
rotary axis.
Angle Reference—the reference coordinate of the point where text begins/ends,

relative to the Angle Ref Location.
Angle Ref Location—the location of the reference point in the text: Bottom of text, Top
of text, Center of text.
Angle Start—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the segment starting point.
The value of Angle Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.
APC Clamp Status—indicates if the APC table is clamped or unclamped.
APC Door Status—indicates if the APC door is Open and Unlocked, Closed and Unlocked,
or Closed and Locked.
APC Position—indicates whether APC table is in the Up or Down position.
Application Font Size—size of text displayed by the application in lists (for example, in
Program Manager); default is Large. This field is inactive in WinMax Mill (active in WinMax
desktop).
Apply Border To Top—applies the automatically-calculated border to the top of the

stock, in Stock Geometry. The border is automatically applied to the bottom. Field is
available when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO.
Approach Feed—the feed rate to use for the initial touch of the part. No measurement is
taken at this feed rate, it is simply used to locate the part feature to be probed.
Arc Radius—the radius of the arc, if known.
Argument Type—the type of Argument, String or List, and variables in a NC Program

Call block.
Assume Feedrate .1 Increment—assumes a feedrate increment of .1 when Yes is

selected.
Assure Minimum Length—specifies Yes or No. When Yes is selected, the Minimum
Length and Leading Symbol fields appear so that a placeholder can be used to achieve
consistent serial number length. Default is Yes.

ATC Axis Positions—indicates At X, At Y, and At Z positions. All three are required for
ATC to begin.
ATC Disable—disables all automatic tool changer functions. See Machine Parameters Page
2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
ATC Door—indicates Closed or Open position. Closed is required for ATC Status Home.
ATC OK to Stop—indicates if the ATC is at a position where it can stop.
ATC Position—indicates Z At Height and X/Y At Position (VTXU only).
ATC Status—indicates if ATC is in Home position. Home is required for ATC or APC cycle
to begin. Home is defined as ATC Door closed, Exchange Arm at 0°, Tool Holder at 0°, and
Magazine In Pos (1).
ATC Z-Axis Move to Zero Position—in HMX only, moves the Z-axis to zero position at the
end of a tool change. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started
with WinMax Mill for more information.
ATC Z Axis Position—indicates Z is at Machine Tool Change Height.
Auto Balance Enable—adjusts the balance between the motion card and the servo drives
at the start of calibration and run program. See Machine Parameters Page 2, on page 1 - 65
in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As Manual—automatically loads unmatched

tools from newly-loaded conversational part programs:
• YES—new tools from the newly loaded program (that are not in the Tool &
Material Library) are automatically added to Manual.
• NO—requires new tools to be matched (see “Part Program Tool Review”
section for more information about matching tools.)
Automatic Centerline Calculation—specify Yes or No to enable automatic centerline

calculation.
Automatic Safe Repositioning Retract Override—available only with Universal

program types. When set to OFF the tool automatically retracts, reorients, and plunges,
using a series of moves computed automatically that do not violate machine limits. Set to
ON to override the automatic repositioning and enter a retract distance along the tool
vector from the target position.
See Automatic Safe Repositioning Command Buffer On (G08.1), on page 3 - 54 in NC

Programming for more information about Automatic Safe Repositioning.
Automatic Tool Monitoring—in the Program Parameters Probing tab, select the
method of checking tools calibrated with the probe:
• Incoming Tool—tool is checked after it is inserted into spindle

• Outgoing Tool—tool is checked before it is removed from the spindle
• Both—checked before and after cut
Specify tolerances in the Length Tolerance and Diameter Tolerance. For more information

about tool monitoring, see Tool Quality Monitoring, on page 4 - 14 in Probing.
Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable—enables a confirmation signal for completion of

each Auxiliary M-code Output. See Machine Parameters Pages 5 and 6, on page 1 - 78 in
Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Axis—axis coordinate where the mill feature will be located on the part.
Axes Status—the calibration status of machine axes.
Axis Center—Z-axis coordinate of the center point.
Axis Distance—the distance between each transform plane in the sequence, along the
rotation axis.
—in Rotary Patterns, the distance on the X-axis between each repetition of the mill
feature. The right-hand rule determines if Distance is positive or negative.
—in Rotary Rectangular, the distance between the patterns parallel to the rotary axis.
Axis End—axis coordinate for the end point. The Axis End value is the depth of the cut at
the end point and is carried forward from the previous segment. Retain the Axis End
value or type in a new value.
Axis Feedrate Override Max (%)—Parameter not accessible by the user. Contact a
Hurco Certified Service representative for assistance.
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%)—sets the Axis Feedrate Override Minimum value.
more information.
Axis Length—the axis coordinate measured from the reference corner.
• Axis Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the
rectangle.
• Axis Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the
rectangle.
Axis Limit Switches—the status of the machine’s limit switches as each axis calibrates.
Axis Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a
line parallel to the rotary axis.
Axis Reference—the reference coordinate of the point where text begins/ends, relative
to the Axis Ref Location.
Axis Ref Location—the location of the reference point in the text: Start of text, End of
text, Center of text.
Axis Start—axis coordinate for the segment starting point. Field is read-only in other
segments and can be changed only in the segment in which is was created.
—in Rotary Frame, the axis coordinate of any one of the four corners of the frame. This
corner becomes the reference corner.

B
B—the B end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).
—in Rotary Position block, Rotary A Tilt B and Tilt B Rotary C configurations, the tilt-axis
coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.
—In Rotary Position block, Rotary B configuration, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle)
where the mill feature will be located on the part.
B—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will be located on the part.
B Angle—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero B.
B-Axis Status—indicates if the B-axis is Clamped or Unclamped.
B Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable
B Distance—in Rotary A Tilt B configuration, the distance (angle) on the tilt axis
between each repetition of the mill feature.
—in Rotary B configuration, the distance (angle) on the rotary axis between each
repetition of the mill feature.
B Offset—the offset for the B axis, to be added to the B dimension in the data block.
Background Color—choose Black or White background color for the graphics display.
Baud Rate—the communication speed rate.
Beam Offset—the width of the beam based on + and - trigger points (laser tool probe
only). This field is updated after running the Determine Laser Beam Offset cycle. It may
be adjusted by the user to optimize performance.
Bidirectional—the direction of the tool path while the 3D Mold part is being machined:
• No—causes the tool to machine in one direction, based on the direction of

the contour definition.
• Yes—causes the tool to machine in both directions without retracting the tool
until the entire contour is complete.

1 Yes
2 No
Blank Spacing—the size of the blank character (space). Leave at zero to use the default
spacing for the selected font.
Blend Offset—the distance from the entry point of the part surface and the Z plunge
point where the tool enters the work piece. This field is used in milling circles, frames,
and ellipses; it is also used in contours with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/
Profile Right and Enable Blend Moves set to Yes.
• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).

• The range is 0 through 99.999 inches (0 through 2539.997 mm).
Blend Overlap—the distance the tool travels past the entry point before it is withdrawn
from the part. This field is used in milling circles, frames, and ellipses; it is also used in
contours with Milling Type set to Left/Right or Profile Left/Profile Right and Enable Blend
Moves set to Yes.
• The default is 0.1181 inches (3 mm).

• The range is 0 through 99.999 inches (0 through 2539.997mm).

1. Start Point
2. 1/2 X length
3. X length
4. Blend offset
5. Tool path
6. Blend offset
7. Blend overlap
8. End point
Figure 7–1. Blend Offset and Blend Overlap
Blend Type—the type of blend move to make at the beginning and end of the threading
operation. Choices are line, ramp, arc, helix:
Line Ramp
blend-out blend-out
blend-in blend-in
Arc Helix
blend-in blend-out
blend-in
blend-out
Block—the block number for this operation. The system determines the number by the
position of this data block in the program.
—in the DRO, the block number and type for Conversational programs. Displays 5 current
blocks for NC programs (2 previous, current, 2 next).
Block Skip Enable—when set to Yes in NC Editor Settings, NC codes which follow the
Ignore (/) character are skipped.
Border Size—the stock border dimension in Stock Geometry (field is available only when

Manual Border Sizing is set to YES).
Bore Dwell—the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a Bore
operation. This parameter is not used for NC programs.
• The default is 1.0 seconds.

• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.
Bore Orient Retract—the distance the boring tool moves away from the part surface at
the end of the boring cycle. Used only when a Bore Orient data block is included in the
part program.
• The default is 0.019685 inches (0.05 mm).

BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device—the output location for BPRINT and DPRINT formatted
data; desktop version only.
BPRNT/DPRNT Output File—the file path if BPRINT and DPRINT data will be output to
a file; desktop version only.
Breakage Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in the
Tool Cal Length field in Tool Setup.
C
C—the C end position of the move (fields are inactive for a non-rotary machine).
—in Rotary Position Block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) where the mill feature will
be located on the part.
C Angle—in Rotary Position block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero
C.
—in Rotary AC Contour block, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the first segment’s
starting point.
C Center—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the center point.
C Centerline X / Y / Z—the offset from true part zero. Field is available when Disable
C Corner—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the reference corner of the frame.
C Distance—the distance (angle) on the tilt axis between each repetition of the mill
feature.
C End—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) of the line or arc end point.
C Length—the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) from the reference corner.

• C Length is positive if the location of the frame is clockwise from the
reference corner.
• C Length is negative if the location of the frame is counter clockwise from the
reference corner.
C Offset—the offset for the C axis, to be added to the C dimension in the data block.
C Start—the C-axis coordinate start point calculated with data programmed in the Start
segment. The value of C Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was
created.
CAL to LS Velocity A, B, C—sets the feedrate for the A, B, or C axis as it moves toward the
calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 2,
on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z—sets the feedrate for the X, Y, or Z axis as it moves toward
the calibration limit switch during a machine calibration cycle. See Machine Parameters
Page 2, on page 1 - 65 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Cal Tool D—the diameter (D) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This
value can be obtained by measuring the diameter of a precision dowel or a laser
calibration tool.
Cal Tool H—the height (H) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This
value can be obtained by measuring the height of a precision dowel or a laser calibration
tool.
Cal Tool L—the length (L) of the Laser Calibration Tool (laser tool probe only). This value
can be obtained by measuring the length of a precision dowel or a laser calibration tool.
Center Beam X—the center locationof the beam in X (laser tool probe only). Do not
change this value after the Laser Tool Calibration cycle has been run, unless you re-run
the cycle. The user enters an approximate value then the laser calibration cycle
determines the precise location.
Center Beam Y—the center location of the beam in Y (laser tool probe only). Do not
change this value after the Laser Tool Calibration cycle has been run, unless you re-run
the cycle. The user enters an approximate value then the laser calibration cycle
determines the precise location.
Centerline X—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the X axis.
Centerline Y—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the Y axis.
Centerline Z—the coordinate point of the center of the part on the Z axis.
Center X—the Center X machine coordinate location. This field appears upon completion
of the probing cycle.
Center Y—the Center Y machine coordinate location. This field appears upon completion
of the probing cycle.
Chamfer Angle—the tool corner angle.
Change Finish SFQ—specifies if the Finish SFQ should be changed for the block range.

Change Rough SFQ—specifies if the Rough SFQ should be changed for the block
range.
Change Tool—the tool used in the block s to which changes will be made. Blocks using
this tool will be changed. (This field appears only for the Change Feeds and Speeds by
Tools screen.) See Change Tool Number, on page 1 - 116 in Getting Started with WinMax
Mill for more information.
Change Z-Start —the new Z-Start position.
Character Height—the height of the text.
Character Length—the maximum number of bits sent back and forth at one time.
Character Width—the character width. The width includes the character left-justified,
plus some spacing between it and the next character to be milled. Spacing between the
characters is equal to the tool's diameter.
Because cutter compensation is not used in this routine and letter

contouring follows the center of the tool, character spacing can be
adjusted by adjusting the tool diameter in Tool Setup.
Char Spacing—the amount of additional space to add between each character. Leaving
at zero will use the default character spacing for the selected font.
Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies—this setting is useful when there are slight
discrepancies or conflicts in contour data; for example, as happens occasionally with
contours imported using DXF, due to bad segment connections in the DXF file. When set
to Yes, an error message is generated when these inconsistencies are present in a
contour segment. When set to No, the contour is allowed to draw and run, as long as
there is enough relevant data to generate valid geometry.
Chipload—the feed per flute.
Chip Removal—the status of the chip auger.
Chip Removal Off Delay Time—sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles off, when
Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in
Chip Removal On Delay Time—sets the time the chip conveyor/auger cycles on, when
Chip Removal On/Off Delay is enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in
Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable—enables the Chip Removal Delay. See Machine
Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.
Chord Error—the maximum distance the cutter deviates from the true arc path.
Circular Passes—the number of times to automatically repeat the probe cycle of a

circular feature. After each pass the probe positions to the new center location and runs
the cycle again. Multiple passes will provide better data because each pass starts closer
to the true center. A poor starting location yields inaccuracies due to the diameter of the
stylus and not being on line with the center. The default value is 2.

This information is specific to each installation and is stored on the
hard drive. If the hard drive is replaced or formatted, the above
information must be restored. Refer to the Getting Started with
WinMax Mill manual for information about restoring parameters.
When the part probe is used, it must be activated by the control. For
this to occur, the control needs to know when the probe is in the
spindle. WinMax provides a Probe tool type in the Tool Setup screen.
Before using the part probe, enter the part probe as a tool in Tool
Setup:
1. Determine which tool number to assign to the probe.

2. Switch to the Tool Setup screen.
3. Enter the probe’s tool number in the Tool field.
4. Select Probe for the tool type.
The control activates the probe hardware when the number in the
Tool In Spindle field matches the probe’s Tool number.
Closing Feed—the feed at which the tool enters the hole at the top and bottom to be
certain that the tool is closed.
Color—the color of the path left by the tool in Solid Graphics, set in Advance Tool
Settings screen. The default selection is Sequential, where tools are represented in the
following order by color:
• Yellow—1st tool
• Orange—2nd tool
• Violet—3rd tool
• Green—4th tool
• Gray—5th tool
• Blue—6th tool
• Cyan—7th tool
• Magenta—8th tool
• Tan—9th tool
• Lime—10th tool
Alternatively, a specific color can be assigned to a specific tool by changing the selection
in the field.
Comment Color—the current NC comment color. The color can be changed by selecting
the Change... button or the Change Comments Color softkey.
Confirm APC Ready—in Machine Function data block, when M70 is selected, indicate
Yes or No to require the APC READY button to be pressed before continuing operation
after a pallet change.
Contact Point X—the X location (in machine coordinates) of the tool probe (touch tool
probe only). When the machine is at this location, a tool will touch the center of the tool
probe stylus. To enter these values easily, insert a tool in the spindle and jog down to the
tip of the probe. When the tool tip is centered over the stylus, press the Store Position

key on the jog controls.
Contact Point Y—the Y location (in machine coordinates) of the tool probe (touch tool
probe only). When the machine is at this location, a tool will touch the center of the tool
probe stylus. To enter these values easily, insert a tool in the spindle and jog down to the
tip of the probe. When the tool tip is centered over the stylus, press the Store Position
key on the jog controls.
Control Power Off Time—turns the control off after the specified period of inactivity. See
information.
Coolant—the coolant used for the tool. Coolant is programmable on a tool-by-tool basis.
The choices are Off/None, Primary, Secondary, or Both when the cursor is at the
Coolant field. Select Primary for machines equipped with a coolant system, Secondary
for machines equipped with a secondary coolant system (i.e. through spindle coolant),
and Both for machines with two coolant systems.
—in the DRO, the coolant status.
Coolant Delay Time—the time the program pauses when the coolant is enabled. See
information.
Coolant Status—indicates Level OK and Filter OK. Both are required for tool coolant
operation. Available with the Coolant Through Spindle (CTS) option.
Coordinate System—the coordinate system for the end position of the move, either Part
or Machine.
Corner Radius—in Mill Slot, the blend radius for the corners of the Start Cap or End Cap,
if either or both are set to Line.
—in Mill Frame and Rotary Frame, the radius of the reference corner when all four corners
of the frame will have the same radius. See Mill Frame, on page 2 - 29 for more
information.
Corner X—the X position of the intersection. This field appears when the Probing cycle is
finished.
Corner Y—the Y position of the intersection. This field appears when the Probing cycle is
finished.
CR / Chip Removal—the status of the chip auger.
Current Font—the current font used in NC Editor. Default is the system font, size 10 pts.
Font and/or size can be changed using the Change Current Font softkey.
Current Time—in Auto screen, the reference time used to determine when the offset is
applied, in Linear Thermal Compensation. Time can be changed during program run.
Time is paused when program is finished running.
Cusp Height—available when the Use Cusp Height field is set to Yes in Swept Surface
parameters. Specifies the step size for ball and flat end mills.

Custom NC File Extensions—provide custom filename extensions to enable loading of
NC files that use the extensions (for example, NCC, TAP, TXT). Separate multiple entries
with a comma.
Cutter Comp Parameter—the programmed tool automatically follows the finished

contour of the part with cutter compensation. Without cutter compensation, the center
line of the programmed tool follows the print line.
• Insert Arc—Inserts a tangent arc to connect two line segments, or a line

segment and an arc segment (when the two cutter compensated segments
are offset and do not intersect).
1. Programmed Tool Path
2. Cutter Compensated Path
3. Completed path using the Insert Arc parameter
• Insert Lines—Joins the cutter compensated lines and arcs as described

below:
• Two line segments are extended until they intersect (provided they form a
90º or greater angle). If the lines form an angle of less than 90º, a line is
inserted to connect them.
• Line and arc segments have the line segment extended, and a tangent
line to the arc segment inserted and extended until the lines intersect
(provided they form a 90º or greater angle). If the segments form an
angle of less than 90º, a line is inserted to connect them.
• Two arc segments have tangent lines (to the arcs) inserted and extended
until the lines intersect (provided the extended tangent lines form a 90º
or greater angle). If the extended tangent lines form an angle of less than
90º, a line or arc is inserted to connect them.
1. Programmed Tool Path
2. Cutter Compensated Path
3. Completed path using the Insert Line parameter
Cut Direction—controls the tool path while a 3D contour is machined:
• With Contour—machines the 3D contour using the tool path originally

programmed.
• Normal—tool path follows the part at right angles to the original two-

dimensional profile.
• Spiral—(Swept Surface) machines a continuous tool path resulting in a
smoother surface.
Cutter Length—in Mill Thread, the cutter length. Displayed when Cutter Type is Multi.
Cutting Edges—the number of cutting edges on the tool.
Cutting Time—the number of minutes a tool has been running in the spindle (seconds
are rounded up to the nearest minute). Starts at zero unless a time is pre-set (if there is
already time on the tool). When Tool Life Monitoring is enabled in Tool Utilities and
Settings a second field is also displayed, where the maximum cutting time for the tool can
be specified. See Life Monitoring in Tool Utilities and Settings, on page 1 - 49 for more
information.
Cycle—the tool probing cycle: No Probing, Length, Diameter, Length & Diameter.
Cylinder Angle—the coordinate of a point on the mirror line.
Cylinder Axis—the coordinate of a point on the mirror line.
Cylinder Radius—the radius of the cylindrical part. If the radius is a negative number,
the tool will cut the rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame) from the top to
bottom. Field present for all rotary configurations except Tilt B Rotary C.
If the radius of the cylindrical part is not defined in the Rotary

Parameters data block and Cutter Compensation is used in rotary
lines and arcs, the machine will define the part’s radius as the
distance from Z Start to the rotary centerline.
D
Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Update—how tool feeds and speeds should be
updated when a tool is changed in a data block:
• Do Not Replace—leaves the previous feeds and speeds.

• Replace All—automatically replaces all feeds and speeds with the defaults
from the tool. No prompt.
• Prompt Replace All—prompts the user to update all feeds and speeds in the
block with the defaults from the tool with no distinction between tool defaults
and manually entered values.
• Prompt Replace Manual Entries—matches the old behavior. The feeds and
speeds in the block that were set to the defaults from the previous tool will be
automatically updated, and if any manually-entered overrides are found, the
user is prompted to updated these values. If there are no manual overrides,
the prompt will not occur.
Data Origin—specifies the source of the serial number data, either User-provided or
From File. Default is User-Provided.

• User-provided—the serial numbers are constructed with information
provided by the user. When selected, the Starting Sequence and Increment
fields appear.
• From File—the serial numbers are populated from a source file. When
selected, the File field and Locate... button appear.
Default Conversational Program Type—select the default program type for new
Conversational programs.
Default Cutter Comp Lookahead—looks ahead one segment to determine if the

contour crosses itself and if the tool will fit into the contour. This value is set to 1 and
cannot be changed.
Default Pocket Overlap—the cutter step-over movement in a pocket milling operation.

After the first pass, the tool follows a path produced by offsetting the boundary by the
tool radius, plus the pocket overlap for each pass while avoiding islands inside the
boundary.
• The default is 50%.

• The range is 0 through 99%.
Default Tool Number—indicates which tool will be used at the beginning of the
program.
Default View—the default graphics display view when WinMax is started, either XY
plane, XZ plane, Isometric, or All Views.
Default Zone—the zone initially displayed in graphics display when the application is
started. Dual-zone machines only.
Depletion Retract—the dimension above the part surface to which the Z axis retracts.
The Z axis retracts while waiting for additional data to be transmitted into the current
program during execution of an NC part program.
• The default is 0.005 inches (.127 mm).

Depletion Retract only applies to NC programs.
Description—a short text description of the part program.
Device—the tool setter method: gauge block or tool probe, if equipped.
Diameter—the nominal diameter of the tool's cutting surface (i.e., the diameter before
the tool suffers from normal wear). The diameter range is 0 through 99.9999 inches/
2539.997 mm. The Diameter also appears on the Tool Geometry screen.
The programmed diameter is used to automatically determine cutter

compensation during milling operations. The system calculates the
radius of the cutting tool and automatically allows for this distance
when performing milling operations. This means it is not necessary
to remember the size of the cutting tool or manually calculate tool
offsets when programming the part.

Diameter Compensation Using Tool Setup—select Yes to use the Diameter and
Diameter Wear values from Tool Setup to compensate for tool wear in ISNC programs. If
set to No, G41/G42 must use a D code to specify an offset from the Tool Radius Offsets
table.
Diameter Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool diameter programmed in

the Diameter field in Tool Setup screen used when checking for a defective tool with
automatic monitoring.
Diameter Wear—a value to compensate for tool wear:
Diameter Wear = (program tool diameter) - (actual tool diameter)
For example, to adjust a 0.5 inch diameter tool for .001 inch of wear, enter .001 in the
Diameter Wear field to set cutter comp diameter to 0.499 inches.
Compensate for tool wear in this field rather than the Tool Diameter
field. This will maintain the tool diameter and ensure accurate tool
matching with other part programs that use the same tool.
The Diameter Wear value alters the toolpath for cutter compensation. For example, when
milling a circle with Milling Type set to Outside, a positive number in the Diameter Wear
field will result in a smaller diameter cut, and a negative number will result in a larger
diameter cut.
If a probe is used to determine diameter, the Diameter Wear field will contain the
compensated value based on the probed diameter. A (P) appears next to the Diameter
Wear field to indicate that the value was derived from the probed diameter.
Disable Auto On Chip Removal—disables chip conveyor from turning on automatically in

AUTO mode. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with
Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt—disables the specified Auxiliary M-code Output
when an Interrupt cycle is selected during Auto Run mode. See Machine Parameters Pages 5
and 6, on page 1 - 78 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Disable Centerlines—(Available only in Rotary A, Rotary A Tilt B, Tilt A Rotary C, and

Rotary B configurations.) Disables the use of rotary axis centerline data in Part Setup.
When set to Yes, the centerline fields are not available. Default is Yes. This parameter is
meant to maintain backward compatibility with old programs and is not recommended for
new programs.
Direction—the direction of rotation from the start point to the end point around the
center point, clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).
—in Mill Thread, the direction of the threads (clockwise or counterclockwise) and the
manner in which they are cut (up or down).
— in Stock Geometry, the direction of the stock cylinder: POS X, NEG X, POS Y, NEG Y,
POS Z, or NEG Z (available when Stock Type is Cylinder).
Disable Tool Length Offset Table—select Yes to disable access to the Tool Length
Offsets table in Tool Setup. Default is No. When Yes, Tool Length Offsets are cleared and
only the Radius Offsets table can be accessed in Tool Setup.

Disable Tool Picker Option—turns off the Tool Picker option. See Machine Parameters
Disable Undo and Redo—Yes disables the Undo and Redo softkeys in the NC Edit
Functions menu. Also disables the Ctrl + Z (undo) and Ctrl + Y (redo) keyboard
shortcuts.
Disable X Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the X axis.
Disable Y Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the Y axis.
Disable Z Scaling—disables any scaling performed in the Z axis.
Display Machine Axes For Universal Type—select Yes to display, in Part Setup, only
the rotary axes that are present on the machine. No will display axes IV and V even on a
non-rotary machine. This setting also applies to Change Part Setup block, Work Offsets
(in NC), and Universal Rotary position block.
Display Time—the amount of time the comment will be displayed when a Comment
block is encountered during a program run.
Distance—the dimensional value between repeated patterns along the defined line in
Pattern Loop Linear.
Display Units—the unit of measurement (inches or millimeters) displayed in Program

Properties, used throughout part programming (this field does not apply to NC
programs). These units will be used when the part program is loaded into memory but
the display value can be changed using the unit (IN or MM) icon in the status bar.
Drawing scale—indicates the scaling ratio for the drawing to the part.
Drill Angle—the angle of the tool tip.
Drill Dwell—the pause (dwell) in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a drill
operation. The most often changed Holes Parameter is Drill Dwell. This parameter
controls the length of time the drill stays at the bottom of a hole after it has drilled the
hole. This parameter is not used for NC programs.
• The default is 0.0 (When set to 0.0 seconds, the drill immediately retracts out
of the hole after it is drilled.)
• The range is 0 through 20 seconds.
Drip Rej. Delay—the time in milliseconds between each sample (specified in the Drip
Rej. Samples field). For example, if Drip Rej. Samples is 200 and Drip Rej. Delay is 5
milliseconds (.005 seconds), the control must see the laser in a clean state for 1 second
(200 x 5 msec) before continuing with tool monitoring.
Drip Rej. Samples—the number of samples for coolant drip rejection. Coolant drip
rejection is the process the control uses to determine if enough coolant has cleared from
the laser probe for proper function during tool monitoring. The value entered in the field
is the number of probe samples the control takes in a specified period of time to
determine if a clean probe state is present. Increase the value for heavy coolant flow.
Dual Laser Probe Present—sets tool probe in one or both zones of dual-zone
machines. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with

Dwell Time —the pause in seconds before the tool retracts at the bottom of a drill
operation. Dwell Time is used with Rigid Tap.
E
Edit Lockout Level—sets the level of protection, Partial or Full, to limit access to part
programming softkeys and other functions when Edit Lockout feature is enabled. If Partial
is selected, the Lock Part Setup and Lock Tool Setup fields can be set to Yes or No.
See Edit Lockout, on page 1 - 46 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
Edit Mode—the Edit Mode for information entry. Select either Ultimax Classic (default) or
Windows Dialog. For example, Ultimax Classic requires the Enter key to change the value
of a data field, while Windows Dialog will accept a number by pressing the Down arrow.
Enable—Yes to enable or No to disable the step.
Enable Automatic Matching—enables automatic matching of tools when

Conversational programs are loaded:
• YES—tools in a program are automatically matched to existing tools in the

Tool & Material Library.
• NO—tools in a program must be manually matched to existing tools in the
Tool & Material Library, or added though Tool Review. When NO is selected all
other parameters on this tab are disabled.
Enable Automatic Save—turn Autosave on or off; if Yes, programs are saved to

memory at the time interval specified—it will not save to the source location of the
program.
Enable Blend Moves—appears when either Left or Right is selected in the Milling Types
field. When set to Yes, automatic arc blend-in and blend-out is performed. Default is Yes.
Also see Climb Milling (Left), on page 2 - 12 and Conventional Milling (Right), on
page 2 - 12 for additional information.
Enable Cutter Comp—specifies whether the tool path is offset by the tool radius.
Default is Yes. When enabled (Yes), the value of the Thread Diameter (set in Tool Setup)
is used to determine the radius.
Enable Dual Zones—sets a dual-zone capable machine as either a single long bed machine,
or as a dual-zone machine. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting
Enable FTP Server—enable the WinMax Control to act as an FTP Server.
Enable Lead In Error Checking—enables error checking to determine whether the lead
in from the current position will overlap the segment.
Enable Lead Out Error Checking—enables error checking to determine whether the
lead out from the current position will overlap the segment.

Enable Linear Thermal Compensation—in Auto screen, specifies whether to use
Linear Thermal Compensation.
Enable Pecking Retract Clearance—enables the use of a different retract clearance for
pecking operations. When set to On, the tool retracts to the height specified in the
Pecking Retract Clearance parameter. When set to Off, the tool retracts to the Retract
Clearance height. Default is Off.
Enable Program Restore—resets previously loaded programs when the application is

started after a shutdown; default is No.
Enable Reset at Program Start—select Yes to enable variable reset at the start of
program run.
Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss—enables Z-axis retract upon power loss, when an
M91 is present. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with
Enable Runtime Tool Display—specify Yes or No to see simulated tool move around
the part in graphics display while the machine is running; tool also shown when jogging
tool near part.
Enable Tool Life Monitoring—select Yes to enable tool wear monitoring. When
enabled, the current cutting time is compared to the maximum cutting time set for the
tool in Tool Setup Cutting Time field.
Enable Tool SFQ—select Yes to automatically apply a specific Surface Finish Quality
(SFQ) when the tool is used in NC programs.
Enable Variable Monitoring—select Yes to enable monitoring of an NC variable during

the program run. Default is No.
End Angle—in 3D Mold, the ending value of the angle of revolution for XY Revolved
About X and XZ Revolved about Z. When determining End Angle, remember that 0º is
where the contour begins and is located at the 3 o'clock position. For more information,
see 3D Mold, on page 2 - 34 in Conversational Programming.
• The difference between the start and end angle determines the degrees that
the 2D profile revolves about the axis.
• Start and End angles can be entered as positive or negative numbers. CCW
motion is programmed as a positive number; CW motion is programmed as a
negative number:
End Block—the number of the last block in the program to be changed or run.
End Cap—the shape that is used to close the slot at the specified end point:

• Line—flat edge connects the top and bottom edges of the slot, passing
through the programmed endpoint.
• Append Arc—rounded edge; center of semi-circle is programmed endpoint.
• Include Arc—rounded edge; outermost edge of semi-circle is programmed
endpoint.
End Job—the last job to be run.
Endpoint Tolerance—determines when the endpoints of DXF segments are close

enough to be considered equal (or coincident).
Exchange Arm—indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC Status Home.
—in VM, VMX, VTXU, indicates 0° or 60° position. 0° is required for ATC Status Home.
• Cannot move from 0° to 60° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, Spindle is Oriented and Clamped.
• Cannot move from 60° to 0° unless Z-axis is at Tool Change Height, Tool
Pocket is Down, and Spindle is Clamped.
Exported NC Decimal Places—the number of decimal places expressed when exporting

a conversational program as NC (range is 1-8); desktop version only.
F
F(%)—the current Feedrate per Minute percentage set on the axis Feed Rate knob.
F / Feed—the current feed rate.
Fast Feed—the feed rate used when making the initial touch of the probe (prior to
measurement touches). When the operator sets the diameter setting for the tool only the
first time the tool is entered, the Fast Feed field will be updated with a suggested value—
you may overwrite this value.
Fast Start Feed—the feed rate to use for auto part probing start movement.
Feed—in Custom Drill, the plunge feedrate.
—in Tool Setup, the default mill feed for the tool. This value is calculated based on
diameter, feed/flute, and number of flutes. Value may also be entered directly into the
field. Depending on tool type this field may be Plunge Feed.
—in the DRO, the current feed rate.
Feed/Flute—the tool's chipload (or feed per revolution). See Feed and Speed
Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Feed/Rev—the tool's feed per revolution. See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 -
113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
File—specifies the source file for serial numbers that are generated from a file. This field

appears only when From File Data Origin is selected.
Finish Feed (%)—allows a different feed to be specified for finishing operations without
changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the feed entered in Tool
Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing operation of
a milling block. (See example below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a

Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.
Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:
Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80
Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100
When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000 and the
feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing operation, the
multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000 (5000 x 120%), finish
feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).
The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the
roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.
Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in
the data block take precedence over these parameters.
If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing

and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults
are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish
Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.
Finish Plunge Helix Radius—the value of the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of
the diameter of the finishing tool. The range is 0% to 100%. If a value of 50% or less is
chosen, it will prevent a post from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting
is 25%.
Finish Plunge Ramp Slope—the slope of the Helical Ramp for the finishing tool. Range
is 1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight Plunge. The default setting is 25°.
Finish Plunge Type—the plunging strategy to use for the finish phase. Choose Straight
or Helix. The default setting is Straight.
Finish SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) for the finishing operation. The
SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required. Default SFQ for finishing is 20. Values

are:
SFQ Desired Result
Finish Speed (%)—allows a different speed to be specified for finishing operations

without changing the tool. The specified percentage is a multiplier of the speed entered in
Tool Setup. This multiplier is applied whenever the tool is entered for the finishing
operation of a milling block. (See example below.)
If this parameter is changed in either Program Parameters or with a

Change Parameters block, all existing data blocks that are affected
by the multiplier will be updated.
Finish Feed / Finish Speed example:
Program Parameters: Finish Speed %=120, Finish Feed %=80
Tool Setup: Speed=5000, Feed=100
When a program block is created, the speed is automatically set to 5000 and the
feed is set to 100. When the tool is entered into the finishing operation, the
multipliers are applied, and finish speed is set to 6000 (5000 x 120%), finish
feed is set to 80 (100 x 80%).
The Finish Feed and Finish Speed parameters are not applied if the
roughing feed or speed in a data block is changed.
Values entered manually into the Finish Feed or Finish Speed fields in
the data block take precedence over these parameters.
If the Tool & Material Library option is enabled, separate roughing

and finishing defaults can be set for each tool. If finishing defaults
are defined for a tool, those values take precedence over the Finish
Feed and Finish Speed multiplier parameters.
Finish XY—the stock width to be left by the roughing pass. The range is 0 to 1.0 inch (0
to 25.4 mm).
Stock is removed up to a maximum of 90% of tool diameter.
For example, if 25 mm is entered in the Finish XY field, and the tool

has a diameter of 10 mm, the XY stock removed on the finish pass
will be 9 mm (90% of the 10 mm tool diameter), despite the number
entered in the Finish XY field.
Finish Z—the stock depth to be left by the roughing pass. The range is 0 to 1.0 inch (0 to
25.4 mm).

If Finish Z is zero on a pocketing finish pass, the tool only runs
around the inside pocket wall.
First Move (Z Retract)—see Retract Type and Z Position.
First Peck Offset—permits modifying the depth of the first peck in milling and hole
operations. Use this feature whenever a first peck needs to be deeper or shallower than
subsequent pecks. The permitted range is –10.0000 to + 10.0000 inches or –254.00 to
+254.000 millimeters. The First Peck Offset value is added to the operation’s peck depth
in calculating the first peck only. Use a positive First Peck Offset value for deeper peck
and negative value for shallower peck. A First Peck Offset of 0.000 will run the pecks
normally, without any First Peck Offset.
For example, if the peck depth in a drill operation is set to 0.2000 inches and First Peck
Offset is set to +0.0500 inches, then the first peck will be 0.2500 inches down from Z
start plane and all subsequent pecks will be 0.2000 inches deep. If the First Peck Offset is
set to –0.0500 inches, the result is a first peck only 0.1500 inches down from Z start
plane and every subsequent peck will be 0.2000 inches deep.
Flutes—the number of cutting flutes for the tool. See Feed and Speed Calculations, on
page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information
Font—the lettering font. The font selection dialog box is opened with the Select New
Font softkey, when the cursor is in the Text field.
Font Side of Contour—in Lettering Along Contour Start segment, the side of the
contour that is used for the location of the text.
Frame Radius—sets a default corner radius to be used in Build DB in DXF.
FTP Server Port—the port number for FTP access.
G
Graphics Chord Error—the chord error to be used when drawing curves in graphics.
Graphics Optimization—optimizes graphics processing and rendering. Default is Full.
H
HD3 Save Program Type—the program type used when exporting conversational
programs to the HD3 file format.
Choices for HWM and HD3 Program Types are:
Standard = 3-axis
Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis
Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis

Height—the height of gauge or probe relative to the Z Reference.
Hole Diameter—determines the default diameter for a hole in a DXF drawing.
Hydraulic Status—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. An alarm will not allow programs to run
or machine operation.
I
Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal—indicates whether or not the Offset Z value in Part
Setup is added to the zero calibration value when tool lengths are adjusted.
Default is Yes.
• Yes—Zero Calibration is adjusted by the Offset Z value.

• No—Zero Calibration is the distance from machine home to the tool tip when
positioned at the workpiece or gauge block.
Increment—the amount to increment for each new serial number. This field appears
only when User-provided Data Origin is selected. Default is 1.
Index Pulses—the number of positioning movements that the indexer head will make
when rotating through an operation. It is used only when indexer equipment is attached
to the machine. A new Position block must be put into the part program each time the
part needs to move to a new indexer position.
Individual Profiles—allows different profile contours to be used for individual segments

of the Draw Along contour in Swept Surface.
Inspection Cycle—the type of cycle to be inspected.
Intelligent ASR Triggers•conditions that turn ON automatic ASR buffering in NC:

• M128 is called.
• Tool Change—when a tool change occurs while a Transform Plane is
active.
• Transform Plane begins.
• Rapid Move—when a rapid move includes an angle (A, B, C) or tool
vector change (I, J, K).
• NC Merge starts.
• Conditions that turn OFF automatic ASR buffering:
• Program End
• Integrator M-code
• NC Merge End
Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning—turns automatic buffering on and off.

Default is On.
Interrupt Cycle Z Retract—retracts the Z axis to Retract Clearance when you press the
Interrupt Cycle console button on a Hurco control.

• Select No to keep the spindle in its current position when the button is
pressed.
• The default is Yes.
Interrupt Cycle during tapping:
• When Interrupt Cycle button is pressed and this parameter has been set
to NO, the spindle moves out of hole and stops; when set to Yes, the
spindle moves out of hole and retracts along tool axis to Retract
Clearance.
• When interrupt happens during tapping into hole, tool retracts at 100%
spindle override and retract override. After resuming, tapping will repeat
the interrupted process.
• When interrupt happens during tapping out of hole, it remains at the fast
retract feedrate. After resume, tapping will not repeat the interrupted
process since it is already done.
IV Angle—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A or Part Zero C,

depending on the configuration of your machine. Enabled when the Enable field is set to
YES.
J
Jog Along Tool Axis—indicate if jogging should occur on tool axis (Tilt B axis
machines).
K
Keep Original—select Yes if the original will be cut in addition to the mirror image. If
only the mirror image is to be produced, select No for this field.
L
Last Used Serial Number—displays the most recently milled serial number.
Lead—the change in the Z axis dimension for each 360° of revolution of the helix in a
helix segment of Mill Contour. This value provides information for the calculation of the X
End, Y End, Z End, and Sweep Angle fields.
Lead Angle—the Lead Angle for this Mill Contour. See Lead In/Out Moves, on page 2 -
15. This field only appears for NC posted programs. This field is only available when
Milling Type is set to Left or Right. Lead In/Out Moves will be ignored in the post unless
Enable Blend Moves is set to Yes and the Display Apt Fields in Editor field on the Post
Processor Configuration screen is set to Yes.
Leading Symbol— the character that is added to the beginning of the serial number as

a placeholder to achieve the minimum length. This can be an alpha or a numeric
character. This character will be repeated in the serial number as many times as
necessary to achieve the specified minimum length with the given starting sequence. See
example below. This field only appears when Assure Minimum Length is Yes.
Lead Length—the Lead Length for this Mill Contour. See Lead In/Out Moves, on page 2 -
15. This field only appears for NC posted programs. This field is only available when
Milling Type is set to Left or Right. Lead In/Out Moves will be ignored in the post unless
Enable Blend Moves is set to Yes and the Display Apt Fields in Editor field on the Post
Processor Configuration screen is set to Yes.
Least Dwell Units—the dwell units when using an integer to specify dwell. This field can
be set to 0.001 or 0.0001.
Least Scaling Factor—the units of the scaling factor when an integer is used with the
scaling command. This field can be set to 0.001 or 0.0001.
Length—the length along axis from reference position when Stock Type is Cylinder, in
Stock Geometry.
Length of Cut—the length of the portion of the tool used for cutting.
Length Offset X—used to change the X table position when probing – applies only when
probing tool length. Required for tools that have a cutter offset from the center.
Length Offset Y—used to change the Y table position when probing – applies only when
probing tool length. Required for tools that have a cutter offset from the center.
Length Tolerance—the amount of deviation from the tool length programmed in the
Tool Cal Length/Zero Calibration field in Tool Setup. Used when checking for a
defective tool with automatic monitoring for Tool Length Wear.
Length (X)—the X length of the pocket. This field appears upon completion of the
probing cycle.
Length (Y)—the Y length of the pocket. This field appears upon completion of the
probing cycle.
Line 1-10—the comment text in a Comment block. Enter up to 10 lines of information to

display. Each line holds up to 50 characters.
Linearization Override—use this setting to force the active linearization mode on or off.
List Icon Size—specify Small or Large for the size of icons in lists.
Location—the physical location of the tool:
• Spindle—tool is in spindle
• Manual—tool is defined
• Auto—tool is in ATC magazine
• Pock—displays the tool pocket location of the tool

M
M6 Initiates Tool Change—initiates a tool change at the M06 code when set to Yes. If
set to No, tool changes are initiated by a T code.
Machine—the current relative axes location or distance-to-go (DTG).
Machine Class—the physical orientation of the spindle, relative to the table surface. The
possible machine classes are vertical, horizontal, and universal.
Machine Coordinate Relative—specifies if the axis coordinates are machine relative.
Machine Hour Meter—total number of machine hours expended to date.
Magazine—the current pocket.
Magazine Lock—indicates Locked or Unlocked Position. Locked is required for ATC to

begin.
Magazine Position•—indicates the current magazine position: In Pos (1) or In Pos (2).
• In Pos (1) is required for ATC Status Home.
• In Pos (2) is active when magazine is rotating and not in position.
Magazine Reference—indicates Reference Pos when the ATC calibration sensor is

detected.
Magazine Status—the current magazine position (note that this may not be the tool
number).
Maintain Operation Level 1 Order—in Tool Change Optimization, when set to Yes, all
Level 1 operations (typically these are the roughing operations) are performed in block
sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 1 operations are
performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.
For Holes, the first hole operation is treated as a Level 1 operation

and will be executed when other Level 1 operations are executed,
based on the Maintain Operation order. The other hole operations will
always follow the first hole operation. If the hole operation should
not be started until a previous block has been finished, then be sure
to disable Tool Change Optimization prior to hole operation.
Maintain Operation Level 2 Order—in Tool Change Optimization, when set to Yes, all
Level 2 operations (typically these are the finishing operations) are performed in block
sequence, including any specified tool changes. When set to No, all Level 2 operations are
performed in tool change sequence. Default is No.
The Maintain Operation Level 2 Order parameter does not apply to

holes operations.
Manual Border Sizing—specify if you will manually size the border, in Stock Geometry
(field available only when Manual Stock Sizing is set to NO). If Yes, specify Border Size.

Manual Jog Feed—the jog feedrate, entered on Manual screen.
Manual Rapid Feed—the feedrate of a linear axis move.
Manual Spindle Speed—the spindle speed, entered on Manual screen.
Manual Stock Sizing—specify if the stock dimensions will be manually set in the Stock
Geometry screen. When set to No, the software automatically sizes and positions the
stock. To calculate the automatic sizing, WinMax takes the diameter of the largest tool in
the program and adds 7/10ths of that size to the stock diameter X and Y fields (with a
minimum addition of .05). When this field is set to Yes, stock dimensions must be entered
manually.
Mapping—the size of the text character including ascenders and descenders:
• Body Only—defines the height of the body of the lettering. Ascenders and
descenders are calculated automatically.
• Descended—defines the height of the body and descenders (the portion of
some characters that extends below the baseline) of the lettering. Ascenders
are calculated automatically.
• Ascended—defines the height of the body and ascenders (the portion of some
characters that extends above the x-height) of the lettering. Descenders are
calculated automatically.
• Full Font—defines the height of the body, ascenders, and descenders of the
lettering. No part of the lettering is calculated automatically.
1. Body Only
2. Descended
3. Ascended
4. Full font
Material—the material to be used, if specified (optional). This field appears as read-only

in Program Properties; however, the material can be changed with the Change Material
softkey. See Tool and Material Database, on page 1 - 123 in Getting Started with WinMax
Mill for more information.
Math Assist Style—select either Ultimax Classic or Standard Calculator interface to be

used when editing data fields:
• Ultimax Classic—select operation (=,-,*,/), then number, and then Enter.

For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing “+” and the
number 3 will change the value to 8.
• Standard Calculator—select number, then operation (=,-,*,/), then Enter.
For example, if the number 5 is displayed as a value, pressing 3 and “+” will
change the value to 8.
Max Depth—the maximum depth of cut.
Maximum Contouring Rate—the maximum feedrate for contouring. Field appears in

Standard motion only.

Maximum Diameter Difference—the maximum diameter difference for a tool to be
considered a match.
Maximum Idle Time (Mins)—maximum amount of time before FTP connection is

dropped.
Maximum Offset—appears when either Profile Left or Profile Right Milling Type is
selected. The value is the distance between the programmed contour and the tool center
during the first pass. The number entered here must be manually calculated. Refer to
Maximum Offset, on page 2 - 13 for details.
Maximum Spindle Motor Speed—the maximum acceptable speed for the spindle.
Maximum Spindle Tool Speed—the maximum acceptable speed for a tool in the
spindle.
Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate—the maximum rapid traverse rate.
Max Spread—he deviation (difference) between the minimum and maximum probe
readings. If the deviation is greater than the Max Spread value, an error message
appears.
Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded—specify how you want to proceed when the
maximum cutting time has been exceeded:
• Display Warning Message—specify if you want a warning message to post

when a tool’s maximum cutting time is exceeded.
• Mark Tool Defective—when set to Yes, the program run will abort when
attempting to change to a tool that has exceeded its maximum cutting time.
M Code—the M Code representing a machine function in a Machine Function block. Type

the code into the field or select from the M code list.
Measurement Feed—the feed rate to use when measuring the part feature.
Mill Plunge Helix Radius—the Helical Plunge radius as a percentage of the tool
diameter. The range is from 0% to 100%. Choosing 0% results in a Straight Plunge. If a
value of 50% or less is chosen, it will prevent a post (a thin cylinder of material formed
after helical plunging) from being formed by the Helical Plunge. The default setting is
25%.
Mill Plunge Ramp Slope—the slope of the helical ramp for the milling tool. The range is
1° to 90°. Choosing 90° will result in a Straight Plunge. The default value is 10°.
Mill Plunge Type—the plunging strategy to use for the milling pass. Choose Straight or
Helix. The default setting is Straight.
Milling Direction—the milling type. Select Conventional or Climb milling for canned
milling cycles (e.g., frame, circle, and ellipse) and for contours (e.g., line, arc).
• The default is Climb.

• The choices are Conventional or Climb.
Milling Type—the type of cutting operation. Identifies whether the system should

automatically compensate for the diameter of the tool when determining tool path; select
the cutter compensation or pocket type with the softkeys or drop-down list box. Refer to
Cutter Compensation (preliminary), on page 2 - 9 for more information.
The values in the Milling Type field vary according to the block type:
Mill Circle, Frame, Mill Triangle,

Mill Contour Mill Face
Ellipse, Slot, Polygon Diamond, Hexagon
On On X Unidirectional Inside
Left Inside X Bidirectional Inside 2 Passes
Right Outside Y Unidirectional Pocket Out/In
Profile Left Inside Tangent Y Bidirectional Pocket Out/In 2 Pass
Profile Right Outside Tangent Pocket In/Out
Pocket Boundary Pocket Boundary Pocket In/Out 2 Pass
Pocket Island Pocket Island
For information about Milling Type in Mill Face, see Conversational Programming, Mill
Face, on page 2 - 31.
For information about Milling type in Mill Triangle, Diamond, and Hexagon, see
Conversational Programming, Insert Pockets, on page 2 - 70.
Mill Feed—the X-Y feedrate. The value initially displayed has been calculated by the
control and can be retained or changed to a different value. See Getting Started with
Min Cusp Overlap (%)—the minimum cutter overlap used for cusp height (percent of
cutter diameter) with a flat end mill. The Use Cusp Height field must be set to YES.
Minimum Length—the length (in number of characters) when Assure Minimum Length
field is set to Yes. This field only appears when Assure Minimum Length is Yes.
Minimum Z—the working envelope the probe tip uses to search for part features in Z
machine coordinates.
When the cursor is in any of these fields, the RESET PROBE WORK
REGION TO MAXIMUM (F4) and STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7)
softkeys become active.
• The RESET PROBE WORK REGION TO MAXIMUM (F4) softkey

allows you to expand the working envelope for a new part.
• You can jog the axes and use the STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7)
softkey to record the positions.
Min Length Delta—the distance below probe stylus or beam that the Z axis is allowed to
travel; determines Min Z Position. Absolute Tool Length mode only.
Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit—the maximum and minimum travel limits
for the A, B, and C axes in System Configuration.

Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit—the maximum and minimum travel limits
for the X, Y and Z axes in System Configuration.
Min Z—limits the negative Z motion to the Centerline Z value when set to Yes.
Min Z Position—the lowest position that Z will be allowed to travel during the probe
cycle. This parameter sets up a safety zone for each tool. This value must be low enough
to allow proper deflection of the probe. This is especially important when checking
diameter as the tool must drop down next to the probe stylus.
Monitored Variable Number—the variable number to be monitored.
Move to Safe Pos During TC—indicates whether or not the table will move to the right/
front of the machine when the operator is changing a tool. If this field is set to Yes when
a part program block calls for a tool change, the table will move out of the way.
Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC—Manual Mode ATC operations are performed at
Safety Position when enabled. See Machine Parameters Page 3, on page 1 - 69 in Getting
Multi-Tool Probing—specifies if multiple tools are to be probed. Yes will include current
tool in multi-tool probe cycle.
N
Name—the file name of the part program. This field appears in Program Properties as
read-only.
NC Dialect—Basic or Industry Standard NC.
NC Display Type—select axes data:
• Standard = 3-axis
• Rotary A or Rotary B = 4-axis
• Rotary A, Tilt B or Tilt A, Rotary C = 5-axis
• Universal Rotary = all types (default)
NC Optional Program Stop—specifies if program should stop on M01 command.
Neck Diameter—the diameter of the tool neck.
New Feed—the new Feed in a Change block.
New Finish Tool—the new tool for the finish pass in a Change block.
New Plunge Feed—the new Plunge Feed in a Change block.
New Speed (RPM)—the new Speed (RPM) in a Change block.
New Tool—the new Tool in a Change block.

New Tool Number—the new number assigned to a tool in Tool Setup.
Next Serial Number—displays the serial number that will be milled on the next cycle.
Next Tool—the tool that will be moved to the spindle by the next tool change.
Notes—a description of the touch-off device in Tool Measurement screen. To change the
specified device number, select any field for that device.
Number—in Pattern data block, the number of times a pattern will be repeated along the
defined line or path.
—in Universal Transform Plane Groups, the number of transform planes in the sequence.
Number of Axes Present—the number of axes present on the machining center.
Number of Holes—the number of holes in the pattern, including those skipped. Up to

250 holes can be programmed in one operation.
Number Of Sides—the number of sides the polygon will have, from three to 100.
O
Offset—in Plane Intersection part probing, the X or Y offset position (1, 2,...).
—in Two Point Edge Skew cycle part probing, the point offset from the original start point,
which determines the second start point.
Offset X—the X offset positions from the Start location.
Offset Y—the Y offset positions from the Start location.
Offset Z—the Z dimension offset for part zero in Zero Calibration mode. This field is
usually left at 0 and the Tool Calibration field in Tool Setup is used to determine each
tool's part zero.
• To use Store Position softkey in Part Setup, the calibrated tool previously
defined in Tool Setup for this program must be in the spindle.
• Entering a value in the Offset Z field adds or subtracts the amount of the
offset to/from the Tool Calibration value. For example, you can adjust all Tool
Calibration values in the Z axis and Z Start to compensate for part thickness
by changing the Offset Z value without recalibrating each tool.
• The Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal parameter indicates if Offset Z is
added to the Zero Calibration value when tool calibration is set using Store
Machine Position. See Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 for more
information.
Operation—the operation number of the function (drill, tap, bore, etc). The system
determines the operation number by the position of the function in the data block. Select
the type of operation using the drop-down list or softkeys.
Operator Specify Pocket Start—if Yes, the pocket start location fields will appear on

pocket boundary screens, when Pocket Type Inward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way are
selected. The default setting is No. The value of Pocket Plunge Near Center is ignored.
Opt Stop On (Off)—the status (on or off) of the Optional Stop.
Orient Method—the method, Angles or Vectors, used to orient the transform plane:
• Angles—uses degree of rotation around X, Y, or Z.

• Vectors—uses a plane of rotation defined using two perpendicular vectors.
Orientation—in Mill Thread, specifies Inside or Outside threads.
—in Mill Triangle, the angle to rotate the pocket about the center. Leaving the field at zero
specifies no rotation. A negative value will angle downward; a positive value will angle
upward. See Conversational Programming, Mill Triangle, on page 2 - 71.
—in Stick and True-Type Lettering blocks, the angle of the text. The center of rotation is
located at the reference point. Leaving the field at zero specifies no rotation. A negative
value will angle the end of the text string in an upward direction; a positive value will
angle the end of the text string in a downward direction.
—in the DRO, the orientation of the axes.
Orientation Angle—rotates the part in a Mill Polygon block. This field specifies an angle
relative to the X axis that determines where the starting side occurs. An orientation of 0°
indicates that the starting side is at the bottom of the polygon, parallel to the X axis. For
example:
0° Angle 45° Angle
Starting Side
Starting Side
Origin Point—the coordinates in XYZ, from part zero, where the rotation begins.
Overlap—the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps for each pass in a pocket milling
operation with Adaptipath (when Pocket Type is ADP Zigzag or ADP 1-Way). Specify
Target (default 50) and Minimum (default 10) overlap percentages.
Overload Status—indicates Tripped or Not Tripped. Not Tripped is required to operate

the machine.
Override Lockout—disables the Axis Feed dial on the jog unit of Hurco controls when
set to On. The default is Off.
Override Machine Configuration—specify Yes to override the machine configuration

with different rotary axis settings for graphics display.

Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration—(Zero Calibration mode) when matching tools
during a program load, the zero calibration from the program replaces the calibration for
the tool on the machine. Default is YES.
The OVERWRITE EXISTING ZERO CALIBRATION setting applies both

to tools that are automatically matched (during a program load), as
well as tools that are manually matched.
P
Pallet—in Machine Function data block, the action the pallet makes when M70 (Pallet
Change) is called:
• Exchange—pallets are exchanged

• Cycle to Pallet 1
• Cycle to Pallet 2
Pallet in Machine—indicates whether the APC table Position 1 or 2 is in the machining

area.
Pallet Pin—indicates if the APC Pin is Locked or Unlocked. The operator uses the Manual
Table Release Lever to engage/disengage the pallet pin. The pallet pin must be engaged
to allow and APC cycle.
Pallet Reference Position—indicates if the pallet is in the correct orientation. Pallet

must be in the correct orientation before engaging the pallet pin. The Manual Table
Release Lever must be at Reference Pos to begin an APC cycle.
Pallet Status in Machine—indicates Pallet Squared/Not Squared. Pallet must be

squared to begin an APC cycle.
Parity—provides simple error checking for transmitted data:
• Select Even if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an even number of 1's
• Select Odd if the data bits plus the parity bit result in an odd number of 1’s.
• Select None if there is no parity bit included in the transmission. When No is
selected, its assumed that there are other forms of checking that will detect
any errors in transmission.
• For example, suppose the data bits 01110001 are transmitted to your
computer. If even parity is selected, then the parity bit is set to 0 by the
transmitting device to produce an even number of 1's. If odd parity is
selected, then the parity bit is set to 1 by the transmitting device to produce
an odd number of 1's.
Part—the current relative axes location or distance-to-go (DTG).
Part Count—the number of parts already completed. This field can be edited by selecting
the Reset Part Count softkey. A pop-up window opens, where the part count value can
be changed or reset to zero.

Part Kinematics Z Reference—enter or store the Z axis position for the Part
Kinematics Z Reference location.
Part Probe Cycle—the type of cycle selected.
Part Program Name—the name of the current part program.
Part Program Path—the part program’s directory path.
Part Surface—specify Yes or No to show the part surface in graphic display (appears as
solid cyan line).
Part X Offset—manually offsets part zero in the DXF drawing. All dimensions are
calculated from this point.
Part Y Offset—manually offsets part zero in the DXF drawing. All dimensions are
calculated from this point.
Part Zero IV—the 4th-axis part zero coordinate in universal rotary configuration.
Part Zero V—the 5th-axis part zero coordinate in universal rotary configuration.
Part Zero A—the A-axis part zero rotary coordinate.
Part Zero B—the B-axis part zero rotary coordinate.
Part Zero C—the C-axis part zero rotary coordinate.
Part Zero Cycle—the type of cycle chosen from the Part Zero Probe Cycles softkey
menu.
Part Zero X—the X-axis part zero coordinate.
Part Zero Y—the Y-axis part zero coordinate.
Part Zero Z—the distance from Machine Zero to the workpiece Z0 of the part in Absolute
Tool Length Mode,. This field defaults to zero for all new programs. See Absolute Tool
Length mode, on page 1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
• Touch the top of workpiece with the tip of a calibrated tool and select the
Calculate Part Z with Current Tool softkey. The value is automatically entered
into the field as the distance from the touch-off gauge block to the workpiece.
• To add an offset, add or subtract a value from the Part Zero Z value.
If this field is not set before running a part program, tools will plunge
to the gauge block height.
Part Zero Z Shift—the global offset to the Part Zero value in Z (Absolute Tool Length
Mode).
Password—the password that corresponds to the user name and allows access to the
FTP Server.
Path—in Program Properties, the media and directory path to the saved program. Field
appears as read-only.

Path—in FTP Server Settings, the file path that the users will be allowed access to.
Peck Clearance Plane—the relative distance to the previous peck level. In

conversational programming, the tool retracts to Z Start after each peck. The tool then
rapids down to a position which is the Peck Clearance distance above the previous peck
level before plunging to the next peck level at plunge feedrate.
• The default is 0.05 inches (1.27 mm).

Peck Depth—in Milling blocks, the maximum depth to be cut in one pass. If the total
depth is greater than this value, multiple cutting passes occur. Entering a zero (0) value
causes the total programmed depth to be cut in one pass of the tool.
—in Drill/Custom Drill, the distance the tool drills down into the part before stopping to
clear out or break the chips. If used, this parameter is usually not larger than the tool's
diameter. If a specific number of pecks is desired, the value for Peck Depth can be
calculated by determining the absolute distance between Z Start and Z Bottom and
dividing that value by the desired number of pecks. For example: a distance of 1.0000
inch between Z Start and Z Bottom divided by a peck depth of 0.2500 inch requires four
(4) pecks to drill the hole.
Pecking Retract Clearance—in Drill/Custom Drill, an incremental distance above or

below Z Start, to which the tool retracts between pecks.
• Field is only enabled when Peck Type is Standard.

• Defaults to 0.0, in which case the tool returns to Z Start between pecks.
• This value may be negative, indicating a peck retract plane below Z Start.
• If Peck Depth = 0.0, this field is disabled.
This field applies only to Holes drilling operations and has no
relationship to the Pecking Retract Clearance field in Program
Parameters, which applies only to Milling operations.
—in General 1 Program Parameters, the height above Z Start to which the tool should
move between milling operations. Field is active when Enable Pecking Retract Clearance
parameter is set to On.
Peck Retract Feed—the feed rate for the move out of the hole, when Rapid Peck Retract
is No.
Peck Type—the type of pecking; used only with a Drill or Customer Drill operation. Two
softkey choices appear: Standard and Chip Breaker.
• Standard - the tool retracts to Z Start or the location specified in the

Pecking Retract Clearance field between pecks.
• Chip Breaker - the tool dwells at each peck level before continuing to feed to
the next peck level. (Dwell time is the time selected in Program Parameters
or Change Parameters (Holes).
Pitch—the distance between threads. In a Mill Thread block, field is read-only for multi-
cutter thread mills; the value comes from Tool Setup. If this value is changed by the
operator, the TPI is recalculated.

—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC). Threads per Inch
(TPI) appears when the program’s unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears when
millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches
for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch). If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically
calculates the Pitch. If you enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. “CAL” appears
next to the calculated value.
Plunge Feed—the feed rate for the tool moving from Z Start to Z Bottom.
—in Tool Setup, the default plunge feed for the tool. This value is calculated based on
diameter and feed per revolution. Value may also be entered directly into the field.
Depending on tool type this field may be Feed.
Plunge Speed— the speed of the spindle with the tool closed while entering or exiting
the hole in a Back Spotface operation.
Plunges—specify Yes or No to show plunge moves in graphics display (appears as purple

lines). Default is Yes.
Pocket First—select YES if pocketing should be done before milling the swept surface.
Pocket Plunge Near Center—if Yes, UltiPocket will attempt to perform a plunge at the
approximate center of the pocket and then move to the start point of the pocket. If the
software detects an interference with plunging in the center, the plunge will be made at
the start of the tool path. The default setting is No.
The Pocket Plunge Near Center parameter may be used with frames,
circles, ellipses, and contours with Pocket Type Inward, and
contours with Pocket Type Outward.
Frames, circles, and ellipses with Pocket Type Outward

automatically attempt to plunge to the center.
Pocket Overlap— the percentage of tool diameter that overlaps for each pass in a
pocket milling operation. Appears when Pocket Boundary Milling Type is selected with
Inward or Outward Pocket Type.
If the overlap is less than 50%, the toolpath may make additional moves to clean
out the pocket. For example (toolpath is red):
Additional corner moves for

Pocket Overlap of 25%

If you change the Pocket Overlap using this field and save the file as
an HD3 file, a Change Parameters data block will be inserted into the
HD3 file to make the Pocket Overlap change. The Change Parameters
block changes only the Pocket Overlap, leaving all other parameters
as they were.
Pocket Rough SFQ—Surface Finish Quality for pocket roughing.
Pocket Finish SFQ—Surface Finish Quality for pocket finishing.
SFQ Desired Result
Pocket Type—appears when Pocket Boundary is chosen for Milling Type. Defines if tool
movement is Inside, Outside, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-Way. Requires the UltiPockets
options, see Pocket Boundary, on page 12 - 2 in the UltiPockets chapter.
Pocket X Start—the X coordinate pocket plunge point.
Pocket Y Start—the Y coordinate pocket plunge point.
Present—the presence of a part probe. Select the Yes or No softkey to indicate whether
the probe is present. If not present, then the remaining part probe parameters are not
used.
Preset X—the offset for Part Zero X. Entering an offset in this field is optional.
The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point and applied to Part Zero X if you
select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears after the cycle has
been run. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing
Axis Z.
Preset Y—the offset for Part Zero Y. Entering an offset in this field is optional.
The offset(s) will be subtracted from the center point and applied to Part Zero Y if you
select the ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO softkey, which appears after the cycle has
been run. This field appears when the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing
Axis Z.
Probe Axis—the X, Y, or Z (Edge cycle) axis to probe. (Edge, Slot, and Web cycles only.)
Probe Cycle Type—the type of tool monitoring selected from the Probe Tool Monitoring
menu: Tool Breakage Detection, Length Wear, Diameter Wear, or Length and Diameter
Wear.
Probe Direction X—the direction, positive or negative, the probe moves when looking
for the part.
Probe Direction Y—the direction, positive or negative, the probe moves when looking
for the part.

Probe Z—the distance from Z Zero to the top of the part (i.e., the height, or Z Plane),
including the reference tool or part probe in the spindle; in Zero Calibration mode.
Probing Axis—the axis of deflection in the X/Y plane. Orientation of the probe will
determine if it deflects along the X axis or the Y axis. It is assumed the probe will always
deflect along the Z axis.
Probing Direction—the direction to probe: Positive or Negative. This field appears when
the Probing Axis is X or Y. It is not available for Probing Axis Z.
Probing Direction X—the X direction to probe: Positive or Negative.
Probing Direction Y—the Y direction to probe: Positive or Negative.
Probing Length X—the maximum value of the estimated X length. Half of this value is
used to determine the point at which the Z axis begins to move downward; i.e., its
horizontal travel limit for X.
Probing Length Y—the maximum value of the estimated Y length. Half of this value is
used to determine the point at which the Z axis begins to move downward; i.e., its
horizontal travel limit for Y.
Probing Method—the Probing Method selected on the Tool Probing screen. Field is read-
only.
Probing Radius—a value for the probe search radius. This value is used for determining
the point at which the probe stops horizontal travel and begins to move downward.
Profile Number—the number of the Swept Surface profile.
Program Number—the NC program number.
Program Run Time—the time the program has been running.
Program Type—the type of program. Use the drop-down list to change the program
type. The default Conversational Program Type can be set in Conversational Settings, see
Conversational Settings, on page 1 - 48 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.
Protocol—the format in which the data is communicated. Choose from CTS/RTS

(hardware flow control), Xon/Xoff (software flow control), and Full Handshake.
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable—sets the Washdown Coolant pump run cycle;
used in conjunction with other washdown coolant parameters. See Machine Parameters
Put Block Before—move a block in the program before the indicated block.
R
R(%)—the current Rapid Traverse Feedrate percentage set on the Rapid override knob.
Radial Peck Count—the number of radial peck passes in Mill Thread. If radial pecking is

not desired, set this field to 1 (default). See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 in
Conversational Programming for more information.
Radial Peck Depth—the incremental distance from the final cut when using radial
pecking in Mill Thread. See Radial Pecks, on page 2 - 53 in Conversational Programming
Radius—the distance from the center point to start and end points.
—in Bolt Circle, the radius of the circle between the coordinate center and the center of
the cutter's starting point.
—in Mill Thread, the radius of the major threads. When tapered threads are enabled, this
is the radius at thread top.
—in Mill Triangle, the value for the radius of the inscribed circle.
—in Stock Geometry, the stock radius when Stock Type is Cylinder.
Radius Bottom—the plunge bottom point. Value may be positive or negative; negative
values produce inside-cylinder milling.
Radius End—point where the Z-axis plunge into the cylinder ends.
Radius Start—the plunge feedrate start point. Value may be positive or negative;
negative values produce inside-cylinder milling.
The value of Radius Start can be changed only in the segment in which it was created.
Rapid Clearance—the distance above the probe stylus or beam that determines Rapid
Z Position (based on approximate tool length and probe height in Z calibration).
Absolute Tool Length only.
Rapid Feedrate Override Max—Parameter not accessible by the user. Contact a Hurco
Certified Service representative for assistance.
Rapid Feedrate Override Min—sets the Rapid Feedrate Override Minimum value. See
information.
Rapid Peck Retract—determines the rate at which the tool moves to the retract plane.
When set to Yes, the tool will rapid back up to the retract plane. When set to No, the tool
will feed back up to the retract plane at the feed rate specified in the Peck Retract Feed
field.
Rapids—specify Yes or No to show rapid moves in graphic display (appears as yellow

solid lines).
Rapid Traverse—the feedrate that the table (X and Y axes) moves between one point in
the part program to the next point in the program (rapid table positioning). Set in
Program Parameters, on page 1 - 124 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill.
• The default is 400 ipm (10160.0 mm/min).

• The Range MAX value is user-defined in the Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate
field on the Machine Specifications screen. The Range MIN value is 0.1 ipm

(2.54 mm/min).
Rapid Z Position—the tool (in the Z axis) rapids down to this position and then
continues downward at the speed specified in the Fast Feed field. For Zero Calibration
mode, use the remote jog unit or type in a value for the Rapid Z Position field; For
Absolute Tool Length mode the value is determined by Rapid Clearance. With the cursor
in this field, the Position Tool Over Probe softkey can be used to position the tool over the
probe before jogging Z to the desired position.
Ream Chamfer—the angle of the tool shaft.
Reference Point X—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software
allows you to select the tool change positions (X, Y, Z) or maximum travel limit (X, Y).
Reference Point Y—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software
Reference Point Z—the reference point for the G28 command. The WinMax software
Refresh Speed—the refresh speed for graphics rendering. Choose one of seven options
between fastest speed (Fastest Completion) to smoothest rendering (Smoothest).
Default is Smoothest.
Relief 1—for Triangle, Diamond, and Hexagon, the direction of corner relief cut and the
depth past the corner of the two walls. Provides the option of a right, center, or left relief
cut (or none) in the corner at point 1.
Relief 2—for Diamond 1 Face and Hexagon, gives the option of a right, center, or left
relief cut (or none) in the corner at point 2.
Relief 3—for Hexagon, gives the option of a right, center, or left relief cut (or none) in
the corner at point 3 or the option of a face relief distance between points 3 and 4.
Repeat Count—the number of times a machine function (M Code) should repeat in a

Machine Function block.
Repetitions—the number of Slow Feed touches when touching tools to the probe. You
can program up to 99 repetitions to get the average length and diameter of the tool.
Replace In Files—specify if new tool feeds and speeds should be updated in current
editing file only or in all open files.
Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change—specify when to reset tool monitoring
data:
• Type—when the tool type changes

• Diameter—when the tool diameter is out of the specified tolerance
• Length—when the tool length is out of the specified tolerance
For each, you can specify automatic reset, prompt to reset, or do not update
(reset).
Reset Numbering—resets the serial number back to the first string of the sequence.

Select the Reset Numbering button or the Reset Numbering softkey.
Retain Probed Part Setup—allows the probed part setup and/or tool calibrations to be
retained for new program runs. Choices are:
• Do Not Retain—no updates will be made to part zero or tool lengths.

• Retain All—retains part setup and tool calibrations.
Previous versions of WinMax may have included additional selections
which have subsequently been removed; older programs that
contained a selection other than Do Not Retain or Retain All will be
converted to Retain All upon opening, and a message will appear
informing the user.
For example, the following table shows Part Setup values for a sample program
before and after a Probed Part Setup is executed:
Original Part Setup values Probed Part Setup values
Part Zero X = 20.0000 Part Zero X = 19.1234
Part Zero Y = 10.0000 Part Zero Y = 11.1111
Probe Z = 15.0000 Probe Z = 16.5555
Skew Angle = 0.0000 Skew Angle = 2.0045
Zero Cal = 18.0000 Zero Cal = 17.4444

(Tool Setup) (Tool Setup)
If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Do Not Retain, the original values for Part
Setup and Zero Cal will be restored. Part Setup and Tool Setup will contain the
original data (20, 10, 15, 0, and 18).
If Retain Probed Part Setup is set to Retain All, Part Setup and Tool Setup will
contain the probed values (19.1234, 11.1111, 16.5555, 2.0045, and 17.4444).
OFFSET Z is not affected in any way by the probe block or the

parameter setting.
Retract Clearance—the Z coordinate to which the Z axis positions before rapid table
positioning. This includes a tool moving from one drilled hole to another, or from one
milling operation to another (programmed in separate data blocks or generated as a
patterns operation).
• The default is the maximum programmable Z travel. This is the difference

between the Z-Axis MAX Travel and the Z-Axis MIN Travel as indicated on the
Machine Specifications screen.
• If the next operation has a different Z Start value, the CNC always retracts to
the highest dimension. When a Position block is programmed, the tool always
retracts to the safety plane programmed as Z Top of the Safety Work Region.
Retract Feed—the feed rate to use when retracting away from the probe immediately

after a deflection. This value is also used for the slow moves when determining deflection
offsets.
Retract INCR—scales the incremental moves that may be required if the probe is still
deflected after the initial move.
Retract INIT—scales the initial retract move after a deflection.
Retract Override—when set to OFF the tool automatically retracts, reorients, and
plunges, using a series of moves computed automatically that do not violate machine
limits. Set to ON to override the automatic repositioning and enter a retract distance
along the tool vector from the target position.
Retract Type—the Z level to which Z-axis retracts at the beginning of the Universal
• Z Home—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in Z

Machine field.
• Z Position—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position entered in the
Z Position field.
Reverse Dwell—the number of seconds that the spindle dwells, in a Back Spotface
operation, when it is reversing to give the tool time to open or close.
Roll End Point—when YES, sweeps the profile down to the horizontal plane at the end
point.
Roll Start Point—when YES, sweeps the profile down to the horizontal plane at the start
point.
Rotary Axis ISO Standard—specifies if the positive direction of the rotary axis matches
the ISO standard. In Graphics Settings, available when Override Machine
Configuration is set to Yes.
Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z—the machine coordinate for the center of rotation.
Rotary Centerline X—the distance from part zero to the vertical axis around which the
part will rotate. (Tilt B Rotary C configuration only.)
Rotary Centerline Y —the distance from part zero to the horizontal axis around which
the part will rotate. (Tilt B Rotary C configuration only.)
Rotary Jog Feed—the rotary feedrate, entered on Manual screen (rotary machines
only).
Rotary Orientation—the method to specify the orientation of rotary features in

Universal Rotary Parameters: User Defined, Rotary A/AB, Rotary B, Rotary AC, Rotary BC.
Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc—specifies how to process “Out of position” conditions
for the axes. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with
Rotary Rapid Feed—the feedrate of a rotary axis move.
Rotary Safety Move—when set to Yes, moves the X and Y axes to the locations defined

in X Safety Position and Y Safety Position fields before rotary-axis orientation.
Set the Rotary Safety Move field to Yes if there is a potential for
collision between the rotary axis and the spindle.
Rotate Angle—the angle between the repeated patterns in Pattern Loop Angular and
Pattern Loop Rotate.
Rotation Angle—the angle between each transform plane in the sequence, around the
rotation axis.
Rotation Angles—appears with Angles method in Universal Transform Plane and

Transform Plane Groups. Specify the rotation angle around X, Y, Z.
Rotation Axis—the axis around which the transform planes are rotated.
Rough SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) for the roughing operation. The
SelectSurface Finish Quality option is required. Default SFQ for roughing is 80. Values
are:
SFQ Desired Result
S
S(%)—the current spindle RPM percentage set on the Spindle Speed override knob.
S / Spindle—the current spindle speed. In some instances, “L” or “H” may be displayed
next to the field to indicate low or high gear in use.
Safety Clearance—when set to OFF the tool will retract to machine limits; set to ON to
enter a tool tip clearance.
Safety Work Region—a part-relative safety area to prevent the cutting tool from
colliding with fixtures or other equipment. The Safety Work Region created in Part Setup
is saved with a conversational part program; the Safety Work Region is not saved with NC
programs.
Save Active Program Only—specify Yes to save only the current program; specify No
to save all loaded programs; default is No.
Save Frequency—the number of minutes between each autosave; range is 1-255.
Save NC State with Program—when set to Yes, an NC State file is saved with the NC
program, in the same directory and with the same name. Default is No.
Screen Configuration—(desktop only) select Dual Screen or Single Screen display.

Default is Single.

Screensaver Timeout—set screensaver timeout in minutes (range is 1-30 minutes);
default is 10.
Second Move—see Enable, X Position, and Y Position.
Segment—the segment number within the Mill Contour operation. The system
determines the number by the position of this segment in the contour.
Setup Fast Feed—the feed rate to use for setup moves near the probe. For example,
when dropping down next to the probe to measure diameter, the drop down move uses
this feed rate. This value is also used for calibrating the probe and the initial touch when
determining deflection offsets.
Shank Diameter—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Back Spotface and
represents the diameter of the tool shank.
Shape—the shape of the slot, either line or arc.
Shape Angle—the angle formed by points 1 and 3 defining the shape with a range from
20° to 160°.
Shift—see Part Zero Z Shift.
Show All File Types—view all file extensions when opening files; default is No (only
displays HWM, HD3, HD5, FNC, HNC, and NC file types).
Show Graphics—the type of graphic display: Show All, Tool Path, or Solids.
Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all the
roughing tool path, applies only to Toolpath graphics.
Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces—specify Yes or No to show all the
roughing tool path for 3D Molds and Swept Surfaces, applies only to Toolpath graphics.
Side Length—specifies the length of the side. This field is available when the Side
Length Sizing Method is selected.
Sister Tool—the spare tool for tool quality monitoring. See Tool Quality Monitoring, on
page 4 - 14 in Tool Probing.
Sizing Diameter—specifies the diameter of the circle. This field is available when the
Outer or Inner Diameter Sizing Method is selected.
Sizing Method—how the polygon size is established:
• Outer Diameter—the diameter of a circle that encompasses the outside of

the polygon, touching it at the corners:

• Inner Diameter—the diameter of a circle contained within the polygon,
touching at the center of each edge:
• Side Length—the length of one side of the polygon:
Skew Axis—the X or Y axis as the skew axis. There is no skewing in Z.
Skew Cycle—the geometric feature for the Part Skew cycle.
Skew Start Positions—the location where the probing process begins. The easiest
method for entering the start positions is to jog the probe down to the desired start
location and press the Store Position key. A single push of this key automatically enters
all three coordinates (X, Y, and Z) for one Start position.
Skip List—in Bolt Circle, Enter up to 24 positions that should be skipped (not drilled).
Slow Feed—the feed rate used when taking measurements after the initial deflection.
The default value is 4 mm per minute for a touch probe, 25.4 mm per minute for a laser
probe.
Smoothing Tolerance—the maximum allowable deviation from the tool path. The range
is 0.0000 to 0.0500 inches (0.0000 to 1.2700 mm); default is 0.0005 inches (0.01270
mm). This corresponds to NC code G05.2
Softkey Menu Position—positions the softkey menu to the right or left of the screen;
default is Right.
Speed (RPM)—the spindle speed for the tool. Entering a value in the Speed field in a
data block overrides the Tool Setup value, for that data block.
See Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for
more information.
The range is set in Machine Specifications, on page 1 - 44 in Utilities.
Spindle—the current spindle speed. In some instances, “L” or “H” may be displayed next
to the field to indicate low or high gear in use.
Spindle Chiller—indicates No Alarm or Alarm. No Alarm is required to begin an ATC

operation.

Spindle Clamp/Unclamp —indicates “ON” when spindle unclamp button is depressed,
“OFF” when it is not.
Spindle Clearance—used only when measuring tool diameter. Specifies an additional

distance to leave between the tool and tool probe when determining the tool diameter.
This value can be adjusted to optimize probe cycle time.
Spindle Load Monitor—the percentage of full load on each axis as the program runs.
The load is displayed in a bar graph format, with colors progressing from green to yellow
to red to indicate the percentage of load from 0 to 150%.
Spindle Speed—the spindle speed when the Spindle Usage field is set to either CW or
CCW. When the operator sets the diameter setting for the tool probe, the Spindle RPM
field will be set to a suggested value – this value may be overwritten by the operator. The
suggested value for RPM is only done when the tool is first entered.
Spindle Status—indicates if the Spindle is Oriented or Not Oriented, and clamped or

unclamped. Oriented is required for ATC to begin.
Spindle Stop—the point at which the spindle stops rotating after drilling the hole in a
Gun Drill cycle. This field may be set to be the Z Bottom or the Z Start position.
Spindle Usage—specifies the direction the spindle should turn during the probe cycle.
Choices are: manual (free rotating), oriented, clockwise (CW) or counter clockwise
(CCW).
The default value for a touch tool probe is the reverse of the
programmed tool. For example, if the tool is CW, Spindle Usage for a
touch tool probe will default to CCW. For a laser tool probe, Spindle
Usage value defaults to the programmed tool direction.
Start Angle—in 3D Mold, the starting value of the angle of revolution for XY Revolved
About X and XZ Revolved about Z. When determining Start Angle, remember that 0º is
where the contour begins and is located at the 3 o'clock position. For more information,
see 3D Mold, on page 2 - 34 in Conversational Programming.
• The difference between the start and end angle determines the degrees that
the 2D profile revolves about the axis.
• Start and End angles can be entered as positive or negative numbers. CCW
motion is programmed as a positive number; CW motion is programmed as a
negative number:
—in Bolt Circle, the angle of the circle measured counter-clockwise from the 3 o'clock
position to the first hole. This angle may be specified to the nearest one-thousandth of a
degree.
—in Mill Thread, the starting angle for the threading operation in the XY plane. Zero

Angle is at the 3 o’clock position.
—in Part Probing, the three probe deflection points (Start Angles 1, 2, 3). Relative to the
3 o’clock position, and increasing counter-clockwise as viewed from above the part, the
default angles are 0, 120, and 240, respectively. Change the angles if the part contains
geometry that interferes with the defaults.
—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the angle value between the original pattern and
the location of the first pattern created by this routine. If this location is the same as the
original programmed pattern, the value in this field will be zero.
—in Mill Circle and Rotary Circle, the location of the plunge start point on the circle, -360
to +360. A positive value is counterclockwise (CCW) from the 3 o'clock position, and a
negative value is clockwise (CW) from the 3 o'clock position. Default is 0. Field is not
available when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary with Pocket Type Outward or when pocket
with user defined pocket start points is used.
Start at Center—specifies if the threading operation should start at the center of the
threads. Default is Yes. If set to No, the Blend Offset value from Program Parameters is
used. This field is available only when the Internal Thread field is set to Yes.
Start Block—the number of the first block in the program to be changed or run.
Start Cap—the shape that is used to close the slot at the specified start point:
• Line—flat edge connects the top and bottom edges of the slot, passing
through the programmed start point.
• Append Arc—rounded edge; center of semi-circle is programmed start point.
• Include Arc—rounded edge; outermost edge of semi-circle is programmed
start point.
Start Coordinate Reference—indicates if the start coordinates for a Probe Part Setup
are relative to the machine zero or to the active part zero.
Start Job—the number of the first job to be run.
Start Pushbutton—indicates Off or On. On is displayed when the Start Cycle button is
pressed.
Start Side—tool plunges on or around the middle of the side selected: Bottom, Right,
Top, Left. Default is Bottom. Plunge will be referenced from the middle of the chosen wall,
or at the end of a corner if the corner is larger than half of the wall length.
This field is not available when Milling Type is Pocket Boundary with Pocket Type
Outward, ADP Zigzag, or ADP 1-way, or when pocket with user-defined pocket
start points is used.
Starting Sequence—in HD3 Serial Number Lettering, the characters for the first serial
number. The sequence can contain any combination of alpha or numeric characters, but
the last character in the sequence must be a digit (number). This field appears only when
User-provided Data Origin is selected. Default is 1.
Step Connect Type—the type of segment (arc or line) to connect passes of normal cut
direction.

Step Size—the distance between cutter passes. Ultimately, this dimension determines
the surface finish of the part. A larger step size machines faster but leaves a rougher
surface. A smaller step size machines more slowly but leaves a smoother surface. Step
size significantly affects the drawing speed of the graphics screen.
Step Size
Stock Allowance—leaves or removes extra material on the surface of a 3D contour. Can

be used for roughing, undersizing, or oversizing a surface. A Ball-Nosed End Mill must be
used to maintain a uniform stock allowance dimension over the complete 3D contour. A
positive stock allowance value programmed using a Flat End Mill leaves sufficient material
for a finishing pass:
1 Print Dimension
2 + Stock Allowance
3 - Stock Allowance
Stock Allowance Mode—specifies whether the Finish XY and Finish Z parameters used
are those set in Program Parameters (Program Parameters mode) or those set in the
individual data blocks (Data Block mode).
In Data Block mode, the Allowance tab is active in the data block,
and the values entered there supersede the Finish XY and Finish Z
values from Program Parameters. Finish XY and Finish Z must be
entered in the data block; they are not applied automatically.
When Milling Type is ON, only the Finish Z parameter appears in the
Allowance tab.

Stock Outline—specify Yes or No to show the stock outline, which is set in the stock
geometry screen (appears as green solid line). Refer to Stock Geometry, on page 1 - 101
in Part Setup for more information.
Stock Transparency—shows the stock in a solid (Opaque) or clear (Translucent) view,

in graphics display. Default is Opaque.
Stock Type—the type of stock in Stock Geometry screen:
• Box—enables settings for X length, Y length, Z length of stock box or cube.

• Cylinder—enables direction, length, and radius of cylinder.
Stop—pauses program operation until further input from the operator:
• If set to Yes, the program is stopped, the spindle goes to its Z Top position,
and the coolant shuts off.
• If set to Optional, the behavior is dependent on the state of the Optional Stop
setting on the Auto screen. (Refer to Auto Mode Monitoring, on page 1 - 162
for information about the Optional Stop On/Off softkey.) If the Optional Stop
is enabled on the Auto screen, the program will be stopped (same as Yes). If
it is not enabled, no stop occurs (same as No).
• If set to No, no stop occurs.
Press the flashing Start Cycle button to continue with the part
program.
—in Universal Rotary Position block, Yes pauses program execution after the Rotary
Position data block is executed. To restart the program, press the Start Cycle console
button.
Stop Bits—stop bits signal the end of the transmission of data. Choose the size for the
Stop Bit.
Store Result As—the destination for the probed length and/or diameter value.
Stylus Diameter—the stylus tip diameter, available on the specification sheet for the
probing equipment.
Stylus Length—the length of the probe stylus.
Stylus Width—the width of the probe’s stylus along the Probing Axis (touch tool probe
only).
Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default)—the SFQ value for the roughing
operation.
Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default)—the SFQ value for the finishing operation.
Surface Side—the side of the Along contour on which the profile is cut:
• When set to Right, the profile is cut to the right of the contour forming a
surface to the right of the along contour.
• When set to Left, the PROFILE is cut to left of the contour creating a surface

to the left of the along contour.
Surface Speed—the tool surface speed in feet per minute (or meters per minute), See
Feed and Speed Calculations, on page 1 - 113 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for
more information.
Swap Screens—in User Interface Settings, select Yes or No to switch, or swap, the left
and right screens on dual-screen Max5 consoles. When set to Yes, console keys ctrl +
Home will swap screens, ctrl + Home again will swap the screens back.
Sweep Angle—the angular distance from the start point to the end point around the
center point. The range is -360° to 360°.
T
Taper Angle—specifies the angle for tapered threads. External threads must be positive,
and internal threads must be negative. Enter zero for non-tapered threads. This field is
available only when the tool is a single-cutter thread mill.
Tap Retract (%)—the retract speed for a tap operation, as a percentage of the plunge
speed. Appears only when the UltiMotion option is on.
• The default is 200%.

• The range is 50-1000%.
Text—the text to be milled.
Text Height—the height of the text.
Text Offset—the distance between the contour and the reference point of the text
Text Width—in Stick Lettering Along Contour, field appears when Specify Width is
selected as Width Method. Enter the total width of the text along the contour, or use the
Calculate Text Width softkey to automatically calculate the text width based on the
contour length.
— in Rotary True-Type Lettering, the width of the text.
Third Move (End Position)—see X Position, Y Position, IV Angle, and V Angle.
Thread Bottom—specifies the Z position for the bottom of the thread.
Thread Diameter—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap. Select the Tap
icon, located to the right of the field. Choose the appropriate diameter from the pop-up
box, as shown below:

Use the slider Select desired
to select range diameter
Touch to select
Thread Top—specifies the Z position for the top of the thread.
Tilt Axis Preference—the tilt axis preference: neutral, positive, or negative. Neutral
indicates no preference. In Graphics Settings, available when Override Machine
Configuration is set to Yes.
Tilt Axis Safety Position—sets the position for the tilt axis during an automatic tool
change when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change.
more information.
Time / Program Run Time—the time the program has been running.
Tip Angle—the angle of the tool tip.
Tip Diameter—the tool tip diameter.
Tip Length—the tool tip length.
TIS / Tool in Spindle—the tool number of the tool in the spindle.
Tool—the number and name of the tool used in the operation.
Tool Calibration Mode—sets the method used to calibrate tools.:
• Zero Calibration—stores the tip of tool dimension relative to home position

(machine zero in z axis). See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 1 - 105 in
• Absolute Tool Length—stores the actual length of the tool from spindle nose
to the tip of tool. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page 1 - 102 in Getting
Started with WinMax Mill for more information. This is the default setting.
Tool Cal Length—the length of the tool from the spindle nose to the tip of the tool. Field

is available in Absolute Tool Length mode only. See Absolute Tool Length mode, on page
1 - 102 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more information.
Tool Change Optimization—indicates if Tool Change Optimization should be enabled

for the program. Default is Yes. (This field is available in Program Parameters only; it is
not available in Change Parameters.)
• No—Any Tool Change Optimization blocks are ignored by the program.

• Yes—Tool Change Optimization blocks are used by the program.
See Tool Change Optimization, on page 2 - 126 in Conversational Programming for more
information.
Tool Holder—in HMX ATC Diagnostics, indicates 0° or 90° position. 0° is required for ATC
Status Home.
—in VM, VMX, VTXU ATC/Machine Diagnostics, indicates Up or Down position. Up is

required for ATC Status Home.
Tool in Spindle—the tool number in the Spindle.
Tool Length—the length of the tool.
Tool Length Tolerance—the value used for NC tool probing.
Tool Number—the number of the programmed tool.
Tool Path—specify Yes or No to show the tool path (appears as red dashed line).
Tool SFQ—the Surface Finish Quality (SFQ) that will be applied to the tool in NC
programs. Set in the NC SFQ tab of Advance Tool Settings.
Tool Type—the type of tool. Use the appropriate softkey or drop-down list to select a
tool type. If you do not see the type of tool that you wish to use, select the More softkey
to display more tool type softkeys. The tool types are:

Standard Tools WinMax-Only Tools
Drill Ream
Tap Spot Drill
Boring Head Forming Tap
End Mill Counter Bore
Face Mill Counter Sink
Ball End Mill Keyseat Mill
Back Spotface Drill Thread Mill (SC)
Probe Thread Mill (MC)
Gun Drill Corner Round Mill
Center Drill Dove Tail Mill
Chamfer Mill Engraving Mill
Bull Nose Mill Taper Radius End Mill
Custom Tool
Touch-Off Device—the device used for touch-off. A read-only area displays notes that
were entered for the device.
—in Tool Setup, displays the touch off device and type (gauge or probe) specified on the
Tool Measurement screen. Displayed for reference only; edited on the Tool Measurement
screen.
TPI—the threads per inch. This field is available only when units are imperial (inch). In
Mill Thread, field is read-only for multi-cutter thread mills; the value comes from Tool
Setup. When this value changes, the pitch is recalculated.
—in Tool Setup, appears when the tool type is Tap or Thread Mill (MC). Threads per Inch
(TPI) appears when the program’s unit of measurement is inch. Pitch appears when
millimeter is the selected unit of measurement. The range is 0.0 through 1000.00 inches
for TPI (0.0 to 2514.6 mm for Pitch). If you enter a value for TPI, WinMax automatically
calculates the Pitch. If you enter a value for Pitch, WinMax calculates TPI. “CAL” appears
next to the calculated value.
Transform Part Zero—when set to Yes, used to activate Transform Plane for a non-
rotary data block machined on multiple sides of a part. Refer to Universal Transform
Plane, on page 5 - 8 in Rotary Programming for information about using Transform Plane
in a Conversational rotary part program.
Type—in 3D Mold, the type of operation:
• Draw 2D Contour—renders the 2D contour

• XY Revolved about X—use a 2D contour programmed in the XY plane and
revolve it about a centerline on the X axis to produce the finished 3D contour.

• XZ Revolved about Z—use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and
revolve it about a centerline on the Z axis to produce the finished 3D contour.
• XZ Translated in Y—use a 2D contour programmed in the XZ plane and
translate it in the Y axis.
—in Insert Block, the type of code: Text or APT.
—in Laser Probe parameters, the type of tool probe. If a tool probe is not present, the
remaining tool probe parameters are not used.
—in Swept Surface, the type of operation:
• Draw Profile(s)—program the XZ or YZ part dimensions.

• Draw Along—program the XY contour that the XZ or YZ profile follows.
• Swept Surface—program the details of the Swept Surface.
Type of Corners—the type of corner (rounded, extended, or truncated) to insert when

there is a change of direction in the Draw Along contour in a Swept Surface block.
U
Universal Type—the type of machine when using Universal Rotary configuration, for
graphics rendering.
Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes—Update feeds and speeds in conversational
data blocks when tool feeds and speeds are changed. Specify if update this should occur
automatically, prompt first, or should not update. Tool Utilities and Settings.
UPS Software Shutdown Off Time—sets the number of minutes the system will wait
before it shuts down after a power loss condition has been detected. See Machine
Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill for more
information.
Use Chord Error From Program—specify Yes or No to use the chord error value
programmed in general parameters when rendering curves in NC in graphics display.
Use Cusp Height—when YES, step over is calculated from the specified cusp height.
Used only with flat and ball end mills in a Swept Surface block.
Use Offset Z —in Zero Calibration mode only, available when Transform Part Zero is Yes.
Determines if the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will be used by the
machine in a transformed plane. The default value is No. Refer to Rotary Part
Programming, on page 5 - 5 in Rotary Programming for information about the Offset Z
field.
• When set to Yes, the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will
be used to establish the part zero coordinate system in Transform Plane
operations.
• When set to No, the value in the Offset Z field on the Part Setup screen will

be added or subtracted from the Z calibration point during Transform Plane
operations.
Use Tool Type Checking—Yes only allows the selection of tool types that are valid for
the operation in conversational mode:
• YES—only the tools that are valid for the data block can be selected (i.e.,
drills and taps displayed for hole operations).
• NO—allows any tool to be selected for any data block.
User Name—the log in name that will allow users access to the FTP Server.
V
V Angle—rotary-axis coordinate (angle) relative to Part Zero A or Part Zero C, depending
on the configuration of your machine. Enabled when the Enable field is set to YES.
Variable Reset Value—the NC variable reset value.
Vertical/Horizontal—the current orientation of the machine. This field will be vertical

for vertical machines and horizontal for horizontal machines. For universal machines, this
field can be either vertical or horizontal.
W
Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate—Sets the axis feed rate for each step of the warm-up cycle. See
information.
Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass—sets the time for each step of the warm-up cycle. See
information.
Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed—sets the spindle speed for the final step of the warm-up
cycle. See Machine Parameters Page 4, on page 1 - 76 in Getting Started with WinMax Mill
Warm-Up Speed Steps—sets spindle speed increments for each step of the warm-up cycle.
more information.
Warm-Up Starting Speed—sets the spindle speed for the initial step of the warm-up cycle.
more information.
Warn Before Saving in Old Format—select Yes to display a warning message when a
program is about to be saved in the HD3 file format, which may not support some
conversational features.

Washdown Off Delay Timer—the time the washdown coolant pump is off; used with
Washdown On Delay Timer. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting
Washdown On Delay Timer—the time the washdown coolant pump is on; used with
Washdown Off Delay Timer. See Machine Parameters Page 1, on page 1 - 62 in Getting
Way Lube Level—indicates Level OK or Low Level. A Low Level alarm will not allow
programs to start running.
Width—the width of the slot. The slot width determines how far to expand the centerline
or center arc segment programmed in the Geometry tab. Half of the programmed width
is applied to each side of the line or arc.
Width Method—in Stick Lettering Along Contour, the method of determining the width
of the text:

Write Protection—prevents changes to the program from being saved when set to ON.
Changes can be made if set to OFF.
A write-protected program can be saved with a different program

name. The user will be prompted to do this when attempting to save.
X
X—the X coordinate for a point on a line about which the Mirror Image routine occurs, as
measured from part zero to the mirror line.
—in Position and Rotary Position data block, the X-axis coordinate where the mill feature
will be located on the part. This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.
—in Manual Rapid Move, the X end position of the move in a linear axis.
X Axis Safety Position—sets the absolute X axis machine location to which the table will
move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See
information.
X Center—the X-axis coordinate for the center point of the shape.
—in Mill thread, the X-axis coordinate for the center of the thread.
—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the X coordinate of the reference point about which
the pattern is rotated.
X Corner—the X coordinate of any one of the four corners of a frame or face which then
becomes the reference corner.

X Direction—appears with Vector method in Universal Transform Plane/Transform Plane
Groups. Enter I, J, K vector components for the X direction.
X Distance—the distance between the repeated patterns along the X axis line in Pattern
blocks (negative values indicate direction.)
—in Transform Plane Groups, the distance between each transform plane in the
sequence, along the X axis.
X End—the end point of the line in X.
X Length—the length of the rectangle along the X axis, measured from the reference
corner. This value is positive or negative relative to the reference corner. If the reference
corner is at the left side of the rectangle, the X Length is a positive (+) dimension. If the
reference corner is at the right side, this field's value is negative (-).
—in Stick Lettering, the X axis length of the Sizing Box.
—in Stock Geometry, the X length of the stock (when Stock Type is Box.).
X Max—the maximum X coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to
search for part features in X and Y machine coordinates. This envelope also helps protect
against crashing the probe. These fields are similar to the safety work region in Part
Setup.
X Min—the minimum X coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to
Setup.
X Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a line
parallel to the X axis in Pattern Loop Rectangular.
X Offset—the offset for the X axis, to be added to the X dimension in the data block.
X Point—the plane of the arc in X when it is 180° or greater.
X Position—the X-axis coordinate relative to Part Zero X.
—in Universal Rotary Position, the location to which the X axis will move before the rotary
axis orients.
X Radius—the distance along the X axis from X Center to the edge of the ellipse.
X Reference—in Lettering blocks, the X coordinate of the point where text begins/ends,
relative to the X Ref Location.
—in Pattern Loop Angular, the X coordinate of the reference point (the only point in the
pattern always on the circular path defined by this routine).
—in Pattern Scale, the X coordinate of the point from which the scaling will be performed.
X Ref Location—the location of the X reference point. Default is Start. Values are:
• Start—the lettering is left-justified; the first character begins at the X

reference point.
• Center—the lettering is centered left and right of the X reference point.
• End—the lettering is right-justified; the last character ends at the X reference
point.
X Ref Position—the location of the stock on X axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock
Geometry; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.
X Safety Position—when the Rotary Safety Move field is set to Yes, defines the location
to which X axis will move before the rotary-axis orients.
X Scale—the scaling factor from the X axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis,
enter 1.0000.
• A value that is less than 1.0000 scales down the pattern.

• A value that is greater than 1.0000 scales up the pattern.
X Start—the starting point of the line or arc segment in X.
XY Angle—the angle of the XY line segment, in degrees, measured counterclockwise

from the three o’clock position.
XY Length—the distance from the start point to the end point, in X-Y.
X/Y Skew (DEG)—represents, in degrees, how far the part is from perfect alignment
with the table. See Part Skew Probing Cycles, on page 4 - 56 of Part Probing for more
information about X/Y skew.
XZ Angle—the angle of the XZ line segment, in degrees, measured counterclockwise

from the 3 o'clock position.
XZ Length—the distance from the start point to the end point, In X-Z.
Y
Y—in Pattern Mirror Image, the Y coordinate for a point on a line about which the Mirror
Image routine occurs, as measured from part zero to the mirror line.
—in Position and Rotary Position data block, the Y-axis coordinate where the mill feature
will be located on the part. This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.
—in Manual Rapid Move, the Y end position of the move in a linear axis.
Y-Axis Safety Position—sets the absolute Y axis machine location to which the table will
move when the Table Safety Move parameter is set to Yes for an Automatic Tool Change. See
information.
Y Center—the center point of the shape, in Y.
—in Mill Thread, the Y-axis coordinate for the center of the thread.

—in Pattern Loop Angular and Rotate, the Y coordinate of the reference point about which
the pattern is rotated.
Y Corner—the Y coordinate of any one of the four corners of a frame or face which then
Y Direction—appears with Vector method in Universal Transform Plane/Transform Plane

Groups. Enter U, V, W vector components for the Y direction.
Y Distance—the distance between the repeated patterns along the Y axis line in Pattern
blocks. (Negative values indicate direction.)
—in Transform Plane Groups, the distance between each transform plane in the
sequence, along the Y axis.
Y End—the end point in Y.
—in Rotary AC Contour blocs, the rotary-axis coordinate (angle) for the ending point of
the line.
Y Length—the length of the rectangle along the Y axis, measured from the reference
corner. This value is positive or negative relative to the reference corner:
• Y Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle.
• Y Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the
rectangle.
—in Stick Lettering, the Y axis length of the Sizing Box.
—in Stock Geometry, the Y length of the stock (when Stock Type is Box.).
Y Max—the maximum Y coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to
Setup.
Y Min—the minimum Y coordinate to define the working envelope the probe tip uses to
Setup.
Y Number—the number of times the programmed routine will be repeated along a line
parallel to the Y axis in Pattern Loop Rectangular.
Y Off Of Centerline —determines where the tool will locate on the Y coordinate. The
default selection is No. (Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B configurations only.)
• If set to No, the tool will position the Y coordinate (specified in the A
Centerline Y field on the Part Setup screen) directly over the centerline of the
rotary axis when cutting a rotary mill feature (e.g., rotary circle, rotary
frame).
• If set to Yes, the tool will stay at the current Y coordinate (specified in the A
Centerline Y field on the Part Setup screen) when cutting a rotary mill feature
(e.g., rotary circle, rotary frame).

Y Offset—the offset for the Y axis, to be added to the Y dimension in the data block.
Y Point—the plane of the arc in Y when it is 180° or greater.
Y Position—the Y-axis coordinate relative to Part Zero Y.
—in Universal Rotary Position, the location to which the Y axis will move before the
rotary-axis orients.
Y Radius—the distance along the Y axis from Y Center to the edge of the ellipse.
Y Reference—in Lettering blocks, the Y coordinate of the point where text is aligned
relative to the Y Ref Location.
—in Pattern Loop Angular, the Y coordinate of the reference point (the only point in the
pattern always on the circular path defined by this routine).
—in Pattern Scale, the X coordinate of the point from which the scaling will be performed.
Y Ref Location—the location of the Y reference point. Default is Bottom. Values are:
• Bottom—the bottom of the letter is aligned with the Y reference point.

• Top—the top of the letter is aligned with the Y reference point.
• Center—the letter is centered above and below the Y reference point.
Y Ref Position—the location of the stock on Y axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock
Geometry; can use Store Position or can be set to Part Zero with softkey.
Y Safety Position—when the Rotary Safety Move field is set to Yes, defines the location
to which Y axis will move before the rotary-axis orients.
Y Scale—the scaling factor from the Y axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis, enter
1.0000.

Y Start—the starting point in Y.
—in Rotary AC Contour block, the rotary-axis start point coordinate calcualted with data
programmed in the Start segment. The value of Y Start can be changed only in the
segment in which it was created.
Z
Z—in Position data block, the Z coordinate for the position to which the tool should move
(after Z Top position is reached). This dimension is measured relative to Part Zero.
—in Rotary Position, the offset for the Z axis. Z is used when a vise or other fixture holds
multiple parts at different levels.

Z-Axis Position—indicates At Zero position.
—in APC Diagnostics, indicates if the Z-axis is At Zero (calibration point), APC position, or
neither. Must be At APC position to begin an APC cycle.
Z Bottom—the plunge bottom point; where feed rate begins.
—in Hole operations, the bottom of the hole.
—in Manual Rapid Move, the Z end position of the move in a linear axis.
Z Break Out—the Z end position for the break out step at the specified feed and speed.
Z Center—the center point in Z.
Z Clearance—the incremental distance to rapid the tool away from the cutting distance.
At this point, the tool pauses and the spindle returns to its original direction to close the
cutter.
Z Corner—the Z-axis coordinate of any one of the four corners of the frame. This corner
Z Depth— in a Back Spotface operation, the depth to which the tool feeds.
—in Part Probing, the distance, relative to the Start Position, the Z axis moves downward
before changing direction and searching horizontally for each contact point on the
cylinder’s diameter.
There should be no deflection during the Z move.
Z Drop Down Depth—used only when measuring tool diameter. This parameter (a
negative value) indicates the distance to drop down from the surface of the probe or
beam. For example, if you wish to measure the diameter of the tool ¼" from the tip, this
parameter would be set to –0.25".
Z Distance—the distance on the Z-axis between each repetition of the mill feature or
transform plane. The right-hand rule determines if Distance is positive or negative.
Z End—the end coordinate in Z.
—in Tilt B Rotary C configurations, the point where the Z-axis plunge into the cylinder
ends.
Z Length—the Z length of the stock in Stock Geometry (when Stock Type is Box.).
—in Rotary Frame, Tilt B Rotary C configuration, the Z-axis coordinate measured from the
reference corner:
• Z Length is positive if the reference corner is at the left side of the rectangle.
• Z Length is negative if the reference corner is at the right side of the
rectangle.
Z Location— calculates the difference between Z Reference and the height of the touch-

off device.
Z Move Type—the level to which Z-axis retracts at the beginning of the Rotary Position
data block:
• Z Home—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in Z

Machine field.
• Z Safety—Z-axis will move at Rapid feedrate to the position defined in the
Part Limit Z (+) field on the Part Setup screen.
Z Offset—the offset for the Z axis, to be added to the Z dimension in the data block.
Z Out—the Z end position of the retract move from Z Re-entry, in Custom Drill.
Z Plunge—the point within the hole to which the tool feeds before rapid movement to Z
Bottom. This action assures that the cutter is fully closed, preventing damage to the tool
and part.
Z Plunge Start—in Mill Thread, the Z position at which plunge feed begins.
Z Point—the plane of the arc in Z when it is 180° or greater.
Z Position—the position to which Z-axis retracts when Z Position is selected for the
Retract Type in a Universal Rotary Position block.
Z Re-entry—the Z end position of the Custom Drill re-entry move back into the hole at
the specified speed and feed.
Z Reference—the Z coordinate of the point from which the scaling is performed in

Pattern Scale.
—in Tool Measurement screen, the machine reference position of the table top from
machine zero.
Z Ref Position—the location of the stock on Z axis relative to the Zero Ref, in Stock
Geometry; use Store Position or set to Part Zero with softkey.
Z Retract—in a Holes block, the Z position of the retract move through the hole at the
specified speed and feed. Z Retract can be greater than, less than, or equal to Z Start.
—in a Position block, turns the Z retract move on or off.
Z Roughing—specifies if the Z roughing strategy be applied to the roughing pass.
Z Scale—the scaling factor from the Z axis. If scaling is not executed from the axis, enter
1.0000.

Z Start—the point where Plunge Feed rate begins, moving the tool to Z Bottom.
Z Start RPM—the spindle speed from Z Start to Z Bottom in a Gun Drill cycle.
Z Table Offset—the part offset in Z direction relative to the table top; field is available

only with Rotary configurations in Zero Calibration mode.
Z Top—the position of the entry move into the material at the specified speed and feed.
The tool moves rapidly to this point and then slowly moves into the pre-drilled starting
hole.
Z Top Feed—the rate at which the tool moves from the Z Top position to the Z Start
position in a Gun Drill cycle.
Z Top RPM—the spindle speed from Z Top to Z Start in a Gun Drill cycle. negative values
will result in a counter-clockwise rotation.
Zero Calibration—identifies Z-axis position of the tool tip when positioned at workpiece
or gauge block. A (P) is displayed if the value is set by probing. Field available in Zero
calibration mode only. See Zero Calibration Mode, on page 1 - 105 in Getting Started with
Zero Ref—coordinate system zero from which to reference the stock zero position in
Stock Geometry.
Zone—the zone on a dual-zone machine:
• 1 = Zone 1 (the left-side zone when facing the machine).

• 2 = Zone 2 (the right-side zone when facing the machine).
• 0 = the current zone. Zone 0 can be used when dual zones are enabled but
you do not need to run the program in a particular zone. Setting the Zone
field to 0 will run the program in the zone that the spindle currently occupies.

ERROR MESSAGES
Error.wrc
NTID 001-025 NTID 026-050 NTID 051-075
NTID 076-100 NTID 101-125 NTID 126-150
NTID 151-175 NTID 176-200 NTID 201-225
NTID 001-025
NTID 001 CALIBRATE LIMIT SWITCH NOT FOUND ON AXIS [at].
CONDITION: During machine calibration, each axis travels to its respective limit
switches (the positive or negative limit switch is determined by parameter ________).
The axis will stop when the limit switch input is detected by the software. A second limit
switch signal is sent to the axis Servo Drive Amplifier which will also stop the axis
movement.
DEFINITION: This error message indicates that the input signal to the software was not
detected but the limit switch input to the servo drive amplifier was detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Verify that the Servo Drive Amplifier for the axis indicates overtravel alarm in
the direction that the axis was moving. If no overtravel alarm is reported, this
would typically result in a Following Error alarm.
2. Check the wiring connections at the limit switch for the indicated axis that all
four wires are properly terminated.
3. Use the electrical schematics to check the wiring terminations for the software
input at the Slice I/O module. Check for continuity. If no continuity then
replace harness. If continuity, swap Slice I/O module with another to see if
problem goes away (replace Slice I/O module if problem goes away after
swap).
NTID 002 SERVO DRIVE FAULT ON AXIS [at].
CONDITION: During axis motion, the Servo Drive Amplifier outputs a motion signal to
the Servo Motor. Feedback from the Encoder or the Linear Scale is received by the Servo
Drive Amplifier.
DEFINITION: This alarm indicates that a fault has occurred on the Servo Drive Amplifier
and Control Power will be disabled.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Error Messages 7-67

1. At the Control Console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS
softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. Re-enable Control
Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion to see if error
occurs again.
2. If error occurs again, open the Electrical Cabinet door (please observe all
safety precautions for opening the electrical cabinet door with Machine Power
enabled). This must be done with the error message still displayed.
3. For the axis indicated in the error message, check the display of the Servo
Drive Alarm for an error code.
4. Refer to the Servo Drive Amplifier manual provided in the Electrical Cabinet for
the definition and corrective action for the alarm.
NTID 003 SPINDLE FAULT - NOT AT SPEED ERROR.
CONDITION: During Spindle motion, the Spindle Drive Amplifier outputs a command to
the Spindle Motor to rotate the Spindle. Feedback from the Spindle Encoder is received
by the Spindle Drive Amplifier.
DEFINITION: This alarm indicates that the Spindle speed feedback did not achieve the
commanded Spindle speed within a specified time frame. The alarm is typically displayed
on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.
Typically, Control Power is not disabled with this alarm.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. At the control console, select Manual mode followed by the RESET SERVOS
softkey. Error message should clear after a few seconds. If necessary, re-
enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion
to see if error occurs again.
3. Verify the alarm code displayed on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.
4. Use the Electrical Schematics to verify the connection of the encoder feedback
harness to the Spindle Drive Amplifier. Reseat connector and retry.
5. If issue persists, check Encoder connector at Spindle Motor. Reseat connector
and retry.
6. If issue persists, open both ends of Encoder harness (at Spindle Motor and at
Spindle Drive Amplifier) and verify wiring terminations at each pin. Resolder or
replace harness.
7. If problem persists, replace Spindle Drive Amplifier.
8. If problem persists, replace Spindle Motor.
NTID 004 SPINDLE FAULT - WINDING NOT COMPLETED ERROR.
CONDITION: During Spindle motion, the Spindle Drive Amplifier outputs a command to
the Spindle Motor to rotate the Spindle. On Spindle Drive Amplifiers that have a Low and
High Winding, the Winding is automatically determined by the Spindle Speed Command.
7 - 68 Error Messages 704-0116-501 Errors Messages and Alarms

Note that parameter ________ determines the Spindle Speed that the Winding change
occurs.
DEFINITION: This alarm occurs if the Servo Drive Amplifier does not properly change to
the Low or High Winding. Typically, Control Power will not be disabled.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons) and repeat motion
to see if error occurs again.
3. Verify the alarm code displayed on the Spindle Drive Amplifier.
4. Retry the Spindle command at both the Low Winding and the High Winding
(below and above the value in parameter ______).
5. If problem occurs with only one Winding, either Low or High, then replace
Spindle Drive Amplifier.
NTID 005 SPINDLE FAULT - ORIENT ERROR.
CONDITION: During Tool Changes, Bore Orient cycles, Rigid Tap cycles, and Spindle
Orient commands, the Spindle orients to a position to align the Spindle Drive Key to a
specific angle.
Typically, a proximity switch or encoder marker is used to determine the absolute position
of the spindle nose, and then an offset set in the Servo Drive Amplifier is used to
command the Spindle to rotate to the angle.
DEFINITION: This alarm occurs when either the proximity sensor or marker is not
detected during the Orient sequence, or the Spindle does not rotate to the specified angle
after the proximity switch or marker is detected.
Typically, Control Power is not disabled when this alarm occurs.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
enable Control Power (press Power and Start pushbuttons). Select ORIENT
SPINDLE softkey in Manual mode and press Start to initiate Spindle Orient.
2. If problem persists, check the alignment of the Orient proximity sensor. Check
continuity to the Spindle Drive Amplifier. Replace proximity sensor if no
continuity,
3. If encoder marker is used, check connections of the Encoder harness at both
the Spindle Motor and the Spindle Drive Amplifier.
4. Use the Electrical Schematics to verify continuity at both ends of Spindle
Encoder Harness. Replace harness if wiring terminations inside either
connector are defective or are missing continuity.

NTID 007 ATC ERROR - DETECTED SPINDLE BOTH CLAMPED AND
UNCLAMPED.
CONDITION: Alarm occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a
requested action as part of Diagnostics.
DEFINITION: This message advises that some mechanism is sensing contradictory

position input states (for example, both up and down). This is either an I/O or wiring
problem.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Authorized service personnel should use Diagnostics to

determine if there is a mechanical or electrical fault.
NTID 008 PART PROBE BATTERY IS LOW.
CONDITION: Part Probe battery is low.
DEFINITION: Part Probe battery is being indicated as low.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check for faulty wiring.

2. Check Part Probe is functioning properly.
3. Replace Part Probe battery.
NTID 009 PART PROBE FAULT - UNABLE TO RECEIVE OPTICAL SIGNAL.
CONDITION: Part Probe Fault – Unable to receive optical signal.
DEFINITION: Spindle is oriented and Part Probe signal is not being received.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check Part Probe is functioning properly.

NTID 016 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE REFERENCE LIMIT SWITCH NOT SEEN.
CONDITION: Occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a

DEFINITION: Message indicates which stage during the tool change an error occurred.

NTID 017 PROBE INPUT NOT DETECTED.
CONDITION: Probe input not detected.
DEFINITION: Probe signal was not detected by receiver.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check to ensure line of site is clear for the unit(s).
2. Check power to the unit(s).
NTID 018 ATC ERROR - MAG IN POSITION SWITCH NOT SEEN.
CONDITION: Occurs in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a


NTID 020 MAGAZINE CALIBRATE TIMEOUT; MAGAZINE REFERENCE LS NOT

SEEN.
CONDITION: Magazine Calibrate Timeout; Magazine reference LS not seen
DEFINITION: Magazine has entered the calibration mode, but has not seen its limit
switch.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check that chip doors are closed.

3. Ensure all home positions are working properly.
NTID 025 ATC NOT IN HOME POSITION; ENTER ATC [amp] MACHINE
DIAGNOSTICS.
CONDITION: ATC not in home position; Enter ATC & Machine diagnostics.
DEFINITION: ATC has not returned to its home position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check that all doors are closed.

2. Check that magazine home sensor is working properly.
3. Check for faulty wiring at the Tool Changer.
NTID 026-050
NTID 033 ATC ERROR - DETECTED SPINDLE NEITHER CLAMPED NOR

UNCLAMPED.
CONDITION: Spindle is neither clamped nor unclamped.
DEFINITION: Neither the spindle clamped switch nor the spindle unclamped switch is
“true.” There may be a problem with the clamping mechanism or with the switches.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Inspect the switches and clamping mechanism.

NTID 034 ATC ERROR OCCURRED ON SELECTED OPERATION.
CONDITION: ATC Error occurred on selected operation.
DEFINITION:
1. Z-axis has been commanded to move to the T/C position w/ no response

received from the CNC.
2. Spindle fault during a T/C
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check drives/spindle to ensure they are working properly.

NTID 035 ATC ERROR - TOOL HOLDER DID NOT MOVE DOWN.
CONDITION: Error is the result of failed steps during either a tool change or a requested
action as part of Diagnostics.

NTID 036 ATC ERROR - TOOL HOLDER DID NOT MOVE UP.

NTID 037 ATC ERROR - LOAD ARM DID NOT ROTATE TO 0°.

NTID 038 ATC ERROR - LOAD ARM DID NOT ROTATE TO 60°.


NTID 039 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT MOVE DOWN.

NTID 040 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT MOVE UP.

NTID 041 ATC ERROR - SHIFTER DID NOT MOVE DOWN.

NTID 042 ATC ERROR - SHIFTER DID NOT MOVE UP.

NTID 043 ATC - ERROR LOAD ARM NOT AT 0°.

NTID 046 ATC ERROR - EXCHANGE ARM DID NOT ROTATE!
CONDITION: Exchange arm did not rotate.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm did not move to position in the designated amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check exchange arm for debris that may be inhibiting travel.

2. Check exchange arm for debris that may be inhibiting travel.
3. Reset drives to see if this cures the situation.
NTID 047 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE MUST BE CALIBRATED.
CONDITION: Magazine is not calibrated.
DEFINITION: Tool change cycle is being requested, but the tool changer is not
calibrated.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check for faulty magazine switches.

2. Calibrate Tool Changer.
3. Check magazine for loose or faulty wiring connections.
4. Check cabinet for loose or faulty wiring connections.
NTID 048 ATC ERROR - TOOL CHANGE CYCLE TOO LONG! ENTER ATC [amp]
MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS.
CONDITION: Tool change.
DEFINITION: Message means that the tool change took too long.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Authorized service personnel should enter the Diagnostics

screen to correct this condition.
NTID 051-075
NTID 051 ATC ERROR - ARM NOT RETRACTED! ROTATE LOAD ARM TO 0°
CONDITION: The message is in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a

NTID 057 INDEXER NOT IN POSITION AT START
CONDITION: Indexer not in position at start.
DEFINITION: Message can occur when the indexer doesn’t move in the prescribed
amount of time. Typically, this would be due to a faulty or slow indexer, or a problem with
I/O.

CORRECTIVE ACTION: Check the indexer switch and connections. Telephone for
technical assistance if necessary.
NTID 058 INDEXER NOT IN POSITION AFTER MOVE
CONDITION: Indexer not in position after move.
I/O.
NTID 059 INDEXER POSITION LESS THAN 1
CONDITION: Indexer position incorrect.
I/O.
NTID 060 INDEXER IN POSITION 10 SECOND TIME OUT
CONDITION: Indexer position incorrect.
I/O.
NTID 064 INDEXER NOT INSTALLED OR CONFIGURED PROPERLY.
CONDITION: Indexer incorrect.
I/O.
NTID 067 COOLANT PRESSURE IS TOO HIGH. TOOL CANNOT BE

UNCLAMPED UNTIL PRESSURE IS CORRECTED.
CONDITION: Coolant pressure is too high. Tool cannot be unclamped until pressure is
correct.
DEFINITION: Tool coolant pressure is being indicated as high.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check wiring of coolant pressure high input.

2. Check for faulty connections.
3. Check hydraulic clamping tool for pressure leaks.
4. Check hydraulic pump for pressure problems.
NTID 068 DOOR LOCK FAILURE - ENTER CE DIAGNOSTICS AND RESET

FAULT.
CONDITION: Door lock failure – enter CE diagnostics and reset fault.
DEFINITION: CE feature is enabled and chip doors are not closed.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check all door switches for faulty wiring.

2. Check alignment of all doors.
3. Check alignment of all door switches.
NTID 069 ATC ERROR - DETECTED TOOL POCKET BOTH UP AND DOWN.
CONDITION: Message is in response to failed steps during either a tool change or a

DEFINITION: Message indicates which stage of the tool change an error occurred.

NTID 070 ATC ERROR - DETECTED LOAD ARM BOTH 0° AND 60°.


NTID 071 ATC ERROR - DETECTED EXCHANGE ARM BOTH UP AND DOWN.

DEFINITION: These messages advise that some mechanism is sensing contradictory

position input states (for example, both up and down). This is either an I/O or wiring
problem.


NTID 072 ATC ERROR - TOOL POCKET UP SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 073 ATC FAULT - TOOL POCKET DOWN SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 074 ATC FAULT - LOAD ARM 0° SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 075 ATC FAULT - LOAD ARM 60° SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 076-100
NTID 076 ATC FAULT - EXCHANGE ARM UP SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 077 ATC FAULT - EXCHANGE ARM DOWN SWITCH FAULT.


NTID 078 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - Z AXIS DID NOT REACH POSITION !
CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – Z Axis did not reach position.
DEFINITION: Z-Axis did not move to a specified position in the designated amount of
time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check Z drive for faulty wiring

2. Check that the Z drive is functioning properly.
NTID 079 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - X,Y AXES DID NOT REACH POSITION!
CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – X, Y Axes did not reach position.
DEFINITION: X and Y axes did not more to a specified position in the designated
amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check X and Y drives for faulty wiring.

2. Check that the X and Y axes are functioning properly.
NTID 080 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - X,Y AXES DID NOT CLEAR!
CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – X, Y Axes did not clear.
DEFINITION: The X and Y axes have triggered a move timer fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check X and Y drives for faulty wiring.

2. Check that the X and Y axes are functioning properly.
NTID 081 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - SPINDLE NOT ORIENTED !
CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – spindle not oriented.
DEFINITION: The Spindle has encountered an orientation fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check the spindle and drives for faulty wire connections.

2. Check that the Spindle is functioning properly.

NTID 082 FIXTURE MOVE FAULT - SPINDLE DID NOT UNCLAMP.
CONDITION: Fixture Move Fault – Spindle did not unclamp.
DEFINITION: Spindle did not unclamp when commanded.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check to ensure solenoids are working properly.

3. Check outputs to ensure they are working properly.
NTID 083 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE PIN DID NOT LOCK!


NTID 084 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE PIN DID NOT UNLOCK!


NTID 095 ATC ERROR - POCKET-TO-POCKET TIMEOUT FAULT!
CONDITION: ATC Error – Pocket-to-pocket timeout fault.
DEFINITION: Tool Changer is calibrated and the pocket-to-pocket indexing has timed
out.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check the tool changer and motor for faulty wire connections.
2. Check tool changer motor is functioning properly.
3. Check pocket switches are functioning properly.
NTID 096 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE ROTATE SWITCH UNDERCOUNT.
CONDITION: ATC Error – Magazine rotate switch undercount.
DEFINITION: Phantom count detected or “in position” not detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check the tool changer for faulty input wiring.
2. Check that magazine indicator switches are functioning properly.
NTID 097 ATC ERROR - MAGAZINE ROTATE SWITCH OVERCOUNT.
CONDITION: ATC Error – Magazine rotate switch overcount.
DEFINITION: Phantom count detected or “in position” not detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check the tool changer for faulty input wiring.

2. Check that magazine indicator switches are functioning properly.
NTID 101-125
NTID 108 SERVO FAULT - X AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault – X Axis.
DEFINITION: X Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check wiring of Allen-Bradley Control Bit31 input.

2. Check wiring of INPUT Spindle @ Speed.
3. Check the X-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
4. Check the X-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
5. Reset servos to see if this cures the problem.
NTID 109 SERVO FAULT - Y AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault – Y Axis.
DEFINITION: Y Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check the Y-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
3. Check the Y-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
NTID 110 SERVO FAULT - Z AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault – Z Axis.
DEFINITION: Z Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check the Z-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
3. Check the Z-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
4. Check the Z-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
NTID 111 SERVO FAULT - SPINDLE ALARM
CONDITION: Servo Fault – Spindle Alarm.
DEFINITION: Spindle Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check the S-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
3. Check the S-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
NTID 112 SERVO FAULT - A AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault – A Axis.
DEFINITION: A Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check the A-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
3. Check the A-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
NTID 113 SERVO FAULT - B AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault – B Axis.
DEFINITION: B Axis has indicated a fault.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check the B-Axis servo for faulty wiring.
3. Check the B-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
4. Check the B-Axis servo for a faulty drive.
NTID 114 SERVO FAULT - I/R OVERLOAD
CONDITION: Servo Fault – I/R Overload.
DEFINITION: I/R Overload has been detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check servos are functioning properly

3. Check for other faulty wiring with the servo.
NTID 115 SERVO FAULT - I/R FAULT
CONDITION: Servo Fault – I/R Fault.
DEFINITION: I/R Fault has been detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check servos are functioning properly.

NTID 116 SERVO FAULT - MOTOR OVERTEMP
CONDITION: Servo Fault – Motor Overtemp.
DEFINITION: Motor Overtemp Fault has been detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 117 SPINDLE READY SIGNAL NOT DETECTED.
CONDITION: Spindle Ready signal not detected.
DEFINITION: Spindle “Ready” signal was not detected in a designated amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check for faulty wiring connections to the PLC.
NTID 120 A SERVO ERROR OCCURRED DURING TOOL FIXTURE SEQUENCE.

(RESET SERVO'S TO CLEAR ERROR)
CONDITION: A servo error occurred during tool fixture sequence.
DEFINITION: A Servo has encountered an error.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


NTID 121 SPINDLE SPEED FAULT SENSED - NOT AT COMMANDED SPEED!
CONDITION: Spindle speed fault sensed – not at commanded speed.
DEFINITION: An error with the spindle speed has occurred.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 126-150
NTID 150 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER UP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER
"ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder up input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Tool holder “up” input was not detected in a designated amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check tool holder position indication switches are functioning properly.

2. Check for faulty wiring from the Tool Changer to the PLC.
NTID 151-175
NTID 151 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER DOWN INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER
CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder down input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
DEFINITION: Tool holder “down” input was not detected in a designated amount of
time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check for faulty wiring from the Tool Changer to the PLC.
NTID 152 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER UP INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED

DOWN INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR
ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder up input detected, expected down input. Enter “ATC
& Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates that it is in the up position when it should be

in the down position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check Tool Pocket Down input.

2. Check Tool Pocket Up input.
4. Check for faulty or mismatched wiring.
NTID 153 ATC ERROR!! TOOL HOLDER DOWN INPUT DETECTED, EXPECTED
UP INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Tool holder down input detected, expected up input. Enter “ATC
DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates that it is in the down position when it should
be in the up position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 154 ATC ERROR!! BOTH TOOL HOLDER UP AND DOWN INPUTS
DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Both tool holder up and down inputs detected. Enter “ATC &
Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Tool holder position indicates it is in both the up and down positions when
only one or no positions should be indicated.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 155 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM AT 60 DEGREES INPUT NOT

CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input not detected. Enter “ATC &
DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 60 degree position and that input
was not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check Exchange Arm position switches are functioning properly.
NTID 156 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM AT 60 DEGREES INPUT DETECTED,

EXPECTED 0 DEGREES INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS"
TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input detected, expected 0

degrees input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 0 degree position and the 60 degree
position input was detected instead.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check Air Pressure Sw input.

2. Check Spindle Alarm input.

EXPECTED EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE
DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm at 60 degrees input detected, expected exchange
arm down input. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the 60 degree
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check ATC Arm 60 Degrees input.

2. Check ATC Arm Down & 180 Degrees input.
NTID 158 ATC ERROR!! BOTH EXCHANGE ARM AT 0 AND 60 DEGREES

INPUTS DETECTED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR
ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Both exchange arm at 0 and 60 degrees inputs detected. Enter
“ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Exchange arm detected the 0 AND 60 degree position input when the arm
should be at either one or no positions.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 0 degree position and the input was
not detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


EXPECTED 60 DEGREES INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the 60 degree position and the 0 degree
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 161 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT NOT DETECTED.
ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm down input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the input was not
detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


NTID 162 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM DOWN INPUT DETECTED,
TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm down input detected, expected 60 degrees input.
Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear error.
DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at the down position and the 60 degree
input was detected instead.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check ATC Arm Down & 180 Degrees input.

NTID 163 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE NOT IN POSITION. ENTER "ATC [amp]
MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine not in position. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to
clear error.
DEFINITION: Magazine is not rotating, but also is not in position.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check Magazine position switches are functioning properly.
NTID 164 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE UNCLAMP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER
CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle unclamp input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
DEFINITION: Spindle has not detected the unclamp input within the designated amount
of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check spindle unclamp sensor is functioning properly.
NTID 165 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE CLAMP INPUT NOT DETECTED. ENTER "ATC
[amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle clamp input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
DEFINITION: Spindle has not detected the clamp input within the designated amount of
time.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check spindle clamp sensor is functioning properly.
NTID 166 ATC ERROR!! NEITHER SPINDLE CLAMP OR UNCLAMP INPUTS

CONDITION:
DEFINITION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NTID 167 ATC ERROR!! BOTH SPINDLE CLAMP AND UNCLAMP INPUTS
CONDITION: ATC Error. Both spindle clamp and unclamp inputs detected. Enter “ATC &
DEFINITION: Spindle clamp and unclamp inputs have been detected when the spindle
should either have one or no inputs being enabled.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check spindle clamp and unclamp sensors are functioning properly.

NTID 168 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE ORIENT FAULT. ENTER "ATC [amp]
CONDITION:
DEFINITION:
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
NTID 169 ATC ERROR!! SPINDLE NOT ORIENTED. ENTER "ATC [amp]
CONDITION: ATC Error. Spindle not oriented. Enter “ATC & Machine diagnostics” to clear
error.
DEFINITION: The spindle has not oriented properly in the designated amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check Spindle input.

2. Check Tool Unclamp input.
3. Check spindle sensors are functioning properly.

NTID 170 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE DID NOT ROTATE WHEN COMMANDED. IN-
POSITION SENSOR MAY HAVE MALFUNCTIONED OR AN OVERLOAD MAY BE
TRIPPED. ATC MUST BE RE-CALIBRATED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE
DIAGNOSTICS” TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine did not rotate when commanded. In-Position sensor
may have malfunctioned or an overload may be tripped. ATC must be re-calibrated. Enter
DEFINITION: Magazine has encountered a rotation error where the magazine did not
more when told to.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check magazine sensors are functioning properly.

NTID 171 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE IN POSITION INPUT DETECTED OUT OF

SEQUENCE. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine in position input detected out of sequence. Enter “ATC
DEFINITION: Magazine is in a position that is not in the proper sequence of events.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 173 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE REFERENCE INPUT DETECTED OUT OF

SEQUENCE. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine reference input detected out of sequence. Enter “ATC
DEFINITION: Magazine is in a position that is not in the proper sequence of events.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 174 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE PIN LOCKED INPUT NOT DETECTED.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine pin locked input not detected. Enter “ATC & Machine
DEFINITION: The magazine is expected to have a locked position enabled and that
input is not detected.

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 175 ATC ERROR!! MAGAZINE PIN UNLOCKED INPUT NOT DETECTED.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Magazine pin unlocked input not detected. Enter “ATC &
DEFINITION: The magazine is expected to have an unlocked position enabled and that
input is not detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 176-200
NTID 176 ATC ERROR!! BOTH MAGAZINE PIN LOCKED AND UNLOCKED
ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Both magazine pin locked and unlocked inputs detected. Enter
DEFINITION: Both magazine pin locked and pin unlocked inputs have been enabled
when the magazine should either have one or no inputs detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 177 ATC ERROR!! EXCHANGE ARM "OK TO STOP" INPUT

MALFUNCTIONED. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE DIAGNOSTICS" TO CLEAR
ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Exchange arm “OK to stop” input malfunctioned. Enter “ATC &
DEFINITION: The Exchange arm Motor Brake input was not detected in the designated
amount of time.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

2. Check exchange arm sensors are functioning properly.
NTID 179 ATC ERROR!! BOTH MAGAZINE IN POSITION INPUTS DETECTED.

CONDITION: ATC Error. Both magazine in position inputs detected. Enter “ATC &
Machine diagnostics” to clear error
DEFINITION: Magazine position 1 and position 2 inputs have both been detected and
have been on for more than 30 seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 189 SERVO FAULT - C AXIS
CONDITION: Servo Fault - C Axis
DEFINITION: There was a servo fault that occurred with the C Axis.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


TO CLEAR ERROR.

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 90 degrees and the 0 degree input was
detected instead.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

NTID 192 ATC ERROR!! BOTH EXCHANGE ARM AT 0 AND 90 DEGREES

ERROR.
CONDITION: ATC Error. Both exchange arm at 0 and 90 degrees inputs detected. Enter
DEFINITION: Exchange arm 0 degrees and 90 degrees inputs were detected.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


EXPECTED 90 DEGREES INPUT. ENTER "ATC [amp] MACHINE

DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 0 degrees and the 90 degrees input was
detected instead.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:


DEFINITION: Exchange arm expected to be at 90 degrees and the input was not
detected instead.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check ATC Arm 60 Degrees and 180 Degrees input.

NTID 195 FRONT DOORS MUST BE CLOSED BEFORE CYCLING THE PALLET
CHANGER. CLOSE DOORS [amp] PRESS CONFIRMATION BUTTON TO
CONTINUE.
CONDITION: Front doors must be closed before cycling the pallet changer. Close doors
& press confirmation button to continue
DEFINITION: An error was encountered when trying to start the cycle of the pallet
changer.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:

1. Check for faulty wiring and/or loose sensors.
2. Check front door alignment.
3. Check door switch for alignment.
4. Ensure that the pallet changer is in the home position.
NTID 196 FRONT DOORS OPENED DURING PALLET CHANGE. OPERATION

ABORTED. PRESS ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.
CONDITION: Front doors opened during pallet change. Operation aborted. Press any
key to continue.
DEFINITION: An error was encountered during cycle motion of the pallet changer.
CORRECTIVE ACTION:
1. Check for faulty wiring and/or loose sensors.

2. Check front door alignment.
3. Check door switch for alignment.
4. Ensure that the pallet changer is in the home position.
NTID 197 PALLET SETUP CONFIRMATION REQUIRED TO CYCLE PALLET

CHANGER.
CONDITION: Pallet setup confirmation required to cycle pallet changer.
DEFINITION: The pallet setup requires a start confirmation from the user in order to
continue with the pallet changer cycling.
CORRECTIVE ACTION: Start cycle in order to continue.

ALARMS
Servo Drive Alarm Descriptions

The following table shows the servo drive alarms and descriptions.
Alarm Motor Stop

Alarm Name Description
Display Method
The data of the parameter in the SERVOPACK
32 A.020 Parameter Checksum Error Gr.1
is incorrect.
The data format of the parameter in the
33 A.021 Parameter Format Error Gr.1
SERVOPACK is incorrect.
The data of the parameter in the SERVOPACK
34 A.022 System Checksum Error Gr.1
is incorrect.
The motor parameter data in the SERVOPACK
41 A.029 Motor Parameter Checksum Error Gr.1
is incorrect.
The data of the parameter in the power
44 A.02C Converter Parameter Checksum Error Gr.1
regeneration converter is incorrect.
The format of the parameter in the power
45 A.02D Converter Parameter Format Error Gr.1
The data of the parameter in the power
46 A.02E Converter System Checksum Error Gr.1
48 A.030 Main Circuit Detector Error Detection data for main circuit is incorrect. Gr.1
The parameter setting in the SERVOPACK is
64 A.040 Parameter Setting Error Gr.1
outside the allowable setting range.
Combination of some parameters exceeds the
66 A.042 Parameter Combination Error Gr.1
setting range.
The parameter setting in the power regenera-
75 A.04B Converter Parameter Setting Error tion converter is outside the allowable setting Gr.1
range.
The SERVOPACK and the motor capacities do
80 A.050 Combination Error Gr.1
not match each other.
81 A.051 Unsupported Device Alarm The device unit unsupported was connected. Gr.1
The motor type/Application selection setting
82 A.052 Motor Type Setting Mismatch (Pn01E.0) does not match the motor parame- Gr.1
ter written inside the SERVO-PACK.
The Winding Change Setting (Pn01E.1) does
83 A.053 Winding Selection Setting Mismatch not match the motor parameter written inside Gr.1
the SERVOPACK.
The combination of the SERVOPACK and motor
84 A.054 Unsupported Winding Selection Alarm Gr.1
does not support winding selection.
The capacity of the spindle motor is outside of
90 A.05A Induction Motor Combination Error Gr.1
the range that can be combined.
The converter and SERVOPACK are not
91 A.05B Converter Combination Error Gr.1
combined correctly.
The host controller reference was sent to turn
the Servo ON (Enable operation) after the
176 A.0B0 Canceled Servo ON Command Alarm Gr.1
Servo ON function was used with the utility
function.
An overcurrent flowed through the IGBT.
256 A.100 Overcurrent Gr.1
Heat sink of the SERVOPACK was overheated.
An overcurrent flowed through the power
266 A.10A Converter Overcurrent transistor inside the power regeneration Gr.1
converter.
A ground fault occurred inside the power
282 A.11A Converter Ground Fault Gr.1
regeneration converter.
7 - 94 Alarms 704-0116-501 Errors Messages and Alarms

The fuse of the main power supply inside the
554 A.22A Converter Fuse Blowout Gr.1
power regeneration converter is blown out.
The DC-bus voltage inside the SERVOPACK is
1024 A.400 Overvoltage Gr.1
excessively high.
The DC-bus voltage inside the power regenera-
1034 A.40A Converter Overvoltage Gr.1
tion converter is abnormally high.
The AC power supply voltage inside the power
1035 A.40B Converter AC Overvoltage Gr.1
regeneration converter is abnormally high.
Abnormal Voltage in Converter Main An error occurred in the main circuit of the
1036 A.40C Gr.1
Circuit power regeneration converter.
1040 A.410 Undervoltage The DC-bus voltage is excessively low. Gr.2
The DC-bus voltage inside the power regenera-
1050 A.41A Converter DC Undervoltage Gr.2
tion converter is abnormally low.
The AC voltage inside the power regeneration
1051 A.41B Converter AC Undervoltage Gr.1
converter is abnormally low.
The AC power supply was cut off while the
1052 A.41C Power Failure While Motor Running Gr.1
motor was running.
The charging of the main circuit capacitor did
1068 A.42C Converter Initial Charging Error Gr.1
not finish within the specified period of time.
The capacitor of the main circuit has deterio-
1104 A.450 Main Circuit Capacitor Overvoltage Gr.1
rated or is faulty.
1296 A.510 Overspeed The motor speed is excessively high. Gr.1
1313 A.521 Autotuning Alarm Vibration was detected during autotuning. Gr.1
The deviation between the speed reference
1329 A.531 Excessive Speed Deviation Gr.1
and the actual motor speed is abnormal.
The low-speed winding maximum rotation
Overspeed
1344 A.540 speed was exceeded during low-speed Gr.1
(During Low-speed Winding)
winding.
During the winding selection operation
check that is performed when the power is
turned ON, the electromagnetic contactor
for winding selection did not change accord-
ing to the internal command.
1680 A.690 Winding Selection Operation Fault Winding selection was not completed within Gr.1
two seconds of receiving the winding selec-
tion command.
Chattering occurred in the electromagnetic
contactor for winding selection when the
winding selection command was not received.
The motor did not stop within 10s after the
1712 A.6B0 Emergency Stop Failure Gr.1
emergency stop signal input.
The motor was operating for several seconds
1808 A.710 Overload: High Load to several tens of seconds under a torque Gr.2
largely exceeding ratings.
The motor was operating continuously under a
1824 A.720 Overload: Low Load Gr.1
torque largely exceeding ratings.
Continuous electrical operation was per-
1834 A.72A Converter Electric Operation Overload formed that exceeded the rated output of the Gr.2
power supply regenerative converter.
Continuous regenerative operation was per-
Converter Power Supply Regenerative
1835 A.72B formed that exceeded the ratings of the power Gr.1
Overload
regenerative converter.
1840 A.730 When the dynamic brake was applied, rota-
Dynamic Brake Overload tional energy exceeded the capacity of Gr.1
1841 A.731 dynamic brake resistor.
The main circuit power supply turned ON and
1866 A.74A Converter Inrush Resistance Overload Gr.1
OFF frequently.
The motor temperature exceeded the upper
1936 A.790 Motor Overheated Gr.1
limit.
The motor thermistor is either disconnected or
1937 A.791 Motor Temperature Detection Error Gr.1
is damaged.
Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Alarms 7-95

The temperature of the heat sink in the
SERVOPACK exceeded 100°C, or the
1952 A.7A0 Heat Sink in SERVOPACK Overheated Gr.2
thermistor in the SERVOPACK was discon-
nected or damaged.
1963 A.7AB Built-in Fan in SERVOPACK Stopped 1 The fan inside the SERVOPACK stopped. Gr.1
The fan inside the power regeneration con-
1964 A.7AC Built-in Fan in Converter Stopped 1 verter stopped.
Gr.1
The heat sink inside the power regeneration
converter exceeded 100°C, or the thermistor
1978 A.7BA Converter Heat Sink Overheated Gr.2
in the converter was disconnected or dam-
aged.
All the power supplies for the absolute
2064 A.810 Encoder Backup Error encoder have failed and position data was Gr.1
cleared.
The checksum results of encoder memory is
2080 A.820 Encoder Checksum Error Gr.1
incorrect.
The battery voltage was lower than the speci-
2096 A.830 Absolute Encoder Battery Error fied value after the control power supply is Gr.1
turned ON.
2112 A.840 Encoder Data Error Data in the encoder is incorrect. Gr.1
The encoder was rotating at high speed when
2128 A.850 Encoder Overspeed Gr.1
the power was turned ON.
The internal temperature of encoder is too
2144 A.860 Encoder Overheated Gr.1
high.
2208 A.8A0 2 External Encoder Error of The external encoder is faulty. Gr.1
2209 A.8A1 2 External Encoder Error of The serial converter unit is faulty. Gr.1
2210 A.8A2 2 External Encoder Error of The external encoder is faulty. Gr.1
2211 A.8A3 2 External Encoder Error of The position of external encoder is faulty. Gr.1
The overspeed from the external encoder
2213 A.8A5 2 External Encoder Overspeed
occurred.
Gr.1
The overheat from the external encoder
2214 A.8A6 2 External Encoder Overheated
occurred.
Gr.1
The current detection circuit for phase-U is
2865 A.B31 Current Detection Error 1 (Phase-U) Gr.1
faulty.
The current detection circuit for phase-V is
2866 A.B32 Current Detection Error 2 (Phase-V) Gr.1
faulty.
Current Detection Error 3 (Current
2867 A.B33 The detection circuit for the current is faulty. Gr.1
detector)
An error occurred in the gate drive signal of
2890 A.B4A Converter Gate Drive Output Error power transistor of the power regeneration Gr.1
converter.
Converter CPU: AD Conversion Circuit An error occurred in the A/D conversion circuit
3034 A.BDA Gr.1
Error inside the power regeneration converter.
An error occurred in the reference voltage out-
3036 A.BDC Converter Reference Voltage Error 2 Gr.1
put inside the power regeneration converter.
Internal program error 0 occurred inside the
3037 A.BDD Converter System Error 0 Gr.1
power regeneration converter.
3050 A.BEA Converter System Error 1 Gr.1
3051 A.BEB Converter System Error 2 Gr.1
Internal program error 0 occurred in the
3056 A.BF0 System Alarm 0 Gr.1
SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK.

SERVOPACK.
3088 A.C10 Servo Overrun Detected The servo motor ran out of control. Gr.1
Pulse Encoder Phase C Error/ Pulse The number of pulses per revolution exceeded
3114 A.C2A Gr.1
Error the setting range.
The signal line for phase A of the pulse encoder
3130 A.C3A Pulse Encoder Phase A Disconnection Gr.1
is disconnected.
The signal line for phase B of the pulse encoder
3131 A.C3B Pulse Encoder Phase B Disconnection Gr.1
is disconnected.
The signal line for phase C of the pulse encoder
3132 A.C3C Pulse Encoder Phase C Disconnection Gr.1
is disconnected.
Phase C was not detected during the first two
Phase C Not Detected rotations after the power supply was turned
3152 A.C50 ON. Gr.1
Magnetic Pole Incorrect Detection The magnetic pole could not be detected.
Over travel Detection at Polarity An overtravel signal was detected during mag-
3153 A.C51 Gr.1
Detection netic pole detection.
An attempt was made to detect the magnetic
pole for the high-speed winding or when
3154 A.C52 Polarity Detection Uncompleted Gr.1
hanging the winding (for motors with a wind-
ing selection).
Movement during magnetic pole detection
3155 A.C53 Out of Range for Polarity Detection Gr.1
reached or exceeded the set value of Pn494.
3156 A.C54 Polarity Detection Error 2 The magnetic pole could not be detected. Gr.1
Absolute Encoder Clear Error and The multiturn for the absolute encoder was
3200 A.C80 Gr.1
Multiturn Limit Setting Error not properly cleared or set.
Communications between the SERVOPACK and
3216 A.C90 Encoder Communications Error Gr.1
the encoder is not possible.
Encoder Communications Position An encoder position data calculation error
3217 A.C91 Gr.1
Data Error occurred.
An error occurs in the communications timer
3218 A.C92 Encoder Communications Timer Error Gr.1
between the encoder and the SERVOPACK.
3232 A.CA0 Encoder Parameter Error Encoder parameters are faulty. Gr.1
Contents of communications with encoder is
3248 A.CB0 Encoder Echoback Error Gr.1
incorrect.
Different multiturn limits have been set in the
3264 A.CC0 Multiturn Limit Disagreement Gr.1
encoder and the SERVOPACK.
Serial Converter Unit Communications
3313 A.CF1 2 Error (Reception error)
Reception from the serial converter unit. Gr.1
Serial Converter Unit Communications Timer for communications with the serial
3314 A.CF2 2 Error (Timer stop) converter unit is faulty.
Gr.1
Position error pulses exceeded parameter

3328 A.D00 Position Error Pulse Overflow Gr.1
(Pn520).
Position Error Pulse Overflow Alarm at
3329 A.D01 Position error pulses accumulated too much. Gr.1
Servo ON
After a position error pulse has been input,
Pn529 limits the speed if the SV_ON command
is received. If Pn529 limits the speed in such a
Position Error Pulse Overflow Alarm by state, this alarm occurs when the position
3330 A.D02 Gr.2
Speed Limit at Servo ON references are input and the number of posi-
tion error pulses exceeds the value set for
parameter Pn520 (Excessive Position Error
Alarm Level).
The position error between motor and load is
3344 A.D10 Motor-load Position Error Overflow Gr.2
excessive.
3584 A.E00 System Alarm 5 Gr.1
SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK.
SERVOPACK.
Errors Messages and Alarms 704-0116-501 Alarms 7-97

SERVOPACK.
HWBB Function Signal Input Timing The HWBB function signal input timing is
3761 A.EB1 Gr.1
Error faulty.
A power regeneration converter local bus WD
3818 A.EEA Converter Local Bus WD Error Gr.1
alarm occurred.
A communications error occurred during the
Converter Local Bus Communications
3819 A.EEB power regeneration converter local bus Gr.1
Error
communications.
3824 A.EF0 Local Bus Connection Error The local bus is not connected. Gr.1
A local bus watchdog alarm occurred in the
3826 A.EF2 Local Bus Drive WD Error Gr.2
SERVOPACK.
An error occurred during local bus
3828 A.EF4 Local Bus Communications Error Gr.2
communications.
The voltage was low for one second in phase
Converter AC Power Supply Open
3866 A.F1A L1, L2, or L3 when the main power supply was Gr.1
Phase
turned ON.
Converter AC Power Supply Frequency
3882 A.F2A The power supply frequency is faulty. Gr.1
Error
The detection of the AC power supply input
Converter AC Power Supply Frequency
3883 A.F2B frequency was not completed within the set Gr.1
Detection Time Exceeded
time.
There is an error in the connection to the
3888 A.F30 External DB Error Gr.1
external dynamic brake.
Converter AC Power Supply Phase An error occurred in the AC power supply
3899 A.F3B Gr.1
Sequence Error phase sequence.
1. If the fan stops, an alarm or a warning will be issued in accordance with the setting of SERVOPACK
parameter Pn00D.2.
2. The alarm that may occur when using external encoders.

RECORD OF CHANGES
704-0116-501 rD, v9.1/10.1 June 2015
Revised by: H.Arle
Approved by: D.Skrzypczak
Changes
• Added new Error Messages section.

• Added Servo Alarms section.
• Updated Automatic Tool Monitoring Parameter and other changes in
Program Parameters.
• Updated Machine Parameters section to reflect reorganized parameters;
also added new parameters
• Updated Linear Thermal Compensation section.
• Added Concurrent Programming section.
• Updated User Preferences section to reflect new import/export feature.
• Added Max5 UI Graphics Screen option for Max4 consoles.
• Added new Max5 console to Machine and Console Basics section.
• Added new Max5 Remote Jog Units. to Machine and Console Basics section.
• Other updates to reflect software changes.
704-0116-501 rC, v9.1 June 2014
Revised by: H.Arle
Changes
• Added Pallet Changer Control (M70) definition to NC and related fields to

Field Glossary.
• Added Linear Thermal Compensation feature to Auto Mode and related
fields to Field Glossary/
Getting Started with WinMax Mill 704-0116-115 Record of Changes -1

704-0116-501 rB, v9.1 March 2014
Revised by: H.Arle
Changes
• Added new NC Settings parameter Diameter Compensation Using Tool

Setup.
• Added Job List Estimated Run Time screen in Auto mode.
• Updated Rest Machining section.
• Updated Machine Function block section.
• Added new M Codes for Axis Limit Overrides (M210, 211, 212) and
Kinematic ASR (M213, 214). See Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes.
• Added new softkey to Tool Management screen.
• Added NC parameters to Field Name Glossary.
• Cutter Compensation (preliminary) revisions.
• Two Point Edge Skew cycle in Part Probing
• Other updates to reflect software changes.
704-0116-501 rA, v9.1 November 2013
Revised by: H.Arle
Approved by: D.Skrzypczak, November 2013
Changes
• Changes to support new Field Name Glossary.

• Moved optional features documentation into appropriate sections.
• Added new Extended Shop Floor documentation.
• Updates to reflect software changes.
- 2 Record of Changes 704-0116-115 Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Part Zero storage 7 - 39
INDEX Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 46
Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 50
Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 48
Accept softkey, DXF 2 - 133, 2 - 137
Numerics ACCEPT X/Y SKEW ANGLE (F1) softkey
Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 60
10-base T 1 - 20
Edge Skew cycle 4 - 62
24-station 1 - 143
Hole Skew cycle 4 - 58
3D Arc Data Block 2 - 24
Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 61
3D circular interpolation
Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 59
G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 49
access code 1 - 130
3D Mold 2 - 34
changing 1 - 130
Blend Arc 2 - 40
activate spindle, canned cycle 3 - 150
Contour 2 - 38
Active Error Listing 1 - 51
Line 2 - 39
Active Status Listing 1 - 52
Parameters 2 - 34
AdaptiPath 2 - 140, 2 - 141
3D tool geometry compensation, G41.2 3 -
Add As Manual Tool softkey
77, 3 - 174
Tool Review screen 1 - 113
5-axis linear interpolation, G43.4 3 - 83
Unmatched Tools Review 1 - 113
Add Job 1 - 31
A Add Location softkey 2 - 103
ADD MATERIAL F1 softkey, Tool and Mate-
A7-1
rial Database screen 1 - 117
A Angle 7 - 1
ADD TOOL F1 softkey, Tool and Material
A Angle field
Database 1 - 117
Rotary Lines and Arcs Start Segment 7 -
Add Tool softkey, Tool and Material Data-
1
base screen 1 - 117
A axis
Address Characters 3 - 3
clamp, M32 3 - 166
Address expressions 3 - 193
unclamp M33 3 - 166
Addresses
A Center 7 - 1
with numbers 3 - 190
A Centerline X/Y/ Z 7 - 1
with variables 3 - 190
A Corner 7 - 1
ADP 1-Way Pocket Type 2 - 141
A Distance 7 - 1
ADP Zigzag Pocket Type 2 - 140
A End field
Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 103
Rotary Lines and Arcs Line Segment 7 -
softkey 1 - 102
1
air
A Length 7 - 1
probe barrier, M43 (increase) 3 - 167
A Offset 7 - 1
probe barrier, M44 (decrease) 3 - 167
A Start 7 - 1
Air Pressure 7 - 1
A-axis rotation 5 - 2
Alarm 3000 messages 3 - 190
Abort Port Operation softkey, Serial I/O
All Off, DXF 2 - 138
screen 1 - 51
All On, DXF 2 - 138
About X 2 - 34
Allow Plunge Outside Pocket 7 - 1
About Z 2 - 34
Allow Vacant Variables 7 - 2
absolute location, tool probing 4 - 24
Along Contour 2 - 76
absolute machining mode, G90 3 - 135
Alt Dwell Lt Side 7 - 2
Absolute Tool Length mode 1 - 96
Alt Dwell Lt Side, machine parameters 1 -
ACCELERATED DRAW F2 softkey, graphics
66
screen 1 - 132
Alt Washdown Dwell 7 - 2
ACCEPT POSITION AS PART ZERO (F1)
Alt Washdown Dwell, machine parameters
softkey
1 - 66
Cylinder cycle 4 - 44
Alt Washdown Off Time 7 - 2
Edge cycle 4 - 53, 4 - 55
Alt Washdown Off Time, machine parame-
Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 55
WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Index — 1

ters 1 - 67 DXF 2 - 133
Angle 7 - 2 Automatic Buffering Off (M17) 3 - 164
Angle Center 7 - 2 Automatic Buffering On (M16) 3 - 164
Angle Distance 7 - 2 Automatic Calculations 2 - 7
Angle End 7 - 3 Automatic Centerline Calculation 7 - 4
Angle Length 7 - 3 Automatic mode 4 - 64
Angle Number 7 - 3 automatic pallet changer 1 - 151
Angle Ref Location 7 - 3 automatic part probing cycles 4 - 64
Angle Reference 7 - 3 automatic part setup data block execution
Angle Start 7 - 3 4 - 66
ANSI/EIA RS-274-D standard 3 - 2 automatic return
APC 1 - 151 from reference point, G29 3 - 67
diagnostics 1 - 153 to reference point, G28 3 - 67
Machine Function screen 1 - 152 Automatic Safe Repositioning Command
squaring the table 1 - 151 Buffer Off (G08.2) 3 - 56
APC Clamp Status 7 - 3 Automatic Safe Repositioning Command
APC Door Status 7 - 3 Buffer On (G08.1) 3 - 54
APC Position 7 - 3 Automatic Safe Repositioning Retract Over-
Append Tool and Material Database soft- ride 7 - 4
key, Import and Export 1 - 123 Automatic Tool Change Using TPS 1 - 149
Application Font Size 7 - 3 automatic tool changer 1 - 141
Apply Border To Top 7 - 3 40-taper 1 - 143
Approach Feed 7 - 3 50-taper 1 - 145
Arc Radius 7 - 3 Automatic Tool Monitoring 7 - 4
ARG 3 - 23, 3 - 24 Automatic Tool Monitoring field 4 - 17
Argument Type 7 - 3 Automatic Tool Monitoring field, Probing
Arguments 3 - 186 Parameters screen 4 - 17
NC 3 - 22 Automatic Tool Removal Using TPS 1 - 148
passing 3 - 207 Automatically Load Unmatched Tools As
arrow keys 1 - 6 Manual 7 - 4
Assume Feedrate .1 Increment 7 - 3 AutoSave Settings 1 - 46
Assure Minimum Length 7 - 3 softkey, Utilities screen 1 - 43
ATC 1 - 23, 1 - 141 Aux Output 1-12 Confirmation Enable 7 - 5
large tools 1 - 25, 1 - 142 Aux Output Confirmation Enable, machine
loading 1 - 24, 1 - 141 parameters 1 - 72
tool removal 1 - 25, 1 - 142 Aux Work Coordinate Systems, G54.1 3 -
ATC Axis Positions 7 - 4 100
ATC Disable 7 - 4 Aux Work Offsets
ATC Disable, machine parameters 1 - 60 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15
ATC Door 7 - 4 Auxiliary
ATC OK to Stop 7 - 4 console key 1 - 6
ATC Position 7 - 4 Mode 1 - 37
ATC Status 7 - 4 auxiliary output
ATC Z Axis Position 7 - 4 disable, M62 through M65 3 - 168, 3 -
Auto Balance Enable 7 - 4 178
Auto Balance Enable, machine parameters enable, M54 through M55 3 - 167
1 - 57 Auxiliary Work Offsets 1 - 94
Auto console key 1 - 18 axes angle input, tool center point manage-
Auto Mode 1 - 128 ment 3 - 172
Monitoring 1 - 162 Axes Status 7 - 5
Auto Set Restart Marker 1 - 160 Axis 7 - 5
Auto tab, Tool Library 1 - 115 axis
AutoCalc 2 - 7 control 1 - 8
Autochain motion 3 - 8
Contours, DXF 2 - 135 Axis Center 7 - 5
2 - Index 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Axis Configuration 5 - 4 BNC dialect 3 - 2
Axis Distance 7 - 5 Bolt Circle 2 - 102
Axis End 7 - 5 Bolt Circle to Holes Locations Conversion
Axis Feed Rate dial 1 - 8 2 - 104
Axis Feedrate Override Max (%) 7 - 5 Bolt Circle to Pattern Locations Conversion
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 7 - 5 2 - 104
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) parameter Bolt hole circle program 3 - 236
1 - 71 Border Size 7 - 8
Axis Length 7 - 5 Bore 2 - 99
Axis Limit Switches 7 - 5 boring bar 2 - 99
Axis Number 7 - 5 orient 2 - 100
Axis of Rotation 5 - 23 rapid 2 - 99
Axis Ref Location 7 - 5 bore
Axis Reference 7 - 5 back boring cycle 3 - 147
Axis Selector (& Override) Knob 1 - 15 bore cycle 3 - 146
Axis Start 7 - 5 chip breaker cycle 3 - 147
Axis Start field 5 - 15 counter, drill with dwell G82 3 - 115
manual feed out and dwell, G88 ISNC
3 - 131
B manual feed out cycle 3 - 147
B7-6 orient cycle 3 - 146, 3 - 147
B Angle 7 - 6 orient G76 3 - 111
B axis rapid out cycle 3 - 147
clamp M34 3 - 166 rapid out, G86 ISNC 3 - 125
unclamp M35 3 - 166 rigid tapping cycle 3 - 147
B Centerline X / Y / Z 7 - 6 spot drill, G81 3 - 113
B Distance 7 - 6 with dwell cycle 3 - 147
B Offset 7 - 6 with dwell G89 3 - 133
back boring, G87 ISNC 3 - 128 Bore Dwell 7 - 9
Back Spotface 2 - 101 Bore Orient Retract 7 - 9
Background Color 7 - 6 Boring and Reaming Operations 2 - 98
Backup Config & Machine Files 1 - 39 boring, G85 3 - 123
softkey 1 - 38 Bottom Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 94
Ball-Nosed End Mill 2 - 42, 2 - 43 BPRNT/DPRNT Output Device 7 - 9
on a Contour 2 - 41 BPRNT/DPRNT Output File 7 - 9
Basic Programming Menu, NC 3 - 9 Break Out Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 93
Baud Rate 7 - 6 Breakage Tolerance 7 - 9
B-axis rotation 5 - 2 Breakage Tolerance field, Tool Monitoring
B-Axis Status 7 - 6 screen 4 - 15
Beam Offset 7 - 6 Build DB softkey 2 - 133
Begin Reading from Port softkey, Serial I/O Bypass TPS in an Automatic Tool Change
screen 1 - 51 1 - 150
Begin Writing to Port softkey, Serial I/O Bytes Transferred field, Serial I/O 1 - 51
screen 1 - 51
beginning of file, NC 3 - 3
Bidirectional 7 - 6 C
Blank Spacing 7 - 7 C7-9
Blend Arc 2 - 22 C Angle 7 - 9
Blend Offset 7 - 7 C axis
Blend Overlap 7 - 7 clamp, M12 3 - 164
Blend Type 7 - 8 negative direction, M81 3 - 169
Block field positive direction, M80 3 - 169
Mill Circle data block 7 - 8 unclamp, M13 3 - 164
Block Renumbering mode softkey 3 - 14 C Center 7 - 9
Block Skip Enable 7 - 8 C Centerline X / Y / Z 7 - 9

C Corner 7 - 9 Center Y, DXF 2 - 138
C Distance 7 - 9 Centerline X 7 - 10
C End 7 - 9 Centerline Y 7 - 10
C Length 7 - 9 Centerline Y field, 3D Mold Parameters 2 -
C Offset 7 - 10 35
C Start 7 - 10 Centerline Z 7 - 10
CAL to LS Velocity A 1 - 59 Centerline Z field, 3D Mold Parameters 2 -
CAL to LS Velocity A, B, C 7 - 10 35
CAL to LS Velocity X 1 - 59 Chamfer Angle 7 - 10
CAL to LS Velocity X, Y, Z 7 - 10 Change Access Code softkey 1 - 130
Cal to LS Velocity, machine parameters 1 - Change All Feeds Speeds & Tools softkey
60 1 - 124
Cal Tool D 7 - 10 change feeds 1 - 125
Cal Tool H 7 - 10 Change Feeds & Speeds by Tool softkey 1 -
Cal Tool L 7 - 10 124
Calculations, automatic 2 - 7 Change Finish SFQ 7 - 10
calculator 1 - 80 CHANGE FTP ROOT DRIVE F5 softkey
Calibrate Machine softkey, Manual Mode 1 - FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9
138 Change Parameters 2 - 119
Calibrate the Tool Probe,Tool Setup Change Parameters (General) 2 - 120
Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration Change Parameters (Holes) 2 - 120
mode 4 - 28 Change Parameters (Milling) 2 - 120
Calibrating the Machine 1 - 136 Change Parameters (Performance) 2 - 120
calibration Change Parameters (Probing) 2 - 120
laser tool 4 - 19 Change Part Setup 2 - 121
part probe 4 - 34 change program blocks 1 - 124
cancel canned cycle 3 - 146, 3 - 150 change programmed feedrate 3 - 44
G80 3 - 113 Change Rough SFQ 7 - 11
canned cycle change speeds 1 - 125
activate spindle 3 - 150 Change Tool 7 - 11
cancel 3 - 146, 3 - 150 Change Tool Number 1 - 110
code (parameters) 3 - 148 softkey 1 - 110
descriptions 3 - 142 Change Tool Number softkey 1 - 102
operations 3 - 146 Tool Library screen 1 - 116
replace 3 - 150 change tools 1 - 125
tapping 3 - 120 Change Z-Start 7 - 11
carriage return/line feed pair 3 - 4 changing access code 1 - 130
C-axis rotation 5 - 2 Changing Feeds, Speeds, and Tools 1 - 125
CE Configuration field 1 - 129 Char Spacing 7 - 11
CE Diagnostics softkey 1 - 129 Character Height 7 - 11
CE Safety override mode 1 - 128 Character Length 7 - 11
CE Status & Diagnostics screen 1 - 129 Character Width 7 - 11
CE2000 1 - 128 Check Calc Assist Inconsistencies 7 - 11
Center Beam X 7 - 10 Check for Errors softkey, Auto Mode 1 -
Center Beam Y 7 - 10 159
Center Drill 2 - 89 chip breaker, G87 BNC 3 - 127
Center X 7 - 10 chip conveyor M codes 3 - 168
Center X field Chip Removal 7 - 11
Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 50 Chip Removal Forward On/Off softkey, Auto
Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 51 Mode 1 - 163
Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 - 35 Chip Removal Forward On/Off soft-
Center X, DXF 2 - 138 key,manual mode 1 - 139
Center Y 7 - 10 Chip Removal Off Delay Time 7 - 11
Center Y field Chip Removal Off Delay Time, machine pa-
Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 35 rameters 1 - 58

Chip Removal On Delay Time 7 - 11 Machine Mode 1 - 18
Chip Removal On Delay Time, machine pa- Machine Mode ,Single 1 - 18
rameters 1 - 58 Machine Mode ,Test 1 - 18
Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable 7 - 11 Machine Mode, Auto 1 - 18
Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable, ma- Page Down 1 - 6
chine parameters 1 - 58 Page Up 1 - 6
Chip Removal Reverse On/Off softkey, Single 1 - 18
manual mode 1 - 139 Test 1 - 18
Chipload 7 - 11 console knobs
Choose as Replacement softkey 1 - 114 Axis Feed Rate 1 - 8
Chord Error 7 - 11 Rapid Override 1 - 8
chord error default 3 - 49 Spindle Speed 1 - 8
Circle Data Block 2 - 26 Constant Z level, in Swept Surface 2 - 74
circular and helical interpolation, CW G02 Contact Point X 7 - 12
3 - 44 Contact Point Y 7 - 13
circular interpolation Contour
3D G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 49 End 2 - 25
multi-quadrant, G75 BNC 3 - 110 Contour Arc 2 - 21
single-quadrant, G74 BNC 3 - 110 Contour Blend Arc 2 - 22
Circular Passes 7 - 11 Contour Line 2 - 20
Clear Graphics 1 - 132 Contour Start Segment 2 - 19
CLEAR TOOLS F6 softkey, Tool Library control panel 1 - 4
screen 1 - 116 Control Panel Function Groups 1 - 4
Client Control Power Off Time 7 - 13
definition 6 - 2 Control Power Off Time, machine parame-
Climb Milling 2 - 12 ters 1 - 57
Close 1 - 30 Control Power Off Timer 1 - 166
Closing Feed 7 - 12 Conventional Milling 2 - 12
Coding standard 3 - 7 Conversational Components 1 - 121
Collapse and Expand Files 1 - 78 Conversational Overview 2 - 1
Color 7 - 12 Conversational part probing cycles 4 - 38
Comment Block 2 - 123 Conversational Part Program creation 2 - 2
Comment Color 7 - 12 CONVERSATIONAL PROGRAM F1 softkey,
Communications Panel 1 - 20 Program Manager 1 - 28
Compute Estimated Run Time softkey, Auto CONVERSATIONAL SETTINGS, Utilities
Mode 1 - 159 screen 1 - 42
Concurrent Programming 1 - 165 CONVERT TO LINEAR F7 softkey, Program
concurrent programming Review screen 1 - 127
access from Input screen 1 - 165 CONVERT TO ROTARY F6 softkey, Program
configuration of Hurco machining centers Review screen 1 - 127
5-3 Coolant 7 - 13
Confirm APC Ready 7 - 12 coolant
console 1 - 3 both systems off, M09 3 - 163
console buttons both systems on, M10 3 - 163
Feed hold 1 - 17 primary on, M08 3 - 163
motion control buttons 1 - 17 secondary on, M07 3 - 163
Motion hold 1 - 17 Coolant Delay Time 1 - 63, 7 - 13
console keys 1 - 76 coolant parameters, defined 1 - 64
Auto 1 - 18 Coolant Status 7 - 13
Delete 1 - 6 Coolant Washdown On/Off softkey, Auto
End 1 - 6 Mode 1 - 163
Enter 1 - 6 Coordinate System 7 - 13
Home 1 - 6, 3 - 5 coordinate system rotation cancel, G69 3 -
Insert 1 - 6 105
Interrupt cycle 1 - 18 coordinate system setting 3 - 137

local, G52 3 - 93 Cycle 7 - 15
coordinate systems, multiple work G54-59 Cycle field in Probing 4 - 9
3 - 98 Cycle field, Tool Setup
coordinates, machine, G53 3 - 96 Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
Copy and Change Blocks 1 - 124 Length mode 4 - 3
Input screen 1 - 84 Cycle Pallet Changer (M51) 3 - 167
Copy Blocks softkey 1 - 124 cycle, return to initial point, G98 3 - 142
COPY DIRECTORY softkey Cylinder
Disk Operations 1 - 34 probing cycle 4 - 47
copy program blocks 1 - 124 probing part setup fields 4 - 47
Copy Selection softkey 3 - 12 skew probing cycle 4 - 60
COPY softkey Cylinder Angle 7 - 15
Disk Operations 1 - 35 Cylinder Axis 7 - 15
Program Review screen 1 - 127 Cylinder cycle 4 - 47
Copy Tool softkey 1 - 110 Cylinder Radius 7 - 15
Corner Radius 7 - 13 Cylinder Radius Data 5 - 23
Corner Radius field Cylinder Skew Probing cycle 4 - 60
Mill Slot Caps tab 2 - 82 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off (G07.3) 3 - 53
Corner X 7 - 13 Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On (G07.2) 3 - 52
Corner X field, Plane Intersection cycle 4 -
54
Corner Y 7 - 13 D
Counterbore 2 - 89 D code 3 - 153
Countersink 2 - 89 Data block 2 - 2
CR / Chip Removal 7 - 13 Data Block Tool Entry Feed and Speed Up-
create a rotary-axis or tilt-axis program date 7 - 15
from an existing Conversational pro- Data Origin 7 - 15
gram 5 - 4 data smoothing G05.2 3 - 51
CREATE DIRECTORY softkey Datum Z field, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset
Disk Operations 1 - 35 4 - 35
Current Font 7 - 13 DB SEARCH F6 softkey, graphics screen 1 -
Current Time 7 - 13 133
cursor control 1 - 6 Default Conversational Program Type 7 -
Cusp Height 7 - 13 16
in Swept Surface 2 - 74 Default Cutter Comp Lookahead 7 - 16
Custom Drill 2 - 92 Default Cutter Comp Lookahead field
Custom NC File Extensions 7 - 14 NC Parameters, NC Configuration
Cut Direction 7 - 14 screen 3 - 80
CUT DIRECTORY softkey Default M and G Codes 3 - 5
Disk Operations 1 - 34 Default Order
CUT softkey softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134
Disk Operations 1 - 35 Default Pocket Overlap 7 - 16
Program Review screen 1 - 127 Default Radius
Cutter Comp Parameter 7 - 14 DXF 2 - 133
cutter compensation 2 - 9, 3 - 74 Default Tool Number 7 - 16
exit move 3 - 79 default values, information about 3 - 5
left, G41 3 - 77 Default View 7 - 16
off, G40 3 - 76 Default Zone 7 - 16
right, G42 3 - 78 Default Zoom softkey
steps for programming 3 - 79 graphics screen 1 - 133
tool length offset 3 - 76 Deflection offset calibration
tool radius offset 3 - 75 probing 4 - 23, 4 - 34
Cutting Edges 7 - 15 Deflection Offset column, Reference Block
Cutting inside a cavity 2 - 120 Deflection Offset 4 - 36
Cutting Time 7 - 15 Delete Block softkey 1 - 127, 3 - 9

Delete Blocks softkey 1 - 124 Disable Undo and Redo 7 - 18
DELETE DIRECTORY softkey Disable X Scaling 7 - 18
Disk Operations 1 - 35 Disable Y Scaling 7 - 18
Delete key 1 - 6 Disable Z Scaling 7 - 18
Delete Location softkey 2 - 103 DISCONNECT ALL USERS F6 softkey
DELETE MATERIAL F3 softkey, Tool and Ma- FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9
terial Database screen 1 - 117 Disk Operations 1 - 34
delete program blocks 1 - 124 softkey, Program Manager 1 - 30
Delete softkey Display Geometry, DXF 2 - 135
Disk Operations 1 - 35 Display Machine Axes For Universal Type
DXF 2 - 137 7 - 18
Program Review screen 1 - 127 DISPLAY MACHINE IP ADDRESS F4 softkey,
Delete Sub Block softkey 1 - 127 FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9
DELETE TOOL F3 softkey, Tool and Material Display Machine Specifications softkey 1 -
Database screen 1 - 117 38
Delete Tool softkey 1 - 100 Display Time 7 - 18
deleting Display Tool Notes 2 - 7
words or characters 3 - 5 Display Units 7 - 18
Depletion Retract 7 - 16 Display Warning Message, Tool Utilities and
depth, Z code 3 - 149 Settings 7 - 30
Description 7 - 16 Display WinMax Configuration softkey 1 -
DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET (F1) soft- 38
key, Tool Setup screen 4 - 19 Dist to Go / Trans (Standard DRO) softkey
DETERMINE LASER BEAM OFFSET softkey, 1 - 164
Tool Setup screen 4 - 19 Distance 7 - 18
Device 7 - 16 Distance To Go (QUAD-SIZE DRO) softkey
DIAGNOSTICS F3 softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 1 - 164
138 Distance to Go (Standard DRO) softkey 1 -
Diagnostics screen 164
APC 1 - 153 DO loops 3 - 203
Diagnostics softkey 1 - 129 DO NOT ACCEPT (F2) softkey
Diameter 7 - 16 Cylinder cycle 4 - 46
tool probing sequence, single tool 4 - 6, Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 50
4 - 12 Edge cycle 4 - 60
Diameter Tolerance 7 - 17 Edge Skew cycle 4 - 59
Diameter Wear 7 - 17 Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 58
Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12 Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 53
Diamond Data Block 2 - 71 Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 61
Digital Read Out 1 - 88 Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 62
digital read out 1 - 164 Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 44
Direction 7 - 17 Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 48
Direction field Door Lock Status field 1 - 129
DXF 2 - 138 Door Switch Status field 1 - 129
Disable Auto On Chip Removal 7 - 17 DRAW (PAUSE) softkey, graphics screen 1 -
Disable Auto On Chip Removal parameter 132
1 - 57 Draw 2D Contour 7 - 55
Disable Aux Out 1-12 During Interrupt 7 - Draw Along Contour 2 - 76
17 Draw console key 2 - 132
Disable Aux Out During Interrupt, machine DRAW OPTIONS softkey, graphics screen
parameters 1 - 72 1 - 132
Disable Centerlines 7 - 17 Draw Profile Contour 2 - 75
Disable Tool Length Offset Table 7 - 17 Drawing scale 7 - 18
Disable Tool Picker Option 7 - 18 Drill 2 - 89
Disable Tool Picker Option, machine param- drill
eters 1 - 60 deep hole cycle 3 - 146

deep hole, G83 3 - 116 Ellipse 2 - 33
peck, G73 3 - 107 Emergency Stop 1 - 15, 1 - 165
spot boring cycle 3 - 146 button 1 - 5
with dwell, counter boring cycle 3 - 146 Enable 1 - 57, 7 - 19
Drill Angle 7 - 18 Enable Auto Numbering softkey 3 - 15
Drill Dwell 7 - 18 Enable Automatic Matching 7 - 19
Drill Operations 2 - 88 Enable Automatic Save 7 - 19
Drip Rej. Delay 7 - 18 Enable Blend Moves field, Mill Contour
Drip Rej. Samples 7 - 18 block 7 - 19
drive Enable Cutter Comp 7 - 19
jump 1 - 22 Enable Dual Zones 1 - 156, 7 - 19
DRO 1 - 164 Enable Dual Zones parameter 1 - 58
drop-down lists 1 - 78 Enable FTP Server 7 - 19
Dry Run softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 160 ENABLE FTP SERVER field
Dual Laser Probe Present 7 - 18 FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8
Dual Tool Probe Present parameter 1 - 57 Enable Lead In Error Checking 7 - 19
Dual-Zone Machining 1 - 155 Enable Lead Out Error Checking 7 - 19
dwell Enable Linear Thermal Compensation 7 -
bottom of hole, P code (canned cycle) 20
3 - 148 Enable Optional Numbering softkey 3 - 15
mode, G04 3 - 50 Enable Pecking Retract Clearance 7 - 20
P code 3 - 149 Enable Program Restore 7 - 20
Dwell Time 7 - 19 Enable Reset at Program Start 7 - 20
DXF Enable Reset at Program Start, NC Settings
Editor 2 - 132 1 - 43
Layers 2 - 138 Enable Retract Z-Axis on Power Loss 7 - 20
DXF Edit Modify Enable Runtime Tool Display 7 - 20
Arc 2 - 138 Enable Tool Life Monitoring 7 - 20
Line 2 - 138 Enable Tool Life Monitoring, Tool Utilities
Point 2 - 138 and Settings 1 - 43
DXF Option 2 - 131 Enable Tool SFQ 7 - 20
Enable Tool SFQ field, Advanced Tool Set-
tings 1 - 108
E Enable User M/G Codes field, NC M and G
Edge (X, Y, or Z) field Code Program Numbers 3 - 21
Edge Skew cycle 4 - 58 Enable User S/B/T Codes field, NC M and G
Edge cycle 4 - 42 Code Program Numbers 3 - 21
Edge Skew cycle 4 - 58, 4 - 63 Enable Variable Monitoring 7 - 20
Edit 3D Mold Parameters softkey 2 - 38 Enable Variable Monitoring, NC Settings 1 -
EDIT ALONG CONTOUR softkey 2 - 76 43
Edit Apt Parameters 1 - 109 End Angle 7 - 20
Edit Drawing End Block 7 - 20
DXF 2 - 133, 2 - 136 End Cap 7 - 20
Edit Functions Menu 3 - 12 End Job 7 - 21
Edit Functions softkey 3 - 10 End key 1 - 6
Edit Lockout 1 - 40 end of file, NC 3 - 3
Edit Lockout Level 7 - 19 End Of Program code (M30) 3 - 165
Edit Lockout Level field 1 - 40 end of program, M02 3 - 161
EDIT MATERIAL softkey, Tool and Material Endpoint Tolerance 7 - 21
Database screen 1 - 117 Endpoint1 X, DXF 2 - 138
Edit Mode 7 - 19 Endpoint1 Y, DXF 2 - 138
EDIT PROFILE CONTOUR softkey 2 - 75 Endpoint2 X, DXF 2 - 138
EDIT TOOL softkey, Tool and Material Data- Endpoint2 Y, DXF 2 - 138
base screen 1 - 117 Enter Access Code softkey 1 - 130
EIR Relay State field 1 - 129 Enter key 1 - 6

Enter Text To Search softkey 3 - 11 Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11
entering the access code 1 - 130 Fast Start Feed 7 - 21
Entry Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 93 Feed 7 - 21
Erase Functions 1 - 84 feed
Input screen 1 - 84 functions, dwell mode 3 - 50
ERASE PART SETUP softkey 1 - 84 functions, F words 3 - 139
ERASE PROGRAM softkey 1 - 84 per minute feedrate, G94 3 - 139
ERASE TOOL SETUP softkey 1 - 84 Feed & Speed Optimization softkey, Auto
Error History 1 - 52 Mode 1 - 159
Error Messages 7 - 67 Feed and Speed 1 - 106, 1 - 107
Error messages Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 106
#3000 3 - 190 Calculations 1 - 107
Error.wrc 7 - 67 Feed Hold button, Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15
Estimated Run Time Parameters 1 - 73 Feed Hold console button 1 - 17
Ethernet Feedrate
definition 6 - 2 part probing 4 - 39
European machines 1 - 2 feedrate 3 - 3, 3 - 8
Exchange Arm 7 - 21 change programmed 3 - 44
Exchange Arm Jog Reverse F4, ATC and F code 3 - 148, 3 - 149
machine diagnostics 1 - 147 inverse time G93 3 - 139
Exchange Arm Rotate F5, ATC and machine Field Name Glossary 7 - 1
diagnostics 1 - 147 fields
Exit/Cancel Part Setup, rotary-axis program,
DXF 2 - 133 WinMax Mill 1 - 90
Expand and Collapse Files 1 - 78 File 7 - 21
Explode PCurve softkey, DXF 2 - 137 HD3 Serial Number Lettering Text tab
Export 1 - 123 2 - 66
EXPORT AUTO AND MANUAL TOOLS soft- File Transfer Protocol 6 - 8
key, Import and Export 1 - 123 File transfer protocol
Export Log 1 - 54 definition 6 - 2
Export Manual Tools List softkey, Import Find & Replace softkey 3 - 13
and Export 1 - 123 Finish Feed (%) 7 - 22
Export Tool and Material Database softkey, Finish Plunge Helix Radius 7 - 22
Import and Export 1 - 123 Finish Plunge Ramp Slope 7 - 22
Exported NC Decimal Places 7 - 21 Finish Plunge Type 7 - 22
Exported NC Decimal Places field, NC Set- Finish SFQ field 1 - 126
tings 1 - 42 Finish Speed (%) 7 - 23
Expression First Move (Z Retract) 7 - 24
keywords 3 - 195 First Peck Offset 7 - 24
spacing 3 - 196 Fit to View softkey
symbols 3 - 193 DXF 2 - 135
Extend softkey, DXF 2 - 136 graphics screen 1 - 133
Flashlight 1 - 15, 1 - 16
Flat End Mill 2 - 41
F on a Contour 2 - 41
F / Feed 7 - 21 Font 7 - 24
F code 3 - 3, 3 - 8 Font Side of Contour 7 - 24
feedrate 3 - 148 Fonts, True-Type 2 - 56, 2 - 62
F words, feedrate 3 - 139 formula
F(%) 7 - 21 Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 68
Face Milling 2 - 31 Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 68
Fast Feed 7 - 21 formula, speed and feed for tap 3 - 120
Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11 Frame Data Block 2 - 29
Fast Feed, Tool Setup Frame Radius 7 - 24
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool FTP

definition 6 - 2 G140 Motoman Robot Control 3 - 145
FTP Host 6 - 11 G16 polar coordinates 3 - 61
FTP Host List screen 6 - 10 G17 XY plane selection 3 - 62
FTP Host Properties 6 - 10 G18 XZ plane selection 3 - 64
FTP Host Properties screen 6 - 10 G19 YZ plane selection 3 - 66
FTP Manager 1 - 30, 1 - 35 G20 ISNC inch 3 - 67
FTP MANAGER F8 softkey G21 ISNC metric 3 - 67
Project Manager screen 6 - 10 G28 automatic return to reference point 3 -
FTP Manager softkey 67
Disk Operations 1 - 35 G29 automatic return from reference point
FTP Server Port 7 - 24 3 - 67
FTP SERVER PORT field G31 skip (probing) function 3 - 70
FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8 G40 cutter compensation off 3 - 76
FTP Server Settings 1 - 44, 6 - 8 G41 cutter compensation left 3 - 77
Full Precision Editing 1 - 77 G41.2 3D tool geometry compensation 3 -
77, 3 - 174
G42 cutter compensation right 3 - 78
G G43 positive tool length compensation 3 -
G code 3 - 3, 3 - 24, 3 - 27 80
alarm 010 3 - 30 G43.4 5-axis linear interpolation 3 - 83
cancel canned cycle 3 - 30 G44 negative tool length compensation 3 -
functions 3 - 31, 3 - 36 80
groups 3 - 31, 3 - 36 G45 tool radius offset increase 3 - 84
modal 3 - 31 G46 tool radius offset decrease 3 - 84
NC/Conversational Merge 2 - 129 G47 tool radius offset double increase 3 -
same block 3 - 30 84
same group 3 - 30 G48 tool radius offset double decrease 3 -
table 3 - 31 84
G Code Group 3 - 24 G49 cancels tool length offset 3 - 80
G00 Rapid Traverse 3 - 40 G50 scaling, cancel 3 - 87
G01 Linear Interpolation 3 - 42 G50.1 mirroring cancel 3 - 90
G02 CW circular and helical interpolation G51 scaling 3 - 87
3 - 44 G51.1 mirroring 3 - 90
G02.4 and G03.4 3D circular interpolation G52 local coordinate system setting 3 - 93
3 - 49 G53 machine coordinates 3 - 96
G03 CCW circular and helical interpolation G54.1, Aux Work Coordinate Systems 3 -
3 - 44 100
G04 dwell mode 3 - 50 G54-59 multiple work coordinate systems
G05.1 surface finish 3 - 51 3 - 98
G05.2 data smoothing 3 - 51 G61 precision cornering on 3 - 100
G05.3 Surface Finish Quality 1 - 108 G64 precision cornering off 3 - 100
G05.3, Surface Finish Quality 3 - 51 G65 Macro Command, Subprogram Call 3 -
G07.2, Cylindrical Rotary Wrap On 3 - 52 186, 3 - 206, 3 - 207, 3 - 208, 3 -
G07.3, Cylindrical Rotary Wrap Off 3 - 53 210, 3 - 216, 3 - 221
G08.1, Automatic Safe Repositioning Com- G66 Modal Subprogram Call 3 - 186, 3 -
mand Buffer On 3 - 54 207, 3 - 208, 3 - 215, 3 - 216, 3 -
G08.2, Automatic Safe Repositioning Com- 221
mand Buffer Off 3 - 56 G67 Modal Subprogram Call Cancel 3 - 216
G09 precision cornering 3 - 58 G68 rotation 3 - 102
G10 setting tool offsets 3 - 60 G68.2 global rotation NC transform plane
with L3 3 - 61 3 - 104
with P, R 3 - 60 G68.3 local rotation NC transform plane 3 -
with T, H, D 3 - 60 104
G10 setting work coordinate systems with G69 coordinate system rotation cancel 3 -
L2 3 - 59 105

G69 rotation cancel 3 - 102 Graphics Settings 1 - 131
G70 BNC units of measure, inch 3 - 106 for Stock Geomety 1 - 95
G70, Unit of Measure, Inch 3 - 106 softkey 1 - 131
G71 BNC units of measure, metric 3 - 106 softkey, graphics screen 1 - 133
G71, Units of Measure, MM 3 - 106 Gun Drill 2 - 90
G73 peck drilling 3 - 107
G74 BNC single-quadrant circular interpola-
tion 3 - 110 H
G74 ISNC left-handed tapping, 3 - 109 H codes 3 - 211
G75 BNC multi-quadrant circular interpola- H00 3 - 81
tion 3 - 110 hardware options 1 - 2
G76, bore orient 3 - 111 HD3 Lettering 2 - 69
G80, cancel canned cycle 3 - 113 HD3 Save Program Type 7 - 24
G81 drill, spot boring 3 - 113 HDS Serial Number Stick Lettering 2 - 65
G82 drill with dwell, counter boring 3 - 115 Height 7 - 25
G83 drill, deep hole 3 - 116 helical and circular interpolation, CW G02,
G84 tapping 3 - 120 CCW G03 3 - 44
G84.2 ISNC rigid tapping, right-handed 3 - Helical Plunge (Inside/Outside) for Mill
130 Frames, Mill Circles and Ellipses 2 -
G84.3 ISNC rigid tapping, left-handed 3 - 45
130 Helical Plunge in the Center of a Pocket 2 -
G85 boring 3 - 123 46
G86 ISNC bore rapid out 3 - 125 Helical Plunge Milling Parameter Fields 2 -
G87 BNC chip breaker 3 - 127 45
G87 ISNC back boring 3 - 128 Helical Plunge of Mill Frame Inside with No
G88 BNC rigid tapping 3 - 130 Pecking and Blend Offset 2 - 46
G88 ISNC bore Helical Plunge Option 2 - 44
manual feed out and dwell 3 - 131 Helical Plunge Using Operator Specify Pock-
G89 bore with dwell 3 - 133 et Start 2 - 143
G90 absolute machining mode 3 - 135 Helical Plunge with 3-D Part Programming
G91 incremental machining mode 3 - 135 Option 2 - 50
G92 part zero setting 3 - 137 Helical Plunge with Lines and Arcs 2 - 50
G93 inverse time feedrare 3 - 139 Helical Plunge with Operator Specified Lo-
G94 feed per minute feedrate 3 - 139 cation 2 - 46
G94.1, Rotary Tangential Velocity Control Helical Plunge with Outward Pocketing 2 -
3 - 140 46
G98 return to initial point in canned cycles Helical Plunge with UltiPocket 2 - 45, 2 -
3 - 142 143
G99 return to R level in cycles 3 - 144 Helical Plunging of Mill Frame Inside with
Gauge Device setup, with Absolute Tool Pecking and Straight Plunge Finish
Length Mode 1 - 97 Pass and Blend Offset 2 - 48
Gear pattern program 3 - 238 Helix Data Block 2 - 23
General 1 Parameters 1 - 118 Help
General 2 Parameters 1 - 118 On-screen Help 1 - 82
Geometry, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 104 Help key 1 - 6
global rotation NC transform plane, G68.2 Hexagon Data Block 2 - 72
3 - 104 HMX 1 - 55, 5 - 34
Global variables 3 - 185 HMX pallet change 1 - 151
NC 3 - 22 HMX630 tool magazine 1 - 146
glossary 6 - 2 Hole Diameter 7 - 25
GOTO statements 3 - 201 Hole or Circle Pocke tcycle
Graphics 1 - 131 probing part setup fields 4 - 45
Graphics Chord Error 7 - 24 HOLE OR CIRCLE POCKET (F2) softkey 4 -
Graphics On/Off 2 - 119 59
Graphics Optimization 7 - 24 Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 44

skew probing cycle 4 - 59 key 1 - 6
Hole or Circle Pocket Skew Probing cycle 4 - Input Mode 1 - 84
59 Insert Arc field, Milling Parameters 7 - 14
Holes Block 2 - 87 Insert Block 2 - 123
Holes End Block 2 - 105 Insert Block / Sub Block Before softkey 1 -
Holes Locations 2 - 103 127
Holes Parameters 1 - 118 Insert Block Before softkey 3 - 9
Holes softkey Insert key 1 - 6
DXF 2 - 133 Insert Line field, Milling Parameters 7 - 14
Part Programming 2 - 2 Insert Location Before softkey 2 - 103
Holes to Pattern Locations Conversion 2 - Insert mode 3 - 7
105 Insert Pockets Option 2 - 70
Home console key 3 - 5 Insert Segment Before softkey 2 - 25
Home key 1 - 6 INSERT TOOL F3 softkey, Tool Library
Host screen 1 - 116
definition 6 - 2 Insert/Overstrike Mode Toggle softkey 3 -
HTX 1 - 55, 5 - 34 12
HTX500 tool magazine 1 - 146 Inspection Cycle 7 - 25
Hydraulic Status 7 - 25 inspection, part 4 - 67
Integrator Configuration Parameters, N95
codes 1 - 69
I Integrator M-code, Intelligent ASR Triggers
I code, X axis incremental distance for 7 - 25
canned cycle 3 - 148 INTEGRATOR SUPPORT SERIVICES F4 soft-
icons 2 - ii key, Utilities screen 1 - 47
IF statements 3 - 201 Integrator Support Services 1 - 50
Import / Export Functions 1 - 121 Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25
Import and Export 1 - 123 Intelligent Automatic Safe Repositioning
Import Functions 7 - 25
Input screen 1 - 84 interpolation modes
Import Into Manual Tool List softkey, Im- linear interpolation 3 - 42
port and Export 1 - 123 rapid traverse 3 - 40
Import Manual Tools, Import and Export 1 - Interrupt console key 1 - 18
123 Interrupt Cycle Z Retract 7 - 25
Import softkey 1 - 29 Intersect softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134
Importing NC States into Conversational inverse time feedrate, G93 3 - 139
Programs 1 - 122 Inward Pocket Type 2 - 140
Include Offset Z in Tool Zero Cal 7 - 25 IP (Internet Protocol) definition 6 - 9
Increased Radius 2 - 35 IP address
Increment 7 - 25 definition 6 - 3
incremental Island, Pocket 2 - 141
distance, X axis (canned cycle) 3 - 148 ISNC dialect 3 - 2
distance, Y axis (canned cycle) 3 - 148 ISNC, in NC/Conversationl Merge 2 - 129
machining mode, G91 3 - 135 IV Angle 7 - 26
peck depth, Q code (canned cycle) 3 -
148
Index Pulses 7 - 25 J
indexer port 1 - 22 J code, Y axis incremental distance for
indexer, pulse one increment, M20 3 - 165 canned cycle 3 - 148
Indirect variables 3 - 197 Job Lists 1 - 31
Individual Profiles 7 - 25 jog
infinite solution examples, 3D tool geome- parameters 1 - 10
try compensation 3 - 175 Jog Along Tool Axis 7 - 26
Inner Diameter, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 47 Jog Feed Override 1 - 16
Input jog unit 1 - 9

Join softkey, DXF 2 - 136 laser tool probe parameters 4 - 19
Joined Lines and Arcs 2 - 137 Last Used Serial Number 7 - 26
Jump 3 - 10 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 11
Jump & Search Functions softkey 3 - 15 Lead Angle 2 - 15, 2 - 16, 7 - 26
Jump and Search Functions Menu 3 - 10 Lead In/Out Moves 2 - 15
Jump and Search Functions softkey 3 - 10 Lead Length 2 - 16, 7 - 27
jump drive 1 - 22 Leading Symbol 7 - 26
Jump M99 3 - 170, 3 - 203, 3 - 205, 3 - Least Dwell Units 7 - 27
217 Program Parameters screen 3 - 50
Jump to Beginning softkey 3 - 11 Least Scaling Factor 7 - 27
Jump to Block Number softkey 3 - 10 left-handed tapping cycle 3 - 146
Jump To End softkey 3 - 11 left-handed tapping, G74 ISNC 3 - 109
Jump to End softkey 3 - 10 Length 7 - 27
Jump To Next Syntax Error softkey 3 - 11 Length (X) 7 - 27
Jump to Next Tagged Block softkey 3 - 14 Length (Y) 7 - 27
Jump To Previous Syntax Error softkey 3 - Length of Cut 7 - 27
11 Length Offset X 7 - 27
Jump to Previous Tagged Block softkey 3 - Length Offset Y 7 - 27
14 Length Tolerance 7 - 27
Jump to Sequence Number softkey 3 - 10 Length, DXF 2 - 138
Lettering
HD3 2 - 69
K True-Type 2 - 69
K code, repeat operations for canned cycle Limited Manual Operations field 1 - 129
3 - 148 Line 1-10 7 - 27
Keep Original 7 - 26 linear interpolation, G01 3 - 42
keyboard 1 - 5, 1 - 76, 1 - 80 Linear Thermal Compensation 1 - 159, 1 -
close 1 - 81 161
icon 1 - 81 Linearization Override 7 - 27
optional 1 - 7 Lines and Arcs 2 - 19
window 1 - 81 List Icon Size 7 - 27
keyboard shortcuts 1 - 6 Load Session 1 - 132
Keywords 3 - 193 Load softkey 1 - 29
Disk Operations 1 - 35
loading
L tool in the spindle 1 - 23
L code 3 - 153 tools in ATC magazine 1 - 24, 1 - 141
repeat operations for canned cycle 3 - local coordinate system setting, G52 3 - 93
148 local rotation NC transform plane, G68.3 3 -
Ladder File Configuration softkey 1 - 38 104
LAN Requirements 6 - 2 Local variables 3 - 185
Language File Configuration softkey 1 - 38 NC 3 - 22
Language Quick Toggle 1 - 46 Location 7 - 27
Language Selection 1 - 46 Location field 1 - 100
Large files 3 - 183 Locations 2 - 103
large tools in the ATC magazine 1 - 25, 1 - Log Files 1 - 47, 1 - 51
142 Loop Angular 2 - 111
laser calibration tool 4 - 19 Loop Linear 2 - 110
Laser Calibration Tool Probe cycle 4 - 21 Loop Rectangular block 2 - 109
laser input update, M40 3 - 166 Loop Rotate 2 - 112
Laser Probe 4 - 18, 4 - 19 Lube Cycle 2 - 122
laser probe 4 - 6, 4 - 12
LASER PROBE (F3) softkey, Tool Setup
screen 4 - 19 M
laser tool calibration 4 - 19 M Code 7 - 30

M code 3 - 155 M44, probe, reduce barrier airflow 3 - 167
M00 program stop 3 - 160 M45 probe, open shutter control 3 - 167
M01 planned stop, pause program 3 - 160, M46 probe, close shutter control 3 - 167
3 - 161 M47 probe laser emitter on 3 - 167
M02 3 - 203 M48 probe laser emitter off 3 - 167
end of program 3 - 161 M49 probe laser receiver on 3 - 167
M03 spindle, start clockwise 3 - 162 M50 probe laser receiver off 3 - 167
M04 spindle, start counterclockwise 3 - 162 M51, Cycle Pallet Changer 3 - 167
M05 spindle off 3 - 162 M52 through M55, enable auxiliary output
M06 change tool 3 - 162 3 - 167
M07 secondary coolant on 3 - 163 M56 rotate pallet changer, nonconfirmation
M08 primary coolant on 3 - 163 3 - 168
M09 coolant off, both systems 3 - 163 M57 rotate pallet changer to pallet 1 3 -
M10 coolant on, both systems 3 - 163 168
M12 C axis clamp 3 - 164 M58 rotate pallet changer to pallet 2 3 -
M126 shortest rotary angle path traverse 168
3 - 171 M59 Chip Conveyor Forward 3 - 168
M126, Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse M6 for tool change 3 - 162
3 - 171 M6 Initiates Tool Change 7 - 28
M127 shortest rotary angle path traverse M60 Chip Conveyor Reverse 3 - 168
cancel 3 - 171 M61 Chip Conveyor Stop 3 - 168
M127,Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse M62 through M65, disable auxiliary output
3 - 171 3 - 168, 3 - 178
M128 tool center point management 3 - M68 washdown coolant system enable 3 -
172 168
M128, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25 M69 washdown coolant system disable 3 -
M128, Tool Center Point Management 3 - 168
172 M80 right handed C axis 3 - 169
M129 tool center point management cancel M81 left handed C axis 3 - 169
3 - 172 M90 Z Axis Retract Enable 3 - 169
M129, Tool Center Point Management 3 - M91 Z Axis Retract Disable 3 - 169
172 M98 Subprogram Call 3 - 169, 3 - 186, 3 -
M13 C axis unclamp 3 - 164 208, 3 - 217, 3 - 221
M140 Tool Vector Retract 3 - 177 M99 Jump, Return from Program 3 - 170,
M140, Tool Vector Retract 3 - 177 3 - 203, 3 - 205, 3 - 217
M19 spindle, oriented stop 3 - 164 Machine 7 - 28
M20 indexer pulse one increment 3 - 165 machine
M200 tool axis preference 3 - 179 Auto mode key 1 - 18
M200, Set Tilt Axis Preference 3 - 179 components 1 - 2
M25 BNC Z axis, home position 3 - 165 control 1 - 8
M26 part probe, select signal 3 - 165 control buttons 1 - 17
M27 tool probe, select signal 3 - 165 major components 1 - 2
M29 ISNC rigid tapping enable 3 - 165 mode console keys 1 - 18
M30 Progam End 3 - 203 Single mode console key 1 - 18
M30 Program End 3 - 165 Test mode console key 1 - 18
M31 rotary encoder reset 3 - 165 Machine (Quad-size DRO) softkey 1 - 164
M32 clamp A axis 3 - 166 Machine / Part (Standard DRO) softkey 1 -
M33 unclamp A axis 3 - 166 164
M34 clamp B axis 3 - 166 Machine and Console Basics 1 - 1
M35 unclamp B axis 3 - 166 Machine Class 7 - 28
M36 servo off 3 - 166 Machine Class field 1 - 39
M40 laser input update 3 - 166 Machine Components 1 - 2
M41 single-touch probing 3 - 167 Machine Coordinate Relative 7 - 28
M42 double-touch probing 3 - 167 machine coordinate system, part setup 1 -
M43, probe, increasebarrier airflow 3 - 167 86

machine coordinates, G53 3 - 96 186, 3 - 206, 3 - 207, 3 - 208, 3 -
Machine Function 2 - 122 210, 3 - 216, 3 - 221
MACHINE FUNCTION softkey 1 - 152 Macro Mode 3 - 184
Machine Hour Meter 7 - 28 Subprogram Variables 3 - 23
Machine Operations 1 - 18 Macro Mode A
Machine Parameters local variables 3 - 185
Alt Dwell Lt Side 1 - 66 Subprogram Variables 3 - 23
Alt Washdown Dwell 1 - 66 Macro Mode A G Code Group Status 3 - 24
Alt Washdown Off Time 1 - 67 Magazine 7 - 28
ATC Disable 1 - 60 Magazine Lock 7 - 28
Auto Balance Enable 1 - 57 Magazine Pin Lock / Unlock F2, ATC and
Aux Output Confirmation Enable 1 - 72 machine diagnostics 1 - 147
Axis Feedrate Override Min (%) 1 - 71 Magazine Position 7 - 28
Cal to LS Velocity 1 - 60 Magazine Reference 7 - 28
CAL to LS Velocity A 1 - 59 Magazine Status 7 - 28
CAL to LS Velocity X 1 - 59 Maintain Finishing Sequence field
Chip Removal Off Delay Time 1 - 58 Tool Change Optimization 2 - 125
Chip Removal On Delay Time 1 - 58 Maintain Operation Level 1 Order 7 - 28
Chip Removal On/Off Delay Enable 1 - Maintain Operation Level 2 Order 7 - 28
58 Maintain Roughing Sequence field
Control Power Off Time 1 - 57 Tool Change Optimization 2 - 125
Coolant Delay Time 1 - 63 Manual Border Sizing 7 - 28
Disable Auto On Chip Removal 1 - 57 Manual console key 1 - 18
Disable Aux Out During Interrupt 1 - 72 Manual Function Setup 1 - 138
Disable Tool Picker Option 1 - 60 softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 138
Dual Tool Probe Present 1 - 57 manual jog
Enable Dual Zones 1 - 58 feed keys 1 - 16
Machine Pause Time for Coolant 1 - 64 feed parameter 1 - 10
Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC hand wheel 1 - 16
1 - 61 hand wheel multiplier keys 1 - 16
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable Manual Jog Feed 7 - 29
1 - 65 Manual Mode 1 - 128
Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) 1 - 71 LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15
Tilt Axis Safety Position 1 - 61 Tool Library 1 - 115
Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 70 Manual Rapid Feed 7 - 29
Warm-up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 71 Manual Rapid Move 1 - 139
Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 70 softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 139
Warm-up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 71 Manual Spindle Speed 7 - 29
Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 70 Manual Spindle Speed parameter 1 - 10
Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 71 Manual Stock Sizing 7 - 29
Warm-Up Speed Steps 1 - 70 Manual tab, Tool Library 1 - 116
Warm-up Speed Steps 1 - 71 Mapping 7 - 29
Warm-Up Starting Speed 1 - 70 Mark Tool Defective, Tool Utilities and Set-
Warm-up Starting Speed 1 - 71 tings 1 - 43, 7 - 30
Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 63, 1 - Match Tools softkey
68 Tool Review screen 1 - 113
Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 67 Unmatched Tools Review 1 - 113
X-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59 Matching tools 1 - 113
Y-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59 Material 7 - 29
Machine Pause Time for Coolant Material Database 1 - 117
machine parameters 1 - 64 Math Assist Style 7 - 29
Machine Specifications softkey Math expressions 3 - 193
Utilities screen 1 - 38 Max Depth 7 - 29
machining center configuration 5 - 3 Max Spread 7 - 30
Macro Command, Subprogram Call G65 3 - Max Tool Cutting Time Exceeded 7 - 30

Maximum Contouring Rate 7 - 29 Minimum Z 7 - 31
Maximum Diameter Difference 7 - 30 Minus/Plus A/B/C Direction Travel Limit
Maximum Idle Time (Mins) 7 - 30 field 7 - 31
MAXIMUM IDLE TIME (MINS) field Minus/Plus X/Y/Z Direction Travel Limit 7 -
FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8 32
Maximum Offset 2 - 13, 7 - 30 Mirror Image 2 - 115
Maximum Rapid Traverse Rate 7 - 30 mirroring
Maximum Spindle Motor Speed 7 - 30 cancel G50.1 3 - 90
Maximum Spindle Tool Speed 7 - 30 G51.1 3 - 90
M-Code field, NC M and G Code Program miscellaneous functions, M codes 3 - 155
Numbers 3 - 21 Miscellaneous softkey, Part Programming
Measurement Feed 7 - 30 2-3
Mill 2 - 84 Modal Subprogram Call Cancel G67 3 - 216
Mill Circle 2 - 142 Modal Subprogram Call G66 3 - 186, 3 -
Mill Contour 2 - 19 207, 3 - 208, 3 - 215, 3 - 216, 3 -
Mill Contours 2 - 141 221
Mill Ellipse 2 - 33 Modal subprograms 3 - 214
Mill Face 2 - 31 Mode 1 - 15
Mill Feed field 7 - 31 Mode Selector buttons, LCD Remote Jog
Mill Frame 2 - 142 Unit 1 - 15
Mill Frame data block 2 - 29 Modify Dimensions 1 - 124
Mill Hexagon Data Block 2 - 72 softkey 1 - 124
Mill Plunge Helix Radius 7 - 30 Modify softkey, DXF 2 - 136
Mill Plunge Ramp Slope 7 - 30 Monitor Motion, probe part setup 4 - 34
Mill Plunge Type 7 - 30 Monitored Variable Number 7 - 32
Mill Polygon 2 - 84 Monitored Variable Number, NC Settings
Mill Slot 2 - 79 1 - 43
Mill Thread data block 2 - 51 Motion Configuration softkey 1 - 38
Mill Triangle Data Block 2 - 71 Motion Hold button 1 - 17
Mill True-Type Lettering 2 - 69 Motion System 1 - 174
Milling motion, axis 3 - 8
3-D arc Motoman Robot Control (G140) 3 - 145
calculate centerline 2 - 24 Move Blocks softkey 1 - 124
guidelines 2 - 25 move commands, scaling 3 - 87
data blocks 2 - 18 move program blocks 1 - 124
Milling 1 Parameters 1 - 118 Move to Safe Pos During TC 7 - 32
Milling 2 Parameters 1 - 118 Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC 7 -
Milling Direction 7 - 30 32
Milling softkey Move to Safety Pos Manual Mode ATC, ma-
DXF 2 - 133 chine parameters 1 - 61
Part Programming 2 - 3 Move Tool To Spindle softkey, Tool Library
Milling Type 2 - 15, 7 - 30 screen 1 - 115, 1 - 116
Milling Type field 2 - 9 Move Z-Axis to Zero, ATC and machine di-
Mill triangle data block 2 - 71 agnostics 1 - 147
Min Cusp Overlap 7 - 31 moving
Min Length Delta, Tool Setup the cursor 3 - 5
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Multi Tool Probing
Length mode 4 - 4 Tool Probing 4 - 7, 4 - 13
Min Z 7 - 32 Multi Tool Probing, Tool Setup
Min Z Position Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11 Length mode 4 - 3
Min Z Position,Tool Setup Multi Tool Probing,Tool Setup
Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration
mode 4 - 9 mode 4 - 9
Minimum Length 7 - 31 Multiple Block Functions softkey, Program

Review screen 1 - 127 31, 5 - 35, 5 - 39
multiple parts 3 - 98 network 1 - 20
Multi-Tool Probing 7 - 32 network ports 1 - 22
networking terms 6 - 2
New Feed 7 - 32
N New Finish Tool 7 - 32
N words 3 - 2 new NC program 3 - 8
N95 Codes (Integrator Configuration Pa- New Plunge Feed 7 - 32
rameters) 1 - 69 New softkey, Program Manager 1 - 28
Name 7 - 32 New Speed (RPM) 7 - 32
navigation 3 - 5 New Tool 7 - 32
NC Configuration screen 3 - 80 New Tool Number 7 - 33
NC Dialect 7 - 32 Next Serial Number 7 - 33
NC dialect 1 - 30 Next Tool 7 - 33
NC Display Type 7 - 32 Next Tool Change softkey, graphics screen
NC Editor 3 - 6 1 - 132
NC Editor Settings Menu 3 - 18 Notes 7 - 33
NC Editor Settings softkey 3 - 18 Notes, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 109
NC Merge End, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - Number 7 - 33
25 Number of Axes Present 7 - 33
NC Merge, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25 Number of Holes 7 - 33
NC Monitor softkey Number Of Sides 7 - 33
Auto Mode 1 - 163 numeric keypad 1 - 7
NC/Conversational Merge 1 - 162
NC Optional Program Stop 7 - 32
NC Parameters 3 - 20 O
NC Parameters, Program Parameters 1 - off
120 servo M36 3 - 166
NC part program spindle, M05 3 - 162
address characters 3 - 3 Offset
Block 3 - 4 maximum 2 - 13
sequence number 3 - 2 Offset 1 7 - 33
special characters 3 - 3 Offset X 7 - 33
start 3 - 2 Offset Y 7 - 33
starting new 3 - 8 Offset Z 7 - 33
Words 3 - 4 Offset Z field 1 - 88, 1 - 99
NC Part Programming 3 - 1 On-screen Help 1 - 82
Principles 3 - 2 Open softkey 1 - 28
NC Probing Part Setup 3 - 25 operating the APC 1 - 152
NC Program Call softkey, Part Programming Operation 7 - 33
2-3 Operator Specify Pocket Start 2 - 143, 7 -
NC Program softkey, Program Manager 1 - 33
28 Opt Stop On (Off) 7 - 34
NC Programming Rules 3 - 8 optional keyboard 1 - 7
NC Settings softkey, Utilities screen 1 - 42 Optional Stop On/Off softkey, Auto Mode
NC SFQ, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 108 1 - 163
NC States 1 - 121 options
NC Variables 1 - 122, 3 - 22 hardware and software 1 - 2
NC Work Offsets 1 - 93 Orient Method 7 - 34
NC/Conversational Merge 2 - 129 Orient Method field, Transform Plane 5 - 8
Neck Diameter 7 - 32 Orient Method field, Transform Plane Group
nested Pattern Loop data blocks, rotary- Locations 5 - 12
axis program 5 - 27 Orient Spindle softkey, Manual Mode 1 -
nested Pattern Loop data blocks, rotary- 138
axis program, WinMax Mill 5 - 21, 5 - Orientation Angle 7 - 34

orientation hole 1 - 23 PART INSPECTION (F5) softkey, New Block
orientation key 1 - 23 screen 4 - 68
Origin Point 7 - 34 Part Inspection cycles 4 - 67
Out Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 95 Part Inspection files 1 - 50
Outer Diameter, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 46 Part Inspection Probe.txt, sample file 4 -
Outward Pocket Type 2 - 140 69
Overlap 7 - 34 Part Kinematics Z Reference 1 - 97, 7 - 36
Overload Status 7 - 34 part probe
override calibration 4 - 34
knobs 1 - 8 cycles, accessing 4 - 42
Override Lockout 7 - 34 deflection 4 - 39
Override Machine Configuration 7 - 34 deflection offset calibration 4 - 34
Overwrite Existing Zero Calibration 7 - 35 reference block 4 - 36
ring gauge 4 - 35
Part Probe Cycle 7 - 36
P part probe cycles
P code, dwell at bottom of hole for canned selecting type 4 - 38
cycle 3 - 148 PART PROBE DEFLECTION OFFSETS (F7)
Page Down key 1 - 6 softkey, Part Setup screen 4 - 34, 4 -
Page Up key 1 - 6 35, 4 - 36
Pallet 7 - 35 part probe parameters
pallet changer 1 - 151 accessing 4 - 32
Pallet in Machine 7 - 35 Part Setup screen Probing menu 4 - 39
Pallet Pin 7 - 35 PART PROBE PARAMETERS softkey, Part
Pallet Reference Position 7 - 35 Setup screen Probing menu 4 - 32
pallet rotation Part Probe Probe Deflection Offset screen
M56 nonconfirmation 3 - 168 4 - 34
to pallet 1, M57 3 - 168 part probe, select signal, M26 3 - 165
to pallet 2, M58 3 - 168 part probe, tool setup 7 - 12
Pallet Status in Machine 7 - 35 part probing 4 - 38
Pan softkey automated method 4 - 64
DXF 2 - 136 manual mode part setup cycles 4 - 42
graphics screen 1 - 133 manual mode part skew cycles 4 - 57
Parameter Change 2 - 7 parameters 4 - 32
parameters 3 - 23 X/Y Skew 4 - 57
jog unit 1 - 10 part probing automatic cycles
laser tool probe 4 - 19 fields 4 - 65
manual jog feed 1 - 10 Part Zero 4 - 65
manual spindle speed 1 - 10 part probing cycles
part probing 4 - 32 Cylinder 4 - 47
probing option 4 - 39 Cylinder Skew 4 - 60
retract clearance 2 - 119 Edge 4 - 42
touch tool probe 4 - 18 Edge Skew 4 - 58
Parity 7 - 35 Hole or Circle Pocket 4 - 44
Park Machine 1 - 166 Hole or Circle Pocket Skew 4 - 59
softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 138 Part Setup fields 4 - 43
Part 7 - 35 Part Zero storage 4 - 55
Part Count 7 - 35 Plane Intersection 4 - 53
Part Fixturing and Tool Loading 1 - 93 Rectangular Pocket 4 - 49
Part Inspection Rectangular Pocket Skew 4 - 61
cycles 4 - 67 Rectangular Solid 4 - 51
fields 4 - 68 Rectangular Solid Skew 4 - 62
files 4 - 69 Part Probing softkey, Part Setup screen 4 -
programming 4 - 68 32, 4 - 38
Part inspection 4 - 67 part program

address characters 3 - 3 Part X Offset 7 - 36
axis motion 3 - 8 Part Y Offset 7 - 36
components 3 - 2 Part Zero A 7 - 36
deleting 3 - 5 Part Zero B 7 - 36
feedrates 3 - 8 Part Zero C 7 - 36
printing 1 - 47 Part Zero Cycle 7 - 36
sequence number 3 - 2 Part Zero cycle fields 4 - 65
Part Program Name 7 - 36 Part Zero IV 7 - 36
Part Program Path 7 - 36 PART ZERO PROBE CYCLES (F2) softkey,
Part Program Printing softkey 1 - 47 Part Setup screen Part Probe func-
Part Program Tool Review 1 - 110 tions 4 - 38
softkey 1 - 102, 1 - 127 PART ZERO PROBE CYCLES softkey, Part
Part Program Tool Review Softkeys 1 - 112 Setup screen Part Probe functions 4 -
Part Programming 2 - 1, 2 - 2 42
Input screen 1 - 84 Part Zero storage 4 - 55
softkey 1 - 100, 1 - 127, 2 - 2 Part Zero storage, at end of probing cycles
softkey, Tool Review screen 1 - 112 4 - 55
Part Quality Verification 4 - 67 Part Zero V 7 - 36
Part Relative (QUAD-SIZE DRO) softkey 1 - Part Zero X 7 - 36
164 Part Zero X field 4 - 55
Part Setup 1 - 85, 1 - 127, 4 - 38 Part Zero Y 7 - 36
fields 1 - 88 Part Zero Y field 4 - 55
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15 Part Zero Z 7 - 36
manual probing cycles 4 - 42 Part Zero Z field 2 - 122
Orient Spindle 1 - 89 Part Zero Z Shift 7 - 36
Part Probing 1 - 88 Part Zero Z Shift field 1 - 88
Part Programming 1 - 88 part zero, setting, G92 3 - 137
probing option 7 - 39 Password 7 - 36
Program Parameters 1 - 88 Paste Into Directory softkey
softkey 1 - 100 Disk Operations 1 - 34
Stock Geometry 1 - 89 Paste Selection softkey 3 - 13
Store Machine Position 1 - 89 Paste softkey
Tool Setup 1 - 88 Disk Operations 1 - 35
Work Offsets 1 - 88 Program Review screen 1 - 127
working envelope 4 - 39 Path 7 - 36
PART SETUP (F1) softkey, Part Setup Pattern 2 - 142
screen 4 - 38 Pattern End 2 - 115
Part Setup cycles, manual method 4 - 42 Pattern Locations 2 - 113
Part Setup probing cycles 4 - 40 Pattern Locations softkey 2 - 134
Part Setup probing cycles, processes for Pattern Loop Angular 2 - 111
each type 4 - 40 Pattern Loop data blocks, nesting, rotary-
Part Setup screen 4 - 38 axis program, WinMax Mill 5 - 21, 5 -
PART SETUP softkey, Part Setup screen 4 - 31, 5 - 35, 5 - 39
32 Pattern Loop Linear 2 - 110
Part Setup softkeys 1 - 88 Pattern Loop Rectangular 2 - 109
Part skew Pattern Scale 2 - 114
automatic probing cycles 4 - 64 Patterns Operations 2 - 107
manual probing cycles 4 - 57 Patterns softkey, Part Programming 2 - 3
Part Skew cycles 4 - 56 pause program, M01 3 - 161
Part Skew cycles, manual method 4 - 57 Peck Clearance Plane 7 - 37
PART SKEW PROBE CYCLES (F3) softkey, Peck Depth 7 - 37
Part Setup screen 4 - 38, 4 - 58 peck drilling cycle 3 - 146
Part Skew Probing cycle 4 - 57 Peck Retract Feed 7 - 37
Part Skew probing cycles, processes for Peck Type 7 - 37
each type 4 - 56 Peck Type field

Bore and Ream Operations 2 - 89 probe
Pecking Retract Clearance 7 - 37 close shutter control, M46 3 - 167
percent character 3 - 2 double-touch M42 3 - 167
Performance Parameters 1 - 118 increase barrier airflow, M43 3 - 167
Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 53 laser emitter off, M48 3 - 167
plane of interpolation, specify 3 - 44 laser emitter on, M47 3 - 167
plane selection laser input update M40 3 - 166
G17 XY 3 - 62 laser receiver off, M50 3 - 167
G18 XZ 3 - 64 laser receiver on, M49 3 - 167
G19 YZ 3 - 66 open shutter control, M45 3 - 167
Plunge Feed 7 - 38 reduce barrier airflow, M44 3 - 167
Plunge Speed 7 - 38 single-touch M41 3 - 167
Plunges 7 - 38 skip function G31 3 - 70
Pocket Boundary 2 - 140 Probe Axis 7 - 39
Pocket Finish SFQ 7 - 39 Probe Calibration
Pocket First 7 - 38 Zero Calibration mode 4 - 27
Pocket Island 2 - 141 with Part Probe 4 - 28
Pocket Overlap 7 - 38 with Reference Tool 4 - 28
Pocket Overlap (%) field, Swept Surface 2 - Probe Cycle Type 7 - 39
79 Probe Cycle Type field, Tool Monitoring
Pocket Plunge Near Center 2 - 143, 7 - 38 screen 4 - 15
Pocket Rough SFQ 7 - 39 Probe Cycle Type, Tool Wear Detection 4 -
Pocket Type 7 - 39 15
polar coordinates, G16 3 - 61 Probe Direction X 7 - 39
Polygon Milling Data Block 2 - 84 Probe Direction Y 7 - 39
pop-up Probe Multiple Tools softkey 4 - 7, 4 - 13
keyboard 1 - 81 PROBE PART SETUP (F6) softkey, New
pop-ups 1 - 79 Block screen 4 - 65
port Probe Part Setup data block 4 - 65
pin descriptions 1 - 21 accessing 4 - 64
USB 1 - 22 execution 4 - 66
Position block 2 - 120 Probe Part Setup fields 4 - 65
Position data block 2 - 118 PROBE PART SETUP softkey, New Block
Position softkey screen 4 - 65
DXF 2 - 134 Probe Tool Monitoring data block 4 - 14
Part Programming 2 - 2 Probe Z 4 - 10, 7 - 40
POSITION TOOL OVER THE PROBE (F5) Probe Z field, Edge cycle 4 - 55
softkey 4 - 9, 4 - 28, 7 - 42 Probe Z,Tool Setup
Power On button 1 - 17 Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration
precision cornering mode 4 - 10
off G64 3 - 100 Probing
on G61 3 - 100 Tool 4 - 1
precision cornering, G09 3 - 58 PROBING (F2) softkey, Tool Setup screen
Present 7 - 39 4 - 23
preset values PROBING (F5) softkey, Part Setup screen
skew angle 4 - 58 4 - 34, 4 - 42
Preset X 7 - 39 Probing Axis 7 - 40
Preset Y 7 - 39 Probing Cycle field 4 - 3, 4 - 9
Previous Segment softkey 2 - 25 Probing Data Printing 1 - 50
principles for programming 3 - 2 softkey 1 - 47
Printing Probing Direction 7 - 40
Part Program 1 - 47 Probing Direction X 7 - 40
Probing Data 1 - 50 Probing Direction Y 7 - 40
Printing Setup 1 - 47 Probing Length X 7 - 40
softkey, in Utilities screen 1 - 47 Probing Length Y 7 - 40

Probing Method 7 - 40 Radial Peck Count 7 - 40
Probing Parameters 1 - 118 Radial Peck Depth 7 - 41
feedrate 4 - 39 Radial Pecks 2 - 53
Probing Part Setup, NC 3 - 25 Radius 7 - 41
Probing Radius 7 - 40 Radius Bottom 7 - 41
Profile Contour 2 - 75 Radius End 7 - 41
Profile Left 2 - 13 Radius Start 7 - 41
Profile Number 7 - 40 Radius Start field 5 - 15
Profile Right 2 - 13 Radius, DXF 2 - 138
progname.dat 4 - 67 Rapid Clearance 7 - 41
progname.txt 4 - 67 Rapid Clearance field, Tool Setup
program Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
functions, M00, M01, M02, and M30 3 - Length mode 4 - 4
160 Rapid Feedrate Override Max 7 - 41
Program control statements 3 - 200 Rapid Feedrate Override Min 7 - 41
call subprogram 3 - 200 Rapid Feedrate Override Min (%) parame-
current program 3 - 200 ter 1 - 71
indirect variables 3 - 200 Rapid Jog Rate Knob 1 - 15
Program End (M30) 3 - 165 Rapid Move, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - 25
Program End, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - Rapid Override dial 1 - 8
25 Rapid Peck Retract 7 - 41
Program Execution Menu 3 - 16 Rapid Traverse 7 - 41
Program Manager 1 - 27 rapid traverse, G00 3 - 40
Input screen 1 - 84 Rapid Z Position 7 - 42
Program Number 7 - 40 Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11
Program Parameters 1 - 118 Rapid Z Position,Tool Setup
Input screen 1 - 84 Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration
Program Parameters softkey 1 - 102, 1 - mode 4 - 9
127 Rapids 7 - 41
Tool Review screen 1 - 112 Read restrictions 3 - 188
Program Properties 1 - 30, 1 - 33 Ream 2 - 99
Program Review screen 1 - 126 rapid 2 - 100
Program Run Time 7 - 40 reaming tool 2 - 99
Program Type 7 - 40 Ream Chamfer 7 - 42
programming mode keys 1 - 6 Reaming Operations 2 - 98
Protocol 7 - 40 Recovery and Restart 1 - 137
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable 7 - 40 Recovery Restart softkey, Auto Mode 1 -
Pulsating or Delay Washdown Enable, ma- 160
chine parameters 1 - 65 Rectangular Pocket cycle
Put Block Before 7 - 40 probing cycle 4 - 49
skew probing cycle 4 - 61
Rectangular Solid cycle
Q probing cycle 4 - 51
Q code, incremental peck depth, canned cy- skew probing cycle 4 - 62
cle 3 - 148 Redo softkey 3 - 13
Re-entry Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 94
Reference Block column, Reference Block
R Deflection Offsets screen 4 - 37
R code Reference block deflection offset method
BNC canned cycle 3 - 148 4 - 36
ISNC canned cycle 3 - 148 REFERENCE BLOCK METHOD (F2) softkey,
R level, return in cycles, G99 3 - 144 Reference Block Deflection Offsets
R parameter, angle of rotation 3 - 102 screen 4 - 36
R(%) 7 - 40 Reference Point X 7 - 42
R/W 3 - 24 Reference Point Y 7 - 42

Reference Point Z 7 - 42 Parameters 1 - 120
Reference Tool Touch, tool probing 4 - 24 Retain Probed Part Setup 7 - 43
Refresh Speed 7 - 42 retract along tool vector 3 - 173
Relief 1 7 - 42 Retract Clearance 2 - 119, 7 - 43
Relief 1 field Retract Feed 7 - 43
Mill triangle data block 2 - 71 Retract INCR 7 - 44
Relief 2 7 - 42 Retract Override 7 - 44
Relief 3 7 - 42 Retract Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 96
remote jog Retract Tool softkey, Manual Mode 1 - 139
unit 1 - 9 Retract Type 7 - 44
removing tools from the ATC 1 - 25, 1 - Retrieve Log and Diagnostic Files 1 - 53
142 Return from Program M99 3 - 170, 3 - 203,
RENAME DIRECTORY softkey 3 - 205, 3 - 217
Disk Operations 1 - 35 return to initial point in cycle, G98 3 - 142
RENAME softkey Reverse Dwell 7 - 44
Disk Operations 1 - 35 Reverse, DXF 2 - 133
Renumber Numbered Blocks softkey 3 - 15 Review key 1 - 6
Renumbering and Tagging Menu 3 - 14 Review Mode 1 - 126
Repeat Count 7 - 42 Review, Tools in Part Program 1 - 110
repeat operations, K code (canned cycles) Rigid Tap softkey 2 - 97
3 - 148 rigid tapping
repeat operations, L code (canned cycles) G84.2 ISNC right-handed 3 - 130
3 - 148 G84.3 ISNC left-handed 3 - 130
Repetitions 7 - 42 G88 BNC 3 - 130
replace canned cycle 3 - 150 rigid tapping enable, M29 ISNC 3 - 165
Replace In Files 7 - 42 RING GAUGE (F1) softkey, Part Probe De-
Replace Tool and Material Database soft- flection Offsets screen 4 - 35
key, Import and Export 1 - 123 ring gaugedeflection offset method 4 - 35
Reset Control 1 - 137 Roll End Point field, Swept Surface 7 - 44
Reset Cutting Time on Tool Data Change Roll Start Point 7 - 44
7 - 42 Rotary Axes Parameters 1 - 45, 1 - 97
Reset End Marker Rotary Axis ISO Standard 7 - 44
Auto Mode 1 - 160 Rotary Axis machining 5 - 3
Reset Numbering 7 - 42 Rotary Centerline 1 - 90
Reset Part Count softkey, Auto Mode 1 - Rotary Centerline X 7 - 44
162 Rotary Centerline X/Y/Z 1 - 45, 7 - 44
RESET PROBE WORK REGION TO MAXIMUM Rotary Centerline Y 7 - 44
(F4) softkey, Part Setup screen 7 - 31 Rotary Circle softkey 5 - 6
RESET PROGRAM PARAMETERS F3 1 - 84 Rotary Circle, BC configuration 5 - 38
Reset Restart Marker 1 - 160 rotary encoder reset, M31 3 - 165
Reset Servos and Spindle softkey, Manual Rotary Frame softkey 5 - 6
Mode 1 - 138 Rotary Jog Feed 7 - 44
Reset Start/End Markers softkey 3 - 17 Rotary Lines and Arcs softkey 5 - 6
Reset Wireframe Markers softkey 3 - 17 Rotary Locations, AC configuration 5 - 32
Rest Machining 2 - 141 Rotary Locations, Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt
restart after emergency stop 1 - 5 B configurations 5 - 7
Restart Control 1 - 167 Rotary Loop field, Rotary A and Rotary A
Utilities screen 1 - 47, 1 - 167 Tilt B configurations 5 - 7
Restart Markers, NC 1 - 160 Rotary Loop, AC configuration 5 - 31
Restart, Conversational 1 - 160 Rotary Loop, BC configuration 5 - 34, 5 -
Restore Config & Machine Files 1 - 39 39
softkey 1 - 38 Rotary Milling field 5 - 5
RESTORE USER DEFAULTS, Program Pa- Rotary Mirror, Rotary A and Rotary A Tilt B
rameters 1 - 120 configurations 5 - 7
RESTORE WINMAX DEFAULTS, Program Rotary Orientation 7 - 44

Rotary Orientation field 5 - 23 safety
Rotary Parameters field 5 - 5 CE safety circuit switches 1 - 128
Rotary Parameters, AC configuration 5 - 33 override mode 1 - 128
Rotary Part Setup 5 - 5 Safety Clearance 7 - 45
Rotary Pattern End, AC configuration 5 - 33 Safety Work Region 7 - 45
Rotary Patterns field 5 - 5 Safety Work Region field 1 - 88
Rotary Patterns, BC configuration 5 - 34, sample part inspection probe file 4 - 69
5 - 38 Sample programs 3 - 234
Rotary Polygon softkey 5 - 6 Bolt hole circle 3 - 236
Rotary Position field 5 - 5 Gear pattern 3 - 238
Rotary Position Out of Tol Proc 7 - 44 SAVE 1 - 29
Rotary Rapid Feed 7 - 44 Save Active Program Only 7 - 45
Rotary Rectangular, Rotary A and Rotary A SAVE AS 1 - 29
Tilrt B configurations 5 - 7 SAVE AS USER DEFAULTS, Program Param-
Rotary Safety Move 7 - 44 eters 1 - 120
Rotary Slot softkey 5 - 6 Save Frequency 7 - 45
Rotary softkey, Part Programming 2 - 3 Save NC State with Program 7 - 45
Rotary Stick Lettering 5 - 20 Save Session 1 - 132
Rotary Stick Lettering softkey 5 - 7 Save to Database softkey 1 - 114
Rotary Tangential Velocity Control (G94.1) Saving variables to files 3 - 197
3 - 140 Scale 2 - 114
Rotary Transform Plane, AC configuration scaling
5 - 33 cancel G50 3 - 87
Rotary True Type Font 5 - 6 circular radius command 3 - 87
Rotary, overview 5 - 2 G51 3 - 87
rotary-axis hardware 5 - 2 ISNC methods 3 - 87
rotary-axis table 5 - 3 specify center point 3 - 87
Rotate Angle 7 - 45 specify, factor 3 - 87
ROTATE F5 softkey, graphics screen 1 - screen
133 CE Status & Diagnostics 1 - 129
rotation Screen Configuration 7 - 45
angle of 3 - 102 Screens
cancel, G69 3 - 102 Gear pattern 3 - 238
G68 3 - 102 NC
negative R, CW 3 - 102 NCPP bolt hole circle 3 - 236
positive R, CCW 3 - 102 screens
Rotation Angle 7 - 45 FTP Host Properties 6 - 10
Rotation Angles 7 - 45 NC Configuration 3 - 80
Rotation Axis 7 - 45 NC, Tool Setup 3 - 81
Rough SFQ 7 - 45 Part Setup, rotary-axis program,
Roughing and Finishing WinMax Mill 1 - 90
Passes 2 - 43 Screensaver Timeout 7 - 46
Tools 2 - 41 Search Again softkey 3 - 11
RS-232 C Second Move 7 - 46
serial communications 1 - 20 Segment field
serial port 1 - 21 Mill Contour block 7 - 46
RS-274-D standard 3 - 2 SELECT DRO F4 softkey 1 - 164
Run Program softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 160 Select DRO softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 163
Select Holes by Diameter, DXF 2 - 135
SELECT LANGUAGE softkey, Utilities screen
S 1 - 46
S / Spindle 7 - 45 Select Layer 2 - 138
S code 3 - 3 SELECT MATERIAL FOR PART PROGRAM F5
spindle speed 3 - 151 softkey, Tool and Material Database
S(%) 7 - 45 screen 1 - 117

Select New Font softkey 2 - 62, 7 - 24 Side Length 7 - 46
Select Tool from List 2 - 6 Side Length, Mill Polygon 2 - 85, 7 - 47
SELECT VIEW F2 softkey, graphics screen Single console key 1 - 18
1 - 133 single key 1 - 18
SelectSurface Finish Quality 1 - 118, 1 - SINGLE STEP F3 softkey, graphics screen
120 1 - 132
Sequence Number 3 - 2 Sister Tool 7 - 46
Serial I/O 1 - 47, 1 - 51 Sister Tool, Tool Setup
Serial Number block 2 - 65 Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
Serial Number Stick Lettering block 2 - 65 Length mode 4 - 3
Serial Numbers Printing Sister Tool,Tool Setup
softkey 1 - 47 Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration
Serial Port Settings 1 - 44 mode 4 - 9
SERIAL PORT SETTINGS F1 softkey, Utili- Sizing Diameter 7 - 46
ties screen 1 - 39 Sizing Method 7 - 46
serial ports 1 - 21 Skew Angle (Deg) field, Part Setup screen
Server 4 - 58
definition 6 - 2 Skew angle, preset values 4 - 58
Servo Power 1 - 136 Skew Axis 7 - 47
Set End Marker Skew Cycle 7 - 47
Auto Mode 1 - 160 Skew Start Positions 7 - 47
Set End marker softkey 3 - 17 skip function G31 3 - 70
Set Restart Marker 1 - 160 Skip List 7 - 47
Set Start marker softkey 3 - 17 Slot Milling Data Block 2 - 79
Set Tilt Axis Preference, M200 3 - 179 Slow Feed 7 - 47
Set Tool Zero softkey 1 - 101 Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 11, 4 - 12
Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block softkey Slow Feed, Tool Setup
1 - 102 Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
Set Wireframe End Marker softkey 3 - 17 Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11
Set Wireframe Start Marker softkey 3 - 17 Smooth 1 - 133
setting axis configuration 5 - 4 Smoothing Tolerance 7 - 47
Setup Fast Feed 7 - 46 SNAPSHOT F7 softkey, graphics screen 1 -
SFQ 1 - 119 133
Shank Diameter 7 - 46 Softkey Menu Position 7 - 47
Shape 7 - 46 softkeys 1 - 5, 1 - 76, 1 - 77
Shape Angle 7 - 46 software options 1 - 2
Shift 7 - 36 Software Options softkey 1 - 38
shift offset 1 - 93 Software Version softkey 1 - 38
shortest rotary angle path traverse cancel, Spacing in expressions 3 - 196
M127 3 - 171 Special Characters 3 - 3
shortest rotary angle path traverse, M126 special function keys 1 - 6
3 - 171 Speed (RPM) field
Shortest Rotary Angle Path Traverse, M126 Mill Contour block 7 - 47
& M127 3 - 171 speed and feed formula, tap 3 - 120
Show All File Types 7 - 46 Spindle 1 - 23, 7 - 47
Show Graphics 7 - 46 spindle
Show Roughing Tool Path for 2D Surfaces activate 3 - 150
7 - 46 control 1 - 8
Show Roughing Tool Path for 3D Surfaces direction 3 - 150
7 - 46 manual speed 1 - 10
Shutdown Control 1 - 167 off, M05 3 - 162
SHUTDOWN CONTROL F6 softkey, Utilities oriented stop M19 3 - 164
screen 1 - 47 speed, S code 3 - 151
SHUTDOWN CONTROL softkey start clockwise, M03 3 - 162
Utilities screen 1 - 167 start counterclockwise, M04 3 - 162

tool removal 1 - 23 Start Pushbutton 7 - 49
Spindle Chiller 7 - 47 Start Segment 2 - 19
Spindle Clearance 7 - 48 starting new part program 3 - 8
Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12 Starting Sequence 7 - 49
Spindle Clearance, Tool Setup Status Address 3 - 23, 3 - 24
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Status Bar 1 - 80
Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11 status bar 3 - 7
Spindle Load Monitor 7 - 48 Status field, Serial I/O 1 - 51
Spindle loading 1 - 23 Status History 1 - 53
Spindle Speed 7 - 48 Step Connect Type 7 - 49
Spindle Speed dial 1 - 8 Step Size 7 - 50
Spindle Speed, Tool Setup Stick Lettering 2 - 54
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Stick Lettering Along Contour 2 - 59
Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 10 Stock Allowance 7 - 50
Spindle Stop 7 - 48 Stock Allowance Mode 7 - 50
Spindle tab, Tool Library 1 - 115 Stock Geometry 1 - 95
Spindle Unclamp button 1 - 23 Part Setup 1 - 95
Spindle Unclamp PB 7 - 48 STOCK OUTLINE, Graphics Settings 1 - 95
Spindle Usage 7 - 48 Stock Transparency 7 - 51
Tool Probing 4 - 5, 4 - 11 Stock Type 7 - 51
Spindle Usage, Tool Setup Stop 7 - 51
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Stop Bits 7 - 51
Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 10 Stop Cycle button, LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 -
Spiral, in Swept Surface 2 - 74 15
Split softkey, DXF 2 - 137 Stop Cycle console button 1 - 17
Spotface 2 - 89 stop program
squaring the APC table 1 - 151 (planned), M01 3 - 161
Standard Calculator 7 - 29 M00 3 - 160
Start Angle 7 - 48 Stop program execution 3 - 204
Start Angle, DXF 2 - 138 Store Calculated Value 2 - 7
Start at Center 7 - 49 STORE MACHINE POSITION (F7) softkey,
Start At Center field Part Setup screen 7 - 31
Thread Mill block 7 - 8 Store Position key 1 - 15
Start Block 7 - 49 Store Result As 7 - 51
Start Cap 7 - 49 Stream Load 1 - 29
Start Cap field Stylus Diameter 7 - 51
Mill Slot Caps tab 2 - 82 Stylus Length 7 - 51
Start Coordinate Reference 7 - 49 Stylus Width 7 - 51
Start Cycle 1 - 15 Subprogram
Start Cycle console button 1 - 17 G65 3 - 186
Start Job 7 - 49 G66 3 - 186
Start Marker, NC 1 - 160 M98 3 - 186
START PROBING CYCLE (F1) softkey subprogram
Cylinder cycle 4 - 46 commands 3 - 93
Cylinder Skew cycle 4 - 54 Subprogram call 3 - 200
Edge cycle 4 - 60 Subprogram Call G65 3 - 186, 3 - 206, 3 -
Edge Skew cycle 4 - 61 207, 3 - 208, 3 - 210, 3 - 216, 3 -
Hole or Circle Pocket cycle 4 - 50 221
Hole or Circle Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 48 Subprogram Call M98 3 - 169, 3 - 186, 3 -
Plane Intersection cycle 4 - 52 208, 3 - 217, 3 - 221
Rectangular Pocket cycle 4 - 59 Subprogram Variables 3 - 23
Rectangular Pocket Skew cycle 4 - 44 Macro Mode 3 - 23
Rectangular Solid cycle 4 - 62 Subprograms 3 - 205
Rectangular Solid Skew cycle 4 - 58, 4 - fixed 3 - 219
63 G65 3 - 206

G66 3 - 215 Third Move (End Position) 7 - 52
layering local variables 3 - 208 Thread Bottom 7 - 52
modal 3 - 214 Thread Diameter 7 - 52
passing argument lists 3 - 207 Thread Mill 2 - 51
passing single dedicated parameters 3 - Thread Milling Data Block 2 - 51
221 Thread Top 7 - 53
specifying iterations 3 - 208 Tilt Axis machining 5 - 3
user defined 3 - 219 Tilt Axis Preference 7 - 53
Supplier, Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 109 tilt axis preference, M200 3 - 179
surface contact point, 3D tool geometry Tilt Axis Safety Position, machine parame-
compensation 3 - 174 ters 1 - 61
surface finish G05.1 3 - 51 tilt-axis hardware 5 - 2
Surface Finish Quality 1 - 119 tilt-axis table 5 - 3
G05.3 1 - 108, 3 - 51 time 1 - 80
Surface Finish Quality (Finishing Default) Time / Program Run Time 7 - 53
7 - 51 Tip Angle 7 - 53
Surface Finish Quality (Roughing Default) Tip Diameter 7 - 53
7 - 51 Tip Length 7 - 53
surface normal vector, 3D tool geometry TIS / Tool in Spindle 7 - 53
compensation 3 - 174 Toggle Edit Lockout State softkey 1 - 37,
Surface Side 7 - 51 1 - 40
Surface Speed 7 - 52 Toggle Language 1 - 46
Swap Screens 7 - 52 Toggle Rapid Override Enable softkey, Auto
Sweep Angle 7 - 52 Mode 1 - 163
Sweep Angle, DXF 2 - 138 Toggle Units softkey 3 - 23, 3 - 73
Swept Surface 2 - 74, 2 - 75 Tool 7 - 53
Symbols 3 - 193 tool
system change, M06 3 - 162
principles 3 - 2 functions, D, L, and T codes 3 - 153
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION F1 softkey, Utili- holder, orientation hole 1 - 23
ties screen 1 - 38 in Spindle 1 - 23
System variables 3 - 185 initiate change, NC Parameters, M6 3 -
NC 3 - 22 162
loading, machine spindle 1 - 23
removal from ATC magazine 1 - 25, 1 -
T 142
T code 3 - 153 removal from spindle 1 - 23
Tagged Block List softkey 3 - 14 Tool & Material Library 1 - 115
Tap Operations 2 - 97 Tool and Material Database 1 - 117
Tap Retract (%) 7 - 52 tool breakage detection 4 - 15
Tap softkey 2 - 97 Tool Breakage Detection cycle 4 - 15
Taper Angle 7 - 52 TOOL BREAKAGE DETECTION softkey, Tool
tapping cycle 3 - 146 Monitoring screen 4 - 15
tapping, G84 3 - 120 Tool Cal Length 7 - 53
TCP/IP Tool Probing 4 - 6
definition 6 - 3 Tool Cal Length field, Tool Probing 4 - 2
TCPM cancel, M129 3 - 172 Tool Calibration Mode 7 - 53
TCPM, M128 3 - 172 Tool Calibration Mode field, Tool Utilities
Temporary Parameter Change 2 - 7 and Settings 1 - 43
Test console key 1 - 18 tool center point management 3 - 173
Test key 1 - 18 tool center point management cancel,
Text 7 - 52 M129 3 - 172
Text Height 7 - 52 tool center point management, axes angle
Text screen 1 - 6 input 3 - 172
Text Width 7 - 52 tool center point management, M128 3 -

172 tool breakage detection 4 - 15
Tool Center Point Management, M128 & Tool Monitoring (Probing) softkey 4 - 14
M129 3 - 172 Tool Monitoring Enable, General Parame-
Tool Change Optimization field, General Pa- ters screen 4 - 17
rameters 7 - 54 Tool Number 7 - 54
Tool Change Optimization Off block 2 - 125, tool offset 3 - 73
2 - 126 assigning 3 - 61
Tool Change Optimization On block 2 - 125 radius 3 - 84
Tool Change Optimization parameter 2 - Tool Offset Cancel (G49) 3 - 84
124 tool offsets
Tool Change Review Screen softkey setting with G10 3 - 60
Tool Review Screen 1 - 112 setting with G10 and L3 3 - 61
Tool Change, Intelligent ASR Triggers 7 - setting with G10 and P, R 3 - 60
25 setting with G10 and T, H, D 3 - 60
tool changer 1 - 23 Tool Offsets softkey 1 - 100
orientation key 1 - 23 Tool Path 7 - 54
tool changer (see Automatic Tool Changer) tool positioning
1 - 141 G00 3 - 41
Tool field G01 3 - 42
Custom Drill Tool Tab 2 - 92 G02 3 - 44
Tool Fixture Option 1 - 148 G02.4 and G03.4 3 - 49
Tool Geometry 1 - 104 G03 3 - 44
Tool Holder 7 - 54 tool probe
Tool Holder Up / Down, ATC and machine deflection offset calibration 4 - 23
diagnostics 1 - 147 multiple tool cycle 4 - 7, 4 - 13
Tool Home softkey 1 - 101 TOOL PROBE DEFLECTION OFFSET (F7)
Tool in Spindle 7 - 54 softkey, Tool Probe Deflection Offsets
Tool In Spindle field for activating probe screen 4 - 23
hardware, Tool Setup screen 7 - 12 Tool probe deflection offset calibration 4 -
Tool Information Printing 23
softkey 1 - 47 absolute location 4 - 24
Tool Length 7 - 54 reference tool touch 4 - 24
tool length offset Tool Probe Deflection Offset screen
cutter compensation 3 - 76 accessing 4 - 23
G43, G44, and G49 3 - 80 Tool Probe Parameters
table 3 - 73 Laser Probe 4 - 19
Tool Length Tolerance 7 - 54 Touch Probe 4 - 18
Tool Library 1 - 115 Tool Probe Parameters screen 4 - 18
Auto 1 - 115 Tool Probe Setup softkey, laser tool calibra-
Manual 1 - 115, 1 - 116 tion 4 - 21
Spindle 1 - 115 tool probe, select signal, M27 3 - 165
tool magazine tool probing
HMX630 1 - 146 Diameter sequence, single tool 4 - 6,
HTX5000 1 - 146 4 - 12
VTXU 1 - 146 multiple tool cycle 4 - 7, 4 - 13
Tool Management softkey, Manual Mode 1 - PROBE MULTIPLE TOOLS (F4) softkey
138 4 - 7, 4 - 13
Tool Matching 1 - 113 Zero Calibration sequence, single tool
Results 1 - 114 4 - 5, 4 - 11
Tool Measurement screen 1 - 97 Tool Probing Cycle Defaults 4 - 4
Tool Measurement screen, use in Tool Prob- Tool Probing Option 4 - 1
ing 4 - 26 Tool Probing softkey 1 - 102, 4 - 8
Tool measurement settings 1 - 96 Tool Probing softkey, Tool Setup
tool monitoring 4 - 14 Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
spare tool 4 - 14 Length mode 4 - 2

Tool Probing,Tool Setup transfer files
Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration jump drive 1 - 22
mode 4 - 28 Transform Part Zero 7 - 55
Tool Quality Monitoring 4 - 14 Transform Plane 5 - 8
tool radius offset Transform Plane End field 5 - 5
cutter compensation 3 - 75 Transform Plane field 5 - 5
G45, G46, G47, G45 3 - 84 Transform Plane Groups 5 - 11
table 3 - 73 Transform Plane Groups field 5 - 5
Tool Removal 1 - 148 Transform Plane, Intelligent ASR Triggers
TOOL REVIEW 7 - 25
Input Screen 1 - 84 Translated in Y 2 - 34
Tool Selection List 2 - 6 travel limits 4 - 39
Tool Setup 1 - 100 travel limits, part probe 4 - 39
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15 Triangle Data Block 2 - 71
Tool Setup Fields 1 - 100 Trim softkey, DXF 2 - 137
Location 1 - 100 True-Type Fonts 2 - 56, 2 - 62, 5 - 18
Tool Setup Probing Parameters True-Type Lettering Along Contour 2 - 62
Zero calibration mode 4 - 8 Type 7 - 55
Tool Setup softkey Type field
Tool Review screen 1 - 112 3D Mold Parameters 2 - 35
Tool Setup Softkeys 1 - 100 Type of Corners 7 - 56
Advanced Tool Settings 1 - 102 Types 3 - 23, 3 - 24
Change Tool Number 1 - 102
Delete Tool 1 - 100
Part Program Tool Review 1 - 102 U
Part Programming 1 - 100 Ultimax classic edit mode 1 - 76
Part Setup 1 - 100 Ultimax Classic Math Assist 7 - 29
Program Parameters 1 - 102 UltiMonitor 6 - 1
Set Tool Zero 1 - 101 UltiMotion 1 - 173
Set Tool Zero Using Gauge Block 1 - UltiMotion Option 1 - 174
102 UltiNet 6 - 1
Tool Home 1 - 101 glossary 6 - 2
Tool Offsets 1 - 100 UltiPocket 2 - 18
Tool Probing 1 - 102 UltiPockets 2 - 143
Tool SFQ 7 - 54 UltiPockets Option 2 - 139
Tool Tab, Custom Drill 2 - 92 Undo softkey 3 - 13
Tool Type 7 - 54 unit of measure 1 - 80
Tool Type Checking 2 - 7 Unit of measurement, changing 3 - 73
Tool Type Setup/Advanced Tool Settings units of measure
1 - 117 G70 BNC, inch 3 - 106
Tool Utilities and Settings 1 - 43 G71 BNC, metric 3 - 106
tool vector 3 - 173 ISNC G20, inch 3 - 67
Tool Vector Retract, M140 3 - 177 ISNC G21, metric 3 - 67
tool vector, 3D tool geometry compensa- Units of Measure (BNC G70, G71) 3 - 106
tion 3 - 174 Units of measure, changing 3 - 23
Tool Wear Detection cycle 4 - 15 Universal Transform Plane 5 - 8
Toolpath and Solid Graphics 1 - 132 Universal Type 7 - 56
Toolpath Graphics 1 - 132 UNLOAD PROGRAM F5 1 - 84
touch probe 4 - 6, 4 - 11 unrotated coordinate system, part setup
TOUCH PROBE PARAMETERS softkey, Tool 1 - 86
Setup screen 4 - 18 Update Data Blocks With Tool Changes 7 -
touch tool probe parameters 4 - 18 56
Touch-Off Device 7 - 55 UPS Software Shutdown Off Time 7 - 56
touchscreen 1 - 76 USB port 1 - 22
Transfer 1 - 35 Use Chord Error From Program 7 - 56

Use Cusp Height field, Swept Surface 7 - 56 fixed 3 - 219
USE DATUM POINT TO GET Z OFFSET (F2) global 3 - 22
softkey, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset indirect 3 - 197
4 - 35 layering 3 - 208
Use Editing File softkey, Auto Mode 1 - 159 Local 3 - 22
USE GAUGE TO GET X&Y OFFSETS (F1) NC 3 - 22
softkey, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset restrictions 3 - 188
4 - 35 system 3 - 22
Use Hole Location Method softkey 2 - 133 vacant 3 - 191
Use Hole Pattern Method softkey 2 - 133 vector 3 - 173
Use Offset Z 7 - 56 verification of tool and part quality 4 - 67
USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET (F1) Vertical/Horizontal 7 - 57
softkey, Reference Block Deflection VTX 1 - 55
Offsets 4 - 36, 4 - 37 VTXU
USE PROBE TO DETERMINE OFFSET soft- tool magazine 1 - 146
key, Reference Tool Touch 4 - 24 VTXZ 1 - 155
Use Tool Type Checking 7 - 57
USER 1-4 NAME field
FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8 W
USER 1-4 PASSWORD field Warm Up Machine softkey, Manual Mode 1 -
FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 8 138
USER 1-4 PATH field Warming Up the Machine 1 - 136
FTP Server Settings screen 6 - 9 Warm-Up Axis Feed Rate 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -
User defined 57
B code 3 - 221 Warm-Up Cycle Time Per Pass 1 - 70, 1 -
B codes 3 - 216 71, 7 - 57
B, S, and T codes 3 - 219, 3 - 221 Warm-Up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 70, 7 - 57
codes 3 - 216 Warm-up Max Spindle Speed 1 - 71
G and M codes 3 - 216 Warm-Up Speed Steps 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -
G code 3 - 221 57
M code 3 - 221 Warm-Up Starting Speed 1 - 70, 1 - 71, 7 -
S code 3 - 221 57
S codes 3 - 216 Warn Before Saving in Old Format 7 - 57
T code 3 - 221 washdown
T codes 3 - 216 Y-axis rear way cover 1 - 64
User defined value 1 - 107 Washdown Coolant On/Off softkey, Manual
USER INTERFACE SETTTINGS softkey, Util- Mode 1 - 139
ities screen 1 - 40 washdown coolant system M codes 3 - 168
User Name 7 - 57 Washdown Off Delay Timer 1 - 63, 1 - 68,
USER PREFERENCES softkey, Utilities 7 - 58
screen 1 - 39 recommended formula 1 - 68
Utilities 1 - 37 Washdown On Delay Timer 1 - 67, 7 - 58
recommended formula 1 - 68
Way Lube Level 7 - 58
V WHILE loops 3 - 202
V Angle 7 - 57 Width 7 - 58
Vacant variables 3 - 191 Width Method 7 - 58
Value Address 3 - 23 Window Select softkey 2 - 133, 2 - 134
Values 3 - 23, 3 - 24 WinMax Configuration softkey
Variable example 3 - 197 Utilities screen 1 - 38
Variable expressions 3 - 193 WinMax IP Address softkey 1 - 38
Variable Reset Value 7 - 57 WINMAX UPTIME F3 softkey, Utilities
Variable Reset Value, NC Settings 1 - 43 screen 1 - 44
Variable summary 3 - 224 work coordinate systems setting with G10
Variables 3 - 23, 3 - 185 L2 3 - 59

Work Offsets 1 - 93 XY Angle field
LCD Remote Jog Unit 1 - 15 Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 60
Work Offsets softkey, Part Setup screen 3 - XY Angle, DXF 2 - 138
98 XY Length 7 - 60
working envelope 4 - 39 XY plane selection, G17 3 - 62
Working envelope, part probe 4 - 39 XY Revolved About X 2 - 34
Worklight On/Off softkey XY Revolved about X 7 - 55
Auto Mode 1 - 164 XZ Angle 7 - 60
Manual Mode 1 - 139 XZ Length field, 3D Mold Line 7 - 60
WorkPc / TR Plane (Standard DRO) softkey XZ Plane Selection, G18 3 - 64
1 - 164 XZ plane selection, G18 3 - 64
workpiece coordinate system, part setup XZ Revolved About Z 2 - 34
1 - 86 XZ Revolved about Z 7 - 56
Write Protection 7 - 58 XZ Translated in Y 2 - 34, 7 - 56
Write restrictions 3 - 188
Y
X Y Center field
X and Y offsets, RIng Gauge Deflection Off- Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 60
sets 4 - 35 Y code, Y axis hole position 3 - 148
X Center field Y Corner field
Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 58 Mill Frame data block 7 - 61
X code, X axis hole position 3 - 148 Y Direction 7 - 61
X Corner field Y Distance 7 - 61
Mill Frame data block 7 - 58 Y End field
X Direction 7 - 59 3D Mold Parameters 2 - 36
X Distance 7 - 59 Mill Slot Geometry tab 7 - 61
X End field Y field 7 - 60
Mill Slot Geomtry tab 7 - 59 Y Length field
X field 7 - 58 Mill Frame data block 7 - 61
X Length field Y Length Offset, Tool Setup
Mill Frame data block 7 - 59 Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
X Length Offset, Tool Setup Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool Y Max 7 - 61
Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11 Y Min 7 - 61
X Max 7 - 59 Y Number 7 - 61
X Min 7 - 59 Y Off Of Centerline 7 - 61
X Number 7 - 59 Y Offset 7 - 62
X Offset 7 - 59 Y point 7 - 62
X Point 7 - 59 Y Position 7 - 62
X Position 7 - 59 Y Radius 2 - 33, 7 - 62
X Radius 2 - 33, 7 - 59 Y Ref Location 7 - 62
X Ref Location 7 - 59 Y Ref Position 7 - 62
X Ref Position 7 - 60 Y Reference 7 - 62
X Reference 7 - 59 Y Safety Position 7 - 62
X Safety Position 7 - 60 Y Scale 7 - 62
X Scale 7 - 60 Y Start field
X Start 7 - 60 3D Mold Parameters 2 - 36
X Start field Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 62
Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 59 Y Value, DXF 2 - 138
X Value, DXF 2 - 138 Y-axis rear way cover washdown on and off
X/Y skew 4 - 66 cycles 1 - 64
X/Y Skew (DEG) 7 - 60 Y-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59
X-Axis Safety Position 1 - 59 YZ Plane Selection, G19 3 - 66
XML1 file 1 - 29 YZ plane selection, G19 3 - 66

Z 4 - 11
Zero Calibration Mode 1 - 99
Z axis home position, M25 BNC 3 - 165
Zero Calibration,Tool Setup
Z Axis Retract Disable (M91) 3 - 169
Probing Parameters, Zero Calibration
Z Axis Retract Enable (M90) 3 - 169
mode 4 - 27
Z Bottom field
Zero Radius 2 - 36
Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 63
Zero Ref 7 - 65
Z Break Out 7 - 63
Zone 7 - 65
Z Clearance 7 - 63
ZOOM F3 softkey, graphics screen 1 - 133
Z code, Z bottom location 3 - 148
ZOOM IN softkey
Z Corner 7 - 63
graphics screen 1 - 133
Z Depth 7 - 63
ZOOM OUT softkey
Z Distance 7 - 63
graphics screen 1 - 133
Z Drop Down Depth 7 - 63
Zoom Out softkey
Tool Probing 4 - 6, 4 - 12
DXF 2 - 135
Z Drop Down Depth, Tool Setup
Zoom Window softkey, DXF 2 - 135
Probing Parameters, Absolute Tool
Zoom Window, DXF 2 - 133
Length mode 4 - 4, 4 - 11
Z field 7 - 62
Z Home 7 - 64
Z Home field 7 - 44
Z Length 7 - 63
Z Location 7 - 63
Z Move Type 7 - 64
Z Offset 7 - 64
Z offset, Ring Gauge Deflection Offset 4 -
35
Z Out 7 - 64
Z Plunge 7 - 64
Z Plunge Start field
Thread Mill block 7 - 64
Z Point 7 - 64
Z Position 7 - 64
Z Re-entry 7 - 64
Z Ref Position 7 - 64
Z Reference 7 - 64
Z Reference position, setting 1 - 97
Z Retract 7 - 64
Z Roughing field, Swept Surface 7 - 64
Z Safety 7 - 64
Z Scale 7 - 64
Z Start field
Mill Slot Start tab 7 - 64
Z Start parameter 2 - 119
Z Start RPM 7 - 64
Z Table Offset 7 - 64
Z Top 7 - 65
Z Top Feed 7 - 65
Z Top RPM 7 - 65
Z-Axis Position 7 - 63
Zero Angle Vector 5 - 23
Zero Calibration 7 - 65
Tool Probing 4 - 12
zero Calibration 3 - 81
zero calibration
tool probing sequence, single tool 4 - 5,


WinMax Mill Programming2

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

WinMax Mill Programming2

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

WINMAX MILL

v9.1 & v10.1

June 2015 704-0116-501 Revision D

Hurco Manufacturing Company reserves the right to incorporate any modification or

© 2015 Hurco Companies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Patents:U.S. Patents B14,477,754; 5,453,933; Canadian Patent 1,102,434; Japanese

AutoCAD, Autodesk, and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.

MS-DOS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Hurco Companies, Inc.

For Hurco subsidiary contact information, go to Hurco’s Web site:

i - WinMax Mill Programming Documentation 704-0116-501

Additional information is available on the machine’s Documentation CD.

Console Buttons and Keys

Ensures proper operation of the machine and control.

? Steps that can be taken to solve potential problems.

Hints and Tricks

Useful suggestions that show creative uses of the WinMax features.

Where can we go from here?Programming and Operation Information

Lists several possible options the operator can take.

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions — ii

Using the On-screen Help

• Use the Hide button to hide the navigation pane.

• Use the Index tab to show the Help index:

iii - Documentation Conventions 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Printing the Programming Manuals

1. From the Input screen, select the F8 softkey.

• For WinMax on a machine, the path is D:\Hurco\\hlp.

The PDF files will appear in the right-hand pane.

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Documentation Conventions -iv

Getting Started with WinMax Mill

Machine and Console Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 1

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -viii

Machine Operation Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 - 135

ix - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Patterns Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 107

Special Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 117

NC/Conversational Merge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 129

DXF Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 - 131

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -x

Preparatory Functions - G Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 27

Spindle Speed - S Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 151

Tool Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 153

Miscellaneous Functions - M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 155

NC Productivity Package Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 - 183

xi - Table of Contents 704-0116-501 WinMax Mill Programming Manual

Tool Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 1

Part Probing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 - 31

Extended Shop Floor

Field Name Glossary

Field Name Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 - 1

Error Messages and Alarms

WinMax Mill Programming Manual 704-0116-501 Table of Contents -xii

Figure 1–1. Hurco Machine with Dual-Screen Console

Max5 dual-screen console

Max4 dual-screen console Max4 single-screen console

1. Machine Control buttons

2. Axis and Spindle Control dials

3. Jog Control functions

4. Machine Operations keyboard

Learn the location of all Emergency Stop buttons on the machining

If the Emergency Stop button is pressed during execution of a part

• Text Screen Data Entry

These keys function as they would on a standard PC keyboard:

• Insert - type over and replace current text.